DIVINITY SCHOOL TROWBRIDGE LIBRARY NOTES ON GENESIS SPURRELL Bonbon HENRY FROWDE Oxford University Press Warehouse Amen Corner, E.C. MACMILLAN & CO., 66 FIFTH AVENUE NOTES ON THE TEXT OF THE BOOK OF GENESIS WITH AN APPENDIX G. J. SPURRELL, M.A. n *¦ FORMERLY HEBREW LECTURER AT WADHAM COLLEGE, OXFORD; EXAMINER IN THE UNIVERSITY OF LONDON — IN HEBREW AND NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 1888-93 IN SEMITIC LANGUAGES, 1889, 1890, 1892, 1894, 1895 ; ASSISTANT MASTER AT THE MERCHANT TAYLORS1 SCHOOL, LONDON SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND CORRECTED ©jforb AT THE CLARENDON PRESS M DCCC XCVI [AU rights reserved} ©jcfor.o PRINTED AT THE CLARENDON PRESS BY HORACE HART, PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. The present volume of notes was undertaken at the suggestion of Prof. Driver, and is' mainly intended for students beginning the Hebrew language. The notes are taken chiefly from the best German commentaries, and do not aim at originality. The Versions have also been used, and references are given to various- grammars, the writer's object being to adapt the book to the wants of students using different grammars. The Commentaries used are those by Tuch1, Delitzsch'2, and Dillmann3, to whom the writer is chiefly indebted ; reference is also made to Mr. Wright's * Notes on Genesis, and (occasionally) to the commentary by the late Dr. Kalisch 5. The Versions are quoted partly from the London Polyglot, and partly from separate editions. 1 The 2nd edition, by Arnold and Merx, Halle, 1871. 2 The 4th edition, Leipzig, 1872. 3 The references to Dillmann are to the 4th edition of his Genesis, in the Kurzgefasstes Exeg. Handbuch zum alten Test., Leipzig, 1882. A 5th edition appeared in 1886, but as some of the sheets had already been printed off, the references to the 4th edition have been kept, and any changes in the 5th edition noted on the margin. 4 The Book of Genesis in Hebrew, by C. H. H. Wright, London, 1859. 5 Historical and Critical Commentary on the Old Test., Genesis, London, 1858. VI PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. For the LXX, Lagarde's text has been used1, reference being occasionally made to the text contained in the London Polyglot, and to Tischendorf's edition. The Targum of Onqelos, or Babylonian Targum, has been taken from the edition by Dr. Berliner z, the text in the London Polyglot being compared, while the Targum of Pseudo- Jonathan and the Jerusalem Targum are quoted from the London Polyglot3. For the Peshitta (Syriac) version the Polyglot and the edition by Lee *, which is based on the text in the London Polyglot, have been used, while the Vulgate has been taken from a Paris edition6 and the Polyglot. The other Greek versions (Aquila, Symmachus, and Theodotion) are- usually cited second-hand, reference being also made to Field's edition of Origen's Hexapla 6. The Arabic version of Saadiah has been quoted from the Polyglot: the Hebrew- Samaritan text and the Samaritan version are also cited from the same source 7. The Grammars to which reference has been made are those of Gesenius, Davidson, Stade, 1 Genesis Graece, edidit P. A. de Lagarde, Leipzig, 1868. 2 In two parts, Berlin, 1884. The first part containing the text after the ' editio Sabioneta ' of 1557, and the second part, the notes, introduc tion, and indices. s The Targum of Pseudo- Jonathan and the Jerusalem Targum (which only exists in a fragmentary form) are really two recensions of one and the same Targum, the Jerusalem Targum ; see Bleek's Einleitung, ed. Wellhausen, p. 606 f. ; Eng. trans., ed. Venables, vol. ii. p. 439 f. - 1 London, 1823. s Published by Gamier Brothers, without date. 6 Oxford, 1875. 7 The reader should consult the various • Introductions ' to the Old Testament on these versions (especially that of Wellhausen-Bleek, 1878 or 1886), or read the articles in Smith's Dictionary of the Bible. PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. Ewald, Olshausen, Bottcher (occasionally), Miiller (for the Syntax only), and the treatise on the Tenses by Prof. Driver 1. The text of Genesis that has been followed in compiling the notes is that of Baer (with a preface by Delitzsch), and the same text has been used in quoting passages from other books, the edition of Theile2 being only cited in those portions of the Old Testament that have not yet been edited by Baer3. Two appendices have been added to the book: one on the structure of Genesis, as it was deemed necessary that the student should have some information about the modern views as to the criticism of the Pentateuch ; and the other on the names of God, which could not be adequately discussed within the limits of a note. The writer has to acknowledge the great obligations he is under to Prof. Driver for the valuable help he has rendered 1 Gesenius' Grammar, translated by Davies, and edited by Mitchell, London, 1880 (since reprinted). Davidson's Grammar, Edinburgh, 8th edition, 1887. Stade, Lehrbuch der hebrdischen Grammatik, Leipzig, 1879. Ewald, Lehrbuch der hebrdischen Sprache, 8te Ausgabe, Got tingen, 1870: the Syntax (the third part of the Lehrbuch) has been translated by Kennedy, Edinburgh, 1879. Olshausen, Lehrbuch der hebrdisch. Sprache, Braunschweig, 1861. Bottcher, Lehrbuch der he- brdisch. Sprache, Leipzig, 1868. Aug. Miiller, Outlines of Hebrew Syntax, translated by Robertson (being a translation of the third part of Muller's Hebrdische Schulgrammatik, Halle, 1878), ist edition, 1882 ; 2nd edition, 1887. Driver, Hebrew Tenses, 2nd edition, Oxford, 1881. 2 3rd edition, Leipzig, 1867. 3 The following portions of the Bible have been published by Baer : Genesis, Leipzig, 1869 ; Isaiah, ib., 1872 ; Job, ib., 1875 ; Minor Pro phets, ib., 1878; The Psalms, ib., 1880; Proverbs, ib., 1880; Daniel, Ezra, Nehemiah, ib., 1882; Ezekiel, ib., 1884; and Canticles, Ruth, Lamentations, Ecclesiastes, Esther, ib., 1886. Vlil PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. him in preparing these notes, and for kindly revising the proof-sheets. His thanks are also due to the Delegates of the Clarendon Press for their assistance in publishing the book, and to Mr. Pembrey, their Oriental reader, for the care which he has taken in passing the sheets through the press. G. J. SPURRELL. Oxford, July, 1887. PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. In the present edition of the ' Notes on Genesis ' a large amount of new matter has been incorporated into the book. An Introduction has been substituted for Appendix I, and the new edition has been enlarged by the addition of about forty new pages. Many of the notes have been recast and expanded, and many new notes have been added on different matters, generally points which were not commented on in the first edition, or inadequately treated. This will be seen in the fuller accounts of the different foreign nations men tioned in Genesis, cf. chaps, io, 25. 36, 8, etc. More attention has also been given to the geography of Genesis. The sites of the different places mentioned and other matters apper taining to geography are generally quoted from Dillmann's Genesis 6, Smith's Historical Geography, and Badeker's Pales tine, 2nd English edition, 1894; so that the information on these points is as far as possible up to date. The Grammars to which reference has been made are the same as in the former edition, with the addition of references to Davidson's Hebrew Syntax, and occasionally to Konig's X PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. Lehrgeb&ude, I \ The 25th (German) edition of Gesenius- Kautzsch's Grammar has been used. As a translation of this work is in preparation, the references given in the notes will serve for the English edition *. The extracts from the different Versions are the same as in the first edition, with the excep tion of the LXX, which is now quoted from Swete's (Cambridge) edition. The Introduction, which is a new feature in the book, has been compiled mainly from the writings of Dillmann, Wellhausen, Kuenen, Cornill, Driver, and more especially from the excellent Einleitung in den Hexateuch, by Dr. Holzinger3. The writer desires to acknowledge the valuable assistance he has received from his friend Mr. J. F. Stenning, Hebrew Lecturer at Wadham College, who kindly revised the proof- sheets and made several useful suggestions. He is also indebted to Mr. Pembrey, the Oriental reader at the University Press, for the skill and care with which he has prepared the sheets for press. G. J. SPURRELL. London, Dec. 14, 1895. 1 Part II of Kbnig's Lehrgebdude was not published in time to be used for the notes. 2 This Grammar, which is very badly and clumsily arranged, is now superseded, as far as the Syntax is concerned, by Davidson's Hebrew Syntax. 3 See the references in the notes appended to the Introduction. CONTENTS. , PAGE Introduction xv-lxiii Notes on Genesis ...... i Appendix ........ 407 Addenda et Corrigenda . . . . . 415 ABBREVIATIONS USED1- A.V. = The AuthorizedVersion, 16 1 1 . Aq. = Aquila's Greek Version. Aram . = Aramaic 2. B. and D. = Baer and Delitzsch. B. Jubil. = The Book of Jubilees, ed. R. Charles, Clarendon Press, 1 894. Badeker, Pal. or Palest. = Palestine and Syria, 2nd (English edition), 1894. Barth, N.B. = Die Nominalbildung in den Semitischen Sprachen, Leipzig, 1894. Baumg. = Baumgarten. Ber. Rab. = Bereshith Rabba. Bernst. = Bernstein. Boch. = Bochart. Boh. = von Bohlen. B6tt. = Bottcher. Bottcher, Neue Aehr. = Neue He- brdische Aehrenlese (in 3 vols.), Leipzig, 1849-65. Budde, Urgesch. = Die Biblische Urgeschichte, Giessen, 1883. C. I. S. = Corpus Inscrip. Semiti- carum, Paris, 1881 et seq. C. P. Ges. = Hebrew and English Lexicon, etc., Clarendon Press, 1892 et seq. Dav. = Davidson, Introductory He brew Grammar, various years. Dav., S. = Hebrew Syntax, 1894. Del.4andDel.5 = The 4th and 5th edd. of the Commentary on Genesis. Del., Par. = Wo lag das Parodies ? Leipzig, 1881. Del., Proleg. = Prolegomenajheipzig, 1886. Di. = Dillmann. Di., N. D.J. «= Commentary on Num., Deut., and Josh. Driver or Th.=Heprew Tenses, 3rd ed., 1892. Driver, Introd. = Introduction to the Lit. of the O. T., 5th ed., 1894. Driver, Sam. = Notes on the H. T. of the Books of Samuel, 1890. Ecclus. = Ecclesiasticus. Ewald, J. B. = Jahrbiicher der bib lischen Wissenschaft, Gottingen, 1848 et seq. Frankel, Einfiuss or Einfl. = Ueber den Einfiuss der paldstin. Exegese 1 Most of the abbreviations, with which the student will be familiar, are not given here. 2 It should be pointed out that the languages usually called Chaldee, Syriac, and Samaritan are really three dialects of the Aramaic, and should be embraced under the term Aramaic. ABBREVIATIONS. Xlll auf die Alexandr. Hermeneutik, Leipzig, 1 851. Frankel, Vorstudien — Vorstudien zu der Septuaginta, Leipzig, 1841. Ges. = Gesenius, Hebr. Grammatik, ed. Kautzsch, 25th ed., Leipzig, 1889. Ges., Th. or Thes. = Thesaurus, Leipzig, 1829-58. Glaser, Skizze = Skizze der Geschichte und Geographie Arabiens, 2 vols., 1890. Gr. Ven. = Versio Veneta, see Bleek's Introduction (Eng. trans.), vol. ii. P- 43°. H. W. B. = Ges., HandwSrterbuch iiber das A. T., 12th ed., 1894. Halevy, MM.— Melanges. Ha.\evy,R.B. = Recherches Bibliques. Halevy, R. E.J. = Revue des Mtudes Juives. Hier. or Hieron. = Hieronymus, Jerome. Hier., Quaest. = Hieronymus' Quaes- tiones Hebraicae in libro Geneseos, at the end of Lagarde's Gen. Graece, Leipzig, 1868. Holz. or Holzinger = Einleitung in den Hexateuch, Freiburg i. B., and Leipzig, 1893. J. A. = Journal Asiatique. J. B. Z.= Journal of Biblical Lite rature and Exegesis. Jos. = Josephus. Ke. = Keil. Kn. = Knobel. Konig, Lehrg. = Histor. Krit. Lehr- gebdude der Heb. Sprache, I part, Leipzig, 188 1. Lagarde or Lag., B. N. = Bildung der Nomina. Lagarde or Lag., Symm. = Symmicta. Len or. = Lenormant. Levy, Chald. W. B. = Chald. Wdr- terbuch, Leipzig, 1881. M. B. A. W. = Monatsberichte der Berliner Akademie der Wissen- schaften, various years. M. R. = Outlines of Hebrew Syntax, by A. Miiller, translated by Robertson, 3rd ed., 1888. Mid. Bern. = Midrash Bemidbar, on the book of Numbers. N61d. = Noldeke. Nold., Uhters.= Untersuchungen zur Kritik des alten Test., Kiel, 1869. Ols. = Olshausen. Onom. = Onomasticon. Onq. = Onqelos. Pesh. = Peshitta. (Syriac) Version. Proleg. or Prol. Crit. = Prolegomena Critica in Vet. Test. Hebr., by H. L. Strack, Leipzig, 1873. R. V. = Authorized Version revised, 1885. Riehm, H. W. B. = HandwSrterbuch des Bibl. Alterthums, 1875 and following years. Rob., Pal. = Palestine, 1st ed., Lon don, 1 841. S.B.A.W. = Sitzungsberichte der Berliner Akademie der Wissen- schafien. Saad. = Saadiah's Arabic Version. Sam. = The Samaritan Version, and the Hebrew Text in Sam. charac ters, when both agree ; the former is quoted as Sam. Ver., and the latter as Heb.-Sam. Schrader (also Sch.and Schr.), K. G.F. = Keilinschriften und Geschichts- forschung. Schrader, C. 0. T. = Die Keilin schriften und das alte Test., 2nd XIV ABBREVIATIONS. ed., 1883 ; translated into English by Whitehouse, 2 vols., London, 1885 and 1888. Sh., G. — The Historical Geography of the Holy Land, by G. A. Smith, London, 1894. Symm. = Symmachus' Greek Ver sion. Targ. Jer. = Jerusalem Targum. Targ. Ps.-Jon. or Jon. = The Targum of Pseudo-Jonathan. Targg. = Targums, when the three Targums agree. Th. or Theod. = Theodotion's Greek Version. Th. S. W. = Theolog. Studien aus Well., Comp. = Wellhausen, Die Composition des HexateucKs, re printed with an Appendix, 1889. Well, Sam.=Der Text der Biicher Samuelis untersucht, 1872. Winer, R. W. B. = Biblisch. Real- WSrterbuch, 1847-48, 3rd ei- Wright, Comp. Gram. = Lectures on the Comparative Grammar of the Semitic Languages, 1890. Z.A.=> Zeitschrift fiir Assyriologie. Z. A. S. A. = Zeitschrift fiir aegyp- tische Sprache und Alterthiimer. Z. A. T. W. = Zeitschrift fur die Alttest. Wissenschaft. Z. D. M. G. = Zeitschrift der Deut schen Morgenldndischen Gesell schaft. Z. D. P. V. = Zeitschrift des Deut schen Paldstina - Vereins. Z. K. S. F. = Zeitschrift fur Keil- schriftforschung. "•ui = iniai. et caetera. INTRODUCTION. The book of Genesis, like the other books of the Hexa teuch, was not the production of one author. A definite plan may be traced in the book, but the structure of the work forbids us to consider it as the production of one writer. This is clear, not only from the (apparently needless) repetitions that occur (e.g. 21, i a and 1 b ; 4, 25 f., and 5, 1-6 ; 47, 29 ff, and 49, 29 ff.), but also from the different accounts of one and the same event which we meet with, not merely such as may be explained on the supposition that the author is really describing different events, or reproducing different traditions (e.g. the narratives contained in 12, 1 off; 20, 1 ff., and 26, 7 ff.; the story of Hagar and Ishmael, in 16, 1 ff., and 21, 12 ff; the double covenant with Abram, chaps. 15 and 17; the double blessing of Jacob by Isaac, 27, 1 ff., and 28, 1 ff.; the double promise of a son to Sarah, 17, 17, and 18, 1 o ff. ; the three explanations of the name Isaac, 17,17; 18,12; 21, 6; the two explanations of the names, Edom in 25, 25. 30; of Issachar, Zebulun, and Joseph, in 30, 16-18. 20. 23 f.; of Mahanaim, in 32, 3. 8; cf. also for Ishmael, 16, n f., and 21, 17; for Peniel, 32, 31, and the allusion in 33, 10), but such as mutually exclude one another, because the event narrated can only have happened once (e.g. the two accounts XVI INTRODUCTION. of the creation, in chaps, i and 2 ; the number of the animals that went into the ark and the time the flood continued on the earth, in chap. 6 f. ; the dispersion of the nations, in chaps. 10 and 11, 1 ff., cf. 10, 25; the varying explanations of the names, Beersheba, in 21, 31. 26, 33; Israel, in 32, 29. 35, 10; Bethel and the pillar of Bethel, 28, 18 f. 35, 14 f.; the different accounts of the relations between Jacob and the Shechemites, in chaps. 34 and 48, 22 ; and the variations in the narrative in 37, 19-36, — the sale of Joseph by his brethren). Many other notices in Genesis also militate against the unity of authorship (e.g. that the limit of human life was reduced to 120 years, 6, 3 against 5, n1; that Abraham begat many sons after the death of Sarah, 25, iff. against 18, n f. 17, 17; that Esau had already settled in Seir when Jacob returned from Mesopotamia, 32, 4 ff. against 36, 6 ; that Rebekah's nurse came with Jacob from Meso potamia, 35, 8 against 24, 59 ; that all Jacob's sons were born in Paddan Aram, 35, 26 against ver. 16 ff; the different names of Esau's wives, 26, 34. 28, 9 against 36, 2 f.; the two accounts of Joseph's master, 37, 36 and 39, 1-40, 4 ; and the two narratives in 42, 27. 35 and 43, 21. Statements like 4, 14 f. 17 seem out of place in their present context; the differences in chronology, e.g. in the age of Sarah, in 17, 17, cf. 12, 4, and in 12, 11. 20, 2 ff; in the case of Ishmael, 17, 24. 21, 5. 8 and 21, isf.; as to Isaac's approach ing death, in 27, 1 f. 7. 10. 41 and in 35, 28 and 26, 34; in the account of Rachel's death in 35, 19, while in 37, 10 she is represented as still living); also 30, 25 f. does not agree with 31, 38. 41 (cf. Di., p. 345 f.) ; further, the ages of Jacob's sons which are given, or presupposed in chaps. 32-37 and chaps. 39-45, do not agree with 46, 8-27 (cf. Di., p. 380 f. and p. 478); even narratives are found in which some parts do not agree with the remainder of the 1 Cf. the note, however, on 6, 3. INTRODUCTION. XVli narrative (e.g. 31, 48-50, and 24, 62-67 an(l tne beginning of the chapter) 1- These discrepancies and difficulties in the book of Genesis, and similar ones in the other books of the Pentateuch, were not really discovered until the time of Ibn Ezra (twelfth century). The prevalent opinion among both Jews and Christians, was that Moses was the author of the Pentateuch. The same view was held by Philo, Josephus, and in the Talmud; and the only opposition it met with in the first centuries of our era, was from unimportant, heretical sects in the Church, especially the Gnostics. Ibn Ezra — in criticising the views of Rabbi Isaac ben Salomo Israeli, of Kairoan in N. Africa 840-950 2, that Gen. 36, 31 could not have been written before the time of King Jehoshaphat — himself inclined to the opinion that portions of the Pentateuch could not have been written by Moses; cf. his Comm. on Gen. 12, 6. 22,14. Deut. 1, 1. 3,11. chap. 34. He did not deny the Mosaic authorship entirely. The views of other scholars up to the time of Astruc (1 684-1 766), the real founder of Pent. Criticism, must be omitted here3. Astruc, a Paris physician, published anonymously, in 1753, a work on the authorship and structure of the book of Genesis4. He first drew attention to the two different names of God, and inferred from this fact, the existence of two different documents, A Elohistic, and B Jehovistic. These proving insufficient, he assigned the narrative of the Flood, in which neither Jehovah nor Elohim occurred, to a third document C ; and all the other passages, where neither name occurred, were apportioned to nine other documents of non-Hebrew origin. A and B 1 Cf. Di., Genesis', p. ix f.; Holzinger, Einleitung, p. I5f., and the authorities cited by him ; and Driver, Introd.', p. 6 ff. 2 Bleek-Well.4, Einleitung, p. 16 ; cf. Holz., I.e., p. 28. 3 They will be found in Bleek-Well., I.e., p. 18 ff. ; Holz., I.e., p. 29 f. * Conjectures sur les memoires originaux dont il paroit que Moyse s'est servi pour composer le livre de la Genese, Brussels, 1753. b XV111 INTRODUCTION. alone were held to be real documents, the others fragments ; and Moses was regarded as the author1. Eichorn arrived independently at practically the same conclusions as Astruc ; but he examined the documents more thoroughly and com pletely, apportioning the different parts of Genesis and Exodus i and 2 to the Elohist and Jehovist. He also pointed out that the language of the two documents differed, and criticised the style and contents of the two sources. Ilgen made the next advance 2. After he had examined the book of Genesis, he came to the conclusion that it was composed of seventeen documents to be referred to three authors ; two Elohists and one Jehovist. These he called respectively ' The Sopher Eliel harischon,' 'the SopherEliel hascheni,' and the Jehovist. The three documents were independent, com plete in themselves, and each exhibiting characteristic marks3. The next development was the hypothesis, that the Pen tateuch was composed from fragments partly by different authors, and arranged by a collector or Redactor. This view was adopted, with various modifications, by several scholars ; e. g. Vater, Hartmann, (and at first) De. Wette, &c.4 The third stage in the history of the criticism of the Pentateuch was the theory that one of the documents was composed to complete and supplement the other. This opinion was accepted by Von Bohlen, Stahelin, Bleek, De Wette, Von Lengerke, and Delitzsch*. The question 1 Cf. Holz., I.e., p. 40, and authorities cited by him. The view adopted by Astruc and his followers is called by German scholars Die Urkun- denhypothese. 2 Die Urkunden des jerus. Tempelarchivs, etc., Halle, 1798. Only vol. i, Genesis, was issued. 3 Ilgen's division of the sources attracted little attention at first, but was revived in 1853, by Hupfeld. * Full details in Holz., 1. c, p. 43 f. ; Cornill, Einleitung, p. 20 f. This hypothesjs is called by German scholars Die Fragmentenhypothese cf. Holz., l.c, p. 54 f.; Com., l.c, p. 32 f. INTRODUCTION. XIX was most thoroughly discussed by Tuch in his Comm. iiber die Gen., 1838. He maintained that there were only two authors, one of whom supplemented or ' filled in ' the work of the other ; (i) the ' Grundschrift ' or the Elohist, and (ii) the ' Supplementer ' or Jehovist ' The first document was composed by a priest in the time of Saul, the second must be referred to the reign of Solomon. Stahelin extended the theory to the other books of the Pentateuch, to the books of Samuel and Kings, and to the other historical writings. He discovered in these two systems of legislation ; the first or Elohim source, c. 1300 b.c, and the second or Jehovah source, in the time of Samuel. Stahelin's Jehovist contains the Jehovist, the Jehovistic Redactor, the Deutero- nomist and the Deuteronomic Redactor, merged, into one person. The other scholars, however, regarded the Jehovist as the author of Genesis, Numbers, and of Joshua in the original form, and believed that his work was again ' filled in ' by the Deuteronomist. The great objection to this hypothesis was the fact that it under-estimated the Jehovist. The Jehovist when carefully compared with the 'Grundschrift' was found to contain much that agreed with that document, and much that was in direct contradiction to it (e.g. the two accounts of the creation). And it became clear that the theory of a supple mental document was quite untenable. The two documents were therefore to be regarded as two distinct and independent works. Out of this change of view the present system of Pentateuch criticism was gradually evolved. Among the scholars who were the first to adopt the new hypothesis were Gramberg 2 and Stahelin 8, who were both of 1 The name adopted for this hypothesis by German scholars is the Ergdnzungshypothese. 2 Liber Geneseos secundum fontes rite dignoscendos adumbratio nova, 1828. 3 Krit. Untersuch. iiber die Genesis, 1830. b 2 XX INTRODUCTION. opinion that Genesis was composed of two documents, the Elohist and Jehovist, and a compiler who is responsible for the present book of Genesis. Ewald held that the Pentateuch was composed of five documents, which were revised by the author of the fifth document. A sixth document (Deuteronomy) was added, and finally edited by a seventh hand who added Deut. 331. The new hypothesis was further developed by Hupfeld2. He considers that three separate documents may be traced in Genesis — the ' Urschrift,' the first document, the younger Elohist, and the Jehovist. Each source is a coherent and complete narrative, and all three were composed inde pendently. The three documents were worked up into the present text of Genesis by a later Redactor. Other scholars followed in Hupfeld's footsteps. Bohmer s differentiated the sources — printing them in different types — and drew atten tion to additions made by the Redactor. „ Knobel 4 divides the Pentateuch into the ' Grundschrift ' = P (in the time of Saul), which was supplemented by the Jehovist, probably in the last years of Hezekiah, by extracts from the nt^Tl 13D (cf. Josh, ro, 13. 2 Sam. r, 8), which was edited in the Assyrian period, and partly corresponds to E, and from the mrv niDrPD nSD (Num. 21, 14), which was composed in the time of Jehoshaphat, and partly corresponds to J. He also added many Jehovistic passages of his own. Finally, in the reign of Josiah, Deuteronomy was added, and Joshua, after revision, and thus the present Hexateuch was produced. Knobel's "it^n nSD is really Hupfeld's second Elohist, while Hupfeld's Jehovist is divided by Knobel into the "13D 1 For details, see Holz., I.e., p. 59 f.; Cornill, I.e., p. 24 f. 2 Die Quetten der Genesis und die Art ihrer Zusammensetzung, 1853. 3 Liber Geneseos Pentateuchicus, i860; Das erste Buch der Thora 1862. 4 Kurzgef. Handbuch, Num., Deut., Josh., 1861. INTRODUCTION. XXI ",'1 niDrpD, and the Jehovist. Knobel also considers that the prae-deuteronomic Redactor was the Jehovist. Kuenen's views (1861)1 — (i) Book of Origins, (ii) Ihvhist, (iii) Younger Elohist — are similar. He does not admit a prae-deuterohomic Redactor, but considers that the whole Pentateuch was edited after the time of Deuteronomy, by one of the priests of Jerusalem, shortly before the beginning of the Babylonian , captivity. Schrader's2 three documents are (P) ' The Annalist,' who wrote when David was king of Judah ; (E) ' The Theo cratic Narrator,' a native of the northern kingdom, who flourished about 975-950, after the division of the kingdom. The ' Prophetic Narrator ' (J), also belonging to the northern kingdom, in the time of Jeroboam, combined these two docu ments and augmented and expanded them with Jahvistic por tions. The Deuteronomist in the time of Josiah, c. 622 b.c, wrote the greater part of Deuteronomy (chaps. 4, 44-28, 69), and later, after the destruction of Jerusalem, added Deut. 1-4, 43 and 29-31, 13, and combined the whole with the rest of the Pentateuch, and also revised the book of Joshua. Schrader agrees with Knobel thdt the Jehovist was the Redactor of the prae-deuteronomic Pentateuch. Noldeke 3 treats the ' Grundschrift ' in a masterly manner. He emphasises ttie fact that the Redactor of the Pentateuch had the second Elohist and the Jehovist before him, not as two distinct sources, but already combined into one document. The results obtained by the researches of these scholars were as follows : — The Pentateuch is composed of four documents, P or PC, The Priests' Code ; E, the Second or Younger Elohist; J, the Jehovist; and D, Deuteronomy. E was usually regarded as earlier than J, and it was assumed that P, J, E were worked up into one whole, before D was added. Some (Knobel and Schrader) held that J was the 1 Onderzoek1. 2 De Wette's EinV, 1869. 3 Untersuchungen zur Kritik des A.T., 1869. XX11 INTRODUCTION. prae-deuteronomic Redactor, others thought that the Redactor was a different person. Some maintained that D was the Redactor of the Pentateuch, others that the Redactor was a distinct person. This view of the origin of the Pentateuch was, however, combated by Graf1, who, following the opinion that had already been put forth by Reuss, George, and Vatke 2, independently of each other, propounded the view that the so-called ' Grundschrift ' was not the oldest of the three documents, but the youngest. This was not, however, the original form of Graf's hypothesis. He first divided the ' Grundschrift ' into two parts, and proceeded to show that the priestly or ritual laws, i.e. Ex. chaps. 25-31 and 35-4o, all Leviticus, and the greater part of Numbers were post- deuteronomic ; while the remainder of the ' Grund schrift ' was prae-deuteronomic and antecedent to the Jehovist, i.e. the Jehovistic laws in Ex. chaps. 20-23. 13, 1-16. 34, 10-27, and the Jehovistic narratives, are prae-deuteronomic. Ezekiel is older than the ritual code and the laws in P. The order of the documents, according to Graf, was, the Grund schrift (the prae-deuteronomic portion), the Jehovist, and the Deuteronomist,the latter being the Redactor of the whole work. After the Babylonian exile the Pentateuch was completed by the addition of the post-deuteronomic portions by Ezra 3. Graf apparently ignored Hupfeld's second Elohist. When, however, Riehm4 and Noldeke5 had shown that this division of the 'Grundschrift' was, on philological grounds, impossible, 1 Die geschichtlichcn Biicher des Alten Test. (1866). 3 Reuss in a lecture in 1834, and afterwards in the article Tuden- thum, in Lrsch and Gruber, Encyc, 1850; Vatke, in Die Religion des A. T. nach den Kanon. Buchern entwickelt, i. 1835 ¦ and George Die dlteren judischen Feste mit einer Kritik der Gesetzgebung des 3 Cf. Holz., I.e., p. 65. 4 Studien und Kril., 1868, pp. 350-379. s Untersuchungen zur Kritik des A. T., Kiel, 1869. INTRODUCTION. XX111 Graf modified his view, and assigned the whole of the ' Grundschrift ' to the post-exilic period \ The reasons alleged by Graf and his followers in support of this view are, that the history contained in the books of Judges, and Samuel, and to some extent in the books of Kings, is in contradiction to the laws usually regarded as Mosaic ; and that these laws themselves were quite unknown at the period to which they are supposed to belong. Further, that the prophets of the eighth and seventh centuries are unacquainted with the Mosaic code. Graf's views are accepted by Kuenen, Wellhausen, Budde, Cornill, and many other scholars 2. Further researches and investigations have led to a practical agreement among most scholars that the Pentateuch consists of four documents, J, E, D, and P s. J is the earliest document and E slightly later. These two sources were united by a Jehovistic Redactor into JE \ This work contains mostly historical matter and a few laws (Ex. chaps. 20-23. 24), It is the opinion of many scholars that J and E, before they were combined into one whole, went through several editions, being revised and modified. These are distinguished as J \ J 2, J s, and E \ E 2. D, at the time of Josiah, contained Deut. 12-26, it passed through several editions, and was finally combined with JE by the Deuteronomist, who also revised JE himself. This revision affected Genesis least ; it is more evident in Exodus and Numbers, and most clearly seen in Joshua. Entirely distinct from this combination of JE and D, after Ezekiel, 1 In Merx, Archiv fur Wissensch. Erforschung des A.T., i. 466-477. * Cf. Holz., I.e., p. 66 f. 3 The group of laws in Lev. chaps. 17-26 are usually designated the Law of Holiness' (H) ; cf. Dr., Introd., p. 43 f., and the authorities cited there, and Holz., I.e., p. 406 f. 4 The document J is called the Jahwist, and the document E, the Elohist. The work formed by the combination of the two is designated the Jehovist; cf. Holz., I.e., p. 71 £; Dr., Introd., p. 12. XXIV INTRODUCTION. during and after the exile, another work was composed, containing some historical matter, but chiefly legislation. This was the Priests' Code (P or P C), which seems to have been composed gradually (P1, P2, etc.) in the school of the priests. This was combined, probably by Ez'ra, with J, E, and D ; and became, about 444 b. c, the recognised law book of the community \ Kuenen, in 1885 2, published the results of his investigation of the structure of the Hexateuch. J and E, according to Kuenen, were both written in the northern kingdom, J about the end of the ninth or beginning of the eighth century b.c; E iii the middle of the eighth century. J and E were subjected to several revisions, and in the process were consi derably augmented and modified, and c. 600 b.c (after Deute ronomy) were united into one document JE. In this work, Ex* chaps. 20-23 occupied the place now taken by Deute ronomy. The original Deuteronomy (D 1), i. e. Deut. c haps. 5-26. 28. 31, 9-13, was written in Josiah's reign, c. 622 b.c and later, in the beginning of the Babylonian exile, Deut. 1-4, 40. chaps. 29 f. and 31, 1-8 (D 2) were added to D1- During the exile, the Deuteronomist (D 3) worked up D' and JE into one document, and revised the whole work, especially Joshua. The priestly and ritual portions of the Pentateuch (P) were all composed after Deuteronomy. Firstly P ', i. e. a collection of laws — a large portion of which is preserved in Lev. chaps. 1 7-26, and in numerous fragments in the rest of the Pentateuch3. This part of P was revised and arranged with re ference to Ezekiel and shortly before the end of the Babylonian exile. All the other portions of the so-called 'Grundschrift,' from Gen. chap. 1 — Josh. chap. 21, belong to P2, which was gradually completed between 560-475 b. c. in Babylon. This P 2 had already been welded together with P 1, and in 444 b.c. 1 Cf. Di., N. D.J., p. 598. 2 Onderzoek 2 = Hexateuch. 3 Kuenen'sP' = H (Law of Holiness), see p. xxiii! INTRODUCTION. XXV (in the assembly described in Neh. chaps. 8-10) was brought into use by Ezra as the recognised law book of the com munity. Later, this law book was augmented by all sorts of new laws, which were not known to Ezra (e.g. Ex. 29, 38-42. Lev. 6, 1-6. Num. 28, 1-6. Ex. 30, n-16. Lev. 27, 32 f.), and c. 400 b.c P^P2 were welded together with JE + D. This composite work was probably subjected to a continuous criticism at the hands of the scribes until the third century b. c. The Dates of the Codes. The dates of the codes J and E are variously assigned, by different scholars, and on this depends the question whether E is younger than J, or vice versa. Those who assign the priority to E are Schrader, E, 975-950 b.c, J, 825-800 b.c ; Reuss, J, 850-800 b.c, E, perhaps a little earlier ; .Dillmann, E, 900-850 b.c, so Kittel and Riehm; Dillmann, J, about 750 b.c, Kittel, 830-800 b.c, Riehm, c. 850 b.c; Well- hausen, Kuenen, and Stade put J, first, 850-800 b. c, and E about 750 b. c.1 The Three Documents J, E, and P. < The three codes J, E, and P are distinguished one from the other, not only by a difference, more or less distinctly marked, in their contents, but also by a peculiar usage of language. P, which has been largely employed in the com position of Genesis, can be more clearly separated from J and E, than these from one another, the points of de marcation between them being less clearly defined than in the case of P. The Document J. This document J — the supplemental document of the Erganzungshypothese (cf. p. xix) — may be designated, as 1 Cf. Holz., I.C., pp. 165 f. and 215 f.; Dr., Introd., p. 116. XXVI INTRODUCTION. distinguished from P, the Prophetic Narrative. In the account of the family of Noah, the deluge, and in the table of nations, it is in substance closely akin to P, also in the portion of Genesis containing the history of Abraham it has several narratives in common with P (e.g. the separation of Lot and Abraham ; the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrha ; the story of Dinah; also cf. 47, 1-11. 29 ff. and 49, 29 ff.), but elsewhere in the history of the patriarchs, and in that of Joseph and Jacob, it is more closely connected with E, so much so, that from chap. 27 onwards, most of the narratives in J have their complete parallels in E. In the sections in J which have their corresponding passages in E, the difference in style and contents is often clearly marked, e.g. in the two reports of the Abimelech story in chap. 20 and chap. 26, and of Hagar and Ishmael etc.; in other parallel passages the two narratives are practically alike, so that R could easily weld together the two accounts. On the other hand there is much thatToccurs in J with no corre sponding account in E, e. g. the visit of the angels to Lot and Abraham ; the origin of the nations of Moab and Ammon ; the list of Nahor's descendants; Isaac in Philistia; the story of Dinah, of Judah and Tamar, etc. J and E are both independent documents, but the striking similarity between a great portion of their contents, would seem to indicate that J and E were closely connected with one another1. The main difference, however, between J and E, is that the narratives in J are marked by a peculiar literary style. E is full of details, often of no importance ; J is distinguished by a fondness for picturesque description, by breadth and variety of ideas, and by the polished and artistic finish of his 1 The question as to which document is dependent on the other, is discussed in Holz., 1. c, p. 215 ff. Up- to the time of Wellhausen, the general opinion was that E was the older document ; so Schrader and Noldeke. But Wellhausen and the followers of Graf regard J as older than E j cf. p. xxv. INTRODUCTION. XXVli narratives. Many passages of J, which we possess in their full form (chap. 2 f. n, 1-9; cf. 18 f. 24. 43 f.), are master pieces of narrative art, with which only a few out of E can be compared (chap. 22). ' His touch is singularly light, with a few strokes he paints a scene which, before he has finished, is impressed indelibly upon his reader's memory. In ease and grace his narratives are unsurpassed ; everything is told with the precise amount of detail that is required; the narrative never lingers and the reader's interest is sustained to the end1.' The dialogues, which are frequent in J, are another noticeable feature of the document (Gen. chaps. 18 f. 24. 43 f.). The standpoint of J is prophetical. Many of his longer narratives abound in acute and instructive reflections, and in moral and religious truths. 'He deals with the problem of the origin of sin and evil in the world, and follows its growth (Gen. 2-4. 6, 1-8); he notices the evil condition of man's heart even after the Flood (8, 21); traces the develop ment of heathen feeling and heathen manners (n, 1 ff. 9, 22 ff. 19, 1 ff. 31 ff.), and emphasises strongly the want of faith and disobedience visible even in the Israel of Moses' days (Ex. 16,4-5. 25-3°- z7> 2_7- I4> IIf- chaps. 32-34. Num. n. 14. 25, 1 ff. Deut. 31, 16-22). He shows, in opposition to this, how God works for the purpose of counteracting the ruin incident to man, partly by punishing, partly by choosing and educating, first Israel's forefathers to live as godlike men, and finally Israel itself to become the holy people of God. He represents Abraham's migration into Canaan as the result of a divine call and promise (Gen. 12, 1-3. 24, 7, contrast 20, 13 and Josh. 24, 3 in E); expresses clearly the aim and object of this call (18, 18 f.); exhibits in strong contrast to human sin the divine mercy, long-suffering and faithfulness (Gen. 6, 8. 8, 21 f. 18, 24 ff. Ex. 32-34); recognises the 1 Driver, Introd., p. 112. XXV111 INTRODUCTION. universal significance of Israel in the midst of the nations of the world (Gen. 12, 2 f. 27, 29. Ex. 4, 22 f. 19, 5 f. Num. 24, 9) ; declares in classical words the final end of Israel's education (Num. 11, 29, cf. Ex. 19, 5 f.); and formulates under the term belief the spirit in which man should respond to the revealing work of God (Gen. 15, 6. Ex. 4, 1. 5. 8 f. 31. 14, 31. 19, 9, cf. Num. 14, n. 20, 12, and Deut. 1, 32. 9, 23). And in order to illustrate the divine purposes of grace, as manifested in history, he introduces at points (fixed by tradition), prophetic glances into the future (Gen. 3, 15. 5, 29. 8, 21. 9, 25-27. 12, 2 f. 18, 18 f. 28, 14. Num. 24, 17 f.), as he also loves to point to the character of the nations or tribes as foreshadowed in their beginnings (Gen. 9, 22 ff. 16, 12. 19, 31 ff. 25, 25 ff. 34, 25 ff. 35, 22, cf. 49, 9ff)V Other characteristic features of J are, that he often in his narratives describes certain events as due to human and natural causes, whereas E assigns similar events to super natural causes (e.g. Gen. 30, 14-16, contrast 30, 17 f. ; 30, 28-43, contrast 31, 4 ff. Ex. 10, 13. 19. and 14, 21, etc.). J, too, in his representations of the Deity is more anthropo morphic than E ; God appears in visible form to Abraham (Gen. chap. 18 1'.), meets Moses (Ex. 4, 24, cf. Gen. 16, 7), comes down (Gen. n, 5. 7. Ex. 3, 8. 19, n, etc.), is jealous of men (Gen. 6, 3. n, 6), repents (Gen. 6, 6), grieves (Gen. 6, 6), swears (Gen. 24, 7. Num. n, 12, etc.), is angry (Ex. 4, 14. 32, 10. 12), shuts the door of the Ark (Gen. 7, 16), smells the sweet savour (Gen. 8, 21). Like E, J is fond of describing the consecration of the various sanctuaries in Palestine (Bethel, Gen. 12, 8. 28, 13-16; Shechem, 12, 6 f. ; Beer-lahai-roi, 16, 14; Beersheba, 21, 33. 26, 23. 28, 10; Mamre-Hebron, 13, 18. 18, 1, etc.)2, but he expressly s'tates 1 Di., N.D.J., p. 629 ff., as translated in Dr., Introd., p. 113. 2 J (like E) explains the origin of the names Beer-lahai-roi, "Beersheba Bethel, Penuel, 32, 30 ; Succoth, 33, 17 ; and Abel-Mizraim, 50, 17. ' INTRODUCTION. XXIX that the patriarchs, when worshipping at the sanctuaries, ' called upon the name of fehovah' (Gen. 12, 7 f. 13, 18. 21, 33. 26, 5), to avoid any suspicion that the Holy places were used for the purposes of idolatry. The Language of J. Proper Names. J uses nvf as the name of God; DT17N is also used in special cases, e.g. when he reflects upon the contrast between the divine and human character (Gen. 32, 29. 31. 33, 10), also when a heathen is addressing an Israelite (Judg. 1, 7. Gen. 43, 29), or an Israelite a heathen (Gen. 20, 13. 40,8. 41, 16. 25. 28. 32). The serpent in Gen. 3, 2 also uses DTv^X, and Abimelech niiT1 in Gen. 26, 28 f. J has for Mesopotamia nnni DIN ; P has cnx ps. ^Nib" is the name of the third Patriarch, after Gen. 32, 29 (generally). The Mount of 'the Law-giving' is TD in J and P, 3in in E and D. In J the original inhabitants of Palestine are "»3J»3 (Gen. 10, 18 b. 12, 6. 24, 3. 37, etc.), cf. J "3VS HIM (Gen. 24, 3. 37) = P J5?W Tim (Gen. 28, 1. 6. 8). Words and Phrases characteristic of J. "a "QK connecting the different members of a genealogical table, Gen. 4, 20. 21. 10, 21. 11, 29. nDIK 'surface of the earth] or as land suitable for cultivation. px in its ordinary sense also occurs. Vns = the second son, after the first has been mentioned, in the formula VTIN D^, Gen. 4, 21. 10, 25; cf. 22, 21 (in appos.). WtWO B>*K, only in Gen. 7,2. P has '"niMI "OT. nb$ = oath, Gen. 24, 21. 26, 28. In other sources in a different sense. tfE>M mN, Gen. 18, n. XXX INTRODUCTION. px, in the phrase pta rr,r\ = 'to exist,' Gen. 2, 5. 6, 4. So in J, Gen. 19, 31 p«3 fK ^Kj and Gen- 6> 6 nE^ pS3 /, frequently in the phrases DN or DV nDn n'Ety, Gen. 19, 19. 24, 12. 14, etc. ; ay now 1DH nfe>y, Gen. 24, 49. 32, 11. 47, 29, etc. 3"in, in the story of the Flood, Gen. 8, 13 b, and nrnri, Gen. 7, 22. HIT1 = 'portions,' Gen. 43, 34. 47, 24 (all). JH\ euphemistic = ' to know,' Gen. 4, 1. i9) 5. 24, 16. 38, 26, etc. nan,, from an* as interj., Gen. 11, 3. 4. 7. 38, 16. In E it also = ' to give.' *?i>i = ' to beget,' Gen. 4, 18. 10, 8. 13. 22, 23. INTRODUCTION. XXXI 35P, the Hif'il ysn only occurs in Gen. in J, 30, 38. 33, 15. 43. 9- 47. 2. Dip11, Gen. 7, 4. 23. In Deut. 11, 6 the meaning is different. SB'*, in the phrase 'a 3^3 3t^, of foreigners dwelling in a land not their own, Gen. 24, 3. Josh. 6, 25, etc. "•as, verb and adj. used in J = ' sore;' (of famine) Gen. 43, 1. 47, 4; (of plagues) Ex. 9, 3. 18. 24 b; (of mourning) Gen. 50, 10. 11 ; = ' grievous' (of sin) Gen. 18, 20; = rich] Gen. 13, 2;= ' numerous] Gen. 50, 9. Ex. 8, 20; = '/o harden' (the heart), Ex. 9, 7. 8, 11 a, etc. b n^3, frequently in J, Gen. 24, 15. 19. 45. 27, 30. 43, 2, etc., also occurs in D and P. 3^, in the different phrases nWs ION, Gen. 8, 21; 13^3 ION, Gen. 27, 41; *3^K 131, Gen. 24, 45; 13^ ^N 3Vjmn, Gen. 6, 6; and (?)13^3 no'C, Ex. 4, 14. }*5j, frequently in J, Gen. 19, 2. 24, 23. 25. 54. 32, 14 a. Ex. 34, 25. |1$>0 is only found in J, Gen. 42, 27. 43, 21. Ex. 4, 24, Josh. 4, 3. 8. nononn, only in J, Gen. 19, 16. 43, 10. J in 34, 19 has "HK, E, 45, 9 noy. mi'lD = relatives in J, Gen. 12, 1. 24, 4. 31, 3. 43, 7. In P =posterity, Gen. 48, 6. N13DD, Gen. 24, 25. 32. 42, 2. 7. 43, 24 (all). E has JTO, Gen. 45, 23. njpD, in the phrases fXS njpO, np3 "D, non3 "O, Gen. 26, 14. 47. i7- 18. noiNn ninaBJo-i>a, Gen. 12, 3. 28, 14. aniyjD, only in J, Gen. 8, 21. 46, 34. D'YI HOBO, only in J, Gen. 2, 7. 7, 22. In Gen. 6, 3 J uses nn = spirit (of Jehovah). P uses D«n nn, Gen. 6, 1 7. 7, 1 5. r^StD — ' sweep away] Gen. 18, 23 f. 19, 15. 17. 12$ with suffix = /, addressed to God, or a person of rank, common in J, Gen. 18, 3. 5. 19, 2. 19. 32, 11, etc. fO nDJ? = '/o cease] Gen. 29, 35. 30, 9. XXX11 INTRODUCTION. 3S^ in Nif., Gen. 45, 5 a, and Hithpael, Gen. 6, 6. 34, 7, and asy Gen. 3, 16, and jmy Gen. 3, 16. 17. 5, 29. IpJ? in Qal, Nif'., and Hif'., only in J. Qal in Gen. 25, 21. Ex. 8, 26. 10, 18, and Nif. in Gen. 25, 21; Hif. in Ex. 8, 4. 5. 9, 28. n?an = 'to separate, distinguish] Ex. 8, 18. 9, 4. 11, 7. cyan, Gen. 18, 32. 29, 34. 35, etc.; nyan nNT, Gen. 2, 23; and also HNtn Dya3, Ex. 8, 28. D has xinn Qya3, Ex. 9, 19. 10, 10. "33 1¥3, only in J, Gen. 19, 3. 9. 33, 11 b. "3 nsOX-b i?BJ, only in J, Gen. 33, 4. 45, 14. 46, 29, in the last two passages together with "a "s "y n33. nwi, seven times in J, Gen. 24, 21. 40. 42. 56. 39, 2. 3. 23. "Vyx and m*yv = the younger of two brothers or sisters, Gen. l9> 31- 34- 35- 38. 25, 23. 29, 26. 43, 33. 48, 14. ' The first-born' is b\1), Gen. 27, 1. 15, or 31, Gen. 25, 23, or TD3, Gen. 38, 7. 43, 33. pp =youngest also occurs in J, Gen. 43, 29. 44, 2. 23. 26. npyx = ' an evil report] Gen. 18, 21. 19, 13. Nip, in the phrase "a DtJ> Nip p"!>jj frequent in J, Gen. 11, 9. 16, 14. 19, 22. 25, 30, etc. The phrase nirp DBO Nip only occurs in J, Gen. 4, 26. 12,8. 13,4. 21,33. 26,25. mp in Hif'., only in J, Gen. 24, 12. 27, 20. nNlp^>, in the phrase "a nxipb JTi, only found in J, Gen. 18, 2. 19, 1. 24, 17. 29, 13. 33, 4. "pb alone is common in J, but is also found in the other sources. mfc» in J is generally regarded as 'pasture land] opposed to n»nN arable land, Gen. 25, 27. 30, 16. 34, 7. niB-n asry, Gen. 2, 5. 3, 18. Ex. 9, 25 in J = p«n atoy in E, Ex. 10, 12. 15. nab' = ' language] only in J, Gen. 11, 1. 6. 7. 9. p uses p£9, Gen. 10, 5. 20. 31. nnaB5, J never uses HON (E), Gen. 16, 1. 5. 6. 24, 35. 30, 7. 9. 10. 12, etc. P also uses "e\ CTPB>n, found in J, Gen. 18, 16. 19, 28. 26, 8. Ex. 14, 24 INTRODUCTION. XXXlii The Grammar of J. There are no special peculiarities in the formation of words. The ending fl— which Di. cites — in the third and second pers. masc. pi. imperf. is found in E, and frequently in D. J exhibits a preference for verbal suffixes, instead of using HN with suffixes. So Gen. 24, verbal suffixes fourteen times ; HN with suffix three times ; Judg. 1, verbal suffixes ten times ; nN with suffixes twice. Peculiar constructions of verbs pan and p&\, construed with an ace, while E uses b with these verbs (in Pi'el) ; cf. Gen. 33. 4 with 29, 13. 31, 28. 32, 1. 45, 15. 48, 10. ^ = to call any one, make him come, is construed with b not HN in J, but this is also found in E, D, and P. The genitive expressed by b 1B>N is found in J, Gen. 29, 9. 40, 5. 47, 6b; but also in E, Gen. 31, 19. In J Oyp is used with the genitive following, so Gen. 18, 4. 24, 17. 43, 2. 11. 44, 25, while D puts the cstr. state before BJJQ, Deut. 26, 5. 28, 62. J is fond of using proper names of nations in the sing., so bvr& (but E i>Nlb" *J3)=/A? Israelites, tFT$0=the Egyptians, also the different tribes of Israel; cf. Judg. chap. 1. We find too i'Ni'f* B*N, Josh. 9, 6, and in Josh. 17, 14 f. the tribes speak of themselves in the sing. Lastly may be noted, the use of sing, gentilic nouns, ^|n, *D!i3^n) etc., cf. Judg. 1, 1. 21. 27. 28. 29. 30. 32. 36. In his syntax, J often employs periods with main and dependent clauses. He not only uses the ordinary means of connecting a verbal and nominal sentence, but is fond of employing the formulae ^ ""H^l, Gen. 6, 1. 26, 8. 27, 1. 43, 21. 44, 24. Josh. 17, 13, and iB'N.a W, Gen. 12, 11. 24, 22. 52. 27, 30. 30, 35. 37, 23. 43, 2. Disjunctive interrogative sentences are frequent in J, Gen. 18, 21. 24, 21. Ex. 16, 4. 17, 7. J is fond of using nNl and ni, for emphasis, in nN'mp, c XXXIV INTRODUCTION. Gen. 3, 13. 12, 18. 26, 10. 42, 28; nfnp, Gen. 27, 20; nj nob, Gen. 18, 13. 25, 22. 33, 15. He also makes use of particles and conjunctions with great freedom, imparting to his style a certain vivacity, and expressing the various shades of meaning with more effect. So *^N in Gen. 16, 2. 18, 24. 28. 24, 5. 39. 43, 12. I?N, Gen. 28, 16. fe, Gen. 12, 13. 30, 27. 39, 5. "Waga, Gen. 3, 17. 8, 21. 12, 13. 16. nraa, Gen. 24, 25. 43, 8. 44, 16. 46, 34. 47, 3. 50, 9. f3-V*a, Gen. 18, 5. 19, 8. 38, 26. Num. 10, 31. ?nbafj, Gen. 3, n. 4. i5- I9, 2I- 3§. 9- Ex- 8> l8- 25- 9. x7- naib, Gen. 25, 21. 30, 38 (P uses nab alone, Ex. 14, 2. 26, 35). W?0 (infrequent), Gen. 39, 5. Ex. 9, 24 b. J is also fond of using the precative NJ, instances in Gen. chaps. 19 and 24. J has Nj> about forty times in Gen., E about six times. nfiy] also occurs frequently in J, Gen. 3, 22. 4, 11. 11, 6. 12, 19. 24, 49. 30, 30, etc. J has nny} seventeen times, E eight times, Gen. 20, 7. 21, 23. 31, 30. 44. 41, 33. 50, 17. 21. Ex. 33, 5. fa is also frequently used, in J fourteen times, in E seven times, and fourteen times in D. J also employs Q'l.tt usually, Gen. 2, 5. 19, 4. 24, 15. 45. Ex. 9, 30. 10, 7. Josh. 2,8. 3,1, and once tnoa, Gen. 45, 28. Lastly the uses of prep, b may be noted as particle of time = about such and such a time, Gen. 8, 11. 24, 11. 49, 27. Ex. 34, 2; also = about such and such a time reckoned from to-day, Gen. 7, 4 ; and = after the lapse of a fixed period of time, Gen. 7, 10, and the use of ntt? with a suffix representing the subject, Gen. 18, 22. 43, 27. 28. 46, 30. Ex. 4, 18. 9, 2. 17. Num. 22, 30 1. 1 Cf. Holz., I.e., p. 93 {., from whom the above examples and rules are mainly taken. INTRODUCTION. XXXV The following portions of Genesis are usually assigned to J: 2, 4b-3, 24. 4, 1-26. 5, 29. 6, 1-4. 5-8. 7, 1-5. 7-10 (mainly). 12. i6b-i7. 22. 23. 8, 2 b-3 a. 6-12. 13 b. 20-22. 9, 18-27. 10> 8-19. 21. 24-30. 11, 1-9. 28-30. 12, 1-4 a. 6-20. 13, 1-5. 7-1 1 a (to East). 12 b (from and moved)-i8. 16, ib-2.4-14. 18, i-19, 28.30-38. 21, 1 a. 2 a. 33. 22, 15-18. 20-24. chap. 24. 25, 1-6. 11b. 18. 21-26 a. 27- 34. 26, i-i4.(i5R).i6-i7,(i8R). 19-33. 27, 1-45- 28, 10. 13-16. 19. 29,2-14.31-35. 30, 3b-5. 7. 9-16. 2ob(now- sons). 24-31, 1. 3. 46. 48-50. 32, 3-i3a. 22. 24-32. 33, 1-17. 34, 2 b-3. 5. 7. 11-12. 19. 25 (partly). 26. 30-31. 35, 14. 21-22 a. 37, 12-21. 25-27. 28 b (to silver). 31-35. chap. 38. chap. 39. 42, 38-44, 341. 46, 28-47, 4. 6 b (LXX). 13-26. 27 a (to Goshen). 29-31. 49, ib-28 a (incorporated from an older document). 50, 1-11. 14. The Home of J. The writer of J is commonly supposed to have been a native of the southern kingdom. This is the opinion of Ewald, Di., Well., Stade, Budde, Meyer, Kittel, and Cornill. The evidence they bring forward in favour of this view is as follows : Abraham and possibly Jacob are repre sented as living at Hebron, and not at Beersheba. In the history of Joseph, Judah appears as leader of the brethren, not Reuben. Aaron, the north Israelite, is not mentioned in J, and Joshua is not the prominent figure he is in E. It is also difficult to assume that Gen. 38, which contains traditions relating to the family history of Judah, could be of any particular interest to any one who was not a member of that tribe. Schrader, Reuss, and Kuenen hold that J as well as E belonged to the northern kingdom. The evidence in the case of J is not so convincing as in that of E. That the author of J was a native of the southern kingdom, 1 With traces of E; cf. Holz., Hex., Table I. p. 5. C 2 XXXVI INTRODUCTION. is the opinion of a majority of scholars, and therefore may be provisionally accepted *- The Document E. This document is called by Dillmann (Gen.6, p. xi) the Traditional History of Israel. ' It is probably based on older written sources, cf. p. xiv, but in the main it derives its information from oral tradition, and preserves unchanged both the colouring and tone of tradition as current among the people 'l. ' The standpoint of E is the prophetical, though it is not brought so prominently forward as in J, and in general the narrative is more " objective," less consciously tinged by ethical and theological reflexion than that of J V E, as com pared with J and P, is fond of stating details and particulars. He has the best information on Egyptian matters. Proper names, such as Eliezer, Deborah, Potiphar,Phicol,Zaphenath- Paaneach, Asenath, Pithom, Raamses, etc., are only known to us from E. It has numerous chronological notices, e.g. the number of years Joseph and Joshua lived (Gen. 50, 22. 26. and Josh. 24, 29), and the time fhat Jacob sojourned with Laban, cf. also 40, 12-19. 42, r7- Ex. 3, 18. and 45, 6 with 41, 26. E supplies much important information as to the Aramaic origin of the Teraphim cultus, and the polytheism of Laban's family (31, i9f. 35, 2ff.), and contains many peculiar notices and brief statements which bear the impress of the highest antiquity (15, 2 ? 20, 16. 31, 42. 21, 27 ff. Abraham's covenant with Abimelech). Angels are frequently mentioned by E : as guides and guardians of Israel (Ex. 14, 9. 33, 2), and as the channel of divine revelation between God and man, especially the patriarchs (21, 17. 22, 11. 28, 12). In 1 Cf. Holz., p. 160 f.; Kuenen, Hex., p. 230 f. ; Driver, Introd., p. 115 f.; Cornill, p. 51. » Cf. the narratives 22, 1-14. chap. 31. 32, 24-32. Ex. chaps. 1-3, etc. 3 Driver, Introd., p. 111 ; cf. Di., N. D.J., p. 619. INTRODUCTION. XXXVli many of his narratives reference is made to the antiquities or localities in the Holy Land, and the local traditions attaching to them are recounted, so the altars on Moriah, 22, 9; at Bethel, 3 5 , 1 . 3 . 7 ; at Shechem, 3 3, 1 9 ; the pillars at Bethel, 28, 18 f. and at Rachel's grave near Bethel, 35, 20; the pillar set up by Jacob and Laban in Gilead, 31, 45; and the Terebinth at Shechem, 35, 4; Jacob also sacrifices at Beersheba. E also mentions the burial-places of Deborah and Rachel, 35, 8. 19 f.; and Joshua and Eleazar, Josh. 24, 30. 33. E (like J) explains the origin of the names of places in Palestine, e.g. Beersheba, 21, 31; Mahanaim, 32, 2; Jabboq, 32, 23; and Allon-Bachuth, 35, 8. Other points characteristic of E are : Abraham dwells chiefly in the Negeb (Gerar, Beersheba), chap. 20 f., not Hebron ; Jacob is chiefly associated with Bethel, 28, 11 f., and Shechem, 33, 19 f.; Joseph is honoured above his brethren by a special blessing, 48, 8 ff., and in the history of Joseph Reuben is the leader of the brethren and intercedes for Joseph. E is fond of de scribing how God reveals Himself to man. He appears in a dream to Abimelech, Laban, Pharaoh, 20, 6. 31, 24. chap. 40 f.; to Abram 21, 12. 22, 1; and to Jacob and Joseph 28, 11 f. 37, 6 f. Abraham bears the title of ' Prophet,' 20, 7, with the power of effectual intercession, and Moses is expressly represented as a prophet (though he does not receive the title, as in Hos. 12, 14), 'entrusted by God with a prophet's mission (Ex. 3), and holding exceptionally intimate communion with Him (Ex. 33,11. Num. 12, 6-8, cf. Deut. 34,1a)1.' In the narrative of Joseph, which has been preserved by E in the most complete form, the whole tenor of the account is prophetic. It is clear from 50, 20 that the writer's object is to show how the divine plan of salvation, already communicated to Abraham and his descendants, would be gradually realized through human means, even though it be accomplished without the knowledge, 1 Driver, Introd., p. 112. XXXV111 INTRODUCTION. contrary to the wishes, and in spite of the errors of the human agents who actually carry into effect the divine purposes '. The Language of B. Proper Names in B. God is EPFbti, ''JIN also occurs (Gen. 20, 4), and bit (Gen. 33. 20- 35. 7- 46> 3)- In E the name mrt* is first revealed through Moses, but E continues to use OM^N, or QV^Nn freely, side by side with nin*. Crt^N is also used as an appellative noun in the formulae : *3N *i-6n, 1*ax"N, VON "N (Gen. 31, 5. 29. 42. 46, 1. 3. Ex. 18, 4). E uses *10N as the name of the original inhabitants of Palestine (Gen. 48, 22. Num. 13, 29. 21, 21. 31, etc.). The Mount of Law-giving in E is 3in (Ex. 3, 1. 17, 6. 33, 6), it is also called nin* in in Num. 10, 33 a, and Qy6n in in Ex. 3, 1. 18, 5. 24, 13. E uses 3py, not ^Ni'B" (generally) after Gen. 32. Moses' father-in-law is iin* or in*. (Ex. 3, 1. 4, 18. chap. 18). nt^O l^Nn is only found in E (Ex. 11, 3. Num. 12, 3); cf. t^Nn nK>0 nt (Ex. 32, 1. 23). Words and Phrases characteristic of E. ni11N by, frequently in E, Gen. 21, 11. 25. Ex. 18, 8. Num. 12, 1. HON, never nfiaK> (J), Gen. 20, 17. 21, 10. 12. 13. 30, 3. 31, 33, etc.; also found in D. 1^X3 with DB>= where, Gen. 21, 17. nt3, common in E, Gen. 48, 9 a. Ex. 24, 14. Num. 22, 19. Q1D3, Gen. 27, 4 b. 33 a. 41, 50. Ex. i, 19. E never uses DIO. nyb with suffix, Gen. 41, 16. 44 (all). In 41, 16 "3 is used as in Gen. 14, 24; cf. 14, 24. I*y3, only in E, Gen. 45, 17. Num. 20, 4. 8. 11; cf. Ex. 22, 4. 1 Cf. Di., N. D. J., p. 619 ff., from whom most of the above particulars are derived. INTRODUCTION. XXXIX ?y3, in all its meanings, is only found in the Hex. in E, Gen. 20, 3. 37, 19. Ex. 24, 14. Num. 21, 28, etc.; "3 in E also = ' husband] Ex. 21,3. 22, cf. Gen. 20, 3. In J (and P) the 'husband' is t^N, Gen. 3, 6. 16. 29, 34. 30, 15. 18. 20. J once has pIN —'husband] Gen. 18, 22. "3 *313~?y, in the phrase 'to bear in the lap of another] Gen. 30, 3. bfti and )Dp = elder and younger, Gen. 29, 16. 18. 42, 13. 15. 20. 32. 34. In Gen. 41, 51 f. wn stands instead of popn. ''33 131 'to talk against any one] Num. 12, 1. 8. 21, 5. 7. 131 = dispute which is to be settled in a court of justice, Ex. 18, 16-19. 2<>- 22, 8. 24, 14; also in Deut. 17, 8. ill 111, Ex. 3, 15. 17, 16. In Deut. 32, 7 Trtl ill occurs. 0*550 Tin, Gen. 31, 35; cf. p. xxix. 1*,f, Ex. 18, 11, and Tin, Ex. 21, 14 = 10 act presumptuously. 37 p)T} = 'to harden the heart] Ex. 4, 21. 10, 20. 27; also prnnn, Gen. 48, 2. Num. 13, 20. &bn, only in E, Ex. 17, 13. 32, 18; cf. ni13J = ' victory] and nBh^n 'defeat] in Ex. 32, 18. 3in, in the phrase 'jnB'pa*, 13in3, Gen. 48, 22. Josh. 24, 12. "a *:*y3 mn, Gen. 31, 35. 45, 5. E has also b mn without sin, Gen. 31, 36, and "a *|N mn, Gen. 30; 2. Ex. 32, 19. Num. 11, 10. 33. ynnn, Gen. 45, 1. n*3in and n31J, Hif'.= '/0 call lo account] Gen. 21, 25, and 'to decide a matter by arbitration] Gen. 31, 37. 42. Nif'.=' justified] Gen. 20, 16. J has n'ain twice = 'destine] or 'intend] Gen. 24, 14. 44. 1^* is common in E, Gen. 21, 8. 14. 15. 33, 5b. 37, 30, etc. It also occurs in J, instead of the more usual word iy:, Gen. 32, 23. 33, 1. 2. 6. 44, 20. nNIO na*1 lNn-na*, and with fern, adj., Gen. 29, 17. 39, 6. 41, 18 (plural na*). J uses "o H31D, Gen. 24, 16. 26, 7. xl INTRODUCTION. 7rtN nn3 3M, only in E, Ex. 33, 8. Num. 16, 27. ,13 in E is a local particle, Gen. 22, 5. 31, 37. Ex. 2, 12. In *J ns is a temporal particle. 7373, only in E, Gen. 45, n. 47, 12. 50, 21. 337, in E, Gen. 20, 5. 6. 31, 26. Ex. 14, 5. 37 in J. |3Ni1 mniv characteristic of E, Ex. 24, 12. 31, 18 b. J and D have D^JDN mn7 *JB>, Ex. 34, 1. Deut. 4, 13. 5, 19. P uses nnyn nin7, Ex. 31, 18 a. 32, 15 a. 34, 29. nono, as a name of the camp which the Israelites moved from place to place as they journeyed, Ex. 32, 17. 19" a. 33, 7. 11. Num. 12, 14 f.; also occurs in D and P. J uses njno, in the sense 'company] Gen. 32, 8. 9. 11. 33. 8- 5°. 9- NXO 'to meet any one, io befall] Ex. 18, 8. Num. 20, 14. Deut. 31, 17. Josh. 2, 23. ma'E'O, only in E, Gen. 29, 15. 31, 7. 41. ¦HS}, Gen. 31, 15. Ex. 2, 22. 18, 3. 21, 8; also occurs in D. 75H = ' to destroy] only occurs in E ; Pi'el = 'plunder] Ex. 3,22. 12, 36; Hif'.='/o take away] Gen. 31, 9. 16; Hithpa'. =' to strip off' (ornaments), Ex. 33, 6. Wtb NSW, only in E, Gen. 50, 17. Ex. 23, 21. Josh. 24, 19. \T)1 = ' to permit] with ace. of pers. and inf. cstr. with 7, Gen. 20, 6. Ex. 3, 19. Num. 20, 21. 21, 23 (both inf. without 7). 22, 13. 77Bnn 'to pray] with 7N 'to] and ng3 'for] Gen. 20, 7. 17. Num. 11, 2. 21, 7. niS, characteristic of E, Gen. 42, 25. 45, 21. Josh. 9, 11. 7N py*, in the phrase mn* 7N pyx, very frequent in E, Gen. 41, 55. Ex. 5, 15. 14, 15 a. 17, 4. 22, 22. Num. 11, 2. 20, 16. Josh. 24, 7. pp = 'to have a horror ' of anything, Ex. 1,12. Num. 22, 3 b. J usee IIJ, Num. 22, 3 a ; in P pp is used in a weaker sense, 'to feel disgust] Lev. 20, 23, so in E, Num. 21, 5. nip, Nif*. in E, Num. 23, 3. 4. 15. 16. INTRODUCTION. xii 0*731 instead of D*oy3, Num. 22, 28. 32. 33, and Ex. 23^ 14. 0*7310, Gen. 42, 9. 11. 14. 16. 31. 34, E. N31, used of God, Gen. 20, 17. Ex. 15, 26. Num. 12, 13. ma*, nnts>, Num. 16, 14. 20, 17. 21, 22; also ai3 in nn'E>, Ex. 22, 4. *137 0*1?, Gen. 21, 13. 18. 46, 3. J uses *137 nfe>y, Gen. 12, 2, and P *1J7 fna, Gen. 17, 20. ife> occurs frequently in E, Gen. 21, 22. 37, 36. chap. 40. 41, 9. 10. 12, etc. It is also found in the other documents. BBB-Ol pn 0*tJ», Ex. 15, 25. Josh. 24, 25. ntPD mtJ'O, of Joshua, Ex. 24, 13. 33, 11. *3N DM7N nnnn, Gen. 30, 2. 50, 19. nN7n, only in E, Ex. 18, 8. Num. 20, 14, in the phrase ' the trouble which has befallen us ' (NVO). O&bv 7*.on, frequent in E, Ex. 5, 8, without a prep. "b> "n3 is also found in E, Gen. 31, 2. 5. Ex. 5, 7. 14. "tVO 03 "no occurs once in E, Ex. 4, 10. List of rare and archaic Words and Phrases in B. P?N, in Nif. = to wrestle, only in Gen. 32, 25 f. nJON, Gen. 20, 12. Josh. 7, 20 (all). 37 333, only in Gen. 31, 20. 26. 27. I"'J'5 = to multiply, only in Gen. 48, 16. npn, in Hif. to silence, Num. 13, 30; only again in Pi'el, Neh. 8, 11. 13t to dower, and 13J dowry, only Gen. 30, 20. Oannn, Ex. 1, 10 ; once again in Eccl. 7, 16. non skin for water, Gen. 21, 14. 15. 19 (all). nno in ne>p. \1.nBD, only Gen. 21, 16. J? post or position, Gen. 40, 13. 41, 13 ; also Dan. 11, 7 (LXX). 20. 21. 38 (all). |3, as &d]. = honest, Gen. 42, 11. 19. 31-34- 130 price, Num. 20, 19; again in Neh. 13, 16. Prov. 31, 10. 0*310 = times, only Gen. 31, 7. 41. xlii INTRODUCTION. 1331 J*3, Gen. 21, 23 ; only again, Is. 14, 22. Job 18, 19. D*7VI33 struggles, once, Gen. 30, 8. P*i?3, Gen. 20, sf.; only again, Hos. 8, 5. Amos 4, 6. Pss. 26, 6. 73, 13. njn Di>n-15? *1iyo, only Gen. 48, 15. Num. 22, 30. IpJ? to bind, Gen. 22, 9 ; and npJ? striped, Gen. 30, 35. 39. 40. 31, 8. 10. 12 (all). 7 ?a = to believe, only Gen. 48, 11. ina to interpret dreams, Gen. 40, 8 f. 41, 8 f.; and Jiina interpretation, Gen. 40, 5f. 41, 11 (all). 7 10X3 to attach oneself (to Baal Peor), Num. 25, 3. 5 = Ps. 106, 28; cf. 2 Sam. 20, 8 (Pu'al), and Ps. 50, 19 (Hif. with obj. noiO), (all). OWX dry, unfruitful, only Gen. 41, 23. no^P a money weight, Gen. 33, 19. Josh. 24, 32. Job 42, 11 (all).' ' nfp rt3l (Mass. Text n#p nai), Gen. 21, 20. Dillmann, Gen.", mentions, as characteristic of E : — ni1iN"7y, see above, p. xxxviii. J^DN 'harm or misfortune] Gen. 42, 4 b. 38. 44, 29. Ex. 21, 22 f. PC1?! "1D?, as a name of God, Gen. 31, 42. 53. The Grammar of B. Special Forms characteristic of B. Peculiar forms of the Infinitives. E writes, but not exclu sively : — 1]i7n instead of fD^, Ex. 3, 19. Num. 22, 13. 14. 16. ny^ instead of ny'l, Ex. 2, 4. ni"] instead of nil, Gen. 46, 3. rim., Gen. 50, 20; also i'tPy., Gen. 31, 28. nNl, Gen. 48, ii. Vlt}>5?, Ex. 18, 18. INTRODUCTION. xliii In Num. 20, 21, pH3 stands for m, but J also has this in Gen. 38, 9. Unusual full forms of the Suffixes are attached to Nouns, so: — '"W]i?. Gen. 41, 21. nrf?> 42, 36- n??a£, 21, 29; also njFiN, 31, 6. E (contrast J) is fond of using the verbal suffixes with the ace sign nN, instead of attaching them to the verb. In Josh. chap. 24, E uses two verbal suffixes, and the suffix with nN fourteen times; cf. also Gen. 40, 3 f. 6. 8. n. 15. 17. 19. 48, 10-12. 15-17. 21. Construction of Verbs : — pan and Pgb take the obj. with 7, Gen. 29, 13. 31, 28. 32. 1- 45, 15- 48, 10. V33 with 3, Gen. 28, 11. 32, 2 ; and with nN or ace, Ex. 5, 3. 20. 23, 4. ypB> with ?ipa occurs, Gen. 21, 12. 27, 13. 30, 6. Ex. 18, 19, and several times in D. ION with ? or "?N ' to say in reference to any one] Gen. 20, 2. 13. The construction of 0*1175?=: • God' with a plural verb is found in E, Gen. 20, 13. 35, 7; cf. Josh. 24, 19. The use of the Ethic dat. (not connected with the Imper.) may also be noted, Gen. 21, 6. Ex. 18, 27 (all). In E, the connection between the different portions of the sentence, or the different events in a narrative, is looser and more superficial than in J. The formulae N*nn njn *n*l, Gen. 21, 22, and especially T\Wn 0*l3in (*inN) inN *n*l, Gen. 22, 1. 40, 1. 48, 1. Josh. 24, 29 are obviously used to bridge the gap between two narratives. Characteristic of E is the unnecessary prolixity employed in addressing persons to whom an important communication xliv INTRODUCTION. has to be made : ' He called M. or N. (and the name of the person is frequently repeated by E), and he answered, Here am I, or I hear] e.g. Gen. 22, n. 46, 2. Ex. 3, 4; similarly, Gen. 22, 1. 7. 27, 1 b. 18. 31, 11. He commences his narrative of the dreams in Gen. 40, 9. 16. 41, 17. 22, with the superfluous formula nan*. *p?na. These two artifices may have been borrowed from the colloquial language, which was actually used by the people \ \ The Code E in Genesis. E is first found in the history of Abraham, chap. 15 or 20. Chap. 15 (analysis uncertain2), vers. 6-1 1 and 17-18 are possibly J. 20, 1-17 (18 R). 21, 6-32 a (g2 b R). (34 R). 22, 1-14. 19. 28, 11-12. 17-18. 20-22. 29, 1. 15-23. 25-28. 30. 30, 1-3 (to knees). 6. 8. 17-20 a. 20C-23. 31, 2. 4-i8a. 19-45. 47- 51-32, 2. i3b-2i. 23. 33, i8b-20. 35, 1-8. 16-20. 37, 2b-n. 22-24. 28a (to pit). 28 c-30. 36. chap. 40 (with traces of J)s. 41, 1-45 (with traces of J)3. 47-57. 42, 1-37. 45, i-46, 5 (with traces of J)3. 12. 48, 1-2. 8-22 (in the main)3. 50, 15-26. The Home of E. The generally accepted opinion of critics is, that the author of E was a native of the northern kingdom, an Ephraimite. The reason for this opinion is based on the following facts. The narrative bears a distinct Ephraimitic tinge. Joseph is the king among his brethren, and his father's favourite. Reuben, next to Joseph, is leader of his brethren, and not Judah. The sanctuaries of Bethel, Shechem, and Beersheba, 1 For a full discussion of E, cf. Holz., 1. c, p. 181 ff. See also Driver, Introd., p. 111 f. 2 Cf. Holz., I.e., Table I. p. 2, for the views of the different critics, Driver, Introd., p. 14. 8 Cf. Holz., l.c, Table I. pp. 4, 5 ; Driver, Introd., p. iS f. INTRODUCTION. xiv as a place whither pilgrims journeyed, are especially promi nent in E. Abraham also lives at Gerar and Beersheba, Jacob at Beersheba and Shechem. Ephraim is to receive the promises and privileges of Joseph. Joshua, the Ephrai mite, is the servant and companion of Moses. The graves of Deborah, Rachel, Joseph, Joshua, Eliezer are mentioned by him as being in Ephraimite territory; Gen. 35, 8. i9f. Josh. 24, 30. 32. 33 \ Did J and E employ earlier sources in writing their narratives ? It is not impossible that J and E in composing their narratives made use of other sources. In E we find two of these quoted : the Book of the Wars offehovah, nOrpp 13D "**, Num. 21, 14: and the Book of fashar, IB'jn isp, Josh. 10, i2f. 2 Sam. 1, 18 (David's lament over Saul's death), and an extract is quoted from each. The first of these two books was apparently a collection of songs, celebrating the victories of Israel over their enemies. The second was probably of a similar character : a collection of songs in praise of the noble deeds of the heroes of Israel 2. At what date the collection was formed is quite uncertain s. We also 1 Cf. Driver, Introd., p. 115; Holz., 1. c, p. 2 1 2 f. ; Corn., I.e., p. 47 f.; Kuenen, Hex., p. 228 f. 2 What the name T43' means is uncertain. It has been variously rendered Book of the Upright, Book of the Worshippers of Yahweh and their deeds. Kuenen offers two interpretations, The book of that which is right (in Yahweh's sight), or of him who is right (in Yahweh's sight). Cf. Hex., p. 35 ; Holz., I.e., p. 228. 3 Reuss, Di., Kittel assign both books to the period of David or Solomon. Wellhausen thinks the "n^n TDD contained an account of the Exodus, the Wandering in the Wilderness, and the Conquest of Canaan. Kuenen, Meyer, and Stade consider that both works were completed at a much later date ; cf. Holz., 1. c. Driver, Introd., p. 114, calls attention to the fact that the Book of Jashar 'at least was not completed before the time of David' (cf. 1 Sam. 1, 18), 'though the nucleus of the collection may obviously have been formed earlier.' xlvi INTRODUCTION. have no information as to the contents or authors of the books. Other quotations in E are the poems or fragments : Ex. 15 (The Song of Moses), Num. 21, 17-18 (The Song of the Welt), and vers. 27-30 (The Song of triumph over the defeat of Sihon). Possibly, these were contained in one of the two sources, and not improbably Judg. chap. 5 (The Song of Deborah). Other poetical passages are : (J) Gen. chap. 49 ]; Balaam's 'Parables' in Num. 23, 7-10. 18-24. 24. 3_9- 15-24; The Song of Moses, Deut. 32, and The Blessing of Moses, Deut. 33. From what sources these extracts were derived it is impossible to ascertain 2 It is also pointed out by Driver3 that the command in Ex. 17, 14 'to write "in a book " the threat to extirpate Amalek, makes it probable that some written statement existed of the combat of Israel with Amalek, and of the oath sworn then by Jehovah to exterminate His people's foes.' The Ten Commandments in Ex. 20 must have existed in a written form before E incorporated them into his work, and the ordinances and pre cepts upon which the 'Greater Book of the Covenant] Ex. 20, 22-chap. 23 E, and the 'Little Book of the Covenant] Ex. 34, 11-26 J, are based4, doubtless existed in a written shape before they were worked up into the narratives of E and J respectively. 'The existence of written laws c. 750 b.c is implied by Hos. 8, 12V Lastly, one other extract may be mentioned, Gen. chap. 14, a fragment usually assigned to R, of uncertain date, and of doubtful origin 6. 1 For the analysis of Gen. chap. 49, cf. Holz., I.e., Table I. p. 5. 3 Cf., for a full discussion, Holz., I.e., p. 230 f., and Cornill, I.e., p. 88 f. ' 3 Introd., p. 115. . Cf. HolZj p H2_ 5 Driver, Introd., p. 1 15. 6 Cf. Cornill, l.c, p. 72 ; Kuenen, Hex., pp. 143, 3H . Well Comp pp. 26, 310. r INTRODUCTION. xlvii The Document P. P chiefly contains legislation, setting before us the various precepts and ordinances that were to be observed by Israel, and explaining their origin. The history contained in it is merely the framework in which to arrange the legislative matter. The thread of the narrative is very thin, and often only serves to carry on the chronology. Important events, however, are treated more in detail (e.g. the story of the creation, the deluge, the covenants with Noah and Abraham, the migration of the patriarchs into Egypt), especially such events as are narrated to explain the origin of various laws (e. g. 17, 23. 48, 3-8), in which case the narrative is generally full and detailed. Other events of less importance are only briefly described, partly in the form of genealogies (e. g. chap. 5. 11, 10 ff. 35, 22 ff), and partly in the form of short summaries (e.g. chap. 10. 25, 12 ff. chap. 36). A strongly- marked characteristic of P is the careful and uniform attention he pays to chronology. In the whole period covered by his narrative the dates of the various events are stated in their proper chronological order (cf. the geneological tables, chaps. 5, n, and 35), and even the month and day, in the case of important events, are duly stated (Gen. chaps. 7 f. and the History of Moses). ' The history advances along a well-defined line, marked by a gradually-diminishing length of human life, by the revelation of God under three distinct names, Elohim, El Shaddai, and fehovah, by the blessing of Adam and its characteristic conditions, and by the subsequent covenants with Noah, Abraham, and Israel, each with its special " sign," the rainbow, the rite of circumcision, and the Sabbath (Gen. 9, 12 f. 17, 11. Ex. 31, 13) V In the legal portions of P 1 Driver, Introd., p. 119 ; cf. Di., N. D.J., p. 649. xlviii INTRODUCTION. a description is given of the development of the theocracy which is evidently intended to serve as a model. God is described as the Lord and Protector of Israel, whom they must serve and obey. A full and detailed account is given of the Tabernacle, and its services, of the Priests, and of the duties and obligations of the people towards God. The organisation of the people is minutely described, the division into Tribes, and these again divided into Families, each with the firstborn as Leader (Gen. 35, 23. 46, 8. 49, 28, etc.), and the welding together of these separate units into one organised community (my), which was the final court of appeal in all matters relating to the people (Num. 35, 24 f.). The representations of the Deity in P are not so anthropo morphic as those in J and E. Angels and visions in dreams are nowhere mentioned. ' Certainly he speaks of God as "appearing" to men, and as "going up" from them (Gen. 17, 1. 22 f. 35, 9. 13. 48, 3. Ex. 6, 3), at important moments of history, but he gives no further description of His appearance : usually the revelation of God to men takes with him the form of simple speaking to them (Gen. 1, 29. 6, 13. 7, 1. 8, 15. 9, 1. Ex. 6, 2. 13 al.); only in the supreme revelation on Sinai (Ex. 24, 16 f., cf. 34, 29 b), and when he is in the Tent of Meeting (Ex. 40, 34 f.), does he describe Him as manifesting Himself in a form of light and fire (1133 glory), and as speaking there with Moses (Num. 7, 89. Ex. 25, 22), as man to man, or in order that the people may recognise Him (Ex. 16, 10. Lev. 9, 6. 23 f. Num. 14, 10. 16, 19. 42. 20, 6). Wrath also proceeds from Him (Num. 16, 46), or destroying fire and death (Lev. 10, 2. Num. 14, 37. l6. 35- 45 f- 25. 8 f.). But anthropopathic expressions of God he avoids scrupulously ; even anthropomorphic expres sions are rare (Gen. 2, 2 f., cf. Ex. 31, 17 b), so that a purpose is here unmistakable. It may be that as a priest he was accustomed to think and speak of God more strictly and INTRODUCTION. xlix circumspectly than other writers, even those who were prophets. On the other hand, he nowhere touches on the deeper problems of theology. On such subjects as the justice of the Divine government of the world, the origin of sin and evil, the insufficiency of human righteousness (see, on the contrary, Gen. 5, 24. 6, 9), he does not pause to reflect; the free Divine choice, though not unknown to him (Num. 3, 12 f. 8, 16. 17, 5ff. 18, 6), is at least not so designedly opposed to human claims as in J. His work contains no Messianic outiook into the future: his ideal lies in the theocracy as he conceives it realized by Moses and Joshua \ In his method of representation P is stereotyped, detailed, and circumstantial. He everywhere aims at strict accuracy, especially in all legal matters, and exhibits a marked fondness for recurrent formulae. His language is formal and precise ; technical words and phrases, and certain turns of expression not found elsewhere, frequently recur. The manner in which the author handles his materials gives evidence of research and reflection, and a capacity for justly weighing and estimat ing the sources of information at his disposal (e.g. chaps. 1. 5. 10 f. 36. 46), while in describing the events of the past, and in accounts of foreign peoples, remarkable accuracy is dis played (e. g. 25, 16. 36, 15). Some of the peculiarities of the language of P may be, noted. The Language of P. Proper Names in P. P uses QM7N not nin*, excepting in 17, 1. 21, 1 b, until Ex. 6, 2. God reveals Himself to the patriarchs Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob as *1Bi 7N. He communicates the name nin* first to Moses, and through him to the people, Ex. 6, 2 ff, 1 Di., N. D.J., p. 653, as translated by Driver, Introd., p. 121. d INTRODUCTION. but in all the passages iu Pin Gen. when God appears to the patriarchs or they address Him, the name used is *1B> 7N, Gen. 17, 1. 28, 3. 35, 11. 48, 3- p speaks of God, before Ex. 6, 2 as DM7N, Gen. chap. 1, and in the story of the Flood, and uniformly throughout the book. The people of Israel are always 7Nl't^ *J3; Abraham, until 17, 5, is called D13N. P never used 7N1E>* as a name for Jacob. The months are numbered, not named, Ex. 12, 2. 18. 40, 2. 17. Lev. 23, 5. Num. 9, 1. 5. 20, 1. Josh. 4, 19. The Hittites are always called in P nn *33, Gen. 23, 3. 5. 7. 10. 16. 25, 10. 27, 46 (nn n*03). 49, 32. J, E, and D use Cnn, never nn *33, which only occurs in P. For the sing. P has inn, Gen. 15, 20. 23, 10. 25, 9. 26, 34-36, 2. He also makes the Hittites into a Canaanitish tribe, when they were really settled in the district of Lebanon. Special geographical names occur in P. pN is always prefixed to jy:3, Gen. 11, 31. 12, 5. 16, 3. 23, 2, etc.; it is only omitted in the phrase jy}3 ni33, Gen. 28, 1. 36, 2; and in the same way D*1XO pN, Ex. 16, 1. 3. 6. 19, 1. Num. 3, 13. 8, 17. The following geographical names are characteristic ofP:— y3lN n*lp for Hebron, Gen. 23, 2. 35, 27. Josh. 15, 13. 20, 7, etc. n7330, Gen. 23, 9. 17. 19. 25, 9, etc. DIN pa, Gen. 25, 20. 28, 2. 5. 6. 7. 31, 18. 33, 18. 46, 15. |S 1310, Num. 13, 21. 20, ia. 27, 14. Deut. 32, 51. Josh. 15, 1. In Num. 34, 4. Josh. 15, 3 p alone. 3N10 nmy, Num. 22, 1. 26, 3. 63. 31, 12. 35, 1, etc. The Mount of the Lawgiving is always *:*D. Moses died on Mt. 13J, Num. 32, 38. Deut. 32, 49, Aaron on Mt. nn, Num. 20, 22 f. INTRODUCTION. Words and Phrases characteristic of P. niTN and pNn "n, Ex. 12, 19. Lev. 16, 29. 17, 15. 18, 26, etc. tnN3, Gen. 34, 10. 47, 27. Num. 32, 30. Josh. 22, 9. 19. ntnN, Gen. 17, 8. 23, 4. 36, 43. 47, 11. 49, 30, etc. n73N7, Gen. 1, 29 f. 6, 21. Ex. 16, 15. Lev. 11, 39, etc. niON, as special name for an Arab tribe or family, Gen. 25, 16. Num. 25, 15 (all). *3N, 130 times in P; *33N, once, Gen. 23, 4. 1*oy_7N *|DNJ, Gen. 25, 8. 17. 35, 29. 49, 29, Num. 20, 24, etc. In Num. 20, 26. 27, 13, without 1*oy. ilE'N, a technical term of the sacrificial lang., sixty times in P. WN and IDy, pleonastic in enumerations, Gen. 6, 18. 7, 7. 13. 8, 16. 18. 9, 8. 28, 4. 3, in enumerations, Gen. 7, 21. 8, 17. 9, 10. 10, 5. Ex. 12, 19. Lev. 17, 15, etc. n*.3N n*3, Ex. 6, 14. 12, 3. Num. chaps. 1-4; also "N *E'N1 with n*3 omitted, Ex. 6, 25. Num. 31, 26. 32, 28, etc. nitr |3, Gen. 5, 32. 7, 6, etc., and lnst? J3, Lev. 12, 6. 23, 12. Num. 6, 12. 14. N13 ' to create] Gen. chap. 1 often, 2, 3. 4. 5, 2. n*l3, in the phrases n*l3 D*pn and n*l3 jn3, Gen. 6, 18. 9, 9. 17, 2. Ex. 6, 4. Num. 25, 12. 1E>3-73, Gen. 6, 12 f. 7, 15 f. 8, 17. 9, 11. 15-17- ~jM, Gen. 6, 17. 7, 21. 25, 8. 35, 29. Num. 17, 27, etc. n7373, in enumerations, Ex. 16, 16. Num. 1, 2. 18. 20. 3, 47. n31, Gen., 37, 2. Num. 13, 32. 14, 36. 731, Num. 1, 52. chap. 2. 10, 14. 18. 22. 25; also Cant. 2, 4. *1, Ex. 36> 5- 7- Lev. 5, 7. 12, 8, etc. niOTjJ^en-i*-^-^!^ (all). nnn, Gen. 6, 9. 9, 1 2 ; in formulae Dni1117 or D3'iniTn7, Gen. 17, 7. 9. 12. Ex. 12, 14. 17. 16, 32 f. 27, 21. 30, 10. d2 Hi INTRODUCTION. 131, of God remembering the covenant with the Patriarch, Gen. 8, i. 19, 29. Ex. 2, 24. 6, 5. 13T, Gen. 17, 10. 12. 23. 34, 15. 22. Ex. 12, 5. 48, and in n3pi1 131, Gen. 1, 27. 5, 2. 6, 19. 7, 3, etc. yir, in phrases like 1*inN Ijnn WIN, Gen. 9, 9. 17, 7- 35. I2- 48, 4, and mN iyit-731, 46, 6 ; VinN iyi!71, Ex. 28, 43. Num. 25, 13. pit, frequent in P, Ex. 9, 10. 29, 16. Lev. 1, 5. 11. 3, 2. 7, 2, etc. pn, in the phrases pnoi n*30, Gen. 6, 14. Ex. 25, 11, and 7 pno, Lev. 10, 4. 24, 3, etc. n*n, Gen. 7, 21. 8, 1. Lev. 5, 2, etc.= ' wild beasts] as opp. to non3 '/> I3- Josh. 22, 9. illinn, 'confess] Lev. 5, 5. 1-6, 21. 26, 40. Num. 5, 7. T?in = 17*, Gen. 5, 3-32 and often. nin* 1133 = generally in P, ' the presence of God manifest to the whole people] Ex. 16, 10. 24, 17. 29, 43. Lev. 9, 6, etc. 55*33 ' to subdue] Gen. 1, 28. Num. 32, 22. 29. Josh. 18, 1 (all). |,13 = ' to perform the duties of a priest] only in P, occurs frequently; also nin3 = ' priesthood' is only found in P, Ex. 29, 9. 40, 15. Num. 3, 10. 18, 1, etc. 73, frequently in P, with 7, a generalizing formula, Gen. g, 10 b. 23, 10 b. Ex. 14, 28. Lev. 5, 3. 11, 26. 16, 16. Num. 4, 27. DD3, D30, and nD30, Ex. 12, 4. Lev. 27, 23. Num. 31, 28. 37-41 (all). a*i133, only in P in O.T., Ex. 29, 36. 30, 10. 16. Lev. 23, 27. 28. 25, 9. Num. 5, 8. 29, 11 (all). INTRODUCTION. Iiii nia, in the phrase (7Nic>*o) n*oyo N*nn tya:n nni33, only in P, Gen. 17, 14. Ex. 12, 15. Lev. 7, 20. 21. 18, 29. Num. 9, 13, etc.; cf. voyo ni33i, Ex. 30, 33. 38, tJ*Nn ni33i ioy 3ipo Ninn, Lev. 17, 4-9, and (t?ajn = ) nnN *ni3ni noy 3lpO, Lev. 17, 10. 20, 3. 5. 6. }17 = '/0 murmur] only in P, HiP., Ex. 16, 2. Num. 14, 27, etc.; in Nif'., Ex. 15, 24. Num. 14, 2, etc. 1NO 1ND, and with 3, Gen. 7, 19. 17, 2. Ex. 1, 7. Num. 14, 7. najon, with ixym, Num. 17, 13. 15. naiO occurs elsewhere in P, Num. 14, 37. 17, 14- 25, 9- *9- D*113D, only in P, Gen. 17, 8. 28, 4. 36, 7. 47, 9. Ex. 6, 4. {TOO, only in P, Lev. 25, 34. Num. 35, 2-5. 7. 71D, in the phrase 13P73 "37 710n, Gen. 17, 10. 12. 34, 15. 22. Ex. 12, 48. 3K>10, in the phrase B3*ni3B>10-733, Ex. 12, 20. 35, 3. Lev. 3, 17. Num. 35, 29; cf. Gen. 36, 43. ntOO (rarely D3E>), Ex. 31, 2. 6. 35, 30. 34. Lev. 24, 11. Num. 1, 4. 21. 23, etc. |*D, frequent in Gen. chaps. 1. 6. 7. Lev. chap. 11. n3N7D, in the phrase "o nfety 'to work] frequently with N7= 'to keep holiday] Ex. 12, 16. 31, 5. Lev. 7, 24. Num. 4, 3. 29, 7; and in muy n3N70, Ex. 35, 24. 36, t. Lev. 23, 7f. Num. 28, 18, etc. 7JI0 'to trespass] and byo, Lev. 5, 15. 21. 26, 40. Num. 5, 6. 31, 16. Deut. 32, 51. Josh. 7, 1, etc. n7yD1, with ages (20 years and upwards), Ex. 30, 14. 38, 26. Lev. 27, 7. Num. 1, 20, etc. ,11p0, Gen. 1, 10. Ex. 7, 19. Lev. 11, 36. B7PO, Num. 35, 6. 11-15- 25~28- Josh. 20, 2. 21, 13. 32. 36. n:pO, Gen. 17, 12 f. 23, 18. Lev. 25, 16, etc.; also f)D3 WpO, Ex. 12, 44. Lev. 25, 51. KHp NlpO, Ex. 12, 16. Lev. 23, 2-4. Num. 28, 25, etc.; only in Hex. in P. ptyon = ' the Tabernacle] and "** "o and similar additions, very common in Ex., Lev., and Num. liv INTRODUCTION. mOBto, with two meanings in P, (i) Ex. 12, 6. 16, 23. Num. 17, 25, etc.='/0 keep a thing] in the place of an inf.; (2) —'what is to be observed] 'the commandment] with special reference. to the service of the Levites, and often occurring in the phrase "o lOKi, Lev. 8, 35. Num. 1, 53, chap. 3. 4, 27, and often. Dn*ninSE'07, and with other suffixes, Gen. 8, 19. 10, 5. 20. 31. Ex. 6, 17. 25, and elsewhere with extreme frequency. ^33, Ex. 12, 13. 30, 12. Num. 8, 19. 17, 11 f., etc. 7n3 without obj., very common in P, Num. 18, 20. 26, 55. 32, 19; the Hithpa'el, Lev. 25, 46. Num. 32, 18, etc.; and the Pi'el, Josh. 13, 32. 14, 1 are peculiar to P. spn, a technical term in the language of the sacrifice, Ex. 29, 24. 26. Lev. 7, 30. 8, 27. 29, etc. n3J without 7 (J E always n337), Ex. 14, 2. 26, 35. Josh. 15, 7 ; cf. n33 7N, Num. 19, 4= motion towards. 133'p, Gen. 17, 12. 27. Ex. 12, 43. Lev. 22, 25. £>S3 =' person] when the number of a family is stated, also= slaves, as opposed to other property, and in the phrases "3 .130 and N*nn "3,1 nni33. All these uses of P33 are extremely common in P. n3p3, alone, Lev. 4, 28. 32. 5, 6. Num. 31, 15. "31 131, see 131 above. D*N*tM=7Nlfe>* *3pr, in E, Gen. 17, 20. 25, 16. 34, 2. Ex. 16, 22. 34, 31. Num. 1, 16, etc. Synonyms are myn *N*ip and lyio *Nip, Num. 1, 16. 16, 2. 3*'BM, in the phrase "a 1* J*fe>n 'to stretch out one's hand towards something] so ' lo pay for anything] or ' be able to procure anything;' without obj., Lev. 14, 21. 25,26. 27, 8, etc.; with 7, Lev. 5, 11; with ace, 14, 22. 30-32, once again Ez. 46, 7. *137 pl3, Gen. 17, 20; cf. 48, 4. D*OD, in O.T., only in P, Ex. 25, 6. 30, 7. 31, n. 35, 8. 39. 38, etc., and in Chronicles. INTRODUCTION. Iv T "JOD, technical term of language of sacrifice, Ex. 29, 10. 15. 19. Lev. 1, 4, chaps. 3. 4. 8. nny, myn-73, 7Nib>* niy-73, cf. mn* my, Num. 27, 17, about 100 times in the Hex. nnyn = '/fo tables of the law] P, Ex. 25, 16. 21. 27, 21. 30, 6, etc.; so miyn piN, niiyn 7nN, "yn pate, all peculiar to P. epy, Ex. 16, 18. 23. 26, 12. Lev. 25, 27. Num. 3, 46-49. D7iy combined with n*l3, Gen. 9, 16. 17, 7. Ex. 31, 16. Lev. 24, 8, etc.; with n70 n*l3, Num. 18, 19 ; with pn, Ex. 29, 28. 30, 21. Lev. 6, 11. 7, 34, etc.; npn, Ex. 12, 14.17. 27,21. Lev. 3, 17. 7, 36, etc. ; ntnN, Gen. 17, 8. Lev. 25, 24; n3n3, Ex. 40, 15. Num. 25, 13; and with H7N3, Lev. 25, 32. I33n *iy, Gen. 13, 12. 19, 29. pnxn*. D*iyn, Josh. 13, 28. 15, 32. 18, 24. 19, 6. by = ' in addition to] ' together with] frequent in sacrificial rules, Lev. 2, 16. 3, 4. 4, 9, etc. "3 *Oy =' kinsfolk] see on 5]DN and ni3, Gen. 17, 14. 25, 8. 17. 35, 29. Ex. 30, 33. Lev. 7, 20. 21, etc. noy?, Ex. 25, 27. 28, 27. 38, 18. Lev. 3, 9. B>33 nay, Lev. 16, 29. 31. 23, 27. 32. Num. 29, 7. 30, 14. DXy = the phrase ntn Q1M DVy, Gen. 7, 13. 17, 23. 26. Ex. 12, 17. Lev. 23, 14. 21. 28. D*3iyn J*3, Ex. 12, 6. 16, 12. 29, 39. 41. 30, 8. Lev. 23, 5. Num. 9, 3. 5. 11. 28, 4. 8 (all). •jiy = (1) ' preparation] ' setting in order] Ex. 40, 4. 23; = (2) ' estimation] '' value] Lev. 5, 15. 18. 25. 27, 2. 3-8, etc. Num. 18, 16. J1l{5»y, Ex. 29, 40. Lev. 14, 10. 21. 23, 13. 17. Num. 15, 4, etc. »B7, frequent, Ex. 12, 4. 16, 16. Lev. 25, 16. 51, etc. *33, only in P, Ex. 16, 21. Lev. 25, 52. Num. 6, 21. 35, 8; both = ' according to] *3"7y in P = ' according to com mand of] Ex. 17, 1. Lev. 24, 12. Num. chaps. 3. 4. 9, etc. Ivi INTRODUCTION. Dm 103 occurs in the Decalogue in Ex. 34, 19. P has the longer formula Dm 103 133 733, Ex. 13, 2. Num. 3, 12. N73, in the phrases 113 N73, Lev. 22, 21. Num. 15, 3. 8, and "3 N*7an, Lev. 27, 2. Num. 6, 2. n3H ma, Gen. 12, 2. 28. 8, 17. 9, 1. 7. 17, 20, etc. •pa, Ex. 1, 13 f. Lev. 25, 43. 46, 53, once in Ez. 34, 4 (all). niN3X, of Israelites, not in a military sense, Ex. 6, 26. j, 4. 12, 17. Num. 1, 3.52. chaps. 33, 1. 2. and 10. 33, 1. yilX, for the usual yiXO, Lev. 13, 44 f. 14, 3. 22, 4. Num. 5, 2. D,2'1pn Vhp, technical term, = the most holy place in the Tabernacle, Ex. 26, 33 f. Num. 4, 4. 19; = the incense altar, Ex. 30, 10; = the altar of burnt offering, Ex. 29, 37. 40, 10; = the utensils of the Tabernacle in general, Ex. 30, 29; = the Tabernacle as a whole, Num. 18, 10; = the definite portions of the sacrifices, Lev. 21, 22. Occurs 25 times. |*3p, Gen. 31, 18. 34, 23. 36, 6. Lev. 22, 11. Josh. 14, 4. 131, Gen. 12, 5. 13, 6. 31, 8. 36, 7, etc. B>31 den. verb, Gen. 31, 18. 36, 6. '^01 and 5>01, frequent in P, Gen. chaps. 1. 6. 7. 8. 9, etc. !W3K», Ex. 16, 23. 31, 15. 35) 2. Lev. 16, 31, etc. T]ilV, Lev. 4, 2. 22. 27. 5, 15. 18. Num. 15', 24-29, etc. lycy, in the phrases l*yn lytJ* *N3"73 and "yn "v *NS*"73, Gen. 23, 10. 18. 34, 24 (all). nnae>, Gen. 16, 1. 29. 24, 29. Lev. 19, 20. n*0BK>, Ex. 6, 6. 7, 4. 12, 12. Num. 33, 4. Ylf, Gen. 1, 20. 21. 7, 21. 8, 17. 9, 7. Ex. 1, 7, etc. f\f, Gen. 1, 20. 7, 21. Lev. 5, 2, and chap. n. INTRODUCTION. lvii ni"l7in, 27 times in P, and nowhere else in Hex. It occurs 9 times in formula "in n7N, Gen. 2, 4 a. 5, 1, etc. In Num. chap. 1 it is found 1 2 times. im 'to spy] Num. chaps. 13 and 14. In JE and D nn 'to select or seek out] Num. 10, 33. Deut. 1, 33. 3E>in, Gen. 23, 4. Ex. 12, 45. Lev. 22, 10. 25, 6. 23. 35. 40. 45. 47. Num. 35, 15. nonn, Ex. 25, 2. 29, 28. 30, 13, etc. About 40 times in Hex. Instances of recurring Formulae. When Divine commands are communicated to Moses or Joshua, it is narrated that ' God spake to Moses' (or to Moses and Aaron,or tofoshua): 7N1E>* *33 TN 131, or V33"7N1 pnN"7N 131, or n*lSO 170 nyi3"7N 131, and the like. Examples of the first formula occur in Ex. 14, 2. 15. 31, 13. Lev. 1, 2. 4, 2. 18, 2. Num. 5, 6. 12, etc., and the same formula with different persons, Ex. 6, 11. 29. 11, 2. Lev. 6, 18. 16, 2. Num. 6, 23, etc. The formula ,11,1* nil? 1K>N I3in ,11 is frequently employed by Moses when he communicates to the people the Divine commands, see Ex. 16, 16. 32. 35, 4. Lev. 8, 5. 9, 6. 17, 2. Num. 30, 2. 36,6. P, in introducing the various Laws, uses two types of conditional sentence. When he states the law generally, without going into details, or without any reference to special cases, he uses a conditional sentence introduced by *3. This sentence is a compound nominal sentence, which always begins with *3 (,1E>N) E>*N, or *3 K>a3, cf. Lev. 2, 1. 4, 2. 5, 1. 4. 15. 17. 21. Num. 5, 12. 9, 10. 27, 8. 30, 4, also ItPN $33, Lev. 5, 1 and 1B*N S?*N, Num. 5, 30. When he introduces any special cases of any law, or when he wishes to insert modifications of the law described, or to supplement it, he makes use of a conditional sentence which is a verbal lviii INTRODUCTION. sentence of the type, conjunction, verb, subject or sometimes conjunction, subject, verb. The conjunctions used are nN and HN1, cf. Lev. 4, 3. 13. 27. 5, 7. 11. 17. Num. 27, 9. 10. 11. 30, 6. 7. 9, etc. ; 1PN, Lev. 4, 22 : *3 and *31, Lev. 2, 4. 13. 42. 14, 34- *5> x3- 25- P, when stating that a Divine command has been performed by the person or perspns concerned, frequently uses such formulae as p ,11,1* (nnN) *J1N ,11V (ltJ>N3) 1E>N"733 (l'tS»y*l) fe>y*1 (l'B»y) n^y, Gen. 6, 22. Ex. 7, 6. 12, 28. 50. 25, 9. Lev. 4, 20. Num. 1, 54. 2, 34. 5, 4. 6, 21. 8, 20, etc. The constantly recurring superscriptions and subscriptions beginning with ,17N, nt, nNf are also characteristic of P : — mi7in n7N, Gen. 2,4 a. 6, 9, etc. "a *317N ,17N, Gen. 36, 19. 43. "3 *33 (n,l) ,17N, Gen. 10, 20. 31. 25, 16. 36, 19. 20. n*370,1 ,17N, Gen. 36, 31. "131 *yDO ,17N, Num. 33, 1. "3 (*33) nnat^O ,17N, Gen. 10, 32. Ex. 6, 19. ni7ran ,i7N, Josh. 19, 51. DHpan n7N, Num. 1, 44. "a nnatfo *ipa n?N, Num. 4, 37. 41. 45. "a ni3N (n*3) *u>ni n7N, Ex. 6, 14. 25 b. "a mot? n?N, Gen. 25, 13. 16. 46, 8. Ex. 1, 1. 6, 16. Num. 1, 5, etc. "a **n *3E' n7N, Gen. 25, 17; also 1B»N ,17N, Josh. 13, 32. 14, 1. To these may be added : — 7133 nt, Josh. 15, 12. "3 pip nt, Num. 7, 17. 23, etc. "a n?n3 nxt, Josh. 13, 23. 28. 15,20. 16,8. 18, 20. 28, etc. "131 *33 nnsK*o ni3y nNf, Num. 4, 28. 33. INTRODUCTION. Hx The Grammar of P. The Grammar is characterized by its simplicity and i consistent adherence to rules. P, like D, occasionally uses fem. nouns for infinitives, cf. nino, Lev. 13, 7 ; ,13lp, Lev. 16, 1; niDPO, Ex. 12, 6. 16, 23. 32. Num. 17, 25. 18, 8. Syntax. P generally uses nND instead of nNO. Even when nNO would be expected by rule, cf. Gen. 5, 3. 6. 18. 25. 28. 7, 24. 8, 3, and often. In compound numbers P rarely puts the smaller number after the larger, Gen. 17, 1. 24, as a rule the smaller number precedes, Gen. 5, 15. 17. 21. Sometimes the substantive is without the article, while its qualifying adj. has it, son'B>Ol,1 n*n, Gen. 1, 28; 'wn ni*, 1, 31; *y*atyn m*, 2, 3. P prefers the use of nN with the suffixes to verbal suffixes. In Gen. chap. 1 — Lev. chap. 6, nN with suffix occurs 136 times, and the verbal suffix 73 times. In verbal constructions P exhibits no special peculiarities. In JE 'to walk before God' is "** *3S7 17iinn (J, Gen. 24, 40. 48, 15). P uses this construction in 17, 1, but elsewhere he has nWNmnN "pnnn, Gen. 5, 22. 24. 6, 9. P uses 7N and not 7 or 3 with yoe> = 'to listen to any one] Gen. 23, 16. Ex. 7, 13. 22. 8, 15. 9, 12. The Priests' Code in Genesis. 1, i-2, 4 a. 5, 1-28. '30-32. 6, 9-22. 7, 6. 7-9 (in parts). n. i3-i6a. 18-21. 24. 8, i-2a. 3b-5- 13a. 14-19- 9, 1~I1- 28-29. 10, 1-7. 20. 22-23. 3i-32- 11. 10-27. 3J-32- 12. 4D-5. 13, 6. 11 b-12 a. 16, 1 a. 3. 15-16. chap. 17. 19, 29. 21, ib. 2b-5. chap. 23. 25, 7-1 1 a. 12-17. i9~20- z6h- 26, 34-35- 27, 46-28, 9. 29, 24. 29. 31, 18 b. 33, 18 a. 34 \ 1-2 a. 4. 6. 8-10. 13-18. 20-24. 25 (partly). 27-29. 1 So Di. and Driver. Well., Kuenen, and Cornill assign none of chap. 34 to P ; cf. Holz., Hex., Table I. p. 4. lx INTRODUCTION. 35, 9-13. 15. 22 b-29. chap. 36 (mainly) ]. 37, 1-2 a. 41, 46. 46, 6-27. 47, 5-6 a (LXX). 7-1 1. 27 b-28. 48, 3-6. 7 (if not P? R). 49, 1 a. 28 b-33. 50, 12-13 2- How was Genesis compiled out of J, E, and P? The following remarks may perhaps give a general idea of how Genesis arose out of the three documents, J, E, and P. It has been already remarked that a definite plan can be traced throughout the whole book. To put it as briefly as possible, the object of the book is to give an account of the history of Israel from the earliest times until the death of Joseph, to show how God created the world and mankind, preserved Noah from the deluge and made a covenant with him, chose Abram the descendant of Noah through Shem, and made a covenant with him, promising to him and his descendants the land of Canaan, and taking him under his especial protection, and imposing upon him the observance of several precepts. The history is carried on in the person of Isaac, to whom the promises made to Abraham are renewed ; some account is given of Ishmael, who then dis appears from the narrative, which employs itself with the fortunes of Jacob and Esau, the latter being dismissed after a short account of the relations between him and Jacob, and the course of the narrative confined to Jacob. We are next told of the birth of Jacob's sons and the sale of Joseph into Egypt, Joseph now becoming the prominent figure in the narrative. After some account of the journeys of Joseph's brethren into Egypt, and their meeting with Joseph who was regarded as dead, the history tells us of Jacob's migration 1 Cf. Holz., i.e. 2 Cf. Holz., l.c., p. 349 f. and pp. 332-475 for a fall discussion of this document ; see also Driver, Introd., p. 118 f. INTRODUCTION. lxi into Egypt, and finally relates Joseph's death, after he had removed his father's remains to Canaan and buried them in the Cave of Machpelah. In compiling this history from the materials at his disposal the Redactor chose from his sources what was most suited to the plan of his work. Sometimes he merely makes small extracts from one document (e.g. 4, 17-24. 6, 1-4. 30, 32- 42, merely small portions of fuller accounts), or notices individual points (e.g. 11, 29, Jiska mentioned; 20, 12, the relationship between Abram and Sarai, cf. 28, 22 (see 35, 7); 48, 22). At other times the portions taken from the docu ments are quoted in full, and for the most part are verbally transferred from the original (e. g. the narratives in P up to n, 26), and sometimes again, whole passages from 'one document are omitted, possibly because they were at variance with the accounts given by the others (see in P the brief accounts in 11, 27-32; the omission of the introduction to the history of Abram, previous to chap. 1 2 ; of the Divine manifestation to Isaac, see 35, 12 ; of the sojourn of Jacob in Paddan Aram ; of all the history of Joseph prior to Jacob's arrival in Egypt). Frequently extracts from J are given in an abridged form, in order that P may be reported more fully (cf. 2, 5 f. 4, 25 f., the Story of Creation, and the Table of Nations, J) and 16, 15 f. 2i,2ff 25, 7 ff. 32,4. 35,28f.P. Elsewhere, however, in the story of the Patriarchs the extracts from J are abridged in favour of E. With the exception of the history of Joseph, E contains (from chap. 20 onwards) fewer passages which are verbally reported. Usually the portions in E are expanded by notices from J, or anything worth recording in E is incorporated into the narrative of J. When combining his sources the compiler, as far as possible, or as far as he deemed necessary, appears to have taken the narrative verbally from each and inserted both in his work (cf. chap. 2 f. side by side with chap. 1,1 Ixii INTRODUCTION. chap. 27 side by side with 26, 34 f. and 28, 1-9; 48, 3-7 side by side with 48, 9-22). Elsewhere, as for example, where the event need only be quoted from one document (e. g. the birth or death of any person), he selects his account from one source, even though the same event be recorded in more than one document. In other cases the compiler found two accounts in the documents before him, agreeing in the main but differing in details, he would then weave one account into the other, omitting from each what could not be reconciled, and choosing from both what best suited the plan of his work (cf. chaps. 7 f. 10. 16. 25. 27-37. 39-50). It was not always possible, without further revision, to place side by side, or to weld together the individual extracts from two or three sources. So it was necessary to eliminate what was contradictory from one or other of the documents (e. g. 21, 17 ff. explanation of Ishmael's name, 32, 8 of Mahanaim, 33, 10 of Peniel, cf. 31, 25), or to insert here and there small additions or remarks in order to fill up gaps and remove contradictions. So 4, 25. 10, 24. 21, 14. 26, 1 a. 15. 18. 35, 9, 37, 5b. 8b. 39, 1. 20. 43, 14. 46, 1. To the desire to produce a readable whole may be attributed the accommodation necessary to preserve consistency in the use of the names Abram and Sarai, in all passages previous to chap. 1 7, of the double name Yahweh Elohim in chaps. 2-3 ; also the change of Elohim into Yahweh in 17, 1. 21, 1. Another expedient was frequently employed with the same object in view, viz. transposing entire portions of the narra tive (so 11, 1-9. 12, 10-20. 25, 5 f. nb. 25, 2 iff. 47, 12ff), or of brief notices (so 2, 4 a. 31, 45-50. 37, 26, etc.), consequently R was obliged to insert all kinds of small additions; cf. 1, 1. 9, 18. 13, 1. 3 f. 24) 62. In other passages the sources are loosely combined (e.g. 7, 7-9. 22. i5, 7 f- 31, 45 ff- chap. 36. 46, 8-27), the compiler now and then making additions of his own to bring the documents INTRODUCTION. lxiii into harmony (e.g. 21, 34. 27, 46. 35, 5. 46, 12-20). Ex planatory glosses are also found (e.g. 20, 18. 31, 47. 35, 6. and chap. 1 4 (where they are numerous), some of which may be due to a later corrector. All kinds of little additions occur, which are probably not derived from the sources themselves, but were inserted, either when the sources were welded together into one work, or some time after this. These insertions were added partly to explain the object of the narrative (15, 12-16. 22, 15-18. 26, 3 b-5); partly to make it harmonize with statements occurring elsewhere (25, 18 b. 35, 22 a, perhaps 4, 15 a), and partly to introduce new notices, or new phases of tradition which were not mentioned in the three chief documents (10, 9. 32, 33; perhaps 2, 10- 14, and in 10, 14; 11, 28 b. 31b. 15,7. 22, 2, etc.). Some times possibly use was also made of materials taken from other sources than J, E, and P (e.g. perhaps in chap. 14) \ 1 Cf. Di.G, p. xvi. For full details of the various works bearing on the criticism of the Pentateuch, see Driver, Introd., p. 1 f., and cf. Di., Gen.6, p. xx. NOTES ON GENESIS. 1. I. JTtTN"^ . ' In the beginning] as h> <3px», in John i, i ; not iv ttj apxfj. n*K>Nia is without the article, like ninNS, Prov. 29, 11 ; Ta, Is. 28, 2; *npa, Lev. 26, 27. The Vss. and most commentators render, 'In the beginning God created] etc. : the same rendering is perhaps indicated by the accents, n*syN12 being marked off by Tifcha from what follows \ If this rendering be adopted, n*B'Nl3 must not be taken relatively, i.e. 'first of all] in opposition to a second or third, which might follow; for this is against the sense, as heaven and earth include all; and we should rather expect nji^Nia; but it must be taken absolutely, ' at first' (' uran- fanglich'): hence the choice of the expression n'ttfNia, which does not occur elsewhere. J"Ptt?N"*. = the beginning of a series, always relative to a genitive either expressed or (as here, Deut. 33, 21. Is. 46, 10) understood. As n*B*Ni everywhere else (except in these two passages) is followed by a genitive, Ewald, Bunsen, and others follow Rashi and Ibn Ezra, and render, ' At first, when 1 In 3, i" and 5*. Deut. 28, 47" (iSsi ana). 61" (rninrr iDDi). Ex. 9, 241" (fiti firvn lsn), we find Tifcha, the word so accented being closely connected in sense with the next following word. From these and similar passages it seems that the argument from the accents ought not to be pressed in this verse. B GENESIS, God created, etc. . . . (ver. 3) then God said, Let there be light! A similar construction to Ex. 6, 28 nin* 131 01*3, where DI* in the construct state is followed by a sentence as its genitive; so in Gen. 39, 20a. Num. 3, 1. Deut. 4, 15. Hos. 1, 2. Ps. 90, 15, etc.; see Ewald, § 332 d; Dav., S., § 25. ION**., in ver. 3, would then be the imperfect with waw conv. in answer to n*t?Ni3; cf. 19, 15 (103 precedes). 27, 34 W?\ • • • WV 2»F3; Is. 6, 1 nNlNJ . . . *]^on nio n3?>3 ; and see Ewald, § 344 b ; Driver, §127/3. (Boettcher (Neue Aehr. 1. 2-9) and others prefer to read N13 as in 5, 1, which would be the more common construction ; but this is not necessary.) According to this interpretation verse 2 becomes a parenthesis, which is unnatural, as a long and heavy sentence at the beginning of the book would hardly be expected ; cf. also Ryssel, De Elohistae Pentateuchi sermone (Lipsiae, 1878), p. 76. On the reading of the LXX, cf. Geiger, Urschrift, etc., pp. 344, 439, 444, who, fol lowing the tradition that this was one of the thirteen places that were altered for Ptolemy, considers that Rashi's construction was the traditional one, that of the LXX being an innovation. 803 ' created] the common word in P in this connection, is restricted to the divine workmanship, and always implies the production of something new (in matter or form, as ver. 21), being used literally and metaphorically (e.g. Ps. 51,12). It is never followed by an accusative of the material used, and thus implies the unconditioned operation (absolute causality) of the agent. Its original meaning is generally given as 'to cut' (cf. the Pi'el in Josh. 17, 15. 18, and Ges. in Thes. ; and C. P. Ges. sub voce), then ' to shape] 'form] and so 'create] but it does not in itself express the idea of creation out of nothing ; cf. the Arabic jli. , prop, 'to smooth] 'polish] then ' to create] the word used by Saadiah here. In the Pi'el it is used of man, 'to cut with effort:' contrast the intensive CHAP. I, VER. 2. stem with Qal, the simple stem, used of the free-creating of God without any effort; cf. Ew., § 126 a. The Samaritan renders N13 by which Del. explains as equivalent to idepeXiuae ; see Heidenheim, Bib. Sam., Heft i. p. 70, who mentions other explanations that have been suggested. DV&N, plural of ni7N. The derivation of ni7N is dis puted; see Appendix. D*,17N pluralis excellenliae, with a singular verb; see Ges., § 124. 1 a; M. R., § 135. 2. So we find DyJ?a and E'1?'"'*?, used in a similar way, of human superiors; and in Is. 19, 4 iWp D*31N, singular and plural as here. D*n7N is only joined with a plural verb in special cases; cf. the note on 20, 13, and Ewald, § 318 a; Dav., S., § 116. R. 4. D^CUFl TIN. IS or "nN, the sign of the ace. when defined (Ges., § 1 1 7. 1 ; M. R., § 32 ; Dav., S., § 7 2). It corre sponds to the Phoenician n*N , which was probably the original form of nN (a noun substantive from niN ; cf. Schroder; Phoen. Gram., § 123); cf. the Arabic 131, Aramaic n*, Syriac '&>£ (found twelve times in the Pesh. O. T.). It is usually explained as = ' essence] or ' existence] but according to usage has so little emphasis, that it is merely inserted to mark the definite object; cf. Ges., Thes., p. 169 a, where its etymology is dis cussed, Ges.; 1. c. 1, foot-note J, and Ols., Gramm., p. 432. D^DttJ, only occurs in the plural in Hebrew. The singular form would probably be "V? , cf. *P, the assumed sing, of D?0, a trace of which perhaps survives in the pr. n. *P!inN:. 1 Chr. 4, 2, and see Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 150. 2. IfQI inn . VWl = ' wasteness] or ' bareness] Some times the word is used metaphorically, e. g. of idols, as vain, unrewarding, 1 Sam. 12, 21. Is. 44, 9. In Hebrew the root nnn is not found. b 2 GENESIS, *iri£ = ' emptiness] ' desolation.' This word is always found in immediate or parallel connection with }nh ; it only occurs twice again, viz. Jer. 4, 23. Is. 34, 11 (possibly borrowed from this passage). A root nna is not found in Hebrew. In Arabic we find ]~£ = ' vacua et inanisfuit' domus. inn=liTJ? and In3 = 1:n3, like &p from #*]£, are both segholates, from verbs n"7, properly \"b. On the segholates (so called from the helping vowel seghol, which replaces the shewa under the second consonant), see Ges., § 93 ; on inn and 1,13 in particular, § 84 a, 1 b, and 93. Rem. 6 ; Stade, § 198 a; also Dav., §§ 29 and 45. The 1 before m3 has a pretonic qamec, joining together the two nouns, which are closely connected, so 2, 9. 8, 22 i17*7} DI*; see Ges., § 104. 2. Rem. e; Dav., § 15 d; cf. especially Rem. with Ges., I. c. DTl^N T\T\. 'The Spirit of God] the life-giving and life-preserving power (Pss. 33, 6. 104, 29), not a 'wind sent by God] as apparently Onqelos, *.* fJIP, |p NfTll*, , and others (e.g. Ephrem and Saadiah), for namo does not suit this rendering, and the dividing of the waters in ver. 7, which separated the earth from the water, forbids us to think of a wind sent by God to dry up the earth. nDrTlQ. The usual fem. form with the participle, cf. Ges., § 94. 1 and 2. Observe that this fem. form is accented, like the segholates, on the penult. The word occurs again in Deut. 32, n, of an eagle brooding over its young. The original meaning of the root is 'to be loose' or 'slack] and so ' to hover with loose wing] the figure here being that of a bird hovering over its young. The root is more widely used in Syriac, the Pa'el sJfy being equivalent to the Heb. root in Deut. 1. c, which the Pesh. renders as here with .aIL» ; cf. CHAP. I, VERS. 3, 4. Bernstein, Syr. Chrest., p. 173. 4, and Lex., p. 480, the Syriac word having also the notion of fructifying and fertilizing. The Talmud, Tract. Chag., c. 2, fol. 15, refers thus to this passage, ny313 n3*N1 ,1*33 7y nsniD n31*3 ' as a dove hovering over its young without touching them;' cf. also Matt. 3, 16, and the paraphrase of Milton, Par. Lost, Bk. 7, 235 : — 'His brooding wings the Spirit of God outspread, And vital virtue infused, and vital warmth Throughout the fluid mass' 3. YP, imperf. apoc. from njil), for *n* weakened from *n! (like *"]£> from *")?, weakened from *"j3, Ges., § 24, 1 b; so Dapi thinned from Oaoi, see Ges., § 27. 3. Rem. 3 b), cf. Ges., § 75. Rem. 3 e and § 93. Rem. 6 ; Dav., § 45. On the thinning of ! into *, see Wright, Arab. Gram., i. § 90. Rem. ad fin. TPV The Grave Metheg (see Ges., § 16. 2. 2 ; Stade, § 54 c; cf. also Dav., § 10, foot-note) is not found with pathach followed by * except in *n*l and *n*l, when they stand before Maqqeph, or with the accent Pashta. 4. N"*.*V Imperf. with waw conv. On the apocopated form «T out of nNT, see Ges., § 75. Rem. 3 c ; Dav., § 45. The so-called waw conversive or consecutive is confined to the language of the ancient Hebrews and their neighbours the Moabites, whose language, as we now know, was so closely allied to their own. Besides the O. T. it occurs on the Siloam inscription, first deciphered by Prof. Sayce, and is frequent on the inscription of Mesha, commonly called the Moabite stone: it is also found in later Hebrew writings composed in imitation of Biblical Hebrew. If we remember that the tenses in Hebrew do not indicate the date, but the state of an action, i.e. whether it be complete or incomplete, the explanation of this peculiar Hebrew construction will GENESIS, not be far to seek. The imperf. denotes an action as entering on completion. When we have a series of events, each single event need not necessarily be regarded as completed and independent, but each may be regarded as related to the preceding one, one event stepping into its place after the other, the date at which each successive event comes in being determined by the *,, which connects the new event with a point previously marked in the narrative. Thus here N13, ver. i, is the starting-point in the narrative,' to which ION**, first and then *n*1 are related: and the narrative developes itself, each fresh event stepping into the place pre pared for it by its predecessor. This construction begins to fall into disuse in later Hebrew. It should be remembered that an imperf. with waw conv. never refers to the future unless its preceding perfect to which it is related is the so-called pro phetic perfect, which describes future events which are certain to take place as already accomplished, and so regarded as past, e.g. Is. 9, 5. See further, Driver,-£&<5. Tenses, c. vi, 3rd ed. ; also Ges., §§ 49, 1 1 1 ; M. R., § 16 f. ; Dav., S., § 47 f. Ewald aptly terms this construction the relatively-progressive imperfect. ll£3 ^ . . . NTH. Hebrew says, 'And He saw the light, that it was good: ' English more tersely, ' He saw thai the light was good;' so 6, 2. 12, 14. 49, 15. See Ewald, § 336 a, 2 ; and cf. Ges., § 117. 1. Rem. 6 ; Dav., S., § 146. ¦pn . . . 'pD, in ver. 6 7 . . . |*3: the former scheme (|*3 . , . |*3) is by far the most common, the latter (7 . ... J*3) only occurs twice again in the Pentateuch, viz. Lev. 20, 25. 27> 33, being rare, and generally confined to late writers; cf. however 2 Sam. 19, 36 yi7 31D j*3. 5- n717 N"lp, the tone is here thrown back to avoid the concurrence of two tone syllables; so 3, 19 QrS 73N.1, •a CHAP. I, VERS. 5-7. I 4, 17 1*y 1133, and often; sefe Ges., § 29. 3 b, and the note on 4, 17. "tHN OV. 'One day] so R. V., not as the A. V., 'the first day] inN has not, strictly speaking, a corresponding ordinal, though it is possible to use |*.S2>N1 as such.' Here InN may_ stand, as at the head of a series the ordinal is not needed; see Ewald, §2693. So 2, 11. 4,19. 2 Sam. 4, 2. 6. in^ for VTO, by Ges., § 24. 1 a; Dav., § 15 d. Rem. Cf. also Ges., § 104. 2 d. ^"H3Q Vi"1! . Render, ' and let it be (permanently) divi ding.' When any special stress is laid upon the continuance of the action, the participle with n*n is used by the best writers, but is more frequently affected by later writers (e.g. 2 Kings 17 it occurs nine times), and is exceedingly common in the Mishna. As Driver, p. 170, points out, two cases of this use of n*n are to be distinguished. Here and in Deut. 9, 7. 28, 29. Is. 30, 20, etc., the state described by the particip. and n*n stands upon an independent footing. In the instances quoted in the note on 4, 17, the state thus described is regarded as implicitly related to another event. Cf. also Ges., § 116. 5. Rem. 2 ; M. R., § 14. 2 a; Dav., S., § 100. R. 2 ; Ryssel, De Elohislae Pentateuchi sermone, p. 58. For the Mishna usage, see Lehrb. der Neuhebraisch. Sprache, § 96 b, by Strack and Siegfried. TTvh tTE 'p2. 7 with pretonic qamec; so ^fb, Ttib, Niab, etc.; cf. Ges., § 102. 2 c; Dav., § 14. 1 d. yp"*, from ypl, Qal = '/o strike] 'stamp] 'make firm;' Pi'el, 'to spread out by striking:' according to LXX, Aq., Symm., Theod. arepia^a, Vulg. ' firmamentum.' 7. toj^l. The form is (1) nfe>y*_, then (2) by apocopation f5>! like a segholate, e. g. ~]V), then (3) with a helping vowel GENESIS, (here pathach on account of the guttural y) 'W- (like n$?3), the y preserving the original pathach with the prefix *, as in the Arabic; cf. Ji2j (the regular form = the Heb. bhp]), see .Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 62 : cf. further, Ges., § 75. Rem. 3 d; Dav., § 45 ; Driver, p. 52, foot-note 1. 7D. At the end of ver. 6 the LXX read au eyeWo ovras instead of at the end of ver. 7, which suits ver. 6b better than ver. 7b; as elsewhere, e.g. vers. 9. 11. 15. 24. 30, p *n*1 immediately follows what God says. Possibly it has been misplaced in the Mass. text, and the LXX preserve it in the original position. 8». O'TOBJ. After this word the LXX have in their text Kal Xbev 6 Oe6s on koKov, which is wanting in the Mass. text, but would be expected here (as in vers. 3. 10) at the end of the second day's work. In the account of the third day's work it occurs twice, in LXX and Mass. text, ver. 10 and ver. 12. Possibly the addition in the LXX text is, as Frankel, Einfiuss, p. 60, points out, due to a reviser who wished to make 8a parallel with 3. 10. 12. The Mass. text again may have omitted the formula of divine approval here, as the complete division of the waters was not made until the third day. 9. ilNim, jussive, although the shortened form is not used; cf. 41, 34. Ruth 1, 8 Ktb. Job 3, 9. In the regular verb, with the exception of the Hif'il stem, the ordinary imperfect must serve as jussive, there being only one form for both tenses; see Ges., § 48, especially 2 and 4; Dav., § 23. On the syntax of the jussive, see Driver, c. iv; Ges., § 109; M. R., §8; Dav., 5., § 61 f. 11. NttTT = ' grass 'or 'grasslike plants] the first verdure that covered the earth young and fresh, appearing after rain, CHAP. I, VERS. 7b-II. 2 Sam. 23, 4. Job 38, 27, or after the old grass had gone, Prov. 27, 25. 2toj*. A wider term including herbs useful for men, Ps. 104, 14. Gen. 3, 18. Nffl"tn (the metheg under n is inserted to secure the proper pronunciation of *i before ty) is Hif'il denominative from NB>1 = ¦ to make ox produce ' N^H ; so lOO ' rain] n*ODn ' to make rain] Wp ' a root] B>*1?>n 'to send out roots.' Hif'il the causative stem, expressing with denominatives the idea of producing or putting forth that of which the original noun is the name, Ges., § 53. 2. So yit y*UO. The construction of a verb with a cognate accusative is common in Hebrew, so in 27, 34 npyx pyx*l, Zech. 1, 14 nN3p . . , *nN3p, and often; see Ges., § 117. 2, and Rem., a and b; M. R., § 36; Dav., S., § 67 b and R. 2; the same construction occurs again in ver. 20. Render, ' Let the earth bring forth young grass, herbs yield-' ing seed] with the accents, 3'tyy being in apposition to NB>1 ; see Ges., § 131. 2 a; M. R., § 71. 2 ; Dav., S., § 29 b; not as the LXX, $oravr\v xoprov (also Aq. and Th.), Vulg. ' herbam virentem] connecting NKH in the cstr. state with Sbty. But NBH is never used thus in the O. T., it may be preceded by py.. 'greenness] 'viror,' 2 Kings 19, 26. Ps, 37, 2. Is. 37, 27, but cannot be followed by S't^y as genitive. "*"1D yj? 'fruit trees] J»y being used collectively, lit. ' trees _ of fruit! The use of words in the singular to denote collective ideas is especially frequent in Hebrew; cf. DIN, coll. 'man kind ' (without a plural), 3*1N = ' enemies] E>B3 ' living beings.' Often the fem. ending is employed to express a collective idea, so T\vsy' clouds', nniN 'caravan] il7*J 'exiles;' see Ges., §i23b; M. R., §61; Dav., S., § 17. 10 GENESIS, lj1*^ ' after its kind! Emphasis is laid on the fact that each was adapted for continuance ; the ivy flowered and so produced its seed ; the yy bore fruit containing seed or stones necessary for reproduction, po is a common word in P. "Q 1JHT "ItDN ' in which (fruit) is its seed] i. e. for propagation (Di.). 12. N*iim. Hif'il, imperf. apoc. with waw conv. from NV*, a verb *"a, properly *,"a. The form is N*Si* = K*S1v cf. 7*0p:. 'ln^aS for 13*07. The suffix in— for i — except in words that are derived from verbs T\"b, such as ni'2>, n'B>yp,, H3P0, etc. — outside this word (where it is found fourteen times), only occurs in !mi*,N for iliN, Job 25, 3; intw!?*? for i^*3, Judg. 19, 24; MOiO for loto, Nah. 1, 13; see Ges., § 91. 1. Rem. b; Ewald, § 247 d; Stade, § 345 c, who remarks that the e of these forms is to be explained as an .ex tension of a short e, — which has arisen out of short a (cf. § 84. 4), — which is still preserved before the suffix of the second pers. masc. sing, in pause, e. g. ^P, IK'S?. 14. miNQ "TT1. On the construction here, see Ges., § 145- 7 a; M. R., § 133; Dav., S., § 113 b. TINO . Nouns formed by prefixing O denote often instru ments or places, e. g. nnao < a key] 3.b]0 ' a fork] nyiO ' a pasture] 31N0 ' a lurking-place;' see further, Ges., § 85, 48; Ewald, § 160 b ; and Stade, § 268 ff. Render, ' luminaries! VJTI . The perf. with waw conv. in continuation of the voluntative *n*, so in 28, 3 n**,1*, . . .-inN "pa*, 31, 44 nmas n*,11 . . . n*l3, Ex. 5, 7 ; cf. Ges., § 1 12. 3, c, 0 ; M. R., § 24. 1 a; Driver, § 113. 2 a; Dav., S., § 55 a. 131 nim&O may be rendered in three different ways : I. As a Iv &a Svolv, 'for signs of seasons, and for days and for CHAP. I, VERS. 12-14. " years;' see Ges., Lehrgeb., p. 854, and cf. 3, 16. II. 'For signs and for set times, and for days and years! III. ' For signs, as well for times, as also for days and years' (Tuch). Against III. Del.4 remarks that the correlatives ' as well] ' as also ' are not sufficiently clearly expressed by 1 ... 1 , as, for example, in Ps. 76, 7 ; nor is this rendering suitable to the simplicity of the narrative. On I. it may be remarked that though the hendiadys may be possible in 3, 16, it is by no means necessary there, and Job 10, 17. 2 Chron. 16, 14 (cited by Ges. 1. c.) are not parallel. II. is the simplest and best rendering, and is adopted by the Vss., Kn., Del., Di., and others. mmN. 'The luminaries were to be niniN, i.e. signs, partly in an ordinary way as marks of the different regions of heaven, of the weather, and partly in an extraordinary way, e.g. through eclipses of the sun and moon, the appearances of comets, etc., which were regarded by the ancients as foreshadowing extraordinary events (Joel 3, 3 f. Jer. 10, 2. Matt. 24, 29).' Knobel in Di. Q'HI*,1E!. iy*.0 from ly* (lyi), 'to fix] denotes any ' stated place] as in the phrase lyiO 7nN ' tent of meeting] or as here, ' any fixed, slated time ;' cf. 17, 21. The D*iyiO here mean set times or seasons, in particular, stated annual feasts, also periods in animal (cf. Jer. 8, 7, of the stork) and vegetable life, and the seasons suitable to the various occupations and employments of man. ?"OtBl D'wV^. On the pointing \, cf. Ges., § 104. 2 c; Dav., § 15. 1 c. 'For days and for years] i.e. for dis tinguishing and counting the days, some being short, others long, according to the season of the year: the years also being long and short, according as they are reckoned by the sun or moon. The ntHNO had a threefold aim : (1) to 12 GENESIS, divide the day and night; (2) to fix the calendar; (3) to give light on the earth. 16. The lights more exactly defined. *3B'; on the various ways in which the numerals may be connected with substan tives, see Ges., § 134 ; M. R., § 96 ff.; Dav., S., § 35 ff. On the article with D*7113, see Ges., § 126. 5 ; M. R., § 85 ; Dav., S-, § 3°- 7>1"Un TlNQn nN. On this method of expressing the comparative, cf. Ges., § 133. 2 ; M. R., § 86. D^aaiDn . . . "DNEPr nNI. 'And the lesser light with the stars to govern the night! D*33*Jn nNl is closely attached to fOpn UNOn nN ; see 2, 9. 12, 17. 43, 18 ; Dr., Sam., p. 292. 18. ^"DDTI, the 7 is pointed with — by Ges., § 10. 2. Rem. ; see also Stade, § 105 ; and Konig, Lehrg., p. 73. 20. rrn $22 'living beings] an explanatory apposition to Tgl so the Pesh.: not as the LXX, Vulg., etc., as a genitive after Y~$; see on ver. ii n'cy NBH. YT.# and Y~}$ are frequently found in P. ridy. Pilel from explains "nn $33 as = ' the soul that lives] regarding the adj. with the article as virtually = to a participle and article as in ver. 28. Q"'I2n "VSrW "TON 'wherewith the waters swarm'. 1B>N is the ace. after pit2>. Verbs of abounding in, and wanting, govern the ace; see Ges., § 117. 4. Rem. 4b; M. R., § 35; Dav., S., § 73 c; and 9, 2. Onypb scriplio defecliva, for Dn*3*07; cf. 4, 4 ?Qa?n. Fp3 Pf)J7 'birds (coll.) of wing! On the construction of a subs., where in English an adj. is used, see Ges., § 128. 2 i; M. R., §79; Dav., S.,%24. TrTj^Q?. See on ver. 12. 22. 1"12v*i. On the position of the tone, cf. Ges., § 64. 3. Rem. 2. 24. in^HT. in*n with the old, so-called case ending i. Probably the ending i was that of the nominative ; compare the Arabic nominative ending u, but in Hebrew its distinctive use as a mark of the nom. was lost. These terminations \ or ?, also the ending *., have no meaning in Hebrew, and are retained as mere binding vowels in particular phrases (*. especially in participles before a preposition) as archaisms, or in imitation of archaisms ; see Ges., § 90. 3 b ; Dav., §17; 14 GENESIS, Stade, § 344; Driver, p. 237 f. ; and cf. 1JG *J3 in Num. 24, 3. 15, and D*0 *.3*yo in Ps. 114, 8. Y"*.Nn n^H is one of the characteristic expressions of P. 26. ntoy] 'let us make! Verbs n"? hardly ever take the n^- of the cohortative, and verbs N"7 only very rarely ; cf. Ges., §§ 75. 6 and 108, foot-note ; M. R., § 9 ; Dav., S., § 62 ; and Driver, c. iv, esp. § 47. We have the plural again in 1 1, 7 and Is. 6, 8, and it has been explained in various ways. I. The Fathers here see a reference to the Trinity, and many moderns have followed them; but as Del. (Comm., 4th ed., p. 101) and Oehl. (Theol. ofO.T.,% 36) remark, the mysterium Trinitatis is not sufficiently manifest in the O. T. to warrant this interpretation. II. Tuch and others account for the plural on the ground that in a case of reflection or self-consultation, the subject stands as the object, in anti thesis to itself, the speaker conceiving himself as addressing himself; cf. Hitzig and Del. on Is. 6, 8 ; Tuch, Comm., 2nd ed., p. 23. But as Del. and Di. point out, there is no proof of the existence of such a plural. III. Kn. and others explain the plural from the custom which monarchs have of using the first person plural in decrees, etc. ; but though this occurs continually in the Qoran, and is found in the Bible, Ezr. 4, 18. 1 Mace. 10, 19. n, 31. I5> g (0f Persian and Greek rulers), it was never used in this way by the Hebrews. IV. Di., Comm., p. 31, proposes a new explanation; his words are, ' We should rather remember that the Hebrew who speaks of God as DN17N in the plural, regarded Him as the living, personal conception of a fullness of power and might; God could thus, differently from men, speak of Himself in the plural.' A plausible explanation, but perhaps hardly so natural as the one Del. adopts. V. Del. and others CHAP. I, VER. 26. may possibly be right when they refer the plural, as in Is. 6, 8, to the angels. God announces to them His resolve to create man, without however allowing them to participate in His creation: cf. Del. here, and for the idea 1 Kings 22, 19-22. Dan. 4, 14. 7, 10. Job 1. Luke 2, 9. This is an old interpretation, and is the one adopted by Philo (SmXeyerai 6 to>v oX, also fourn. Phil., xi. 229 f.; Ges., § 126. 5. R. 1 a; Ew., § 293 a; Dav., S., § 32. R. 2; and Dr., § 209. 1. On the relation in which the Cosmogony of Genesis stands to modern science, cf. Driver in the Expositor, Jan. 1886, pp. 23-45. 2. 1. DN22, applied zeugmatically to pN,11 DW.1. The phrase ' host of heaven' is common in the O. T., e.g. 1 Kings 22, 19 ( = ' the angel hosts'). Josh. 5, 14 f. (=' army or host of God'). Ps-103, 21 (of the elements). The phrase 'host of the earth] here due to the DWn N3X, is not common elsewhere, we find instead pNn N70, Is. 34, 1. c 1 8 GENESIS, 2. ?3V1. 'And God ended] not as a pluperfect as some render. It is very doubtful whether an imperf. with waw conv. can stand for a pluperfect, if no perfect in a pluperfect sense precedes, and it is scarcely consistent with the meaning of the idiom; cf. on i, 4. When a writer wishes to mark that a pluperfect sense is necessary, he usually separates the 1 from the verb, which then naturally passes over into the perfect (,173 DM7N1). For a full discussion of the question and an examination of the l instances in which waw conv. with the imperfect has been supposed to be equivalent to a pluperfect, see Driver, § 76. Obs. H7D=here 'to bring to an end] 'to leave off;' cf. Ex. 34, 33. 1 Sam. 10, 13. Ez. 43, 23 (where ,173 occurs with JO). This ' leaving off or resting ' fills up the seventh day, just as the work of creation the six preceding days. ' God did not create anything on the seventh day,' Kn. The Sam., LXX, Pesh., Ber. Rab. read *B>E> for *y*3tJ>; an intentional alteration to avoid the idea that God created anything on the seventh day. iniNbp from n3N7D, which has arisen out of na&6p, the weak letter N surrendering its vowel to the preceding vowelless consonant, and the pathach under the prefix B disappearing and its place being taken by shewa vocal; cf. Stade, § no c and § 112 b; Ges., § 23. 2 and § 95. 3. In the form with the suffix \, the pathach under the 7 is due to the syllable being short and unaccented. < 3- TO"1"!. If the penult, is an open syllable waw conv. frequently draws back the tone on to it, leaving the last syllable a short unaccented syllable ; see Dav., § 23. 3 b; Driver, § 69; Ges., § 49. 2 b. Cf. 1, n. 22j and often. ¦wntfn dv nN. cf. on i, 3i. CHAP. 2, VERS. 2-4. 19 rVtiEvb DVTJN N-Q -H»N. Two renderings are pos sible, (I) ' which God had created in respect of making] quae creaverat Deus faciendo. The inf. cstr. being used to define a preceding verb, as in Judg. 9, 56 31,17 .... n'cy 1K>N ; 2 Kings 19, n DO*in,17 . . . . 1E>y ; Ps. 103, 20 yOK>? 1131 *B>y ; cf. Ges., § 45. 2 ; Ewald, § 280 d; M. R., § 113 ad fin. But as N13 in this construction would be followed by 1K>N (=,13N70), which is against the usage of the language, and for which n3N70 ntJ>y would stand, Di. (II) prefers rendering with Ewald, § 285 a, 'in making which he had created] i.e. 'which he had made creatively ' (cf. Del.5 die er schopferisch ausgefUhrt hatte), it^N being ace. after Ttivyb, and the latter word being defined by N13; cf. m'2>y7 7*13n, iryn7 N*73n, 773n,17 n3in. The LXX have S>v rjp^aro 6 Oebs Ttoirjo-ai, a paraphrase. The Pesh. ,-^sviN ]*&}' Jl=?, as the Hebrew, so Onq. *nai 13yo? **. Vulg. 'quod creavit Deus ut facer et] 4. mi7ln H7N . ' These are the generations of the heavens and the earth when they were created! ni17in, — which only occurs in the pi. cstr. state, — when it stands before a proper name signifies 'generations] not as a nom. act., but in the sense 'those who are brought forth] so=family, 'the details about those who spring from any one ;' hence in the title of a book or chapter, ' the history of the families springing from any one! LXX, yeveo-is ; in this passage /3i'/3\os yeveo-eas. Here nn7in=the 'creatures] i.e. 'the things brought into existence when heaven and earth were created] Elsewhere mi7in always refers to what follows, e.g. 5, 1. 6, 9. 10, 1, but in this chap, no history of the heavens and the earth follows, so Schrader and others suppose that this half verse properly ought to precede 1, 1, its present position being perhaps due to the compiler of the book, who inserted it here in order to form a transition to 2, 4 b, ff. The n7N (as it stands now) c 2 20 GENESIS, points backwards, and may be rendered, ' Such then are the generations:' so Job 18, 21. Ps. 73, 12. Gen. 10, 20. 31. 32. Cf. further, Del., Comm.5, p. 72 f.; Di., p. 38 f.; Tuch, p. 49; Driver, Introd., p. 5. The heading nnTin ,17N is peculiar to P: so 5, 1. 6, 9. 10, 1, etc.; and as the remainder of chap. 2 is not taken from this document, the formula as it now stands must be regarded as a ' subscription ' to chap. 1. In all the other cases, however, where these words occur in P., they are always the ' superscription ' to the following narrative. Cn^N mrp, the combined name 'Yahweh Elohim] 'is only found once again in the Pent. (viz. Ex. 9, 30) outside Genesis, but occurs in Joshua. On the Tetragrammaton, nin*, cf. Appendix. P uses DM7N till Ex. 6, 3. COIBI y*,N. Only once again, in Ps. 148, 13. ONinni. Inf. Nif. with 3 prefixed, and the suff. of the third pers. pi. masc, from N13. The ,1 is written smaller than the other letters, and is marked by the Massoretes Nl*yt "n, i. e. He small. Tuch remarks on this : ' The ,1 minusc. in DN13,13 (cf. 5, 2) has a critical significance, and points to a variant reading, Qal (viz. &N")?:!), not Hof'., as Rosenmiiller thinks. Similarly Lev. 1,1.' Cf. Di., p. 39, who apparently endorses this view. Other instances of letters written smaller or larger than the other letters will .be found in Strack, Pro legomena critica, p. 92, e. g. litterae majusculae in Lev. 11, 42, fina, with waw larger than the other three letters; in Num. 14, 17, * in 713*; in Deut. 34, 12, 7 in i'NIB'*; and litterae minusculae in Deut. 32, 18, * in *E>FI ; Esth. 9, 9, V in NRB'pia : see also Bleek (Introduction, § 357 f.) [Eng. transl.], or Keil (Introduction, § 205) [Eng. transl.]. A list of the 'litterae majusculae et minusculae ' will be found in Ochla we Ochla (ed. CHAP. 2, VER. 4b. 21 Frensdorff), Nos. 82-84; Buxtorf, Tiberias (1665 ed.). They are not expressly mentioned in the Talmud, and probably in the course of time became more numerous. Buxtorf, 1. c, enumerates thirty-one instances of the lit. majusc, and thirty^ two of the lit. minusc. The Jews give fanciful explanations. The two following — viz. on this passage, and 23, 2 — are cited from the Tiberias, p. 147 ff. '"n in voce DNia,13 "quando creata fuerant ilia" nempe, coelum et terra, Gen. 2, 4. Ad indican- dum, fore ut omnia creata minuantur et intereant : et ut littera n constat ex lineis dissolutis et ab invicem separatis, sic creata cuncta dissolventur, sicut scriptum est: " Coeli velut fumus evanescent, et terra ut pannus veterascet, et habitatores ejus similiter morientur" Is. 51, 6. Hebraei litterarum mysteria sectantes, notant innui transpositionem hujus litterae, ut ex DN13n3 fiat Dni3N3 "propter Abraham]' i. e. propter fideles creatum esse mundum : illi enim soli Deum propter admi- randa creationis opera laudant.' And on the small 3 in 23, 2 (p. 152): 'ad indicandum, planctum et luctum propter mortuos, viris minuendum esse, ne modum excedat, quod et Abrahamum fecisse, externo litterae signo indicatum fuit.' See another Jewish explanation of Gen. 2, 4, from the Tal mud, Tract. Menachoth, fol. 29, col. 2, in Hershon, The Pentateuch according to the Talmud, p. 92 (Eng. transl.). Render, ' When they were created' lit. 'in their being created;' a common use of the inf. cstr., like the Greek construction iv to, with the inf.; see Ges., § 1 14. 2, 3 ; M. R., § n 1 b. 4*>. The narrative begins here. 'In the day of God's making] i. e. ' when God made,' etc. On the construction, see Ges., §115. 2, 3; M. R., §111 a, §118; Dav., S, §§ 90 b, 91a. C3"l'*3,=lit. 'in the day of ,' is freely used for 'at the time of; ' so 3, 5 D373N Dl*3; Is. n, 16 ini7y DV3; Jer. 11, 7 DV3 *n7yn. ni'e'jr j.=ni3 in P. 22 GENESIS, The apodosis to 4b, mvy D1*3, may be either ver. 7 or ver. 5. If we take ver. 7 as the apodosis, then vers. 5, 6 will be a paren thesis descriptive of the earth's condition before God created mankind, and we should have to render it as follows:— ' When Yahweh Elohim made earth and heaven (now no shrub of the field was yet on the earth, and no herb of 'the field had yet sprung up ; for Yahweh Elohim had not sent rain upon the earth, and there was no man to till the ground ; and a mist used to go up and water all the surface of the ground), then Yahweh Elohim formed] etc. So Bunsen, Di., and Schrader. If we make ver. 5 the apodosis, then the rendering would be, ' When Yahweh Elohim made earth and heaven, then there was no shrub of the field] etc. So Tuch and Kn. Against the first rendering it may be urged that the con struction is too involved, and seems to identify a period (ver. 6), with a point (ver. 7) of time. To make TVV 73*, the apodosis to 4b is against the division of the verses and the syntax (Del.) ; cf., however, on the latter point, Driver, §§123 and 124, who cites Lev. 7, i6b. Josh. 3, 3, and other instances of the imperf. separated from *,, after a time determination, and this passage may possibly be explained in the same way. The argument, too, from the division of the verses is hardly conclusive. Del. takes apparently 4*> and 4a, after the analogy of 5, 1, as belonging together, and regards vers. 5 and 6 as independent sentences introductory to ver. 7, which beginning with IS**, ('so he formed') expresses the main point, viz. the creation of man. 5. On the imperf. after BIO, cf. Ges., § 107. 1. Rem. 1 ; M. R., § 6. 1 ; Ewald, § 337 c ; Driver, § 27 b ; Dav., S., § 43. Ewald, 1. c, remarks that DID for the most part stands in circumstantial clauses, preceded by the subject. CHAP. 2, VERS. 5, 6. 23 70 indefinite, and with the negative =' none] Germ, kein: cf. Ges., § 152. 1 a; M.R., § 142; Ewald, § 323b; Dav., S., § 11. R. 1 b. On )*N, see Ges., l.c. 1 c; Ewald, § 321 a; M.R., §140; Dav., S., § 127 b. On the position of |*N in the sentence, cf. Num. 20, 5 |*N D*01, M. R., § 79. 6 b. Rem. a ; Dav., S., 1. c. 6. ^7y,. The imperf. used in a frequentative sense, and followed by a perfect with waw conv. npK>,7i. The companion construction to the imperf. with waw conv. is that of the perfect with waw conv. According to Ewald, § 234 a, b, this construction was originally due to the opposite con struction of the perfect, followed by an imperfect with waw conv.; just as the two tenses are in many aspects opposite one to the other, so the peculiar idiomatic use of the one, generated a corresponding idiomatic use of the other as its counterpart. Ols., cited by Driver, remarks that this use of the perfect rests originally on a ' play of the imagination,' in virtue of which an action when brought into relation with a preceding occurrence as its consequence, from the character of inevitability it then assumes, is contemplated as actually com pleted. In this construction ' the nascent action (i. e. the action of the imperf.) is conceived of as advancing to completion (the action of the perfect with waw conv.), as no longer remaining in suspension, but as being (so to" say) precipitated.' Driver, Tenses, p. 117. Compare c. viii, where a full dis cussion of this idiom will be found, and the rules concerning the shifting of the tone one place forward with the waw conv. are noted. When the waw and the verb are separated, the imperf. reappears. Cf. also Ewald, §§ 136 c, 342 b, 1; M. R., §§ 23. 25 '> Ges., § 112. 3 a. Other instances of the imperf. as a frequentative, followed by a perf. -with waw conv., 24 GENESIS, are 6, 4. 29, 2. 3 «*B>m . . . IptWII . . . 17731 , , . 1BDN31 . . . Iptf* ; 1 Kings 14, 28 D13W11 . . . DINS?*; 2 Kings 3, 25 . . . 13*70* i11N701, etc. See also Dav., S., §§ 44 b, 54 b. m»* IN only occurs in this passage and Job 36, 27. The LXX render here by 7^7,7, and in Job, 1. c, by vecpeXt], which is also Onqelos' rendering here (S2JJ!)- Pesh- and Vulg, have respectively L^o-^i and 'fons.' Saadiah agrees with the ordinary rendering ' mist] ' vapour] y\s?. . The word "IN appears to be confined to Hebrew. Ges. in the Thesaurus, p. 35, is in error when he says that the word IN is used in the Targ., Job 3, 5. Prov. 23, 33. He has accidentally written ' Targum ' for ' the Commentary of Rabbi Levi ben Gerson' (of Provence, died 1370), cited by Buxtorf, Lexicon. Chald. Talm. et Rabb., p. 69. 7. IS"""!. On the form of this *"a verb, see Ges., § 70. 1; Dav., § 39. 2. ?INH. On the derivation of DIN, compare the note on 1, 26. The author connects DIN with noiN, as though he would imply that man bore in his name a mark of his earthly ' origin. On the article with DIN, cf. Ges., § 126. 2d; Ewald, 277 c; M. R., § 66. Rem. a; Dav., S., § 21 c. "1DJ* is a second accusative, specifying or defining the material used in the operation ; see Ges., § 1 1 7. 5 b. 8 ; Ewald, § 284a. 1; M. R., §45. 5; Driver, § 195. 1 (Tertiary predicate); Dav., S, § 76. Cf. Ex.20, 25. D^n. The masc. plural used to form an abstract noun. ' The plural may serve to collect together the scattered items into a higher idea, so as to form the signification of an ab stract,' Ewald, § 179, who gives as other instances D*113 ' fittings] Job 7, 4; D*yiy ' perverseness ;' D*113D 'blindness;' cf. also Stade, § 324 b, who remarks 'that D**n is the only CHAP. 2, VERS. 7, 8. 25 word of this sort in general use, the other instances that occur being archaisms, and belonging to the conventional •language of the Law, or of Poets or Prophets.' See also Ges., § 124. 1 b; Dav., S., § 16. tiJDD"? . . . ¦,n",1 . In the sense of ' become] 7 n*,1,.cf. 17, 4. 18, 18, etc., is more frequent than n*n, followed by the simple subst., as in 4, 20. 21. 19, 26. ODD in Heb. = the breath of life that is in every indi vidual being. Man derives this breath of life from God immediately (Job 27, 3. Is. 42, 5), animals from the earth (1, 20. 24), and so only mediately from God, yet partici pating in God's spirit (Job 34, 14 f. Ps. 104, 30). In this direct inspiration lies man's pre-eminence over the animal world, stress being laid on the manner in which man ' be came a living soul.' He comes into existence as a personal being in a personal relation with God. Cf. Oehl., § 70. Onq. renders n*n Eta3 by N^PO nil « a talking spirit! 8. ]T#H p. 'A garden in Eden! jnjf as an appellative means 'loveliness] 'delight] but is here clearly the name of the place where the garden was situated. The LXX render here 7rapdSeio-ov iv 'E8//i ; ver. 1 5 (incorrectly) irapaSeio-m rrjs Tpvcpijs, so 3, 24, and Vulg. 'Paradisum voluptatis.' Pesh. has j.m*;«.3 v^i, Saadiah ^Is. J>h\l*.. Schr., C. O.T., p. 26 f., says 'Eden, Heb. ]"$, has originally nothing to do with ]"}$, pi. ^1V. "loveliness," but is a word that came over to the Hebrews from the Babylonians, meaning properly "field," "plain;" in Assyrian i-di-nu] f$, pointed with^-, to distinguish it perhaps from flj? with -^, is a pr. n., the name of a district in Mesopotamia, or Assyria, which, according to 2 Kings 19, 12. Is. 37, 12, came under the rule of Assyria. flVhasnot yet been identified ; cf. further, Di., pp. 55 and 61 ff; Del.5, p. 79. 26 GENESIS, ?TpQ is local, not temporal (for yo*1 is against this),= ' eastwards] ' on the east of (a further definition of the position of Eden; cf. 3, 24. 11, 2. 13, 11), i.e. from the standpoint of the narrator in Palestine. 9. niC2vl. The shortened form of the Hif. imperf.; see Ges., § 65. 1 c. Rem. 3; Dav., § 37. 1, 2. SHI lltO njHi"T Yin = ' and the tree of knowledge of (lit. of the knowing) good and evil;' i.e. the tree, the partaking of the fruit of which would cause persons to know good and evil. SHI lltO cannot be genitive after nyi, as a word defined by being in the construct state does not take the article, but must be regarded as the accusative; cf. Jer. 22, 16 N*n N7n *hN nyin ' was not that the knowing me?' see Ewald, § 236 a ; M.R., § no. Rem.; Ges., § 115. 1. Rem. 3; Dav., S., § 19. The article prefixed to an inf. cstr. is very rare. STfi 3,113. On the pointing of 1 with — , see on 1, 2. 10. 'And a river was going out of Eden, to water the garden; and from thence it separated itself, and became four branches] N2V. The part, denoting continuous, unintermittent action; see Ges., § 107. 1. Rem. 2 ; Driver, § 21 ; M. R., § 14. 2 a ; cf. Dav., S., § 97. R. "nD\ On the imperf. as a freq. in past time, see Driver, § 30 a; M. R., § 6. 2 a ; Dav., S., § 44 b. HTII ; cf. on npB>,7i, ver. 6. n. }W*S=, according to Gesenius, 'streaming] or 'stream] from a root Bha 'to burst forth! It is not found again in the Canonical books of the Old Testament, but is CHAP. 2, VERS. 9-1 1. 27 mentioned in Ecclesiasticus 24, 25, together with the Tigris. The Arabic of Saadiah has jJiji 'the Nile! The other versions follow the Heb. text. Its position is more closely defined by the mention of the land (,l7*in) round which it flows. Joseph. (Ant., i. 1. 3), the Fathers (Euseb., Aug., Hier.), and others identify it with the Ganges; Reland and others consider it is the Phasis; Del. and the moderns, the Indus. n?*inn occurs only here with the art.; in 10, 7. 29, it is men tioned partly among the Cushites, and partly among the sons of Joqtan, together with Ophir. It also occurs in the phrase (25, 18) lit? ly i17*ino ; cf. 1 Sam. 15, 7, and Dr., Sam., p. 94. Havila in 25, 18 and 1 Sam. 15, 7 seems to have been the eastern frontier of the Ishmaelites and Amalekites on the Persian gulf. The moderns identify the Havila of this verse with India ; according to their view [10*3 is the Indus. That one of the rivers here mentioned was an Indian one, was the view prevalent among the ancients ; and the identification of n7*in with India, and [10*3 with the Indus, is strengthened by the fact that the products of the land of n7**.n, viz. n713, 3W, 0,10, are mentioned by ancient writers as being found in India ; the gold of the Indus district being celebrated among classical writers, as that of Ophir was among biblical : cf. Her., iii. 106; Diod. Sic, ii. 36; Curt., viii. 9. 18. Cf. 1 Kings 10, n. Ps. 45, 10. Job 22, 24: see further, Del.5, p. 82; Di.,p. 601. ,17*in has the article by Ewald, § 277 c; cf. ver. 7. It seems to indicate, as Di. remarks, that the Hebrews had not then forgotten the original meaning of the word, ' the sand land' par excellence. The n7*in mentioned in 10, "7 (cf. 1 Chron. 1, 9) among the sons of Cush seems to denote a place distinct 1 The name may possibly ==' Sandland] or ' Land of golden stind, connected with bin 'sand! 28 GENESIS, from those intended here, and in 25, 18. 1 Sam. 15, 7. It is perhaps to be identified with the modern Zeila On the Abyssinian coast, south of Bab-el-Mandeb. Cf. the note on 10, 7. 33Dn NTH =' that is the one encompassing the whole land of Havila! The article with the predicate, cf. Driver, § 135. 7; see also Ges., §§ 116. 5. Rem. 1, 126. 2 i. Rem.; Dav., S., § 19. R. 3. 33D without the article would='M encompassing! The word 33D does not of necessity imply a complete surrounding; cf. Num. 21, 4. Judg. n, 18. Ps. 26, 6. On the relative construction QV 12>N, cf. Ges., § 138. 1. and R. 2 ; M. R., § 156 d ; Dav., S, § 9. R. 1. 12. 3nt1. The 1 is pointed 1 by Ges., § 104. 2 c. Oh the -^- under the t, to emphasize the sibilant, see Ges., § 10. 2. Rem. A; Stade, § 105. Cf. 3, 17 (njbaN'n). 25, 22. 27, 26. 2 9. 3- 8 O^SD- * is marked with metheg, as in Judg. 5, 12, na_B>i : see Ges., § 16. 2, 1 a; Stade, § 52 d. N1H in the Pent., with the exception of eleven places, is of common gender. The punctuators, however, by pointing it Nin, indicate that they meant it to be read as NYl, the usual form of the fem.: cf. Ewald, § 184c; Ges., § 32. iii. 6; Stade, § 171 c. 2. This has usually been explained as an archaism, but Nold., Z. D.M. G., xx. (1866), p. 458, has pointed out that this cannot be philologically sustained, if we compare the other Semitic languages, all of which exhibit distinct forms for the masc. and fem. He, shewing that the double form must have existed before the different branches of the Semitic race had parted from their common home, rejects the sup position that the fem. N*n was at an early date lost, and again introduced into the language at a later period from the Aramaic, but admits that he has no plausible solution of the 29 anomaly to offer. Only he is convinced ' that it cannot be explained as an archaism (dass es mit dem Archaismus nichts ist); at the most it might be an artificial archaism.' Stade, I.e., regards it as ' a mistake of tradition,' and adds, ' probably the use of Nin for both genders arose from a MS., which both for N1,1 and N*n wrote defectively Nn, as it is found on the Moabite stone and Phoenician inscriptions. This N,1 was thoughtlessly always miswritten Nin.' Del., in the ' Zeitschrift fur Kirchliche Wissenschaft und Kirchliches Leben] i. p. 393 ff, has accepted Noldeke's statement that it cannot be an archaism, and accounts for the fem. as follows : ' Though through all Hebrew, even in the post-biblical literature (cf. p. 395 of his article), the distinction of gender was not sharply defined; yet at the time of the revision of the text, the use of Nin for the fem. was regarded as a mistake (for outside the Pentateuch it is unheard of, and not found in the Hebrew- Samaritan Pentateuch). In the recension of the text however it was presupposed that in the language at the time of Moses, although it possessed for the fem. the form N*,1, the use of N1,1 as of double gender prevailed, and the distinction of gender was at the lowest stage of its development.' Stade's view (cf. Ges., Gram., 1. c. 6 b. end), that N*n and Nin were both originally written N,1, and that the last redactors of the text have almost everywhere written this Nin without regard to gender, is borne out by the Nn on the Moabite stone, line 6, Nn D3 10N*1=NVrDa ION**,, and line 27 na n,i Din *a no3=Nin Dnn *s nios n*a (cf. Mic. 5, 1, n*a 0n7, masculine); and in Phoenician; see C. I. S., vol. i. p. 4 (Inscription of Yehawmelek, king of Gebal), line 9, pis 170 Nn; line 13, Nn naN70 : p. 14 (Inscription of Esmunazar, king of Sidon), line 10, Nn DIN; line 11, N,1 n3700. Cf. line 22, N,1 n3700n. This is ,probably the best explanation 30 GENESIS, of the anomaly1. See also C. P. Ges., p. 214 b. The art. is pointed according, to Ges., § 35. 2 A; Dav., § 11 b. N1,1 is here defined by the art. by Ges., § 126. 5; M. R., § 85; Dav., § 13. Rule 1 ; S., § 6. nv~Qn. 'Bdellium,' a transparent kind of gum, with a pleasant smell, and of wax-like appearance; found, according to Pliny, in India, Arabia, Media, and Babylonia : so Jos., Aq., Symm., Theod., and Vulg. In Greek the by-forms ftSiMa, pASe\Kov occur. The LXX have 3v8pa£ here, but in Num. 11,7 (the only other passage where the word occurs) Kpiordk- Xor, regarding n?ia as a stone, but this would have required ?3N before it. The Pesh. has \2S.*-£ (reading 1 for l), which apparently can be used of pearls or crystals. Saad. and others render pearls (so also Ges. in Th), which meaning would be suitable here — between 3,1T and 0,1$ but hardly in Num. 11, 7 (Del.), and according to Tuch was first derived from this passage in order that some object of equal value with 3nt and Dnt5> might be mentioned; but cf. 1 Kings 10, 2.10. The etymology is doubtful. OntlJn. Probably the Prasius or Beryl. The art. as in 3nm, according to Ges., § 126. 3 b; M. R., § 68; Dav., S., § 22 d. The LXX here give 6 \i60s 6 Ttpdo-ivos, perhaps meaning the beryl, Vulg. 'lapis onychinus] Pesh. JloU, Onq. H??3- Elsewhere variously rendered, onyx, sardonyx, sardius, which all belong to the same species (chalcedony), or beryl (more correctly chrysopras) : cf. H. W. B., nth ed., Di. in loco. The etymology is doubtful. It is not certain that Min = N, Nile, by rij; cf. Ecclesiasticus 24, 27. Josephus and the Fathers also consider the Nile the river here meant, so many moderns. K>0 is Ethiopia. Thus if 'in*3 is the Nile, we have a river taking its source in Asia, flowing round the African ^3 ! Others consider V>B as representing only the Asiatic Cushites, and identify |m*3 with either the Ganges or Oxus. Reland identifies it with the Araxes. Del. and Di. (provisionally) decide for the Nile, explaining the anomaly above noted, as having arisen through the ignorance of the ancients of geography; see their commentaries in loco. 14. spin, = ' the Tigris] occurs again Dan. 10, 4. The Heb. name agrees with the Sumerian Idigna, and the Bab.- Assyr. Idiglat (Schr., C. O. T., 32 f.; Del., Par., 170). In Aramaic the name is n73*1 (so Onq. here); the Pesh. has fcOLs?, Arab. iL^i- 'The Aryan name (Old Persian Tigra, Pahlawi ni31, Greek Tlyprjs, Ti'yois), according to the express tradition of the ancients (Strabo, xi. 14, 8; Pliny, vi. 31; Curt., iv. 9), designates the river as " the arrow-swift" Old Baktrian tighra = " pointed]' tighri= " arrow." ' Dillmann. n*D"Ip. Render, ' in front of Assyria] i.e. from the standpoint of the narrator ; so LXX Karivavn, Pesh.'^ajsa^. . Others (the Targg., Aq., Tuch) render ' east of] thus includ ing Mesopotamia in the term HtPN; but then the narrator could not have spoken of the Tigris as being east of Assyria, for he must have known that Assyria extended far east of the Tigris. Mesopotamia, too, is called D*in3 DIN in 24, 10; for 32 GENESIS, this meaning of noip, cf. 4, 16. 1 Sam. 13, 5. Ez. 39, n (all). Cf. Di., p. 59. niQ . ' The Euphrates] not further defined, as being familiar to every Hebrew reader. It is often mentioned in O.T. as ' the great river] or 'the river' kot i^oxov. Together with the Heb.-Aramaic name, we have now the Old Persian 'Vfrdtu] and the Babylonian- Assyrian 'Burattuv] 'Purdtu! A Semitic etymology is still unknown ; see Di. in loc, and M. and V. in H. W. B., nth ed., p. 702 a. 15. innD^I. The Hif. imperf. with waw conv. from ni3 : see Ges., § 72. Rem. 9 ; Dav., § 40, esp. Rem. c. N.B. n*3n='/0 cause to rest] 0*311 ' to place] 'set] 'lay down! matljbl iTOyb. The inf. cstr. with suffixes follows the analogy of the segholate nouns : see Ges., §61.1; Dav., § 31. 4. Possibly the suffixes should be pointed ri, as \l is generally masc, cf. note on 9, 21. 16. by 12T1 ' laid a command on him! More usually ,11¥, = * to command] is followed by an ace, or the prep. 7, or 7N (cf. 28, 6. Is. 5, 6. Amos 2, 12), the words of the command being introduced by 10N7. 7DNn 7DN. ' Thou mayest indeed eat! The inf. abs. being prefixed to the verb. ' The inf. abs. expresses the idea of the verb simply, without conditions of person, mood, etc.; hence, when it precedes the finite verb, there is first the idea bare, and then the idea modified ; and the effect of the whole is to express with some variety of emphasis the fact (not the quality) of the action as now predicated in the finite verb.' Dav., § 27, rule at end. See also Ewald, § 312 a; Ges., § 113. 3 a; Dav., S., §§ 85, 86; M.R., § 37. On the potential use of the imperf., see Driver, § 38 a; Ges., § 107. 4 b ; M. R., § 7. 2 a; Dav., S., § 43 b. CHAP. 2, VERS. I5-I9. 33 73N is one of the five verbs that form their imperf. with holem in the first syllable : see Ges., § 68. 1 ; Dav., § 35. 17. ' But from the tree of knowledge of good and evil, thou shalt not eat of it! On the preposition with the suffix, repeating the substantive (a use allied to that of the casus pendens), see Ges., § 135. 1. Rem. 2, foot-note 1; Driver, § 197. Obs. 1; Ewald, § 309 a, ad fin.; Dav., S., § 106 b. *pON is an instance of an inf. cstr. with the suffix de parting from the analogy of segholate nouns : cf. ver. 15, and see Ges., § 61. 1. Rem. 2. 18. nYH Ht2 N7. The inf. cstr. as the subject of a sentence : cf. Ges., § 1 14. 1 a ; M. R., § 1 12 b ; Dav., S., § 90. V? ntD^N. The 7 of 17 has a dag. forte conjunctivum or euphonicum: see Ges., § 20. 2 ; Dav., § 7. 4, foot-note; cf. ver. 28. The LXX and Vulg. here have read the plural, to bring the text into conformity with 1, 26. 1"U33 IT J*, lit. 'a help as before him] i.e. 'a help corre sponding to him] ' meet for him] A.V. LXX have here *.ar airov, in ver. 20 Sfioios airm; so the Pesh. and Vulg. In Rab binic, 1333 = ' corresponding to:' see Ges., Thes., p. 847.' ity is used concretely, as in Ps. 70, 6 : cf. Nah. 3, 9. 19. 12"1! is written defectively for 1X**1, which occurs in ver. 7. The verb must not.be rendered as a pluperfect. It appears that the narrator conceived the formation of animals as posterior to that of man. For the question of the use of the imperf. with waw conv. as a pluperfect, cf. the note on ver. 2. mizn n^n bs j, p pNn n*n 73 (1, 25. 30; cf. 9, 10). n*2. On the punctuation of no, see Ges., § 37. 1; Dav., § 13. ' The punctuation is quite like that of the article.' 34 GENESIS, Nip"1 nQ ' what he would call them ;' cf. Driver, § 39 /3; Dav., S., § 43 b. Nip1 IttJN ^31 . The imperf. according to Driver, § 38 0 ; Dav., S., § 44 b; 'a// whatever he called them! TV'tl ttJDD. These words may perhaps be considered a gloss on i7 (cf. Ges., § 131. 2. Rem. c, foot-note 3). Such a redundancy as we find in the text here is common in Aramaic, which would say NJ1*0 K^B^p H7; and there are genuine examples of it in the O.T., e.g. Ex. 2, 6. 1 Sam. 21, 14 (see Ges., l.c. Rem. 4 b; M. R., § 72. 3. Rem. a; Dav., S., § 29. R. 7), but none so harsh as this (note especially the masc. 17). In late Hebrew this redundancy might be an Aramaism, but that can hardly be the case in this passage. ,1*n £'33 = ' living creatures] 15*33 being collective. n*n is a fem. adj. (n*n = ' life' is only poetical; see on 1, 21). As the text stands we have 17 masc. followed by n*n K>33 fem., which is difficult. Del. supposes that ,1*n ^33 (cf. K>33 in 46, 27. Num. 31, 28) was construed ad sensum as a masc; but these passages are scarcely parallel. 20. D"7N71, pointing the 7 with — . The word is not used as a proper name until 4, 25. In these three chapters (1-3) it is, with the exception of this verse and 3, 17. 21, always pointed with the article. But cf. M. R., § 66. Rem. a. N2J2 N7. I. Impersonally, ' One did not find for man kind.' II. 'For himself (trwb^VZlb) he (man) did not find! III. 'For mankind (God) did not find! III. is not probable, as we have D1N.1 already as subj. at the beginning of the verse. If I. be adopted, NSO would be impers. by Ges., § 144- 3J M.R., § 123. 2, cf. on 11, 9, and D1N7 could stand without the art., as in 1, 26. Tuch adopts II. Del. and Di. propose a rendering that differs slightly from any of these: CHAP. 2, VERS. 20-24. 35 'He (man) did not find for man] i.e. 'for a human being, like himself] etc. ; almost the same as II, though they do not take D1N7 as directly equivalent to 1B>337. Ols. reads EINni, which would remove the difficulty as to the subject of NVO N7. 21. nDnnn 'in its place ;' the suffix is a verbal one, cf. Ges., § 103. 1. Rem. 3; Stade, § 378 a. 1 : with the nominal suffix it would be n*nnri . 23. ' This now is . . . this shall be called woman! The con nection of n^N with tr*N is preserved by the Vulg., which renders them by 'virago' and 'vir] respectively, probably following Symm., who has dvSpls and dvr/p ; so Luther, Mdnnin. The two words, however, in Hebrew come from different roots. Cf. C. P. Ges., sub voce. nnpb. The form is made more distinct by the fuller shewa; see Ges., § 10. 2 B, and § 52. 1. Rem. 2. The dag. in the p has fallen away in accordance with the rule, that any doubled letter pointed with shewa, may drop its doubling; hence the Raphe, see Dav., § 7. 4, foot-note a ; Ges., § 20. 3 b, where the letters that commonly admit of this loss of the dag. are mentioned. The aspirates, however, very rarely omit the dag.; cf. note on 18, 5. 24. ' Therefore doth a man leave his father and his mother and cleave unto his wife, and they become one flesh! The imperf. as freq. followed by the perf. with waw conv., in present time, as before (ver. 6) in past time; so Ps. 17, 14. 49, 11. 73, 10-11; Ges., § 112. 3b; Dr., § 113. 4a; Dav., S., §§ 44 a, 54 a. These words are the narrator's comment, as in 26, 33. 32, 33, as they would be unnatural if assigned torthe man, who had no knowledge of a father or mother. The LXX, Pesh., Vulg., and Sam. insert Dn*3lp ' and they two become;' and the text is quoted thus in the N. T., Matt. d 2 36 GENESIS, 19, 5. Mark 10, 7 ; cf. 1 Cor. 6, 16. Eph. 5, 31. It may have fallen out of the Heb. text through the Dn*3tJ> of ver. 25. 25. Caill* marked by the Massoretes, SM13 'o ' mem with dagesh! On the apparent anomaly of a long vowel in a toneless syllable, see Dav., § 3. 2; Stade, § 327 a. This word occurs again, with the same points, in Job 22, 6. 1©EfoTP. Hithpolel of c'13, only occurs in this passage; see Ges., § 72. 7 ; Dav., § 26. 3 c. Render, ' were not ashamed before one another] i. e. ' not in the habit of being ashamed] etc. The Hithp. is reciprocal, cf. nNinn in 42, 1. The imperf. according to Driver, § 30 a ; Ewald, § 136 c. 3. 1. "ui n"*n by& any rxr\ ©ram. 'Now the serpent was more cunning than all the beasts of the field] etc. On the use of JO in expressing the comparative, see Ges., § 133. 1; M. R., § 49. 2 ; Dav, S., § 33. "O f|N, lit.=' and that . . . !' is placed first in the sentence to denote astonishment, which may be expressed by a note of interrogation. Render, 'And (is it really the case) that?' cf. Ewald, § 354 c; M. R, § 143 b. There is no necessity to suppose that the ,1 interrog. has fallen out. TO . . . N*7='w/ any; ' see Ges., § 152. 1 a; M. R., § 142; cf. 2, 5 and Dav., S., § 127 a. 3. pniQn. This form of the plural of the imperfect in J1, which always in Hebrew has the tone, is the common ending in the pi. imperf. 3rd pers. masc and 2nd masc. in classical Arabic (the abbreviated form being reserved for the subj. and jussive moods), and in Aramaic, but is not found in Ethiopic in the written language. It is tole/ably common CHAP. 2, VER. 25 CHAP. 3, VER. 3. 37 in Hebrew, and is probably not to be regarded as a mark of antiquity, but as a weightier form, being especially frequent in the elevated prose style and in poetry. ' I. It is found in various cases of pause, as here, and Ex. 1,22 |1*nn. II. As an emphatic, form, e.g. in Deut. 1, 29 JINTTI N71 |1*nyn N7; Josh. 4, 6 JPNB'* *3 : especially after particles or nouns, which expect a'verb after them, e.g. ,13, 1t5>N 73, IPN 131,1, n07, N7, |y07, J3. III. As a rhythmical form to ensure a fuller sound for the word, Hab. 3, 7 }1T31*; Ps. 4, 3 JianNn. IV. As an audible connecting link, similar to the -ev, -au> before d, & in Greek : so 32, 20 )H3in before ISPy 7N. Judg. 6, 31 |iy*B>in before mN: most commonly before N, but also before y, n, 1, and O. Many common verbs, as ION, 131, yi*, 3155*, etc., have preserved the )1; while others, as 11*, )n3, 3B>*, etc, do not receive it any longer. It is found in all classes of verbs, with the single exception of verbs y"y, and is very frequent in verbs n"? and l"y. Qal, as a light form, has it more frequently than the heavier reflexive forms. It occurs more commonly in the 3rd pers. than the 2nd pers. pi, as this form is far more frequent, but is by no means uncommon in the 2nd pers. pi. in certain verbs, e. g. 131, yOK>, rivy, ION, lot?.' It is found in the oldest prose, e. g. in Gen. (twelve times), Ex. (twenty-eight times), Num. (seven times), Josh, (nine times), Judg. (eight times), 1 Sam. (eight times) ; being especially frequent in Exodus, which contains many old pieces; also in old poetry, e.g. Ex. 15. 2 Sam. 22 (once), and some Psalms and old prophets, e.g. Is., Mic, Joel, Hos., Amos. In Job, Deut, Is. 24-27, 40 ff, Pss. 58, 89, 104, etc, it is more artificial (a revived archaism). In the gnomic poetry (Prov.) it is rare, and does not occur in the erotic and purely elegiac (Song of Songs, Lam.). Levi ticus has it very rarely, Ezekiel never. More modern prose 38 GENESIS, writings (Ruth, Kings) have it only in colloquial passages. The books of Chronicles have preserved it in some passages from more ancient sources, while they reject it in others. In Ezra, Neh, Esther, Dan. (Heb.), Eccles. there are no examples of )1.' See further, Bottcher, Lehrbuch, ii. § 930 (from whom the above paragraph slightly abbreviated is borrowed), where a full list of the passages, where the ending [1 occurs, is given ; and cf. Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 63 ; Stade, § 521 a, a ; Ges, §72.7. Rem. 4, and § 47. 3. Rem. 4; Dav, § 21. Rem. a. It may be observed that some of Bottcher's distinctions seem doubtful and arbitrary. 4. pniftn mft N7>. The negative should stand between the inf. and the verb; see Ges, § 113. 3. Rem. 3; Ewald, § 312 b. 1 ; who cite Amos 9, 8. Ps. 49, 8 as parallel to this passage. Its unusual position here is probably due to a desire to keep the' formula mon niO from 2, 17 unchanged. Cf. Dav., S., § 86 b. Render, 'Ye shall by no means die! 5. W. The participle as a true present (the subject does not precede, as a slight emphasis is laid on the verb, so 18, 17 *3N ,1D30,1; 19, 13 umN DWntyo *3; cf. Dr., § 135. 4; Dav, S., § 100 b)', Dr., § 135. 2 and Obs.; cf. Ges, § 116. 5a. mpsDi . . . arroN ova. >In /A'e dayye eat _ # your eyes shall be opened! The perf. with waw conv. after a time determination; see Ges, § 112. 5c; Dr., § 123/8; M.R., §§ 26, 132 b; Dav, S., § 56. Waw in this usage is to be noticed. It assumes a stronger demonstrative force than it has in the ordinary cases of the perf. with waw conv. (cf. Driver, § 122), when used to introduce the predicate or the apodosis ; so in Ex. 16, 6 Dnyi*1 3iy 'at evening, (then) ye shall know! 1 Kings i3> 3i VlN Dni3p1 *ni03 ' when I die, (then) ye shall bury me! Ez. 24, 24 b DnyTI ,1Naa 'when it comes, (then) ye shall know! CHAP. 3, VERS. 4-8. 39 0V17N3 ' as gods.' Targ. Onq. Paiaia ' as princes] perhaps intentionally to avoid an anthropomorphic idea. Targ. Jon. pODO'l paiai f*3N7D3 'as mighty princes who know] connecting *yi1* with D*n7N, which is grammatically possible. The Samaritan has SffTfiJ/fZiiJiJ 'like angels'. 'yi* is perhaps best taken (so the accents) as second pre dicate to Dn**m. 6. Baffin1?!. The LXX, Pesh, Vulg, and some moderns render, ' to look at] or ' regard] a meaning which 7*3tJ'n never has. Render, ' lo become wise] lit. ' to gain insight] Di. 'um Einsicht zu gewinnen] Rashi's note here is yil 310 *yi1* ,17 10NB> 103 'compare his saying to her, "know ing good and evil." ' 7DN*1. Pausal form of ->3N*; cf. Ges, § 29. 4 c, note, with § 68. 1. The LXX and Sam. read 173N*1 (plural), the waw might have arisen out of the following waw in ,13npani . The plural is not necessary. 7. On Oft1T,y "O. The pronoun stands here by M. R, § 125 ; cf. ver. 11 ; and Ges, § 141. 4. nDNn Thy, K\.' leaf of a fig] i.e. 'fig-leaf here collec tive, 'fig-leaves.' WTO Itoyi 'and they made themselves! The personal pronoun is used for the reflexive, as often with this verb ; cf. Ges., § 135. 3 ; M. R, § 89 a ; Dav, S., § 11 b. 8. Tip, not 'the voice] but 'the sound] as in 2 Sam. 5, 24. 1 Kings 1 4, 6. Render, < The sound ofY. (while) walking (ace) in the garden] and cf. Driver, p. 204 ; Dav, S., § 70. OT*n Trrb. 'About the cool of the day] so 8, n 3iy ny7 'about eventide;' 17, 21 ,1M iyi07 ' about this date;' also Is. 7, 15 myi7 'about (the time of) his knowing;' cf. Ges, § 1 19. 3 c ; 40 GENESIS, Jk MiR, §51.2. In the East, towards evening a cool breeze sprflags up (cf. Song of Songs 2, 17. 4, 6) and the Oriental goes out; so 24, 63 3iy,1 ni337. The LXX render well to oVjXii/oV. In 18, 1 the noontide is called D1*n Dn 'the heat of the day ' (LXX, excellently, ¦ iamnippias); Abraham being described as sitting in the door of his tent. 9. n3*N. The suffix (as it is pointed) is a verbal one; cf. Ges, § 100. 5 ; M. R, § 39; n|>N standing for n|3'_N; cf. Prov. 2, n H3lj;3Pl, and* with the nun, Jer. 22, 24 JI^pnN1; see Ges, § 58. 4 ; Dav, § 31. 5. Stade, § 355 b. 3, remarks that 'It is due to false analogy if the Pausal suffix $ — is transferred from the verb to a noun,' and cites with this passage, Prov. 25, 16 ;IH, and other instances. It is possible, however, that the vowel points in these cases are not to be trusted as they stand in our texts. The n at the end of n3*N is merely a scriptio plena (found both in obj. and subj. suffixes), — as Prov. 2,11 n3lV3n ; cf. ver. 12 nnn3. Ex. 15, 11 ,1303 (twice). 1 Sam. 1, 26 n30y,— and in no way affects the sense. 10. "ODN. The Mass. note here is 7y70, i.e. the word is, contrary to rule, accented on the penult.; cf. Ges, § 29. 4 c; Dav, § 10. 5 b. As a rule the vowel in pause is lengthened, this cannot take place here as the vowel is already long. The accents ;— , — , and (sometimes) — usually effect this lengthening, when it is possible, in pause. Here the minor distinctive accent __ (Tifcha) exercises a pausal influence, 1 On the forms of the Imperf. with the suffix and so-called nun demonstrative or energetic, the reader may consult Wright, Comp. Gram. p. 193 f. It should be remembered that the nun belongs not to the suffix, but to the energetic form of the Imperf, which is still preserved in Arabic. CHAP. 3, VERS. 9-13. 41 there being a sufficient break in the sense for the voice naturally to rest; cf. Driver, § 103, and 15, 14 1*13^1 (the tone drawn back and the vowel lengthened), which the Massoretes have not noticed. nnN and nny, like *33N, transfer the accent to the penult, in pause. 11. nnN OT*}* "O is really the object to 1*3,1 *0, see M. R, § 161 b, where it is designated 'an object sentence;' cf. 1, 4 and Dav, S., § 146. ",n7i7. *n?3 is used regularly to negative the inf. cstr. after 7; cf. Ges, § 114. 3. R. 2 ; M. R, § 140. R. a; Dav, S., §95. ]ftn. On the pointing of n interrog, see Ges, § 100. 4, s.p.; Dav, § 49. 2. Here n introduces a simple interrogative sentence (cf. Ges, § 150. 2; M. R, § 143; Dav, S., § 122), the answer being uncertain (affirmative or negative). N7,1= Latin nonne, the answer expected being in the affirmative. 12. n?35* . . . nttJNn, a casus pendens. 'The woman which etc. . . . she gave me] N1,1 is resumptive and is inserted for emphasis; seeGes,§ 135. 1. Rem. 2; Driver, §§ 123. Obs. 199; cf. 15, 4 TKh** Nin yyoo nx* ipn dn *3 ; 24, 7 . , . mn* xhv* Nin nNf,1. The casus pendens is often used to relieve a long and unwieldy sentence. See also Dav, S., § 106. vDNl. The pausal form of the ist person. In ver. 6 we have 73Nm and 73N*l as the pausal forms of the 3rd pers. fem. sing, and 3rd pers. masc. sing, respectively; see Ges, § 68. 1. 13. nW nNt ntt: cf. 12, 18. With the verb nfry, nNT no is generally employed, with other verbs nt no, e.g. 27, 20. ni and nNT are used, after the manner of an adverb, to emphasize interrog. words, see Ges, § 136. R. 2; Dav, S., § 7 c; M.R, §93. Rem. c. Render, ' Whatlhen hast thou done?' 42 GENESIS, The A. V. and Pesh. render it as a relative sentence, ' What is this thou hast done?' Del. adopts the former rendering, remarking (in edit. 4) that the corresponding question in Arabic, whether the demonstrative belongs to the interroga tive, or whether it should be rendered as our Eng. Ver. does, was a subject of dispute among the Arabic grammarians. He points out that the Massoretic punctuation favours the first rendering. LXX render slightly differently, «' tovto iirotrjo-as ; so Vulg. quare hoc feci sti ? On the dag. in the t of nNl, see on 2, 18. 14. "i;n bm nnN itin. lxx, imKardparos di d™ irdvrcov k.t.\. Vulg. maledictus es inter omnia, etc. Render as the Vulg. ' Cursed art thou among all beasts', i. e. ' marked out by a curse from] etc. IP as in Ex. 19, 5. Deut. 14, 2. Judg. 5, 24. Amos 3, 2; cf. Ges, § 119. 3d. The other renderings, ' cursed by all beasts] i. e. ' these shall hate and abhor the serpent] or ' more cursed than] as apparently A. V, are untenable : for, as Knobel points out, the curse comes from God, not from the beasts, who had no reason to curse, and is aimed at the serpent only, not at the other beasts, as there is no ground assigned for cursing these. "pTT'D'1 ^3, ace. of time; cf. Ges, § 118. 3b; M.R.,§42. 15. 131 ®N~I *JQ1\I^ Nin. t?Ni and 3py are accusatives of nearer definition; cf. Ges, § 117. 5 d; M. R, § 44 and Rem. a; Ewald, § 281 c; Dav, S., § 71; so 37, 21 E>33 1333 N7; Deut. 33, 11 l*op D*3no j»no; Jer. 2, 16. Ps. 3, 8. Hebrew in this respect is analogous to Greek ; cf. rvdjXbs rd r &ra tov tc vovv t<£ t oupar' d, ' blind both in ears and mind and eyes art thou f /3A«rcB koKuiov T&ppar iKKCKoppivov, ' I see a jackdaw pecked out as io his eyes! s^B occurs again Job 9, 1 7. Ps. 139, 11. The only meaning which can be philologically defended CHAP. 3, VERS. 14, 15. 43 is 'crush! This meaning suits Job 9, 17, but not Ps. 139, 11. The alternative rendering is, 'lie in wait for] a kindred form with ?|NB> 'to pant after] cf. Amos 8, 4 ; it suits Ps. 139, 11 (cf. Del. in loc.) better than 'crush] but a word = ' cover ' is required there : hence some read there *33!ib'* , so Ew, Ges. in Th. t\\V=' to crush' is justified by the Aramaic usage of tpv and &£. or .a£, e.g. in Onq, Deut. 9, 21 n*n* n*aB»1 'and I crushed it] i.e. the calf; Targ. on Job 14, 19 N|?3N N*D N3*E> 'the water crushes the stones] And in Ex. 32, 20 (Pesh.) IJIsculs c*4*.o (=Heb. jnO*l) 'and crushed (better scraped) it with a file! [It should be remarked that in Syriac the roots .so*, and ¦»»• are confounded one with the other, as Bernstein points out 1. c.J Cf. Levy, Chald. Wbrterb. ; Bernst., Lex. Syr. sub voce. Di. admits that the meaning ' crush ' suits the first part of the clause, i. e. the man's crushing the serpent's head, but denies its application to the serpent, and adopts the rendering ' lie in wait for] which he attempts to justify by appealing to *p.V ; but this meaning is not so certain as the meaning 'crush] and the double ace after the rendering 'lie in wait for' is difficult. ?]1B> is applied to the serpent in the second half of the verse by a kind of zeugma, the same verb being used to express the mutual nature of the enmity (Kal.); compare Del.5, and Tuch, 2nd ed, who compares 'feriri a serpente] Pliny, xxix. 4. 22. The Vss. render variously. In the LXX the reading varies, both rrfpijo-ei . . . njp^o-«s (Swete) and Teip^im . . . reiprjo-eis occurring. The Vulg. has 'ipsa conlerel caput tuum, et tu insidiaberis calcaneo ejus;' but *$V cannot have a different meaning in each half of the sentence. Pesh. has fcjjo yi»» j».o,j 001 o,^«<-. uja,*yl, using different words in the two parts of the clause, but giving tfltf a similar sense in each half. Onq. paraphrases wi flNl ppipta n*> ni3yi no [$] 1*31 Nn; Nin 44 GENESIS, I N31D7 n*7 103 ' he will remember against thee what thou hast done to him from the beginning, and thou wilt guard against him to the end] Targg. Jon. and Jer. paraphrase widely, but seem to have rendered *fiV 'crush! 1 6. nilN min 'with a multiplying, I will multiply] i.e. ' I will greatly multiply ;' cf. the rule on 2, 16. n31 has two forms for the inf. abs. Hifil: (i) <13in (which would be the regular form) used as an adverb; (2) n3in, see Ges, § 75. iv. Rem. 15: only here and 16, 10. 22, 17. ^31im "pi^l*. Not a hendiadys, ' the pain of thy con ception] but ' thy pain and (especially) thy conception : ' waw attaching the particular 1,31m to the general *]33*;y; cf. Ps. 18, 1. Is. 2, 1; and see Ges, § 154, foot-note b. |1in is an abnormal formation, which occurs nowhere else in the O. T. The abs. state is fVnn (Hos. 9, 11. Ruth 4, 13). cstr. fi*in; with suffix Tjtfnn and shortened ^IJiiri; see Stade, § 296. 2. fnpltrn. The LXX here, and 4, 7, render with dm>- o-rpodjri, possibly reading -jn312Tl ; cf. their rendering in 1 Sam. 7,17. Frankel, Einfiuss, p. 10, suggests that the LXX render ing is a free euphemistic translation of the Heb. word. The word i1plE>n is only found once again outside the book of Genesis, viz. in the Song of Songs 7, 1 1 mplKTl *7yi *1117 *3N ; LXX, iya> ra dS(\cf>iSu> pov, Kal in ipi 17 ima-Tpodjrj avrov. 17. 0"TN71 . On the pointing tnt&j, adopted by some, see the note on 2, 20. |"1ulD . The LXX (iv rots epyois aov) and Vulg. (' in opere tuo') seem to have read *]1l3y, which they apparently took as irn*3y;. Tuch considers the variant as perhaps due to the parallel passage 4, 12. Cf. also Geiger, Urschrift, p. 456. 18. TTVYl yip. Cf. Hos. 10, 8. Only in Isaiah do we CHAP. 3, VERS. 16-20. 45 find the phrase n*2>1 1*05?, e. g. Is. 5, 6. 1111 occurs but once again in Hos. 1. c. n?DN1. Notice the place of the tone, which has been thrown forward one place by waw conv. with the perfect ; see for details, Driver, §§ 106, no : cf. also Ges, § 49. 3; M. R, § 23 ; and Dav, § 23. 3. 19. 0n7 v3Nn. For position of tone, see note on 4, i7- nftnNn 7N "pittt ly. On the construction, see Ges, § 114. 2. 3; M. R, § in b; Dav, S., §§ 91, 92 ; cf. on 2, 4. Render, 'until thou return;' "pity (as Arabic shews; see Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 311) is to be regarded as a subst. in the genitive case after ly . Cf. Ges., 1. c. 1 b. n2!DO "O. Some render, 'from which thou wast taken] lit. 'which from it thou wast taken;' *3 being regarded as equivalent to the relative lt?N; so in 4, 25; for constr. cf. Ges, § 138. 1 ; M. R, § 156 : so all the Vss. here and in 4, 25, except the Sam, which has I*2& here and TiJ in 4, 25. But as the passages cited in defence of this are not conclusive, it is better to render 'for' here and in 4, 25. ' Until thou returnest unto the ground; for thou wast taken from it' (pause, this half of the verse being marked off from the second half by Aihnach [— ], the second strongest prose accent) : 'for dust thou art] etc. 20. mn='Z^' or 'Living] not 'Life-giver! n;n=,TO, the form used here is antiquated in Heb, but Nin=,1*n vixit, is preserved iri Phoenician (Di.). LXX here Zaij, in the other passage where it occurs (4, 1) Eila. Zwjj is probably intentionally used by the LXX, being occasioned by the ex planatory addition "131 ,m*n Nin *3. Cf. also C. P. Ges, sub voc. 46 GENESIS, 22. 'And Yahweh Elohim said, Behold the man hath become as one of us, so as to know . . . and now that he may not stretch forth his hand and take] etc. 12T2D inN3 . On the construct state before the prepo sition, see Ges, § 130. 1; M. R., § 73. Rem. a; Dav, S., § 35. R. 2. It is especially frequent with inN and |0, Lev. 13, 2. Num. 16, 15. 1 Sam. 9, 3. 1 Kings 19, 2, etc. 131 r\y~r?='so as to know:' cf. 1 Sam. 12, 17 D37 7Nty7 170; Prov. 26, 2 epy7 11113 1137 H3S3. On this gerundial usage of the inf. with 7, see Driver, § 205 ; Dav, S., § 93. }D is used here independently, as in Ex. 13, 17; cf. Ewald, § 337 b; M. R, § 164 b; 'without indicating that the sentence which it introduces is dependent on another.' See also Ges, § 152,1 i. The formula, 'For he said . .. to,' occurs frequently, and always implies that some precaution is taken by the speaker to prevent what he fears happening; e.g. Ps. 38, 17 (compare Del, Die Psalmen6, ad loc); Gen. 38, n. 42, 4, Ex. 13, 17, etc. Cf. Dav, S., § 127 c. np71. The perfect with waw conv. after the imperfect with ja; so 19, 19 *noi . . . *3p3in ;a; Ex. 1, 10 n*m ,131* fa. Three times (Ps. 2, 12. Jer. 51, 46. Prov. 31, 5) we find the imperf. repeated after |S, instead of a perf. with waw conv.; see Driver, §115 end, §116; Ges, §112. 3 c. a; Dav, .£,§530. ""Pn . Perf. with waw conv. pointed with pretonic qamec ; so 19, 19 *npi (notice the tone; cf. the note there); 44, 22 npi : see on 1, 2. "n is perf. from *TI : see Ges, § 76. 2 g; Dav, § 42. 24. Cll-On nN 'the cherubim! These appear in the Old Testament always in connection with God's manifesting himself to the world. In the tabernacle they hovered over CHAP. 3, VERS. 22-24. 47 the ark (Ex. 25, 18 ff.). In Solomon's temple they are repre sented as stationed on the floor of the Holy of Holies, spread ing out their wings from one side to the other (1 Kings 6, 23. 1 Chron. 28, 18). In Ez. 1 and 10 they form God's living chariot, in which he appears to the prophet ; and in Ps. 1 8, 11. 2 Sam. 22, 11 God is represented as riding on a cherub to judgment : cf. Ps. 80, 2. 1 Sam. 4, 4. 2 Sam. 6, 2, where God is described as "3n 3K>1*. From 1 Kings, l.c, we find that the cherub had an upright form, partly human, with one face (Ex. 25, 20), two wings (1 Kings 6, 24), and possibly hands. In Ez. 1 and 10 a somewhat fuller and different description of the cherubim is given : ' with the similitude of a man, four wings' (Ez. 1, 11. 23), two of which served to cover their bodies, and with two of which they flew ; and under their wings human hands (Ez. 1, 8. 10, 7. 8. 21), with four faces (Ez. 1, 10. 10, 14), one human, one that of a lion, one that of an ox, and one that of an eagle, and the soles of their feet like those of a calf (Ez. 1, 7). Lastly (Ez. 1, 18. 10, 12 ; cf. Rev. 4, 6), their whole body was studded with eyes. It is uncertain whence the Hebrews derived their idea of the cheru bim ; possibly the winged forms on the Assyrio-Babylonian and Egyptian monuments exercised some influence on their con ception of the cherub, but it is doubtful whether they borrowed the idea from either the Egyptians or Assyrians (cf. the author ities cited below). The etymology of the word is uncertain, (i) Some con nect it with the Aramaic o*a, 313 aravit ; so 1T\'2=arator, bos: cf. Ez. 10, 14 with 1, 10. (ii) Another view is that 3113 is transposed for 3131=' chariot] i.e. 'the divine chariot:' cf. 1 Chron. 28, 18, where the D*3113 are explained by n*33n n33lon ; so Rodig. in Ges, Thes.; M. and V, H. W.B., 1 ith ed. (iii) Hyde (quoted by Ges, Thes., p. 710) considers that 48 GENESIS, 3H3=311p, i.e. 'he who is near God] 'his servant] (iv) Maurer on Is. 6, 2 explains 3113 as from 313=D13, Arab. + S 'nobilis fuit] (v) Another view is that 3113 is to be connected with the Arab. l_j.S ' adstringere] so 3113 ' a strong being ' (Rosen- miiller); cf. viii. (vi) Ges. in the Thes. proposes a derivation from 313= Din, Arab. ^a. 'prohibuit a communi usu] 3113 = 'custos] 'satelles] i.e. Dei, 'qui profanos arcet.' All these are most precarious and improbable, (vii) Vatke, see Ges, Thes., 711, assigned a Persian origin to the word, regarding it as the same as the Greek ypity, ypvnos, ' quod a Pers. CfUi/j(greifen) prehendere, tenere, derivabat Chr. Th. Tychsen (Heeren's Idem, i. p. 386), vel idem esse volunt atqueypra-or naso adunco nostrove praeditus.' (viii) Del, Par., 154, connects it with an Assyrian root ' kardbu ' (from which an adj. ' kariibu ' is derived)='/o be great, powerful;' cf. Schr, C. 0. T, p. 39. The word reads like a foreign one, but it seems that nothing can be affirmed as to its meaning with certainty. See further, Di. in Schenkel's Bibel Lex., 1. 509 ff; Keil, Bib. Arch., 2nd ed, i. 92 ff; Winer3, R. W.B.; Riehm, H. W.B., art. Cherubim; Del. Comm? and Di. Comm. on this passage ; also Cheyne, art. Cherub, in Ency. Brit. 1^1 linn ttrO nNI ' and the blade of the waving sword] ¦^O^' The article (pointed according to Ges, § 35. 2 A; Dav, § 11 b) is placed before the genitive, and not before the cstr. state, cf. Ges, §125.1; M. R., § 76. II. a ; Dav, S., § 20. n3Dnn?3n, Iit.= 'the one turning itself 'about:' cf. on 2,11; also M. R, § 92. Rem. a. The form is a participle fem. sing. Hithpa'el of 1.31, being formed as a segholate noun, and so accented on the penult.: see Ges, § 95. Rem. 2. 3; Dav, add. notes to 3rd Dec. CHAP. 3, VER. 24 CHAP. 4, VER. I. 49 O^nn \y yn nN 'the way to the tree of life:' so 16, 7 115? 1,11 'the way to Shur;' 38, 14 nn30n "pi 'the way to Timnah;' 48, 7 ni3N 1113 'on the way lo Ephralh! Cf. Ges, § 128. 2 b ; Dav, S., § 23. Hebrew uses the cstr. state (implying belonging to) to denote ideas which are made clearer in English by the use of a preposition. 1. STf 'to get to know] 'make the acquaintance of] so euphemistically ¦=¦' concubuit cum ea;' used again in this sense vers. 17. 25. 24, 16, and often. This meaning has passed over into Hellenistic Greek ; cf. yiyvwo-Kew, often used by the LXX for the Hebrew yi*, e.g. here. Cf. also in the New Testament, Luke 1, 34 eWi avSpa oi yiyv£>o-Ko-Kev airfjVz=ot^AaJL Do. ]",p ' Kain] elsewhere a nom. app. = ' spear] 2 Sam. 21, 16, or a nom. prop, of a people, Num. 24, 22. Judg. 4, 11. The text here seems to connect )*p with the root n3p 'to gain] 'acquire;' but this explanation must not be regarded as an etymology. The name was given, not because it was derived from n3p, but as recalling to mind this word: compare such proper names as n3 , bvHGV, ,1E>0 (not derived from, but recalling to mind ntPO). Gesenius derives pp here from [*p= ' to forge] Arab. ^jU, ^^3, 'a smith] Syr. J.1L£ ; and supposes that f*2 in this passage means ' spear] as in 2 Sam. 21, 16. mn* nN. LXX, M too Oeoi. Pesh. Ju^N 'for the Lord] Onq. ** Qli? IP 'from before Yahweh! Vulg. 'per Deum] The Targ. of Ps.-Jon. has *p. N??i>p-n: N13j|> *n*3pT ' I have gotten as man the angel of the Lord] possibly meaning E 50 GENESIS, the Messiah. The nN has been variously explained. I. Di. and others render ' with Yahweh] i. e. through his assistance, with his help ; so LXX, though it is uncertain whether Sid is a free rendering, or whether they had nNO for nN in their text, and similarly the Vulg. and Onqelos. Elsewhere, to be sure, we find Dy used in this sense, and not nN ; cf, for example, i Sam. 14, 45 rwy D',17N Dy *3 ; still nN may be regarded as synonymous with Dy, as may be inferred from its alternative usage with Dy in the phrase ' to be with one] i. e. help him; cf. 26, 3 "joy with 21, 20 iy3n nN. 28, 15. 31, 3 Dy, but 26, 24. 39, 2 nN. II. a. Others (Luther, etc.) render ' / have gained a man, the Lord;' mn* nN being a second ace of nearer definition, so 6, 10 GV nN D*33 ,1B'7E'; 26, 34; Judg. 3, 15; Eve supposing she had given birth to the Messiah; see Ps.-Jon, above, b. Or as TJmbreitt ' I possess as a man, Yahweh] B**N ace of the predicate. But against a it may be urged that there is nothing in the text to justify the idea that Eve thought she had given birth to the Messiah (cf. also 3, 15) ; and against b that it gives no explanation of the name of the child. 2. nib? fpm 'and she bare again;' cf. ver. 12. The finite verb in Hebrew corresponds to the adverb in our idiom. We find other verbs used in Hebrew to express adverbs, e. g. ino 'to hasten;' cf. Ges, § 120. 1 f. (cf. also § 114. 2. Rem. 3); M. R, §114 a; Dav, S., § 82. fpl ]N2 nm bin W1. ppi is placed before the verb to which it belongs in order to slightly emphasize the con trast between the occupations of Kain and Abel. M. R, § 131. 1 b. Rem. c, compares piv . . . Si in Greek. 73n has been explained as meaning 'a breath] 'nothing] possibly with reference to his short life ; but it is doubtful if the name can CHAP. 4, VERS. 2-4. 51 be brought into connection with this, meaning. It has also been suggested that 73n might be a variation of 73* ver. 20. See Ew, f. B. vi. 7 ff. Others connect the word with the Assyr. ablu=son; cf. C.O.T. Gloss, s.v. 73n. njH is a participle in the cstr. state, 'a shepherd of;' ny/l would be the abs. state, and '&& would then be in the ace case. Both constructions are possible, cf. 22, 12 D*n7N Ni* with Ex. 9, 20 njn* 131T1N NTn,- see other examples in Ges, §116. 3; M. R, §121; Dav, S., §98. 3. nQO . The prep. IP must be taken here in a partitive sense, 'some of] cf. 8, 20 non3n-7ao np*1; 27, 28 D*,17N "|7 jn*1 700; Ex. 1 2, 7. Ges, § 1 19. 3 d. foot-note 1; Dav, S., § 101. R. c. nn2D. 1. 'a gift] 2. 'an offering (to God),' but not to be taken in this passage in its more restricted sense 'the meal offering] as opposed to n3T, 'the meat offering! The LXX render it here by dvo-Lav. 4. 'And Abel too brought! D3 with the pronoun repeated is emphatic; cf. ver. 26 Nin D3 nt??l. jnaVnEl, scriptio defectiva, for p*37n01. The sing, form of the word would be jn37n. Other instances of scriptio defectiva are, 1, 21 Dn3*07. Job 42, 10 Vljn for Vl*jn. Ex. 33, *3 I?"1"1 for T?-n; see Ges, § 91. 2. Rem. 1. 'The singular would be permissible here (Lev. 8, 16. 25), but would not express the plurality of animals so distinctly ' (Di.). The plural here, as in Lev. 6, 5, = 'fat pieces! In the Levitical service the offering of the first-born of the flock and their fat portions is enjoined; cf. Num. 18, 17. Render, 'and (indeed) of their fat pieces! The waw is waw explica- tivum, see Ges, § 154. foot-note b, and cf. Judg. 7, 22. 1 Sam. 17, 40. Is. 57, 11 ; Dav, S., § 136. R. c. yCPI. Impf. Qal from T\yv, apocopated from nyp*, E 2 52 GENESIS, yE'*=yB'*; cf. Ges, § 75. Rem. 1. 3a,b,c; so 10! from nin* in ver. 5. The verb nyv is rare in prose. 5. 'ppb "l!~P1. So 18, 30. 32. 31, 36, and often. I. Either p)N may be understood, ' it (anger) was hot for Kain] or II. mn may be taken impersonally, * it was hot to Kain] On this impersonal use of the 3rd perf. sing, cf. Ges, § 144. 2; M. R, § 124 ; Dav, S., § 109. 7. Render, 'Is there not, if thou doest well, lifting up? and if thou doest not well, at the door sin croucheth ; and towards thee is its desire, but thou oughtest to rule over it] nNp (for nNE> inf. cstr. of NtM, cf. Ges, § 76. 2 a) must be explained from the phrase D*3a NtJ>3 = ' to lift up (one's own) face] the opposite of D*33 1733 in verse 6 ; so Tuch, Ke, Del, and Di. : cf. also the usage of language in Job 10, 15. 11, 15. 22, 26. Lifting up of the face = ' cheerfulness, joy ;' falling of the face, ' sadness or moroseness! The Vss. render variously. LXX has ovk idv 6p8as TipoacviyKjjs, opBas 8e pr) StiXr/s, rjpapres ; fjo-ixao-ov, possibly connecting nN^ with nN&O 43, 34, and reading nn37 instead of nns?, and perhaps J*31 nNpn instead of */3l nNpn; cf. their rendering of }>31 in Job 11, 19. Pesh. has, >^i J4-. jjWvs. &*X $ VU i^AS OuJr vda ' Behold if thou doest well thou receivest ; and if thou doest not well, at the door sin croucheth] taking riNB' in the sense of receiving ; so Vulg. ' Nonne si bene egeris recipies, sin autem male, statim in foribus peccalum aderit] but this is not in keeping with the context. Onq. has, ^13iy 3*Oin-DN N^l liny. 1*03. nNpn nj*i Di*b Tjiaiy 3*p*,n «b dni *\b p*anV* $ panf* 3inn-DNi: 3inn-N^-DN ija*p Nyian*Nb 'if thou doest thy work well thou wilt be pardoned ; but if thou doest not thy work well, for the day of judgment the sin is laid up, ready to take vengeance upon thee, if thou dost not repent; but if thou CHAP. 4, VERS. 5-8. 53 repentest thou shalt be forgiven] paraphrasing, but taking nN'C in the sense 'forgive:' this rendering of Onqelos' is also out of harmony with the context. ^11 nNttn nnDb. ' Sin is at the door (cf. Prov. 9, 14) a lurker] Sin is compared to a ravenous beast lying in wait for its prey ; perhaps a lion is here intended (cf. the Arabic name for the lion ^i^l 'the Her in wait'); cf. 1 Pet. 5, 8. As nNOn is fem, J>31 must be taken as a substantive, on the construction cf. M. R, § 135. 4a; Ewald, § 318 a; Kalisch, Heb. Gram., I. § 77. 13; and Ges., § 145. 7 b. Rem. 3. This is the ordinary explanation of the verse. It is possible, however, that the text is corrupt. The mention of the ' house door ' is strange, and the lion can hardly be described as lurking outside the door of a dwelling-place, nor are the words npltWl and 13 7tJ''on very suitable expressions in this connection. Di. suggests as an emendation nV31 or fSIR and nnpltWjl and ns . ' Sin ' would then be figuratively de picted as a woman who tempts or leads astray. On the trans, of the LXX here, see Del.5 ad loc. 8. "ijl \y "lEN^I. LXX, Itala, Pesh, Vulg, Sam, Targ. Jer. have given in their translations ni'KM ,1373, which does not stand in the Mass. text ; and it is not improbable that these Versions have preserved the original text. Frankel, Einfl., p. 55, certainly objects to ,1373 on the ground that a Hebrew would say KM, not '1373, and regards the addition in the LXX as a gloss ; but though this is the more usual phrase, yet we have 27, 5 mfeM \Vy 17*1 ; Ruth 2, 2 N3 ,137N nit^n, cf. also Lagarde, Symm. i. 57. Some MSS. note a lacuna here [NpD3] ; two expressly note no lacuna (N73 NpD3, Wright) ; and according to Del.4 it is doubtful whether the NpD3 is found in the best authorities. Del.6 renders, 54 GENESIS, 'And Kain said it to his brother] etc., explaining (on the analogy of 2 Chron. 1, 2 f. and 32, 24) that what Kain said may be easily perceived from what follows. But in 2 Chron. 1, 2 f. ION = nix , and the explanation is hardly so natural as to suppose an omission of 'let us go into the field] Some (Bott, Kn.) read 101^*1, cf. 2 Sam. 11, 16 'he laid in wait for! Tuch, comparing Ex. 19, 25, where he takes 10N1 D1*7N (as ION is always followed by what is said) in the sense ' Moses spake to the people what God had said to him] ver. 7 (cf. Ewald, § 303 b, 2), renders, 'And Kain said it] viz. what God had said to him. This is, according to Di, improbable. He also points out that 10N*1 is not =131)1, and that in Ex, l.c, an extract from one document (J) abruptly terminates (leaving ION without an object), in order that the compiler may make use of another of his sources (E) ; cf. Driver, Introd., p. 29. 131 OnYTO, lit. 'In their being in the field] i.e. 'when they were in the field] LXX, iv ra chat avrovs k.t.X., cf. 2, 4 DN13,13 and the note there, and see Dav, S., § 92. 10. IVOiy nD. no pointed with — before the guttural with — , according to Ges, § 37. 1 ; Dav, § 13, Dav-> s> § 34- R- 2. Y\y='sin] including its consequence, punishment, which is represented as a burden heavy to bear; cf. Is. 24, 20. Ps- 38, 5- NitoO , inf. cstr. with the 3 retained, Ges, § 76. 2 a ; cf. Num. 20, 21 |h? and Gen. 38, 9 103, by the side of the more usual form nn. The Vss. mostly render, 'My trans gression is greater than forgiving] i. e. ' too great lo be forgiven] 56 GENESIS, which is grammatically possible, but not so suitable here, as in ver. 14, Kain speaks of his punishment, not with a view to its removal through the forgiveness of his offence, but with a desire that it should be mitigated. 14. "'NSJft 73=' every one that findeth me] lit. ' my finder! The participle may either govern its case like the verb, or may stand as a substantive in the cstr. state followed (as here) by a suffix or a genitive; cf. Ges, § 116. 3 ; M. R, § 121 ; cf. also § 80. 2 a and Gen. 32, 12 inN NI* • timens eum] 23, 10. 18 n*y iyt!> *N3; Ex. 1, 4 3py* -p* *nx*. Comp. note on ver. 2. 15. ^p 3in 73, casus absolutus, 'Every one that slay eth Kain, he (Kain) shall be avenged' (cf. ver. 24); or impersonally 'vengeance shall be taken] cf. the Nif. in Ex. 21, 20, and the Hof. in ver. 21: and this is perhaps preferable, the change of subject involved in the first way being a little harsh, though perhaps supported by ver. 24. |*p 31,1 73=' every one, or any one, that killeth] is virtually a hypothetical sentence, 'if any one kills Kain;' cf. ver. 14. 9, 6, and Driver, p. 147, foot-note 2 ; Ges, 116. 5. Rem. 5 ; Ewald, § 341 e ; Dav, S., § 132. R. 2. UT\yit=' sevenfold] so D*ny31N, 2 Sam. 12, 6, 'four fold;' see Ges, § 97. Rem. 1. It may be interpreted, with Tuch, as meaning, Kain's murder shall be avenged with a vengeance seven times greater than the vengeance taken on Abel's; sevenfold meaning, as in Prov. 24, 16, 'manifold] ' many times! Cf. also Dav, S., § 38. R. 5. Op"1 does not mean 'shall be punished, shall suffer punish ment] so perhaps LXX, ; Onq. J*j£ *.* *«* "131 WIN. T T inN ni3n ^717 , not ini3n *n737, because that might mean 'that he might not smite;' cf. Ges., § 117. 1. Rem. 3. The usual order is here departed from, and the object coming after the infinitive precedes the subject; cf. Ges, § 115. 3 Rem.; Ewald, § 307b: see also Is. 20, 1 inN xbvi J131D. Prov. 25, 8 lyi inN D*73,13. 73 . . . *n?37 = ' ^ no one] just as 73 N7='«o one;' cf. 3, 1 fS 730 73Nn N7 'thou shalt eat of no tree] and see also Dav, S., §§ 95, 148. 16. 112 must be the name of a place, as we may infer from 3tP*l, and its position after pN and before noip ; not an apposition to the subject, as Hieron, Quaest. p. 9 o-dKev- opcvns, i.e. instabilis et fluctuans . . . , the Vulg. ' profugus in terra] connecting 113 with 13 'to wander] and Onq, who render Wppi \^ . The position of 113 is as uncertain as that of the garden of Eden. The narrative regards it as lying 58 GENESIS, towards the east, perhaps (cf. py FlOlp) on the east of Eden. J, however, always uses '? W^O=' east of] cf. 2, 8. 3, 24. 11, 2. 13, 11, so possibly py noip here, is an addition by the author of 2, 10-14; cf. Di., p. 98. 113=' banishment! 17. *|12n = ' dedication] from "]3n 'to dedicate] prob. a denom. from the root of ~\T\ 'a gum '. (for SJ3IJ), prop. ' io rub the gums;' so in Arabic ; it being customary to rub the gums of new-born children with date syrup, which was regarded as an act of dedication or initiation into life; cf. Del.6, p. 125, Prov. 22, 6. ~Vy n23 ''n^l 'and he was building a city] i.e. at the time when "]i3n was born, the city was not completed, otherwise the narrator would have written n33 (pf.) or |3»1 (impf. with waw conver.). Other instances where the subst. verb n*,1 is added to the participle to mark more prominently the duration of the action (i.e. that it is incomplete) are to be found in 37, 2 ,iyi n*,1 'was shepherding ;' 39, 22 TWy ,1*,1; see on 1, 6. Ryssel, however, De Elohist. Pent, sermone, p. 59, takes this passage differently, his words are ' Prorsus aliter res Se habet Gen. 4, 17, ubi participium loco nominis ponitur ["Sladle- bauer"] ; ' so Del.6, Di. The former rendering seems simpler. For conjectures as to the city 1l3n, see Di, p. 99. < "VJ* n33. The retrogression of the tone in ,133 is due to the following tone-syllable in l*y. Two tone-syllables usually do not come together, either the first word is accented on the penult, or deprived of all accent by being connected with the second by Maqqef ; cf. Ges, § 29. 3 b ; Driver, § 100 : so 1, 5 i17*i5N1p. 3) I9 Dn^^Nn. 21, 5 17 I7in3. 39) 14 133 pnsi>. 18. TVJ* . , . ITTI. The passive verb is followed by the ace case, as in 17, 5. 21, 5. 27, 42. 40, 20, etc. ; cf. Ges, § 121. 1 ; Ewald, § 295b; M. R, § 47; Dav, £.,§§ 79, 81. R. 3. CHAP. 4, VERS. 17, 18. 59 The meanings of some of the nomina propria which follow are very obscure ; cf. Di. ad loc. and Budde, Urgesch., p. 1 24 f. T^y may mean ' he who flees] or ' the one who flees] from my, Arab, ^s- 'to flee! LXX give it by rinD Ges, Thes. ' man that is of God] being composed of VlO, i.e. no with the old case ending }, which is found again in n7Eino and 7N133; cf. Ges., § 90. 3 b; Stade, § 344 b, and esp. Driver, p. 238 : of V, the relative pronoun, in Assyrian sha, and of 7N ' God! no is preserved in Ethiopic, where it often has the meaning 'husband] as Is. 54, 1. Luke 2, 36. Gen. 2, 23, in the Ethiopic version ; see Di, Ethiop. Lex., p. 183. The relative V is not found in the Pentateuch, unless we adopt the view of some interpreters who consider 0355*3 in 6, 3 to consist of 3, V, and D3; and ni'B' in 49, 10 to be equivalent to i"w, i.e. 1? 1^N:. It is found in Judg. 5, 7. 6, 17, where it may be due to a north Palestinian dialect, and in the Song of Songs ; also in later writings, e. g. Eccles, Lam, late Pss. ; while in Phoenician (see Schroder, Phon. Gram., pp. 162-166, and the inscriptions cited by him, note 2, p. 162) t^N is the common form, the form 1B>N being never used. This explanation of the name 7Ntfino is corroborated by the Assyrian; cf. Hommel, Z.D.M.G., xxxii. 714, and Lenor., Les Origines de V Histoire'1, p. 262 f. It is, however,. against the analogy of compound proper names like 7N13S, ¦ 7N1DE> etc, which have no B\ If '^—' man of God] we should expect the form 7Ninp, rather than 7N0no. A less probable 60 GENESIS, explanation is 'Man of Entreaty' from v&V and no. The LXX have Madovardka. ^7, 1"1^X*1 . 17* is generally used of the mother, and the Hif. 1*71,1 of the father ; cf. io, 8 ff. 22, 23. 1JT37. cannot be explained from the Hebrew. In Arabic eIJo = ' a strong young man ; ' possibly "\cb is to be connected with this. 19. Lamech was the first to introduce polygamy, in opposi tion to the divine injunction in 2, 24. The names of the wives are given here because it is necessary for the understanding of the song. TTiy = ' adornment;' nW -shade:' but these two meanings are not quite certain. "'¦Pity constr. of Cftf. According to Ges, § 97. 1. foot note 1, the dag. lene after a vocal shewa is due to the fact that the full form of word was D^N. According to Stade, p. 216, ' a*ntf is formed after the analogy of 0*3B> from D*ntV.' 20. The names in this verse are very obscure ; cf. Di. for explanations that have been attempted. TOpfil 7nN ntiriV Jabal was the father of those who dwelt (the sing, taken collectively) in tents, and had cattle, i. e. the first to introduce nomad life. 3Bi* is connected by zeugma with ,l3pO; cf. Hos. 2, 20. Is. 42, 5. Josh. 4, 10. 2W> with the ace. or gen. of the place that is dwelt in, so Ps. 22, 4 7NTe» ni7,in 3tW; cf. Is. 33, 14, where 113* is construed with an ace of the place dwelt in. n2pE 'possession] then 'possession of cattle] a wider idea than [NX; it comprehends also (e.g. 26, 14. 47, 17) larger cattle, sometimes camels and asses ; cf. Ex. 9, 3. Job 1, 3. 21. "lJ.1 113D ben 73 vjif. 'The father of all those who CHAP. 4, VERS. 19-22. 6l handle harp and pipe! LXX somewhat freely, 6 Kara&eigas ijraXTripiov Kal Ki6dpav. 1*.23, according to Ewald (Lehrbuch, § 79 d, § 118 a), who seeks to connect it with aBdpa, is abbreviated from 1FI33 or "*h33. According to H W. B., nth ed, it is a modified form of 133; cf. ni33, Arab. Yp£, Aramaic "133, N1133, )|ia; from 133 an assumed onomato poeic root1, Josephus, Arch., vii. 12. 3, describes it as being ten-stringed, and says that it was touched with the plectrum, but cf. 1 Sam. 16, 23. 18, 10. 19, 9. where David is said to touch it with his hand. 3315* occurs only four times in the Old Testament ; here, Job 21, 12. 30, 31 (see Baer in loco, p. 50). Ps. 150, 4; and is taken by the LXX (uddpav) and Pesh, (]£ia) as a string-instrument; it is better to take it with Targ. Jer, LXX in Ps. 150, and Rabb. &s='ptpe] perhaps 'a shepherds pipe! In the Hebrew translation of the Aramaic parts of Daniel it is used in 3, 5. 10. 15 for n*31301D. 22. ttTin 73 ttJZD7. 'A sharpener (or hammerer) of every kind of instrument of brass and iron! The A.V. takes Va? in a metaphorical sense ' a sharpener] i. e. ' instructor of every worker in brass] etc.; R.V. 'forger;' Marg. 'an instructor! tjnn=' an instrument' does not occur again in the O. T. ; the passage (1 Kings 7, 14) cited in H. W. B., nth ed, being an instance of its ordinary meaning, ' workman! The rendering above given is that of Tuch, Del, and most moderns. Dillmann, however, in his note on the passage remarks: 'This explanation, which since Tuch is the one usually adopted, is hardly the meaning of the Mas- soretes, who — judging from the accent on tJ>07 and the pronunciation B>in (where one would rather expect Bnn) — 1 Barth., N. B., p. 65, is of opinion that 1133 = Arab. ^\ 62 GENESIS, perhaps supplied (cf. Targ.?) *3N from ver. 21, before 73, ' a hammerer, (father) of every brass and iron smith! The falling out of *3N must have been very old, as the Vss. do not give it. The LXX have Kal rpi crdjvpoKorros x10y3 = ' die Liebliche, the amiable, lovely one! 23, 24. Lamech's Song. It consists of three verses, each containing two lines. It may be rendered thus : 23 (a). 'Ada and Zillah hear my voice;' (0). ' Ye wives of Lamech, give ear unto my speech :' (a). ' Surely a man have I slain for wounding me] ($). ' And a young man for bruising me:' 2 4 («)• ' If Kain shall be avenged sevenfold] (/3). ' Then Lamech seven and seventy/old! With ver. 23, cf. Isa. 28, 23. 32, 9. CHAP. 4, VERS. 23-25. 63 23. ]S»iOty for ,13yp?>; cf. f?1.p, Ex. 2, 20, and Ges, § 46. Rem. 3; Stade, § 612 a. Possibly the text should in each case be emended, }5?P^ being punctuated jyptf, and ?£"!?. Jtfji? ; cf. Ruth 1, 20. 13 not 'for] nor = the on recitativum, of the N. T, intro ducing the words of the speaker (as e.g. 21, 30); but = 'certainly, surely;' cf. Ex. 4, 25. "•niinS . . . ',S7*iD7. The suffixes are objective; cf. Ges, § 135. 4 ; M. R., § 78 ; Dav., S., § 23. Cf. LXX, ch rpaipa ipol . . . els poihuma ipoi. So Vulg. b =' on account of ;' cf. M. R, § 51. 4; Ges, § 119. 3 c; see Num. 16, 34 D71p7. The perfects may best be taken, with the Vss., as real perfects, and not as perfects of certainty. Lamech has killed men and will not, should necessity occasion it, hesitate to kill others. Jewish fancy narrates that Lamech killed Kain (tJ**N) and Tubal Kain (^J). But only one act is intended, the repetition being due to the parallelism common in Hebrew poetry. The song is probably a triumphal song on the invention of war weapons. Lamech boasts that if Kain would be avenged sevenfold, surely he, with his instruments, would be able to take a far greater vengeance (seventy-sevenfold). For a mere wound inflicted on him, he has punished the inflicter with death ; and in the possession of his weapons he feels himself superior to his ancestors, and able to dispense with divine protection. The poetical words piNn and ,110N and the parallelism which is observed throughout the three verses are noticeable. 25. rW = Salz, Selzling, and then Ersatz, ' substitute! ''bTltiJ ,3 . Qamec remains, notwithstanding the Maqqef, 64 GENESIS, and is on this account marked with firm Metheg ; see Ges., § 16. 2 b; cf. § 9. 12. Rem. 1 d. }*p 131,1 *3; cf. on 3, 19. 26. Nin 03 nffibl. The pronoun is repeated separately, to emphasize the noun ; cf.Ges, § 135. 2c; Ewald, § 3 1 1 a and § 314a; M. R, § 72. 1. R. a; Dav, S., § 1, cf. 10, 21. ti*TJN='0zara,' from BON 'to be weak;' or from tMN = the Arabic J-Jl ' lo attach oneself to] so animal sociabile. Cf. C. P. Ges, p. 60. bmn tN. The indeterminate 3rd pers. sing.; see Ges, § 144. 3 e, and the note on ver. 5 : cf. Lam. 5, 5 137 WW tih. The LXX have oZtos tfXmo-cv, perhaps reading ?nn and nt; cf. Frankel, Einfiuss, p. 41, on their reading. Onq. has f*5? *.*1 N0E?3 n^sb NK*3N *33 17? *,lioi*3 'thus in his days the children of men ceased praying in the name of the Lord;' so Ps.-Jon, taking ?nin as = ' profanari] and paraphrasing to avoid the idea of profaning Y.'s name, so that the com mencement of idolatry is here mentioned. This, however, is not probable. Aq. has correctly t6tc tjpxdr), also Sym- machus dpxt) iyivcro. Di. remarks on this verse: 'It is, moreover, quite possible that the original reading was 7fin (nt=) T, i.e. " This one began" (so LXX, Vulg, B. Jubil.), and 7ni,1 TN (so,' read as a passive, already in Aquila and Symmachus, but with the meaning dpXfi) stood in connection with the view taken by the Targum.' 0*2)3 Nlpb. Not merely 'to call with Yahweh's name] 'to mention Him;' but ' to worship Him] A short notice of the generations from Adam to Noah, connecting the history of the creation, the first chief event, CHAP. 4, VER. 26 CHAP. 5. 65 with that of the flood, the second important event in the narrative. The number of generations from Adam to Noah is ten. In the accounts of the first nine generations, the name of the first-born is always given, the age of the father at the time of his birth, the number of years which the father lived after the birth of his first-born, and the total length of his life. In the case of each, mention is made that he begat sons and daughters (n!331 D*33 171*1). In the notice of Noah however, no mention is made of the number of years he lived after the birth of his three sons, nor of the total number of his years when he died, this being narrated, chaps. 7, 11. 9, 28. On the deviations in the chronology followed by the Hebrew text, the LXX, and the Samaritan, cf. Di., p. no, and the authorities cited by him, p. 112 ; Del.6, Comm., p. 136, and more especially for the LXX chronology; Frankel, Einfiuss, p. 70. The following table, taken from Di, p. no, gives the variations in the chronology of the Hebrew, LXX, and Samaritan texts. Adam Heb. Text. Sam. Ver. Septuagint. 130 800 930 130 800 93° 230 700 93° Seth io5 807 912 io5 807 912 205 707 912 Enosh 90 815 9°5 9° 815 9°5 190 7i5 9°5 Kenan 70 840 910 70 840 910 170 740 910 Mahalalel 65 '830 895 65 830 «95 165 73° 895 Jared 162 800 962 62 785 847 162 800 962 Enoch 65 300 3<55 65 300 365 165 200 365 Methuselah 187 782 969 67 653 720 167 802 969 Lamech 182 595 777 53 600 653 188 565 753 Noah 500 ... 500 500 Up to the flood . 100 (95°) 100 (95°) 100 (95°) In each of the three tables marked Heb. Text, Sam. Ver, Septuagint, the first column gives the years each patriarch 66 GENESIS, lived until he begat children; the second, the number of years in each life after the birth of the first child ; and the third, the total number of years each individual lived. i. nnbin 1CD only here: elsewhere in Pni17in alone; cf. 2, 4. 6f 9. Num. 3, 1. 3. "l3l D^fiSbtZJ DIN TP1. nsv nNO is equally common with n3P nNO; cf. Ges, § 134. 1. Rem.; M. R, § 98. The ace. is ace of time, in answer to the question ' how long?' cf. M. R, § 42 a; Ges, § 118. 3b; Dav, S., § 68. ibVI , viz. a son or child. Olshausen proposes to insert J3 here, but unnecessarily, the object being contained in the verb, as in 6, 4 Dn7 117*1; 16, 1 17 ,117* N7. 5. "131 DTN "'D'1 73. The predicate usually, after 73, agrees with the genitive, and not with the noun in the cstr. state: 'cf. Ges, § 146. 1. R. 2 ; M. R, § 135. 3a; Dav., S., § 116. R. 2. TO© O^ffibffll mttj nNE) ytiln. The noun n:v repeated with the ten ; cf. Ges, § 134. 3 ; M. R, § 97. Rem. c. Dav., S., § 37. R. 3. *D is perf. from **n, as in 3, 22. 6. n3tt? nNTDl ?"'jCJ ffi»n. The noun repeated with the lesser number (from 3-9 inclusive) in the pi, and with the greater in the singular. See reference to Grammars in preceding note. 22. nN *TOn "pnn'n ; so Noah, 6, 9, walked with God ; cf. a similar use of the Qal in Mie 6, 8. Mai. 2,6. nN "]7nnn is used of confidential intercourse with God, a closer relation ship to God than is implied in 'walking before God' (17, 1), or, 'walking after God' (Deut. 13. 5); cf. 1 Sam. 25, 15 of the intercourse between David's followers and Nabal's ser vants. The LXX have here ~&vr\pio-ri)o-cv 8e 'Ej>a>x ro Qea, perhaps to avoid an anthropomorphic idea; cf. Ecclus. 44, CHAP. 5, VERS. I-29. 67 16. 49, 14, and Heb. 11, 5 rrlo-Tei 'Eva>x. Onq. paraphrases *1 Nn|>ni3 T]i3n -l*i>ni: 'Enoch walked in the fear of Yahweh! The Pesh. renders as the LXX, \oS*\ ^oi— 3.».o 'Enoch pleased God! 24. inN np7 "O WN1. 'And he was not, for Elohim took him;' cf. the usage of J*N in Is. 17, 14. Ps. 103, 16. 1 Kings 20, 40, of sudden disappearance. On its use in the narrative style, cf. Ewald, § 321 a ; M. R, § 128, 2 a. np7 *3 "N mN, that is, without dying, otherwise we should expect no*1 ; cf. 2 Kings 2 (Elijah's removal from earth to heaven, without tasting death). The reason for inN np7 *3 is to be found in the first half of the verse, viz. his piety ; cf. Heb. 11, 5, and Onq.; not, as some suppose, the danger of his relapsing into sin: so Ber. Rabb. c. 24. Frankel, Einfiuss, p. 43, cites this passage as one of the places where the LXX translators had the Haggada in view. LXX have m\ oix rjvpia-KCTO SuSri pcridrjKcv avrbv 6 Ocos. So Vulg. Onq. nin 71 *.* Fl*n* n*ON (N^) *1N. (cf. Frankel, p. 44, note d, who omits N7, so Berliner in his edition of Onqelos [ed. 1884, Berlin], p. 5 ; cf. part 2, p. 3) = ' And he was not, for Yahweh did (not) slay him! The Pesh. follows the Heb. text. In Ecclus. 44, 16 Enoch is called virdbctyua pcravoias ra'is yeveais, and in the book of Enoch (translated by R. H. Charles :) and the N. T. book of Jude, 14 etseq, he is described as a seer and prophet, who announced the coming of God, to punish the world for its sin. 29. TO IttttJ nN Nip"1!. n3 generally derived from ni3 'to rest] =' rest] but doubtfully as the word is always written n'3 in the O. T.— as if from a root n3, — not 013. Ewald con nects this root n3 with M=' to be fresh] or ' new] and Hale"vy (R. E. /, xxii. p. 611) regards it as the verb from which 1 See Jewish Quarterly Review, Oct., 1893, et seq. F 2 68 GENESIS, nn*3 comes, assigning to it the meaning ' to be pleasant] and seeing in the p. n. 03 (agre'ment de sacrifice) an allusion to 8, 21. Cf. further, Di, p. 116. The explanation given in the text, 130n3* ,1t, is not strictly an etymology at all, as n3 cannot be connected with Dn3, which is an entirely different stem ; but the similarity in sound led the narrator to connect in thought n3 with Dn3, just as ntJ>0 is a reminiscence of ntJ^O 'to draw out] yet cannot be etymologically connected with that word. The LXX render 13on3* as though they read it 13rV3* (not tin^, which would rather mean 'to set, place'). Rashi perceiving the etymological difficulty, fancifully explains 130n3* as though it were=1300 n*3* 'make to rest from us! His words are N3 N7B» iy 13*1* |13Vy nN 1300 m* nN*mo pNn nn*ni D,i7 pan ni.h npnno *73 Gnb n*n N7 ni3 ni3 *o*3i jitPNin din bv in77po D*on D*yirBo D*mn D*sip 130n3* intl >m3 ' He will make the toil of our hands cease from us : before Noah came they had no instruments to plough with, but he made them some, and the earth used to bring forth thorns and thistles when they sowed wheat, on account of the curse of the first man, but in the days of Noah (the earth) had rest, and this is the meaning ofXTOTW! "i:n 'j'myol l^yOO. 'From our work and labour (arising) from the ground;' better than noiNiTJO ' because of the ground] as A.V.; for the curse comes to man from the ground, which brought forth mil pp when it was tilled (3, 1 8). 6. i. 3"lb is inf. cstr. of 331 'to be many] 'gross sein;' 131= 'to become many] 'gross werden! The apodosis of the sen tence begins with ver. 2 1N1*1. 2. m3tt is used in a physical sense here=' comely;' cf. 24, 16. Ex. 2, 2. CHAP. 5, VER. 29 CHAP. 6, VER. 2. 69 1"in2 "ItZJN b3ft. IP is used to particularise the idea as in 7, 22. 9, 10; cf. Ewald, § 278 c; Dav, S., § 101. R. e O^nbNn ^2. This phrase, elsewhere in the O. T, always means ' the angels] with reference to their nature as beings of a higher, diviner type (being called D*3N70,,with regard to their office as messengers executing the divine commands); so Job 1, 6. 2, 1. 38, 7. Dan. 3, 25 ('a son of the gods'), but never nin* *33. The same meaning is usually assigned to it here by ancient interpreters, e. g. Philo, Book of Enoch, etc.; cf. Jude 6. 2 Peter 2, 4; the moderns also mostly explain it in the same way; so Tuch, Knobel, Schrader, Del, Di, etc. As, however, the idea of a carnal connection between the angels and daughters of men was very repugnant to a refined mode of thought, and especially objectionable to the Christian mind (cf. Matt. 22, 30), many attempts were made to explain these words in a way that would not cause offence. Thus, Targg, Onq. and Ps.-Jon. both render N*3131 *33 ' sons of nobles] from the use of t- : : : J J » DM7N in Ex. 21,6; 22, 7 (which, however, are very different passages from this). Rashi has D*03K>,11 D*ltJM *33 ' the sons of princes and judges ;' others explain D*n7N,1 *33 similarly as the sons of those of higher rank, opposed to DINn ni33 the daughters of those of lower rank. In favour of this interpretation, Pss. 82, 6. 49, 3 are quoted. But in the first of these passages the expression is not the same, and the application evidently different; in the second, the opposite to DIN is C2>*N, not DM7 N ; further D1N1, in vers. 1 and 4 (=' the human race'), is against this view. Another explanation is that adopted by the Fathers, e.g. Ephrem Syrus, Theodoret (cf. Del.5, p. 146), who interpret the sons of God in a spiritual sense as the pious ones, those who lead the lives of angels; viewing these as the descendants 70 GENESIS, of Seth, and regarding the D1N,1 ni33 as the daughters of the wicked, the offspring of the line of Kain. But there is nothing in either chap. 4 or 5 to bear out this view, and the expression 'sons of God' as a name for pious men is not usual in .the O. T.; and it is scarcely conceivable that D1N,1 in ver. 2b is to be taken in a different sense from the DINn in ver. ia, which would be required if this view were adopted. The Vss. render variously. The reading of the LXX is uncertain, viol tov Bcov is found, and also nyyeXot tov Bcoii (Swete); cf. Lagarde, Genesis Graece, p. 20. The Pesh. has here p!oid^7 «•!= merely transliterating the Heb. words; so in Job 1, 6. 2, 1; Aquila, viol t£>v Oeav, on which Hieron, Quaesi. ed. Lagarde, p. 11, says, ' Deos intelligens sanclos sive angelos ;' Symm, ot viol rmv Swao-revov- t, is only another form of the Aramaic relative conjunction ? , i. It has been supposed that the rel. xo is characteristic of the dialect spoken in Northern Israel, cf. Di.,Introd.,pp. 422, 563. Whether the Inscription asa in bra sn, 72 GENESIS, D3 also; cf. lt5'N3, 39, 9. But against this it may be urged that (a) the relative V never occurs in the Pentateuch, though defended by some by an appeal to the pr. n. 7NB>ino, 4, 18; 7Nt5»0, Ex. 6, 22. Lev. 10, 4; which are not, how ever, of any weight for prose usage, and both of which may be explained otherwise : and that (b) D3 is here superfluous. The second explanation is that adopted by Ges, Tuch, Ew, Budde, who read MPS, and take it as inf. cstr. from 3Jt?= mv, with the affix of the third pers. m. pi. (cf. Ges, § 67, Rem. 3 ; Ewald, § 238 b), and renders, ' On account of their error or transgression he (mankind!) is flesh! Against this it may be urged (a) that Nin is masc. sing, while D3t? has the third pi. m. affix; cf, however, Ewald, § 319 a, where other instances of a similar Enallage numeri are to be found, or the suffix in QSB'a may refer to ' the sons of God ; ' cf. Budde, Urgesch., p. 23 f.: (b) that HV is scarcely the word that would be expected in this connection, and it is here hardly general enough : (c) that the reading with qamec is not so well attested as that with pathach; cf. Del.4, p. 195. The text is probably corrupt : but the emendations that have been proposed are not satisfactory: e.g. D3 lt?N3, or Dt2>33, 'the fourth of a. fourth of a,?,' preserved on a weight discovered on the site of Samaria and prob. dating from the eighth cent. B. C, confirms this view or not is very doubtful. The real text of the Inscription has not yet been accurately deciphered, and the reading bra may be incor rect : see authorities in Driver, I.e., and cf. Robertson Smith in Academy, Nov. 18, 1893. See also Z. D. M. G. xxxii. 711 ff, and a. note in the American Journal, Hebraica, April, 1885, p. 249, where a third view of the relation between ra and i raw is mentioned, which makes ra the original relative, and derives -\«5« from it by prefixing an independent pronominal stem a, and affixing la. (which appears also in the Arabic relative alladi N . ' The men of repute;' cf. Num. 16, 2 DE* *tWN. A word in the construct state cannot take the article, so it is defined by the article being attached to the following genitive, Ges, § 127 b.; M. R, § 76. N.B. Whether such a combination as *tMN DB'n, means I. ' The men of repute] or II. 'Men of the repute] or III. ' The men of the repute] can only be decided by the context. Hebrew has only one way of defining the first, or the second, or both parts of a construct state, and follow ing genitive combination. Cf. also Dav, S., § 20. R. 2. 1 Well. (Comp., p. 308) and Budde (JJrgesch., p. 34) regard OJi p nn« as a later addition due to one who had Num. 13, 33 before him. CHAP. 6, vers. 5-1 1. 75 5- H3"1 is accented milra', and so is an adj., and not the perfect fem, from 331, which would be miTel. 13b nmLTIEl -HSr* 73. 'Every form of the thoughts of his heart] l*f, I. 'form, shape] physically; II. tropically applied to what is fashioned in the mind, imagination ; cf. 8, 21. Is. 26, 3. The LXX paraphrase nas ns oWoemu iv Tfi KapSla, on which cf. Frankel, Einfiuss, p. 10. y~\ pT 'only evil] i.e. ' utterly, hopelessly, nothing but evil:' cf. a similar use of pi in Deut. 28, 33 }>imi p\vy pi ; Is. 28, 19 nyit pi n*m. 6. 13b bN 321*n,,1. 'And was pained in his heart] LXX, Kal SicvoiiBr). Onq. n*niyi3 fineipm lairp^ [nio*o3] ion*, 'And spake by his Word, to break their strength according to his will! Ps.-Jon. niD*D3 jin*.^ |111*N1 'And disputed with his Word concerning them ; ' so Sam. and Targ. Jer. All intentional, in order to avoid an anthropomorphic idea. 7. non2 = usually 'tame] ' domestic animals ;' here used of ' tame and wild animals] as in ver. 20 ; 7, 23. 8, 17. 9. nnbm nbN. cf. on 2, 4. O^ftn p'H2 ItTN TO. Render, 'Noah was an upright man, perfect among his contemporaries ;' according to the accents and the order of the words. 10. 0,,J3 nUJbtl*. Masc nouns take the numeral in the fem. form, and vice versa ; see Ges, § 97 ; Dav, § 48. The number 2 agrees in gender with the word which it enumerates, and is an exception to this rule. The numerals from 2-10 are substantive, inN, fem. nnN, one is an adj., and agrees with its noun. n. Don yiNn Nbnm. cf. ver. 13 Don pn,i ,in?o and see note on i, 21. 76 GENESIS, 13. ''JOb N3 -ifen b3 yp. 'The end (i.e. the destruc tion) of all flesh (man and beast) has come before me.' Not ' The end of all flesh has come to my knowledge] which would rather be *7N N3 (cf. 18, 21. Ex. 3, 9), but 'has come before my mind, is determined on by me' (cf. Job 10, 13. 23, 14), Kn.; or (Ez. 7, 6) 'has come before me ' (ver. 1 1), i. e. according to my decision and resolve, Di. "ltTQ'bS is characteristic of P. T T T On^Dft 'from before them] i. e. ' because of them, through their influence ;' cf. Ex. 8, 20 3iy,1 *330 piNn nntJTI. The pi. suffix is used because lfc>3 must be taken collectively. yiNn nN ' with the earth! So LXX, Onq, Vulg. Pesh. has l^i^^L 'on the earth;' Sam. =JV°v/f !iiS from the earth] perhaps reading (wrongly) nNO by repeating the final D of Dn*nt?o. 14. 133 *^y i*13n . ,l3n only occurs in Gen, chaps. 6-g, and Ex. 2, 3. 5; it is thought by some to be an Egyptian word; see Gesenius, Th. sub voce, and M. V, H. W. B., p. 893. Others (cf. Halevy,/. A., viii. 12, p. 516 f. Jensen, Z. A., iv. 273) regard it as a loan word from the Assyrio- Babylonian. The Semitic etymologies given by Del.5, Comm., p. 169 (from 3in, a secondary formation of 3'N 'to be hollow'), and Dietrich, Abhandl. zur Semit. Wortfor- schung, p. 33 (who regards the word as Semitic, and as standing 'in lebendigem zusammenhange ' (in actual con nection) with i13N 'a reed;' comparing the derivation of n3n from n3N with those of ^n,^,}]., from 73N ; Din, from DNn; in all of which the N is suppressed), are untenable. The LXX here have ki&o>t6v ; in Exodus fljSw ; the Vulg. has ' arcam' here, and in Exodus 'flscellam;' Targg. Nni3*n, Pesh. JI,q5»Jj9, which is the Greek in/Wor. CHAP. 6, VERS. 13, 14. 77 1D3 ^"2y only occurs here. D*Sy = ' wood ' when cut down, 'logs] as opposed to py, 'trees' growing; so npn, and D^on, sing, 'wheat' growing, and pi. 'wheal' when cut down, 'grain;' P)D3 ' silver' in general, S*3p3 'pieces of silver] Ges, § 124. 1. R. 1 a; Stade, § 333; Dav, S., § 17. R. 1. 133 is probably a resinous coniferous tree (Nadelbaum), perhaps the old name for the cypress, which was used by the Phoenicians for shipbuilding, and is elsewhere called ET13. 133 only occurs here, and is a word of doubtful derivation. Ges. in Thes. cfs. 133, Lagarde (Semitica, i. 64, Symm., ii. 93; B. N., 217 ff.) regards the word as inferred from n*lS3, or as a corruption for n*133; cf. Di, p. 140. The LXX, Itala, and Vulg. did not understand the meaning of the word, and resorted to conjecture. The LXX have %oka>v rcrpayavaiv ; the Itala, ' ligna quadr ata ;' the Vulg. ' ligna laevigata! Onq. and Ps.-Jon. render 'cedar trees;' the Pesh. has U>i&* ).hv.p, which Walton renders ' de ligno viminis;' but this is doubtful. Possibly it should be rendered 'juniper wood;' see Low, Aram. Pflanzennamen, s. v. Q^p. 'In cells shalt thou make the ark;' D*3p being ace of manner or product, after a verb of making; cf. Ex. 38, 3 nt2TI3 Jivy 1*73 73 ' all its vessels he made brass] i. e. so that they consisted of brass; 27, 9. 1 Kings 18, 32. Is. 3, 7; cf. Ewald, § 284. a. 1 ; Ges, § 117. 5 c ; M. R, § 45. 5 ; Dav, S., § 76. Possibly the text originally ran d'Op D*3p, so Lag, Budde, etc. ni331 . . . nt2/S*. The perf. with waw conv. in con tinuation of an imper. ; cf. Dr., § 112 ; Dav, S., § 55 ; Ges, § 112. 3 c. y; M. R, § 24. 1 a; cf. 8, 17. 27, 43 f. Lev. 24, 14 130D1 . . . 77pOn nN NVin. 2 Sam. 11, 15. ni331 has the tone thrown forward on to the last syllable, after the waw 78 GENESIS, conv.; cf. the note on 3, 18. 133 is a denominative from 133. See Ges, § 43. Rem. 2. 1D33 = ' with bitumen ' or ' asphalt] The word is found in Aram, and Arabic, and also occurs in the Babylonian story of the flood. The article is used here with a material which was well known; cf. Ges, § 126. 3. Rem. b; M. R, § 68; Dav, 6", § 22 d; and 11, 3. 13,2. 15. ntol*n 1©N ntl, lit. 'this is what thou shalt make it ;' i. e. 'this is how thou shalt make it! 16. in!?, only here in the sing, prop.=' light] and then ' an inlet for light] so ' window! So all Vss. except the LXX, and most moderns. 1,1X is regarded as a feminine, so |i?n, Ez. 41, 16. 26; cf. Ges, § 122. 3 b and d; Ewald, § 174 c (y), who classes mx, as fem, among the nouns denoting places in which man is wont to move, or things which man uses, comparing isn 'a court] Ez. 10, 4. 5; ,13110 'camp] in Gen. 32, 9; 31m 'a street] Dan. 9, 25. In 8, 6 (J), the ark has a single window fi?n, i. e. 'a lattice-work window/ which could be opened and shut at will, inif (P)= merely ' an opening for light.' It is -possible to render ins collectively (? Pesh.)=' windows] so Ges., Thes., s.v. nbynbCl n373n HON 7N1. Render, 'And up to a cubit shalt thou complete it from above! Tuch supposed that a single window, a cubit square, was meant, and that it was probably intended for Noah's cell while the animals were left in darkness. But there is nothing in the text to warrant either of these opinions. Equally improbable is the view adopted by Keil, Knobel, and Del.4, viz. 'up to a cubit from above] i. e. the covering or roof of the ark, so that there would be the space of a cubit between the roof and the 11X. According to this view the size of the CHAP. 6, VERS. 15-19. 79 window would be left undefined, and we would rather expect npyppp to stand after noN. Di. and Del.6 consider the open ing to have been a cubit high, and to have run round the four sides of the ark, a little below the roof, being interrupted merely by the beams supporting the roof; there would then be really a continuous row of windows. Di. appeals to the Pesh. in favour of his view, and claims n?3 as suiting this meaning, and one would naturally assume that the ark would require more than one window ; whether the Hebrew text, however, can bear the meaning Di. puts upon it, is questionable. 17. N^ft "O^n ""iNl. The participle as future (futurum insians), which it represents as already 'beginning;' fre quently with n3,1 preceding it; cf. Ges, § 116. 5c; M. R, § 14. Rem. a; Driver, § 135. 3; Dav, S., § 100. R. 1. QiQ bl3Qn nN. Not ' the flood of waters] but in app. ' the flood [eveh] waters! So Ps. 60, 5 n7ym |**, lit ' wine, reeling! D^D. On the subst. in apposition, cf. M. R, § 76. Rem. b; Ewald, § 287 h; Driver, § 188. 1. The emendation DjD is unnecessary and unsuitable. More probable is the suggestion that D*0 here (and 7, 6) is a gloss on 7130; see Ges, § 131. 2 e. Rem. 4 foot-note. Di, however, p. 141, denies this, regarding the words pN,T7y D*0 as an explana tion, by the author, of the archaic word 7130 ; cf. Dav, S., § 29 b. In Is 54, 9 the flood is called D3 *p. y\W in the Pent, and Josh, is peculiar to P. 18. ""n^pm . n*l3 D*pn and n*i3 |n3, 9, 1 2 are marks of P. 19. ^nn only punctuated so in this passage ; cf. Is. 17, 8 and the note on ver. 4. 80 GENESIS, n^p^l 13? , characteristic of P. 20. iroPnb. See on i, 12. Btol and t?pi belong to the language of P. 21. nQDNI . . . ^b np; cf. on ver. 14. n73N is another characteristic of P. 22. TWy ]3 is rare outside P. 7. 1. "PV3 b31. Cf. the fuller description of Noah's family in P, 6, 18. 7, 13. 8, 16. 18. 2. nj*3© ni*3ffi. 'Seven by seven] i.e. 'by sevens;' see Ges, § 134. 5; M.R, § 72. 2; Ewald, § 313 a; Dav, S., § 29. R. 8 ; cf. Zech. 4, 2. Num. 3, 47. 17, 17 ,10O nOO 'rod, rod] ' a rod each ;' 2 Kings 17, 29 *13 *13 ' nation, nation] i. e. ' every single nation:' cf. also Mark 6, 39 o-vptrotna o-vpnoa-ia; 40 npao-ial ixpao-ial. The repetition of a noun indicates that the action expressed in the sentence is performed on different individuals of the class denoted by the noun ; thus the repe tition serves to express the distributive relation. Some think that seven individuals of each kind were to be selected, the seventh possibly being intended for sacrifice (Del.). But the addition of WK'Nl t?*N seems to indicate that 'seven pairs' were intended. In the case of the unclean animals we have D*3B> once, i. e. ' one pair] and we may reasonably presume that had the narrator intended seven individual animals here, we should have had ny3E> once. This also suits ver. 9 better (the animals went in D*3E> D*3ty by twos), nyaty T\yiV in the next verse is to be taken in the same way. Nin , , . N7 IttJN; cf. 17, 12. 1 Kings 9, 20 etc. On CHAP. 6, VER. 20 CHAP. 7, VER. 7. 81 the pers. pronoun after N7 itJ'N, see Driver, § 198. Obs. 1 ; Ges, § 138. 1 ; Dav, S., § 9. R. 2. 4. njntt*" IIS* O'Wb "*3. 'For after yet seven days'. For this use of the preposition 7, cf. 2 Sam. 13, 23 *,1*1 d*d* D*n3E>7; Ex. 8, 19 ntn niNn n*n* ino7; M. R, § 51. 2. OV D*VHN. Certain nouns are used after the numerals in the sing. ; cf. Ges, § 134. 2 and R. 1 ; M. R, § 97 ; Dav, S., § 37. R. 1. WhOi. P uses nny or n*nipn; cf. 6, 13. 17. Dlp^n bs. Dlp*,1, which always has the * without a dagesh, is a subst. formed from the analogy of the imper fect. See, however, Barth, N.B., p. 181, who denies this, and explains Dip* from an original Ql'p by transposition. Render, 'Every existing thing! 6. ro$ mNQ l!ft?j p. The adj. is expressed by joining to a subst, denoting a reference or relationship, a genitive expressing the attribute or thing; cf. Ges, § 128. 2. Rem. 2 c; M. R, § 79. 6 d; Dav, S., § 24. R. 3. QlQ n'n 7130m. 'When the flood was, waters] etc. D*0, as the text stands, is an explanatory apposition to 7130n ; cf. however, the note on 6, 17. n*n = ' accidit] 'came;' LXX, iyivcro, but Swete reads ?"¦ The second half of the verse is a circ. clause; see Ewald, § 341 d; Driver, § 169 : cf. 19, 4. 24, 45 and Ges, § 164. 1 a. The R.V. keeps the old rendering, ' the flood of waters] which is a paraphrase adopted for the sake of English idiom. 7. V231 ro N3^1. 'And Noah came in and his sons] etc. When the predicate precedes a compound subj, it frequently stands in the sing.; Ges, § 146. 2 b; M. R, § 138; Dav, S., § U4 t>- G 82 GENESIS, n. "iJll ""Tib. . . niNO ttfttJ r\N52,lit.'intheyearofsix hundred years to the life of N] i. e. ' in the six hundredth year of N.'s life! The cardinals, for numbers beyond ten, are used for the ordinals; cf. Ges, § 134. 4; M. R, § 100 a; Ewald, § 287 k ; Dav, S., § 38 b. TO "m. The genitive is often expressed thus by 7, when a writer wishes to avoid a string of construct states, or — as here — when any word intervenes between the con struct state and the genitive. Cf. Ges, § 129. id; M. R, § 83; Dav, S., § 28. R. 5. nl31N1=lit. 'the latticed windows] from 31N 'to inter twine! The LXX have ot KaTapdnrcu, Vulg. ' calaraclae] Aq. and Symm. al Bvpihcs: cf. D1100 n3lN, Is. 24, 18; also Job 38, 16. Prov. 8, 28 on the whole verse. 13. ntn OVn OI&73. 'On this very day;' see Ges, § 139. 3 ; M. R, § 90 ; Ewald, § 286 f; and cf. 17, 23 ; Ex. 24, 10 D*Ct?,1 DVy3 'as the very heavens ;' Josh. 10, 27 1JI ntn D1*n DSy ' until this very day! Cf. Dav, S., § 11 c. N3. It is not necessary to take this in a pluperfect sense, the rendering ' came ' is quite suitable. nt?jbl?j. Here the numeral very exceptionally agrees in gender with its substantive; cf. Ges, § 97. 1, note; Ewald, § 267 c: other instances are Ez. 7, 2 Ktb.; Zech. 3, 9. 4, 2. Job 1, 4. Cf. Dav, S., § 36. R. 3. 14. fp3 b3 11D!J b3. The same phrase occurs in Ez. 17, 23; cf. also 39, 4. Ps. 148, 10. Lit. 'every bird of every wing] i. e. ' all sorts of birds] ' every species of birds! "13S is properly ' a small bird] so called from its twittering or chirping. Di. and Del, however, regard the two phrases as in apposition, and render ' every bird, every winged thing] p|33 including insects. CHAp. 7, VERS. II-23. 83 16. 0,,N3n = 'Moj« that came] lit. 'the ones coming:' see Ewald, § 335; Dav, S., § 99. The article is equivalent to the rel. pronoun: cf. Neh. 4, 12 D*3131 'those that built;' Ex. 1, 1 ,10*1VO D*N3n 'those who came to Egypt;' 10, 8 D*3i*'nn. 19. INtt 1N73 (cf. 17, 2. 6. 20) is repeated to imply intensity; cf. Ges, § 133. 3. Rem. 3 ; M. R, § 72. 1. 1ND 1NO is peculiar to P ; so 17 l.c. Num. 14, 7. 20. nttN mi?J>5* WQn. nON is ace of measure, answer ing to the question 'how far?' Ges, § 118. 2 c; M. R, § 41 c; Dav, S., § 69 c. 21. n^n331 T^yi. 3 is used to specify the whole according to its contents (a construction characteristic of P) ; cf. M. R, § 52. 1 ; cf. 8, 17. 9, 10. 17, 23. Ex. 12, 19. Render, ' And all flesh died . . . consisting of fowl] etc. 22. n3in, with firm — under n, the noun being of the TTT form nv?_. 23. nfi"1!. The better-attested reading has no dag. in the O ; so the form would be apoc. impf. Qal from nno (see Ges, § 75. Rem. 3a), and would mean 'He (God), or it (the flood) blotted out] the first rendering being the best. The reading with dag. in the O would be imperf. apoc. Nif, for which we should rather expect nm with — , but cf. Ewald, § 224 c, and Ps. 109, 13. 14: the ace might stand after a passive, as in 4, 18; but a passive would hardly be expected with VlB* following in the same verse. The accent on the penult, points to the imperf. Qal: in the imperf. Nif. it could not be drawn back, as the penult, would be a closed syllable. inN 1$N1. lt?N=' H qui] contains in itself the demons. pronoun, Ges, § 138. 2 J cf. M. R, § 158; Dav, S, § 10. G 2 84 GENESIS, 3. 31SJ1 "pbn . . . D^n 13lt>n. The inf. abs. 1,17,1 is added to 31B> to emphasize the continuance of the abating of the waters, just as in vers. 5. 7 ; 12, 9 : cf. Ges, § 113. 3. R. 2 ; Ewald, § 280 b ; M. R, § 37 b ; Dav, S., § 86. c and R. 4. 4. rom is impf. Qal with waw conv. from D13, like 10s.*, from HD, 1W from i«, V3J1 from JM : cf. Ges, § 72. Rem. 4 ; Stade, § 484 d. JOHN "Hn by = ' o» (N. Compare ver. 18 *3N Nin fan; 2, 14. 19. Cf. Driver, § 199. Obs, with Ges, § 138. 1 ; M. R, § 156 a. I^N may be described as the link connecting the two sentences, ' every creeping thing' and 'it is alive ;' so Num. 9, 13. 14, 8. 27. 35, 31. 1 Sam. 10, 19. See also Dav, S., § 9 a and R. 2. nb3N7. 173N always occurs in this particular phrase, and always with another dative (except Jer. 12, 9). n73N (as distinguished from 73N, 73ND, and nb*3N;) = 73N7 gener alized; a thing that is given on a particular occasion big?, is given for a continuance "V???; see Driver, fourn. of Phil., No. 22, p. 21 7.* 4. 1D1 1iyM3. 3=' with] as in 32, n *i*PP3 'with my staff;' Ps. 42, 11 *niOVy3 n*P3 'with crushing in my bones! 101 is an explanatory app. to 1^33, defining, it more closely, Ges. § 131. 2. Rem. 4; M. R, § 71. 2 a. The LXX with their jrXiji' Kpias iv dlpari V"W seem to have transposed the words, and read 2*33 D13. Frankel, Einfiuss, p. 53 note, explains it by the Halacha, which refers the command for bidding the ' Bhitgenuss ' chiefly to the blood that flows out 90 GENESIS, and causes death (Kerithoth, 20b 13 ,1NX1* tPSSnt? DI 'the blood wherein the life goes out '). The blood is not actually the life itself, but through the blood the life becomes apparent to the senses, and the fact that it exists perceptible ; cf. Lev. 17, 11. 14. Deut. 12, 23. 5. 03,,nffiDJb 03731 nN. 'But the blood of your lives (i.e. belonging lo) will I require; from the hand of every living creature will I require it : and from the hand of man, from the hand of each one's brother will I require the life of man! Tuch and others render, 'your blood for your lives] i.e. 'for their protection ;' D3TIK'337 being dat. commodi ; so Deut. 4, 15 D3W337 1N0 DniOt5>31, and Josh. 23, 11; but this is not suitable to the context : in 4 the DI and s?33 are practically identical. Better 03^^337 = ' belonging to your souls ; SO the LXX, to vpirepov alpa tg>v tyvx&v vpav, Vulg. ' sanguinem enim animarum vestrarum] Pesh. >ouo| ops ^eofcJis_>»; cf. Ges, § 129. 1. 2. Other renderings, which are not so good, are ' according to your souls] or ' whoever' s soul it is, to whom it belongs ;' cf. ver. 10, defining distributively the whole to which the part belongs, Del.; and 'your blood as your souls] or 'your blood] (that is to say) 'your souls] according to vers. 4. 5°, 7 as in Job 39, 16 (as though not her own); Ewald, § 217 d and § 310 a. D301 is thinned from E=01, Ges, § 93. 2. Rem. 3. n,n b3 1^12 . ' From the hand of every beast! According to Ex. 21, 28 f., the ox that gored any one, so that he or she died, was to be stoned to death (7pD* 71pD). VnN ttPN T12='from the hand of each one's brother! According to the ordinary explanation VT1K E**N TO stands instead of B'*N *nN 1*»; t5»N, the noun which ought to be in the genitive, after *nN;j being prefixed for emphasis, and CHAP. 9, VERS. 5-9. 91 referred back to by the pronominal suffix in 1*riN; so Di. comparing Ewald, § 278 b. Kautzsch, however, offers two other explanations of the phrase, (1) 1*nN is to be regarded as in apposition to S?*N, cf. 15, 10 and probably Num. 17, 17, so Del.5, who also compares 41, 12 and 42, 35; or (2) B"*N is prefixed as a sort of casus pendens, and is more closely defined by the suffix in l*nN, so 42, 25. Ex. 28, 21. Cf. further Ges, § 139, 1; M. R, § 94. Rem. a, and esp. Budde, Urgesch., p. 283 ff, who explains the phrase on the analogy of Zech. 7, 10 as inverted for the more usual l*nN 1*0 tJ^N; cf. \Vji. in Aramaic, and dXXrjXav in Greek, and see Ewald, § 30 1 b ; Dav, S., § n d. Pesh, Vulg, Sam. apparently read WNl ETN. l*nN E»N TD is coordinate with DIN 1*0. 6. D1N3. The LXX dw! toO atparos avrov, either reading 313 or confusing in sound D1N3 and D13 ; compare their rendering of p7 as though it were=p N7, viz. 4, 15. 30, 15. 07N3. The 3 must be regarded as 3 of instrument ; cf. Hos.1,7. iSam.28,6. Ps. 18,30, but this is not usual; passives in Heb. are generally construed with |0 of the agent, as in ver. n *00 . . . ni3*, or 7, as in 14, 19 |l*7y 7N7 1.113; cf. Ges., § 121. 3 ; M. R, §§ 49- 4, 5*- 3- R- a; Dav, S., § 81. a^nbN 072J is an expression characteristic of P. 9. O^pft ''jin "ONI. When the pronoun precedes ,13n, *3N is the form used : when it follows, *33N is preferred ; see fourn. of Phil., No. 22, p. 226. n113 C'pn. n*l3, when used with D*p,1, always has a suffix; the phrase n'13 D*pn denotes the perpetuation of a covenant already, at least in idea, existing, rather than the formation of one altogether new, which is expressed by ni3 H*13; see fourn. of Phil., l.c. 92 GENESIS, D3JHT nNI 03nN ' with you and with your seed] a phrase characteristic of P. io. ronn tt7D3 b3 nN. The adj. alone defined, the noun being regarded as sufficiently definite through the preceding 73 ; cf. on i, 21. ''NJJT' b3J2 'all whatever ;' |0 denoting the genus ex quo, the general to which the particular partitively belongs, as in 6, 2. 7, 22; Ges, § 119. 3. R. d. foot-note. 7, as in 23, 10 *N3 b'S7='with respect to] etc.; cf. Lev. 11, 42. 16, 21; Ewald, § 310 a (7 with a generalizing and particularizing force). 13. "Vriro. 'I set] as in 1, 29 WI3 n3n ; cf. Driver, § 14 a ; Ewald, § 135 c. 14- pV ^y2. Inf. Pi'el with the prep. 3, and suffix of the ist pers. sing. 3 is pointed with — , as the doubling of the letter has fallen away; cf. Ges, § 10. 2. Rem. a; the more regular form of the inf. Pi'el would be *3?y3. ]py is a denom. of py. Render, ' when I cloud my clouds; ' the apodosis begins with ver. 15, nnNl31 being a continuation of the inf.; see Ges, § 114. 3. Rem. 1 ; Dr., § 118 ; Dav, S., § 5oa. 18. O'N^n. Here the participle must be rendered as past, ' those who went out] equivalent to 1NS* IB'N, but neater ; cf. Ges, § 116. 2 and 5 b; M.R, § 14; so 27, 33 isn, 35) 3 n#n, 43, 18 3B>n,etc 19- YINn b3 TOOH nbNCl. 'And out of these was the whole earth overspread! nXB3 is a lightened form of the 3rd pers. fem. perf, Nif. sing, of pts=p3 ; cf. 1 Sam. 13, 1 1. Is- 33. 3 0^); Ewald, § 193 c (who compares n3D3 from 33D; npp3 from 00p; npT33 from pp3) ; Ges, § 67, note 11. 20. ytT\ . . . TO broi. Render, ' And Noah the husband man began and planted! So most moderns ; cf. Ges, § 1 20. 2 a CHAP. 9, VERS. IO-24. 93 and 26, 18 (13T1 . . . 3E»1). Some, however (Tuch, Kn.), appealing to Ewald, § 298 b (cf. M. R, § 43 a) and 1 Sam. 3, 2 nW3 17n,1 — which is scarcely parallel — render, 'And Noah began lo be a husbandman, and planted; ' but this would require noiN B**N instead of noiN,1 B»N; cf. 25, 27 nn'V E>*N (for M. R.'s explanation, § 76 b. Rem. a, is hardly satisfactory), and what is noticeable in the narrative is, not that Noah .began to be a husbandman, but that he began the cultivation of the vine. A slightly different expl. in Dav, S., § 83. R. 2. 21. ntiTI. The imperf. apoc Qal of lints' without a help ing vowel ; see Ges, § 75. Rem. 3 c and § 28. 4 ; Stade, §§ 70 a. 2. 2, 101 c, 489 b. libnN for fontf, ri for i is the older and original form of the suffix. The 6 arose by contraction from ahu, au, but the ,1 was retained in writing. The ,1 is also preserved in Arabic, and on the Moabite stone, e.g. 1. 5 nxiN3=telN3; 1. 7 nn331 ,13=in*331 13; other examples in lines 9. 10. 19. 25. n7,lN always has a Kri, 17,1N; cf. Ges, § 91. 1. Rem. 2 ; Stade, §§ 28 a, 345 b. ri" for i" occurs, however, elsewhere in the O. T, and is by no means confined to the oldest books. 22. On may be called the father of Canaan here with reference to ver. 25. 131, sc. 'it;' see Ges, § 117. 1. Rem. 4; cf. note on 27. M- 23. n7Dton. 'The upper garment] also used (e.g. by the poor) as a covering by night; cf. Ex. 22, 26. Deut. 24, 13. 24. I^Q 'from his wine] i.e. his intoxication which the wine had caused, as in 1 Sam. 1, 14. 25, 37. jtOpn 133, i.e. ' his youngest son] tf. 1 Sam. 16, 11. 17, 14. If two were compared one with the other, J0p,1 might = 'younger ' or 'youngest] when more than two are compared, 94 GENESIS, it= ' youngest] cf. Del.5, ad loc. This rendering, however, does not agree with 5, 32. 6, 10. 7, 13. 10, 1 (aU P) and 9, 18 (J), in which verses the order of the sons is Shem, Ham, Japhet. In 9, 18 R may have corrected J from P, but failed to do so in this verse; Di, p. 160; cf. Budde, Urgesch., p. 299 ff. 25. 0*1Hy T2.y=' servant of servants,' i.e. ' meanest ser vant ;' cf. 0*1*^,1 1*^ 'song of songs] 'choicest song;' see Ges, § 133. 3. R. 2; M. R, § 81 a; Dav, S., § 34. R. 4. Canaan is made Shem and Japhet's servant. As Noah's son Ham sinned against him, so shall he (Ham) be punished through his own son Canaan, by the curse laid upon him by Noah. The settlements of Canaan on the islands and coasts of Asia Minor were at an early date overcome by the Japhetic races. Cf. Di, ad loc. 26. Iftb is poetical for 3n7, as often; cf. Stade, § 345 c, note 1 ; Ges, § 103. 2, foot-note 2. Shem is not blessed directly, but the. God of Shem (Deut. 33, 20), i.e. Shem is blessed through his God, the highest possible form of blessing. If God is to be blessed for His goodness, which is implied in blessing Him, how great must be the happiness of those who are under His protection and enjoy His favour. 27. ' May God spread out faphet far, and may he dwell in the tents of Shem! Onq, Baumg, etc. take God as the subject to pE"i ; but God cannot be spoken of as dwelling in a tent, and we should in this case rather expect pis'* Nini. Some again (Ges, Schr.) take Dt5> as meaning 'repute ;' cf. 6, 4 DE> *B>3N ; but this is not suitable to the context, and Japhet could not at that date have had any opportunity of acquiring fame. Dwelling in the tents of Shem does not mean con quest, but points to the friendly relations that should exist CHAP. 9, VERS. 25 CHAP. IO. 95 between the Semitic and Japhetic races; the latter participating in the honour paid the former, and sharing the religious privi leges enjoyed by them. 10. In chapter 5 we had a list of the descendants of Adam, containing ten generations, and ending with Noah. In chapter 10 we have a continuation of the list found in chapter 5, viz. a genealogical table of the sons of Noah, and the various peoples that sprang from them. In the first verse we find the sons of Noah given in the same order as in 5, 32; but in verse 2 — in accordance with the custom observed in the book of Genesis, to first notice the side branches of the family tree, in order to prepare the way for mentioning the chief line — we have the order, Japhet, Ham, Shem ; Ham standing next to Shem, being, through Canaan, Mizraim, and Cush, more closely allied to him than Japhet was. It should be observed in these ni17in that the list of nations is by no means complete. We find no mention made of nations of a more modern origin, such as Moabites, Edomites, Ishmaelites, Keturaeans, nor of some nations, such as the Rephaim and Amalekites, who were of very ancient descent ; also we find no allusion to the Chinese and the other Mongolian races of Eastern Asia, to the Indians or Eranians, probably because they were entirely unknown in Palestine at the time of the narrator. ' In general the notice embraces the peoples who were grouped round the basin of the Mediterranean and its vicinity, the peoples of the so-called Caucasian race ' (Di.). The nations mentioned in this table are regarded as the individuals of a large family, as sons, grandsons, and great- grandsons, of a common father, e.g. just as Shem, Ham, and Japhet are Noah's sons, so the Chittim and Dodanim in 96 GENESIS, ver. 4 are the grandsons of Japhet ; cf. ver. 6, Mizraim as the son of Ham; ver. 13, Ludim as the son of Mizraim; and (ver. 1 6) the similar use of the patronymics (the Amorite and Jebusite being spoken of as the children of Canaan; compare vers. 17. 18). The table falls into three chief divisions, viz. I. 2-5. The Descendants of Japhet, the Northern Races. II. 6-20. The Descendants of Ham, the Southern Races. III. 21-31. The Descendants of Shem, the Central Races. The list is repeated with some variations in 1 Chr. 1, 4-23. For a list of works bearing on this chapter, see Dillmann's Commentary, p. 170. In the following notes — which are not intended to form a complete commentary on the chapter — Dillmann has been chiefly followed, and for fuller information his notes and the works there cited should be consulted. 1. mibin. Cf. the nofe on 2, 4. nEPl. 1 with pretonic qamec, see on 1, 2. 2-5. The Descendants of Japhet. 2. 1Q3. LXX, Tapip, mentioned again in Ez. 38, 6 (LXX, Topip), as an ally of Gog of Magog. Josephus, Ant., i. 6. 1, considers that lD3 = the Tdkdrai, who were formerly called Vopapds, in Northern Phrygia. Bochart also decides for Phrygia. 'Usually, since the time of Calmet, supposed to be the Cimmerii (Kippipwi, Hom. Od., xi. 14), who dwelt north of the Pontus Euxinus and Lake Maeotis (Her. iv. n f.; Strabo, iii. 2, 12 etc.), were driven out in the eighth century by the Scythians, journeyed through Thrace, and reinforced by the Tijp^ and other tribes, at the beginning of the seventh century crossed the Bosphorus and entered Asia Minor,' Di. Others (Kiepert, Lagarde, etc.) consider that 103 is CHAP. 10, VERS. I, 2. 97 Cappadocia, called by the Armenians Gamir (PI.). Saadiah explains 103 by usJ^l ' the Turks! The name is found in the Assyrian inscriptions, ' Gimirrai= those who belong to the people (Ass. land) of Gimir ;' i.e. the inhabitants of the dis trict between the north-western provinces of the Assyrians, in the east, and of the Lydians in the west, i.e. of Cappadocia. They are first mentioned in the time of Esarhaddon and Assurbanipal. Whether the land was called after the Gimirrai, earlier than this time, is uncertain. Cf. Schrader, C.O.T., i. p. 62, ii, p. 123 ; Del., Par., 245, etc. JIM. 'The second son of Japhet must be sought for between Gomer and Media. In Ez. 38, 2. 6. 15. 39, 6 Magog appears as a remote and warlike people in the far north, having Tubal and Meschek under them, and to whom Gomer and the House of Togarma have attached themselves.' Josephus 1. c. and Hieron, Quaest. ed. Lagarde, p. 14, explain 313D as ' the Scythians] the people of lake Maeotis and the Caucasus, and this view is the one commonly adopted since the time of Bochart. See further Di, ad loc, who mentions some explanations of the name that have been suggested. "HD . ' The Medes] elsewhere mentioned in the 0. T, viz. 2 Kings 17, 6. 18, 11. Jer. 25, 25. 51, 11. 28. Is. 13, i7f. 21, 2. The name is found on the Assyrian inscriptions, 'Madai' (' Ma-da-ai') ; see Schrader, C.O.T., p. 62. ]1\ ' The Ionians ' (ldovcs, 'ldfovcs), in the whole of the East, up to India, the name for the Greeks ; also found on the Assyrian inscriptions of Sargon II 'favnai' ('fa-av-naai'), Schrader, C.O.T., p. 63 ; and according to Sayce in the Tel- el-Amarna Tablet, xlii. a. 16; see Academy, 1891, p. 341. They are frequently mentioned in the O. T, e. g. Joel 4, 6. Ez. 27, 13. Is. 66, 19. Dan. 8, 21. 10, 20. 11, 2. H 98 GENESIS, "fttJOl b3in. 'Always (except Is. 66, 19, Mass. text, and Ps. 120, 5) joined together. In Ez. 32, 26 they are mentioned as having suffered severe reverses, in Ez. .27, 13 (together with Javan, possibly from Gen. 10, 2) as connected by trade with the Tyrians, whom they supplied with slaves and vessels of brass. In Ez. 38, 2 f. 39, 1 they are spoken of as forming the flower of the army of the Scythian king Gog, in Is. 66, 19, LXX, as distant peoples. They are usually identified with the Tibareni and Moschi, who inhabited the hill country on the south-east of the Black Sea, the Moschi between the sources of the Phasis and Cyrus, the Tibareni east of the Thermodon, in Pontus. In the Assyrian inscriptions (see Schrader, C. O. T, p. 64 ff.) their territory extended further south, the " Tabali" (" Tibareni") up to CJlicia and the " Muski" ("Moschi") north-eastwards of the Tabali. Josephus, Ant., i. 6. 1, explains 73in as the Iberians in the Caucasus land, and 1,tS>D as Mafaxa in Cappadocia (being deceived by the similarity in sound).' Dl^n is mentioned nowhere else, but must, according to its position, be looked for either east of "JtS'D, or in the west, and more towards the south than "jtS'O. Since Josephus Dl*n has been usually identified with the Thracians, but Di. questions the suitability of this identification, as D1*n = the Thracians would be already included in the Gomer group. Other conjectures are Tupi/s, Tvpas, i. e. the Dniester with the people dwelling on it, the Tvpnai. (Her. iv. 51); the Tvpar)vol (Tuch, Nold, Di.), who belonged to the Pelasgi, and who made themselves by their acts of piracy a terror to the islands and coasts of the Aegean Sea between Greece and Asia Minor (Her. i. 57. 94; Thuc. iv. 109); see Tuch, p. 171; Di, p. 175. CHAP. IO, VERS. 2, 3. 99 3. The sons of Gomer. W3tt?N, 'the first son of Gomer, is mentioned in Jer. 51, 27 together with Ararat and Minni, i.e. with North-eastern and South-eastern Armenia.' Josephus explains by 'Pijyu/«, who are otherwise unknown. The Ber. Rabba gives Asia ; and the Jews of the Middle Ages, Germany. 'T33t2>N — whether the ending az was the original ending of patronymics or not (see Lagarde, Gesammel. Abhand., 255, but cf. Armen. Stud., § 143; Mittheil, i. 225) — appears to be the old name -of a people who were spread over Mysia and Phrygia. For Ascanios occurs in Homer (7/. ii. 862 ff, xiii. 793, etc.) as the name of a Mysian and Phrygian prince, and the same name at a later date was still attached to the lake of Kelaenae in Phrygia, and to one near Nicaea in Bithynia, and also to a river, a district and other localities (Strab, 12, 4. 5ff, 14, 5. 29; Pliny, 4, § 71. 5, § 121, etc.; Steph. Byz. see 'Ao-Kavla),' Di. In Jeremiah the Western Armenians are intended, i.e. the Ascanians, who had emigrated from Phrygia into Western Armenia, and Tuch, Ges, and Schr. consider this to be the case in the present passage. nCH , in 1 Chr. 1, 6 n3*1 . Josephus explains by Ripheans, i. e. Paphlagonians. Bochart and Lagarde the river 'Pf/fias, a river of Bithynia which falls into the Black Sea, and the district 'Pnj3ai/Tta on the Thracian Bosphorus. Di, however, thinks that n3*l cannot be placed so far west. Most ex positors, however, prefer the view that n3*l = the fabulous Spri 'Ptirdia, which were regarded by the ancients as the boundary of the northern side of the earth. Saadiah and the modern Jews apply n3*i fancifully to France. The LXX have 'P«j>d6 here and in 1 Chr. 1. e nftl^in, mentioned in Ez. 38, 6 together with Gomer, h 2 IOO GENESIS, in the army of Gog; and in Ez. 27, 14 after Javan, Tubal, and Meshek, as supplying horses and mules for the Tyrian traders: both times called in Ez. ,10l3n n*3. Josephus understood noi3n to mean the Phrygians. But as the Phrygians are already included in T33E'N, the view that 'n= the Armenians, is to be preferred ; ' according to the oldest sense of the word, Western Armenia,' Di. With this identifi cation, Phrygia, Paphlagonia, and Western Armenia naturally follow one another in the direction from west to east. The LXX have the name slightly altered, Bopyapd; Codex A, eepyapd (so Swete); cf. Lagarde, Gen. Graece, p. 34. Whether the town Tilgarimmu, in Melitene, mentioned in the Cunei form inscriptions (see Del, Par., p. 296, etc.) is to be connected with ,10l3n, is uncertain. 4. The sons of Javan. ntt*-,,bN, mentioned inEz. 27, 7, 'the coastlands ofElishah] whence purple was obtained. Josephus thinks that nty'^N means the Aeolians ; so Del.6 The Targ. of Jonathan here takes it 10= Hellas. Others, Elis (Boch.). But Di. objects, firstly, that nt? — for the Greek nom. ending s — is incon ceivable, and secondly that Greece and the Greeks are already included in Javan. He suggests Italy and Sicily, citing the Targ. to Ez. l.c. N*>0*N n3*1D. This would not be unsuit able here, and would fit in with the statement in Ez. l.c. ('7N**N). Cf. Sh, G., p. 136. What, however, the name itself (? VX\vp-m) means, remains to be explained. Stade considers that nB»7N is Carthage, but it seems doubtful whether Car thage was ever called Elissa, and the phrase ntJ»*7N **N hardly suits this identification. ffi'^in is frequently mentioned in the O.T. Josephus thinks Tarsus in Cilicia is intended, but the more generally CHAP. 10, VER. 4. 101 accepted view is that Tartessus in Spain is meant, which was celebrated in the east for its abundance of silver, and carried on an extensive trade with Tyre (cf. Her. i. 163, iv. 152; Is. 23). 'Not the town as a Phoenician colony (Stade), but the land and people is intended,' Di. Tartessus embraced the coastland from Gibraltar to the mouth of the Baetis or Guadalquiver. The Tarshish navy, mentioned in the book of Kings (1 Kings 10, 22. 22, 49), was not a navy that was intended to traffic with Tarshish, but is a term for large vessels, just as we speak of East or West-Indiamen ; cf. Ges, Thes., p. 1315. CnS . Cyprus and its inhabitants, where was an old town KjVtiov (cf. C.I.S., i. 137), the modern Larnaka (Schrader), which Josephus mentions in his explanation of the name. The Assyrian name of the island was 'fatndna ' or 'Alndna;' see Schrader, C.O.T., p. 68 f. The name seems at a later date to have included other islands and coastlands ; cf. Jer. 2, 10. Ez. 27, 6 DTD **N. Dan. 11, 30. DTPf. So the Targg, Pesh, and Vulg.; but the LXX and Sam. give D*311, as 1 Chr. 1. 7. The reading D*311 is generally accepted as the correct one, as D*311 cannot be suitably explained. Conjectural explanations that have been offered are Dodona, the seat of the famous oracle in Epirus, which would be unsuitable here; or D*311=the AdpSavou ; Targ. Jon. WITH, Jer. Targ. N*3li1, i.e. the Trojans. With the other reading D*31i Bochart explains the word as meaning the Rhone, and the people dwelling near it : more probable, however, is the explanation by which D*31i = Rhodes, or in a more general sense the Rhodian Islands, i. e. the islands of the Aegean Sea. In Ez. 27, 15 the LXX give the correct reading, 'P68101 for JT] ,?.?. Cf. Sh, G., p. i3g- 102 GENESIS, 5. ' In ver. 20 and ver. 31 we find at the conclusion of the list Dn *33 ,17N and Off *33 n7N respectively ; and we should expect here n3* *33 n7N. As n?NO cannot refer to n3* *33 in ver. 2, but to |V *33 ver. 4 (since Magog, Media, etc. cannot be spoken of as populating the sea coasts), and as, moreover, DnViN3 does not agree with D*13n **N, these three words (17N n3* *33) must be inserted before DnslN3, without its being, on account of this, necessary to strike out D*13n . . . n7NO as a gloss,' Di. This emendation, proposed by Ilgen, is adopted also by Ewald, and Del: Render, 'From these have the sea-lands of the peoples separated themselves. (These are the sons of faphet) in their lands, each according to his language, according io their families, by their peoples.' D**N denotes regularly ' the islands and coastlands' of the Mediterranean. On 3 = ' by, according to] cf. vers. 20 and 31 and see on 7, 21. 6-20. The Descendants of Ham. 6. t?jl3, ' called by ancient Egyptians " Kas, Kes," and used as the name of a people of a reddish-brown colour, between Egypt and Abyssinia, viz. in the East between the Nile and the sea.' In the O. T. Cush seems to have had a wider and narrower signification. In 2, 13 and here it has a wider meaning, and is used to denote the southern limit of the known world, including the inhabitants of the coastland of Southern Arabia. From Isaiah's time and onwards it was used with a more limited signification, as the special name of the state Napata situated at the foot of mount Barkal, viz. Ethiopia. 55*13 is found on the Assyrian inscriptions ('Kusi') as the name of Ethiopia ; see Schrader, C. O. T., p. 68. ' It is CHAP. IO, VERS. 5, 6. 103 not very probable that the Kassi of the Inscriptions (Fried. Del, Die Sprache der Kossder, 1884), i.e. the KiWioi in Susiania, and the Koo-o-atot in the neighbourhood of Mt. Zagros, are connected with the biblical Kus] Di. O'HSO. Egypt. Assyr. ' Musur, Musru, Misir] Schrader, C.O.T., p. 71. The dual form of the word in Hebrew probably is used with reference to the two parts of Egypt, upper and lower, which are always mentioned on the oldest Egyptian monuments when the whole of Egypt is spoken of. The dual form is used in the Mass. text when only Lower Egypt is meant, Upper Egypt being expressly excluded, e.g. Is. 11, 11. Jer. 44, 1. 15. Various etymologies have been suggested for the name. Bochart thinks that 1X0 = ' walling in] and Egypt would then=the land that is shut off or walled in;- but this opinion of Bochart's merely rests on the use of the name in Is. 19, 6. 37, 25. Another derivation (Ges. in the Thes., p. 815) is from i*JO which occurs in Aram, Assyr, and Arab.='a limit, province] so D*1XO='/fo two lands.' tOID. This name occurs frequently in the O.T. In Nah. 3, 9 013 is mentioned with Cush, Mizraim, and Lubim; in Jer. 46, 9 in the Egyptian army, together with Cush and Ludim ; cf. Ez. 30, 5. In Ez. 27, 10 the soldiers of 013 are found among the Tyrian mercenaries, together with those of Persia and Lud; and again in Ez. 38, 5 013 occurs with Persia and Cush in Gog's army. In the LXX, Is. 66, 19 (Mass. text 713), it is spoken of as a distant nation of the west. The LXX in Jer. and Ez. translate it by Aleves, so Jose phus : and this is the view generally adopted. Knobel (Volkertafel, p. 296) points out that the Coptic name for Libya was Phaiat. Ptol. iv. 1. 3, Pliny v. 1 mention a river t8o<>6 or Fut in Libya. 104 GENESIS, p733 (usually derived from y33 ' to be low, depressed ')=' the low land] cf. Num. 13, 29 as opposed to the high lands of Aramea. This, however, Di. disputes, and regards |y33 as the original name of the low land by the sea and the Jordan, which was afterwards extended to all the country west of the Jordan ; cf. Sh, G., p. 4 f. Canaan embraced all this district, exclusive of Philistia, but inclusive of Phoenicia. It is remark able that jy33 — though the language of the land was Semitic — should be found among the sons of Ham. Perhaps this was due to a sense of their different origin ; it being more or less certain that they were emigrants from the south, from the neighbourhood of the Persian Gulf (see Di, p. 180, and the authorities he cites in favour of the view of the southern origin of the Canaanites, viz. Her. i. 1, vii. 89 ; Justin, xviii. 3 ; Strabo i. 2. 35, xvi. 3. 4; Dion. per. 906 ; compare The Book of fubilees, c 10 ; see also Schroder, Phb'n. Gram., p. 4). On the Assyrian name for Canaan ' mdt Aharri] ' the Westland] see Schrader, C.O.T., p. 72. In the Tel-el- Amarna letters (cir. 1400 b.c.) frequent mention is made of the land Kinahhi or land of the Kunaha, that is, Canaanites, see Di. l.c, and authorities cited by him. 7. The sons of Cush. N3D is mentioned in Ps. 72, 10 together with N3tS>, as a distant land in the south. In Is. 43, 3. 45, 14 it is spoken of together with Egypt and Cush; and in 45, 14 the D*N3D are described as being very tall. Since Josephus (Ant., ii. 10. 2), N3D has usually been identified with Meroit; and possibly this identification is supported by a comparison of Is. 45, 14 with 18, 2. 7 (Her. iii. 20. 114). Di, however, prefers to identify N3D with a branch of the Cushites, dwelling on the Arabian sea, more to the east of Napata ; and he CHAP. IO, VER. 7. I05 conjectures that remains of this proper name are to be found in Asta-soba and Soba, the capital of the Christian kingdom of Senadr in the Middle Ages. His reason for objecting to the identification given by Josephus is that the kingdom of Cush, even when it reached from Napata to the southern island of Meroe, was never called by the Egyptians N3D, and that its name in the O. T. is always Cush. nbin. Cf. on 2, 11. Di. supposes that a trace of this people is to be found in the name K6\nos AidkiTtjs or 'A^oXIttjs, and the people 'A/3aXmu, on the African coast near the Straits of Bab-el-Mandeb. This would suit the order of the enume ration. In ver. 29 n7*in is mentioned among the sons of Joqtan on the Persian Gulf; and we must either suppose that there was more than one i17*in, or that a great Cushite people were scattered over the east and south coast of Arabia, who also had penetrated to the west coast of north eastern Africa, and there left traces of their name. Possibly, as Tuch suggests, the difference is due to two different accounts. nn3D. Josephus, Ant., i. 6. 2, explains by 'Aord/3apoi, i.e. the inhabitants of Aslaboras, now Atbara, in Abyssinia, which Gesenius in the Thes. approves. More general is the view held by Tuch and Del, that nn3D is to be connected with the old Arabian town 2ri/3j3«0a or Sabota, the capital of the Chalramolilae, which had sixty temples, and was a great emporium of the frankincense trade. Its name was written in Sabaean nnts*. nftJTI, LXX, 'Pcypd, cf. on 4, 18, is mentioned in Ez. 27, 22 in connection with N3tJ>, as a trading people, who supplied the Tyrians with spices, precious stones, and gold. Tuch and others identify noyi with 'Pfopa or 'Piypa, mentioned Io6 GENESIS, by Ptolemy and Steph. Byz, a town with a harbour on the Arabian side of the Persian Gulf. Di. prefers to identify it with the noyi of the Sabaean inscriptions, in the neighbour hood of |yo Me'in, north of Marib. He also compares the 'PappaviTai, mentioned by Strabo, xvi. 4. 24, in connection with this identification, who dwelt between the Mivdioi and the XarpapwTtTai. N3n^D is unknown. Those who consider that noyi is situated on the Persian Gulf compare 2a/auSd«i/, a seaport town and river in Carmania ; so Bochart. The Targ. of Jon. here, and the Targ. to Chron, give 'SMJ, i.e. Zingis, on the east coast of Africa. The sons of Ra'ma. N311?. ' The Sabaeans] often mentioned in the O. T. as a distant land and people, whose great wealth in gold, precious stones, frankincense, and cassia, was brought, partly by them selves, and partly by others, to the north. They dwelt in south-western Arabia, the capital of their empire being Mariaba or Saba, three days' journey from San'd. Their language was Semitic. See, further, Di, p. 182 f. pi, mentioned in 25, 3 among the descendants of Ke- turah. Possibly there were two different accounts of their origin, both of which have been employed by the narrator. In Ez. 38, 13 |11 is mentioned together with N3tS>, as a most important trading nation, and in Ex. 27, 20 as supplying Tyre with costly coverlets. In Is. 21, 13 the caravans of Dedan are mentioned, and in Jer. 25, 23. 49, 8 it is spoken of together with the Edomites and other desert tribes of Arabia. In Ez. 25, 13 pi is the nation on the frontier of Edom. The Cushite Dedan, since Boch, has usually been placed on the Persian Gulf, and a trace of the name is supposed to CHAP. IO, VER. 8. 107 have been found in Daden (^jta, Aram. »J*J» ; see Ges, Thes.), one of the Bahrein Islands. Di, however, points out that it is unnecessary to assume the existence of a Cushite Dedan, as distinct from the Dedan mentioned in 25, 3. The Dedanites (according to all the other places where the name occurs) are to be found in north-western Arabia in the neighbourhood of Khaibar, el-'Ula, el-Higr, where the trade- routes from south, east, and central Arabia meet. A trace of them is probably to be found in the ruins of Daidan, west of T6ma, south-east of Aila. We may assume that they also had stations on the southern, eastern, and northern trade-routes. It is, moreover, possible that they were originally to be found settled still further south, pi occurs in the Sabaean inscriptions, Di. After the exile the Dedanites disappeared, their place being taken by the Gerrheans (on the west of the Persian Gulf). On this word and N3tS" in the Assyrian inscriptions, see Schrader, C.O.T., pp. 74, 131 ff. 8. lb\ P would use T7in ; so in 6, 10. 11E2. LXX, NcPpoS. Found once again in Micah 5, 5. Its derivation is uncertain; some derive it from mo 'to revolt;' so 1103 'rebeller] cf. H. W. B., nth ed. The name has not yet been discovered in the Assyrian inscriptions. The Assyriologists identify the Nimrod of the Bible with the Babylonian hero Istubar ; see Schrader, C. 0. T, p. 75; and Haupt quoted by Schrader, l.c, believes that the name can mean, as an old Babylonian gentilic, 'he who is of Mar ad] Mar ad (also Amarad) being a town of central Babylonia. See, further, Di, p. 184. 1133=' a mighty man] cf. Ps. 52, 3; a powerful ruler, who, by his courage, activity, and the terror he inspired, I08 GENESIS, reduced all around him, either voluntarily or involuntarily, to submission, Del.4; cf. ver. io. 9. Nimrod was also distinguished as a mighty huntsman.. TX 1133=' a hero in (lit. of) the chase! nin"1 ^Db (cf. Jon. 3, 3 D*17N7 ; t& e™, Acts 7, 20). The expression is doubtless taken from the mouth of the people, and denotes that he was exceptionally mighty, a person whom God himself must regard as sui generis; cf. Pss. 36, 7. 104, 16. Onq. has ^Fl 13?=' a mighty hero ;' LXX, ylyas Kvvrjybs evavriov TLvpiov tov Qcov. IftN1 p 7J*. This formula is also used elsewhere in citing what was well known as a proverb, e. g. Num. 21, 14 ; cf. 1 Sam. 10, 12. 19, 24, also Gen. 22, 14, and (for Impf.) cf. Dr., §33 a; Dav, S, §44 a; Ges, §107. 2 b; M.R, §6.3. 10. b33. Cf. 11, 9. *]1N. LXX, 'Opix. The Targg. of Jon. and Jer, also Ephrem Syrus and Jerome, take this to be Edessa (wiio/), , but incorrectly, as Edessa is a Mesopotamian, not a Baby lonian town. Bochart and others identify it with Arecca, on the lower Tigris, on the frontier of Susiania. More probably it is 'Opxofi, mentioned by Ptol. v. 20. 7 ; the modern Warka, on the left bank of the lower Euphrates, south-east of Babylon. Its name on the inscriptions is ' Arku' or ' Urku] interpreted by Oppert as meaning 'Moon-town;' but see Schrader, CO. T, p. 76 f. 13N . LXX, 'ApxdS. The position of 13N was, until recently, unknown. Knobel explains it by 'Akk^ti/, a district north of Babylon. In the Assyr. inscriptions not only do we find the land of Akkad mentioned, but also the ancient royal title 'King of the Sumiri and Akkadi] which was assumed by the later CHAP. IO, VERS. 9— II. 109 Assyrian and Babylonian monarchs. Akkad may be re garded as the name for North, or Upper Babylonia. A town Akkad has now been discovered on an inscription, of the reign of Nebuchadnezzar I, unearthed by Rassam at Abu-Habba, but its position has not yet been definitely ascertained. Cf. Di. and see Schrader, C.O.T., p. 78. rob3. LXX, Xdkavvr). In Amos 6, 2 it has the form n?P?, and in Is. 10, 9 i3?3; but it is uncertain whether ,1373 in this verse is identical with these. It has not yet been found in the Assyrian inscriptions. The Targ. Ps.-Jon. and Targ. Jer, also Ephrem, Jerome, etc, identify it with Ctesi- phon Seleucia, on the Tigris. G. Rawlinson (Anc. Mon., i. p. 20), cited by Di, thinks it is Nippur (Niffer), following the Talmud. lyjtt? VI N3. Shin'ar is Babylonia proper, exclusive of Mesopotamia, the Bab. Irdq of the Arabs. Shin'ar is com monly understood to be a dialectic variation of the Bab. Assyrian 'Sumer;' 'Sumer' being the name of the southern portion of Babylonia, the northern part being Akkad. The Hebrews would then have applied the original name of south Babylonia to all Babylonia; see Schrader, C. O.T., p. 103 f. Di, however, now thinks that the comparison of iy3ts* with Sumer is improbable, and mentions Hale"vy's proposal to read IJ? *3?>, 'the two cities;' he also points out that in one of the Tel-el- Amarna letters, from the King of Alasija in Mesopotamia to Amenophis III, Babylonia is named Sanhar =1J?3E\ Cf. Halevy, /. A., viii. 12, p. 507 f. Onq. has 7331 NyiNS • ,„ the land of Babel! The word occurs besides in Josh. 7, 21. Is. 11, 11. Dan. 1, 2. Zech. 5, 11. 11. Render, 'From that land he went forth to Asshur] etc. This translation is not only demanded by ver. 22, where IIO GENESIS, Asshur is enumerated among the sons of Shem, but by ver. io, 11K>N here, being opposed to Shinar in that verse. The versions, however, except Targ. Jon, take IIE'N as subject, as though it were the name of a person, which is never the case in the O. T. llts'N is here taken in its geographical sense, and denotes the district on the east bank of the Tigris, as the site of the cities assigned to it shews; cf. 2, 14. 11tt)N is the ace. of motion towards, without the ending n— ; cf. 35, 1. 3. 43, 15. Ex. 4, 19, and constantly; see Ges, § 118. 2 ; M. R, § 41 a ; Dav, S, § 69 b. nli^J. LXX, Nu/ei„7, Assyrian 'Ninua] also 'Nind] on the east bank of the Tigris, opposite the modern Mosul, now Kujundschik. Cf. Schrader, C. O. T., p. 82. "Vy n3m = lit. ' streets of a city] or ' wide places of a city;' unless it be preferred to regard the two words as in apposition. The LXX have ttjv 'Po<»j3s v6\u>. Probably i*y n3m is distinct from 1,131 nnm in 36, 37, though it has been conjectured that the two are identical, and that it is Rahaba on the Euphrates; see Tuch, p. 189. Di. supposes that, according to its name, it formed a sort of suburb of Nineveh, the position of which is now unknown ; so Del. in his Parodies, p. 261, comparing 'Ri(re*)-bit ir Ni-na-a' in the inscription of Asarhaddon (i. 53), etc.; see Schrader, C. 0. T, p. 84. nb3 was formerly identified with KaXaXrivf) of Strabo, perhaps n7n, whither (according to 2 Kings 17, 6. 18, n) a portion of the ten tribes was carried away captive by Shalmaneser. More probably it is the same as Kalhu of the inscriptions, built about 1300 by Shalmaneser I, and re founded by Asurnisirhabal (883-859), and raised to the CHAP. IO, VERS. 12, 13. Ill position of a royal residence (see Schrader, C.O.T., p. 81). Kalhu occupied the site of the present village and hill of Nimrud, in the most southern angle of the triangle formed by the Tigris and Zab; see Di, p. 87. It is distinct from n?n mentioned above. 12. |D1, LXX, Ado-cp, cf. Lag, Gen. Graece, p. 36, is only mentioned here, and is not found on the inscriptions ; but as it lies between Nineveh and Kelach, it is to be sought for between Kujundschik and Nimrud. Prof. Sayce identifies it with Res-eni, i.e. J*y tS"Nl; see Academy, May 1, 1880, and Schrader, C.O.T., p. 83 f. nbllJin I^J^n Nin cannot refer to JD1 alone, as nothing further is known of the large city of Resen ; and from its position between Nineveh and Kelach, it must be regarded as insignificant. We must therefore refer it either to the four cities, or to Nineveh, together with the other three ; Nineveh being regarded as forming with the other three a great city ; cf. Jon. 1, 2. 3, 2. 4, n. 13. The sons of Mizraim. CUb, 1 Chron. 1, n D**117 Ktb. We find the D*117 (in Jer. 46, 9. Ez. 27, 10. 30, 5) mentioned as bow men in the army of the Egyptians, or Tyrians ; in Jer. and Ez. 30, 5, with Cush and Phut; in Ez. 27, 10, with Persia and Phut; and in Is. 66, 19, among the most distant people. In Is. l.c. and the two passages in Ez, the sing, form 117 is used. They are identified by Hitzig with the Libyans; by Movers (Phoen., ii. 1. 377 ff.) with the Berber tribe oiLewdta dwelling on the Syrtes ; by Knobel with the Egyptised portion of the Semitic 15 7 (cf. ver. 2 2), who had settled in north-eastern Egypt. All these identifications are precarious. A people of western lower Egypt, or on its borders, seems to be 112 GENESIS, required to explain 0*117. 117 in ver. 22 is different from the D*117 here mentioned; cf. further, Di. and Tuch on this verse. COil*. LXX, Alvcpcridp, uncertain. Pesh. has p'^^T, which Tuch emends to aofli\\ . Kn. and Bunsen connect it with ' emhit] i. e: ' north] and explain it as North Egypt. Ebers explains D*03y as = ' an-amu] the wandering Amu or Asiatic herdsmen who had settled on the Bucolic arm of the Nile, where there was pasture for their cattle. 0^3nb. LXX, Aafiiclp — probably identical with the D*317 in Nah. 3, 9. 2 Chron. 12, 3. 16, 8. Dan. 11, 43 — are the Libyans, old Egyptian 'Tehennu' ('Thihenu'), also ' Lebu' or 'Rebu! Wright compares for the interchange of n and 1, 3*117, Sam. D*1,17; tS'13, Syr. lis; pi, Syr. foi. 'The name here is to be understood of the Libyans on the borders of Egypt,' Di. O^nnDJ. LXX,. Lag. reads Nc73, Philistia, is called naXaiorlvri by Josephus, and this name afterwards was used as the name of the whole land of Canaan. In Assyrian it is 'Palailav' or 'Piliita;' see Schrader, C. 0. T, p. 86. For the Philistines, cf. Sh, G., p. 169 f. ; Bad, Pal., p. 154 f. CinDS. Not the Cappadocians, as LXX in Deut. 2, 23. Amos 9, 7; Vulg. (everywhere else, but here ' Caphtorim'), Targg. Onq, Ps.-Jon, and Jer, and Pesh.; but more 114 GENESIS, probably Crete ; not only because such an important island would scarcely be omitted in this table of nations, but also because Kaftor in Jer. 47, 4 is expressly mentioned as an *N, and the Philistines in 1 Sam. 30. 14. Ez. 25, 16. Zeph. 2, 5, etc. are called D*ni3 : cf. Tac, Hist., v. 2, who indirectly testifies to the origin of the Philistines from Crete; see Del.5, p. 217 f. ; and Sh, G., pp. 135, i7ot, 198. 15. The descendants of Canaan. ]Y"PX the first-born, perhaps ' the fisher-town ' (from 1*1?), the oldest settlement of the Canaanites, and the only one of all the Phoenician towns known to Homer. In Josh. n, 8. 19, 28 it is called n31 |1TX. Even when Tyre had gained a reputation, the Phoenicians were still called Sidonians; Deut. 3, 9. Josh. 13, 6. 1 Kings 11, 5. 16, 31. The absence of any mention of Tyre in the table is notice able ; cf. Di, p. 190 f. nn. ' The form nn (without *— , although D*nn, instead of nn *33, is commonly found in P) points to the name of a people of wide range,' Di. nn=the ' Chela' of the Egyptian Monuments, who in the period from the 18th to the 20th dynasty were the ruling nation in Syria, between the Orontes and Euphrates, up to Asia Minor. Brought under the rule of Egypt by Thutmosis II, they soon penetrated further south and became, as we learn from the Tel-el- Amarna Letters, in the time of Amenophis III and IV, dangerous foes of the Phoenician coast towns, up to that time under the sway of Egypt. Palestine was again brought entirely under Egyptian control by the campaigns of Seti I and Ramses II, but in N. Syria the ' Cheta ' maintained their supremacy. In the Assyrian inscriptions, the ' Haiti] in this sense, are often mentioned from noo onwards, but from the end of the eighth century, when these territories CHAP. IO, VERS. 15-17. 115 were absorbed by the Assyrian Empire, the name is applied, in a more limited sense, to the Hittites in Palestine (cf. Schrader, K.G.F., p. 225 ff; C.O.T., p. 91 ff.); and the author of Gen. x seems to refer mainly, if not exclusively, to the nn in Canaan. Their chief city was Kadesh on the Orontes. In 1 Kings 10, 29. 2 Kings 7, 6 Hittite kings are mentioned in Syria ; and the Hittites in the O. T. may very possibly be offshoots of these Syrian Hittites, see further, Di. ; Sayce in the Trans, of the Soc. of Bib. Arch., vii. 2. 248 ff. ; Cheyne, Enc. Brit, s.v.; Wright, Empire of the Hittites. 16. ""DI^H. ' The febusites] who dwelt in and around Jebus, afterwards called Jerusalem. "*1?0Nn. ' The Amorites] who dwelt in the hill country of Ephraim and Judah, and spread out far into the south; the most powerful and warlike of all the Canaanitish tribes. In E and D *iONn is the general name for the original inhabitants of Palestine, before the coming of the Israelites, while J uses the title *3y33. Cf. Amar, the name of Palestine in the Egyptian Monuments, and Amurra, in the Tel-el- Amarna Letters. Deut. 3, 9 is a specimen' of the Amorite language, Di. *lON = prob. ' those who dwell on high ground' (cf. Num. 13, 29), from ION = TON, Is. 17, 9, 'top] 'height! W13. 'The Girgashites] cf. 15, 21. Deut. 7, 1, their position is uncertain : possibly they must be sought for in the west Jordan land; cf. Josh. 24, 11. 17. inn. ' The Hiviles.' *in possibly = ' those who live in town-communities (Stadtgemeinden), nfrl,' Di.; cf. 34, 2. Josh. 9. Later they are found in the Lebanon and Hermon dis tricts, perhaps driven thither by the Israelites; Josh. 1 1, 3. Judg. 3, 3. 2 Sam. 24, 7. Cf. Ewald, His., i. p. 237 (Eng. Trans.). Il6 GENESIS, The *f1S, i. e. 'Perizzites] 'those who dwell in open villages', niP3, who are mentioned in 13, 7. 15, 20, are not found in this table; see Di, p. 192. ''pIS'n are the Phoenicians of "Apia) (Aram. J13371 NpIN), at the foot of mount Lebanon, about five hours north of Tripolis, the birth-place of the emperor Alexander Severus. *Apmj has been rediscovered in the modern Tell Arqa and village Arqa. LXX, 'ApovKdios. In Assyrian 'Arha;' see Schrader, C.O.T., p. 87. TDH . 'The Phoenicians of Sin.' Hieron., Quaest. ed. Lag, p. 17, mentions a town Sin, not far from Arqa. Breydenbach (see Di, p. 192) in 1483 found a village Syn, half a mile from the river Arqa. 18. "miNn. LXX, tov 'ApdSiov. ' The Aradians] men tioned in Ez. 27, 8. 11 as the sailors and warriors of the Tyrians, are the inhabitants of "ApaSos, a Phoenician city built on a rocky island north of Tripolis, according to • Strabo, by exiles from Sidon. But this does not prove that there were no Aradians at an earlier date; see Di., p. 192. Arvad is frequently found on the Assyrian inscriptions ' Ar-va-da, Aruada ;' see Schrader, C.O.T., p. 87 f. Cf. Bad, Pal., p. 382. "HTOJJn . ' The Phoenicians of Simyra,' south of Aradus, north of Tripolis, mentioned by Strabo. In Assyrian 'Si-mir-ra;' see Schrader, C.O.T., p. 89, and in the Tel-el-Amarna Letters Sumura and Sumur. The name is still preserved in Sumra, a small village, cf. Bad, Pal., . P- 379- TlEim. 'The inhabitants of Hamath\' the modern 1 Arab. glii, Ass. Amattu, Del, Par., p. 275 f, Proleg., p. 174. CHAP. IO, VERS. I8-2I. II7 Hamd, about thirty-eight hours N. of Damascus, on the Orontes (cf. Bad, Pal, p. 396 f.), often mentioned in the O. T, and Assyrian inscriptions up to Sargon's time, ' mat Hamatti ;' see Schrader, C.O.T., p. 90. 1!?M is Nif. of p3 ; there is no necessity to take it with Ewald from p*3. "03*D3n, used here and ver. 19 in its narrower sense, excluding the Phoenicians and Syrians. 20. n3N2 scriptio plena, for *]N3; H3N3 here, ver. 30, 13, 10. 25, 18, is to be taken as an adv. ace for the fuller 1N3 iy, 19, 22, lit. 'as thou comest ;' cf. on 13, 10. nil J. ' Gerar] in Philistia, it was more towards the south than Gaza. On the ,1 of motion towards, see Ges, §90. 2; Dav, § 17. 3. TXty. ' Gaza] the southernmost frontier stronghold in Philistia; see Sh, G., p. 181 f. ; Bad, Pal., p. 154 f. 0,,321 nttlNI niftjn nmO, the four cities of the plain, mentioned with Bela in 14, 2. They probably occupied the ground now covered by the southern portion of the Dead Sea ; see Di, p. 237. SJttJb. Hieron. and Targ. Jer. identify it with Callirrhoe, on the east side of the Dead Sea, in the Wady Zerka Ma'in, celebrated afterwards for its hot springs. But Di. objects to this identification, as Callirrhoe lies too far north; and points out, that according to the analogy of the preceding verse, a town on this side of the Dead Sea or of the Ghor is required. 21-31. The Descendants of Shem. 21. Nin 02 . . . DttJbl; see the note on 4, 26. 13V; see the note on 14, 13. Il8 GENESIS, bVUn nD"1 TIN. Render, ' The elder brother of faphet] The rendering ' Brother of faphet, the elder] adopted by the LXX, Symm, Massoretes, Rashi, and others, is refuted by the fact that the limitation of 7113 to the age would only then be sufficiently indicated if the text ran 7113,1 n3 |3 (9, 24. 27, 1. 15. 42). 7.113,1 without p or nN cannot = ' nalu major] On 7113,1, as comparative (or superlative), see on 9, 24; and cf. Dav, S., §§ 27, 34; Ges, § 133. 2. 3. 22. Ob^y = ' Flam' and 'the Elamites] the land and people on the east of the lower Tigris, south of Assyria and Media, north of the Persian Gulf; nearly corresponding to the more modern Susiana and Elymais. ' D7*y neither here nor elsewhere in the O. T. included Persia or all the land up to India/ Di. In Assyrian ''Ham' or ''Ilamti;' see Schrader, C. 0. T, p. 96. lltUN. 'Assyria and the Assyrians] 'for the most part on the eastern side of the central Tigris, between Armenia, Susiana, and Media ; its extent cannot be accurately defined ; so called after its old capital and deity Asur ;' see Schrader, C.O.T., p. 97, also p. 35. The Assyrians (as their inscrip tions testify) spoke a Semitic language. 1ffi3D1N, since Bochart's time usually explained by 'Appanaxiris (Ptol. vi. I. 2), the hill country of the upper Zab (east of Carduchia or Gordyene). The name occurs fre quently in the Assyrian inscriptions as Arbaha, or Arabha, but its meaning is not clear. Ges, Kn, and others explain it as = ' boundary of the Chaldeans ' from f)lN = Arab. fiT\ ' boundary] and Itso = Chaldean ; cf. Josephus' statement that the Chaldeans were descended from ' Apdja^dh^s. Schrader and others object to the identification of "in with Arrapa- chitis, as the Assyrian inscriptions never mention Chaldeans CHAP. IO, VER. 22. 119 as settled in those districts. Di. thinks, that following the geographical notices in the inscriptions, the 'land of the Chaldeans ' must be sought in the south, but not in Accadia (Neuville) or Babylonia (Fried. Del. and Schr.), as this land was well known to the Hebrews under other names. He regards ItSOSiN as being the territory of the Chaldeans from the Persian Gulf towards the North. He draws attention to the fact that Kardunias, the Assyrian name at a later date for Babylonia in general, was originally the title of the Babylonian coast lands, and that it signifies ' land of the Chaldeans! Cf. his Comm., p. 195 f. lib. Apparently ' the Lydians ' and ' Lydia! It is not, however, clear why Lydians should be placed among the Semites. Their language was not Semitic, and they do not appear to have formed a portion of any Semitic kingdom. See Di, p. 196, and Del.5 ad loc. There is no reason to assume that the narrator here wishes to limit the title to the Lydians of Asia Minor. In the other passages in the O. T. where 117 occurs, the African Lydians are probably meant, though Stade and Fried. Del. question the existence of African D*117 : cf. also Schrader, C. 0. T, p. 98 f. 01 N. 'Rather the name of a people than a land, and with a wider meaning than Syria, so that when it is more accurately spoken of, some addition is made to the name, as D*in3 DIN, p'tS*01 DIN. DIN = the peoples of Syria and Mesopotamia, up to the upper plains of the Tigris and the valley-land within the Taurus, which was at a later date considered as belonging to Armenia. The explanation of the name as 'Highland' is very doubtful. In Assyrian 'Aramu] 'Arumu] and 'Arimu;' see Schrader, C.O.T., p.- 100. 120 GENESIS, 23. The sons of Aram 1- yiV is mentioned in 22, 21 as the first son of Nahor; in 36, 28 as a son of Dishan (|tJ'*l); in Job 1,1 as a people north-east of Edom. In Jer. 25, 20 kings of the land of Uz are spoken of, and in Lam. 4, 21 Edomites are mentioned as dwelling in the land of Uz. According to Josephus, Ant., i. 6. 4, Uz founded Trachonitis and Damascus. 'All this points to a people who were widely scattered in southern Syria and the Wilderness, viz. in the neighbourhood of Hauran and Damascus,' Di. Cf. also Robertson Smith, Kinship, p. 2 6 1, 'and Glaser, Skizzen der Gesch. und Geograph. Arabiens, ii. p. 411 f. bin is uncertain. Josephus, Ant., i. 6. 4, gives 7in as the founder of Armenia. Bochart refers it to XoXoporrivr) in Armenia. It is usually identified (see Di, p. 197) with Hule (Sj^il), a name that still attaches itself to lake Merom in Galilee and the marshy land around it, but also to a district between Emesa and Tripolis. A district ' Huli(j)a' near mount Masius is mentioned in the Assyrian inscriptions ; see Del, Par., p. 259. m3 is unknown. Josephus 1. e mentions in3 as the founder of the Bactrians. Jerome supposes in3 to be the Carians. Clericus takes it to be ' Karthara ' on the Tigris ; see Tuch, p. 204. t?jn. Heb.-Sam. NE>0; ~LXX,Moo-6x, 1 Chron. 1, 17 TjBto; cf. Ps. 120, 5. Josephus l.c. explains by Mrjo-awuot, at the mouths of the Euphrates and Tigris (Syr. r--^) More probable is Bochart's identification with Mons Masius, north, of Nisibis. 1 These words are wanting in 1 Chron. 1, 17. CHAP. IO, VERS. 23-26. 121 24. The descendants of Arpachshad. nbU7 and lay the son of n7ts», also found in 11, 12. 14. 25. lb\ On the passive, see 4, 18. JbD, the same individual is mentioned in 11, 18. yiNn n3bC3. ' The earth was divided] i. e. the popu lation of the earth; possibly to be referred to 11, 1-9; cf. Ps, 55, 10; or it may refer to some partition of the soil amongst distinct nations, in which case we should expect to find p?n. 373 may have been used here on account of the proper name 373. JlapV 'foqtan.' 'Joqtan, from the notices in the Bible, was regarded by the Arab genealogists under the name " Qahtdn," as the ancestor of the genuine Arabs in Arabia proper, from whom the old prehistoric inhabitants, as 'Ad, Thamiid, Gadis, etc. on the one hand, and the Ishmaelites of the north (Gen. 25, 12 ff.) on the other, were distinguished,' Di. The name ' Qahtdn ' is still preserved as the name of a district and a tribe in northern Yemen. 26. 111D7N. The 7N in this word is usually explained as the Arabic article, and this is the view evidently adopted by the punctuators. Other alleged instances of the Arabic article in Hebrew words, are K*3?^, D*Dl3f)N, Dlp^N, and the p.n. *tonj>«, cf. C. P. Ges, p. 38, and H.W.B., nth ed. sub voce. It is more probable, however, that 7N, as in many other Sabaean names, should be read 7N ' God] and that 1110 comes from the root 11*, so that the word = + 7N HID ' God (is) a loving one] or = 111 + D7N 'II loves' (D is then the mhnation). Cf. D. H. Miiller, Z. D. M. G., xxxviii. 18, and Glaser, Skizzen, ii. p. 280. The identification of this name is uncertain. Bochart connects it with the "AaXov- 122 GENESIS, pawToi of Ptolemy in the midst of Yemen. Tuch corrects it into H107N, i.e. iCi, grandson of Sabas, who, with his tribe, inhabited the hill country of Yemen, near x*j\ . F)btt) is uncertain. 'Bochart compares the 'S.aXaTnjvol of Ptolemy, vi. 7. 23 ; Knobel, a district Salfie (i^ii-. in Niebuhr, Arab., p. 247), south-westward of San'd; Osiander, Sulaf or Salif the name of a tribe in Yemen,' Di, p. 198 f. niQI^n, rediscovered on the Sabaean inscriptions as niOiSn, i. e. Hadramaut (uy^Ilii), is the name of a district east of Yemen on the sea coast, which is probably identical with the land of the XarpapaT'iTai, one of the four chief tribes dwelling in southern Arabia (Strabo, xvi. 4. 2). Their capital was Sahara, cf. ver. 7. The name is preserved at the present day. ni1* is uncertain. 'As the word means "moon" in Heb, Sab, and Geez, Bochart conjectured the JU-a ,_ij "sons of the new moon" or Alilaei in northern Yemen; Michaelis, the moon-coast and moon-mountain, «£)! Hi^s. or J^». in eastern Hadramaut,' Di. 27. Omn, Heb.-Sam. D111N, is unknown. The 'ASpa- plrai of Ptolemy, or the Alramilae of Pliny, have been suggested, but they probably belong to nioixn. 7T1N, Heb.-Sam. 71*N, LXX, AifijX (Lagarde, A2/3ijA, so Tisch.'s text), according to Arab tradition, was the old name of the capital of Yemen, called, since the Ethiopic occupation in the fifth century a.d, San'd (*lxi«). See further, Di, p. 199. nbpl is unknown. Perhaps = 'a palm-bearing district' (Arab. Jil ' a palm tree '). Bochart identified it with the Minaei of Pliny and Strabo. CHAP. IO, VERS. 27-29. 123 28. 7313?, 1 Chron. 1, 22 73*y, so Heb.-Sam, Vulg. ' Ebal] LXX, TefidX and EioA, is unknown. Swete's edition of the LXX omits the word. bNO*'3N is unknown. Cf. the Sabaean mny03N = ' a father is 'Attar] Hal, Melanges, p. 86. D. H. Muller, Z.D.M.G., xxxvii. 18. N2U7, see ver. 7. 'The Sabaeans] here as the descendants of Joqtan, among the Arabs; in 25, 3, among the descendants of Abraham and Keturah. There is no reason to assume that there were three distinct Sabaean peoples as Kn. does. Cf. Schrader, C. O. T., p. 103. 29. 1D1N is mentioned, from Solomon's time onwards, as the land whence the fleet of Hiram and Solomon, after a three years' voyage, brought gold, precious stones, sandal wood, silver, ivory, apes, and peacocks (1 Kings 9, 28. 10, 11. 22. 2 Chron. 8, 18. 9, 10), and whose gold became proverbial as fine gold (Ps. 45, 10. Job 22, 24. 28, 16. Is. 13, 12. 1 Chron. 29, 4). Its position has been disputed, but as it is mentioned among the sons of Joqtan it must perhaps be sought for in Arabia (cf. ver. 30), probably on the southern or south-eastern coast. On the Arabian coast, however, no suitable place with which Ophir can be identified is at present known. Ophir has also been identified with Supara on the coast of Malabar (Ptol. vii. 1. 6); with Sofala on the east coast of Africa, opposite Madagascar, in the neighbourhood of which the ruins of Zimbabye have been recently discovered; and with Abhira on the coast of the Indus Delta. It has also been supposed that Ophir must be located somewhere on the west coast of Arabia, between Hig'az and Yemen, where much gold and silver were found in former times ; so Sprenger and Riehm. See further, Di, p. 200. 124 GENESIS, nSin. Cf. ver. 7, and 2, 11. 'Assuming that there was a n?*in in north-west Arabia, on the Persian Gulf (cf. 25, 18. 1 Sam. 15, 7 \ and Gen. 2, 11), the XavXoraloc of Strabo (xvi. 4. 2) and Huwaila in Bahrein on the coast may be com pared (Niebuhr, Arab., p.342),' Di, Glaser, Skizzen, ii. pp. 267, 325 f, 339 f, thinks that n7*in here=the district of Yemama; cf. Di, p. 200. 33T* is unknown. Bochart compares the 'lafiaptrai of Ptol. vi. 7. 24 (which he emends to 'l<»|3aj3iT; Job 3, 4 ~\VT\ *n* Ninn Dl*n; Is. 27, 10, and often. nDto= lit. 'lip] then 'language;' so in Is. 19, 18 |y33 HSto; 33, 19 ns'ts* *poy; cf. Ez. 3, 5. P uses Jits'? in this sense, 10, 5. 20. 31; cf. Deut. 28, 49. D^inN O'HIll = lit. ' single words] i. e. ' the same ' or ' similar words! The use of D*inN in the phrase D*inN D*0* 27,44. 29, 20. Dan. 11, 20, meaning 'single] i.e. ' a few days] is different from its use here. 2. yUl does not only mean 'to break up the camp] but ' lo strike the tents and move onward on the journey! 126 GENESIS, DlpO. Not 'from the east] but as 13, 11 'eastwards' (cf. M. R, § 49. Rem. d. 12, 8), i. e. 'from the Standpoint of the author, in Palestine (29, 1),' Di. Tiypl, prop, 'a split' or 'cleft] but according to the usage of the language, ' a plain lying in a broad valley] ' a valley plain ; ' cf. the Syriac ] fcoxjas ' campus patens! The dis tinction between geographical synonyms should be noted ; see Stanley, Sinai and Palestine, App, § 5, where the niyp3 men tioned in the O. T. are enumerated, and Sh, G., pp. 384, 654. lyD® yiN3. Cf. on 10, 10. 3. injTl 7N ttPN . ' One to the other! On this mode of expressing the reciprocal relation, see Ges, § 139. i'c ; M. R, §72.3. Rem. a ; cf. § 94 c. Rem. a ; Dav, S., § 1 1. R. c. mn is properly imper. with n cohort. (Ges, § 48. 5; Stade, § 592 c) from the root 3n* ' to give] which, though common in Aramaic and Arabic (t_*-»j)> is confined in Heb. to the imper. sing, and plural. n3l sing, sometimes has the force of an interjection, so here, 'up] 'come on;' A.V. 'go to] so vers. 4. 7. Ex. 1, 10. For the form, cf. Ges, § 69. 2. Rem. 2. Other verbal forms used as interjections are ,1Ni 'see!' n37 'come!' cf. Stade, § 380. n32bj. 'Let us bake;' the imperf. with n cohort, to express the intention with greater energy; cf. Ges, §§ 48. 3, 108. 1 a; Dav, S., § 61 f.; M. R, § 9; Driver, § 49 0. The verb p7 is a denominative from n337. 0,,33b ' bricks] perhaps so called as being baked white by the heat of the sun. The word occurs in Assyr. under the form libillu, cstr. state libnat, Schrader, C.O.T., p. 106. nDltob. Dat. of the product; cf. 2, 22. Amos 5, 8, lit. ' into what is burnt] i. e. ' bricks! Render, ' And let us burn CHAP. II, VERS. 3-6. 127 them into bricks! The bricks here mentioned were different from those made of a mixture of straw and clay, Ex. 1,14. 5.7- 4. D^Ottn IttJNU. Render, ' With its top in the heavens! The clause is a simple circumstantial one ; cf. 24, 10. 25, 26 ; Dr., § 159 ; Ewald, § 341 a; Dav, S., § 138 a ; so Is. 6, 6 11*31 ,13X1 ; Zech. 2, 5 mo 73n 11*31. In Deut. 1, 28 we have the word D*iy qualified by D*DE>3 ni11X3 'fortified in the heavens] i.e. 'with high and lofty fortifications ;' cf. Dan. 4, 8. 17. OtD 1 jb niyy3 , lit. ' let us make us a name] i. e. ' let us gain an honourable name;' so Is. 63, 12. Jer. 32, 20. }*!33 J3 refers to both halves of the first part of the verse. They had a double object in view, to found a city, and gain for themselves an honourable name ; the city being a common place of assembly for all, and so a means of keeping them together and preventing their being scattered over the earth. Others connect p33 |3 closely with DCS*, and take that word in the sense of ' monument' = Arab. I*.-., as in 2 Sam. 8, 13. This however is doubtful, and here unsuitable. VlD3 \D . LXX, irpb tov Siao-n-aprjvai f^pas, and Vulg. ' ante- quam dividamur] apparently taking JB as though it were *337. 6. 'Behold one people (are they), and one language have they all! The A.V. 'The people is one] is scarcely correct, as that would be rather Dyn inN. The R.V. renders, 'Behold they are one people] etc. abnn is inf. cstr. Hif'il of bbn, with the ,1 pointed with pathach instead of a composite sheva, on account of the following guttural n ; cf. Stade, § 80. 2 b ; Ges, § 67. Rem. 6 ; Ewald, § 1 99 a. So Esth. 6, 1 3 n&nn ; Is. 9, 3 nhnn . 128 GENESIS, "l^ll Obnn nt1=lit. 'and this is their beginning to do] i.e. ' merely the commencement of their plan.' "^3^ = lit. 'will be cut off] i.e. 'they will not be debarred from it;' so once besides, Job 42, 2 ,1010 1,00 1V3* N7, lOt'* is a lightened form of IOT* from DOT ; so n733, Ver. 7, for n?33; cf. 9, 19, and Ges, §67. Rem. 11; Stade, §521 a, 0, who explains the form in question as formed after the analogy " of the third pers. pi. perf, instead of 'Of*, or W ; cf. Ewald, § 193 c 7. nb33. See note on ver. 6; and on the first pers. pi, see on 1, 26. The word was probably chosen with reference to the name 733. 1tt?N, expressing the result rather than the aim, = 'jo that] not 'that;' cf. Ex. 20, 26. Deut. 4, 10. 40. In Gen. 3, 22, we have [3 introducing the negative final clause; see Ges, §165.2; M.R, §i64b; Ewald, § 337 b. 2 ; Dav, S., § 149. inyi nDU* ttTN. Cf. on ver. 3. yoti'=not merely 'to hear] but 'to understand] as in Deut. 28, 49. Is. 33, 19. 8. n^Ilb ibin^l . After verbs of ' ceasing] ' hastening] etc, two constructions are usually possible; either the inf. cstr. with ? as here, or the inf. cstr. alone ; cf. Ges, § 120. 1 ; Ewald, § 285. 1; Dav., S., § 82 1. With hn, JO may be used, see Ex. 23, 5. 1 Kings 15, 21. 9. Nip ]3 by . ' Therefore they called its name Babel] i.e. ' they, people called] On the so-called impersonal use of the third pers. perf. masc. sing. (=Nlpn K1j3), cf. Ges, § 144. 3 a; M.R, § 123. 2 ; Dav, S., § 108 and R. 1. b33, according to the etymology given in the text, is from 773. 733 must then be regarded as contracted from 7|5>3 ; CHAP. II, VERS. 7-9. 129 cf. tf?PT*P. from ?i7P>p; 71NJJ? for 71^; see Ewald, § 158 c; Stade, § 124 a; cf. also the Syriac JLaA 'confusion of speech;' Arab. JlJj This is the Hebrew explanation of the name. For the Babylonian it had another meaning, which is probably the correct one. Some (Eich, Winer) derive it from Bdb &e?> J-3. ^U 'gale] i.e. 'court of Bel;' following the ancients, see Steph. of Byzant.; compare the Aramaic and Talmudic )k^=o, X21='gate] also the names of the Talmud Tracts NOP N33 ' the front gate ;' NT/13 N33 'the back gate;' N33 Ny*XO 'the middle gate;' others, from 733=73 n*3, so Tuch, comparing for the contraction ninti'y3, Josh. 21, 27=n*3 mntS'y 'Temple of Ashtoreth] and the Phoen. my3=my n3 'Temple of Athor ;' Inscr. Melitensis, 5, 1. 4 ; Schroder, Phoen. Gramm., p. 235; cf. p. 108 (see, however, C.I.S., i. p. 163); and the Syriac vo»»|l3>= yojj fc^a; see further, Tuch, p. 221. The name as given on the Assyrian inscriptions is Bdb-Il='Gale of God] or (later) Bdb-Ildni='Gate of the Gods] which is certainly the most probable meaning; cf. Schrader, C.O.T., p. 112 ff.; Del, Par., p. 212 ff.; so most moderns. In the following verses, 10-32, we have a genealogical table carrying on the history of the patriarchs from Shem to Abram — the founder of the house of Israel — and his two brothers Nahor and Haran. This table is in many respects very similar to the one found in chap. 5. In both ten generations are given, Abram closing the list here, and Noah in chap. 5. In both lists the ages of the persons men tioned are considerably higher than those usually reached. Here, as well as chap. 5, we find the length of each person's life reckoned, both from his own birth to the birth of his first son, and from that event to his death. The LXX and the Samaritan deviate in their methods of reckoning the years 13° GENESIS, here, as well as in the earlier chapter, as may be seen from the following table taken from Dillmann, p. 209. Hebrew Text. LXX Text. Samaritan Text. U v 0 5 S.SS $*& H 11 s 2 £>= a v 0 0 2.b2 *¦>«! a; H fi a, '3-3 t°v 2 r. u s.f**S S hftjj Wu Shem Arpachshad IOO 35 500 4°3 600438 IOO 135 500 400 (43°) 600 535. (565) IOO 135 Soo 3°3 600 438 Kainan . . . Shelach ... Eber 3° 34 4°3 43° 433 464 130130 "34 33°33° 2 70 (37°) 460460404 (504) 130134 3°3 270 433404 PelegReu Serug Nahor 3° 32 3°29 209207200 119 239»39230148 13°132 13° 179 (79) 209 207 200 (1291 33933933° 3°4 (208) 130132 130 19 109 107 IOO 69 239239230148 Terach . . . 70 (135) (205) 70 (13s) (205) 70 (75) (145) In both chapters the Hebrew text has most probably preserved the more correct lists, though the Samaritan is v perhaps the most consistent of the three tables. The Sa maritan list never allows the son to live to a greater age than the father; so the numbers, e.g. in the cases of Terach and Eber, have to be lowered in order to carry out this rule. With the single exception of Terach, the Sam. text increases the number of years before the birth of the first son, and in all cases, except that of Shem, decreases the number of years which each person lived after the birth of the first son. CHAP. II, VERS. 12-28. 131 The Sam. text in the third column agrees with the Hebrew, with the exception of the cases of Eber and Terach. The LXX text, having a large number of variants, is more or less uncertain. Like the Sam. text, seventy years seem to have been the limit before which no children were begotten, and with the exception of Shem, — where all three texts are the same, and Nahor, where one hundred and fifty years are added, with a variant, seventy-nine, — the LXX add one hundred years to the number each person lived before the birth of the first son. In the second column the readings are uncertain, but sometimes the numbers are lower than the corresponding numbers in the Heb. text. In the third column, the LXX have always higher numbers than the Hebrew, except in the cases of Shem, of Eber (reading doubt ful, variant 504) and Terach ; the LXX in the latter case agreeing with the Heb. text. The years of Kainan's life are only given in the LXX text. The object of this table, as of that in chap. 5, was pro bably twofold, to give some account of the period from the flood to Abram's birth, a period treated as uneventful, and to draw attention to the gradual decline in the number of years reached by each patriarch. 1 2. On the proper names in this chap, cf. Di. and Del.5 28. mn "OB by. ' Coram eo] i.e. so that he witnessed it, 'during his life-time;' compare Num. 3, 4. Deut. 21, 16 (Kn.). O^lfcO UN occurs again ver. 31. 15, 7. Neh. 9, 7, but not elsewhere. It is not quite clear whether UN is to be regarded as a proper name or as an appellative = ' district.' The LXX have x<»Pa tS>" XoXSoiW (Acts 7, 4 « yv xdXSaiav), X&pa possibly having arisen from a reading im (but the K 2 132 GENESIS, article is against this), unless we suppose that the reading X&pa has arisen out of xaP, and was then supplied with the article, and so iv rfj x°>Pa- Kn. takes UN as = 11,1 ' mountain] but this is ver}' doubtful. J. D. Michaelis, and others, have identified 11N with the castle of Ur, lying within the Persian frontier, and six days' journey north of Hatra, mentioned by Amm. Marc. xxv. 8. But the Ur mentioned by Marcellinus was first founded by the Persians or Parthians (Del.6), and being in an unfruitful and barren district would hardly be a suitable place for Abram, the shepherd-prince. Besides, dIBO points rather to the land about the lower Euphrates than to Mesopotamia, and most of the ancients (cf. Di.) hold the view that Ur was in Babylonia (Chaldea or Shinar). Another identification is that proposed by Sir Henry and Prof. George Rawlinson, Ur being S]1N (which occurs only in 10, 10), i.e. the present Warka, on the left bank of the lower Euphrates : the name being explained by them as mean ing 'the moon city] after the Arab. j+2. This view has been adopted by Loftus, Trav., p. 126. The opinion most current among modern expositors is irizX~i^is'M.\i^ht\x(El-Muqayyar), a little south of Warka, on the right bank of the Euphrates, where ruins are still to be found. The name UN is found on the inscriptions in the form Uru (seat of the moon-god worship: cf. Eupolemos in Euseb, Praep. Evang., ix. 17 irdXts ttjs Ba/3vXcovlas Kapapivt), rjv twcs Xiyovo-i ttoXiv Ovplrjv), one of the oldest of the Babylonian royal towns in Sumer; see Schrader, C. 0. T, p. 1 1 48". ; Del, Par., pp. 200, 226, and F. Brown,/. B. L., Dec. 1887, p. 46 ff. B*ifc>3 would then be an addition due to the Jews, and not part of the native name ; cf. Di, p. 214. Kittel (Th. St. W., vii. p. 215 ff. : cf. his Gesch., i. p. 163 ff.) considers that Ur Casdim must be sought for in Armenia or in northern Mesopotamia. He CHAP. II, VERS. 30, 31. 133 does not dispute the existence of an Assyrian Ur, but holds that the Ur in this passage must be distinct from Ur in south Babylonia. The Casdim were the inhabitants of south Babylonia and Babylon; they are not mentioned in the Bible or on the monuments before the time of Isaiah (see 23, 13). The name in a wider sense might possibly have included Meso potamia. The origin of the Casdim is obscure, but they seem to have been a tribe which from small beginnings gradually acquired supremacy over south Babylonia and the capital ; cf. Sayce, Ency. Brit., art. Babylonia. The Talmud, Baba Bathra, 91, places Ur Casdim in the neighbourhood of Babylon. Ur Casdim has also been identified, — but with out any great probability, — with Edessa (in Syr. -otio/), by Hitzig. The Syrian Christians boast of Edessa as being the Ur Casdim of Abraham. The old interpretation current among the Jews (also found in the Qoran, Sur. 21) takes UN as meaning fire, and narrates that Abraham confessed the true God, and denied the gods of Nimrod, so he was cast into the fire, but saved in a miraculous manner by God. Hier. probably had this in view when he translated Neh. 9, 7, ' eduxisti eum de igne Chaldaeorum] see Del.6, p. 242, and Beer, Das Leben Abraham's nach Auffassung der jiidischen Sage, 1859. 30. 171, only here and as Ktib in 2 Sam. 6, 23 for 1?*; the original 1 of the root, which still exists in Arabic SJj , Uj , and reappears in the Hif. and Nif. of the verb in Hebrew, is here preserved. 31. DnN 1N2"1. 'They went out with them! The mean ing of the text is not clear. DnN may not be rendered ' with one another] as the suffix cannot be taken as reciprocal. To 134 GENESIS, regard Abraham and Terach as the subj. of 1NX*1, and to refer DFIN to Lot and Sarai or vice versa, is quite arbitrary and not justified by the Hebrew. Nor can DnN be taken as=the retinue who accompanied Abraham and Terach, as these have not been mentioned previously. The text seems to be cor rupt. Either read with the LXX DnN NSi'l igrryayev abrois, so Sam, Vulg, Del.5; or with the Pesh. DriN N2f»l, ^£,5 ypo) vi *C , so Ilg. Ols. Terach would be the subject with either rendering. ]in, Assyr. Harran, Syr. yjJL, Arab, ylji, Gk. Kappal, Lat. Carrae, was situated in north-west Mesopotamia, nine hours SSE. of Edessa, on the little river Gullab. 12. i . 1£N1 . A. V. wrongly, ' Now the Lord had said] more correctly R.V, 'Now the Lord said] the passage being like Judg. 17, i. 1 Sam. 9, 1 ; a new narrative is commenced, amplifying the preceding one which is regarded as a whole, the association of the two being in thought, not in time; cf. Driver, §767. Whether the imperf. with waw conv. can denote a pluperfect is very doubtful ; see note on 1, 2. Driver, 1. c. Obs, fully discusses the question, and arrives at the conclusion that there is not sufficient evidence to justify the adoption of a pluperfect rendering in the place of the simple past. *P V (once again in Pent, Gen. 22, 2) 'get thee] the dat. adds an element of feeling to the bald T\b, implying a reference to, or a regard for, the person addressed. The dative is often found similarly after verbs of motion, e.g. Deut. r, 7. 40. 5, 27, etc.; see Ges, § 119. 3c 2; Ewald, §315 a; Dav, S., § 101.R. b; M.R, §51. 3. R. a. 3. CHAP. 12, VERS. 1-3. 135 "[SING, probably Harran; cf. ver. 4 with 24, 4. 7. 38. In Acts 7, 2 1V1NO is taken as Ur Casdim ; so Hupfeld. ;JN1N for *J3N1N . Impf. Hif. of nNl with the so-called 3 demons.; the verb ,1N1 and other verbs n"7 frequently use the suffix with 3; cf. Stade, §§ 576 c, 127 b; Ges, § 58. 4 ; Dav, §31.5; and see foot-note on 3, 9. 2. 131 "pZJJ'NI 'And I will make thee into a great nation, and I will bless thee and make thy name great, and be thou (i. e. that thou mayest be) a blessing! The imperfects in this and the following verse are to be taken as cohortatives, expressing with greater energy the intention of the speaker, see Driver, § 49 a ; Ges., § 108. 1 a; M. R, § 9; Dav, S., § 62. This rendering is simpler than to translate Y^yNI and the other imperfs. ' that I may ' etc., regarding them as de pendent on *p 1,7 in ver. 1 . i-piTl , pointed according to Ges, § 63. Rem. 5 ; Stade, § 592 d. Here the imperative with waw is used where a voluntative with weak waw would be expected, to express the intention or purpose with greater energy ; cf. 20, 7 n*ni ; 2 Sam. 21, 3 13131; Driver, § 65; Ges, § no. 2b; M. R, § 10; Ewald, § 347 a; Dav, S., § 65 d. n313. 'And be a blessing] LXX, Kal co~n cvXoyrjpivos (Swete prefers tvXoyrjTos), cf. Ps. 21, 7. Is. 19, 24; God will bless him, and men will bless him, in that they will use his name as a formula of blessing, cf. ver. 3, Zech. 8, 13 ; he himself too will be a source of blessing to others ; cf. ver. 3 a. 3. *]bbp?Dl. LXX, Pesh, Vulg, Sam. read the pi. T$>0?*. The Mass- reading is the better one, 'God does not expect that many will so far forget themselves as to curse him' (Di.). 136 GENESIS, 131331. LXX, evXoytjdrjo-ovrai iv o-oi ; Ecclus. 44, 21. Acts 3, 25. Gal. 3, 8 ; so Onq. and Vulg, rendering as a passive, 'shall be blessed:' it is interpreted in the N. T. as meaning that in Christ all the nations should be blessed. The Nif. would then be passive, as in 18, 18. 28, 14. But in 22, 18. 26, 4, we find the reflex. Hithp'. 13i3n,11, which can scarcely be taken as passive, but must = ' all peoples shall bless them selves with thy seed] i. e. wish that they may be as blessed as Israel; cf. 48, 20. Jer. 29, 22. Is. 65, 16; the Nifal is also taken as a reflexive here by Del, Di, and most moderns, after Rashi. Di. remarks that it would not be unreasonable to expect the Pu'al in these passages if the passive sense were intended. Tuch slightly alters the meaning, and renders both Hithp'. and Nif. ' to call oneself happy] i. e. ' to regard oneself as blessed' (2 = through any one), which is perhaps not impossible, but at least for the Hithp'. improbable. 5. t?J13l=' moveable property! LXX, to. imdpxovra. I©}* 1©N ttJODn. ' The souls which they had gotten in H! 8*331 is used collectively. The meaning of these words is not the persons whom they had begotten (Luth.), but the slaves they had acquired during their sojourn in Harran. ivy occurs again in this sense in 31, 1. Deut. 8, 17. 18. $33 as in m*3 nitPB3, 36, 6; DIN 8*33, Ez. 27, 13, etc.; cf. a similar use of tyvxh, 1 Mace. 10, 33. Rev. 18, 13. EOT and P131 are characteristic of P, 2*33 in this sense is also common in P, so 17, 14. 36, 6. 46, 15. 18. 22. 25, and often. Onq. renders, pri3 Kp^ ™?Hr*1 WJ«*M f)Nl. 'And also the souls which they had subjected to the law in Harran] possibly, as Tuch suggests, to avoid the suspicion that strangers accompanied Abram to Canaan. 6. D3ttj DIpE. ' To the district of Shechem! Dipo as in CHAP. 12, VERS. 5, 6. I37 Ex. 3, 8 *3y33n DlpO 7N. Di, however, renders 'to the sanc tuary (Kultstdtte) at Shechem] comparing 22, 3 f. 28, n, etc. Shechem (cf. 33, 18) is the modern Nablous (yJoli), one of the best known towns of Mid-Canaan, in the hill country of Ephraim, situated between Mount Ephraim and Mount Gerizim. Its Roman name was Flavia Neapolis. ni1*3 jlbN iy. 'To the terebinth of Moreh! Del, and others, regarding "o as a proper name. Di. renders ' The terebinth of the teacher! mo J17N is probably to be explained, according to Deut. n, 30 mo *317N, as a terebinth grove, where in ancient times the priests who were seers or prophets had their dwelling, and gave instruction and information to those who resorted to them. The fact that Jacob (35, 4) buried the idols and amulets at Shechem, and that Joshua — after the address to the tribes at Shechem, previous to his death, wherein the covenant between them and God was renewed — raised a stone there as a testimony (Josh. 24, 26), is not without significance, as pointing to the religious character belonging to the locality. Perhaps, as Di. suggests, this grove at Shechem is the same as the terebinth of the Wizards, Judg. 9, 37. On the question of sacred trees, cf. Rob. Smith, Relig. of Semites, p. 185. llbN, to which n^*N and 7s*? belong, was probably 'the terebinth] while P?N, and prob. also n?>N (Josh. 24, 26), was ' the oak! The terebinth, being less common than the oak, was more suitable for marking out any spot (Di.). The LXX translate P?K, and (sometimes) l&N, by dpvs, and the Mas soretic pointing varies, e. g. cf. Josh. 19, 33 and Judg. 4, n. In Aramaic Jai>-7 means a tree in general (cf. Bpvs and tree), and it is possible that 7*N and J17N might be used of other great trees (Ges, Th., 51 a). The Targg. of Onq. and 138 GENESIS, Ps.-Jon. render )17N by *'?.?''l0 'plain] which the Vulg. ' con- vallis illustris' and A. V. follow (R.V. has 'oak] marg. terebinth). From this, perhaps, we may infer that they were acquainted with the idolatrous sense of |17N, for they often render |>y3 in the same way. Pesh. has Jisajcj l^oN-^N ' at the oak of Mamre] so also Saadiah. nilO . LXX render by tyrjkds, Vulg. ' illustris] prob. taking niio as though it were nNIO (a confusion between the sound of the two words). Y1N3 "TN ",3J*33n. IN points to a time when the Canaanites should not be in the land as rulers of the same, this notice was perhaps inserted with reference to the promise made in ver. 7. "WJSn has the article, *a generic word being used col lectively to denote all the individuals belonging to it,' Ges, § 125. 2 ; Ewald, §2770; Dav, S., § 22 a. 8. hbnN O^l. n?nN, ri for 1 ; cf. the note on 9, 21. CO 'on the west] the Mediterranean sea forming the western boundary of Palestine. This use of D* (cf. 333 in ver. 9) as marking a point of the compass is purely Pales tinian. DlpO . . . bNn>13 is a simple circ. clause, without any connecting particle; cf. 32, 12. 31. 1 Sam. 26, 13; Ges, § 156. 2; Driver, § 161. 1; Dav, S., § 140; M.R, § 153. "^n. 'Ai,' lit. 'the stone heap] par excellence ; cf. for the article thus used with a pr. name, Ges, § 125. 2 ; M. R, § 66. Rem. a; Dav, 5"., § 20. R. 1. 9. yiD3i -pbn, cf. on 8, 3. n332n. Cf. ver. 8. 'Towards the south! LXX, iv rfj ePW?'> Aq. better, vorovSe; Symm. ds votov. 333 = ' dryness, dry land] with the art, is the name of the southern portion- CHAP. 12, VERS. 8-15. I39 of the territory of the Hebrews, to the north of which were the Shephelah (low country), the mountains, and the wilder ness of Judah. The district is partly, land capable of culti vation, and partly a waste. South of it lies the wilderness proper, stretching across to Mount Sinai. Cf. Josh. 15, 21 ff.; and Sh, G., pp. 49 f, 278 f. The use of this -word=soulh, is purely Palestinian, cf. on D*, ver. 8. 10. 111. 11* is the usual word in the O.T. for a journey from the high land of Canaan into the valley of the Nile, e.g. Is. 31, 1 ; 17y for the journey from Egypt to Palestine; cf. 13, 1. 44. 23- 24- 46. 4- 11. N137 3'*1pn, lit. 'draw near to come] i.e. 'came near;' cf. on 11, 8, and see Ges, § 114,2. R. 3; Dav, S., §82. nNIO nD\ The adj. in the cstr. state is defined by a following genitive ; cf. D*33 *p3 ' with clean hands] lit. ' clean of hands ;' 8*33 *03N 'sorrowful in spirit;' D*n3B' 7iy ' un- circumcised of lips] Ges, § 128. 3; M.R, § 80. 2 b; Ewald, § 288 c 3 ; Dav, S., § 24 d. Render, ' That thou art fair lo look at! 12. Vn'1 "jnNI. inN, by being placed first, varies the two clauses, and is more emphatic. 13. nN "nnN N3 "*10N. "*? is omitted in the oralio indirecla, as in 41, 15. Is. 48, 8. Hos. 7, 2 ; Ges, § 157 a ; Ewald, § 338 a; M. R, § 162 ; Dav, S., § 146. R. 1. mvm . . . ItO1" I^Oa The perfect with waw conv, after an imperf. with jy07 ; cf. 18, 19 not* . . . niV* 1B>N jyo7, Is. 28, 13 17E>31 137* jy07; cf. Ges, § 112. 3 c. a; Driver, § "5 (P- J34); M-R-> § 24- 2 a; Dav, S., § 53 c 15. 17^n"1 is pointed with a comp. shewa, the dagesh in the first 7 being omitted, by Ges, § 10. 2. Rem. A ; Stade, § 136. 2 (who cites 7 as one of the consonants that frequently 140 GENESIS, give up their doubling when pointed with shewa). The shewa is here composite instead of simple, by Stade, § 105, Ges. l.c, i.e. hatSph-pathach is used instead of a simple shewa after a vowel with Metheg, when two similar sounds follow one another, so tfnrtot Ps. 8, 3, rMJJl Is. 53, 7, Tp Ps. 87, 1. njnS TV2. is ace of place, in answer to the question 'whither?' see Ges, § 118. 2 ; M.R, §41 a; Ewald, § 28id; Dav, S., § 69 b ; cf. 24, 16. 27, 3. 31, 4- 39. I- 42, 38- 43. i7- 45. 25- nj*1D, Josephus, Ant., viii. 6. 2, explains the name as= 'the king] so Ges, in Thes., p. 11 29. Stern gives as the hieroglyphic form of the name p-ur-d, i.e. ' the great prince] ' the greatest of all] a title given, since king Sisaq, to all the Pharaohs, and which has passed over into Coptic, where n-OlfpO, n-eppO='^ king' (Peyron, Lex., 150). Di, p. 227, Lauth, de Roug£, Brugsch, Ebers, and Erman prefer to explain nyi3 (from a notice in Horapollo, i. 62 oucos piyas) zs=per'o (per-aa, per-ad), ' the great house] a title given to the reigning monarch, similar to the modern 'Sublime Porte! It remained the usual title of the Egyptian kings up to the time of the Persian conquest. The title nyi3 is often found on the oldest monuments, Ebers, Egypt, und die B.M., p. 264. 16. The presents Abram received from Pharaoh are else where mentioned as forming the riches of a nomad prince ; cf- 24, 35. 32, 15. Job 1, 3. 42, 12. lb "n^l, lit. 'and there was to him] 'i.e. he had ; for the singular, cf. (note on) 1, 14. 13, 5. 30, 43. 32, 6. Num. 9, 6. 1 Kings n, 3. 17. DtyM nyiB . . . yXP\. VX, Qal='/o touch] Pi'el, intens. ' lo touch heavily] ' smile.' A verb in Hebrew is fre quently followed by a noun, derived from it, in the ace; cf. CHAP. 12, VER. 16 — CHAP. 13, VER. 3. 141 note on 1, 11, and add examples 30, 8. 40, 8. 50, 10. Deut. 7, 23. 2 Sam. 4, 5. V33 and JW3 are often used in this connection, e.g. 2 Kings 15, 5. 1 Sam. 6, 9. Job 19, 21 (both with 1*). Ex. n, 1. 18. nob. On the pointing here and ver. 19, cf. Ges, § 102. 2 d; Stade, § 372 b. 19. Render, 'Why didst thou say, She is my sister, so that I took her to be my wife (i. e. and so lead me to take her) ? ' The second idea being really a consequence of the first, the waw conv. may be rendered, 'so that or and so;' see Driver, § 74 a, and p. 136 ; Ges, § in. 3 b. Rem. ; and cf. 20, 12. 23, 20. 31, 27. 20. Vbj* IS^I 'commanded concerning him ;' cf. Num. 8, 22. 2 Sam. 14, 8. inbCTI 'and they brought him on his way or escorted him;' cf. the N.T. irpoiripirciv, Acts 15, 3. 21, 5. 13. 2. 3nt31 **|D33 njp03. The article is generic, being used with different materials which are generally known ; cf. . note on 2, 11. So in 6, 14. 11, 3. 1 Kings 10, 27. 2 Chron. 2, 13. 14. Di. suggests that the Massoretes possibly had the particular wealth acquired by Abram in Egypt in their mind, and so inserted the article. 3. VyDOb 'by his stations' (stationenweise), implying that he proceeded gradually, adapting his speed to the requirements of the flocks and herds he had with him ; cf. Ex. 17, 1, where LXX render kuto. napcpfioXds avTav, Ex. 40, 36. Num. 33, 2. The D*yDO are the J»£I 'day-journeys] by which they still reckon at the present time in the east (Tuch). The LXX (*,1 are denominatives from |*0* and 7NOt? respectively ; on the quad, form of the latter, see Ges, § 56 ; Stade, § 627. Onq. renders 7NOt? by N313*l?i> 'to the north] and I*p* by «0*hl|j ' to the south] In Arabic 'Lil, IV conj,= 'io go to Syria ('t-UT), and ^^jl, IV conj.,=' 'to go to Yemen3 (^S.'J\), lit. 'to go lo the left and right] respectively; see other similar instances in Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 36. "'bj'O 'from my presence] 25, 6. Ex. 10, 28. 10. pTn 133 recurs 1 Kings 7, 46. Cf. in the N.T. Matt. 3, 5. Luke 3, 3 v ncpix°>P0S T0" 'I8acot, ; more fre quently we find merely 1331, 19, 17. 25. 28. Deut. 34, 3. 2 Sam. 18, 23. The district (prop, circle) of the Jordan is the land on both sides of the Jordan, from lake Tiberias to the Dead Sea, called by Josephus to pJya neStov, Bell, fud., iv. 8. 2. Elsewhere in the O.T. it was also called ,l3iyn (at 144 GENESIS, the present time El- Ghdr); cf. Sh.^.jpp. 47, 482^,505; Bad, Pal, p. xlvii. The valley of Siddim, 14, 3, also belonged to the 133. nptt*0 = ' 'well watered] lit. ' a well-watered place ;' it occurs again Ez. 45, 15 7N1E>* ,1pt5>0; cf. Is. 58, 11 ,111 |33. mn"1 p3, probably referring to the garden of Eden, 2, 8. LXX, i>s 6 irapdScicros tov Beov ; Pesh. lotixl' o*£o^}»9 f<- Del.4 and Schumann, however, regard ,11,1* as used in a superlative sense, and render, ' as a beautiful garden ; ' cf. 10, 9 and the note there. This rendering, however, is not so natural as the other. In Is. 51, 3 we have mn* |3, and in Ez. 36, 35 py )3, used in comparisons. D^IUO ^1N3 is added to tone down the previous y\y |3, the comparison with the garden of Eden being a somewhat too lofty conception. n3N3. 'On the way to] lit. 'as thou comest ;' for the second pers. sing, used impersonally, cf. Ges, § 144. 3 c; Dav, S., § 108. R. 3; M. R, § 123. 4. The second pers. thus used occurs chiefly in this phrase; again 10, 19. 30. The form of the suff. n3" is merely an orthographic variation for the more usual 1", e.g. 19, 22. 1J*2. LXX, zdyopa, also called J&3, 14, 2. A small town, generally regarded as situated on the south-east end of the Dead Sea. See on 19, 22. Pesh. reads ]ya (jWvsri-vt ^£j?), which Ebers, Egypt., p. 272, accepts as the real reading. With this reading, which however is not necessary, iyx n3N3 would refer to D*l*fO p« alone, and not to the whole sentence. Trumbull (quoted by Del.6) supposes that iy*f is a name of the eastern border land of Lower Egypt, but cf. 10, 19. 12. bnNI. This verb is a denom. from 7,1N 'a lenl]= CHAP. 13, VER. 12 CHAP. 14, VER. I. 145 ' to lent] i. e. ' to wander about nomad fashion] hence, perhaps, the pi. *iy3. Render, 'Moved with his tents towards Sodom! 13. O^Ntflll 'sinners] i.e. 'habitual sinners] different from D*NOn 'people sinning] not necessarily as a habit ; cf. Ges, § 84. 17 ; Barth, N.B., p. 49 f, and Ryssel, De Eloh. Pent, sermone, p. 40. milv 'towards] i.e. 'against Yahweh! Cf. 20, 6. 39, 9. Or, 'to Yahweh] i.e. in his sight, 7=*337 7, 1. So possibly the Mass. Text. I4b. Cf. 28, 14 ,13331 ,133V1 noipi ,10*. 15. n23nN is impf. Qal of !D3, with the suffix strengthened by the so-called 3 demonstrativum ; see note on 12, 1 ^"!N. Notice the casus pendens, here marked as the ace. by nN, pN,1 73 nN *3 'For all the land . . . I will give it ;' cf. Driver, § 197. 6 ; Dav, S., § 106 c; and 21, 13. 16. b3V ON lltfN, either I. 'so that, if any one could number] etc.; cf. n, 7. 22, 14. 24, 3, so Pesh. y\j, Driver, p. 183; Ges, § 166. 2; or II. Tuch, 'quern [pulverem] si quis] lE'N referring to I3y in the first half of the verse, and I3y being repeated in the second half, where we would rather expect inN. Tuch compares 50, 13 (=49, 30), where, however, nN rather means 'with;' and Ewald, § 331 c. 3, cites Num. 26, 64. Jer. 31, 31, which are apparently quite regular. The LXX have simply d SiWai ™, not translating lE'N. Perhaps, however, it is simplest to regard lE'N as in Deut. 3, 24. 1 Kings 3, 12. 13, as a link which cannot be literally translated. 14. 1^ "iii b310N "'O'O. The four kings' names are all genitives after the construct state *0*3. Hebrew prefers, as a rule, to repeat the construct state before each genitive; 146 GENESIS, cf. Ges, § 128. 1 ; Dav, S., § 28. R. 4; M. R, § 75 c ; Ryssel, De Eloh. Pent, sermone, p. 61. The four kings, the subject to ivy in ver. 2, are not given again, as they can easily be inferred from ver. 1; cf. Ewald, § 303 b. 1; 9, 6 D7S3 *3 n'E»y DM7N 'For in God's image, He (God)] etc, Esth. 2, 21. The renderings of the LXX, iv i-i) Pao-i\ela 777 'Apapx <5 PacriKcvs 'EXvpalav ; Dan. 2, 14 NjnSO 31 T]^*1N 'A. chief of the executioners! 1D7N is identified with ~W>n, Is. 37, 12, by Targ. Ps.-Jon.; with Pontus, by Symm. and Vulg.; with Artemita, in south Assyria, by Kn.; with Kal'ah Sirgat, by Sayce. More recently (e.g. by Rawl, Del, Sch.) with the old Babylonian town Larsam or Larsav, the modern Senkereh, to the south-east of Uruk, cf. Loftus, Chaldaea and Susiana, p. 240 f. 10y7H3, LXX XoSoXXoyopdp (notice the y = y, and cf. on 4, 18). On the Assyr. inscriptions several kings of Elam have names compounded with Kudur. CHAP. 14, VERS. 2, 3. I47 In the inscriptions the name of a deity Lagamar has been found. The name would perhaps = Crown of Lagamar ; cf. Schr, C. O.T., p. 121 ff. 7ym, LXX OapydX, uncertain. Lenor. makes it=Akk. tar-gal, 'great Son! D**J, not a nom. appel. as A.V, 'King of nations] so Onq., for this rendering is too indefinite, and gives no suitable sense without some further name to define it ; but a proper name, compared variously with the 'circuit (" Galil") of the nations' (Is. 8, 23), Pamphylia (Symm.), and D*13,1 **N 10, 5 (Ges, Nold.). Others, as H. Rawl, connect it with the Guli, Kuti that are frequently found in the inscriptions; cf. Schr, K.G.F., 258, 271, 294, 451. 473 > a powerful tribe, dwelling between the Zab and Dijala (Gyndes), Di, p. 237. R.V. has ' Goiim] marg. ' nations! 2. The proper names in this verse are even more uncertain than those in ver. 1, the readings being possibly corrupt ; cf. the LXX text with the Hebrew. These five towns were, with the exception of Zoar, according to the narrative in chap. 19, destroyed. 3. bN 112n. A pregnant construction; cf. ver. 15. Render, 'Came allied to the valley of Siddim ;' cf. Josh. 10, 6 13*7N 1X3D3 *3 'for they have gathered together [and come] unto us! Other instances of preg. cstr. are to be found in Ewald, § 282 c; Ges, § 119. 4; Dav, S., § 101. 0"Hi2.*n pOJ*. ' Valley of Siddim] i.e. ' Valley of the level fields] so Onq. N^pn 1E>*0 ; Aq, Symm, Theod. Koikhs rS>v dXo-av, so Vulg. The Pesh. takes D*1t5><1, as=' the inhabitants of Sodom] and renders ]2&ola>t JjLsoq.s»X. Others connect it with the Arabic jJ!. ' stony ground.' LXX have here (pdpayt fi &Xvkt], and in ver. 9 KoiXas f) dXvKfj. Cf. Sh, G., p. 503. On poy, see Stanley, Sinai and Palestine, App, § 1. l 2 148 GENESIS, nbon D1*. 3*. with qamec is the construct state. 3' with pathach and maqqeph occurs as cstr. state twenty-three times, and always of the Red Sea (*]1D"D2). D* with qamec occurs as construct state twenty-four times, seventeen times without maqqeph, and seven times with maqqeph, but never of the Red Sea. Cf. Del. on Is. 11, 15. 4. n3tl) nitoj* D^nttJ, ace of time, in answer to the question 'how long?' nitl)y tljbtijl, ace of time, in answer to the question 'when?' cf. Ges, § 118. 3 a and b; M. R, § 42 a and b; Ewald, § 300 a; Dav, S., § 68. When & particular point of time is mentioned, the preps. 3, 7, or 3 are used ; so Ols. and Nold. prefer the reading of the Sam. here, viz. E'7E'31 — cf. M. R, § 42 b — as being more correct ; see the next verse. 5. CNDin. 'The Refdim] or 'sons of the Rafa] i.e. ' Giants] so LXX and Pesh. here. Partly the ordinary name of the giant aborigines of Canaan, in the western and eastern Jordan-land, whose territory was promised Abram's descend ants, 15, 20 ; partly a special name of the giants in Bashan, as here and Deut. 3, 11. Josh. 13, 12. The last traces of them in the O.T. are in 2 Sam. 21, 15 ff. n31,1 *1*7*, where they are spoken of among the Philistines at the time of David. Crip mntWi*1, also simply nm^y, Deut: 1, 4, and ,1intJ'y3=mnB'y n*3, Josh. 21, 27, was one of the principal towns of Bashan, identified with the present Tel 'Astere, two and a half hours from Nawa, nearly between Nawa and M'z&rib ; it is situated on a hill in a rich meadow-land, well watered, and many ruins are still to be found (Ritter in Di, 1 The LXX, Codex Vat. reads 'AaTap&O ml kapvaiv, and Kuenen thinks it possible that this is the true reading, cf. Rob. Smith, Religion of the Semites, p. 310. CHAP. 14, VERS. 4, 5. I49 p. 238) ; cf. Bad, Pal., p. 198. Wetzstein, however, prefers to identify it with Bosra, one hour and three quarters from Edrei, where ruins have been found. The name means ' The two- horned Ashtoreth] who, as the goddess of the moon, was repre sented with two horns. The name ninety occurs frequently in Phoenician inscriptions, e. g. Esmunazar's inscription, line 18, mnE'y? n31 p5f 7y37 n3 (cf. C.I.S., vol. i. p. 14; and Dr., Sam., p. 49), ' a temple for the Baal of Sidon, and a temple for Astarte! D*3ip by itself is not found in the O. T. It probably was near ninety, and the two may have been regarded as one town, or "p ninety may be taken as meaning Ashtoreth near Karnaim. The town was probably so called as being devoted to the worship of Ashtoreth. D13 CTlTn nNI , possibly identical, as Ges. supposed, with the D*0?or, Deut. 2,20, the name given by the Ammonites to the D*N3i who formerly dwelt in their land. LXX have here, Wm) lo-xvpd apa aiTuls, reading Dn3 and (F^W?: so Pesh. Onq. has «*3*i5n, and gives for 3113, NriOn31 • who were in Hamta(?)! It is quite uncertain where Dn was. Tuch conjectures that Ham was perhaps the old name of the capital Rabbath Ammon. CO^Nn, perhaps 'the terrible ones! The giant abori gines of the land of Moab; cf. Deut. 2, 10. 11, where they are expressly mentioned as the original inhabitants of Moab. DM'Hp mt?J3 = ' in the plain (of) Kiryalhaim! nits' is found only once again, in ver. 17, both vowels being unchangeable; cf. Driver, § 190. Obs. end; Lag, B.N., p. 43. In Num. 32,37. Josh. 13, 19 the town Kiryathaim is mentioned as belonging to the Reubenites; in Jer. 48, 23. Ezek. 25, 9 to the Moabites ; it was situated, according to the Onomas, four hours south-west of MSdebl The ruins are called at the 150 GENESIS, present day Kareyat (east of Makaur (Machaerus) and south of mount 'Attarus). DTl*lp= ' double town (?).' 6. "'inn nNI. The original inhabitants of Edom, Deut. 2, 12. 22; the hill country between the Dead Sea and the iElanitic gulf. Olinn ' on their mountain] for Q^ns. LXX, iv ruts opco-iv; so Sam. reading *n,l3, cstr. pi. On the pointing, compare on 12, 15 (and add to the instances there, wS and v??); *lin and the other forms of 1,1, which resolve the doubled letter, and write it instead twice, are found in poetry and higher prose, as Deut. 8, 9 : other instances of a doubled letter being written twice, instead of having a dagesh, are B9?30, inf. cstr. of pn, Is. 30, 18; HID for 110, from 110, Ez. 43, 10; D*00y: = D*0y, Neh. 9, 22. 24 [cf. the regular emph. pi. in Aramaic N*00y]; and in poetry, Judg. 5, 14. See also Ges, § 93. 1. Rem. 7. ]1N2 b^N iy = ' to the terebinth of P.;' cf. on 12, 6. 7*N |1N3 is possibly identical with the well-known port Elath, on the iElanitic gulf, variously called n7*N, n7*N, or ni7*N, in the O.T, which were perhaps abbreviated names of more modern origin, for the full name [1N3 7*N. 7. EDttJO y>y. 'Well of judgment] i.e. a place where decisions were given to disputants, perhaps the seat of a temple or oracle; cf. the other name Vlp. The position of Qadesh, so often mentioned in the Pentateuch, is still un certain. Three identifications are given by Di., p. 239 : I. that it is to be sought for in 'Ain el Weibeh, near the Arabah, 300 42' lat. (Robinson). A view now generally abandoned. II. Identical with Qddus, about eleven kilo meters north of mount Madara, in the neighbourhood of the Wady-el- Yemen, one day's journey from Hebron (Wetzstein, CHAP. 14, VERS. 6-IO. 151 in Del, Gen!1, p. 574; cf. Del.6, p. 266). 'But this situation is too far north, and neither suits Gen. 16, 14 nor the history of Moses,' Di. More probable is III. Prof. E. H. Palmer and others identify it with Ain Qudes, on the western slope of the 'Azazimeh (Machra) Plateau, south of Elusa, four and a half hours east-south-east of the Well of Hagar. See also Trumbull (Kadesh Barnea, 1884, p. 241 and passim). lOn ^!Jn. Cf. 2 Chron. 20, 2, where it is explained by *13 )*y N*1 ' En-gedi] on the west side of the Dead Sea, noted for its palm trees. Knobel prefers to identify it with Dnonn i*y, judg. 1, 16, or ion Ez. 47, 19. 48, 28 (as Engedi lay too far north), on the south-east border of the Holy Land, the modern Kurnub (Di.). Cf. Sh, G., pp. 269 f, 507; Bad, Pal., p. 140. The name perhaps means 'Palm rows] or ' cutting of Palms] but this is not certain. 10. lOn niN3 niN3, lit. 'pits, pits of asphalt] i.e. 'full of asphalt pits! On the repetition of the noun to express plurality, cf. Ges, § 123 d. 3 ; Ewald, § 313 a ; M. R, § 72. 2; Dav, S., § 29. R. 8. ion niN3 niN3; the first two nouns are both construct states to the genitive ion, the first of the two being an instance of the so-called suspended construct state, cf. Ps. 78, 9 ng% *D11 *pfi3, the second noun explaining the first, which is in the construct state, its proper genitive being nfp-, so 031 *% *in.3, Job 20, 17, *7n3 explaining *in3, the *1,13 being really cstr. state before the genitive 031; cf. Ewald, § 289c; M.R, § 73, note a. 4; Ges, §130. 5; Dav, S., § 28. R. 6. "l31 niNn Clton pOjn. Note the form of the predicate in Hebrew. In English we say, 'The valley of Siddim was full of slime pits] i.e. we have to use some term such as, consist of, contains, or the like, to express the relation between the subject and the predicate. In Hebrew 152 GENESIS, the predicate is expressed by the simple noun. ' The valley of Siddim was slime pits! Cf. Ex. 9, 31 nnts'sni 3*3N my'E'n 7iy33 ; Ps. 23, 5 ,1*11 *D13; so 13, 10. Is. 5, 12. Ps. 45, 9. Ezr. 10, 13 ; cf. note on 11, 1, and Driver, § 188. "*On is 'asphalt' or 'bitumen] found in the neighbour hood of the Dead Sea and of Babylon. The Babylonians used itasmortar; cf. 11,3. See Sh, G., p. 500L. ; Bad, Pa/, p. 170. niOyi DID "[70 . LXX, fiavCKcvs 2o86pD for ,T?p, the doubling being resolved, and the — changed into — ; also 1313 28, 2 and 1^013 1 Sam. 25, 5 for 1313 and 1^013 respectively, cf. his Comm. on the Psalms, 5th ed, p. 78 (on Ps. 3). n. ffiOI. LXX, tijv Uttov, reading the word as though it were 0?1. 13. C7Sn N31. 'And the fugitive came] i.e. 'the fugitive or escaped one, who in such cases is wont to come,' see esp. Ez. 24, 26. 33, 21. 22. Or it may be taken as a collective. On the article with 0*73, see Ewald, § 277a; Ges, § 126. 4; Dav, S., § 22 b; M. R, § 68; cf. 1*30,1^ 2 Sam. 15, 13. CHAP. 14, VERS. n-13. 153 "H3S?n. ' The Hebrew! *i3y means ' one who has come 13yo from the other side of a river! If this name was given to the Israelites by the Canaanites (Reuss, Stade, etc.), the name being Hebrew, the people 'who gave it them must have spoken the same language as they did. It is only used in O. T. to or by foreigners, or when the Hebrews are men tioned, in opposition to other nations. The name Israelite was, on the other hand, a patronymic, and the national name used by the people, themselves (cf, however, Robertson- Smith, Ency. Brit., 9th edit, art. Hebrew Lang, and Lit!). The river from beyond which the, Hebrews came is, accord ing to some, the Euphrates, cf. Josh. 24, 2 ff . 14 f. ; so most commentators. Reuss and Stade prefer the Jordan, on the ground that the Hebrews on their return from Egypt spent some time in the land east of Jordan, leaving the Canaanites in possession of that on the west, which, however, does not seem very conclusive against the general view. LXX render it here r<5 nepdrrj, Vulg. ' Transeuphratensis! Another ex planation is that *13y is a patronymic from I3y, mentioned as an ancestor of Abram, 10, 24. n, 14. 15. Num. 24, 24. See Di, p. 2 1 1 \ NIOO "07N3. Cf. on 12, 6. The terebinth grove being named after the Amorite Mamre, who possibly owned or planted it. D13N ni13 "hy2 Dm. 'They being confederates of Abram] notice the circ. clause. The text literally translated is, 'And they (were) owners of a covenant with A.;' ?y3 being 1 Robertson-Smith, I.e., mentions a modified form of the usual etymo logy of 'eber, the word being taken in the Arabic sense = a river bank. The Hebrews would then be 'dwellers in a land of rivers.' This would suit Peleg (the water-course) as in Arabic we have the district Falag so called ' because it is furrowed by waters.' 154 GENESIS,' used to form an adjective here, as in 37, 19 mo?nn 7yi= 'dreamer;' 49, 23 D*^n *7y3=' bow-men (lit. arrow-men);' 7y3 •\y'V=' hairy] 2 Kings 1, 8; f)33 by2='winged] Prov. 1, 17, etc. Cf. Ges, § 129. 2. Rem. 2 b; Dav^ 5, § 24. R. 3; M. R, § 79. 6 d. We have a similar expression to n*l3 *7y3 in Neh. 6, 18, viz. nyi3lp *by3. The phrase n*l3 7y3 occurs nowhere else. In Judg. 8, 33. 9, 4 it is a proper name. 14. pll is the imperf. apoc.-Hif'. of pn='/o empty out] e.g. arrows from a quiver, or a sword from the sheath, Ex. 15, 9. Lev. 26, 33. Ps. 35, 3 ; but only in this passage, and Ps. 18, 43 with a personal object. Render, 'Let loose! LXX have rjpl6pr)o-cv, ' mustered] reading pl*l as though it were P"V]., which the Heb.-Sam. has, and which seems to have been the reading of the Sam. text, which has f/TS1" ' recensuit] and the Vulg. ' numeravit] 1^3 ¦,T,7'1 TC^n. l*3*3n = '>fo'.r tried ones' ("]*3n is a aira£. Xcy.); cf. the Arab. eL^.=' experienced ;' LXX, tovs Iblovs ; who were m*3 *1*7* ' home-born slaves] as opposed to f]D3 n3pO, 17, 12. 23, who were purchased slaves (orl3, Ex. 23, 12); cf.the similar phrases, ns3-|3, 15, 3 ; ,10N"p, Ex. 23, 12. p, i.e. Laish, on the N. frontier of Canaan, which in the time of the Judges received the name of Dan, Josh. 19, 47. Judg. 18, 29; the modern Tell el-Kddi, cf. Bad, Pal., p. 264, but Sh, G., p. 480, takes it as = Banias. 15. Dn"*by pbni, lit. 'he divided himself against them] i.e. 'he divided his forces- and fell upon them;' cf. Job 1. 17. 1 Sam. 11, 11, for a similar manoeuvre. For the cstr. praeg- nans cf. on ver. 3. niin is on the left, i.e. north of Damascus, identified by Wetzstein with Hoba, twenty hours north of Damascus, in the neighbourhood of Hims and Tadmor; cf. Del, Gen.*, p. 561. CHAP. 14, VERS. 14-18. 155 17. 131 pOX? Nin m\?j pOJ*— mentioned again 2 Sam. 18, 18, as the place where Absalom set up his monument — is hardly identical with D*n*1p ills' ver. 5, as it is now mentioned as though it were not previously known, and its position not far from Salem is against this identification, cf. ver. 18. It is usually — following Josephus' notice, Ant., vii. 10. 3, that Absalom's pillar was two stadia distant from Jerusalem — supposed to be in the neighbourhood of Jerusalem. Cf. Neubauer, Ge'og. du Talmud, p. 50 f. 18. DbiL\ Generally taken as Jerusalem, so Del, Kn, Targg, Hieron. (Quaest.), Joseph, etc. Others, Roed. in Ges, Thes., and Tuch, identify it with the SaXtlp of John 3, 23, cf. Judith 4, 4, which, according to Eusebius and Hieron, was eight Roman miles south of Scythopolis (see, however, Riehm, H.W.B., p. 32 f.; Del.5, p. 269). In Ps. 76, 3 Salem is certainly Jerusalem. The objections to its being Jeru salem are : I. That this city lay too far south. II. That its old name was Jebus ; cf. Judg. 19, 10. III. That Ps. 76, 3 is late, and the abv there is a late poetical abbreviation of D7EiV1*. But as Del.5, p. 269, shews, Jerusalem would not necessarily be too far out of the way — whether Abram returned down the Jordan valley to Sodom, or took his way home through Samaria to Hebron — for the king of Sodom to come and meet him from the south-east, and Melchizedek out of Jerusalem. Further, the facts (I) that in Josh. 10, 1 there is a king of Jerusalem bearing the name pTX *31N, which is very similar to p1V*3701, and (II) that the comparison of 1 But Well, and Budde {Richter und Samuel, p. 63) assert that '2 in pns is a later alteration of pir:iK, which is the reading of the LXX in Josh. 10, 1 ; cf. Judg. 1, 5. Kittel, however, disputes this, see his Gesch. i. p. 277 f. It may be remarked that the name Urusalim is found in the Tel-el- Amarna Letters, i.e. in the year 1400 B.C. Cf. Di., p. 343. 156 GENESIS, David, Ps. 1 10, 4 (cf. Heb. c. 7 Melchizedek a type of Christ), with Melchizedek would be far more suitable if he were king of Jerusalem, favour the identification with Jerusalem. The other two objections are not conclusive ; it is quite uncertain that D7E' is a poetical abbreviation of D7ET1*, and that the old name of Jerusalem was Jebus is not of necessity fatal, as the name Gbv might have been intentionally chosen with some hidden significance, just like ,1*110 22, 2. The name pIV *370 ma.y=my king is Sidiq, Sidiq being the name of a deity, see Baudissin, Studien zur Sem. Religionsgesch., i. 15, and cf. E. Nestle, Israelii Eigennamen, p. 175 ff. \\~hy 7N7 ]n3 = not 'the priest] as A.V, but ' a priest of God most high] so R.V.; see Ges, § 129. ia; Dav, S., § 28, R. 5. "y 7N as a proper name (cf. *1E> 7N) has no article; so ,13 might mean ' the priest] or ' a priest ;' but to avoid this ambiguity of meaning, the construction with the prep. 7, instead of the construct state, is chosen ; cf. M.R, § 76 b; Ewald, § 292 a. 2. p*7y in the O. T. when joined with mn*, or 7N, never has the article. 19. ]Yby 7N7 . . . *J1in 'blessed by God] 7 after the passive denotes the agent: cf. 25, 21. 31, 15. Ex. 12, 16; Ges, § 121. 3; Dav, S., § 81; Ewald, § 295 c ; M. R, § 51. 3. Rem. a. npp combines the double idea of creating and possessing. n:p is cstr. state, followed by two genitives; cf. note on ver. 1. Possibly the two words, heaven and earth, were conceived of as really forming one idea=' the world] and so construed as though one word stood; cf. on ver. 1. The phrase pNI D*Oty ,13p is only found in this chapter. i9b to 20a are poetical in form. Notice njp for N13 or CHAP. 14, VER. 19 CHAP. 15, VER. I. I57 nfety, ^*15T for 1*3*^, and J30, which occurs twice again, Hos. n, 8. Prov. 4, 9; all poetical words, though D*1¥ is also found in prose writings ; also the poetical sounding }l*7y 7N. 22. "H1 "'nom. '/ lift up my hand] i.e. 'I have, just at the moment of speaking, lifted up ; ' the perfect is used for the immediate past; cf. Driver, § 10; Ges., § 106. 2b; Dav, S., § 40 b; M.R, § 2. 1 ; the meaning being, I swear by Yahweh, etc.; cf. Ex. 6, 8. Num. 14, 30. Deut. 32, 40 7N NE»N *3 *1* DW (of God, always 1* NB>3, Del.); Dan. 12, 7 13*0* D1*1 D*DE'n 7N 17N0E>1; see also Ex. 17, 16. 23. ON. The negative particle 3N is often used in the oath-formulae. The oath-formula would run in full some what as follows : ' I swear, if I do so and so, may God] etc.; then the second portion being omitted, the first part came to have a negative force, so QK=Iwill not, and N7 GH=Iwill (Num. 14, 28). Render, ' / lift up my hand . . . that I will not take from a thread even lo a shoe latchet, of all which is thine] i. e. 'I will not even take the most trifling thing for myself.' On this use of DN, see Ges, § 149 a; Dav, S., § 120; Ewald, § 356 a; M.R, § 168 b. 24. Render, 'Nought for me, only that which the young men have eaten, and the portion of the men who went with me: 'Aner, ' Eschol, and Mamre, lei them take their portion.' Note the casus pendens 73 Eta 13y . . . lE'N pi N1001: cf. 3, 12. 15. 1. 1NO nXin "J13&=' Thy reward shall be very great] "131 "ptiv can scarcely be taken as a second predicate to *33N, as this would rather require 1, and God cannot be regarded as Himself the reward. 158 GENESIS, nSlil, inf. abs. Hif. of 131, see on 3, 16. This inf. (properly a subst.), which is generally used as an adverb, is here regarded as an adj., and used as a predicate; cf. OJJD, used quite similarly in 47, 9 **n *32' *0* V,1 D*yil Oyo ; and 7ion in Job 8, 9 l3n3N 71DH *3 ; Ewald, § 296 d; cf. also Ges, § 141. le; Dav, S., § 29 e. The Sam. has a correction i"1?"]^, which is easier. 2. Iiy "jbin "*33N1. Circ. clause; cf. note on 20, 3. Render, 'Seeing that I am going to die childless! "|7,1>' e vita decedere ;' cf. 25, 32. Ps. 39, 14. 2 Chron. 21, 20. *1*iy is ace. of condition; see Dav, S., § 70; Ges, § 118. 5 a ; M.R, § 43 a, and cf. 25, 8. 37, 35. 38, n. 44, 33. nny, lit. = 'bare, naked] but restricted by usage to one who has no children; cf. Jer. 22, 30. Lev. 20, 20. 21 (all). ^n'n ptUO ]31 = 'Dl) = 'possession;' cf. ptfOD, Zeph. 2, 9. pffiO p=Ehl* in ver. 3, the construction being the same as in n*l3 byz 14, 13, which compare. Theod,Vulg. render pE>0 p ' son of the manager] i.e. ' of the steward] pva being from ppE>, with the meaning, ' to go about busily] cf. IOO from 110; which is possible, but forced and unsuitable. The other VSS. vary. The LXX have 6 hi vlos Uao-cK rijs olxoycvovs pov (their rendering of *n*3 |3 in the next verse is 6 8c ulKoycvi)s pov), 7-ijs olKoycvoii being either a mistake for o\k!xk, or vios is a gloss, and the word should be oUoyevtis ; see Frankel, Einf, p. 17. Onq. has HJ?*7N .INpDBI Nil *n*331 J*in ND31S 131 - * .... tt: ... ..I.. t tt._ 'this nourisher who is in my house, he is the Damascene, Eliezer] CHAP. 15, VER. 2. I59 The Pesh. has 1A. IU oa «k«J> ;J> [Zaaxx&iy »LvA-lo ' Eliezer the Damascene, the son of my house, he will be my heir. Aq. has 6 vlos tov jroWfon-os olmdv pov, connecting pE"0 with npE'O ' a cup-bearer.' ItybN pffilOl Nin cannot be rendered with the Pesh. Jj^asaaojj, »}^L^.io 'Eliezer the Damascene' (so A. V, but R.V. 'Dammesek Eliezer'), for this would either be 1?y*7N 'PtPDin, or p'VDl K»N 1ty*7N, or p"K>D1 [3 1Ty*7N. Hos. 12, 8, which Gesenius cites in favour of this rendering, is not con clusive, the more correct rendering there being ' Canaan ! in his hand are deceitful balances ;' see Cheyne' s Hosea, Cambridge, 1884, p. 115. Besides, *n*3 J3 in the next verse is not compatible with this explanation, see on 14, 14. The LXX and Vulg. translate the two words as^one proper name, ' Dammesek Eliezer] which is contrary to usage, men never having double names. Del. considers lfy*7N as in apposition to pE»D1, but one would hardly explain the name of a town by that of a person. Hitzig and Tuch reject p'val Nil as a gloss; but this weakens the sentence, and, as Di. remarks, leaves the choice of the rare word pE>0 unexplained. Ewald, § 286 c, renders 1Ty*7N p'B>01 'Damascus of Eliezer] i. e. the city of Damascus, regarded as a community with which Eliezer was associated ; cf. 71NE* ny33 ; and Di, adopting Ewald's construction, explains as follows: 'These words could be well explained if Eliezer not only had a prominent position in Abram's household, but also was closely con nected with Damascus ; then we might expect, failing other heirs, that Abram's property would in time fall to him, and return with him to Damascus when he went back thither. We certainly do not read of any such relationship between Damascus and Eliezer, but then this is the only passage l6o GENESIS, where Eliezer is mentioned, and the Damascenes still in Greek times boasted of their connection with Abram ' (cf. Del.6, ad loc). This is perhaps the best explanation of this passage. The only objection to it is that one would rather expect Eliezer to be mentioned as pB'O'fS, not the city Damascus. 3. nnn2 Nb "'b |n. Observe the emphatic position of*?. 4. Nin is inserted for emphasis, as in 3, 12 *7 n3n3 Nin, which compare. 6. nin-l3 ]ONm . The perf. with waw conv. would here be quite out of place. It could hardly be frequentative, as believing in a person cannot be conceived of as a frequentative act. Kautzsch, however, in Ges, § 112. 6 0, describes it as a kind of frequentative, comparing 34, 5. Num. 21, 20. Cf. also Dav, S., § 58. R. 1. Like the other instances in 21, 25. 28, 6. 38, 5— cf. Driver, § 133— this is probably not a perfect with waw conv, but a case of the perfect with simple waw, where an imperf. with waw conversive would be expected. rr r ui 17 n^tyn^l . Verbs of considering are either con strued as here, with two accusatives, or with one ace. and the prep. 7; see Ges, § 117. 5c; Dav, S., §76; M. R, § 45. 5 with § 51. 1 end; cf. 38, 15. 50, 20. In Ps. 106, 31 we have np1V7 17 3Einni ; and the LXX of this passage, «.! i\oyio-6r\ avT& ds oiKaioovvrjv (as though they read 7 here), is quoted three times in the N. T, Rom. 4, 3. Gal. 3, 6. James 2, 23. 8. HOS. The pathach is not the article, but the preps. 3, 3, 7 before many short pronouns are pointed with long a (cf. Ewald, § 243 b; Ges., § 102. 2 c and d), but with no the CHAP. 15, VER. 3-12. l6l union is still closer, the vowel being doubled and the long a shortened into short a; see also Stade, § 134 f. ; cf. 103. 9. tiJbtlJO, not 'threefold] i. e. ' three of each kind] as Onq. and Rashi, but ' three years old] This is the only passage where it occurs in this sense, but doubtless the LXX are right in reading it in 1 Sam. 1, 24 (e'/B'O 133 for T\vbv D*1S3). 10. inX?1 nNlpb Hn2 ffi'1N = ' each piece over against the other;' cf. on 9, 5 l*nN E^N, and the use of nE'N of inani mate things in Ex. 26, 3. 5. Ez. 1, 9. 3, 13. in3 Nb ID^n nNI. 'But the birds he did not divide] 113X is collective, as in Ps. 8, 9. 1/13, a rare word; cf. Jer. 34, i8f, possibly an allusion to this passage. 11. O^X?n. The generic use of the article, as in 8, 7, which compare. D^IJEn 'the carcases', always used of dead bodies in Hebrew. In Syriac J £^3 is used of a body, whether living or dead; cf. Bernstein, Lex. Syr., p. 390b. So 133 in Aramaic; cf. Levy, Chald. W. B., p. 254 b sub voce. DjIN Sffil. Hif. of 2Vi. 'And he scared them away] lit. 'blew them away! The LXX read the consonants as DnN 3E/*1 avvcKaBto-cv avrols. 12. N1Hb ffiOffin VPI. Render, 'And it came to pass, when the sun was about to set! The *,1*1 does not here, com bined with N37, form the predicate to E'OE'n, but stands alone. N37 E'OE'n is a complete sentence in itself; N37, the inf. cstr. with 7, being used as a periphrastic future; cf. Hos. 9, 13 311,17 N*Sin7 D*13N1 ' and Ephraim is for bringing forth] etc. Is. 10, 32 10y7 3133 ' in Nob is he for tarrying;' Josh. 2, 5 13D7 iyE',1 *,1*1 'and it came to pass, the gate being M - 162 GENESIS, about to be shut;' cf. Driver, § 204 [cf. also § 165], where numerous instances are cited, Ewald, § 217 d. b; and Dav, S., § 94. Ges., § 114. 2. Rem. 2, and M. R, § 113, combine the n*n with the inf. cstr, which, here at any rate, is quite unnecessary. nOlin 'a deep sleep! LXX here, and 2, 21 cko-too-is, ' a trance! nblj r\2XDn nO^N n^ni . Render, 'And a very terrible darkness] lit. ' a terror, great darkness! n713 TOVT\ being an explanatory apposition to ,10*N . nbD2. The participle is more graphic than the perfect ,1733 would be. Render, 'was falling! 13. Dnb N7 Y"1N1. 'In a land not theirs;' cf. Hab. 1, 6 17 N7 ni33E>0 nEH7; Prov. 26, 17 17 N7 3*1 by. The relative, which here would stand in the nominative, being omitted, the antecedent being indefinite; M. R, § 159a; Ges, § 155. 2 a ; Ewald, § 332 a. 1 ; Dav, S., § 143 a; see also Wright, Arab. Gram., ii. p. 343, the construction in Arabic being the same as in Hebrew. Dl13X?1. 'And they (the Hebrews) shall serve them (the strangers = the Egyptians)! LXX, Kal SovXao-ovo-iv ovtovs, cited Acts 7,7,' and they shall enslave them] which would require D3 113yi ; cf. Ex. 1, 14. Jer. 22, 13. 13y with the ace. is SovXiin; in Hif, or Qal with 3, 8ov\6a>. 14. 'The nation which they shall serve am I judging] Driver, § 135. 3. The participle as futurum inslans ; cf. on 6, 17. 16.^311111. ' In the fourth generation! LXX freely, rcTdprtj be yevca. The construction strictly is (Ewald, § 279 d), 'And as a fourth generation, they shall return;' as in Deut. 4, CHAP. 15, VERS. 13-18. 163 27. Zech. 2, 8. Jer. 31, 7; ace. of the complement, or con dition, cf. Ges, § 118. 5c; Dav, 5, § 71. R. 1. 1 7. 'And it came to pass, the sun having gone down! E'OE'n nN3, being a circ. clause, by Driver, § 165; Dav, S., § 141, ',1*1 does not belong to nN3, which is accented on the penult, and is thus perfect (see Driver, foot-note, p. 18), and so incapable of being combined with *n*l as predicate. Ryssel, De Eloh. Pent, sermone, p. 59, is surely in error when he speaks of nN3 as participle (' ubi in participio ,1N3 nihil nisi notio diuturnitatis inest '). The ordinary editions and that of Baer have the accent on the penult. n^n ntDbjn. The subject in the feminine is followed by the predicate in the masculine. Perhaps, as Muller sug gests (M. R, § 39. Rem. a), no?y was regarded as ace. after n*,1, ' and there became darkness (i. e. it turned to a darkness)] see also Ges, § 145. 7. Rem. 3 ; Dav, S., § 113 a. 18. n^lH . . . m3, lit. ' to cut a covenant' = 8pKia ripveiv, foedera icere; on the difference between n*i3 ni3 and D*pn n*13, see on 9, 9. Cf. also Rob. Smith, Religion of the Semites, p. 480. Vin3 'I give] lit. ' I have given;' the act is regarded as so certain of its fulfilment that it is looked upon as already accomplished; hence the use of the perfect in promises, contracts, etc.; see M. R, § 3. 1 a; Ges, § 106. 3 a; Dav, S., § 41 a; Driver, § 13; cf. 23, n. Ruth 4, 3. O'HSO in20. The southern boundary of the promised land is elsewhere (Num. 34, 5. Josh. 15, 4. Is. 27, 12) the D*iSO 7n3, the modern Wady el-'Arls, and this has led Knobel to identify the D*l*fD in3 of this verse with the 7m D*1XD. But even if in3 can be used of smaller rivers and canals (2 Kings 5, 12. Job 14, "• 28, 11. Ez. 1, 3. 3, 15), m 2 164 GENESIS, it seems more natural to identify the D*1V0 1,13 here with the Nile or eastern arm of the Nile. In the time of David and Solomon (1 Kings 5, 1. 8, 65) the kingdom under their rule reached from the Euphrates to. the Egyptian frontier. niQ in3 . . . IJ*. Cf. Ex. 23, 31. Deut. 1, 7. Josh. 1, 4. Is. 27, 12. Notice the difference of idiom. In English we say ' the river Euphrates] while in Hebrew we find ' the river of Euphrates ;' cf. Ges, § 128. 2d; Dav, *S", § 24 a; M. R, § 79. 1 ; Ewald, § 287 e. b, who compares the German ' Rheinfluss! 18. 1. "On probably a Semitic na.me=' flight' (Arabic ^s* 'to flee] sj^ 'flight'), and scarcely, as she was an Egyptian, her real name. Perhaps, as Del. suggests, she was given to Sarai by Pharaoh, cf. 12, 16; and according to this the Midrash explains the name fancifully, as = N13*N Nil ' behold, a reward] The Arab nomad tribe D*13n, Ps. 83, 7, derive their name from 13,1 . 2. illbO lit. ' away from bearing] i.e. 'so that I cannot bring forth;' cf. 18, 25 n'E>yO; 23, 6 ino I3p0; 27, 1 nNIO, etc.; and see Ges, § 119. 3 d. 1 ; Dav, S., § 101. R.c; M. R, § 49. 1. R. c. n33N as in 30, 3; cf. Ruth 4, n. Ex. 1, 21. Deut. 25, 9, etc. The form is not a Nifal denominative from f? • a son] but the ordinary imperf. Nifal of 133 ¦ to build] used in a figurative sense. 3. n3tt>7 D^tt? itoST. 7 in the place of the genitive, as in 7, n (and regularly in dates, Ex. 16, 1. 19, 1, etc.) vv ni **n7 n:v niNO ; of. the note there. 4. bpnl , cf. 1 Sam. 1, 6 f, is the imperf. Qal (intrans.) of CHAP. l6, VERS. 1-7. 165 a verb y"y with — ; cf. W, sp*, etc.; Ges, § 67. Rem. 3; Stade, § 510 g. The two forms of the imperf. are, I. 3D*, with the 3 doubled when it ceases to be final. II. 3B* trans. (intrans. 3D*), with the D doubled. In 7pn the doubling has been given up, and compensation made by lengthening the — into — , as is usual with gutturals; cf. J?in, nn*, Dn*. ' 5. "OOn. 'The wrong done to me] Obj. genitive; cf. on 9, 2. Misunderstood by LXX, iSiKovpat ix o-ov ; and Vulg. ' inique agis contra me;' for "]*7y *DOn is an interjectional clause, ' the wrong done me, be upon thee !' "pTQl. The point over the second yod (Mass. note, Nin3 "* by 11p3 point on the last yod) probably marks it as superfluous, because the form elsewhere is 13*3, in pause 1?.*?; cf. 17, 2. 7. The other passages where points are found over words in Genesis are, 18, 9. 19, 33. 33, 4. 37, 12. 7. nNSO'l (cf. 1 Chron. 20, 2) is the companion form of nNSO|1, which, however, does not occur in this verb; cf. i^T3-!. 37. 33 ; ^JT1?1-. 2 Chron. 20, 7 ; the imperf. taking the affix of the third pers. fem. sing, either in the form n— or n— . O^On \*y by, probably the well-known fountain on the way to HE' ; hence the article. UttJ "]H2. 'On the way lo Shur;' cf. 3, 24 yy "\-\l D**nn. Ilttj must have been somewhere on the N. E. frontier between Palestine and Egypt. Josephus, Ant., vi. 7, 3, er roneously supposed that HE* was Pelusium, which is |*p. Saadiah holds that HE* was Gifar,^U*. 'The Arab, geo graphers understand by the wilderness of Gifar (as distinct from the wilderness of the children of Israel, or Paran), the 166 GENESIS, desert strip of land — which required five or six days' journey to traverse— bounded on the east by the desert of Paran, between Rafia in Philistia, up to lake Tennis (Menzaleh), and from thence to Qulzum or Suez ; in a word, the western declivity of the desert of Paran towards Egypt ' (Dillmann). The name probably means ' wall'. 8. nN3 ntO "'N, more frequently the imperfect was used in questions after ,107, t*NO, etc, as being less outspoken and more courteous than the perfect. The perfect would = ' Whence hast thou come ? ' the imperf. ' Whence art thou coming ?' or ' Whence mayest thou be coming ?' See Driver, § 39 y; 42. 7 (all). Cf. Dav, S., § 45- R- i- ntO ""N. Cf. Ewald, § 326a. J*NO = simply 'whence] with a verb or substantive, see Gen. 42, 7. Num. n, 13. ,1TD *N is used similarly, but admits of being joined with a substantive, as 2 Sam. 15, 2 nnN i*y nto *N; Jon. 1, 8 nnN Dy ,iro *N1 ; but this is not frequent. ,ir *N = ' where] but is used rather of things (e. g. with n*3, 1,11 , Dlpo) than persons; for which IB'N is the common word, as in 37, 16. 11. mn is a fem. part.; cf. 2 Sam. 11, 5 *33N mn; the masc. would be nin, like 13*., 173 (fem. pi. ni73, Deut. 28, 32). nib"1- The participle fem. We have here the ground form of ni7i*, which has remained unchanged, and not passed over into the segholate form ni.7*.*. This ground form reappears before the suffixes, e.g. *ni7i*; ^ni!?!*, etc; cf. Dav, § 29 ; Ges, § 94. 2, and see § 80, 2 b. Ewald, § 188 b, and Konig, Lehrg., i. 404 f, suppose that as this form is only found when the second pers. is spoken about, the word was so pointed on account of its similarity with the second CHAP. 16, VERS. 8-13. 167 pers. fem. sing. It occurs again Judg. 13, 5. 7, but in Is. 7, 14, with the third pers, the pointing is niy. nNlpl. Here (J) the mother names the child, as in 4, 1. 25. 19, 37 f, etc.; in P the father, so 5, 3. 16, 15. 17, 19, etc. nNlpl is pointed in Baer and Del. edition nN")i51, in the common editions nNlpl. The second pers. sing. fem. is, in verbs n"7, usually pointed without the shewa; cf. Ewald, § 195 b, who mentions the two ways of pointing, and cites n**n as well. 12. DIN N"1D. 'A wild ass of a man] i.e. a man like the wild ass, who lives in the desert, wanders about at will, and cannot be tamed ; cf. Job 39, 5. NIB is the onager, Arab. \fi, asinus ferus ; Assyr. purivu. The construction is the same as in Prov. 21, 20 DIN 7*D3 ; Is. 29, 19 DIN *31*3N ; and probably Is. 9, 5 **yi* N73, 'the subordinated noun describing merely the relation of the individual [part] to the whole [genus]: the figurative to the actual,' Ewald, § 287 g; cf. M. R, § 79. 2. Rem. a; Ges, § 128. 2 e; Dav, S., § 24 a. "02 by . Tuch renders ' east of] referring to Ishmael's geographical position; cf. 23, 19. 25, 18, but this is un natural and forced. The text apparently means, Ishmael shall live close to his brethren, before their face, but shall not be on friendly terms with them. This meaning seems to suit 13 73 1*1 733 11* better. 13. ''NI 7N nnN = ' thou art the God of seeing] i.e. 'the all-seeing God! Tuch explains, 'the God who appears, manifests himself;' but this does not suit the explanation which follows in the second half of the verse. "l}1 niON ,*3. 'For she said, Have I even here looked after Him that seeth me?' i.e. Have I even here in the 168 GENESIS, wilderness, where I should not expect to see God, seen Him ? He saw her, but she did not see Him; but after He had gone, she perceived that He had been there. ^Nl is a substantive; out of pause pointed *N1, in pause *N1; cf. Job 33, 21 *Nip; Nah. 3) 6 *N13 (both Baer and Del.); i Sam. 16, 12 *N1 = ' vision] 'seeing.' Cf. "Hif, pausal form of *1V, Ez. 27, 17 ; *i>n, pausal form of *i>n, Deut. 7, 15. *N1 at the end of the verse, pointed *N1, and Job 7, 8 *N1 (both Baer and Del. ; ordinary editions have *N1 ; cf. Del, Gen.*, p. 321), is the participle act. of ,1N1, with the suffix of the noun = my seer, just as s*VF[—my word, differing from '3X1 , where the suffix is a verbal one and would = • he zvho or one who sees me] The LXX erroneously take *N1"7N as l'N"1 'N, and render 6 Ocas 6 inMv pe, and paraphrase the second half of the verse with koi yap ivamov ISov d6ivTa poi. Pesh. has, &]' Ji, LU1» -^4^ J°jl= Ji>tfr o« l^f ujj*.; j&a ^io 1^-.U. )&£ = ' thou art God in a vision, for she said, Lo, indeed a vision I have seen, after that He hath seen me;' taking *N1 in a as a substantive, and paraphras ing b. Onq. has a paraphrase *1N N^13 nn NI17N Nil JjlN *i> »J»nOT ina mn Wlf N3N ?]N niON 'thou art God, seeing everything; for she said, Here indeed I begin seeing (= living, so some moderns, Tuch, etc, a sense ,1N1 does not bear), after He revealed Himself to me] The Vulg, with ' Profecto hie vidi posterior a videntis me] takes *inN, like *lhN in Ex. 33. 23; cf. 2 Sam. 2, 23 n*3ni *inN3. 14. 'Therefore they called the well, well of the Living one, who sees me' (lit. my seer, see above). Nip is the so-called impersonal 3 per. perf, cf. 1 1, g = 'Man nannte den Brunnen] The rend. ' Well of the seeing^ alive (lebendig-sehen)] Tuch, Hengstenb, and others (*N1 as pausal form of *N1 see CHAP. l6, VER. 14 CHAP. 17, VER. I. 169 above), i.e. 'where one sees God and remains alive,' is most improbable, and presupposes a compound (Wortcomposition), which is impossible in Hebrew (Di.). Wellhausen, Hist, of Israel, Eng. transl, p. 326, proposes to emend the text thus, *N1 *inN [*nNl] *n*N1 [D17N] D3n 'have I seen [God and remained alive~] after [my] vision ?' cf. for the popular belief that one who saw God died, 19, 17. Ex. 3, 6. 19, 21. Mich, emends *N1 *I17 1N3 ' well of the jawbone (i.e. rock} Judg. 15, 19) of vision! With the naming of the well, cf. 22, 14. 28, 19. 32, 31. The position of the Hagar-well is uncertain, see some identifications that have been proposed in Del, Gen.5, p. 287. Del. follows Rowlands and Trumbull in regarding the Hagar-well as identical with Muweilih, south of Beersheba, a station on the caravan route from Beersheba, along the Gebel-es-Sur, which stretches from north to south. Cf. Sh, G., p. 283. 113, position unknown. Cf. Di, p. 256; Z.D.P.V., xiv. p. 82 ; Well, Sam., p. 213. 17. 1. "Hffl bN. 7N. The oldest and most general name of God, and restricted as a rule to Yahweh, but occasionally used of other gods. The word is most common in poetry, elsewhere always with some qualifying word, such as fi*?V (14, 18), tbty (21, 33), K|2, npN, IJ, or as here *1B': it only takes the suffix of the first person sing. *?N. On ?&, see Appendix. "Htt?, according to P the name of God revealed to the Patriarchs (see Di., Exodus, p. 54), 28, 3. 35, n (cf. 43, 14). 48, 3 (cf. 49, 25). Ex. 6, 3 (in all these passages, except 49, 25, with i*N). In poetry and the poetical style (Ruth 1, 21) we find 'IE* alone, it is very often found in Job. It is explained 170 GENESIS, by the Rabbins as = -Bi (-V) and *1 'he who is sufficient] ' the all-sufficient] but such compounded names are not found in Hebrew ; so Aq, Symm, and Theod. Possibly the same explanation underlies the pointing adopted by the Massoretes. Nbld. interprets the name as=*1B' or *1B', 'my Lord' (1^= Arab. 11Z ; cf, however, on Its', Assyr. Sidu, Schrader, C.O.T., p. 148). But Gen. 17, 1 and 35. 11 (God himself speaks) are against this explanation, also the fact that *1E* is never used when God is addressed. Fried. Del. (Proleg., p. 96) takes the word as=' The high or lofty one] from Ass. Sadd. But as Di. points out, this assigns to the root ,11E' a meaning it certainly has not in Heb, and only doubtfully in Ass. Di. connects the name with the root IIE* (Joel 1, 15) 'he that exercises authority] 'the all-powerful] 11E'= 'to exercise power] ' to rule ' (cf. LXX and Vulg.). The ending '. (or *. if Mass. text be followed) would then be either an adj. ending (Ewald, § 164), or used to form an abstract noun =' Omnipotence' (Stade, §301). Ewald, § 155, pro posed a similar explanation, assuming a root 11E'=11E', the form would then be an intensive adj. like *J1, V^n- *1E* would probably, in this case, have to be pointed *1B'. (See above on Mass. points.) The LXX render it always in. Genesis by a pronoun, here 6 Beds o-ov ; cf. 49, 25 and Ex. 6, 3 (airav), but elsewhere (often in Job) they have sometimes TravTOKp&Tap, sometimes havos. The Vulg. has ' omnipotens' here. See further, Di, p. 259 f. *OSb = ' before me] i.e. under my eyes, in consciousness of my presence, 24, 40. Is. 38, 3 ; different from nN "J7,inn, 5. 22. 6, 9. 2. 1N0 1N03. Cf. on. 7, 19 ; and see Dav, S., § 34. 4. ' As for me, behold my covenant is with thee, and thou CHAP. I7, VERS. 2-5. 171 shalt become a father of a multitude of nations! *3N is prefixed, as in 6, 17. 9, 9, for emphasis: it is opposed to nnN*;, in ver. 9. 3Nb n^nl. n**,11, perf. with waw conv, though no imperfect precedes ; compare the companion construction of waw conv. with the imperf. when no perfect precedes. So 26, 22 13*131; Ex. 6, 6 *nN*»ini; Driver, § 119 a. HN, cstr. state for *3N;J is chosen on account of the name Abraham. This form is also found in proper names, e.g. D17E>3N, 133N, but not so frequently as the longer form *3N. D^IJ pOn. J101 is used here instead of the more usual 7,1p, 28, 3. 35, n, on account of the etymology of D113N, suggested by the writer in ver. 5. 5. "JOUJ nN . . . Nip1* Nbl. The ace after the passive verb as in 4, 18, which compare. 0ni3N, D13N =' exalted father ;' unless we assume that it is equivalent to D1*3N, when it might=(Di) 'Father of Ram] or ' (the) Exalted One is (my) Father;' cf. the Assyr. male p. n. Abu-ra-mu, Schrader, C.O.T., p. 190, and see Bathgen, Beitr. zur Semit. Religionsg., p. i55ff. The etymo logy of the second name D113N given in the text is really no etymology, but merely a play on the words ; cf. the etymologies given for n3, |*p; the name being changed into Abraham, because thus pronounced, an assonance was produced between the D,1 of Jion and D.113N. Dni3N does not = Father of a multi tude. The etymology is quite unknown. It is also impossible to decide whether Dni3N is the original form, and D13N a con traction of this (Ewald, Stade), or vice versa D,H3N an expan sion of an original D13N. As there is no proof that a Dm = 311 exists in Hebrew, the former conjecture is perhaps more 172 GENESIS, probable than the latter. A word Dm, = ' multitude] does not exist. That the author could have had in view the Arab. 1L&J, mentioned in the Qamus, is not conceivable. "pjinj . . . |lOn 3N . >n3, with two accusatives, in the sense 'to make any one anything] Ges, § 117. 5 CJ Dav, S., § 76; M. R., § 45, 5; so 1 Kings 14, 7. 16, 2. Jer. 1, 5. The other construction with 7 in place of the second ace is equally common ; cf. ver. 6. 48, 4. Is. 49, 6, etc. 7. Omib =' throughout their generations' (successively); the plural suffix is used, JHt being taken collectively. Dnm3Ei07 would be ' throughout their families ' (contemporaneously). Formulae of this kind are common in P; so 8, 19. 10, 5. 20. 31. 32. 25, 16. 36, 40. "pinN . . . y? nl^nb, i.e. Abraham's descendants will stand in a close relationship to God as His servants, and be under His protection. He will protect and specially favour them, they will serve and worship Him as their God, Ex.\ 6, 7. Deut. 26, 17. 8. nttlN, CITO, and )X03 yiN are all marks of P. Also the phrase, ' Thou and thy seed after thee] vers. 7-10. 10. 13* b3 D3b blon. 7ion is inf. abs. Nif. of 770 or 71D; cf. Ges, § 67. Rem. 5. The infinitive abs. is here emphatically prefixed to indicate a command; cf. Ewald, §328 c; Dav, S., § 88 b. c. and R. 5 ; M. R, § 106. ic; cf. Ex. 20, 8. Render, 'Every male to be circumcised] i.e. 'let every male be circumcised] See also Ges, § 113. 4b. Rem. 11. Dn7021 is Nif. of 770 for Dni?03 ; a root 703 does not exist ; cf. 130FI, Num. 17, 28, for «ion ; ni>On, where one would expect C^Or], Ewald, § 234 c; Ges, § 67. Rem. 11; CHAP. 17, VERS. 7-14. 173 cf. on 11, 6. The perf. with waw consec. is in continuation of the imperative, which is implied in the last verse in the inf. abs. 710,1, cf. Ges, § 112. 4b ; Dav, S., § 55 a ; Driver, § "3- i- 1U33 is ace of respect or specification, as in 3, 15, which compare. See also 1 Kings 15, 23 1*731 nN ,17n. 12. biO1* is imperf. Nif. of ?70 (for 70*, the regular form, Job 14, 2); cf. *Oin, Jer. 48, 2, as though they were from verbs l"y; cf. Ges, § 67. Rem. 5; Stade, § 504 e, who ap parently regards ?10* as from a verb 710. // 131 D^O"* niOtt? 131 . ' Every male, when eight days old, shall be circumcised for you throughout your generations] D*0* nsOE* |3 is a secondary predicate ; cf. Is. 65, 20 iy3n *3 nio* n3K> ,1NO 13; Job 15, 7 17in DIN 'lt^Ni.l; cf. Driver, § 161. 3; Dav., S., § 71. R. 1. 132 ]3, a mark of P; so ver. 27. Ex. 12, 43. Lev. 22, 25. ,13pD and 13T 73 are also characteristic of P. 13. The lepetition after ver. 12 is in the legal style of this writer (P); cf. 26f. 14. ' The uncircumcised male who shall not be circumcised as io the flesh of his foreskin — that soul shall be cut off from his people, my covenant he has violated'. The subject is placed first for emphasis, as a casus pendens, and taken up by Nlin EiS3,1, instead of by a pronoun; cf. M. R, § 132a; Driver, § 197. Obs. 2 ; Ex. 12, 15 and Deut. 17, 12. D^OX* = ' fellow-tribesmen'. A peculiar use, found chiefly in one or two stereotyped phrases. nm331. Being cut off from one's fellow-tribesmen is probably to be explained of sudden removal by God, rather 174 GENESIS, than death inflicted by man; cf. Di, p. 262 et sq.; Deli6, p. 294. Tuch explains it as=noi* mo, but if this were here intended^ it would probably have been added; cf. Ex. 31, 14. nm33l is perf. with waw consec, after a casus pendens; cf. Ex. 12, 15 nni331 . . . 73N 73*3; Deut. 17, 12 lE'N E>'*Nni N11,1 E**Nn noi . . . n'E>y*; see Driver, § 123 a; Ges, § 112. 5 a. C ; Dav, S., § 56. N*,11 Ei33,1 ini331 is a phrase characteristic of P; so Ex. 12, 15. 19. Lev. 7, 20 ff. Num. 9. !3- "lEil. Pausal form for ISn, so tnn Is. 18, 5; Ewald, § 93 a. 2; Stade, § 393 b. /3; Ges, § 29. 4, c. note. 15. "I©. The name T\~\V, = ' princess] being the feminine form of IB*. The meaning of *!t5> is not so clear ; the LXX have Stina ; so *3*p 2ivd. Possibly the name *1K' was an older form of the name niE> (with J fem.=nT), (Di.); cf. Lag, B.N., p. 92 f. The ending *. is hardly an adjectival ending, as we should rather expect a fem. form. Another explanation is that *1B/ is from IIB*, 32, 29; and so='the contentious, disputing one; ' cf. *1E,= niE>, which is quite possible, but cannot be regarded as certain. (So perhaps LXX.) Other explanations are that *1B> = ' the merry one] TT\V ' one that makes merry, delights (erfreuende)] fromJL, which Di. says violates both the laws of sound and form; or from the Arabic 111 {jJL l^L ' gener osus fuit] so 'the liberal, generous one'. 17. *(3bn. n interrog. pointed with dag, ace to Ges, § 100. 4; Dav., § 49. 2. nun nito ONI. The repetition of the interrog. n of the first member, after the DN1 of the second member of a double interrogative clause, is uncommon [this seems to be CHAP. 17, VERS. 15-23. 175 the only instance] ; cf. Ges, § 150. 2. Rem. 2 b; Dav., S., § 126. R. 2 ; M. R, § 145 ; Ewald, § 324 c. 18. "l^in"'^ bNX'Offi'* "h -'if Ishmael may live before thee] and as no apodosis follows, ' would that Ishmael might live1;' cf. Driver, § 142 ; M. R, § 147 ; Ewald, § 329b; Ges, § 151. 2 ; Dav, S., § 134. 17 is also followed (exceptionally) by the imperative, 23, 13, or jussive, 30, 34. 19. nNlpl . . . mbV The participle used as future, followed by the perf. with waw consec; so 6, 17. 48, 4 (cf. note); Driver, § 113. 1. The accent on nNlpl is not thrown forward on to the last syllable by the waw conv, in accordance with the rule, that in the perfect Qal of verbs N"7 and n"7 the waw conv. does not cause the accent to move forward, Driver, § no. 4; cf. n**ni, ver. 4. 20. bNyOttJ^bl. 'And with regard to I.;' cf. 19, 21 ntn 1317 D3 ' also with regard to this matter;' 42, 9 D7n lE'N D17 'which he dreamt about them ;' cf. M. R, § 51. 5. Rem. b; Ges, § 119. 3 c 4; Dav, S., § 101. R. b. ''n'HDm . . . V1313, the perfect with waw conv, after a prophetic perfect ; so Deut. 15, 6 n03yni . . . pi3; Num. 24, 17 Dpi . . . 3313 Xn, Is. 2, n. 43. I4\ cf- Driver, § 113. 1 ad fin.; Ges, § 112. 3 c. 8; Dav, S., § 41. R. 1; M. R, § 24. 2 b. Rem. b ; Ewald, § 342 b. 2. DN*C]. N*E>3 is almost confined to P in the Pent, and Josh. 7113 1J17 fnnai ; cf. 48, 4 D*oy bnpb ynm), both in P. 23. 70"n is imperf. Qal of 770 or 710, the form with waw conv. and retrogression of the tone being the same in both verbs. nn ai^n asjn. cf. on 7, 13. 176 GENESIS, 24. I70n3 is either reflexive, ' in his circumcising him self i.e. ' when he circumcised himself] or better passive (see ver. 25, where Ishmael could hardly circumcise himself), 'in his being circumcised] i. e. ' when he was circumcised! 26. 7102 ' is the Nif. of 710, formed from the form 770, Ewald, § 140,' Di. See also Ges, § 72. Rem. 9; Stade, § 397 b. y, cf. nD3 from nnn, in3 from nn. Stade and Ges. both regard it, however, as the Nifal proper of 710, comparing ityj from HV. So, apparently, Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 255, who takes ?i03 for namdl (namwal). 18. 1. "l31 nnc yfr Ninl. Circ. clause, 'While he was sitting at the door of the tent! LXX excellently, KaOqpivov avrov; cf. note on 20, 3. "131 nn3 is ace of place, in answer to the question 'where?' Ges, § 118. 2b; M. R,§4ib; Dav, S., § 69 a; and especially Driver, § 191. Obs. 2. QY*n On3, LXX pcotipfiplas ; cf. 1 Sam. 11, 9 E'OE'n Dn3; Neh. 7, 3 E'OE'n Dn iy; see also on 3, 8 D1*,1 nil? =' al even! DIM GT\=' the heat of the day] i.e. noon. < 2. innU^, in pause VWB*, is the apocopated imperf. of n35p?'C, a rare Hithpalel form, from nnE* 'to bow] formed by a repetition of the third radical ; cf. D*inoo in 21, 16, and Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 219. inPiE"* is for inns'*, analogous to the segholate form )riy for in'E>; cf. Ges, § 75. Rem. 18 ; Stade, § 502 a. n21N='/o the ground] lit. ' earthivards] n (as the position of the tone shews) being the ,1 of motion. 3. 'O'lN is marked by the Massoretes EHp ' holy] i.e. that God is here intended; cf. the Mass. note on 19, 2, and Ges, CHAP. 17, VER. 24 — CHAP. 18, VER. 5. 177 §135. 5. R. 3; Stade, § 359 c The Sam. read the word *3*.1N; • my lords] as is clear from the use of the plural suffixes in D3*3*y3 for "p*J», and D313y for 1,13y, and the plural 113yn for I3yn . Dathe and Tiele correct the text into *3i1N ; so Di, who points out that in this verse Abraham addresses one of the three men whom he, possibly, recognised as the leader of the party (contrast ver. 4, where all are addressed). Di. further considers that Abraham first discovers the divine character of his guests in the course of the conversation (ver. 13), for if he had perceived it at once, the honour he paid them would really be no honour, and the offering of food and drink without meaning ; further, it would have been no trial of Abraham's faith, had he known that it was Yahweh who conversed with him. Tuch, Knobel, and Del. follow the Massoretic punctuation. '¦nNSO N3 DN. N3 is added to shew the precative nature of the entire sentence; cf. 30, 27. 33, 10. So Ges. in Th., p. 834b, 'si — quod opto magis quam sumere audeo — gratiam inveni.' 4. 'Let there be taken a little water, and wash your feet, and rest yourself under the tree! The feet were washed before every meal; cf. 19, 2. 24, 32. Luke 7, 44. Wn nnn ' under the tree] It is not necessary to take yyr\ collectively, as three people could very well sit down under one tree. 5. nnpNI. p without dagesh, and pointed with Raphe, see note on 2, 23; and cf. Stade, § 41. Raphe is only found in accurate texts. The letters 3, 3,1, 3, 3 (?), n, pointed with shewa, sometimes (though rarely) omit the dagesh forte, cf. Ges, § 20. 3 b; Stade, § 41. Render, 'And let me take a morsel of bread] Dn7 n3 ' a morsel of bread;' cf. Judg. N 178 GENESIS, 19, 5; a modest way of describing the rich meal he will set before them (Di.). p by "'3=' quandoquidem] Ewald, § 353 a; 'for as much as] the reason being adduced the second time by the demon strative 'therefore' after the relative [conjunction]; cf. Ges, § 158, foot-note 2. 6. nbnNn is accented on the penult, as the locative n does not take the accent, and 7,1N is a seg. noun : cf. Ges, § 90. 2 a1; Dav, § 17, 3. In the ordinary editions of the text and in B. and D. there is a misprint here (see fesaias, p. v, note): read nbnNn. So lEhn, 133^ (13, 14). 131 CJbtt? ''inO. 'Bring quickly three measures of meal;' *1,10, lit. ' hasten! Or, as 110 with the ace is rare (cf. 1 Kings 22, 9. Is. 5, 19), it may be rendered 'Be quick ! three measures of meal I' nop is the ace, ' three measures in meal] or ' as to meal] the ace perhaps being an ace of specification, cf. Driver, § 194; Ges, § 131. 2 c. M.R, § 71. 4, and Dav, S., § 29 d, regard nop as in apposition, so apparently Ewald, § 287!; cf. Ex. 9, 8 n*3 D3*33n N70; Ruth 2, 17 D*1iyE» ,13*N. nbD is in apposition to nop, defining it more closely, ' meal, fine flour! Three seahs of meal made an ephah, something over an English bushel. The large quantity was probably intended as a mark of distinction ; cf. 43, 34. 1 Sam. 9, 2 2f. ni3X*. 3 without dagesh; cf. B. and D, Gen., p. 77. The cakes were small round cakes, baked in the hot ashes,, so called from their round form. Greek iyKpvtpiai, which word the LXX use here. 1 The statement in Ges. 1. c. that n— is accented, is incorrect. CHAP. l8, VERS. 6-14. 179 9. VbN, the points above the word probably indicate a various reading 17; cf. on 16, 5. 10. n^n Viy2 = ' next spring;' explained, ver. 14, by lyi07; in 2 Kings 4, 16. 17 we have the fuller phrase iy!D7 1*n ny3 ntn . LXX have koto, tov xaipov tovtov (from ver. 1 4) ds &pas, i. e. ' about this time next year! The phrase literally translated =¦' about the time (when it is) reviving] i.e. 'when this, time lives again;' cf. Ges. in Th., p. 470; and Gram., § 118. 6 b. n*n does not qualify ny, which has the article, but is predicate; cf. Ex. 9, 18 ino njJS 'about the time when it is to-morrow! The full expression would be mo nyn n*,*il3, and n*n nyn niVO. In 17, 21 we have the time stated more clearly, ninNn i13fc»3 nrn iy07; cf. 1 Sam. 1, 20 D*0*,1 ni3ipn7. l^inN Nlm . ' // (the door) being behind him (the speaker) ; ' so the Massoretic text. The LXX, oSo-a omo-8ev avTov, took Nin here as Nin, cf. on 2, 12, and referred it to Sarah. 11. O^O'Q D'1N3=' well on in days! So 24, 1; Josh. 13, I, etc.; cf. jrpo|8e/3ijKor€s iv Tats f/pepais in Luke 1, 7- bin , as ver. 1 1 is a circumstantial sentence, explanatory of what takes place in ver. 12, 7in must be translated 'there had ceased! 12. 'And Sarah laughed within herself, saying, After I have grown old, shall I have pleasure, my lord being old?' LXX, iyeXao-ev he 'Zappa iv iavrfj, Xiyovo-a, Ovira> pev pni yiyovcv ias Toil vvv. 6 be Kvpids pov npeo-^vTepos ; leaving *inN untrans lated, and apparently taking *Jl73 = *ni>3, and n3iy = 1315? = nsn-iy. Contrast the explanation of P in 17, 17. 14. 131 mn^O Nbff*n. 'Is anything too hard (lit. wonderftg, extraordinary) for Yahweh?' cf. Jer. 32, 17 N 2 l8o GENESIS, 131 73 100 N7S* N7, and ver. 27 131 73 N73* *300,1; Deut. 17, 8 131 IOO N73* *3). Cf. Ges, § 133. 1. Rem. 2; Dav, S., § 34. R. 2. nin^O. * pointed with shewa: so B. and D. Ordinary texts have nin*0, without shewa. The shewa is inserted according to the Massoretic note, quoted by Del.5, p. 298, D*330 3731 p*30 nEto, i. e. 'Moses leads (Israel) out, and Caleb leads them in] which is the Massoretic way of saying that the letters n, v, O make the N of *31N — the vowels of which are always in the text placed under 11,1* — heard ; while after the letters 3, 7, 3, the N is not sounded as a consonant, e.g. ,1j,1*3=*3i1N3 for *3'1N3; the latter part of the rule holds good for 1. So nin*l_=*3i1N1 for *3*.1N*,; cf. Ges, § 23. 2 ; Stade, § 112 b. note, who gives instances, e.g. Mic. 4, 13. Neh. 8, 10. Gen. 40, 1 (cf. B. and D.'s editions here), where =7^ does not become — . 15. npTO 'O N7 'nay, (for i.e. but) thou didst laugh] *3 N7, as in 19, 2. 42, 12. *3 in antithesis after N7, cf. Dav, S., § 118; Ges, § 163. 1. 16. Dn7©7. DOl? *]7n 0ni3NV while Abraham went with them to escort them] circ. clause, as in vers. 12. 18. 19, 1. 24, 10. 15. 56. 25, 26. 28, 12. 44, 26; cf. Driver, §159; M. R, § 152; Dav, S., § 138 c; Ges, § 141. 2. R. 2. Dn7tt?7. Cf. on 12, 20. 17-19. 'And Yahweh said (i.e. to Himself), Shall I hide from Abraham what I am going to do, (18) seeing that Abraham will surely become a great and powerful nation, and all the nations of the earth will bless themselves in him? (19) For I have chosen him, to the end that he may charge his sons, and his house after him, and that they may observe Yahweh's way, CHAP. l8, VERS. 15-20. 181 by doing righteousness and right; so that Yahweh may bring upon Abraham that which He hath promised concerning him! 17. nD30n, the participle preceding the subject, as in Num. 11, 29. Ez. 9, 8 ; see Ges, § 141. 4 ; Dav, S., § 104 c ; cf. note on 3, 5. 18. mm l^n. *^*n is for ri*n, the Holem quiescing in a Waw, instead of a He; cf. 26, 28 iNI; Is. 22, 13 int?; see Ges, § 75. Rem. 2 ; Stade, § 623 a. 131321. Cf. on 12, 3. 19. Y\nXH\ Cf. Amos 3, 2. Hos. 13, 5, yi* here, and in the two passages cited, = 'A? know a person thoroughly] and so, after becoming well acquainted with him, ' to choose or select him] almost=m3; cf. a similar use of npoytvao-Kew, Rom. 8, 29. ItlJN )yob, stronger than *?,= '£3, sc. |iy or yEi3 = '/o take away the sin for any one] so ' to forgive! 25. ' Far be it from Thee to do according to this thing, to slay the righteous with the wicked, and that the righteous should be as the wicked, far be it from Thee ; shall the fudge of all the earth not execute judgment ?' mm . . . monb , the cstr. inf. breaking off into a per fect with waw conv. : the perfect is used here, as a possible case is stated, and not a fact ; in which case we should find the imperf. with waw conv, as in 39, 18 NipNl , . . *0*1,13; cf. Driver, § 118 (see the preceding section); Ges, § 112. 3c.i); Dav, S., § 96 ; so 27, 45 n3Eil ... aits' iy, Ex. 1, 16 jn*N11 . . . p17*3, 2 Sam. 13, 28 *niONl . . . 3103. n77n = ' profanum (lit. in profanum), nefas tibi sit! Del. compares the Targ.-Talmud 17 Nin p?n 'it is unholy for thee! 184 GENESIS, The ,1 is not the feminine ending, as the word is accented on the penult.; cf. 44, 7 T13y7 17*?n. See also Barth, N.B., p. 136. ntoyO, |D as in 16, 2, which compare. 27. 1DN1 131*. Notice the alliteration, and cf. m31 inn, 1, 2. 131 jo, 4, 14. nil nn, Ps. 21, 6. 28. ¦plDrP. See on 3, 3. IDn being one of the verbs of abounding and wanting, takes the ace; cf. note on 1, 21. 30. "iSI ^1N7 in1* N3 7N. '0 let not my Lord be angry, and let me speak] in* ,is apoc. from nin*. The jussive here expresses an entreaty or request ; cf. 9, 27. 31, 49 ; Driver, § 50 y ; Ges, § 109. 1 a and b; M. R, § 8. 2 ; Dav, S., § 63 c. m31N.1, the cohortative here and in ver. 32, may be explained by Driver, §49/3 (used in asking permission), as in 33, 14. 50, 5. Jer. 18, 18, or by Ges, § 108. 2 a ('that I may speak'); Dav, S., § 65. R. 1. 19. 1. D'ONbon "Ott?=not as A.V. 'two angels] but 'two of the angels] i.e. two of the three mentioned in 18, 2. On the construction, cf. Ges, § 134. 1 a; M.R, § 96b; Dav, S., §36b. 3®"* Olbl. Circ. clause, as in 18, 1; cf. also on 13, 7. Render, ' While Lot was sitting in the gate] The city gate in the east was usually a vaulted entrance, with large recesses on either side ; here business matters were settled, and the affairs of the town and all public matters discussed and arranged; cf. 23, 10. 18. 34, 20. Deut. 21, 19. CHAP. l8, VER. 27 CHAP. 19, VER. 3. 185 2. N3 n3n, with short e (Seghol) (only here; cf. Ewald, § 91 d) and dagesh forte conj., is unique; see also Ges, § 20. 2 a. Rem. 1. "01N is marked by the Massoretes 71m nnaa "3 (i.e. ' 3 pointed with pathach and profane] i. e. ' not used of God '). ui N] HID. It was regarded as a neglect of the duties of hospitality 'to allow strangers to spend the night in the street; cf. Judg. 19, 15, and contrast with this inhospitality, 24, 25. Ex. 2, 20. Judg. 13, 15. 'The modern Arabs con sider it a privilege to lodge strangers who may come to them, and often disputes arise as to who shall have this honour.' Kn. cited by Di. - Dn03ffim. D*3Ei1 prop.='/i'0 ' to lap, suck '), and so more quickly prepared. 186 GENESIS, 4. 131 D1ID; cf. on 2, 5. Render, ' They had not yet gone to sleep, when the men of the city, the men of Sodom, surrounded the house, boihyoung and old, all the people in a body! 13D2 is third perf. pl.'Nif. of 33D=133D3. Nifal being originally Naf al ; the pathach being thinned down into hireq ; cf. Dav, § 25. Rem. a; Ges, § 51. 1; and compare the Arabic vii form l}HM[ (in-qatala) and such Heb. forms as nb-JW, 3E'i3 = 3B;*|3 (Dav, § 9. 1. Rem. b; Ges, § 24. 2 b); Wright, Gram. Arab., i. p. 42. 33D3 becomes 3D3, and the pathach under the nun, standing in an open syllable before the tone, becomes tone-long qamec : cf. Stade, § 86. 3 ; Dav, § 6. 2 b; see also Ges, § 27. 2 a. nJJpO = lit. 'from the end] i. e. including the whole, so in Jer. 51, 31. Cf. Judg. 18, 2. 1 Kings 12, 31 (not ' of the lowest] but ' of the whole body of the people'). The full expression would be nxp'iyi . , , nS(5D, 47, 21. Jer. 12, 12. etc. 5- nb^bn = ' to-night] ' this night] the article, as in DIM, n3Ei,1, has a demonstrative force : Ges, § 126. 1 a; Dav, S., § 21. R. 1 ; Ewald, § 277 a. 3. So in 30, 15. 6. nbl . . . nnD. n71 = ' the door of the house] nns = ' the entrance (gale).' 7. inN = ' my friends;' cf. 29, 4. Judg. 19, 23. 8. bN for ,17N is found eight times in the Pentateuch and once besides (1 Chron. 20, 8), and always (except Chron. l.c.) with the article; see Ges, § 34. 1. Rem.; Dav, § 13. Rem. a; Stade, § 171 b. It is commonly explained as an archaism, but this is very doubtful. Robertson-Smith (in Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 108 J) regards it as merely a ' scriptio defectiva' CHAP. 19, VERS. 4-1 1. 187 (?£¦?) as in Phoenician; cf. C.I. S., I. 3. lin. 22 ; 14. lin. 5 ; 93. lin. 3. He considers ?Nn in any case as younger than n^Nn. 9. nNbn"t?J3. So in correct editions; the ordinary editions have nN?nj -^th metheg, which is wrongly placed, as the tone is on the penult. LXX, 'An-dora e«I. Vulg. 'recede illuc ;' cf. Is. 49, 20 *p~nE'3 'stand away] Render, 'Stand back] OISG? . . . inNn . ' This one came in to sojourn and goes on playing the judge ;' cf. 31, 15 13BD3 nN 73N D3 73N*1 • and goes on to eat up our silver ;' Job 10, 8 *3y73m ' and yet thou goesl on to swallow me up ;' cf. Driver, § 79, 'The action or its results continuing into the writer's present ;' also Ewald, §§ 231 b, 342 a. 1 a. OlSt?J. When the inf. abs. follows the finite verb, it generally denotes, a continued or lasting action ; cf. Ges, § 113. 3 b; Ewald, § 280 b ; and Dav, S., § 86. R. 1. inNn . The n is the article, not the n interrogative. T V T T 11. D'*11DD3 'with blindness;' not absolute blindness, but temporary loss of sight; the word only occurs once again, 2 Kings 6, 18. [i"\iy, Zech. 12, 4. Deut. 28, 28 is different ^blindness, not merely a temporary affliction. D*H3D is from 113D [Safel of 113 (jy)]—'to make blind] which occurs in Aramaic; cited by Levy, Chald. W. B. sub voce, as occurring in Num. 16, 14 Targ. Ps.-Jon. (l113Dn). On the causative conjunction of the verb in Semitic, that has V or D as initial letter, cf. Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 205; see also Delitzsch, Assyr. Gram., p. 231. The article is according to Ges., § 126. 3. Rem. c; Dav, S., § 22. R. 1 ; 188 GENESIS, LXX, dopao-ia; Onq. X*113E> 'fatuttas;' Syr. Jk-^s^i*. ' illusiones.' b113 11»1 fttpO. Cf. i Sam. 5, 9. 30, 2; lit. = 'from a little one even unto a great one] i. e. ' all] every one being regarded as either small or great, so the two extremes would embrace all persons. 11*1 . . . ]0 as in 13, 3. 14, 23, and often. 12. nQ "]b V2 11* = ' Who hast thou still here?' i.e. 'hast thou any more belonging to thee in Sodom besides those in thy house?' ]nn, perhaps collective —'sons-in-law;' but the singular without the suffix is strange, as one would expect T?.0«> which the Pesh. has, ^ijfcJl. Di. conjectures that 331 was inserted between *i* and 3nn, as no mention is made else where of sons which Lot had before the destruction. 13. 1^n:N D^nntW'O 13. The participle is used of future time (with the subject following, cf. 3, 5). See note on 6, 17, and cf. 15, 14. 17, 19. 18, 17. 41, 25. 28. Ex. 9, 3. DnpX'S =' the cry concerning them ;' cf. on 18, 20. mm ^3 nN as in ver. 27. 33, 18. Ex. 34, 23. 1 Sam. 1, 22. Ps. 16, 11. 14. "*npb 'who were to lake] 'the takers of his daughters ;' so Ewald, § 335 b; Ges, § 116. 2 ; better than (LXX, Targ. Ps.-Jon, Kimchi, Del.) ' who had taken] which would be more naturally expressed by lE'N and the perf.; and Lot would scarcely leave his married daughters in Sodom without calling them away. 1N5J lOlp. x with emphatic dag. (see on ver. 2), to CHAP. 19, VERS. I2-l6. 189 ensure the clear pronunciation of the V between the two u-sounds. , , , 3 mn = ' to appear as] for which there is no proper word in Hebrew; cf. 27, 12. 40, 10. 15. Render, 'And when the morning dawned, the angels urged Lot, saying, Take thy wife and thy two daughters that are with thee, lest thou be swept away in the punishment of the city'. tlby intfjn 1031. 103 = 1E'N3 is rare and poetical, Is. 26, 18. Ps. 58, 8 ; cf. M. R, § 60; Ewald, § 337 c; Dav, S., § 145 a. I^N^I is imperf. Hif. of pN. The waw conv. is used after a time determination : so 22, 4 D113N NE»! *E'*?E'n Dl*3, 1 Sam. 21, 6 1*1*1 TINX3, Josh. 22, 7 D3131 . . . Dn^E* *3 ; cf. Driver, § 127 b ; Ges, § in. 1. Rem. 1 ; M. R, § 132 b; Dav, S., § 50 b. nN^O^n, lit. 'who are found] i.e. who are with thee in thy house; cf. 1 Sam. 13, 15- 21, 4. The participle may often be rendered by the present, as in 4, 10. 16, 8. 37, 16, etc. nNS03,1 probably refers to T/IE'N nN as well as to "j*ni33 *n'B' nNi. nSDn 13 . n3D = ' to be snatched off, carried away ;' so 1 Sam. 12, 25. Num. 16, 26. pi* = ' punishment ;' cf. 4, 13. 16. HOnomi, imperf. Hithpalpal of nno; cf. loion* from 11D, Dan. 8, 7 ; Ges, § 55. 4 ; Stade, § 503. mm rhl2ini = ' through Yahweh's sparing him] i.e. ' because Yahweh spared him] the subject of the inf. construct following in the genitive; cf. M.R, § 117; Ges, § 115. 2. 190 GENESIS, Rem. 1 ; Dav, S., § 91 a : also Ps. 133, 1 D*nN naE>, Is. 47, 9 "plan noxy3. The inf. cstr. n70n has the fem. cstr. ending ; here intentionally, as ,11,1* 170n3 could not be taken as construct state with a following genitive. The inf. with fem. ending n is common, especially in particular words, viz. .131N, nNI*, nN?'E», occasionally we find n3lp, 13N1, •T?31, npjn ; cf. Stade, p. 339; Ges, § 45. 1. Rem. b. 17. O'Qn bN. The jussive form 03PI would rather be expected after 7N, but cf. 9, 25. Ps. 121, 3 QWJ'^N, 1 Sam. 25, 25 D*E>* . . . 7N; see Driver, § 47 ; Ges, § 107. 4 a. 2. Rem. 18. *01N, noted by the Massoretes EHP; D0.?*$ does not of necessity imply that Lot did not recognise that Yahweh was speaking with him, and that ''flR.— ' my lords] pausal form of ^'l^; as in ver. 19 we find singular suffixes. The Pesh. and Saadiah regard *31N as 7in, but the LXX, Onq, Vulg., and Sam. as VIp ; so Del. 19. "OpSin-]!!?. Imperf. with the so-called union vowel pathach instead of tsere; cf. 29, 32 l|?3\lNj!,; see Ges., § 60. Rem. 2 ; Stade, § 636 b, who cites 1 Kings 2, 24 Kri *33*E>*,»1, Is. 56. 3 H?^?-, Job 9, 18 *3JJ*3E»!. < TlTOl. 1 with pretonic qamec, the tone is not thrown forward, because the word is in pause; see Driver, §110, 2. *np = *nno. The perf. with waw conv, as in 3, 22, which compare. 22. 15*12, probably one hour south-east of the Dead Sea, in that portion of the Arabah which is now called Ghor es Safia, the modern Chirbet es Safra. In 14, 2. 8 its older name is given, y?3 ; cf.-Wetz. in Del, Gen.*, p. 564, and Di, p. 273, who remarks that the name was still in existence at the time of the Crusades (Segor ; . cf. LXX 2r,yap) ; the CHAP. 19, VERS. 17-26. igi Arab geographers call it Soghar or Zoghar, and the Dead Sea, the Sea of Zoghar. Robinson, Winer, Tuch, and others think that lyilf was situated in the beautiful oasis El-Mezra'a, on the neck of land or peninsula which stretched from the east into the Dead Sea. Cf. Badeker, Palest., p. 145; the Z.D.P. V., ii. p. 212 f.; and Sh, G., p. 505 f. 23. n"*l*2 . . . tt*Ott)n. ' The sun had risen over the earth when Lot came to Zoar ;' cf. 29, 9. 44, 3. 4 , , , 1NX* D,1 ion f)Di*i i*yn, Judg. 3, 24 iNa mayi nv* nwi; also 38, 25. Judg. 18, 3. Time or place determinations are generally subordinated to the main clause in a sentence ; here and in the other instances cited, the time determination is co-ordinate, and placed first for emphasis; cf. Driver, § 169.^ Cf.. also, Ges, § 164 b; Dav, S., § 141 and R. 2 ; M. R, § 154. 24. D^Offln IO mn*1 nNO, the fire and brimstone are described as proceeding both from Yahweh and out of heaven, D*DE>,1 |0 and mn* nNO ; cf. 2 Kings 1, 12. Job 1, 16. Di. comparing Mic. 5, 6 supposes that ,11,1* nNO, like the Greek 4k Aidy, was an archaic expression, similar in meaning to D*OE'n JO, by which it is explained; cf. Ewald, Hist, of Israel (Eng. trans.), ii. p. 157. nNO = napd with the genitive. (O = ««. 25. ISml. n3310 is a technical word, always used of the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah (to which there is at least an allusion even in Is. 1,7), just as ?13p is always used of the great Deluge. 26. VinNO 'from behind him] i.e. Lot; she was 1 Baer and Delitzsch's reading rgsii should be corrected into rtT_»^ : see Jesaias, p. v, note. 192 GENESIS, following Lot, and out of curiosity turned her face away from him. 28. nbl* is pluperfect, 'The smoke had begun to ascend before Abraham looked.' Driver, § 16 ; Dav, S., § 39 c. ]ttJ33n It^pS. Cf. Ex. 19, 18 : 'Like the smoke of a smelting furnace] ]V22 = 'a smelting oven! 113n 'a baking oven! 29. O'nyn nN ^3n3. The subject is omitted as it is clear from the context : cf. on 24, 30. The inf. cstr. always puts its object in the same case as the verb does from which it is derived ; cf. M. R, §116; Ges, § 115. 1 ; Dav, § 91 b. 30. niX*03. 'In the cave;' either the generic article, as in 14, 13. 15, n, or possibly a particular cave was meant, which the narrator could speak of as 'the cave;' cf. 16, 7. 33. r^pCJn. Scriptio defectiva for n3*pvEin ; cf. Ges, § 47. Rem. 3. This defective form is found occasionally, but by no means uniformly, in the Pent. It occurs also elsewhere, e. g. in Ezekiel Tf*.*nn four times, with the full form also four times. Nin nb*b3. Nin without the article — which would be expected, as n7*7 is defined — as being in itself definite ; cf. 30, 16. 32, 23. 1 Sam. 19, 10 (all): see Ges., § 126. 5. Rem. 1 b; M. R, § 85. Rem. c; Dav, S., §§ 6, 32. R. 3. This is a very rare variation for the more usual NW,1 17*73, but we find on the Moabite Stone, 1. 3, nNt n031. nOlp^l with a point on the 1 ; cf. ver. 35 nop3. Possibly the point refers to a various reading nop3, as in ver. 35. Hieron, Quaest., ed. Lag, p. 30 (Appendix to the Genesis CHAP. 19, VERS. 28-38. 193 Graece), says : ' Denique Hebraei quod sequitur et nesciuit cum dormisset cum ea et cum surrexisset ab eo adpungunt desuper quasi incredibile et quod rerum natura non capiat coire quempiam nescientem;' cf. Strack, p. 88. 34. mnOO ._ The ending nr in this word is quite unique, and apparently without analogy; cf. Stade, § 308 d. Ges, § 80. Rem. 2 b, classes it among nouns with the rarer fem. ending nx, e.g. Canaanitish names of towns, cf. niBN, nbyi, non, and other names such as l"l3Dn, prob. abbreviated for nriJDn, also npm, prob. for W™ ; cf. Stade, l.c Olshausen, Grammar, § 38 c, explains the form by contraction out of niriND. Another explanation (cf. Levy, Chald. W. B., i. p. 330) is that it is contracted out of UN DI*; cf. the Aramaic word Nino*,* = Nin Di*. 36. 'jm^ND. JO is used intentionally instead of 7 (38, 1 8 b), on account of the etymology in ver. 37; cf. vers. 32. 34. 37. 3N10. LXX add the explanation, Xiyovo-a, 'Ek tov irarpos fiou, i.e. 3ND 'from the father' (like |*p, m, not a strict etymology) : another explanation is that the word is com pounded of *0 for *P ' water] '=*10 in Aramaic (cf. Is. 25, 10, and the prop, name N3110, Moab. Stone, 1. 8 = Biblical N31 *0, see Schlottmann, Siegessdule Mesa's, Halle, 1870, p. 41 ; and nysiD, Ktb, Jer. 48, 21 ; Kri, n$J3*p (cf. 1 Chron. 6, 64), a town of the Levites, in the territory of Reuben, which afterwards belonged to Moab), and 3N, the meaning being then ' semen patris! 38. ^'Oy~\l = 'son of my people] after which the LXX insert, Xeyovo-a, Xlbs yivovs pov. |ioy=' belonging to the people' (abs. then concrete) bears the same relation to 33? as fi03N to D3N (Del.). 0 194 GENESIS, 20. i. 333n n21N. 'To the land of the south! n locative and the construct state ; cf. Ges, § 90. 2 a; Stade, § 342 d ; Dav, S., § 27: so Ex. 4, 20 D*1V0 nxiN; Gen. 43, 17 nn*3 f)Dl*; Deut. 4, 41 e'oe' nniTO; other instances in Genesis are (?) 24, 67. 28, 2. 46, 1. On the Negeb, cf. note on 12, 9. 113 is identified by Rowlands, Robinson, Kiepert, and Badeker, Palest., p. 157, etc, with the modern Umm el-Gerar, three hours SSE. of Gaza, on a broad and deep torrent flowing from the SE, the Gurf el-Ger&r, the upper portion of the Wady Gazzeh, which forms a junction with the Wady es-Seri'a, a little above Gerar. Thomson, Trumbull (Kadesh Barnea, p. 61 ff.), and Guthe (Z.D.P. V., viii. p. 215) prefer to place it in or near the Wady Gerur, a branch of the Wady es-Seraif, which enters the Wady el-'Aris, to the SW. of Kadesh; cf. Di, p. 279 f, who points out that objections may be urged against both identifications. 2. t7~W~b& =' concerning Sarah:' so ver. 13 *7 "HON; 32, 30 *DE>7'; cf. Ob. 1. Ps. 3, 3; see Ewald, § 217 c; Ges, § 119. 3 c. 4 ; Dav, S., § 101. R. b. 3. bl>3 nbin Nini 'she being married;' so Deut. 22, 22 7y3 n7ya .lE'N ; cf. Is. 62, 5. On the circumstantial clause here, cf. Driver, § 160 ; Ges, § 141. 2. R. 2 ; Dav, S., §§ 105, 138a; M.R, §152; so in 15, 2. 18, 1. 8. 10. 13. 27. 24, 31. 62. 37, 2. 44, 14. 4- p',l2 03 ''Un. D3 (emphasizing the following p*ix)= Spm; cf. Ewald, § 354 a; Ges, § 154. foot-note c: so ver. 5 Nin D3 N*,11, ver. 6 *33N D3 T>nN1 ; cf. Dav, S., § 107. CHAP. 20, VERS. 1-7. 195 6. itOHO for NOnO; written according to the sound. Cf. 2 Kings 13, 6 ^riri; Jer. 32, 35 *onn. The Kri gives the ordinary form NOno. Cf. Stade, §§ 29 and 143c 2, who regards it as a mistake, like i«l for INI, *n*£ for *nN5fJ, both written according to their pronunciation. Ges, § 75. Rem. 21 c, takes ion as an instance of a verb n"7 following the form of a verb ,l"7. VXlb Tnm vh='Ididnot allow thee] etc. 'To let] or 'allow] is always expressed thus in Heb.; so 31, 7 13DJ N71 yi,17 DM7N; Judg. 1, 34 mi7 W13 N7 *3; see Ges, § 114. 2. Rem. 3 ; Dav, S., § 82 b. 7. N^33 , as under God's protection ; cf. Ps. 105, 15. N*33 possibly comes from a root N33 = ' to express] ' announce' (so quite commonly in Assyrian). The original meaning of N*33 is active, not passive, ' the announcer, speaker] i. e. of God, or of divine mysteries : the form being an intensive form of the part. act. ; cf. the Arabic ^j or ^J, a noun of the form J^jJ, with an active meaning like the Heb. 7*Dn. Cf. Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 151, and Fleischer in Del, Gen.*, p. 551; see also Barth, N.B., p. 184. Bleek (Einleitung", p. 306) thinks that N33 may be connected with y33=' ebullire] and so ' to pour forth words] ' lo speak] N*33 = ' speaker] This how ever is doubtful, as N33 does not actually occur with the meaning 'gush up] See a good note on N*33 in Robertson- Smith, Prophets, p. 389 f. mm. Cf. 45, 18, and see note on 12, 2. 3^0 "[^N ONI. 'And if thou art not going to restore;' the affirmative form would be 3*15*0 IE" DN ; cf. 43, 5 DN1 ni'E'O "]3*N, neg; and ver. 4 ni'E'o 1^* DN, affirmative. |*N and E** are often used thus in hypothetical sentences. Cf. note on 24, 42. 0 2 196 GENESIS, "iiii b31 nnN niOn niO "O. When the compound subject is a pronoun and noun (or its equivalent), the pro noun must be expressed whether the verb be sing, of plural. Cf. 7, 1. 14, 15. 24, 54. 31, 21; Judg. 7, 10. n, 38; and see Dav, S., § 114 c. 9. 1®!''* Nb IffiN n^VO=' deeds which ought not to be done;' cf. 4, 7 13 Won nnNl ' thou shouldest rule over him;' 34, 7 ntyy* N7 |31 'so it should not be done;' Ex. 10, 26 ,10 13y3 'how we ought to serve;' see Driver, § 39 a; M. R, 7. 2 b; Ges, § 107. 2 b ; Dav, S., § 44 a. 10. n*Nl TV2 = 'what hadst thou in view?' s© ,1N1 in Ps. 66, 18 *n*N1 DN JIN. 11. "mON "O, supply *h*E>y from fl%y in ver. 10 '(I did it) because I thought ;' cf. 27, 20. 31, 31. Ex. 1, 19. pi. Knobel and Del. render (I) 'surely ;' cf. Num. 20, 19 131 |*N pi; Ps. 32, 6 D*31 D*0 fJOB'? pi. (II) Di. prefers to translate ' only] ' at least] not considering the two passages above cited decisive. ^laim . . . n-NI"* pN. 'There is no fear of God in this place, and they will kill me ;' cf. 2 Sam. 14, 7 1331 'and they will quench ;' Gen. 34, 30 *7y 1BSN31 13D0 *no *3N1. Cf. Dr., § 119a; Dav, S., § 57. R. 1; Ges, § 112. 4a; M.R, § 24. 2 b. 12. 'And she is also really my sister, the daughter of my father, only not the daughter of my mother, so she became my wife;' cf. on 12, 19. Such marriages, though prevalent among other nations, e.g. in Canaan, Assyria, Persia, Egypt, Arabia, were- forbidden in the Levitical law, Lev. 18, 9. n. 20, 17. Deut. 27, 22. From this passage it would seem that CHAP. 20, VERS. 9-16. 197 they were customary also among the Hebrews in pre-Mosaic times, 13. O^nbN . . . 11*nn, marked by the Massoretes V~ip, to shew that the true God is meant, although the verb is plural; possibly the plural here is used because Abraham was conversing with a heathen. Cf. 35, 7, where probably the angels are included under DM7N; see Ewald, § 318 a; Ges, § 145. 3. Rem.; Dav, S., § 116. R. 4; M. R, § 135. 2. The Heb.-Samaritan text here, and 35, 7, read the singular. The later books of the Bible also avoid the plural ; cf. Neh. 9, 18 with Ex. 32, 4. 16. f]D3 F]bN=" a thousand shekels of silver! bpV omitted (cf. 8, 5) by Ges, § 134-3- ^m. 3 ; Dav, S., § 37. R. 4 ; M.R, §71. 4. The thousand shekels of silver could hardly be the value of the presents given to Abraham, ver. 14, for such a valuation of these gifts is here quite out of place ; besides the present here mentioned, is given to Abraham for Sarah, and on account of the insult she had suffered; whilst the one in ver. 14 was for Abraham himself. Nin refers to the gift, not to Abraham ; as in the latter case, no reason would be assigned for giving the thousand shekels, inN IttJN 737. Render, '// is for thee a covering of the eyes for all those who are with thee;' i. e. it is intended for Sarah, and given for her sake, and will blind the eyes of all those that are with her, so that they will be oblivious of what has happened, and regard the insult, to which she has been subjected, as though it had never occurred; cf. 32, 21. Job 9, 24. So Di, who regards 737 as introducing those whose 198 GENESIS, eyes are to be covered, and "]7 as a dat. comm. Tuch and Kn. render "131 lE'N 737 as=' with regard to all that which has befallen thee] a meaning the words will hardly bear. Del.4 renders as though the text were "-'apl, which reading the LXX (ko.1 Trdo-ais) and the Sam. follow. In Ed.5 he renders, 'Let this be for thee a covering of the eyes for all those who are with thee] or ' with reference to all, etc! Then "J7=the person whose eyes are to be covered, and the 7 in 737 must be the dat. of reference. This rendering does not seem to be so natural as that adopted by Di. b3 nNl is separated from "jnN by the accents, and connected with nn331. Render, 'And among all (or " in the judgment of all]' cf. Is. 59, 12) so art thou justified! nNl 73 is taken by Tuch in close connection with 1TIN 'for all which has happened (with) unto thee and (with) unto all! But 73 nNl can hardly mean this, and nothing had happened 73 nN 'with all! nn3D1 probably ought to be pointed nn331 (in pause fiD^l), so Di.; cf. Konig, Lehrg., i. p. 423, which is the usual form of the second pers. fem. perf. in a 7 guttural verb, as the 1 is difficult before anything but a second perf. To take the form nnab as second perf, comparing nnp7, 30, 15, is unsafe, as nnp7 there is probably infinitive. Del.5 takes nn33 as participle fem. standing for nN nn331, and renders, 'and with all justified] viz. 'thou siandest justified! The Mass. points seem to intend nn331 as perf. third pers. fem, which is pointed without shewa under the n, to distinguish it from the second pers. fem. perf, which has shewa. The rendering would then be, 'And with regard to all— so it is settled;' but then the feminine would not be necessary. CHAP. 20, VER. l6. I99 nn33 may here be either pass, of n*3in, with an ace of the thing, Job 13, 15. 19, 5 = '/o represent as right;' or passive of 7 n*3in, Is. 11, 4. Job 16, 21 'to procure right for! Ges. renders nn331 ' and she stood reproved] which is possible, but unsuitable, as Abimelech is not reproaching Sarah. It is not improbable that the sentence is corrupt. D^X* niD3 ; cf. D*33 133 in 32, 21. Job 9, 24 n*03Ei *33 nD3*, and nD3, Ps. 85, 3, of covering sin; 133, Jer. 18, 23, of atoning, lit. covering, guilt; cf. also 1 Sam. 12, 3 D*?yN1 13 *3*y (if the Mass. text is correct here, but see LXX, and Driver in loc). The rendering of niD3 by 'veil' is un suitable, and not supported by 12, 14. 24, 16. 29, 16. 17, compared with 24, 65 ; as it is not certain from these passages that women wore veils first when they were engaged (Tuch). Besides, a thousand shekels would be rather a high price to give for a veil, about £100. LXX have Tavra eo-rai 001 els npifv tov irpoo-amov o-ov, Kal irdo-ais Tais pera aov, koi iravra dXij8evo-ov : irdma dXqdevo-ov being, perhaps, a guess on the part of the translator, who misunderstood the original. Onq. has : n:*. t]W n*tni i]*niai n*n^E>i sjbn ip*i niD| yb Nin nh nnainix niDNI NO 73 ?jn TO*yi bl 'Behold, it is unto thee for a covering of glory, because I sent (and) took thee, and saw thee, and all that is with thee, and concerning all that thou hast spoken, thou hast proved thyself right! The Pesh. has : ..>,v? o+o* 00) .a?' )«o u^<£JJ , D*1N1¥, nouns denoting extension of space ; see note on 2, 7, and cf. Ewald, § 178 a, b. 3. ib'lbiiil. Participle Nif. of 17*, with the qamec shortened into pathach, on account of the following maqqef. Others take it as perf. Nif. with the article 1^ian=lb*J lEte; cf. on 18, 21. pn2^ . Other nouns (mostly proper names) formed after the analogy of the imperfect Qal are a'py*, I?"]*, 22, 22, &2V, DEO*, nin* = nin*, according to the pointing usually adopted by modern scholars (see App.). nO'E'* (in niO*E',n n*3) is possibly an abstract noun of this form ; cf. also nff = * a dove] lion^ 'a stag;' see Stade, § 259a; and cf. Barth, N.B., p. 227. 5. ib iblJlS.. On the construction, cf. on 4, 18. ibjna is accented on the penult, to avoid the concurrence of two tone-syllables, this shortens the tsere in the last syllable into seghol; cf. on 4, 17. Two tone-syllables may however CHAP. 20, VER. 17 — .CHAP. 21, VER. 7. 201 come together, if the first word is separated from the second, by a distinctive accent. 6. 'And Sarah said, Laughter hath God prepared for me, every one who hears will laugh at me] "*b pn2l*. pnx with 7 = 'to laugh at' (as is clearly shown by Job 5, 22. 39, 7. 18. 22. Ps. 59, 9), here rather in astonishment than in derision. A.V. 'will laugh with me;' so VSS, but incorrectly. pre1*, with shewa resolved into hateph pathach; so even where no guttural follows, cf. 2, 12. 23. Jer. 22, 15 Tj7»nn. 7. 1A1 bbO ''O . Render, ' Who could have said to Abraham ?' ' The perfect is used in questions to express astonishment at what appears to the speaker in the highest degree improbable,' Driver, § 19; cf. 18, 12 n3iy *7 nn*,1 ; 1 Sam. 26, 9 ,1p31 . . . n^E* *0; Num. 23, 10 isy ,130 *0; see also Ges, § 106. 4; Dav, S., § 41. R. 2 ; M. R, § 3. 2. note a. LXX have dvayycXe?, ' who shall say! Tuch renders, 'who says] which would rather be 1*?' or ?.?P*, admitting, however, that the perfect in interrogative sentences usually refers to a past act. 770 is only found in Hebrew three times again, viz. in Ps. 106, 2. Job 8, 2 and 33, 3. It is a common word in Aramaic for the Heb. 131. D^3 np^n. 'Sarah will suckle children:' np*3*1 is prophetic perfect; cf. Num. 24, 17 3313 1.11; Is. 5, 13 [37 *oy 173; Jer. 2, 26 7N1E>* n*3 Ei*31,1 |3; and often, and see note on 1, 29. D*03 is generic plural, as in Ex. 21, 22 . . . D*EON 1V3* *3 202 GENESIS, 1*17* 1NS*l; Is. 37, 3 "131 D*33 1N3 *3; Dav, S., § 17. R. 3 ; Ges, § 124. 1. R. 2. 8. 70^1, pausal form, Ges, § 51. Rem. 2 ; Stade, § 504 b, who gives other instances, viz. P5p.8.!, E'??*!, 10N*1, ^3?»1. 9. pll20. So Baer and Delitzsch, who compare Ex. 32, 6 pn~*b, Deut. 32, 11 fjni*, where the ordinary editions point (as they do here) with tsere ; see Ges, § 52. 2. R. 2; Stade, § 88. 3 a. pnvo (LXX irai&vra, with the gloss pera. 'lo-aaK toO vlov iavTrjs ; so Vulg. ' ludenlem cum Isaac filio suo')=' playing, sporting ;' cf. Ex. 32, 6. Judg. 16, 25 : pnx in Pi'el, without a preposition, being always used in a good sense. A.V. here and 39, 14 render pVK by 'to mock;' so Kimchi and some moderns, e.g. Baumgarten, Keil. Cf. Gal. 4, 29, where the apostle speaks of Isaac and Ishmael, o Kara adpKa yevvr\8els i8ia>Ke tov Kara m/eiipa. 11. miN bx* = lit. 'on account of the circumstances] then simply, 'on account of;' an uncommon expression, found again in ver. 25. Ex. 18, 8. Num. 12, 1. 13, 24, etc 12. *J7 Nip1*; cf. 48; 16 *0E> Dn3 N1p*l. Render, 'In (or through) Isaac will a seed be called for thee] i.e. 'in the line of Isaac will those descendants from thee come, who shall bear thy name, and as such be heirs of the divine promise, viz. the Israelites, who were the offspring of Abraham, chosen by God,' Kn. in Di.; cf. Rom. 9, 7. Heb. 11, 18 ; see also 17, 19. 21. 13. Construction as in 47, 21. 13, 15; cf. note on 13, 15, also Ges., § 143. Rem. 1; M. R, § 132 a. < < 14. D^O nom. non, cstr. state of non, a word which CHAP. 21, VERS. 8-l6. 203 only occurs in this chapter, perhaps so pointed (Tuch) to distinguish it from non • anger] DIZ* is perfect, ' he placed it] i. e. the skin of water. The clause is a circumstantial clause, appended without any con necting particle; cf. 44, 12 7nn ; 48, 14 73E>; Judg. 6, 19 DE"; Driver, § 163; Ewald, § 346 a; M.R, § 153; Dav, S., § 41. R. 3; Ges, § 156. 3 a. ib^n nNl is ace. after jn*l, not DE>, which at any rate would not suit the present narrative. LXX seem to have read 17*1 nN i1D3E> 7y G'V\ Kal iwe8i]Kev iiii tov &pov avTrjs to iraiSLov, but badly, as Ishmael, cf. 17, 25, would be about fourteen years old. Vulg. better, ' tollens panem ef utrem aquae, imposuit scapulae ejus, tradiditque puerum! X*nni is imperf. Qal apoc. from nyn. nyn*=yn*, then with a helping vowel S>n*, and lengthening hireq into tsere, J>n*; cf. Ges, § 75. Rem. 3; Driver, p. 52! foot-note 1 (where the analogy between the apocopatedfforms of verbs n"7 and the segholate nouns is noticed); Stade, § 545 d; cf.§489b. 173© 1N3 13103, i.e. the southern frontier of Canaan. 16. nb is ethic dative; common with verbs of motion, esp. in the imperative; cf. 17 ~\b, 12, 1,— and note on that passage,— 22, 2; D37 137, Josh. 22, 4 ; see M. R., § 51. 3. R. a. 3. "l^l pn~\Ti =' about a bow-shot off] lit. 'distant like the shooters with the bow! pm,1 is inf. abs. = ' making far ;' cf. Ex. 33, 7. Josh. 3, 16; see Ewald, § 280 a; used here as an adyerb (cf. Ges., § 113- 2; Dav, S., § 87) = ' at a distance! 204 GENESIS, ¦*intOO is participle plural, cstr. state, Pilel from nno ; cf. Ges, § 75. Rem. 18; Stade, §. 155 b; also § 279, the word only occurs here. ni03 nNIN. ,1N1 with a, as in 44, 34; see Ges., § 119. 3 b. 2. 17. Nin 1t*JN3=1t5'N Dipoa. Cf. Ges, § 138, 2 Rem. ; Dav, S., § 10. Rem. 3, and 2 Sam. 15, 21. Jer. 22, 12, and often. 18. 11 "]T* jIN ''p^nn, YA. = ' make fast thy hand on him] i. e. ' take hold of him,' which is more commonly expressed without 1*, 3 p*in>1. 19. D^O 1N3 'a spring of water! 1N3='« spring] 113 ' a cistern for rain-water.' p©ni is apoc. imperf. Hif. of npE*, without a helping vowel; cf. on ver. 15: so "jam, ver. 16, apoc. imperf. Qal of n33. 20. niyp nni ^mi. Two renderings may be noticed: (I) 'And he became, as he grew up, an archer ;' cf. Job 39, 4 133 131* D1*33 1071*; Zech. 10, 8 131 103 1311. So the Mass. and Hieron, but n31 = ¦ growing up' is superfluous after ?"!!J?!. (II) Del.5 renders, 'And he'became a shooter, (viz.) a bow-man] n#p being a closer definition of nai, and ,131= 331 (cf. 49, 23) and ,101 (cf. Jer. 4, 29. Ps. 78, 9) ; cf. 13, 8. 1 Kings 1, 1; see note on 13, 8. LXX render iyiveTo 8e TogoTrjs, but whether they read the text nE/p ,131 or nfp passing over nai; Js quite uncertain. The Vulg. takes nai = 'juvenis] 'factusque est juvenis Sagittarius] Onq. has nini NtitfjJ NJ3.1, which probably ought to be rendered, 'And the youth became an archer ' (NJ31 being Onqelos' translation of iy31 or li?*n in vers. 8. 14. 15. 16. 17) ; cf. Levy, Chald. W. B., ii. pp. 395, 400. Di. adopts the reading of Kn. CHAP. 21, VERS. 17-25. 205 nE/p ,131 ' a shooter of the bow] ' a bow-man ; ' taking 131, as Del. does =331 and 101 ; cf. the rendering of the LXX. A passage somewhat similar to this is 1 Kings 5, 29 ?3p NEO. The Itureans and Kedarenes, both descendants of Ishmael, cf. 25, 13. 15, were celebrated as bow-men; cf. Is. 21, 17. 21. |1NQ 121D3. The desert-plateau, bounded on the S. by the Gebel-et-Tih, E. by the Arabah, and the N. end of the JElanitic Gulf; W. by the Wilderness of Shur (16, 7). Northwards it extends to the Negeb and the Wilderness of Judah; i. e. up to the Wilderness of Zin (Num. 13, 21. 20, 1) or Kadesh (Ps. 29, 8). The Wady-el-'Arts flows through it; cf. with this ver. (E) 14, 6. Num. 13, 3. 26 (P). Dt. 33, 2. Hab. 3, 3, and Di. on Num. 10, 12. 22-24. 22. LXX have here and ver. 32, ml 'Oxa£o.8 6 wpfayaybs avrov, probably a gloss which has crept in from 26, 26. 23. 'And now swear unto me by God here, that thou wilt not lie unto me or my offspring or offshoot] mn is not 'these things] but ' here;' cf. 1.5, i'6 : properly ' hither ' (German, hier, hierher). 113271 ^"O^l, only Job 18, 19. Is. 14, 22 : notice the alliteration, and cf. on 18, 27. The two words always stand together ='proles et soboles] 25. n3ln1. Di. (ef. Dav, S., § 58 b) explains this on the ground that the conversation took place before the actual swearing, but one does not quite see why the writer should have used a perfect with waw (apparently weak waw, as waw consecutive seems quite out of place here) to express this, and not the perfect separated from the waw by some intervening word; Driver, § 76. Obs. The perfect here 206 GENESIS, seems to be the same as pONIl in 1 5, 6 ; cf. the note there. The text, however, may be corrupt; cf. Ges, § 112. 6 y. D^On 1N3, on the article, cf. on 16, 7. 26. Nb . . . 031 . . . Nb . . . 031 = ' neither . . . nor;' cf. Num. 23, 25 13313n N7 113 D3 133pn N7 3p D3. 29. nbNn nftna xnrc mn no. rotas has no article, it may perhaps be regarded as defined by the numeral yaE*. See Ges, § 126. 5. Rem. 1 a; Dav, S., § 32. R. 2 ; and cf. 41, 26. n2n, not 'here] but ' what are they, these seven lambs ;' cf. Zech. 1, 9. 4, 5 ; and see Driver, § 201, 2 ; Ewald, § 325 a. Compare also Ges, § 141. 3. mi3b (for the form |ni37)=n31137; cf. the rare forms Tit- : v . ' L (nearly all of which occur in pause) nJ??. 42> 36; Prov. 31, 29, and nj^S, 1 Kings 7, 37, etc.; 131, which as a separate pronoun is pointed 1|n, being affixed; cf. Ges. § 91. 1. Rem. 2; Stade, § 352 b; Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 156 f. 30. yyOi nN '13. *3, like the on recilanlis in Greek, introduces the words of the speaker. mi>7 "b mnn. n*nn does not refer to ntJ>33, but to the whole transaction, 'it shall be for a witness ;' cf. Job 4. 5- Mic. 1, 9. The number seven had for the ancients a special signifi cance as the sacred number; cf. Ex. 37, 23. Lev. 4,6; so solemn oaths were attested, either by the presence of seven witnesses (Her. iii. 8) or by the slaughter of seven animals, as here; cf. the word MfS 'to swear] probably a denom. from y3Ei 'seven' =¦' to use or call seven] so the name y3E* 1N3 may mean 'well of seven] or 'well of an oath] y3E'=nyi3E'; cf. the proper names yaE^N, y3Ei11*. CHAP. 21, VER. 26 CHAP. 22, VER. 2. 207 31. XOtl) INn is the modern BJr es-Seba' (^Jl^-o), twelve hours south of Hebron. Ruins are still to be seen there, in the neighbourhood of which are two cisterns of excellent water; cf. Sh, G., p. 284 f. 33. b'vreia, Onq. Nav*3, were perhaps inten tionally adopted for the same reason as NIE^O m X2, 6 for J17N, i.e. to avoid any reference to the sacred tree; see the note there, ad fin.; and on tree worship, Rob. Smith, Relig. of the Semites, p. 185 ff. 22. 1. Di. and Del. lender, 'And it came to pass after these things, when God proved Abraham, that he said] etc, regarding 10N*1 as the apod, and ,1D3 DM7N1 as a circ. clause. The ordinary translation which takes "3 D*,17N1 as apodosis is to be preferred, as being simpler. Cf. Driver, § 78 ; Ges, § in. 2; Dav, S., § 51. R. 1. 2. IT'm nN 'thine only one.' LXX tov dyawryrov; cf. Prov. 4, 3, LXX. According to Frankel, Einfiuss, p. 7, the rendering of the LXX was intentional, as Abraham had another son Ishmael. Isaac is called a 1*n* J3, as the son of Abraham by his own wife Sarah, not as the only remaining son after Ishmael was sent away ; all through the narrative Isaac and Ishmael are regarded by the writer as standing in a different relation to Abraham; cf. chap. 21 with chap. 16. miOn YIN. 'To the district of Moriah ;' cf. Num. 32, 1. Josh. 8, 1. 10, 41, where J*1N occurs again in the sense of 'district! ,1*10 with the article (cf. *y,1 ' At] [11*1 'for dan] J3371 'Lebanon ') is the name of the hill on which in later times the temple stood, 2 Chron. 3, 1. Jos, Ant., i. 13. 1 f. 208 GENESIS, This is the view usually adopted by modern expositors, as Del, Di, but is not without difficulties. Moriah does not appear to have been commonly used as a name for the Temple hill, which was generally called Sion. The district around Moriah could hardly be spoken of as ,1*110 pN, and Moriah itself then described as one of the mountains in this district. Well. (Comp., p. 20) supposes that the Chronicler, following Gen. 22, invented the name Moriah, and that in the Genesis text some other name originally stood ; cf. Kuenen, Hexateuch, p. 254, and Di, ad loc. Tuch prefers the view that n*lO here=the ni10 in 12, 6, near Shechem, called Judg. 7, 1 ,1110,1 ny33, on the ground of the LXX reading els ttjv yrp> ttjv vyf/rjXriv, and in 12, 6 Trpi Spvv ttjv vtyrjkty. But this Moreh was a place of no significance in the history of Israel, and too far from Beersheba to be reached in three days. Further, no great stress can be laid on the reading of the LXX either here or in 12, 6, their translation being probably a mere guess, as it can hardly be a rendering of the Hebrew text. The VSS. render variously, and throw no light on the question. Vulg. has ' terram visionis.' Onq. N3n!>13 yiN? ' land of worship! Pesh. |Ii'sLso{? U»^=pN *H0N,1, cf. their rendering of 2 Chron. 3, 1, 'land of the Amorites;' also Geiger, Urschrift, p. 278. Di., p. 292, seems inclined to think that the Pesh. may have preserved the original reading. miOn . The derivation is unknown, but seems to have been connected by a. play with ,1Ni; cf. vers. 8 and 14. For derivations of the word that have been suggested, cf. Ges, Thes., p. 819; C. P. Ges., sub voce ; also a note by Cheyne in the American Journal Hebraica, April, 1885, p. 252. It cannot mean 'shown of fah] which would be n*N10 (cf. CHAP. 22, VERS. 2-I3. 209 4. ^biLTi DYO is connected by the LXX with 17*1 in ver. 3, but incorrectly. Ntt^l is the imperf. with waw consec after a time deter mination; cf. on 19, 15. 5. n3b3. Cohortative, expressing the intention more strongly than the simple imperf. ; cf. Driver, § 49 a. n3 has here a local force, as Gen. 31, 37 (rare). < 7. "^n, also pointed *33n, and in pause *33il; cf. Dav, § 49 ; Ges, § 100. 5 ; Stade, § 380. The suffix is a verbal suffix here with the nun demonstrative ; cf. Stade, §359^4. 8. 17 nNl"* QVON^GW will provide him' etc.; cf. 41, 33 nyis ni* nnyi; i Sam. 16, i *7 i*saa *n*Ni *a, 17 E»N *7 N3 INI. 12. 'And He said, Stretch not forth thine hand io the boy, and do not do anything to him ; for now I know that thou art a fearer of God (cf. note on 4, 14); for thou hast not withheld thy son, thine only one, from me! n3tWn Nbl is almost =n3E'n N7 *3, which would be more emphatic : 1 here expresses a consequence ; see M. R, § 148 c; Ges, § 158 ; cf. its use in the waw conv. in 20, 12, * and so she became my wife;' 23, 20; Driver, § 74. nOlNO from D1NO ' a spot] ' a dot] then ' anything; ' cf. the French point. 13. 1J1N. Sam, LXX, Targ.-Ps. Jon, Pesh, forty-two Codices (Tuch and Wright) read UN, i. e. 'a single ram] rams in ordinary cases going about in flocks (Tuch), which is preferred by some, e.g. Ewald, but which is not so probable, for inN looks like an emendation of inN, and inN explains 210 GENESIS, how it was that Abraham did not see the ram before. Geiger^ Urschrift, p. 244, reads inN, regarding Isaac as the one lamb (das Opferlamm), and the ram caught in the thicket as 'the other:' and thinks, that as this view was objectionable, the reading was corrected into inN, which was again changed into inN. This however is improbable. UN is not temporal, but local = ' behind ;' cf. Ps. 68, 26; so nnn. as an adv., 49, 25, and a prep.: by, as an adv., 2 Sam. 23, 1, and a prep. thN3. Perf, so Baer and Del, 'it was caught ;' another reading is TITN3, participle, 'caught;' so Theile. "iJ5P3. So Baer and Del.; cf. anp, 2, 12. Ordinary editions point ?iaD3. Render, 'In a thicket] 14. nNl"1 7V\TP =' Yahweh sees] i.e. 'provides;' cf. ver. 8 ; SO LXX, Kvpios 'I8ev. ui IttJN. 'So that it is said (i.e. "people are in the habit of saying"), In the mountain of the Lord provision shall be made' (cf. 10, 9). "im~V = ' provision shall be made] suits the context, but is a doubtful rendering, as the Nifal does not occur elsewhere in this sense. Some render (apparently the Massor.), ' On the mountain of Yahweh He (Yahwe/i) appears ; ' but this is very awkward, and the point to be explained is not so much Yahweh's appearance (there was no real vision, only a voice from heaven) as the providing of a substitute, ver. 8. Di. renders according to Ewald (§ 332 d), ' On the mountain where Yahweh is seen] lit. 'On the mountain of Yahweh's appearing;' cf. Hos. 1, 2. Ps. 4, 8, which however gives no suitable sense; as one cannot regard it as a proverb to say, ' On the mountain where Yahweh appeared] we should rather expect nNl* "** 11 'the mountain where Yahweh appeared:' in either case the CHAP. 22, VERS. I4-2I. 211 sentence is very incomplete. The rendering 'provision shall be made ' may perhaps be accepted in lieu of a better transla tion ; the Qal clearly means ' to provide] the Nifal may be regarded as its passive, though no other instance of this use can be cited. The LXX, iv tw Spei Kvpios a "'O?- The text would be easier of explanation if n?T. at the end of the verse were pointed nNl* ; so Vulgate. 16. "O introduces the contents of the oath; cf. 2 Sam. 3. 35- Jer. 22, 24. 17. timi. The imperf. with simple waw used as a jussive, 'And may thy seed possess the gate of thy enemies ;' cf. 9, 27. 17, 2. 27, 29 ; Driver, § 134 : the ordinary construction would be the perfect with waw consee &?].; cf. ver. 18. Here pos sibly the imperf. with simple waw was chosen intentionally. ts'l**! would=' and thy seed shall] in continuation of n3lN. 18. *kpl ni>Ott5 T\L*N 3pl'=' Because thou hast listened to my voice] lit. 'as a reward for listening to] etc. lE'N 3py recurs in 26, 5. 2 Sam. 12, 6 (all). 3J5J? without 1W is used similarly, e.g. Deut. 8, 20 ('as a punishment for'). 20-24. A short notice of the family of Abraham's brother "Nahor. It is probably inserted here, as Ribqah, Isaac's wife, was the daughter of Bethuel. Nahor's son, cf. ver. 23 *. The families here mentioned can only be partially identified. 21. V1X*. Cf. 10, 23, probably to be taken in a more limited sense here (Di.). (13 is mentioned in Jer. 25, 23, together with Dedan and T6mi, and so must be sought for in the neighbourhood of 1 Di., however, thinks that 23 a rvpi-i n« l1)' 'jNinil is an insertion by R. instead of an original npn nwi pb nNl, to harmonize with 25, 2*0 (P), cf. 28, 2. 7 (P). In 29, 5 (J), Laban is the son of Nahor ; cf. notes .on 24, 15. 24. 47. 50. P 2 212 GENESIS, Edom. Elihu, Job's fourth adversary, was a Buzite, Job 32, 2. Del, Par., p. 307, compares the land Bdzu mentioned in Asarhaddon's inscriptions. DIN "UN 7N10p. 7N1Dp is otherwise unknown. In 10, 22 DIN is the son of Shem. Perhaps DIN here, as Di. suggests, was the name of a single people, DIN in 10, 22 (P) being the name of a nation in a wider sense. 22. 1C*3. It is uncertain whether 1E>3 is to be considered as the ancestor of the whole family of the D*YEO, or of one tribe of the same. ITn is very uncertain; the Arab geographers (cf. Di, p. 295) mention a fji in Mesopotamia, between Nisibis and Ras 'Ain. An Assyrian Chazu is found on Asarhaddon's inscriptions (cf. Del, Par., p. 306 f.), possibly this is the same as the 1tn in this verse. tinbo is unknown; tpT* is also unknown; 7Nin3 is unknown as the name of a place; in 25, 20. 28, 5 it is the proper name of a person. 24. llMb^CI, casus pendens, the narrative being resumed by waw conv, 'And his concubine, whose name was R'uma, she bare;' cf. 30, 30. Ex. 9, 21. 1 Sam. 14, 19. 1 Kings 11, 26; Ewald, § 344 b; Driver, § 127 a; M. R, § 132 c; Ges, § in. 2. Rem. 2 ; Dav., S., § 50 b. llMb^B. V&B, also BoVs. The derivation of the word is doubtful. It may be of foreign origin; cf. Ew, § 106. c 3. Cf. the Gk. jraXAa£ and Lat. pellex, and see C. P. Ges. sub voce. n3ta, Dm, and Wnn are all uncertain; n31*D, also n3X>0 DIN, 1 Ch. 19, 6, a district and kingdom at the foot CHAP. 22, VER. 22 CHAP. 23, VER. 2. 213 of Mount Hermon, not far from Geshur; cf. Deut. 3, 14. Josh. 12, 5. 13, n. 2 Sam. 10, 6. 8. 23. 1. niil? """TI "01*. The phrase "a **n *3E' is only found (in the Pent.) in P; so 25, 7. 47, 9. 28. 2. XOIN mip. 'Arba' city] so called perhaps from Arba', one of the giants who formed the original inhabitants of the land; cf. Josh. 14, 15. 15, 13. 21, 11. Others (Ewald, etc.) explain it as = ' Four town] i.e. 'town of the four quarters] a possible explanation of the name, perhaps favoured by 35, 27 where yaiN has the art. Here and in 35, 27. Josh. 20, 7. 21, n (P). 15, 13. (?D2) yaiN n*ip is also called Hebron — cf. Num. 13, 22 — which seems to have been the more modern name of the town; cf. Josh. 14, 15. Judg. 1,10. In ver. 19 Mamre is identified with Hebron, and in 35, 27 the town is thrice named, Mamre, Kiryath Arba', and Hebron; so that Mamre was either another name of Hebron, or must have formed a portion of it, or have belonged to it. The LXX have an addition in their text, ij io-nv iv t<5 koiAm/joti, perhaps a marginal gloss, occasioned by 37, 14 Jlian poyo. The Sam. also insert poy 7N between yaiN and N1,1. Hebron, the modern El-Halil is about eight hours south of Jerusalem, almost mid-way between that city and Beersheba. It lies in a narrow, deep valley which declines from the NW. to the SE, the town being built on both sides of the valley. The mosque, which is erected at the S.E. end of the town, encloses the cave of Machpelah. Cf. Di, p. 299 ; Bad, Pal., p. 137 f. ; Sh, G., p. 317 f. nn33b, with Ni*yt 13, 'small Caph:' there seems to be no reason for 3 being written smaller than the other letters 214 GENESIS, here, see another instance 2, 4, and the note there; cf. Strack, Proleg., p. 92, who does not, however, mention this passage or 2, 4. 3. ino 'his dead:' of common gender here, as in Lev. 21, n. Num. 6, 6; contrast Zech. 11, 9 nnon ' the dying. one! The distinction of gender in the case of a dead person being less regarded than in that of a living person (Del.)"; cf. Ges, § 122. 2. Rem. 1; M. R, § 62. nn "'33 bN. nn *33 is only found in P: in 14, 13 they are called Amorites, and in Judg. 1, 10 Canaanites. 4. Family graves were not uncommon among- the people of high rank; cf. Judg. 8, 32. 2 Sam. 2, 32. 1 Kings 13, 30, and Is. 22, 16, where Shebna the scribe hews out of the rock a sepulchre for himself. ^ffiin is characteristic of P. 6. As 17 10N7 (ver. 5) is a very unusual phrase (DiT^N 10N7 is found once, Lev. n, 1), Hitzig's conjecture '3$?OE' 17 — which is adopted by most commentators, and brings the text here in accordance with ver. 13 — seems preferable. So in ver. 15 we must read *3i1N 17. 17 then, here and vers. 13. 15, will be followed by the imperative (cf. 17, 18 with the imperf.; 30, 34 with the jussive); see Ges, § no. 1. Rem. 2 ; Dav, S-, § 134. 'Pray hear us! 'In accordance with the politeness which both parties endeavour to shew (Di.).' LXX and Sam. understand 17 as = N7 ; then the text ought to be inverted l3yOE> *31N N7, as in ver. 1 1. 0X17 N ^11*2 = ' a prince of God] i.e. belonging to God, under God's protection, and blessed by Him, and so a mighty and distinguished prince; cf. Pss. 36, 7. 80, 11. iyi3p in303, lit. = 'z'« the choice of our sepulchres] i.e. CHAP. 23, VERS. 3-1 1. 215 'in our choicest sepulchre] cf. Is. 22, 7 "]*poy inao. The usual order of the words is here abandoned, the noun expressing the quality preceding, instead of following, the noun which it qualifies; cf. Ges., § 128. 2. Rem. 1; and see also Dav, S., § 34- R- 5- nbS"1 = N73*, a verb a"V following the conjugation of a verb n"7 ; cf. Ges, § 75. Rem. 21 c; Stade, § 143 e, note 1 c(. fnO 13pO; cf. on 16, 2 ni70. 8. D3ffiOD nN tt?1 DN, lit. = ' if it is with your soul] i.e. ' if it be your intention;' cf. 2 Kings 9, 15 D3E'a3 B""DN ; Ges, § 159. 3. 5. 9. nbD30n. LXX, to o-wT/Xaiov toSlttXovv, Vulg.' speluncam duplicem] i.e. a cave with two entrances or two compart ments, from the root 733 ; but — as may be seen from vers. 17. 19, and 49, 30 — 173301 is a proper name. N70 P)D32 = ' for full money] i.e. for its full value in money; cf. 1 Chron. 21, 22 N70 f)D33 . . . )131 Dipo *7 13n, 24 N70 fp33 ,13pN ,13p *3 N7. 10. "l31 1XW "'N3 737. Cf. on 9, 10 and Ewald, § 310 a. "131 *N3 is the shorter form for D*N¥I*1 D*Na. Render as R.V, 'Even of all those entering the gate of his city] i.e. his fellow- citizens. 7 = the German namlich, ' I mean ' or ' that is to say! 11. "OyOttJ "01N N7. 'Nay, my lord, hear me! Hitzig and Maurer read »b as N17=17; cf. vers. 13. 15, and see 1 Sam. 14, 30. 2 Sam. 18, 12, which is unnecessary, as N7 suits the context better, Ephron refusing at first to receive anything for the field till Abraham presses it upon him. 2l6 GENESIS, The same politeness and apparent unwillingness to sell any thing, but rather to give it, still prevails in the east ; cf. Del. 4, p. 553, and °, p. 334. Mim is perfect of certitude, often used in contracts or promises ; cf. Ruth 4, 3 *»ys ni30 'No'omi is selling] 1 Kings 3, 13 ~b 'Tins n7NE* N7 lE'N D3 ; Is. 43, 20 13103 *nn3 *3 D*0; cf. Driver, § 13 ; M. R, § 3. 1 a; Dav, S., § 41 a; Ges, § 106. 3 a. 13. 'And he spake unto Ephron in the ears of the people of the land, saying, If only thou — pray hear me — I give the money for the field, take it from me, that I may bury my dead there! The optative sentence beginning with DN is broken off, and continued with 17 and the imperative. Olshausen supposes that some words have dropped out of the text after nnN. Hitzig ingeniously renders nrig DN, as perfect Qal of niN 'if thou art willing] which is quite suitable; but the Qal of niN occurs nowhere else, the verb being only found in the Nifal ; cf. 34, 15. LXX have iiieihi) irpos ipov el; irpos ipov=. ' on my side] cf. LXX, 29, 34 and 31, 5, and Dr., p. 182. 15. Cf. on ver. 6. The LXX and Sam. have also read N? here. 16. irtDb 131*. 'Current with the merchants ;' the art. is according to Ges, § 126. 3 a; M. R, § 68 ; Dav, S., § 22 b; cf. the shorter phrase in 2 Kings 12, 5 I3y 5)D3 'current money] i.e. such as the merchants would accept. ' People had at that time no coins issued by the State, but only bits of metal — which came into use through the require ments of trade— of fixed weights, and possibly with the weight marked on them ; these pieces were weighed to avoid any fraud,' Knobel, cited by Di, p. 298. 17. Dp'H. 'So the field .... was ensured lo Abraham ;' CHAP. 23, VER. 13 CHAP. 24, VER. 2. 217 cf. Driver, § 74 a; M. R, § 18. Rem. a; Ges, § in. 3 a. Dip in this sense occurs again in Lev. 25, 30. 27, 14. 17. 19. This use of Dip is peculiar to P. NIOO "037 = ' before] i.e. 'east of;' so *33 7y in ver. 19 ; cf. 16, 12. 18. 131 ,,N3 b32. 3 corresponds to 7 in ver. 10; it is distributive here, as in 7, 21, which compare. 19. n7D30n mil*. 17330 is only found in P ; so again 25, 9. 49, 30. 50, 13. ]113n Nin NIOO . Observe that P never mentions the NIOO *317N (13, 18. 14, 13. 18, 1), but calls the place NIOO; so 25, 9. 35, 27. 49, 30. 50, 13. 24. 2. imil Tpl='lhe old one of his house] i.e. ' the oldest ;' so 42, 13 [Dpi ' the young one] i.e. ' the youngest one;' 2 Chron. 21, 17 1*33 [Op 'his youngest son;' cf. M. R, § 81 b, and note on 10, 21. Probably Eliezer is the servant here intended. The Targ. Ps.-Jon. mentions him here expressly by name. Each large household had a servant of this sort; cf. Joseph in 39, 4. 22 (Ps. 105, 21), also 43, 16. 44, 1 m*a 7y lE'N. At a later period the office was one of the important posts at court ; cf. 1 Kings 4, 6. Is. 22, 15. "•SI'* nnn "jl"* Nj D^iy = ' place thy hand under my thigh] i.e. swear to me; cf. 47, 29, which is the only other passage where this mode of swearing is mentioned. Some (Tuch, Del.) see a reference to circumcision in these words. Others (Di.) explain — from 46, 26. Ex. 1, 5. Judg. 8, 30— the words symbolically, as invoking his descendants to maintain 2l8 GENESIS, the oath and avenge any infraction of it; cf. Di, p. 301, who cites an instance of a similar form of oath among the Bedouins in Egypt; also the following extract from the fournals qf Expeditions in North-west and West Australia, by George Grey, vol. ii, p. 342, London, 1841 : 'Genesis, chap. 24, ver. 9,' after quoting the verse from the A.V. the writer continues, ' this is exactly the form that is observed in south-western Australia, when the natives swear amity to one another, or pledge themselves to aid one another in avenging a death. One native remains seated on the ground with his heels tucked under him in the eastern manner ; the one who is about to narrate a death to him approaches slowly and with averted face, and seats himself cross-legged upon the thighs of the other ; they are thus placed thigh to thigh, and squeezing their bodies together they place breast to breast — both then avert their faces, their eyes frequently fill with tears — no single word is spoken, and the one who is seated uppermost places his hands under the thighs of his friend ; having remained thus seated for a minute or two, he rises up and withdraws to a little distance without speaking, but an inviolate pledge to avenge the death has by this ceremony passed between the two1.' Ibn Ezra in his commentary on the passage has the following: E>* ,*31* nnn 1,1* N3 D*E> OB'S N7 ,17*01 n*133 yaEO n*n p n*n 17*N1 ,17*07 tot ion li* nnn 11* din G\vh Din D*o*3 obe'o ,i*ie' *7N 3iipn •oi* nnn "p* ns d*b> *niEh3 nnN dn Dyom miBha ni,ie> *o 13isi niE>j>7 iniEh nnn *i* nsi Dyo3 i*n 7y 11*11 3Ei* jiinii .1111 pN3 Nil J**iy 03B'01 111 'Some say this refers to circumcision ; but if this were so, he would have sivorn by the 1 For this reference I am indebted to Prof. Driver, who kindly sent me a note he had received on this verse from Dr. Tylor, the Reader (now Prof.) in Anthropology at Oxford. CHAP. 24, VERS. 4-8. 219 covenant of circumcision, and not by fehovah. What appears most probable to me is, that it was a custom in those days for a man to place his hand under the thigh of him in whose service he was : the meaning would then be, " if thou art in my service, place thy hand, I pray, under my thigh ;" the master would thus be silling with his thigh on the (servant's) hand ; the meaning being, " behold, my hand is under thy authority to do thy will;" and this custom still exists in India.' 4. "'3 = ' but] after the negative ; cf. 45, 8. 1 Kings 21, 15 ; see Ewald, § 354 a (who compares the German sondern (not aber) after nichl); Ges, § 163. 1; Dav, S., § 155. Fifteen MSS. and the Heb.-Sam. Codex read DN"*3. pPETb "*D2b. When the pr. name follows the subs, the preposition must be repeated; cf. 4, 2. 21, 10. 48, 13 (an ex ception in ver. 12); when it precedes, it only stands with the pr. name; cf. 11, 31. 12, 5. 14, 16. 16, 3. 20, 14. 22, 20; see M. R, § 71. 1. Rem. a; Dav, S., § 29 a. g. 3tt.*nn. ,1 pointed with seghol before the guttural with qamec, Ges, § 100. 4; Dav, § 49. 2 d. 7. ' The God of the heavens who took me . . . may He (emphatic) send His angel before thee, and mayest thou] etc. nnpbl . . . nb©\ The perfect with waw conv. after the imperfect as a jussive; cf. 1, 14 (note), 28, 3. 43, 14. 47, 29 f, and often; see Driver, § 113. 2 a, cf. § in. 8. n^ . . . niNn Nb ONI. 'But if she does not consent, then thou art free! n*ij>3 for n*ij>3; Ges, § 75. Rem^j : the tone does not advance with 1 conv. as the verb is a n"7 verb ; cf. Stade, § 470 b. note. nNT "'ni*3tt*0. nNT without the article as regularly after 220 GENESIS, a word with a pronom. affix; see Ewald, § 293 a; Driver, § 209. Obs.; Ges, § 126. 5. R. 1 b; Dav, S., § 32 and R. 3. 3tt*n Nb. Cf. the note on 4, 12. 9. I^JIN is pluralis excellentiae, referring to Abraham ; see Ewald, § 178b; Ges, § 124. 1 c; Dav, S., § 16 c; cf. Stade, § 324 a; so 40, 1 1707 Dn*311N7, of Pharaoh; 42, 30 pN,1 *311N, of Joseph. IO. I^JIN 31D b3. LXX, dn-6 Tidvrav twv ayadav ; SO 45, 18 D*1X0 pN 310 nN; 2 Kings 8, 9 p'B>01 310 731. D'Hn} DIN. 'Aram of the two rivers] i.e. Mesopotamia, Deut. 23, 5. Judg. 3, 8. The two rivers are usually identified with the Euphrates and Tigris, so Del.6 Hale"vy, cited by Di, p. 302, takes them to be the Euphrates and Chrysorrhoas. Di. himself, with greater probability, thinks that the Euphrates and Chaboras ("^n) are the two rivers intended. n. D^Dn 1N3 bN, i.e. the fountain that is usually to be found near a town ; cf. Ex. 2, 15 ; see Ewald, § 277 a. 12. N3 nipn. 'Pray cause it io meet me;' cf. 9, 22 for the omission of the ace, and the note there; see also 27, 20 *337 ynbx nin* nipn *3. 14. 'May it be that the damsel to whom I shall say, Pray let down thy pitcher that I may drink, and she answer, Drink, and I will also water thy camels ; (may it be that) her thou hast adjudged to thy servant Isaac, and thereby I shall know that thou hast shewn my master kindness] n^ni is the perf. with waw conv., where no imperf. precedes, used as a precative or mild imperative; cf. 47, 23 noiNn nN Dnym; Deut. 7, 9 nyi*l; Driver, § 119 d; Ges, § 112. 4 b. R. CHAP. 24, VERS. 9-15. 221 niONI . . . ION "MEN. niONl is perf. with waw conv, after an imperf. with lE'N; cf. ver. 43, where the relative is avoided; so Lev. 21, 10 N701 . . , pVl* lE'N; Is. 56, 4 lE'N 1in31, . , llDE" ; Judg. 1, 12. 1 Sam. 17, 26; see Driver, p. 131. nptt'N . . . 11* 2n is a casus pendens, resumed in nnN, which stands before its verb for emphasis; cf. 26, 15. 28, 13 ; Driver, § 197. 1 ; Dav, S., § 106 c ; Ges, § 143 b. The text is to be pointed I5?3n, this word being of common gender in the Pentateuch, also in Ruth 2, 21; cf. Ges, § 122. 2. Rem. 2 and § 2. 5. Rem.; Dav, S., § 12 c ; Ewald, § 175 b; Stade, § 309 d, who regards lys as ' a remnant of an older period of the language, when the feminine ending did not exist.' The Kri directs the ordinary form to be read. n3 is not 'through her] Ribqah, but 'thereby;' cf. 15, 6. 8. 42,36. 47,26. Ex. 10, n. Num. 14, 41; Dav, S., § 1. R. 2; Ges, § 135. 5. R. 2; M. R., §63. 15. 'And it came lo pass before he had done speaking, that, behold, R. was coming out] etc. n73 DIO, the perf. after DIO is very rare (Driver, p. 32. foot-note 1), contrast ver. 45 Die n73N. The perfect after DIO is found again, 1 Sam. 3, 7 "** nN yi* DIO (if the punctuation is right), but immediately afterwards n73* DIO! ; cf. D103, Ps. 90, 2 117* , . . D103 ; Prov. 8, 25 iy30,1 D*11 D103 ; see Ewald, § 337. 3 c ; Ges, § 107. 1. Rem. 1. "l31 bNlnnb nib'* IttfN. Possibly J3 7tfin37 is a later addition to the text, which originally may have run ni7* 1E/N napp. Cf. Di. ad loc, who points out that the passive is strange and, that to describe Bethuel as 'the son of Milkah] here and ver. 24 is unusual, men generally being named after the father. Laban too, in 29, 5 is described as the 'son of Nahor] cf. 24, 48, not of Bethuel. In ver. 24 Di. GENESIS, proposes to read instead of ,1370 |3 *a3N 7Nin3, — *33N ,1370, cf. 34. 1. n03© by ni31. 'With her pitcher on her shoulder] circ. clause; Dav, S., § 138; cf. note on 18, 16. 16. nNIO n2I0. Cf. 12, n nNIO n3*, and the note there, and add 26, 7. 29, 17. 39, 6. 41, 2-6. nblm = ' a virgin] from 7n3 ' secludere] Arab. JJLT ' secuit, separavit] the maiden who lives in seclusion in her parents' home. ,107y from D7y, Arab. lie 'to be strong] 'fully ripe] = the maiden who had reached a marriageable age, puella nubilis. In noby stress is laid on the fact that the maiden is of a marriageable age, in I7in3 that she is a virgin; so here we have the addition nyi* N7 E'*N1. 19. nnitfb 173 DN IX*. 'Until they shall have finished drinking] 17a being a future perfect ; so *niai DN iy, ver. 33. Is. 30, 17 pna DnmiS DN iy; and with the fuller phrase, DN lE'N iy, Gen. 28, 15 *n*E»y DN lE'N iy; Num. 32, 17 D3N*3,1 DN lE'N ly ; see Driver, § 17; M. R, § 3. 2 ; Ges, § 106. 3 c; Dav, S., § 41c. 21. tiynno rh nNnttO UrNnl. 'And the man was watching her in silence! nNntliO is the construct state before the preposition ,17 ; cf. 13 *D11, Ps. 2, 12 ; pNa *3Bi*, Is; 9, 1 ; Pp&7 *inEiO, Job 24, 5; see Ewald, § 289 b; Ges, § 130. 1; Dav, S., § 28. R. 1; M.R, § 73. R. a. I^IDD defines iNnEto more clearly; cf. Num. 16, 27 D*3V3 1NX* ; Judg. 1, 7 D*!2P70 1*,1 D**fSpO 0,1*731,1 D1*1* ni3,13 ; Jer. 41, 6 ,1331 . , . "]bn , . , Nlfl ; cf. Ewald, § 341 b. 3 ; Dr., § 161. 2; Dav, S, § 70; Ges, §§ 118. 5; 120. 1 a; M.R, § 43- CHAP. 24, VERS. 16—30. 223 22. 012 is 'a nose ring;' cf. ver. 47, where IBN by is - added ; here the Sam. have IBN 7y DE>*1 after 17pEi0, which Di. considers the original reading. Vp2. is 'a half-shekel] it occurs once again, Ex. 38, 26. mfc*!?. 7pE' must be understood here, as in 20, 16. 23. ~p3N n"0 is ace of place, as in 18, ij which compare. 27. "131 "OTO 1113 "ODN. 'As for me, in the way hath Y. guided me! *33N, casus pendens ; cf. 17, 4. 48, 7. 49, 8; see Driver, § 197. 4; M. R, § 129; and cf. note on ver. 14. 1~113, i.e. without any mistakes, straight to the house of his master's kinsmen (or kinsman if the reading of the LXX MN be followed ; cf. ver. 48 and Di.'s proposed emendation in ver. 15) ; cf. ver. 48 nON 1113. 28. nON n^b, i.e. to the female members of the family. Ribqah, as a ,17in3, would live apart from the men, among the females of the family. 29D. fyr\ bN . . . ]37 yil. Di. regards this half- verse as out of place here [er greift in unertraglicher (durch ver. 10 nicht zu rechtfertigender) Weise dem ver. 30 vor], having been placed here, instead of after ver. 3oa (before N3*l), by a copyist's mistake. Knobel regards it as a doublet, or in ver. 30, N3*l may be explained by Driver, § 76 y, as giving a more detailed account of Laban's running. 30. DWn nN nNID. On the inf. cstr. without a subject, cf. M.R, §§inb, 117; Dav, 5", §91. R.i ; Ewald, §3043; 19, 29. 25, 26 DnN ni73; 1 Sam. 18, 19 310 nN nn ny3; 2 Sam. 17, 9 ,17nna D,ia 7B33 ; Ps. 42, 4 DIM 73 *7N 10N3. The Sam. read the more correct form inNia ' when he saw! 224 GENESIS, In Ges, § 115. 2. foot-note 1, it is suggested that the text originally was fa? rfiNia. 101* n2n. nsn, placed before the participle, as in 38, 24 mn nsn D31 ; Is. 29, 8 73N ns,11, to arrest the attention and give more liveliness to the narrative ; cf. Ewald, § 306 d ; Driver, § 135. 3. Obs. 1. The subject to the participle is omitted as in 37, 15. 41, 1 etc. See on 32, 7. 31. 'And he said, Come in, blessed of the Lord, why dost thou stand without, seeing I have prepared my house, and a place for the camels?' cf. ver. 56 ; Josh. 17, 14 31 Dy *3N1 'seeing I am a great people ;' Judg. 3, 26 lay N1,1l 'he having passed;' see note on 20, 3, and cf. Ges, § 142. R. 1. 32. Laban is probably the subject to nnD*l and |n*l, as one can hardly suppose that Abraham's servant would be so inhospitably treated that he had to unsaddle his own camels. It would be easier if the text ran N3»l (instead of N3J1), which Dathe and Olsh. prefer, but this again would require Ei*N,1 nN instead of E**N1. 33. The Ktb. is OSS'*!! 'he (Laban) set] imperf. Qal of DE»*=D!E»; cf. 50, 26 DE«*1 without Kri. But as the root DE'* does not exist, it is better to follow the Kri here BfeW ' and there was placed] impf. Hof al of &V, with pathach not qamec; cf. Konig, Lehrg., i. p. 435 f., and see Baer and Del, Genesis, p. 77. Stade, § 500 y, reads here D&5>*!, the ordinary imperf. Qal of nits'. Ewald, § 131 d, considers that the u of the passive here, 50, 26 and Ex. 30, 32 ftD** from -]!D), has been sharpened into 1. 38. Nb DN, prop. = ' if not] after a negative ' but ; ' cf. (possibly) Ez. 3, 6 IMni'E' D1*7N N7 DN; see Ges, § 149. Rem. a. CHAP. 24, VERS. 31-49. 225 nnpbl . . . "|7n . . . Nb DN. The imperf. with waw conv. after DN in an oath. So Ez. 20, 33 f. , , , N7 DN MMpI . . . *nNVMl . . . 170N; see Driver, § 115. 42-43. n^m . . . rthso . . . yfr dn; Cf. Lev. 3, 7 dn 3*1p11 . . . 3*ipO Nil 3ts,a ; Judg. 6, 36 f. . , . y*Bho ¦JE'* DN *nyi*l ; hypothetical sentences with a participle, with or without E" or J*N in the protasis, and the perfect with waw conv. in the apodosis ; see Driver, § 137 a ; Ewald, § 355 b. 1 ; M.R, § 166. 2 ; Ges, §159-3-5; Dav, S., § 130a; cf. 20, 7, and ver. 49, where imperatives take the place of the perfect with waw conv. in the apodosis; and 43, 4, where the cohortative stands in the apodosis. 46. nUJNI. The short form of the first pers. sing, imperf. in n"7 verbs is not quite so frequent as the long. Bottcher, cited by Driver (Tenses, p. 74. note 4), mentions forty-nine instances of the short form, and fifty-three of the long. In the other persons, on the contrary, the full form is very exceptional. 47. 13 bNin3 may be a gloss, cf. on ver. 15. D\L*N1 In the first pers. sing, imperf. with waw conv, the tone is not drawn back. Cf. Driver, p. 74. foot-note 2. 48. ninnt?JN1 here, and n$fN1, Deut. 1, 16. 18, are the only instances of the first pers. with ,1— in the Pentateuch. Cf. Ges, § 75. Rem. 3 e. nON ^113 'in the right way ;' cf. ver. 27. 49. 'And now, if ye are going to deal kindly and straight forwardly with my master, tell me ; and if not, tell me ; that I may turn to the right hand, or to the left f cf. ver. 42 f. and the authorities there cited. 0 226 GENESIS, 50. As Bethuel is not mentioned in vers. 53. 55 ff. the word may, as Di. suggests, be an insertion here; cf. ver. 15. 55. 112*1* IN CO'1, lit. = ' days or ten] i.e. 'a week or ten days;' cf. 4, 3 D*0* po M*l; LXX, npipas &o-el Sim. The Pesh. has ^ocaT *~1Z ' a month in days] Sam. Ehn IN D*0*; possibly, as Qls. suggests, E'ln has fallen out before 0*0*; cf. 29, 14. ~tivy=decas, 'a space often days! 56. "Oil Tirhxn nin1*!. 'Seeing Yahweh hath pros pered my way ; ' cf. 18, 16. 57. iTD jIN n7NtMl. 'And let us ask her, herself] lit. 'ask her mouth] i.e. let her speak for herself; cf. Josh. 9, 14 17NE* N7 111* *B nNl ; Is. 30, 2 17NE> N? *31. 62. ' Now Isaac had come ;' N3 is pluperf, accounting for Isaac's presence when Ribqah arrived ; cf. Driver, p. 84. 1N3 NHO N2 usually would mean, ' had come from coming to the well] etc, i.e. had returned from a journey thither. But n37 is the more suitable word for a journey. Del.5 takes N130 as=Ni3^p, r Kings 8, 65,— cf. N13J? 35, 16 and N37 Num. 13, 21, — and explains the sentence as = not that he was just returning from a visit to the Hagar well, but from an evening walk in the direction of this his favourite place, a place hallowed by a manifestation of God. Houbi- gant reads Dyo for N130, Lagarde 1N30. But against Del, and against the proposed emendations, it may be urged that one does not see why the place where he came from should be noted. One would rather expect to be told where he had come to, or where he was. Ewald, § 136 h, renders, ' er war eben gekommen nach ' (he had just come to), but how this can be got out of the Heb. text is not quite clear. Di. offers two solutions of the question ; either (I) to strike out N13D, or CHAP. 24, VERS. 50-65. 227 (II) to read 1310 from 13103, which the Samaritan and LXX have instead of Ni30. ' Isaac had come to the wilderness of Beer-lahayroi,for he lived in the south' (circ. clause; cf. note on 20, 3 and see Dr., p. 199). Beer-Lahayroi would then be the place where Isaac met his bride. 63. nlil)b variously rendered : l.'To meditate] either over his approaching marriage (Del.), or on matters connected with his flocks (Tuch) ; so LXX, dioXeo-xija-ai, Vulg. ' ad medilandum in agro ;' niE>7=n*'E>7 in Ps. 119, 148; cf. Ps. 77, 4. 7. II. The Targg, Sam, etc. render, ' to pray ;' cf. Ps. 102, 1 in'E', with n7Bn in the parallel member of the verse. III. Aq. 6pi\ijo-ai and Sym. XaAijtrai take niEv as= 'to talk! IV. Knobel and Ewald render, 'to wail or lament] comparing [l*E> in Pss. 55, 3. 18. 142, 3. Job 7, 11, etc. (see ver. 67). V. Bott, Neue Heb. Aehr., renders, ' to fetch brushwood:' the verb being a denom. from D*'^, but this denom. cannot be proved to exist from other passages; cf. Ibn Ezra, D*n*t5,n J*3 n377 'to walk between the shrubs'. VI. Ges. reads 01e6; cf. the Pesh, which has oSS,<£viN; 'to walk] and ver. 65 IIBO 1711. It is not improbable that the Pesh. has preserved the original text. If the reading be not altered to 01E>7, perhaps rendering IV. 'to lament' should be adopted, as this suits the context (ver. 67) better than I. ' to meditate! 311* niJDb, i.e. when the Oriental used to go out; cf. 3, 8 DIM mi7. 64. bDJn byO bcni ; so 2 Kings 5, 2 1 ,133101 7yO 73*1. In Judg. 1, 14 (=Josh. 15, 18) we find n3X 'to spring quickly from the ass! LXX here Kareir^Sijo-ev. 65. mbn Itt^Nn ^O. 'Who is yonder man?' cf. Ges, Q 2 228 GENESIS, § 34. 2. R. 2; Dav, § 13; Stade, § 172 b. ,1*7,1 (only here and 37, 19), cf. the Arabic is'±fi=who, which; and Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 117. f^X'Sn only occurs again in 38, 14. 19. It comes from the root 5)yx = Arabic i—ix-i, conj. 111= duplicavit, 'to lay or fold together ;' cf. Del.6, p. 345, and Dr, p. 223, who points out that Lagarde, Semitica, p. 24, holds that f)*y¥ is properly some square garment. 67. nito nbnNn . 71N with the article and ,1 of motion. The presence of the article before the noun, which is (appar ently) in the construct state, is explained by Ewald, § 290 d, as a loose co-ordination of the two words, instead of the second being subordinate to the first ; cf. 1 Kings 14,24. Di. rightly regards ION mis' as inexplicable, and considers that the words are a gloss to bring about a closer connection with chap. 23. See also, Ges, § 127. Rem. 4 a; Dav, S., § 20. R. 4. 25. 1. ntUN, not in the sense Sarah was, but a concubine; cf. ver. 6, where she is called a B^B, and 1 Chron. 1, 32. nilDp , pr. name = ' incense! 2. Many of the following tribes cannot be identified with certainty, as they have either disappeared at an early date, or become merged into other tribes. The genealogy occurs again in 1 Chron. 1, 32 ff. in an abbreviated form. Keturah bare Abraham six sons (five if we regard )10 and }*10 as one and the same). pOT, perhaps from 10T, a species of 'antelope! Knobel compares pOT with Zaftpdp, the royal town of the KtwuSo- KoXirirai, to the west of Mecca, on the Red Sea, mentioned in CHAP. 24, VER. 67 CHAP. 25, VER. 2. 229 Ptol. vi. 7, 5, but whether they are identical is uncertain. Grotius and Del.* consider the Zamareni of Pliny vi. 32 as more probable. Ittjp'* is identified by Tuch with |Op*. (10, 26) ; by Ewald with I^Q, Hab. 3, 7 ; by Knobel with the Kao-owirai of Ptol. vi. 7, 6, south of the Kinaedokolpites, on the Red Sea, but these are the Gassanides (cf. Del.5 here and Di.). P1D and pO, the best known of the sons of Keturah. D*3*10 and D*31D occur again in 37, 28. 36 as names of the same people, so that probably pO and |*10 are but different forms of the same name. The Midianites are often mentioned in the O.T. ; in 37, 28. 36 (E) they are spoken of as carrying on trade with Egypt. In Ex. 2 and 18 we find them dwelling in the Sinaitic peninsula, and in Num. 22, 4. 7. 25, 6. 17 f. 31, 1 ff. they are mentioned among Israel's enemies in the land east of the Jordan. In the time of the Judges (cf. Judg. 6 ff.) hordes of Midianites overran Palestine. They are also mentioned in Is. 60, 6 as a trading people. Their territory on the east of the jElanitic Gulf stretched from the neighbourhood of Sinai northwards to the territory of the Moabites ; see further, Di, p. 309, who suggests that the two tribes mentioned here may have been neighbours. py®'' is unknown. Fried. Del. thinks that it is Jasbuq, mentioned in the Cuneiform inscriptions ; cf. Z. K. S. F., ii. 92. ni© is mentioned in Job 2, n as a tribe in the neigh bourhood of the land of py, but otherwise unknown. Del, Par., p. 297 f. (see also Schrader, K. G. F, pp. 142 f, 222), compares the Assyrian Suchu, on the right bank of the Euphrates, between the estuary of the Belih and that of the 230 GENESIS, Chaboras; apparently accepted by Di, who also mentions another identification with the Savij of Ptol. v. 19, 5 ; cf. Di, 1. e 3. On N3tS*' and pi, see 10, 7. Probably the northern branches of these two great Arab tribes are here meant, the genealogy in these verses being more limited in range than that in chap. 10 (Di.). Of the sons of Dedan nothing further is known; see conjectures in Di, p. 309; Del.6, P- 347- 4. TlD^y occurs again in Is. 60, 6, mentioned with Midian as rich in camels, and as bringing gold and incense from Sheba. Del, Par., p. 304, compares the Hajapd of the inscriptions, a North Arabian people between Mecca and Medina. The other names do not occur elsewhere; see Di, p. 310, for conjectures about them. 8. l*ntol. Sam, LXX, D*0* y3E1 as in 35, 29. VOl* 7N FlDN^I. 'And was gathered to his people ;' cf. the synonymous expressions, "|*m3N 7N N13, 15, 15; 7N CJDN3 Vni3N, Judg. 2, 10; and "JM13N Dy 33E*, Deut. 31, 16. The phrase 1*oy 7N eiDN3 is peculiar to P; so in 35, 29. 49, 33, etc. 10. niton is in apposition to psy nits' in ver. 9. nDt?J = not 'thither] but, in a weaker sense, 'there;' so Jer. 18, 2 *131 nN ny*DE'N nOE'l; 2 Kings 23, 8 nop lE'N D*3n3n nOE» ; see Ges, § 90. 2 b. 13. Dni7in7 DnOto3. 'With their names, according to their genealogies] The two words are to be taken closely together. n"U3 the best known and most important of the descend ants of Ishmael, ' the Nabatheans! The Nabatheans dwelt CHAP. 25, VERS. 3-13. 231 in Arabia Petrea. In Is. 60, 7 they are mentioned with Kedar ; the two names also being found together on the Assyrian inscriptions of Assurbanipal (Schr, C. O. T., p. 133). Probably they are identical with the Nabataei and Cedrei, mentioned together by Pliny, v. 12. The only other notices about n*as in the O.T. are that Esau (28, 9. 36, 3) married Mahalath (called, 36, 3, Basemath), the sister of Nebayoth, and Is. I.e., that they were rich in cattle. In the history of Israel, up to the Persian period, the, Nabatheans are nowhere mentioned, but probably their name is found in the Assyrian inscriptions (Schr, K. G. F., p. 102) Nabaitai. After the breaking asunder and division of the Macedonian kingdom, the Nabatheans appear, as an important Arabian people, occupying the territory of the Idumeans in S. Canaan, their capital being Petra. After the fall of the Selucidaean kingdom they gained the supremacy in the land on the east of the Jordan, and in the Syrian Desert (1 Mace 5, 25. 9, 35), as far as the Hauran and Damascus (Jos, Ant., xiii. 15. 2), and penetrated south, not only to Elath, but for some distance into Arabia proper (Diod, 3. 43. Steph. Byz.), so that at that time they were regarded as the Arabians, on the frontier of the Syrians (Strabo, xvi. 4. 18. 21; Pliny, xii. § 73), and the whole land from the Euphrates to the Red Sea was called Nabatene (Jos, Ant., i. 12. 4). They had their own kings, and were of great repute both as warriors and as successful traders. Their kingdom was destroyed by Trajan, and fresh hordes of Arabs entered the extensive territories over which they had previously ruled. Whether these later Nabatheans are to be connected with the Nebayoth is uncertain. Cf. Di, p. 313 (from whom the above paragraph is adapted); Del.5, p. 350 f. ; see further, Di, p. 312 ; Sh, G., p. 547, cf. p. 620 f. ; Bad, Pal., p. lvi. 232 GENESIS, lip. 'The Kedarenes! A nomad tribe in the Syro- Arabian desert ; they are frequently mentioned in the O. T. in the time of the kings. In Is. 21, i6f. they are described as skilled bow-men ; Song of Songs 1, 5, as dwelling in black tents, but Is. 42, 11. Jer. 49, 31, in open villages. In Is. 60, 7. Jer. 49, 32 they are spoken of as rich in camels and flocks; and in Ez. 27, 21 as trading with Tyre. The Rabbis use the name np for Arabia in general, Up pvb being the Arabic language. bNH1N and D2HO are unknown names. 14. l*Omo is uncertain; cf. Di, p. 313 f. noil is probably different from the Duma of Is. 21, 11. and Josh. 15, 52. Wetzstein identifies noil here with the Duma in East Hauran. Di. and Del. consider it to be the AoipaBa of Steph. Byz, Domata of Pliny, vi. 32, the modern Jjj-il a-oj j = ' the rocky Duma] in the lowest-lying district of the Syrian Nufud land ; the so-called G6f (Del.), on the borders of Syria and Arabia. NtoO, usually connected with the Mao-avol of Ptol. v. 19. 2, north-east of Duma. In Assurbanipal's inscriptions, Mas'u is found together with Nabaitai and Kidri, Schr, K. G. F., p. 102 ; C. O. T, p. 135. 15. lin is unknown. Baer and Del. read lin, Theile lin, with the marg. note, lin DnnN D*1BD3, i.e. 'in other copies lin ;' so 1 Chron. 1, 30, Sam, Josephus. The Massora mentions the reading here as being nn, not lin ; cf. Baer and Del, Gen., p. 77 f. NOln is identified by Wetzstein with Taimsl, three- quarters of an hour from Duma, in the Hauran ; by Knobel with Baipol, Ptol. vi. 7. 17, on the Persian Gulf, or the Banu Taim (^o yj) also on the Persian Gulf; by Di. and Del. with NOM, a tribe mentioned in Jer. 25, 23. Job 6, 19, as CHAP. 25, VERS. 14-16. 233 traders (cf. Is. 21, i4)=*Lili', on the western border of the Negd, S. E. of the northern end of the iElanitic Gulf; also found on the inscriptions, together with the Mas'ai (Schr, C. O. T, p. 135 f.). On the inscriptions discovered at Tenia by Huber and Euting, see 5". B. A. W., 1884, p. 813 f. 11D"1 and tC^OD are mentioned (1 Chron. 5, 18 ff.) as neighbours of the tribes east of the Jordan, who made war against them and partially subdued them ; E"33 is otherwise unknown. 110*, 'the Itureans] are frequently mentioned from 105 b.c. as a wild and rapacious people dwelling in mountains which were difficult of access and full of caves. In the Roman period they seem to have been located in the hill country of Lebanon and Anti-Lebanon, but may, at an earlier date, have possessed territories further south. They were famous bow-men ; cf. Di, p. 314 ; Sh, G., p. 544 f. noip , not mentioned elsewhere. 16. Dni1I331 Dn'HSro. 'In their villages and in their encampments] i.e. who dwelt partly in unwalled villages (Lev. 25, 31. Is. 42, 11) and partly in moveable camps (Num. 31, 10. Ez. 25, 4). ',11*0 is from no, and means "a camp]' the tents being pitched in the form of a circle; cf. the modern^Ji ; see Burckh, Bed. 26] Kn. in Di, p. 315. LXX, iv Tais o-Kr)vals aiiTcov, Kal iv rdis iirav\eo-i,v avTtov. DnONb. 'According to their tribes! ,10N only occurs here and in Num. 25, 15 (both P), and is used of an Arab tribe : the word is more an Arabic than a Hebrew word, and its use here and Num. 25, 15 is perhaps, as Di. suggests, intentional. Ryssel, De Eloh. Pent, sermone, p. 71, says of nON, 'quae vox ad sermonem populi Midianitici spectat (eodem sensu dictum atque apud Scotos clan apud Arabes gum=fp)! 234 GENESIS, 1 8. nb^in. See io, 29 x- It is not the Indian Havila, but the land of the XavXoraloi (cf. iJbjja. in Niebuhr, Beschreibung von Arabien, p. 342) of Strabo, xvi. 4. 2, between the Nabatheans and the Agroeans. Thus the Ishmaelites spread themselves over the country between the Persian Gulf to the wilderness of Shur, on the confines of Egypt. D"*120 ""3D by . . . 110?. See on 16, 7. nilttJN n3N2. 'In the direction of A shur! n3N3, cf. on 13, 10. nilE'N is explained by Del.6 as meaning 'up to the lands under the Assyrian rule (bis nach den Landern assyrischer Herrschaft).' He admits, however, that a com parison with 1 Sam. 27, 8 arouses a suspicion that these words are a gloss, erroneously explaining nits', although the statement itself that the Ishmaelites' territories extended right up to the Euphrates, is quite correct ; cf. Jos,, Ant., i. 12, 4. Noldeke (Unters., p. 26) considers that nilE'N is the name of an Egyptian place, which has been corrupted in the Heb. text. According to Hupfeld it has arisen out of mis' ,13N3 (1 Sam. 15, 7) by corruption. Well. (Comp., p. 22) and Del. (Par., p. 131) think that it is an instance of dittography for 11B» iy. "OB by = ' east of ;' cf. 16, 12. 733 =' settled ;' in 16, 12 pv is used of Ishmael; cf. Judg. 7, 12 poya D*733 Dip *33 731. J9-34- 20. DIN p3=DiN nits' in Hos. 12, 13, 'Mesopotamia! ' ps in Aramaic = " a yoke," and in Arabic (where it is a 1 Del, Par., pp. 12 ff, 57 ff., identifies nb'in in all passages with N.E. part of Syrian desert; so E. Meyer, Gesch. Alterth., i. 224; Glases, Skizzen, ii. 323 ff, with Central and N.E. Arabia. CHAP. 25, VERS. I8-2I. 235 Nabathean foreign word, Gawdliqi, 112. 2) = " ploughing oxen]' and then their "plough]' so a fixed measure of land, like jugum, jugerum (Lane, p. 2353 ; Z. D. P. V, ix. 54), and is regarded by Lagarde (Proph. Chald., p. xliii) as Persian. But II. Raw, 62. 33, padanu (which as paddnu means elsewhere, according to Schrader, C. O.T, ii. p. 295, " way, path ") is equivalent to ginU (garden) and iklu (field), (compare Del, Par., p. 135), and so it might have meant "field" or "plain" in Assyrian (cf. U*»3 "depression, plain]' Ges., Thes., p. 1092). It is most probable that DIN 115? in Hos. 1. c. is the Hebrew translation of the word. In 24, 10 (J) we have D*1,13 DIN for DIN p3 (P). The LXX and Vulg. render it Mesopotamia Syriae or Mesopotamia; cf. the campos Mesopotamiae in Curt. iii. 2. 3; v. 1. 15. From this it by no means follows that the two ideas are completely identical, still less that Paddan Aram was the district round . Harran. " Still it is worth noticing that the name pB (cf. 48, 7) attaches to a place Fadddn, and a Tell Fadddn, in the neighbourhood of Harran (see authorities in Di, p. 318). That the neighbourhood of Edessa and Harran is a plain surrounded by mountains is evident from Edrisi p. Jaub. ii. 153; Wilh. of Tyrus, 10. 29. Buckingham, Mesopotamia, in'" (Kn. in Di.). DIN pB is only found in P as the name of Mesopotamia; so 28, 2. 6f. 31, 18. 33, 18. 35, 9. 26. 46. 15- 21. nm* lb inyi, lit. 'And Y. suffered himself to be prayed to] i. e. 'hearkened to him! The Nifal = ' to let or cause a thing to be done to one ' (the so-called Nifal tolerattvum) ; cf. Is. 53, 7 ,13ys NM1 ; 65, 1 MN*f03 . . . MEhlS ; Jer. 6, 8 *1D11 ; Ez. 33, 4. 5. 6 11T3 ; see Ges, § 51. 2 ; Cheyne, erit. note on Is. 53, 7. 236 GENESIS, 22. 1*££ini is imperf. Hithpo'. of pn ; see Ges, § 55. 1; Stade, § 532 a. y; cf. *113n* from 113, 177in* from 77,1. "l31 nt nob p DN=' if thus, why am I?' i.e. ' if it be thus, why do I live?' cf. D*M *7 i107 in 27, 46; so Pesh. The LXX, cl ovras [poi peXXei yiveo-daij, Iva ti poi tovto ; and so Vulg. ; hence it has been rendered, ' if it be so, why am I thus ?' i.e. pregnant; but IJ cannot be predicate, as the LXX have taken it; ,1T merely strengthens the 107, as in 18, 13 ; cf. note on 3, 13. 23. (a) 'Two nations are in thy womb, (0) And two peoples shall separate themselves from thy lap: (a) And one people shall overpower the other, (0) And the elder shall serve the younger! The answer given to Ribqah's prayer is poetical in form. 31 and i*y*f in prose would require the article ; cf. Ewald, § 294 a. DNbO ONb. On fo used in comparison, see Ges, § 133. 1 ; Dav, S., § 33 ; M. R, § 49. 2, and cf. 19, 9. 29, J9- 3°- 37> 4- 4 ij 40. 48, 19. DN7 is only found once again in the Pentateuch, 27, 29. 24. n^O** iNbO^I. ' And her days were full ;' so 29, 21. 5°, 3- OOin is contracted from D*ONf!; so nhv from nW 1 Sam. 1, 17 ; D*01 from 3*0N1 Ps. 22, 22 ; cf. Ges, § 23. 2 and 3; Stade, §111; Barth, N.B., p. 289. 25. ^IDIN, probably referring to the colour of his skin, rather than the hair; so David in 1 Sam. 16, 12. 17, 42 (all); cf. 19, 13. CHAP. 25, VERS. 22—30. 237 11*12? . Probably an allusion to 1*$? (cf. 27, 11. 23), where (36, 8) Esau's descendants dwelt. Itol* . ' Esau ' = ' hairy one! 26. 3pX*"' the author takes from 3g*j|, a denom. of 3py ' heel' =¦' heel-holder ;' cf. Hos. 12, 4. Reuss, Gesch. des A.T!, p. 52, explains Jacob as = ' sue cessor ; ' taking the root 3py as='/o be behind] 'to follow after! In 27, 36 another explanation is given ; see the note there. DnN mb3; cf. on 24, 30. 27. T2 y"V>. '1*S is ace after yi*, not gen, for then STf would be necessary,' Wright : the form 3?T, however, does not occur in the O.T. Cf. 2 Chron. 2, n 13*31 bsv yi; ; Ps. 44, 22 37 niD17yn yT, which are parallel to this passage. The pi. cstr. is used in 1 Kings '9, 27. Amos 5, 16. mt2? tt^N = ' a field man] one who spends his time in the fields hunting; but IOINI E"N, 9, 20, = ' an agri culturist! On tt^N. 'A quiet, domestic man! 'An upright man' does not suit the context here, and hardly fits in with the later accounts of Jacob's dealings with his brother. Else where Dn always =' upright] except Ex. 26, 24. Dn is here the German 'fromm] which also means ruhig (quiet), thus ' ein frommes Pferd,' a quiet horse. D^nN for Qibnx ; see Ges, § 23. 3. Rem. 2 ; Stade, § i°9- 28. V33 I"1!? "'3. 'For venison was in his mouth] i.e. was according to his taste ; cf. 27, 5-7. 30. ntn DINn DINn p. 'From the red (stuff), this 238 GENESIS, red stuff;' the words nil D1N,1 being epexegetical ; cf. M. R, § 72. 3. 31. OTO ni30. 'Sell now first of all] etc.; see M. R, § 56. 2. Rem. a, who points out the different shades of meaning in Di>3 and 3^13; and cf. Driver, Sam., pp. 24, 55. 32. ni07 f7in "03N n3n. 'Behold, I am going to die] i. e. Esau's life was a dangerous one, and he might meet his death at any moment. Tuch prefers the rendering, '/ am at the point of death] i. e. from hunger, which is not so natural (so A.V. and R. V.), and would be better expressed by no *331. 26. 3. 7Nn nmNn 73 nN, i.e. Canaan and the ad joining districts, nmN being used of the different portions of what was afterwards the land of Israel, only here and ver. 4 ; cf. i Chron. 13, 2. 2 Chron. 11, 23. 7Nn, cf. note on 19, 8. 7. intoNb = ' concerning his wife;' cf. 32, 30 nf n07 'OB*? 7NE;n 'why dost thou then ask about my name?' 43, 7. 13ni71071 137 B"N1 7NE> 71NE* 'the man asked indeed about us and about our birth-place! 8. np31 nN pnSJO. 'Sporting with R! nN pn*f = Dy pn*:, of mutual playing or caressing, and so distinct from 3 pm, where the action is not mutual; see 39, 14 (Luzz. cited by Del.4). 10. "131 Dyn inN 33C? OrOS. ' One of the people might have lain with thy wife, and so thou hadst brought' etc, lit. 'almost had one of the people;' cf. Ps. 119, 87 *3173 ayD3 pN3; Prov. 5, 14 WM 0yO3. nN3,11 is the perf. with waw conv, after oyoa ; cf. Ges, § 112. 3 a, y, Dav, S., § 57. CHAP. 25, VER. 31 — CHAP. 26, VER. 14. 239 R. 1 ; Driver, p. 133 : the tone being thrown forward on to the last syllable. Del.6, p. 361, explains the position of the tone on nN3ni as due to the y following, which would other wise be scarcely audible, comparing Is. 11, 2 nnsi (where, however, the tone on the last syllable may be due to the waw conv.; cf. Driver, §110. 5). See also ver. 22 n*7y 131, and cf. Ewald, §§ 63 c, 193 b ; so 40, 15 lOB*, before N. 12. D^ll'U? nNO. 'A hundred measures] 'a hundred fold! ~\yv in Biblical Hebrew does not occur again in this sense. In Aramaic and the language of the Mishna, iyK/, Pa'el of ~yN? = ' to reckon, estimate ' (cf. Targ. Onq. here, MliyBha nNO in 73?=' the hundredfold of that which they had estimated it (the field);' cf. Levy, Chald. W. B., ii. p. 504), and NiyE* subst. =' interest, price ;' see Levy, l.c, and cf. the Arabic JjL, 'pretium annonae] and Genesis Rabba, § 64 nii*ON,iE' nos nNO nnts'yi nniN iton.ie' 1070 .D*iyE' ino 'A hundred measures. This shews that they had estimated it, and it yielded a hundred times as much as they had estimated! LXX and Pesh. incorrectly read DpJl'E' 'barley! 'A hundred measures ' would imply that the harvest was very abundant. The neighbourhood of Gerar was very fruitful, and at the present day the Arabs have grain magazines at Nuttir Abu Sumir, a little north-west of Elusa; Rob, Pal., i. p. 562. 13. 7131 "flbn. Cf. the note on 8, 3. 713, the participle, here takes the place of the more common inf. abs. ; so Judg. 4, 24 nvp]\ 1.171 7N1E>* *33 1* 17711; 2 Sam. 16, 5. 18, 25 -]7*1 3ipi 117,1; cf. Ewald, § 280 b; M. R, § 108; Ges, § 113. 3 b. Rem. 2 ; Dav, S., § 86. R. 4. 14. ni31* only here and in Job 1, 3 ; "y is abstract for concrete, servitium= servi; cf. mi33 Is. 3, 25, and Bepaneia, Matt. 24, 45. 240 GENESIS, 15. D1N701 . . . DlOnD. Notice the masc. suffixes referring to feminine nouns ; so ver. 18. 31, 9. 32, 16. 33, 13. 41, 23 ; see Ewald, § 249 b ; Dav, S., § 1. R. 3 ; Ges, § 135. 5. Rem. 1 ; cf. also, for the instances in this verse, § 60. Rem. 6. DINbO^I with double ace, according to Ges, § 117. 5 a; Dav, S., § 75b; M.R, §45. 2. 18. QnillN "OfQ. LXX, o£ 7rai8«; so Sam. and Vulg, reading *13y, possibly from pnv* *13y in ver. 19. DIOnDI is imperf with waw conv. in continuation of nan.19. D^n O^O. 'Living, i.e. flowing water] as con trasted with still water; so Lev. 14, 5. Jer. 2, 13. 20. ptl?l* = ' strife ;' the word only occurs here. 2 1 . n30fe? = ' hostility! 2 2 . ni3I11 = ' wide spaces! Probably the modern Ruhaibe, about three hours south of Elusa, eight hours south of Beer sheba, where remains of fountains are still to be found ; cf., Robins, i. p. 289 ff. O, not = or( recitativum, but as in 29, 32. 33. Ex. 3, 12, affirmative, 'surely,' 'indeed! 12131 is perf. with waw conv. without a preceding imperf.; cf. 17, 4, and the note on 20, 11. 26. mi*1D mnNI. ntnN is a pr. n. with the fem. ending n_^, like n:ba; np'E-3, ver. 34; .n^nD 28, 9; cf. Dr., p. 236 : so LXX, Pesh, Vulg, Saad. Onq, who renders Mtoni ny*p*;, Berl. (some texts MioniO), seems t0 have taken nMN as fem. cons, state of ,1'nN, in the sense of CHAP. 26, VERS. 15-29. 241 ' a troop] ' crowd] a meaning nMN never has : and inyio as compounded of JO and yi (if we follow the reading MioniD, and not Berliner's Mtorn). myiO , only here in the Penta teuch, = 'friend] ' confidant] one who advised him, and rendered him other services ; cf. 1 Kings 4, 5. 1 Chron. 27, 33. *ny]yo has a firm unchangeable tsere in the first syllable. The LXX translate liyio by wpqbayayds ; sup posing that to be the capacity in which he acted as his 'friend;' cf. Judg. 14^ 20, LXX (Codex Alex.). Translate, ' With Ahuzzalh, his counsellor! 27. 131 D nNl. Render, ' Seeing that (or since) ye hated me, and sent me away from you! 28. IN"}, inf. abs. Qal of nNl for nNl; so folB>, Is. 22, 13; and see Ges, § 75. Rem. 2. n7N N3 Vin. The jussive is here used in making a request; cf. 9, 27. 13, 8. 18, 30. 19, 7. 30, 24. 31, 49. 44, 33. 45, 5, and see note on 18, 30. n7N = here a compact ratified by a solemn oath ; so Deut. 29, 11. Ez. 16, 59. 29. nfc?i*n is pointed with tsere, instead of seghol, under the n; so in three other places, Josh. 7, 9. 2 Sam. 13, 12. Jer. 40, 16 (Kri). In the last two instances and here, ' in order to avoid, by emphasizing the final sound of the first word, any confusion in sound with the initial sound of the next' (Del.). Cf. also Ges, § 75. Rem. 17; Konig, Lehrg., p. 531 ; Stade, § 143 e. Rem. 3, who gives other instances, e.g. Josh. 9, 24 nfrga*,; Lev. 5, 9 nxe*; Nah. 1, 3 m\ (but not Baer and Del. in their edition, who point n]33* with seghol). 242 GENESIS, 2113 pi. ' Only good] 'nothing but good ;' cf. 6, 5 yi pi; Deut. 28, 33 pmi p\W) pi- 31. VPNb tt^N. Cf. the note on 13, n. 33. ni*3tt? = ' oath! The author takes it as equivalent to ISDE5. The word is a airag Xeyop. Two accounts of the origin of the name Beersheba are given in Genesis in this ver. (J), in the time of Isaac, and in 21, 31 (E) in the time of Abraham. These are probably merely different accounts , of one and the same event.- 34. Cf. 36, 2 foil. 35. r^TlPftscriptio defectiva, fernS/Wll; cf. 19, 33 i'pfni; , 27, 1 i*i?ni. mi niO, cf. Prov. 14, 10 lE^S TV/O, = ' bitterness of spirit! LXX, r)o-av ip£^ovo-ai, but incorrectly ; so Onq. nxJTj! IJ3101 faipD = ' they were disobedient and provoking lo anger ' etc.; connecting it with niO = • to rebel! 27. 1. nNIO = lit. * away from seeing] i.e. 'so that he could not see;' cf. 23, 6, and the note on 16, 2. 3. "pbn. yn, a awa£ Xeyop., is from 17PI 'to hang;' just as \73 is from nbf, *^! from nh. The LXX, Vulg, Targ. Ps.-Jon, Ibn Ezra, etc. render ' quiver.' Onq, Peshi, Rashi, ' sword! The former rendering is preferable, being more in accordance with the context (bow and quiver are more naturally mentioned together than bow and sword) ; cf. Is. 7, .24. 2 Kings 13, 15: and the root n7n, 'to hang] suits the rendering ' quiver ' better than ' sword; ' as a sword would be girded on, while a quiver was hung on the CHAP. 26, VER. 31 — CHAP. 27, VER. 8. 243 f. T shoulders. "]*7n = the later word IDE'N, which occurs first in Is. 22, 6. nT*2. The Ktb. is ITS, feminine of TV; being what is called by the Arab grammarians a nomen unitatis, meaning 'a single head of game ;' while 1*V would be 'game' in general; cf. Wright, Arab. Gram., i. § 246; see also Ges, § 122. 4d; Ewald, § 176a; Dav, S., § 14. 3. The Kri is 1*S (1 1*n*; n Is redundant), which was probably chosen by the Massoretes, as ,11'X usually means 'provisions for a journey] e.g. 42, 25. 45, 21; or they might have pointed it 1*X here, as this word stands again so pointed in vers. 5- 7- 33- 11*X, 'a single head of game] is quite suitable here — as Isaac would not require more — and is in no wise against vers. 5. 7. 33. 4. nb3N1 "b nN'Oni. 'And bring it lo me, and lei me eat] i.e. 'and bring it to me that I may eat;' so ver. 21. 19, 20. 30,25.28. 42,2.20; see Driver, § 60 ; Dav, »£, § 65 a ; Ges, § 108. 2 a; M.R, § 1 o. 5. N'Onb. LXX read 1*3N7, ™ narpl airod; but N*317 is justified by vers. 4 and 7. 6. n33 3pX!'', 7N. 'To facob her son] i.e. her favourite child, Esau being the father's favourite; cf. 25, 28. The LXX, however, have tov vl6v avrijs tov i\dao-a>, reading [Qpn 133, cf. vers. 15. 42, perhaps on account of Esau's being called 71131 133 in ver. 1 ; cf. ver. 42. 8. "filN niSO "*2N 1ti?N7 = ' in regard to that which I am charging thee;' cf. note on 17, 20 bnynw*b'\ 'and with regard io Ishmael! lE'N includes the demonstrative pronoun ; cf. note on 7, 23. r 2 244 GENESIS, 9. "I^1S. So \M7 : the pretonic — in the construct state is unusual ; cf. Stade, § 332 d. 2 ; Ewald, § 212 b. D^O^DO DnN niLTNI. 'That I may make them [into] dainty dishes! T\vy with a double ace; comp. the note on 6, 14. 12. 'Perchance my father will feel me, and I shall be as one that mocks in his sight] etc.; cf. Driver, § 115; Dav, S., §53°- l*ni*nO is part. Pilpel, from yyn; cf. Ges, § 55. 4; Stade, § 281. yyn, like the Arab, iii,;, means 'to stammer] 'stutter] and then 'to mock;' cf. p7 and 3y7. 13. "|nbbp. 'Thy curse] i.e. the curse that shall come upon thee; cf. the note on 9, 2. Render, 'On me be thy curse!' For the omission of the verb in the optative sentence, see Ges, § 141, 3 (cf. § 116. 5. R. 2. note); M.R, § 147; Dav, S, § 133; so ver. 29. 3, 14. 9, 26. 14, 19. 43. 23- 14. N31 . . . Hp-'l. The object is omitted, cf. note on 9, 22, and add to references given there Dav, S., § 73. R. 5 ; M.R, § 34. R. b; 2, 19. 12, 19. 18, 7. 38, 18 etc. 15. monn = lit. 'costlinesses] 'costly things] ' desidera- bilia] so *133 must be understood before it. Esau's best clothes are intended, which he wore on any festive occasions ; cf. Judg. 14, 12 ff. See Rob. Smith, Relig. of Sem., p. 452 f, and cf. 35, 2. 20. N*J07 nino nt no. 'How then hast thou found it so quickly? ' lit. ' how then hast thou made haste to find it?' cf. Ges, §§ 114. 2. Rem. 3. note, 120. 2 a; M.R, §114; Dav, S., § 82. ni,10 corresponds to the adverb in English. 24. lON^I is really in point of time before 11313*1 in CHAP. 27, VERS. 9-28. 245 ver. 23. In ver. 23 the transaction is briefly described by the single word 11313*1, the particulars of the blessing being added by 1 conv. ; cf. Driver, § 75 0; so in 37, 6. 42, 21 ff. 45, 21-24. 4^, *7- Cf, however, Di, p. 329, who regards vers. 24-27* (J) as a doublet to 21-23 (according to Di. E). liDl* "'23 nT nnN. 'Thou art then my son Esau] = ' art thou then my son Esau?' An interrogative sentence without the interrogative particle n; cf. 18, 12. 1 Sam. 21, 16. 2 Sam. 11, 11; Ewald, § 324a; Ges, § 150. 1; Dav, S., § 121; M. R, § 143. nj is added to give emphasis to the question. 26. npU?1. Cf. on 2, 12. 27VJ-29 are the words of the blessing. The blessing is poetical in form : observe the parallelism in the verses, and the poetical words and forms, e.g. nNl for n3il, fiNn ^OE*, nin for n*jl, 1133 (masc only here, and ver. 37), 3*ON7. 2*1°. 'Behold, the smell of my son is as the smell of a field which Yahweh has blessed : 28. (a) And may God give thee of the dew of the heavens, and of the fatnesses of the earth, (0) And abundance of corn and wine. 29. (a) May nations serve thee, and peoples bow down to thee; Be a prince over thy brethren, and may thy mother's sons bow down to thee: (0) Cursed be those that curse thee, And blessed be those that bless thee! 28. "OOttJO, the V is undageshed (cf. 3*nfo, Jon. 4, n; DJ111330, Ez. 32, 30), as it is pointed with shewa. The word is compounded of JO partitive, and *30E', corresponding to 700 just before. 'SOf is plural cstr. from JOE*, like Q*?0p 246 GENESIS, from fop, D\?03 from 703, not from fOE\ The A.V. takes it as pi. of fOE'O, but the sense and the parallelism are against this. On fO part, see on 4, 3, and cf. 28, 11. 30, 14. Cf. the rendering of the R.V. in these verses. On the great fertility of the land of Canaan, cf. Ex. 3, 8. The dew is here mentioned instead of the rain ; as in summer, in Palestine, there is very little rain, and the dew takes its place ; cf. 49, 25. Deut. 33, 13. Hos. 14, 6. Zech. 8, 12 ; Sh, G., p. 65. Wl^n from EH* 'to take possession ;' so called as taking possession of the head or mind; cf. Hos. 4, 11. 29. inntl^l Ktb.; Kri WWB^. The Kri is preferable, as the plural precedes Opia^!): The Ktb. is possibly— as in 43, 28— an incorrect way Of writing the word. The sing. might perhaps stand by Ewald, § 316a; Ges, § 145. 7 a; Dav, S., § 113 b. nin for IM. The verb 11 n for ,1M is North Palestinian and late; cf. the Aramaic IM and J 001. The imper. occurs again in Is. 16, 4 and Job 37, 6 (with N for 1). "JON ^3 . . . "pnN7 ; cf. Ps. 50, 20, where they are again rhythmically interchanged. "[112 . . . 111N. The singular for plural; cf. Ex. 31, 14 noi* niO 1*77nO; Lev. 19, 8 Nt5>* 13iy 1*73N1 ; Num. 24, 9 iliN THN1 1113 1*3130; see Ewald, §319 a; Ges, § 145. 5; M.R, §135. 4b; Dav, S., § 116. R. 1. 30. npiT N2P N2T ^N. 'Jacob having only just gone out] circ. clause prefixed, not appended, and preceded by the introductory formula *i*i. See Dr, § 165, and cf. 15, 11- 24, 15- 42, 35 ! Josh. 4, 18 D*3131 *731 ni33 lpns 'the soles of the feet of the priest having been withdrawn ;' 2 Kings 12, 7b n*31 p13 nN 3*3,13,1 lptn N7 ' the priests not having CHAP. 27, VERS. 29-36. 247 repaired the breach in the house;' Ges, § in. 2. R. 1, cf. §164. ib. note; M.R, § 154; Ewald, §3410; Dav, 5, §141. 31. b3N"1 is imperf. with weak waw in a jussive sense; so lnnE'*l, ver. 29; see Driver, § 134. // 33. 131 TTTin . . . Uni, so ver. 34 "131 npyx pyvi; the verb being followed by a substantive derived from it in the ace; cf. Matt. 2, 10, and see note on 1, 11. 12n Nin N13N "O = ' who then is he, the one that hunted?' cf. Ps. 24, 10 11331 170 IT N11 *0 ' who then is this one — the king of glory ?' Zech. 1, 9 17N ,101 IO 'what are they — these?' Nil N13N *0 anticipating the subject; see Driver, § 201. 2, and note on 21, 29. N3"1 1"2 12Jn. ' Who hunted game and brought it;' cf- 35, 3 M*1 . . . MN nsyn ; 49, 17 73*1 . . . 1B>3,1. The par ticiple breaks off into the imperf. with waw consec; a fact being stated, not a possibility, in which case we should find the perf. with waw consec; cf. Driver, § 117; M. R, § 15; Ges, § 116. 5. Rem. 7 ; Dav, S., §§ 50 a, 100 e. 34. pX?2T1 . . . yOt!?3 is either to be explained as 19, 15 by Driver, § 127 b, the imperf. with waw conv. after a time- determination, or the word M*l must be supplied with the LXX, Sam.; so Tuch, Di. Ml might easily have fallen out after ,1M* at the end of ver. 33. Hitzig emends as follows (his emendation being accepted by Geiger, Urschrift, p. 377), *1*1 : -Jil3 D3 M313N1. Cf. also Dav, S., § 51. R. 1. "DN D3 "D312. Cf. 4, 26 NM D3 nE>7 ; Num. 14, 32 DnN D3*13S1; see Ges, § 135. 2 a, and the note on 4, 26. 36. ' Is it that they have called his name facob ? for he hath supplanted me now twice] etc.; cf. 29, 15 nnN MN *3,1. LXX, AiKalws iKXrjBrj ; Vulg. ' juste vocatum est nomen ejus ;' cf. Ges, 248 GENESIS, §150.2. Rem. 1; Dav, S., § 126. R. 3; M.R, § 143. Rem. b; Ewald, § 324b, who remarks that *31 'is used when the reason is unknown '= the Lat. numquid, Ger. etwa. In 25, 2 6 another explanation of the name is given. D^OXTB nt; so 31, 38. 41. 43, 16. 45, 6. Deut. 8, 2 ; cf. Ges, § 136. Rem. 3; Dav, S, § 6. R. 2; M. R, § 91. 37. 1"n30D, with a double ace; see Ps. 51, 14 nm *330Dn na*is; so iyD, Judg. 19, 5 on? ns 137 nyD; cf. Ewald, § 283 b (2); Ges, § 117. 5 b.0; Dav, S, § 75 b. n37 , scriplio plena for Ip , only occurs here in the Penta teuch; cf. na*N in 3, 9 for 1*N ; Ps. 141, 8. 38. n313n, see on 34, 31 ; and cf. Ges, § 16. 2. 2. 39. "OOtt/D, not 0 partitive as the A.V. margin, nor cstr. plural of fOE'p as A.V. and M. R, § 136. Rem. a ; cf. ver. 28, because 700 in the second half of the verse is against this, but privative (so most modern scholars). ' Away from the fatnesses ;' cf. vers. 37. 40, and see Dav, S., § 101. R. 2. Render, ' Far from the fatnesses of the earth be thy dwelling-place, And far from the dew of heaven from above] Other instances of IP privative are Num. 15, 24 niyi *3*yo ' out of sight of the congregation ; ' Prov. 20, 3 3*1D ' away from strife;' Job 11, 15 DIOO ' without blemish! The sterility of Edom is here contrasted with the fertility of Palestine ; so ver. 40, 'And by thy sword shalt thou live, and thy brother shalt thou serve ; And it will be, when thou rebellest, that thou wilt break his yoke from off thy neck! CHAP. 27, VERS. 37-40. 249 40. "pin 7l*, i.e. the sword is conceived of as the means of procuring the necessities of life, or as the basis on which Esau's life will rest ; cf. by in Deut. 8, 3 1137 Dn71 7y ; Is. 38, 16 IM* Dn*7y. Tin. The root 111 occurs four times in the Old Test, twice in Qal, Jer. 2, 31. Hos. 12, 1, and twice in Hif, here and Ps. 55, 3. Ill is the Arab, s\j, conj. I. 'to go lo and fro;' III. and IV. 'to desire, long for ;' 'to strive after, wish! In Hebrew the root means * to wander about unrestrained] a meaning which suits Hos. and Jer, loc. cit.; Judah being described (Hos. 12, 1 11 iy) as still wandering about with regard to God, i.e. independently, of his own free will, with drawing himself from God; so Jer. 2, 31 1311 'we have wandered about] i. e. abandoned God. In Ps. 55, 3 1*iN M'EO (where the Hif'il is used) the meaning is slightly different, 'I wander to and fro in my meditation] 'I am tossed about by anxiety and care! Del. and Kn. render here, 'when thou roamesl about] but this is unsuitable, as a yoke would not be broken by roaming about, nor could a person under a yoke be well conceived of as roaming about at will. 1E'N3 in this case would be like Num. 27, 14. Tuch renders, ' when thou rebellest ' (cf. Jer. and Hos, 1. a), to which Di. objects that, every one who is undera yoke rebels, but does not get free ; but this is not conclusive against Tuch's rendering. Di. prefers the rendering, ' when thou makest efforts or strivest;' cf. j^ IV, the meaning being, 'when thou, though in bondage, strivest to become free, thou shalt break off the yoke from thy neck, and attain thy desire.' The A.V. renders, 'when thou shalt have dominion' (so Kimchi; cf. Ges, Thes., p. 1269 a), as though 1*m were from nil, but this is impossible. Other renderings are, 250 GENESIS, 'when thou shalt wish;' 'when thou shalt bewail] both extremely doubtful. The Versions seem to have misunder stood the word. Onq. renders it by "131 Mi33 J1i3*y* 13 ' when his sons transgress ' etc, probably a paraphrase. Pesh. has »aoU .jo 'and if thou repenlest ;' but how they get this out of Tin is not clear. LXX have qvuca idv Kadi\r)s, probably connecting it with 11*, Hif. 1*111 . The Vulg. has a free paraphrase, ' tempusque veniet cum excutias, et solvas jugum ejus] etc. The Heb.-Sam. has 11Nn, Nif. of UN ('when thou becomest great'), for Tin, so the Book of Jubilees (Di.). The best rendering seems to be either Tuch's or Dillmann's. The R.V. renders, 'break loose! For the fulfilment of the blessing, cf. 2 Kings 8, 20 ff. 16, 6. 41. "3N blN ''O'* 13ip\ Render, 'The days of mourn ing for my father] etc, i.e. Isaac would soon die (cf. ver. 4 and ver. 7), and then Esau contemplated taking vengeance on Jacob ; *3N being obj. genit. Others, e. g. Luther, Kalisch, render as genit. of the subject, 'days of grief for my father] i.e. Isaac would grieve when he heard of Jacob's death. But the genitive after 73N is always obj. genit. See on 9, 2. 42. 'And they told (lit. it was told) Ribqah the words of Esau;' on the construction, cf. the note on 4, i8~. DTCnO . ' Will revenge himself upon thee] lit. 'procure for himself satisfaction, or ease (viz. by taking revenge) ; ' cf. the Nif. DnSN in Is. 1, 24. 44- D^inN O^OV 'A few days] lit. ' some days;' cf. 29, 20 D*inN D*0*3; Dan. n, 20 D*inN D*0*31. 'Ribqah mentions a short time in order to persuade Jacob more easily,' Di. D*inN 0*0* is ace of time in answer to the question 'how many?' cf. 7, 4. 24. 14, 4. 15, 13. 21, 34, and see Dav, S., § 68 b ; Ges, § 118. 3 b ; M. R, § 42 a. CHAP. 27, VER. 41 CHAP. 28, VER. 6. 251 45. n3tt?1 . . , 31tt>" 11*. ' Until thy brother's anger turn . . . and he forget ; ' cf. Dr., p. 134 ; 18, 25 n*ni . . . n*on7, and the note there. 100 . , . 31E* iy may be a doublet to 44b. Cf. Di., p. 332. These words certainly seem superfluous. D3"Dl?J 03; cf. Prov. 17, 15. They would both perish, as the murderer would (9, 6) be put to death. 28. 2. DIN n"12. The construct state with 1 local ; cf. on t— ,tjv- 20, 1. The syllable 1_ is pointed with orthophonic Ga'ya (cf. Ges, § 16, 3), so that its sound may be kept distinct from that of the following N in DIN; cf. 44, 2 ^Mn y*33 ; 11, 25 niE'SJ-yEM (Baer and Dell ed.) ; see also Stade, § 56. ,1313=1313; cf. n^>D=nk>; and see Del, Comm., Ps. 3; 5th ed, p. 78. 3. n^m . . . ~[nN *p3''. The perf. with waw con secutive, after the imperf. as a jussive; cf. on 1, 14. 5. Cf. Hos. 12, 13 din nits' 3py* m3*i. 6. nbt*jl. We should expect here rOV"1); no adequate reason can be given for the use of the perfect with waw here, where the imperf. with waw cons, would be expected : pos sibly the present reading has arisen through * having dropped out between 1 and V. See Driver, § 133. Di. explains it on account of its being dependent on *? , but this would require the waw conv. with the imperf. when another perfect had preceded, as already yoE"*! in ver. 7. 1!T1 . . . 13133 . The imperf. with waw conv. continuing an inf. cstr, a fact being stated; cf. Driver, § 118 ad fin. So 252 GENESIS, 39, 18 NipNl . . . *0*113; see also Ges, § 115. 3. Rem. 1 ; Dav, S, § 96. R. 2; M.R, § 120. 9. nbnO. In 36, 3 npts»3 (cf. the note there) is the name of the daughter of Ishmael whom Esau married. I^CJD by—'in addition to his wives] i.e. the wives men tioned 26, 34; so 31, 50 M133 7y D*E>3. Verse 9 forms the apodosis to ver. 6 ; yt>V>), ver. 7, being dependent on *3 . . . N1*1 , ver. 6, and N1*1 , ver. 8, resuming the Nil of ver. 6. 11. OlpOn I'^BI. Dipo with the article =' the place] i.e. the place that was suitable for passing the night. Di. renders, 'the sanctuary ;' cf. on 12, 6; but see Dav, S., § 21. R. 2. Ges, § 126. 4, mentions both ways. DlpOn ,,23NO. 'Some of the stones ;' IP partitive as in 4, 3- VntJJNID = ' at his head! IMiE'Nip for lMIE'NlO ; cf. l*rfy:?no for lMlynfip. The plural is the plural used to mark extension of space (as here) or time; see Ges, § 124. ia; Dav, S., § 16; Stade, §313^ 'The feminine plural being used, according to Stade, § 322 c ('single things in which a definite quality appears'), niEiN1D='//5a/ which is at the head] just as ni7310= ' that which is at the feet ; ' cf. nioyOD and nisiyo 'dainties ;' niN7B3 'wondrous deeds! 12. D7p from 77D, with the ending D_; as in D^lN from 71N, D33 ; Cf. Stade, § 293 ; Ges, § 87. 1 d. This ending is more frequent in proper names, e.g. D*iO, DMN, D^iy, Dj6a, O"joy. Cf. Barth, N.B., p. 353. D7D is a &na£ Xeyop. It may perhaps occur in Phoen, cf. C.I.S., i. p. 103 (Inscrip. of Idalion 88). Barth, however, N. B., p. 23 f, cps. the Arabic pL~, and maintains the D is a radical and not an afformative ; CHAP. 28, VERS. 9-19. 253 he also thinks that D in 333 is radical, and that D71N is a technical word of foreign origin; cf. p. 352. nO"Offin . . . 1tt?N11 . ' With its top reaching heaven wards ;' cf. 11, 4, and see note on 18, 16. 13. Vbl* 222. 'Standing on it' (the ladder). LXX, «V airijr; so Vulg, Pesh. Tuch, Del. and Di. render, 'standing by him' (Jacob), which perhaps is better (cf. 18, 2), as one does not see why it should be said that Yahweh stood on the ladder, while the thought, ' Yahweh stood by Jacob,' is more natural ; and if l*7y referred to D7D, we should expect 17, or 3py*7, after 1DN*1. 14. nnaDi . . . noipi ; cf. on i, 2. ^ T ' T 15. "mi DN IffiN 11*. ' Until that I shall have done] lit. ' until that when ;' cf. on 24, 19 and Num. 32, 17 DN lE'N iy D3N*31; Is. 6, 11 D*iy 1NE* DN lE'N iy. 16. "'TO'T N7 "3DN1 = ' without my knowing it] circ. cl.; cf. Driver, § 160; see on 24, 31. 17. N11D no. 'How dreadful I' cf. Ps. 8, 2 1*1N ,10 'how glorious!' Num. 24, 5 1*71N 130 no ' how goodly are thy tents] etc.; see M.R, § 93. Rem. c; Dav, S., § 7 b ; Ges, § 148. 19. 7Nn"U is situated to the north of Jerusalem, in the Judean plateau, which continues about ten miles to the north of Jerusalem, before it breaks into the valleys and mountains of Samaria. It stands about three miles from the end of the plateau, where three roads concentrate : a highway from the west by Gophna, the great north road from Shechem, and a road from the Jordan Valley through the passes of Mount Ephraim. Sh, G., p. 290. The statement .that the former 254 GENESIS, name of Bethel was Luz (35, 6. 48, 3. Judg. 1, 23 ; cf. Jos. 18, 13), probably only implies that the more modern Bethel was situated near the ancient Luz; cf. Di, p. 337. See also Bad, Pal, p. 213, where it is suggested that Bethel may be identified with the modern B§tin. 20-22. The apodosis commences with *7 nin* 1M1 at the end of ver. 21. Render, ' If God be with me, and keep me on this journey which I am going, and give me bread to eat, and raiment to wear, and T return safe and sound to my father's house, then shall Yahweh be my God, and this stone] etc.; so LXX, Pesh, Vulg, Di, Del, Dav, S., § 130 c; and this division is more natural than that proposed by Tuch, who commences the apodosis with ver. 22. Cf. Driver, p. 130, on the perfect with waw conv. after an imperf. with DN. 29. 1. The LXX add after Dip *33 1V1N, irpos Ad0av tov vlbv Ba8ovtjX tov Svpoy, d8eX(pbv fie 'Pe0eKKas, ptjrpbs 'Iokoi0 ko.1 'Hcrai, probably a gloss to harmonise this passage with 28, 5; the expression Dip *33 ,1X1N for Mesopotamia — which is only found here — being in itself more or less indefinite. 2. 'And he looked up, and behold a well in the field, and behold there, three flocks of sheep were lying by it ; for out of that well they used to water the flocks] etc. 3. 'And all the flocks used to be gathered thither, and they used io roll away the stone from off the mouth of the well, and water the sheep, and bring back the stone upon the mouth of the well io its place! Observe the tenses, which are instructive. The participle D*V31, ' were lying] describing the condition at the particular CHAP. 28, VER. 20 CHAP. 29, VER. 7. 255 occasion, the frequentative imperfect IpE**, and this followed by four perfects with waw conversive, 1SDN31, 17731, lpEMI, 13*Eini , describing what used habitually to be done ; cf. Driver, §§31; 113. 4 0; M.R, §25; Ges, § 112. 3 a. a ; Dav, S., § 54 b, and note on 2, 6. *)ptt?'*. The indefinite, unnamed subject expressed by the 3rd person pi. of the verb. See Ges, § 144.3b; Dav, S., §io8b; M.R, § 123, and cf. 26, 18. 35, 5. 41, 14. 49, 31. nbl12 13Nm . 'And the stone on the mouth of the well was great] lit. ' and the stone was great on the mouth of the well;' ,17113 without the article, and therefore predicate; so in ver. 7 7113 D1M Hy ;i ; cf. Ges, § 126. 2 i ; Dav, S., §§19, 103; M.R, § 125. INnn "0 by nbll3 pNni, i.e. 'the stone on the mouth of the well,' etc, which in the more common con struction would be 1N31 *3 7y lE'N |3N1 171131 ; cf. Mic. 6, 12 D1*33 n*Oi DSlE^l . With these two verses cf. 24, 11 ff. Ex. 2, 15 ff. (where, however, the tenses are different, a single occasion only being described). 4. ''nN =' my friends I' cf. 19, 7. < 6. nN3 = ' is coming] participle not perfect ; in ver. 9 nN3 is accented on the penult, and is therefore the perfect. 7. nOpOn fpNn ni* Nb. ' It is not lime for the cattle lo be gathered together] lit. ' it is not the time of the being gathered together of the cattle] i.e. for the cattle to be collected and put up for the night. On the construction of the inf. cstr. with a subj. following and a construct state preceding, cf.Ges, §§115. 2; 114. ib; M.R, §§ in, 117, 118; Dav, S., §§ 90 b, 91. 256 GENESIS, 8. Dn111*n b3. The LXX have 7raW-ar tovs noipevas, reading D*yin~73, an easier reading than that of the text; so the Sam. here and ver. 3. iD^pffinl . . . Ibb3l . . . 13DN"1 1tt?N iy. The impf. continued by the pft. with waw conv, as in Ex. 23, 30 iy pNi nN n7nsi msn lE'N; Hos. 5, 15 *ss 1E931 ioe'n* lE'N iy, and often; cf. Driver, p. 135; Dav, S., § 53 b; Ges, § 112. 3 c. a. 9. nNa bnn . . . imo 13111*. Cf. on 19, 23, and see also Ges, § 116. 5. Rem. 4. IT3Nb 1©N. b lE'N to express the genitive, as in 40, 5 D*iSO 1707 lE'N n3N,11 nptsni; 47, 4 1*13y7 lE'N JNX7; see Ges, § 129. 2 ; M. R, § 83 ; Dav, S, § 28. R. 5. n. 3P1*"1 ptt?1. pSSO (ver. 13) Pi'el = ' to kiss fondly] or ' cover with kisses] as distinguished from the Qal P^J (here) ' to kiss ; ' cf. (/ji\e'a> and KarafaXia in Greek. 13. 3py VOti? nN. LXX, t'o Svopa 'iaKi>0; so LXX in Num. 14, 15. 1 Kings 10, 1, possibly confusing ynv with DE*, which was very similar in sound. 14. D^O1* tt?'in. 'A month, days] i.e. a whole month; cf. 41, 1 D*0* DMSE* 'twoyears;' Num. 11, 20 D*0* E>in : D*0* being in apposition to Enn ; see Driver, § 192. 1 ; Ewald, § 287 h; Ges, § 131. 2 c; M. R, § 71. 4; Dav, S.,% 29 d. 15. 131 "nN "3n. Cf. 27, 36. 'Art thou, as a brother, to serve me for nothing ?' lit. ' is it the case that thou art my brother, and shouldest serve me for nothing?' cf. the Vulg. ' num quia frater meus es, gratis servies mihi?' On *3ni3yi, perf. with waw conv. after *?, without an imperf. preceding, cf. Driver, § 123 y; Ges, § 112. 4 c; Dav, S., § 56; M. R, § 26. CHAP. 29, VERS. 8-23. 257 17. ni3l nNb "rin. The predicate in the plural with the subject in the dual, as the dual in Hebrew only occurs in a few nouns, never in the verb or adj. (contrast the Arabic) ; see M. R, § 134 ; Ges, § 145. 6 ; Dav, S., § 31. ni3l. ' Weak] lit. 'tender] neither bright nor clear. So LXX and Pesh. But Onq. and Saadiah take ni3l as meaning ' beautiful] as though Leah had fine eyes, but otherwise was not so handsome as Rachel. Good eyes were considered by the Orientals one of the essentials of beauty; cf. 1 Sam. 16, 12. Song of Songs 4, 1. 18. D"DU? 5f3tt?\ Jacob wished to purchase his wife by seven years' service without hire, the seven years' service taking the place of the ordinary price (HO) paid the wife's relatives before marriage; cf. 24, 53. 34, 12. 1 Sam. 18, 23 ff. Hos. 3, 2. 19. 131 "jlil 310. ' It is better for me lo give her to thee, than for me to give her lo another man ;' cf. Ex. 14, 12 137 310 *3 iaiD3 lsnoo d*iso nN i3y; Prov. 21, 9 33 nss by naE^ aio "131 D'SHO nE'NO: see note on 25, 23, and for inf. cstr. as subj. in nominal sentence the note on 2, 18. So Judg. 18, 19. 1 Sam. 29, 6. Ps. 118, 9. etc. inN tt?"Nb, i.e. a stranger; cf. Jer. 6, 12. 8, 10. At the present day in Arabia the cousin is preferred as a husband to a stranger ; cf. Lane, Manners and Customs, vol. i. p. 167. < 21. "n2?N nN n^n. nan is accented on the last syllable, on account of the light consonant N in nN, that both ,1 and N may have their full sound; cf. n07, 27, 45. 22. nntt?0, i.e. the wedding banquet; cf. Judg. 14, 12. Tobit 11, 19. 23. The bride was brought to her husband veiled (cf. 24, s 258 GENESIS, 65), and so the deception practised by Laban could easily be accomplished. 26. 131 nto^ Nb = ' it is not customary in our land] lit. ' it is not wont thus to be done ; ' imperf. as in 10, 9 ; see note on that passage, and cf. 50, 3. Ex. 13, 15. 33, 11. Judg. 14, 10. 2 Sam. 13, 12. 27. nNT yyQi. The wedding festivities usually lasted a week; cf. Judg. and Tobit, l.c. nDnil, i.e. Laban and his relatives; cf. 24, 50. The LXX and Sam. read [nNl. 30. bm bN D3. D3 ='also;' the second D3 in nN DJ 7m may either emphasize Rachel only (see Ges, Thes., p. 294), or may be taken with \0 = 'etiam] 'still more than] which is perhaps a little forced. Di. condemns both ways as against the usage of the language, and following the LXX and Vulg, rejects the second D3. Knobel takes the second D3 withaiN'l, i.e. did not only go in to her, but also loved her: but this would require 31N D3 31N*1 ; cf. 31, 15. 46, 4. nNbO . . , ^nN^I . On the comparative, see note on 25. 23. 31. nNIDC?, not absolutely 'hated] but relatively 'less loved;' cf. Deut. 21, 15. Matt. 6, 24. 32. "3 niON. *3 as in 26, 22; cf. the note there; so ver. 33. "1'12l*3 . . . nNl. 3 . . . 1N1=7o look upon with compas sion;' so 1 Sam. 1, 11 inoN *sya nNin nNl DN; Ps. 106, 44 3^7 1V3 N1*l. ^nN"; cf. 19, 19 and the note there. 33- pl>Oti? = ' hearing! CHAP. 29, VER. 26 CHAP. 30, VER. 6. 259 34. ''bN . . . nib"*. ' Will become attached to me;' cf. Num. 18, 2. 4. *17 as though =z' attachment' or 'dependent! Nip. As the mother in the case of the other three sons, Simeon, Reuben, and Judah, gives them their names, so probably the reading of the LXX (Lagarde), iKd\eo-e (but Swete reads exXijdq), Pesh. L'to=1Nlp, is correct. Nip would = ' one called him] 'people called him! 35. niln"* = 'praise] ' a subject of praise! A Hof al derivative; cf. Pss. 28, 7. 45, 18. Neh. n, 17, where the 1 of the Hif. of 11* (ill) is irregularly retained. For proposed explanations of the proper names at the end of this chapter and in the first part of chap. 30, cf. Di, p. 342 f. 30. < 1. nnO; cf. on 29, 6. 2. ^JN DTlbN nnnn. 'Am lin God's stead?' i.e. am I all powerful, so that I might give you children? so again 50, 19 (*3N); cf. 2 Kings 5, 7 n*017 *3N DM7N1 m*n,i7i. 3. "313 by; so 50, 23 e|DV '313 7y; cf. Job 3, 12. Rachel follows Sarah's example (16, 2), and gives her maid Bilhah to Jacob, so that she might rear up her (Bilhah's) child as her own, and in some measure escape the reproach of childlessness; cf. Stade, Z.A.T.W., vi. p. 143ft". 6. 1^1 with the tone-syllable doubled; so ^ngari , Job 7, 14; cf. Stade, § 71. 3. H = 'judge! God heard Rachel's prayer, and decided (pi) according to her wish. s 2 260 GENESIS, 8. 0V!7N "7lnDD=lit. 'struggles of God] i.e. struggles or wrestlings for God's favour; cf. ver. 6. 29, 31. 30, 2. The R. V. renders, ' with mighty wrestlings] i. e. for the husband's love : but the sisters were never rivals for the husband's love (cf. 29, 33 and ver. 15 of this chapter), as Rachel was always the favourite wife of Jacob. *7*J1§3 is a &ira£ Xeydp. and the only noun of this form ; see Stade, § 251; Barth, N. B., p. 156. "br\Si = ' one obtained by struggling' (?). Di. Kampfmann ('man of combat' or ' struggling '). 11. 133 = the Kri 13 Na 'good fortune comes;' so Onq. and the Pesh. (uj^j, )tf ' my fortune cometh'): but this reading of the Kri is unnecessary. The Ktb. 133, pointed 133 (LXX, iv Tvxn; Vulg. feliciler') — the pausal form of 13 — yields a good sense, ' I am in luck;' cf. *1EiN3, ver. 13. 13 (cf. Is. 65, 11, where it is the Babylonian god of good fortune, identified with Bel, and later with the planet Jupiter) was the name of an old Phoenician and Canaanitish god. Traces of the name are still preserved in the proper name 13 7ya, Josh. 11, 17, and the Phoenician proper names nyi3, Dysi3 ; see Euting, Sechs Phonizische Inschriften aus Idalion, p. 14 (1875); and cf. C.I.S., i. p. no, line 3, and Bloch, Phoenisch. Glossar, p. 25. The A. V. (but not the R. V, see Driver's paper on the Revised Version in The Expositor, July, 1885) and Gr. Ven. (rJKci o-Tpdrevpa) give 13 the meaning of ins ; cf. 49, 19. But 13 never means 'a troop] and 49, 19 is not decisive on the meaning here. 13. "1tt?N3 = '/» my prosperity !' i.e. I am in luck; cf. ver. n. ''JllttJN "3 . ' For the daughters are sure to call me lucky;' CHAP. 30, VERS. 8-15. 26l cf. Is. 11, 9 iyi pN,1 1N70 *3; Jer. 25, 14 D3 113y *3. The perfect of certitude or prophetic perfect; cf. Dr., § 14/3; Ges, § 106. 3 b ; Dav, S., § 41 a; M. R, § 3. 1. 1tt?N = ' the happy one ; ' cf. IIE'n ? ' the goddess of good fortune! 14. D"N111 is pi. of 'ill, obsolete; cf. niN77, from an obso lete singular v17 , *__ of the singular being softened into N in the plural; so *bn, pl. D*s6n; *3if, pl. niN3? and 3'N3J/; MS, pi. D*^1; cf. Stade, §§ 122, 301a. D'NIll = ' love apples] i. e. the fruit of the Mandragora vernalis, or mandrake, of a yellow colour, and similar in shape to an apple; found in Palestine, especially in Galilee. There seem to have been two kinds of D*N111, the Mandragora vernalis and autumnalis (Song of Songs 7, 14), unless we suppose with Tuch that in this passage the fruit is intended (at the time of the wheat harvest, i.e. May to June), while in Song of Songs the blossom is meant (cf. the LXX rendering in Song of Songs, oi pavhpaydpai, with their translation here, prjXa pavSpaydpov). On the supposed efficacy of the D*N111 as love potions, see Tuch, p. 385 f, and the authorities cited by him. 15. 'Is thy taking away my husband a little thing, and (art thou) for taking away the love apples of my son too?' cf. Esth. 7, 8 1370,1 nN E1337 D3n; 2 Chron. 19, 2 1ty7 yEH71. nnp71 is not perf, so Tuch, but inf. cstr. used as a peri phrastic future ; see Driver, § 204 end, and cf. Dav, S., § 94. There is no reason to alter the nnp71 into the 2 sing. fem. perf. with waw consec. as is suggested in Ges, § 114. 2. Rem. 5. Di. remarks that 'the inf. nnp71 ("and to take"= " and thou wilt take" ?) expresses the intention more forcibly But cf. Baer and Del, Liber Psalmorum, Lipsiae, 1880, p. 115. 262 GENESIS, than the more natural construction with the perfect nnp7\- see 20, 16.' 16. Tni3iL* 13!Z?. These words evidently contain an allusion to the name 13E'E'*. Nin nb'1b3; cf. 19, 33 and the note there. 18. IDE?!!?". The reading given in Baer and Del.'s edition is pointed latS'tS'*, with the Kri perpetuum ~|at5'*, i.e. wherever laE'E" occurs in the O.T. it is always pointed lafe1*, as though there were no second V : this is the reading of Ben Asher (the Tiberian or Occidental punctuation). Ben Naftali reads ists/ty* (the Babylonian or Oriental punctuation); cf. Baer and Del, Gen., p. 84. On the readings of Ben Asher and Ben Naftali, see Bleek- Wellhausen, Einl., pp. 563, 614 f.; Bleek, Introduction, Eng. trans, ii. p. 463 ; Strack, Proleg., p. 36 f, De codicibus Orient, el Occident. Ben Asher's reading I3tf^ is perhaps a derivative from the Nifal of 1355" = 'got for hire' (Wright); so apparently the LXX, 'lo-o-axdp; Vulg. Issachar; Pesh. ;ao>/ ; Saad. Jli.LL> ; Josephus, «c plo-8ov yevopcvos. The reading of Ben Naftali, latpfe*, is the same as that of Ben Asher, but written differently. Some think that Ben Naftali read I3fc>j^ (' affert proemium')=-\SV N&*; see Baer and Del, loc. cit, 'At eerie de Ben Naf falluntur! Mose ben Mocha read la'B'TS'* ' est proemium] after Jer. 31, 16. 2 Chron. 15, 7. So Di. 20. ^llt and *373T* are both ana£ Xeyop. pblt (of the same form as JIHE**) perhaps = ' habitation! In this verse two explanations of the name are given, probably derived from two different documents (a) from E, 13T . . . *313T 'presented me with a goodly present] and (b) from J, *373t* (73T with the ace like pv and 113) ' will dwell with me! CHAP. 30, VERS. 16-27. 263 The meaning 'dwell] however, generally assigned to 73T, seems to be very doubtful, cf. Cheyne, erit. note on Is. 63, 15. It is, therefore, perhaps better to render ' will exalt' or ' honour me ' (cf. LXX, alpeTiet). 731= Assyr. zabdlu, to bear, lift up. See Del, Proleg., p. 62, Del.6, ad loc. This meaning of 73T is, however, questioned by Halevy, R. E.f, 1885, p. 299, and Nold, Z. D.M. G., xl. p. 729. 21. n^l = ' vindicalio ;' the daughter's name is here given, as necessary to explain chap. 34. Jacob's daughters are elsewhere presupposed (37, 35. 46, 7), but not mentioned by name. 24. PpY1 explained from ver. 23^ (E) nN DM7N e|DN MSin, as though it were f]DN* =' taker away! i-e. of my reproach of childlessness. In 24b (J) the name is ex plained differently, inN p *7 "** *pi* ' may Yahweh add to me another son] so =' multiplier ;' see on ver. 20, and cf. 35, 18. 27. 131 "nS!JO N3 DN. ' If now I have found favour in thine eyes, — / have observed the omens, that (lit. and) Yahweh has blessed me for thy sake! Dav, S., § 146. R. 4, takes these words, ' / have divined and Yahweh, etc' as a clause with and in the place of an object, sentence ; cf. 47, 6 ; Driver, p. 207; Ges, § 120. 2. R. 2 (cf. § in. 2. R. 2. foot-note, which apparently contradicts Ges, 1. a). The apodosis to "131 MNXO NS DN is suppressed; cf. 38, 17. 50, 15; Ges, § 159. Rem. 2; the apodosis would perhaps run NS 7N *7yo I3yn, as in 18, 3. The words cannot be translated ' Would that I had found favour in thy eyes' (Ges. in Thes), as this would require the imperf, not the perfect; cf. Pss. 81, 9. 139, 19. MEMS ; see on 44, 15. The LXX have olavi- adprpi av, making MEMS into the apodosis to MNXO DN ; the Vulgate ' experimento didici! 264 GENESIS, 28. ""by = lit. ' upon me! 7y because it will be as a burden to him; cf. 34, 12. 29. ' Thou knoivest how I have served thee, and what thy cattle has become with me! 1*ni3y lE'N nN and ,1M lE'N nNl "131 are both accusatives after nyi*; cf. Ges, § 157 c; Dav, S., § 146 ; M. R, §§ 158. R. b, 161 b. nnN is emphatic, 'thou with whom I have been in service shouldest know.' MN ' with me] i. e. under my care. 30. yiBI. Waw conv, as in 22, 24, which compare. "731b, lit. ' al my steps] i. e, wherever I went; cf. Is. 41, 2 17317 UNlp* p~l)l ' whom righteousness meeteth wherever he goeth;' Job 18, 11 1*7317 WX'Sni. "3DN D3. Emphatic, ' I too! You have been prosperous, when shall I begin prospering ? 31. nXHN n3Hl?N. ' I will again feed;' so 26, 18 3Ei1 isn*l pns* 'and Isaac dug again! Two verbs to express one idea (here without 1 cop.) where in English an adverb is used; so Ps. 7, 13 E'07* . . . aiE** 'will again sharpen;' see Ges, § 120. 2 b. Rem.; M. R, § 30 a; Dav, S., § 83 c. 32-43. These twelve verses are very obscure, possibly corrupt. In ver. 31, Jacob, in answer to Laban's request to tell him what reward he desires, replies that Laban is to give him nothing if he will accede to a proposal he has to make. In ver. 32, Jacob proposes to go through Laban's flock, and separate the particoloured and black sheep, and all the particoloured goats. The normal colour of the goats is black, or at least dark-brown ; that of the sheep, on the contrary, white ; see Song of Songs 4,1.2. 6, 5. 6. Dan. 7, 9 ; cf. Song of Songs 1, 5. The greater number of the sheep and goats would naturally be of normal colour, white and CHAP. 30, VERS. 28-32. 265 black respectively. Jacob proposes that the abnormal cattle shall be his hire. Laban, vers. 34-36, consents to Jacob's proposal, and separates the normal and abnormal coloured sheep and goats, and sends the latter off, under the charge of his sons, three days' journey distant from the remainder of his flock of normal coloured animals, left in Jacob's charge. Jacob, in order that the animals left with him may bring forth a greater number of abnormal coloured offspring than they would usually produce, has recourse to the stratagem of the peeled rods in the drinking-troughs (37-39). Ver. 40 seems to contain a second contrivance on the part of Jacob to increase his flock, but the text is very obscure and almost certainly corrupt (see the note there). Vers. 41. 42 either contain a third stratagem, or refer to the previous two (the frequentative tenses perhaps supporting the latter view), 41. 42 being a more detailed account of the contrivance prac tised in vers. 38. 39. 32. Dl^n seems to imply that the cattle separated that day, if of abnormal colour, were to belong to Jacob ; but against this is firstly ver. 31, where Jacob declines any hire, and secondly vers. 35. 36b, where Laban, not Jacob, separates and drives off the abnormal coloured cattle, which seem, according to ver. 32, to belong to Jacob, but here are apparently regarded as Laban's. To avoid this difficulty, some, e.g. Tuch, sup pose that Jacob's hire is to be the abnormal coloured cattle that would be born, cf. ver. 37 ff.; but nothing is said of this in ver. 32, and it is questionable whether *13E' >1M1 would fit in with this view. Well, Comp., p. 40 f, attempts to remove the difficulty by inserting, after .ver. 34, a statement to the effect that Laban, after the abnormal coloured animals had been separated by Jacob, found the promised reward too liberal, and so proposed to Jacob another arrangement 266 GENESIS, (31, 7 f.). Di. rejects this on the ground that such a lacunj would be inconceivable, and the contradiction with *7~>nn-N, noiNO would be too marked. Di. proposes two solutions 0 the difficulty : (i) that before or after *13B> ,1*ni several words have dropped out of the text, or (ii) to alter the accentuation of ver. 32, and point the first N170 with Athnach; then the meaning would be 'every black sheep among the sheep, anc spotted and patched among the goats, shall be my hire] i.e. you are to give me nothing now, but the abnormal coloured cattle born after the division, in ver. 32, has taken place will be mine ; cf. mo, ver. 33. This seems the simplest solution of the difficulties. IDn is inf. abs.; cf. note on 21, 16. Others prefer taking 1D,1 as imperative ; addressed to 137, which suits ver. 35, but not 13yN . N17D1 IpS ' spotted and patched! N170 is not found again outside this chapter, except in Ez. 16, 16, pl. fem. niN70. *ia'E» 1*11 'and (these) shall be my hire] i.e. the sheep and goats of abnormal colour that shall be born after the division mentioned in this verse has been carried out; see above. IE' is used here of both sheep and goats, being further defined by 3*3^3 and D*Ty. Ver. 35 is a more minute description of this verse. The LXX have napeX8dTa>, reading the easier reading "73 13JP ; Vulg. 'gyra omnes greges iuos ' (733 I3y), both regarding 1D1 as imper. 0"3to2 . A form peculiar to the Pent, for which we find elsewhere D^EGS. 33. ''npi'J 'U nnDH. MiihlauandVolck(Ges,i7.JF..5, nth ed.) render here and 1 Sam. 12, 3, 'bear witness for me;' but as 3 . . , nsy always elsewhere means ' io bear witness against] and as this meaning is not unsuitable in 1 Sam. 1 2, 3, it is preferable to follow Del. and render ' my righteousness CHAP. 30, VERS. 33-37- 267 shall testify against me] i. e. I shall be self-condemned (Wright). inO U^1 = ' hereafter;' cf. Ex. 13, 14. Deut. 6, 20. Josh. 4, 6. "p33b . . . N3n "3 . ' When thou comest about my hire, before thee] i.e. when thou comest to inspect the cattle (my hire) which will be before thee ; or 1*337 may be connected with Mpllf *3 insyi, in the sense 'my righteousness will testify against me . . . before thee;' but the position of 1*337, at some distance from Mplx *3 insyi , is against this. Dln1 = Din 133*N1, as the black sheep, being Jacob's hire, could not be regarded as stolen. 35. ID", imperf. Hif, not Qal, although the shortened imperf. third pers. masc. sing. Qal and Hif. are the same, the context alone deciding the conjugation intended. Laban is here the subject, as is clear from 1*33 at the end of the verse, and 3py* p31 13*3 in the next verse. The cattle left with Jacob were of normal colour, white sheep and dark-coloured goats. 36. ID^^ ' between him] LXX and Sam. D3*3 (Dn*3*3) ' be tween them] i.e. his sons. 37. bpO doubtless collective, hence the fem. (as [,13 shews) ; elsewhere it is masculine. n33b = ' Storax ' (S/yrax officinalis). Arabic ^111 ; cf. Low, Aram. Pflanzenn., 153. The noun 1337 is of the same form as inE'S, nE'N, 1__ = *_ (cf. the Arabic name ending in £ = * — , and see Stade, § 301 b), from pi?, so called on account of the milk-like gum that flows from it when its bark is cut. Others, following the Vulg. here and the LXX in Hos. 4, 13, render 'poplar;' so R.V. here. 268 GENESIS, tlb = ' almond! Arabic J^J, Aram. Jf <&». . Del. remarks that T17 is the more Aramaic-Arabic word for Ip?* ; cf. Low, l.c. 49, 69, 374. pOll* = 'plane tree ' (Platanus orientalis), from Diy ' to strip] so called because the bark peels off from year to year, and the tree becomes as it were naked. ?|l2.*nO = sfEM, inf. abs. 'exposing the white;' one of the very few instances in Hebrew of an abstract form with the force of an infinitive; so ^IPP, yDO (as inf. cstr.) from J>p3; niSO (Neh. 12, 45, with ace); cf. Ryssel, De Eloh. Pent, serm., p. 50; Ges, § 45, 1. c; Ewald, § 239 a. In Aramaic the inf. of the first conjugation (=Qal) is formed by prefixing 0. 38. D^Oni, rare and Aramaising, here explained by d*o ninpE*. ninptt? is pl. of npE*, like niiON, ps. I2, 7, from ION; cf. Ges, § 95. Rem. i; Stade, § 187 b ; Ewald, § 212 b, who cites *?3D from :|Sb. i13Db ' over against! t^N3J1 in this verse, and 3*'E"*. in verse 42 are used in a frequentative sense. nDOn"1 from Don (cf. Deut. 19, 6), instead of nspnni, so 1 Sam. 6, 12 ISIE'*!; Dan. 8, 22 131/py;. (all). In Arabic the third fem. pl. form is l^ii&j, and in Aramaic I^Pp*; cf. Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 185; see Ges, § 47. 3. Rem. 3; Stade, § 534. 1. H. W.B., nth ed, gives the root as Dn*, not Don, ,130n*=nson**. ; cf. at?* from at?*, but admits that it is possible to derive the form from Don. If it is from DOPj it follows the analogy of ID',, jJI*. 39. lOrPI, = 10n»l ( plural masc, because the male animals are included, ion* is either imperf. from D0n = 1Qn*; Hos. CHAP. 30, VERS. 38-41. 269 7, 7, or imperf. Qal of an*, for ion* or ion*; cf. Judg. 5, 28 ™g for Vint}; ps. 51, 7 *snpn*. for *snon*: see Ges, §§ 64. 3. Rem. 3; 67. 5. Rem.; 69. 1 b; cf. Stade, § 523 d, who regards ion*. as lightened from ion* , for ion*, after the analogy of verbs n"7 ; and Konig, Lehrg., pp. 365, 4176°, who derives both words from Dn*; comparing the inf. Pi'el in ver. 41. nibpOn 7N. Cf. 24, n D*0,1 1N3 7N 'at the well of water! O'Hpi* = ' striped! 40. O'QiMm are the particoloured animals, goats and sheep; these Jacob separated from the normally coloured animals in Laban's flock. He then turns Laban's normal coloured animals in the direction of the D'Stfa, so that they might have these before their eyes. But these abnormal coloured animals belong to Jacob, according to his agree ment with Laban, and so cannot be spoken of as DM 731 Ipy 137 JNX3 . If the text were emended as follows, the difficulty would disappear, 13NV3 DM 731 Ipy 7N p7 |NV *33 M*l, i.e. ' he set the face of Laban' s flock towards what was striped and (towards) everything dark in his ozvn flock! p? has fallen out of its place after JN¥, which then received the article, and the waw of 13NX3 disappeared before the waw of nv*\. Otherwise we must assume with Del, Di, and others that p7 . . . ;n*l are a later addition to the text. Knobel emends by reading Ipy 73, with Onq, Ps.-Jon, and takes *3B for *S37 ' before] as Ex. 23, 15. Ps. 42, 3; but then Jacob's dark and parti coloured cattle are described as Laban's. Wright adopts Knobel's emendation, but avoids the above-mentioned diffi culty by deleting pi? and reading JNU3. }37 might certainly have crept in, from the pi? |Nx in the next line. 41, 42. The old translators explain these verses by the 270 GENESIS, fact that the strong cattle bring forth their young in winter^ and the weak cattle theirs in the spring : thus nilE'pon would be the winter cattle, and D*SOyi the spring cattle. 41. Dffil . . . n"m, perfs. with waw conv. in a frequen tative sense; see Driver, § 120. H30n*_? is inf. Pi'el of Dn*, with the third pi. fem. suffix n|__ for '-^-; cf. 41, 21 Hjaip, and see Ges, § 91. 1. Rem. 2; Stade, § 352 b. 2, who re marks that the dagesh should be struck out. 43. nlZll ]N2, the collective being construed with a plural adjective; cf. 1 Sam. 13, 15 loy D*NVOS1 Dyi nN, 1 Sam. 17, 28 ns,11 }NX1 oyo; see Ges, § 132. Rem. 5 b; M. R, § 85. Rem. b; Dav, S., § 31. 31. 1. Din 133n = 'this wealth;' cf. Is. 10, 3. Ps. 49, 17. 4. nitt?n is ace. of place ; see note on 12, 15. 5. 1D3"N "3 . . . ^STIN . . . nNl. The logical sub ject of the object sentence attracted as object into the governing clause ; see note on 1, 4. and Ex. 2, 2. 2 Sam. 17, 8. 1 Kings 5, 17. 133*N refers to *3|; cf. Lam. 4, 16, where *3B is followed by a singular verb. 6. n5nN1 for JPIN, also pointed njllN (cf. the Arabic ^fs)\), is only found again in Ez. 13, 11. 20. 34, 17; see Ges, § 32. Rem. 5; Stade, § 178c; Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 102. 7. bnn for 7nn, with retrogression of the tone by Ges, § 29. 3 b; Stade, § 88. 2 b. bnn is Hif. of 77n; cf. the Lexic. and Ewald, § 127 d. The n of the Hif. is retained, as though it were a radical letter, in the forms '?nnn (notice CHAP. 30, VER. 41 CHAP. 31, VER. 8. 271 the dag. in 7), Job 13, 9 ; IPfin*, Jer. 9, 4; 7Fin*J, 1 Kings 18, 27 : see Stade, § 145 e, and Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 37. F|bnm . . . bnn. I. Either like Num. 11,8 10pi?l . . . 10E*, ' the fact being stated summarily by the perfect, and this tense being followed by the perfect with waw conv.;* see Driver, § 114 a ; Ges, § 112. 30,7. II. Or like 1 Sam. 12, 2 MaEI MSpT ; Is. 1 , 2 etc. : 5|*?nn! not being subordinate to 7nn (the imperf. with waw conv. would be required then) but co-ordinate ; see Driver, § 133 ; Dav, S., § 58 a. D"3lO mil?!*. ' Ten times;' LXX, 8«a dpvZv, possibly corrupted out of a reading pvSsv. The translators, not under standing 0*310, wrote the Hebrew word in Greek, and this passed over into dpvSsv; cf. Frankel, Einf p. 18, and ver. 41. The word D*310 is peculiar to this chapter, elsewhere D*oy3 is used, e.g. Num. 14, 22, or By?"], Ex. 23, 14. Aq. has 8exa dpiBpovs, Symm. Sckokk dpL8pm. 8. The account of the agreement made between Jacob and Laban in this chapter differs from that in chap. 30, and is derived from a different source; 30, 25-31, 1 being mainly from J ; 31, 2-1 8a mainly from E. Cf. Dr., Introd., p. 15 ; Di, pp. 338 f. and 349 f. n"n" D"1p3. ,1*1*, the singular is perhaps due to the following 1131? ; see Ges, § 14 5- 7- Rem- 3- 1 If he were to say thus, The spotted shall be thy hire; then all the flock used to bring forth spotted: and if he were to say thus, The striped shall be thy hire ; then all the flock used to bring forth striped.' Cf. Num. 9, 19-21. Ex. 40, 37 N7 DN1 iyD* N71 pyi 17y* (the apod, being in the imperf, as the waw is separated from the verb by Ni?) ; see Driver, § 136 8. Obs, cf.§i230; Dav, S., §1300; Ges, §§ 112. 5a, 0; 159.3.2c 272 GENESIS, 9. D3"1N for p*3N; cf. Ges, § 135. 5. Rem. 1. 10. D"113 = N170, in 30, 32 ; it is found twice again in Zech. 6, 3. 6 (of horses), and = ' speckled! D*113 probably= ' covered as it were with hailstones ' (I"??), so ' white spots on a dark ground' (Tuch). 13. bNn'U 7Nn. '/ am the God at Bethel] i.e. the God who appeared to thee at Bethel. So Dr., § 191. Obs. 2, who compares 2 Kings 23, 17 7Nn*3 naion 'the altar tn Bethel] also Num. 22, 5. 2 Sam. 17, 26. Others regard 7N1 as construct state with the article, see Ewald, 290 d (3\ who cites other instances, e.g. Jer. 48, 32, etc.; see also Is. 36, 8. 16; and cf. M. R, § 76. R.b; Dav, S., § 20. R. 4; Ges, § 127. Rem. 4 a (="a 7N i?Nn). 14. nnONm . . , {l*m. On the first verb with a compound subject in the singular and the second in the plural, see references in note on 7, 7, and cf. 9, 23. 21, 32. 24, 5°- 33> 7- 44, 14- 15. bl3N 03 bSNI. 'And goes on to eat up;' cf. — for force of imperf. with waw conv. — note on 19, 9. Here ?aN inf. abs. comes after the verb for emphasis, and the inf. abs. is further strengthened by adding D3 as in 46, 4 (cf. note). Num. 16, 13. See also note on 29, 30. 16. "3. Not 'so that;' Del. and Kn, neither here nor in Job 10, 6. Deut. 14, 24; but Di. ' rather] or ' nay, rather; ' cf. Pss. 37, 20. 49, n. 130, 4. 19. tub "jbn. In 38, 13 we find T37, the shorter form ; cf. 33D7, Num. 21, 4, and the short form 3D, Deut. 2, 3 ; see Stade, § 619 e ; Ges, § 67. Rem. 10. 17,1 is pluperfect, 'had gone! 0"3inn = ' The Teraphim] Laban's household gods. CHAP. 31, VERS. 9—20. 273 LXX here to ctSuXa, but the word is variously rendered by them in the other passages where it occurs. The Teraphim were of human form (1 Sam. 19, 13), and were worshipped as gods (ver. 30. Judg. 18, 24). Their worship was not recognised as legitimate (see 2 Kings 23, 24 ; cf. Gen. 35, 4 and Hos. 3, 4), yet they were at all times regarded as house hold oracles (Judg. 18, 5. Zech. 10, 2. Ez. 21, 26), and (possibly) as bringing prosperity; therefore Rachel takes them with her, to avoid bringing misfortune or ill luck on her household; cf. Judg. 18, 17, where the Danites take Micha's household gods. The pl. form may here only denote a single image, as in 1 Sam. 19, 13 (see Ges, § 124 c; Dav, S., § 16 c); cf. D*31lN and D*7y3, both used as intensive plurals ; the pl. suf. in ver. 34, and M7N in ver. 30, not being decisive in favour of taking D*3in as a real plural ; cf. Ewald, § 318 a. No certain etymology has yet been found. The one most commonly given is from the Arabic < S,5 ' commode vivere] which would agree with the idea that the D*3in were the gods who were supposed to bring good fortune to those who worshipped them ; but it is not certain that i_j>j does not rather mean ' to be soft;' cf. Tuch, p. 395 ; Del.4, p. 555, who also suggests a comparison with the Sanskrit tarp, ' to be full! The word has also been connected with 3*NS1 (Neubauer, Academy, No. 756, p. 297), and Assyr. tarpu, =dimma, 'a shade' (Sayce, Z. A., ii. 95), the meaning being, 'shades of the dead] but this explanation is very improbable, and cannot be supported by the usage of D*3in in the O. T. The D*3in stood in no connection with the 0*31^. 20. 37 nN . . . 333"1 = ' deceived;' cf. 2 Sam. 15, 6 37 nN Dw3N 333*1, but in the sense 'to win over secretly ;' cf. KXimeiv voov and KXiitTeu) Tiva (Del.). T 274 GENESIS, "•72 by is only found here. *i?3 = N7 with the finite verb, occurs in Job 41, 1 8. Hos. 8, 7. 9, 16 (Ktb.). Is. 14, 6 ; see Ewald, § 322 a. Render, 'In that he did not tell! On i?y, cf. Ges, § 158. 21. in2n. 'The river' par excellence, i.e. the Euphrates; see Ges, § 126. 2 d; Dav, S., § 21 c. So often, e.g. Is. 27, 12. Ps. 72, 8. 23. l^nN nN. ' His friends and fellow-tribesmen ;' cf. Lev. 10, 4. 2 Sam. 19, 13. 24. 1*1 11* 3100. 'Either good or bad] i.e. anything at all : cf. ver. 29. 24, 50. Num. 24, 13. 2 Sam. 13, 22. 25. 11*73n m2 . . . in3. From a comparison of vers. 21 and 23 with this verse, Jacob and Laban apparently encamped in the same place (so Vulg.) ; yet the narrative evidently implies that Laban encamped in one place and Jacob in another. Probably something has been omitted after 1,13. Di.'s explanation of the text is ingenious, if not convincing. He assumes that in in J was followed by a proper name (Lag. suggests ,13X0 ina, cf. ver. 49). R omitted this, as it did not suit the text of E. Or J did not mention the name of the hill, as he wished to reserve his account of its origin, until ver. 48 (then 2 5b comes from R). 26. 333ni n^toX'. The imperf. with waw conv. used to define or explain nvy ; so in 1 Sam. 8, 8. 1 Kings 2, 5; see Driver, § 76 a; Dav, S., § 47. 27. ni37 nN3TO n07 . ' Why didst thou fly in secret?' see on 27, 20. 1^lbti?N1. ' And so I could have sent thee away;' see on 12, 19. On the -^- in in^Nl, see Ges, § 65. 2. note; also Stade. § 633 a. CHAP. 31, VERS. 21-33. 275 28. itlJX? nb3Dn = 'Mo« hast acted foolishly! i'E»y: for nVE»J|; cf. INI, 48, 11: nvy, 50, 20 ; Snv\, Ex. 18, 18 ; and see Ges, § 75. Rem. 2 ; Stade, § 619 k. In l"E»y ni?3Dn the construction is the same as in 8, 10 ni'E' f]D*l. 29. "H" 7N7 tt?\ Cf. Mic. 2, 1. Prov. 3, 27; the neg. is 11* 7N7 }*N, Deut. 28, 32. Neh. 5, 5. Hitzig explains the phrase as meaning 'My hand is for God] which would be suitable if the meaning intended were, ' I am capable or able to do everything] but scarcely suitable when the meaning is, as here, 'I have the power ;' lit. 'it is according to the power of my hand! ?N is a no\in= strength, cf. Barth, N.B., p. 79. R. Ges, Del, Tuch, Di. render, '// is in the power of my hand! OS^N. The plural suffix refers to Jacob and those who were with him. 30. ' And now (when) thou art going right away, for thou longest sore for thy father's house, why hast thou stolen my gods?' 171 and 5)033 are infs. abs, prefixed to the finite verb for emphasis; see the note on 2, 16; and cf. 16, 10. 18, 10. 2 Sam. 5, 19. 5p33, on the form, cf. Ges, § 51. Rem. 1. The word is only found here in the Pent. 31. "nNl" "3. Cf. the note on 20, 11. 32. 1Q?N 01* 'with whomsoever] for 10y . . . lE'N; the phrase is unusual, yet imitated here by the Pesh. ? ^ Idi*. ; see Ewald, § 333 a; Ges, § 138. 1. foot-note 2; M. R, § 158. Rem. a; Dav, S., § 10. R. 1. In 44, 9. 10 we have the regular construction MN . . . lE'N . 33. nnONn is pl. of ION, with the insertion of a 1 ; * f see Stade, § 188 ; Ges, § 96; and cf. the Arabic iS\, pl. JLlpI, with j instead of the Heb. 1. The Aram. \£>\\ pl- \*»x>T, T 2 276 GENESIS, and NON, pl. NniDN, have 1 as in Hebrew. Cf. also Lag, B. N, p. 82, and Barth, N. B., p. 8. 34. 13 is anai-Xeyoa. LXX, els to. ady para = ' saddle. 13, so called from its round basket-shaped form (root 113), was protected by a cover or tent, in which the women sat,, something like a modern palanquin ; see Di, p. 354. 35. ~J"2DO Dlpb. Cf. Lev. 19, 32. Rachel's plan was ingenious, as any attempt to examine the camel's saddle would involve contact with an unclean thing. 36. "inN npbl. *inN pb"l='to burn after one;' i.e. to hotly pursue one; so 1 Sam. 17, 53 DME'i'B *inN pi>10. 39. "nN3n N7 nSlZD. Cf. Ex. 22, 12. nStfln/N, for i13NoriN:; as though from a verb n"7; see Ges, § 74. Rem. 4 ; cf. § 75. Rem. 21c; Stade, §111. Non here is synonymous with DPE*, Ex. 22, 12. DI1* XTQM with the old binding vowel *— ; cf. on 1, 24. It always has the tone with the exception of two places, Lam. 1, 1 and Hos. 10, 11, in the former of which the accent is on the penult, on account of a word of one syllable following; cf. Ges, § 90. 3a; Stade, § 343 d ; Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 141 f. The two imperfs. nsonN, nSE'pan are frequentative. 40. Cf. Jer. 36, 30. In the East the cold at night is quite as intense as the heat by day. Cf. Sh, G., p. 69 f. ; Bad, Pal., p. xlvii. 41. D^O mtoX*. Cf. ver. 7. Ten here, and ver. 7, is a round number = ' often.' 42. in3. So ver. 53 ; cf. N11D, Is. 8, 12. ins is abstract for concrete ; so *1; see note on 6, 14. 47. Nniinto 13" = Heb. iyi?3, the first occurrence of Aramaic words in the O.T. NnillE', cf. Job 16, 19 *11E'1= ' my witness] after the form of the Aramaic participle. The naming of the place with an Aramaic and Hebrew name was probably occasioned by its position on the frontier, between Aramaic and Hebrew-speaking people ; see Di, p. 356. iy?31 in or 1J>731 flN is in the O.T. the name of the stretch of territory (chiefly mountain and hill country) which extended 278 GENESIS, from the edge of the plateau of Moab up to the Yarmuk, being cut into two parts by the Wady Jabbok. The northern portion between the Jabbok and Yarmuk (Deut. 3, 13. Josh. 12, 5. cf. 1 Kings 4, 19) coincides with the modern district of 'Ajlun ; and the southern portion, with that part of the Belka', which stretches from Mount Heshbon to the Jabbok (Deut. 3, 12. Josh. 12, 2). At the present day the long ridge south of the Jabbok is still called Jebel Jela'ad. Cf. Sh, G., p. -583 f.; Bad, Pal., p. 176. The identification of the sites of the various places in Gilead is very uncertain; cf. Di, p. 358, and Sh, G., l.c. Mizpeh, the scene of Jacob's covenant with Laban, has been placed by Conder at Suf, a place of dolmens and stone-circles between 'Ajlun and Jerash (cf. Sh, G., p. 586). This identification, however, is uncertain, as several Mizpehs are mentioned in the O.T. in different localities, and we have no certainty that these were the same, and even if they were identical, one site, which would suit all of them, can hardly be discovered ; cf. Sh, 1. e; Di, 1. c 49. As the text stands, ver. 49 must be closely connected with 48, ' and Mizpah (he called the place) because he said] etc.; so Kn, Keil; but ,13X0,11 is strange, as nothing has been said about a 1SSD 'a look-out] 'watch-lower! Ewald emends, ,1SXD,1 13X0,11 'and the pillar (he called) Hammizpak' (Komp. der Gen., p. 64), which is supported by Saadiah. The Vss. vary, and do not give any clue to solve the difficulty. Di, p. 356, suggests that ver. 49 in its present form does not come from J, but has been revised and modified by R ; as at his time a Mizpah in Gilead was better known than a Masseba, but expresses some doubt as to whether R freely inserted all from W. to MJ/10, and 50b which belongs to this, or made use of information derived from J. 50. ON in an oath, as in 14, 23, which compare. CHAP. 31, VER. 49 — CHAP. 32, VER. 3. 279 52. ON with a following GiV\=sive . . . sive ; so Del. and Dav, S., § 152, who compare Ex. 19, 13 EI'*N DN 1013 DN IM* N7 ' whether beast or man, he shall not live! Di. prefers to take them as the DN in ver. 50, and renders, ' surely not I, I will not pass ;' the DN and then N7 expressing a strong negative ; but this seems unnecessary. 53. 1D3\3". Perhaps the plural is used as the gods of Nahor are mentioned, the narrator supposing that Nahor worshipped idols, as Laban did (cf. the D*3in); see Josh. 24, 2. The words 31*3N M7N may, however, be a gloss. They are wanting in the LXX, and some Hebrew codices. They are rejected by Kennic, Olsh, Welh, Geiger, Urschrift, p. 284, and Di. LXX, Pesh., Sam, Vulg. give the sing. t23Ei*. 54. Cf. 26, 30. Ex. 24, 11. 2 Sam. 3, 20. 32. 1. DnnN is rare; cf. Ex. 18, 20. Num. 21,3. Ez. 34, 12. 1 Chron. 6, 50 (all), and once 3iriiN, Ez. 23, 45. The usual form is DfiN. In the fem, on the contrary, the usual form is IrMN (MN only in Ez. 16, 54). 3. 0'*3nO = 'two camps! LXX have napep&oXal, as though "o were a plural from *snp. The dual, however, suits vers. 8-1 1 better than a plural. The two camps were his own, and the angel host he had just met. On the proper names in Hebrew which are apparently duals see the note on 37, 17. D*sno was situated on the borders of the territory of Gad, Josh. 13, 26. 30. It lay probably to the north of the Jabbok, and was one of the most important towns in Gilead (cf. 2 Sam. 2, 8. 12. 29. 17, 24. 27. 1 Kings 4, 14). Its identification has not yet been determined. ' Conder places 280 GENESIS, Mahanaim near Bukei'a to the east of Salt, a region not likely to contain so important a town, and hardly on the border of Gad (Josh. 1. a). Merrill suggests Khurbet Suleikhat, 300 feet above the Gh6r, in the Wady 'Ajlun,' Sh. G., p. 586. Kiepert places it provisionally between the Jordan and the Jabbok, a little south of Amathus. 5. |HONn. Cf. Ges, § 47. Rem. 4; Stade, § 520a; see on 3, 4. 111N1 is imperf. Qal, by syncope, for mNNl j so 31N for ajTON, Prov. 8, 17: see Ges, § 68. i.note; Stade, § 112 c. 6. nn7tt?'N1. Cf. on 41, 11. 7. "jnNipb ^bn 031. The participle without any subject expressed; so a3n P|N, Deut. 33, 3; DM7EiO DN, 1 Sam. 6, 3; cf. Gen. 24, 30. 37, 15. 38, 24. 41, 1 (all with 131): see Driver, § 135. 6. 2; Ewald, § 303 b; Ges, § 116. 5. Rem. 3; Dav, S., § 100 a. < 8. 12||1 is imperf. Qal from nx, Ewald, § 232 c; Stade, § 510 g. The — in the last syllable is due to the tone being drawn back to the penult, as in Job 20, 22 17 IX*. 9. nnNn n^non 7N. isno, usually masc, is here fem, as in Ps. 27, 3 ; as the masc. immediately follows, the fem. is strange; the Heb.-Sam. reads iriNrt, which is probably the correct reading. in3m . . . N13" DN. Cf. 18, 26. 24, 8. 28, 20, and ver. 18 of this chapter, where *3 takes the place of DN; see Driver, § 136 a, and cf. p. 130; M.R, § 24. 2 a; Dav, S., § i3°> and R- 1 ; Ges, § 112. 5 a, a. nO^bB is abstract, 'escape] and then concrete, 'escaped ones! 11. b30 ^Dp, render as a present, fop being a stative CHAP. 32, VERS. 5-16. 281 verb, 'I am unworthy] lit. 'too small;' see Driver, § 11; M.R, § 2. 1; Ges, § 106. 2a; Dav., S., § 40. b30 . On the (comparative) [O here = the positive with 'too] see M. R, § 49. 2. Rem. a; cf. notes on 18, 14 N73M 131 111*0; 4, 13 N1E30 *3iy 7113. "bp03 "3. 3 is pointed with dag. lene, although the preceding word ends in a vowel, and has a conjunctive accent, because the aspirate in the connected sounds 03 is hardened {i.e. removed), just as in 33, 33, 33, 33, 33 ; see Ges, §21.1. Rem. 2, and Del.4, p. 416. nl3nO "OttJb "Wn . ' / have become (and still am) two camps ;' see Driver, § 8. 12. inN . . . NI". Cf. 22, 12 and note on 4, 14. D"33 bl* DN. The phrase occurs again in Hos. 16, 14 (cf. Deut. 22, 6), and is a proverbial expression. 7y depicts the mother hovering over her children, and vainly trying to defend them : or 7y may be taken as in Job 38, 32. Ex. 35, 22 D*Ei31 i?y D*E'SN1 ' the men together with the women! The first explanation is perhaps preferable. The clause is a circumstantial clause, so ver. 31; cf. note on 12, 8. 14. 11"3 N3n \Q =' of what he had] lit. ' of that which had come into his hand;' cf. 35, 4 OT>2 lE'N. R.V. ' of that which he had with him! 15. D"1C?1* D^nl. The numeral after the noun, in apposition, is rare in the earlier books of the O.T.; cf. ver. 16, and see Dav, S., §§ 36 c, 37 b. 16. Dn"33. The masc. suff. for the fem, as in 31, 9; cf. 26, 15 and the note there. D"1D = 'young bullocks', standing in the same relation to 282 GENESIS, nii3 as D*l*y 'foals' (here 'asses' foals') to the niSMN. &XV). is for aT¥?-; cf- Ges-> § 28. 2. 17. 112b 111* 111*, lit. 'flock, flock alone] i.e. ' by herds or flocks,' so that each flock had one servant; cf. Ges, § 123 d. 2 ; M. R, § 72. 2 ; Dav, S, § 29. R. 8. 18. ^ti?33\ So pointed in Baer and Del.'s edition, fol lowing Ben Asher's reading. Ben Naftali reads, however, 1EJ33* . Ben Asher's reading was oronouncedyif-ghd-shacha, Ben Naftali's yifgosh-cha ; cf. Baer and Del, Gen., p. 85. The imperf. tsi33* would be a by-form of ^33* ; cf. 1 Sam. 25, 20. On the Hatef-pathach under V, cf. on 2, 12 31T1. 20. D3N202, for 33NX03 ; see Ewald, § 63. 1, and Ges, § 74. Rem. 2; and cf. npy'n, for '17^1; and Stade, § 109. D3NX03 =' when you find] lit. ' in your finding! 23. Nin nb*b3. Cf. 19, 33 and the note there. py is the present Wady Zerka, which divides the districts of 'Ajlun and Belka', and falls into the Jordan in the latitude of Shechem, N. of the Dead Sea. The modern name Zerki,= ' blue flood] is derived from the clear blue colour of the water. Cf. Bad, Pal., p. 178; Sh, G., p. 583 f. The name pa* is probably to be derived from ppa 'to pour out;' here it is brought into connection with the root p3N, as though p3!=p3N*_= 'striver] ' wrestler;' cf. Ges, Thes., p. 233 a. 25. p3N"1 = 'he wrestled] is found only here andver. 26. p3N is possibly connected with pan, or perhaps is only a dialectic variation of the same ; the word is probably chosen on account of the pr. n. pa*. In Hos. 12,4 p3N*1 is explained by niE>. Tuch and H. W. B., 1 ith ed, propose a derivation, as Niph. denom., from p3N ' dust] i.-e. ' to scatter oneself with CHAP. 32, VERS. 17-31. 283 dust;' as kovUo-6oi, from kovis, the powder with which wrestlers were sprinkled after being oiled. In C. P. Ges. the word is explained as a denominative, 'to wrestle' —get dusty; cf. Strack, Pirke Aboth, i. 4, an*.1?*.! I3ya pSNno *ini = sit at their feet. 26. I?pm, imperf. Qal from yp*. 27. "3n3l3 DN "3. ' Except thou bless me ;' cf.2Kings-4, 24. Ruth 3, 18; and see Driver, § 17; Dav, S., § 154; Ges, § 163. 2; M. R, § 168 c. 29. bNIC?" = 'God's striver] 'he who strives with God] in this passage and Hos. 12, 4 (hence the choice of the rare verb nits' in both places), as though i'Ni'E'* = 7N Dy HE" lE'N (Wright). The name perhaps really means — as distinct from the meaning given in the text — ' God strives, fights] ?N nits'* ; cf. i'NSJOE'*; so Robertson-Smith, Proph. in Isr., p. 36, who compares niN3X nil!. Ges. in Thes., p. 1338 b, Tuch, Reuss, and others explain it as meaning 'Soldier of God] i.e. he who fights for and with God's help. In 35, 10 (P) we have another account of the alteration of Jacob's name. 7Dim, (I) an imperf. Hof. of 73*, used as the imperf. Qal; so Ewald, § 127 b : (II) Stade, § 486, and Ges, § 69. 2. Rem. 3, regard it as an imperf. Qal 73V = 731; = 731* = 731* ; cf. the Arabic imperf. J^jj from j^j, and Wright, Arab. Gram., i. pp. 89-90. 30. Cf. Judg. 13, 17. "Ott?7. ' About my name;' cf. 20, 2 and the note there. 31. "nZ?33 bllTfS. Cf. Ex. 33, 20; also Judg. 13, 22. Deut. 4, 33; and the note on 16, 14. -\ = and yet; see Driver, § 74/3; Ges, § in. 1. R. 4; cf. M.R, § 18. 2; another expl. Dav, S., § 48. R. 1. 284 GENESIS, 7N"33, or 7N133 in ver. ^2, = ' face of God;' cf. on 4, 18 7NEino. In 7N*33 the * is the old binding vowel ; see on M333, 31/39. The position of 7N*33 cannot be ascertained. Kiepert provisionally locates it on the south of the Jabbok to the NW. of Ramoth Gilead. 'Merrill suggests the Tulul edh-Dhahab, round and between which the Jabbok forces its way into the Jordan ; Conder puts Penuel on the ridge of the Jebel 'Osha,' Sh, G., p. 586. 33. 131 ntt?3n T*3 nN = ' the hip-sinew, which is on the hollow of the thigh'. nE'Sn 1*3 = the Arabic \U , the nerve or tendon which goes through the thigh and leg to the ancle, the nervus ischiadicus ; see Ges, Thes., p. 921 a. The law forbidding the children of Israel to eat the IE'31 1*3 is not mentioned in the O. T. It is to be found in the Talmud, Tract. Chullin, chap. 7. 33. 3. Nim is emphatic, he, Jacob, as opposed to the persons mentioned in ver. 2 ; see Driver, § 160. Obs.; Dav, S., § 107. 4. inpOJI. Mas. note, lips 173 inpE»1=' with points on every letter] The Mid. Bern, cited by Strack, Prol. Crit., p. 89, has 137 730 IpE's t6v ?y l*i?y lips lipE5*!, i.e. ' MpE^l with points over it, because he did not kiss him with all his heart;' cf. the Ber. Rab. in Strack, 1. c, where Rabbi Yanai, answering Rabbi Simeon ben Eleazar, explains the points on )nptir>) thus : 13E'si? N7N IpE's? N3 N7E* ' because he did not come lo kiss him (facob), but to bite him] and goes on to say that Jacob's neck was turned into marble ; an account hardly in keeping with what we are told of Esau, who is never depicted in the O.T. as an inhuman person. The points probably here, as in the other cases where they occur, mark the word CHAP. 32, VER. 33 CHAP. 33, VER. IO. 285 as suspicious ; cf. Ewald, § 19 d. The Targ. Ps.-Jon. explains that Jacob wept because his neck was painful, and Esau because the effort gave him the toothache!! In 45, 14. 46, 29 'falling on the neck ' is immediately followed by ' weeping] and in the several MSS. of the LXX (Lag, Gen. Graece, p. 134) the trans, of 1,1pE'*l is wanting. It, therefore, seems best to omit the word. 5. "J7 n7N "O. 'Who are these to thee?' li? is dat. of reference; cf. Ex. 12, 26. Josh. 4, 6. 2 Sam. 16, 2. ]3n with double ace So 113 49, 25. 28 ; see Ges, § 117. 5 b, 0; M. R, §45-3; Dav, S, § 78. R. 1. 6, 7. }tt?3m, agreeing with the subj. immediately follow ing; so E'sni, ver. 7. On the gender and construction of the verbs in these verses, see M. R, § 138 and Rem.; Ges, §146. 2 b; Ewald, § 339c; Dav, S., §§ 113, 114. 8. "l31 TOnon 73 "]7 "O. 'What to thee is alllhis camp?' i.e. the cattle (32, 14-22) which Esau had already met; cf. ME'33 lE'N. *D by attraction = no, so Judg. 13, 17 10E* *D ; cf. 32, 28 10E* no. Ewald, § 325 a, and Di. prefer the ren dering, 'Who lo thee is the camp?' i.e. 'what dost thou wish lo do with them ?' ' because he brings the people into the fore ground.' Cf. Dav, S., § 8. R. 1. 10. nnp71 = ' pray take;' cf. 40, 14 n*E>jn 'pray shew mercy;' Judg. 6, 17 niN *7 n*E»yi 'pray give me a sign;' see Driver, § 119 8; and cf. Ges, §112.5 a> 0- D"n7N "33 nNl3. ' As one sees the face of God] i. e. Jacob sees that Esau's face wears a friendly (lit. divine) aspect. ' It is a divine friendliness with which he came to meet him,' Di. nNl, the subject to the infinitive, is here indefinite, as Ex. 30, 12 ; see Dav., S., § 91. R. 1. 286 GENESIS, 1 1. nN3!~! is third pers. fem. sing. Hof. from N13, with the old feminine ending n (instead of n), which is preserved as the usual ending of the third fem. perf. in Arabic, Aramaic, and Ethiopic, and appears in Hebrew before the suffixes, and sporadically elsewhere; cf. Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 60; Comp. Gram., p. 167 f.; Ges, § 74. Rem. 1 ; Stade, §407 b; Dr., p. 236. Other instances of the fem. ending are flNlp, nNi?B3, roe>, nblN (the only case with the strong verb). LXX have here as rjveyKd (ro«,= nN3nj possibly not understanding the anomalous form. "n313 = '/rM««//' so Josh. 15, 19. Judg. 1, 15. 1 Sam. 25, 27. 30, 26. 2 Kings 5, 15. nai3=' a present] i.e. as a proof of favour, and often accompanied with a blessing. Knobel compares the presents paid the clergy in the middle ages, called Benedictiones. b3 ^b tt?" "31. 'And because I have everything] *31 as in Judg. 6, 30. 1 Sam. 19, 4. Is. 65, 16 ; see Ewald, § 353 a. Esau has 31 ' an abundance ;' Jacob, being under especial divine protection, can say he has 73 ' everything! 13. "bX? mbX? '=' lactantes] i.e. ' with young ;' so Is. 40, 11. iby=' upon me;' cf. 48, 7. 1 Sam. 21, 16; i.e. the cattle who were with young were a burden and responsibility to Jacob. The R. V. ' with me ' does not sufficiently express the by. inOI . . . OlpCII, lit.= ' and they over-drive them . . .and they die] i.e. 'if they over-drive them . . . they will die] the death of the cattle being conditional on their being over driven; cf. 42, 38 Dniimi . , . J1DN 11Nipi = 'a»rf if trouble befall him . . .ye will bring down;' 44, 4. 22 noi 1*3N nN 3*yi ; cf. 29. See, on two perfs. with waw conv. forming a con- CHAP. 33, VERS. II-I8. 287 ditional sentence, Driver, § 149; also Ges, § 112. 5 a, <=; Ewald, § 357 a; M. R, § 28 ; Dav, S., § 132. DipBTl, the masc. suffix for the fem. ; cf. on 26, 15 ; and on the third pers. pl. used indefinitely, see note on 29, 2. 14. ''ONb, lit. = ' according to my gentleness] i.e. gently. 7 is the i? of ' norm ' or condition, cf. 2 Sam. 15, 11. Is. 1 1, 3. 32, 1 ; see Ew, § 217 d; Dav, S., § 101. R. b : so 7317. n3NbOn b317 = ' according to the pace of the cattle] n3N70 = ' property' (cf. nSpO), here, from the context, in cluding cattle; cf. Ex. 22, 7 with vers. 9 and 10; 1 Sam. 15, 9- 17. n*3 = perhaps, as Del.4 suggests, 'a house] i.e. not a tent, 7,1N 27, 15, but 'a building;' here opposed to n3D 'booths] 'tents'. Hence the name of the place, n3D. ni3D was probably on the eastern side of Jordan, in a valley, a little further west than Peniel ; cf. Josh. 13, 27. Judg. 8, 5. 8. Ps. 60, 8. Its exact position is uncertain ; but it must probably be sought for S. of the Jabbok, near the ford of Damie, on the road from es-Salt to Nablous (Kohler, Geschichte, i. p. 147, Keil, Del, Di.). Sh, G., p. 585, however, thinks Succoth may be the present Tell Deir 'Alia, a high mound in the Jordan valley, about 1 mile N. of the Jabbok. At the present day a S&kut (i^jUL) exists, south of Bethshan, on the western side of Jordan, which is appar ently distinct from the n3D of this verse ; at any rate, it can hardly be the Succoth mentioned here, as it would be too far away from the line of Jacob's journey; see Di, p. 367 ; Del.6, p. 409; also cf. Bad, Pal., p. 167. 18. Obl!?= D17B>3, 28, 21, ' safe and sound] after his late meeting with Esau, and the danger there might possibly have 288 GENESIS, been in encountering him. The LXX, Pesh, Hier. take D7t as a proper name. The Heb.-Sam. reads D17E' here; ci 43> 27. 032?, cf. note on 12, 6, and see Sh, G., pp. 332, 368 ff. Bad, Pal., p. 216 f. "33 nN=' before;' cf. on 19, 13. 19. D3tt? "ON 110n "33 T'O. 'From the sons of Hamor ihe.father of S.,' i.e. the father of Shechem (34, 2), afte: whom the city was called Shechem; cf. 4, 17. The LXJi omit *33, ' in order to agree with 34, 1 ff,' Di. nO"t2?p. LXX, Onq, Hier. render, 'lambs;' cf. Ber Rabba, c. 79; Targg. Ps.-Jon. and Jer. 'pearls! Rabb Akiba, in the Talmud, Tract. Rosh ha-shana, 26 a, relates that in Africa he heard a coin (1?0) called no^p. Probablj the vford='lhat which is weighed] from OE'p=Arab. JLlS= 'to divide] 'fix;' cf. laJLjj 'a weight] 'pair of scales] ther ' a fixed weight] equally used with the shekel by the patriarchs From a comparison with 23, 15. 16 some have supposed the "p to be equivalent to four shekels, but this is quite uncertain 10*'E>p occurs twice again, Josh. 24, 32. Job 42, 1 1, but neithei passage throws any additional light on the word. Cf. alsc Madden, fewish Coinage, p. 6. 34. 1. npi»b rrh* iu?n nNb m (cf. 16, 15 f. 25, 12) an instance of P's circumstantial style. 2. nTlN 33tt?"n. 33E* with the ace, as in Lev. 15, 18 24. Num. 5, 13. 19. 2 Sam. 13, 14. Deut. 28, 30. Kri; cf bv&, which is construed with an ace. and always has a Kr CHAP. 33, VER. 19 CHAP. 34, VER. 8. 289 aaE5. The Mass. punctuation regards nN in these passages as sign of ace, the analogy of 33E5 with Dy, and 7XN, favours the reading nnN, cf. Geiger, Urschrift, p. 407 f. 3. 11>3n. Cf. the note on 24, 14. IXOn 3b 7X? 13T*1=' and he spake kindly to the damsel;' cf. 50, 21 Dai? i>y 131*1; Is. 40, 2. Hos. 2, 16. 5. 'Now facob had heard that he (Shechem) had defiled Dinah his daughter, while his sons were with his cattle in the field, and facob was silent until they came! Ehnil probably, as in 37, 3 nsna li? X\vy\ frequentative; cf. Driver, p. 162. foot-note 1 ; Ges, § 112. 6 b. 0. Dav, S., § 58 b, takes it as simple waw. 7. nnbim. Cf. on 4, 5. 7N1tt*"3 TWy n733 "3 = 'for he had wrought folly in Israel! ,1733 n*E»y is the constant expression for any carnal offence; cf. Deut. 22, 21. Judg. 20, 6. 10. 2 Sam. 13, 12. 33tt?S. See Ges, § 45. ia; Stade, § 619 a. If the second radical of the inf. constr. Qal is one of the six letters n, 3, 3, 1, 3, 3, when 7 is prefixed, it usually is pointed with dag. lene (but not when 3 and 3 are attached), e.g. 33B> with b = (by Ges, § 28. 1; Dav, § 6. 2 d) 3?^, and with the dag. lene 33?^ ; cf. Dav, § 6 end. foot-note (where a list of the so-called half-open syllables is given which is useful for reference), and Ges, § 45- 2- note- nfe?X?" N7 pi. Cf. 4, 7 ; and see note on 20, 9. 8. 1tt?D3 nptt?n "33 D3U?. 'Shechem my son, his soul cleaves' etc. *33 G1V, a casus pendens; cf. Deut. 32, 4 11X1 17ys D*on, Is. 11, 10 IBhl* D*13 1*7N . . . V* V-\V; see Driver, § 197. 2 ; Ges, § 140. 3 5 M. R, § 132 ; Dav, S., § 106. u 290 GENESIS, D3nH3. The pl. suffix includes the brothers with the father; cf. 17 isna; 24, 59 f. 9. 13nN 13nnnn. So Deut. 7, 3. Josh. 23, 12 (both with 3) = to intermarry. ^riN (cf. ver. 2) might possibly be pointed UFIN ; cf. the construction 3 fnnnn. nN fnnnn is found again in 1 Kings 3, 1, but whether nN in this passage is a prep, or the sign of the ace is uncertain; cf. Ewald, § 124b. 10. minDl. inD is construed with an ace like a verb= going; cf. 42, 34 linon pNn nv.\=-' traffic in the land] i.e. go to and fro in the land for the purpose of trading. T\1 ItnNn = ' settle down therein] lit. ' hold yourselves fast therein] The word is peculiar to P; so again 47, 27. 12. jnOI ino. mo = the price paid to the parents for their daughter; cf. Ex. 22, 15. 1 Sam. 18, 25:^0= the gifts given to the bride ; cf. 24, 53, where a like distinction is made. 13. NOO IttJN 1131"1. LXX, ko.1 i\dXVo-av airols, Sri iplavav, which would mean, ' and spoke, because they had defiled] or, (?) ' and said, that they had defiled] which would be better expressed by NOO *3 110N*1. The first meaning being very lame and the second doubtful, it has been conjectured that 131 here must = the Arabic "IS, and mean, 'to act craftily behind one's back] ' lay snares for ;' cf. 2 Chron. 22, 10 (but see Bertheau); so Ges. in Thes., p. 315 a, Kn. This, however, is not certain (see Di, p. 373); so perhaps it is simpler to read noioa 1131*1 instead of 1131*1 10103; so Pesh. Jla±= o)?^ oy»{o. Kuenen emends, lsnMN for DnWN, but then 1131*1 would have to mean 1MN 7N E**N 110N1 . 15. nNn = 'wz this condition] 3 being the 3 of price; cf. ver. 22. 1 Sam. 11, 2. CHAP. 34, VERS. 9-24. 291 niN3, imperf. Nif. of niN; it occurs again in vers. 22. 23, and 2 Kings 12, 9, but nowhere else. In Rabb. the part. Nif. niNS is found, =' suitable] Hitzig and Stade, § 585 a, prefer to take it as imperf. Qal, like ^3*; cf. on 23, 13, where Hitzig reads nnN DN as perf. Qal from niN. bonb. The subject of the inf. cstr. is here in the nominative, see Ges, § 115. 2. Rem. 2; Dav, S., § 91 a; M. R, § 1 1 7. 13T 73 D37 71D1 is a phrase characteristic of P ; so 17, 10. Ex. 12, 48. 1 6. 13n31 . ' Then we will give! The perf. with waw conv.; the apodosis to 1303 l*,m DN in ver. 15; cf. vers. 17. 18. 26, and often. J9- 11lN = inN, cf. fNO, the vowel being lengthened by way of compensation for the non-doubling of n ; see Stade, § 386 d. 2 ; Ges, § 64. 3. 20. Di"1!* 1XN2? 7N. Cf. 23, 10. 18. Is. 29, 21. Am. 5, 10. i*y,1 iyE* was the oriental Forum. 21. ' These men, they are peaceably disposed towards us! Casus pendens; cf. on ver. 8; see Driver, § 198; and Ges, § 143 a; Dav, S., §§ 104 b, 106 a. Cf. also 40, 12. 18. 41, 25-27. 42, 11. 45, 20. 47, 6. 48, 5 (on *7). 0"Obffi 'peaceable! Geiger, Urschrift, p. 76, proposes the curious rendering ' Salemites] also taking D7E', 33, 18, as the name of a city belonging to Shechem. D"1" n3m. ' Wide on both sides;' so Judg. 18, 10. Is. 22, 18; also Ps. 104, 25 (D*1* am . . . DM). intt?1. LXX, Sam, Pesh, Vulg. omit the 1 and connect 13E5* withisnN. 24. II?® "N2" 73. Cf. 23, 10. 18, and the note on ver. 10. On the verbs NX* and Na with the accusative, and u 2 292 GENESIS, so capable of the genitive construction with the participle, see Ges, § 116. 3. Rem.; Dav, S., § 98. R. 1. 25. D"3N3 DnT'nn, i.e. when they were attacked with the fever that appears on the third day after circumcision in the case of adults. The third day was the most critical time for the circumcised person ; cf. Tuch, p. 409. ^ibl pX'OC?', i.e. Simeon and Levi with their fellow- tribesmen. 13in 12?^. 'Each one his sword;' see Ges, § 139. 1; M. R, § 72. 3. Rem. a; Dav, S., § 11. R. d; and cf. 42, 25 lp'E> i?N E'*N. nD3, elsewhere usually 1037,=' ?'# security] a circum stantial accusative, as in 1 Sam. 12, n n03 13EM1; Ez. 30, 9 noa E'13 nN Tinii?; cf. Ges, § 118. 5; Dav, S., § 70 b. 26. 3"*n ''Db, not 'with the edge] but 'according to the mouth of etc., i.e. according to its ability to devour; cf. 2 Sam. 2, 26. 11, 25 3in,1 73Nn ,1T31, nT3 *3. Usually 3in *37 is connected with nan • to smite] but it is also found with other verbs, though only here with 311 (Di.). 27. npi*" "33. LXX, Pesh, Saadiah, Sam, and two- MSS. (Wright) read *331, which is not so abrupt; possibly waw originally stood before *S3, and dropped out on account of the final 1 of 1NX*1, ver. 26 ; dr the Vss. might have added it, to remove the abrupt commencement of the verse. The *33 are probably only Simeon and Levi, not the other sons of Jacob ; cf. ver. 30, where only Simeon and Levi are blamed. 30. "3tt?"N2!lb, lit. 'by making me stink] i.e. bringing me into evil repute; so Ex. 5, 21. 1 Sam. 13, 4. 2 Sam. 10, 6. Cf. the English phrase, 'To be in bad odour with any one! CHAP. 34, VER. 25 CHAP. 35, VER. 4. 293 1DD0 "nO, lit. 'men of number] i.e. so few that they might easily be counted; cf. Ges, § 128. 2 g; M. R, § 79. 4. Rem. a: so Deut. 4, 27. Ps. 105, 12; cf. Is. 10, 19. For MO, see on 4, 18 ; cf. Barth, A7. B., p. 5. It is only found in the plural; see Ewald, § 178 d; Stade, § 183. "•313m . . . 13DN31. Cf. on 33, 13 moi . . . Dlp311. 31. n31t3n, so Baer and Del, with 3 aspirated; cf. 27, 38. Job 15, 8. 22, 13; and the metheg (Ga'ya) before the pathach, to distinguish the 1 interrog. from the 1 of the article (Del). The ordinary text has T majusculum. nfa?i*\ Cf. Lev. 16, 15 101 nN n'E'yi. 35. 1. bNn"3 nbl\ Bethel was situated on a hill; cf. ver. 8 7Nn*37 nWlD; 1 Sam. 10, 3. 2. 133n YT7N nN, especially the Teraphim (31, 19) which Rachel had taken with her. 133 M7N= ' strange gods] lit. 'gods of strangeness ;' cf. Josh. 24, 23. Judg. 10, 16. So 133 J3 'son of strangeness '=' stranger' (17, 12. Ex. 12, 43). lintSn for "nonn, by Ges, § 54. 2 b; Dav, § 26. 3. 3. Tn . . . "nN n31*n. The participle continued by an imperf. with waw conv, a fact being stated; so 49, 17. Num. 22, 11 J*y nN D3*1 D*1X00 NXM; cf. on 27, 33. 4. D"Ot3n, i.e. the earrings that were worn as talismans and amulets, and so belonging to the heathen practices, which Jacob required them to give up. n7Nn nTin . ' Under the terebinth] i.e. the well-known terebinth, which would be familiar to the reader; hence the article; cf. 12, 6. Possibly, as Tuch suggests, the tree 294 GENESIS, mentioned here is the same as the one in Judg. 9, 6, where Abimelech was made king. n!?N always = a single tree, and usually has the article. The LXX insert here, (cat a7ra>Xeo-«> avra. eas rrjs o-qpepov ripipas; which Frankel, Einf, p. 56, explains as a marginal gloss, added by a pious reader who objected to 100*1. 5. D"nbN nnn, not 'a mighty terror] but 'a terror of God] i. e. one caused or sent by Him ; cf. DM7N in3, 2 Chron. 20, 29; ni,1* in3, 2 Chron. 14, 13. nnn is a anag Xeyop. The genitive is an objective genitive ; cf. on 9, 2. 7. DTlbNn T*bN lb33 plural, perhaps because DM7N1 here includes the angels; cf. 28, 12; see also 20, 13. Josh. 24, 19. Onq. here has *M N'a^bo 'angels of Y.;' but Berliner in his edition gives ** n*i> *i>3n*N, i.e. 'Y. appeared to him;' cf. note on 20, 13. $. m33 pbN, probably identical with the palm tree of Deborah, Judg. 4, 5, and perhaps with the Terebinth of Tabor, mentioned in 1 Sam. 10, 3. Cf. Well, Comp., p. 215 (connects D*33, Judg. 2, 1, with ni33 J17N). 10. Cf. 32, 29. n. "PSbnO. In 46, 26 we have 131* *NX*; D*sno is never used in this connexion. 14. )3N raSO . . . nn*iO. pN n3X0 is epexegetical ; cf. 15, 18. 25, fo; and see M. R, § 72. 3. *JD3 n"bX» "JD"1. Cf. 28, 18 fOE* pX*l. IDS was probably a libation of wine (Targ. Ps.-Jon, wine and water). Some (Kn, Well.)takefOE' . . . px*l as epexegetical to ID*!. 15. DC? inN 131 ItfM. Contrast ver. 13 and ver. 14, where GV is omitted, as no confusion can arise in the sentence through its absence ; see M.R, §§ 156 d, 157 c; Dav, S, § 9 d. CHAP. 35, VERS. 5-18. 295 bNn"*3. The narrative in this ver. is from P. The other account in 28, 19 is probably from J. 16. yiNn ni33 occurs again 48, 7 and 2 Kings 5, 19 ; but neither of these passages throws any light on the word ni33 ; however, from 2 Kings, 1. c, it could not have been a very great distance. LXX have here Xa0pa8d, but in 48, 7 tov mtr68popov Xa0pa8d (a double translation), i. e. either a stadium, or like the Arabic u»rsJl laj-i (i. e. as far as a horse can run), a measure common among the Arabs; see H.W.B., nth ed, p. 373. .Pesh. \JLa>Jb, a 'parasang,' = eighteen thousand paces or three German miles ; cf. Bernst, Syr. Lex., p. 408 b. Onq. has NV"]N 3113 = < about an acre] etc. ; cf. Levy, Chald. W. B., i. 384 a. Del. and Tuch take it as=' about an hour s journey] Cf. Ges, Thes., p. 658 b. 17. mb"On, 'the midwife' who would naturally be present. The article by Dav, S., § 21 d, cf. on 14, 13: and see 18, 7. 22, 6. 24, 20. 26, 8. 38, 28. Ex. 2, 15. p ~]b nt D3 "3. Cf. 30, 24, where Rachel wishes that she may have another son. 18. "31N V2 = 'son of my sorrow;' inasmuch as giving birth to him cost her her life. His father, however, instead of this ill-omened name, called him [*0*33 ' son of the right hand] i.e. son of good luck, the right side being considered by the ancients as the lucky side ; cf. Ges. in Thes., p. 599, and 8e|tor and dpiarepos in Greek, f? is pointed with hireq like the pr. n. np* }3 in Prov. 30, 1 ; pi ??, Num. n, 28, etc.; cf. ni?*7 fa, Jon. 4, 10. Del. gives two other explanations of the name ' son of good fortune! I. He might have been so named because he was born when Jacob was free, his other children having been born when he was in Laban's service. II. Because 296 GENESIS, he completed the lucky number (twelve) of his sons. In Ps. 89, 13 f*0* = '//fc south] so Rashi explains the name as meaning the 'south son] as opposed to the others, who were ' north sons', being born in Aramea ; but Canaan is nowhere called ' the south land] 19. Dnb n"3 Nin nniDN. So 48, 7, i.e. Bethlehem, two hours south of Jerusalem; cf. Sh, G., p. 318 f. ; Mic. 5, 1 iniSN Dni? n*3; 1 Chron. 4, 4. Matt. 2, 16-18. Di, Thenius, and others, from 1 Sam. 10, 2 ff . (cf. Jer. 31, 14), consider that Rachel's grave must be sought for much further north, in the territory of Benjamin, or on the boundary between Benjamin and Ephraim, on the way between Ramah of Samuel and Gibeah of Saul, not far from Bethel. Di. points out that this would be more natural, as Rachel was the mother of Joseph and Benjamin ; and as ancestress of the great northern tribes, we should hardly expect to find the site of her grave in the territory of Judah; cf. Bad, Palest., p. 121. An Ephrath, however, on the frontier between Ephraim and Benjamin has not yet been discovered. The writer Jiere clearly means Ephrath, i.e. Bethlehem, and we must assume with Nold. and Del.6, that side by side with the Ephraimitic tradition, there existed a Judaic, according to which the grave was situated near the Judaic Ephrath. Otherwise we must suppose that here and 48, 7 Dn? n*3 Nin is a gloss. 21. 11X? 71307 nNbilO. 'On the other side of Migdal 'Eder;' so Amos 5, 27 p'VO-b 1N710 'on the other side of Damascus] beyond Damascus. 11X? b"\SCi = ' Herd's tower;' cf. 2 Kings 17, 9. 18, 8. 2 Chron. 26, 10. The narrative fixes its position between Ephrath and Hebron. Knobel places it at Jerusalem (cf. Mic. 4, 8); so the LXX, who place ver. 21 after 7Nn*30 CHAP. 35, VERS. 19-26. 297 in ver. 16 and read instead of iyD*l ver. 16, 3py* yD*1, and omit 7N1E>* yD*l from the beginning of ver. 2 1 . Del. considers that it was near Bethlehem. 22. ptt?3 with a with dag, an exception to the rule given in the note on 34, 7. "l31 SSffll. Cf. 2 Sam. 16, 22. 1 Kings 2, 22. The Massoretes here have a note, pIDS yX0N3 NEJD3, i.e., ' a gap in the middle of the verse] There are three of these niNppa in the Pent, and twenty-eight in the books from Joshua to Ezekiel. They are not mentioned in the Talmud or Midrash (Del.). Verse 22 down to 7N1E'* has a double accentuation, according as it is read as a complete verse or as a half-verse. Geiger, Urschrift, p. 373, points out that in the public reading of the text the two verses 22 and 23 were read as one, so that the passage might be passed over in reading as quickly as possible, and the attention of the audience diverted from the evil deed of Reuben. The correct accentuation makes ver. 22 end at 7N1E'*, and ver. 23 begin at 1*1*1, one section ending at ver. 22, and a fresh one begin ning with ver. 23. The first way of accenting the verses here (viz. making 22 end at 7N1E>*, and 23 begin with 1*1*1) is called Jinnn Dyo (' lower accentuation ') ; the second way (viz. making the two verses one), p*7y Dyo (' upper accentua tion'). Cf. the double set of accents in the Decalogue in Exodus and Deut, and cf. Num. 25, 19 and Deut. 2, 8, where there is a gap in the middle of the verse. The LXX have the addition, ko.1 rroviqpov icpdvrj ivavTiov airov = l*S*y3 yi*1 , possibly added to avoid the abrupt ending, which is regarded by Di. as intentional, to draw attention to 49, 3 f. 26. iV]. Sam. and Heb. MSS. (Di.) Vl^, as in 36, 5. 112?N, as the text stands, is ace case, cf. note on 4, 18. 298 GENESIS, 36. The Toledoth Esau follow in this chapter, preceding those of Jacob, just as Ishmael's preceded Isaac's ; the object of the chapter, and its position before the account of Jacob's family, being to dispose of Esau, and leave the course of the narrative entirely free for Jacob's history. The Edomites, Esau's descendants, first appear again in Num. 20, 14 ff. Such a detailed account of the history of Edom can be explained sufficiently from the fact that Edom always passed as Israel's brother (cf. Num., 1. c), and occupied an important position in the history of Israel. A partial list of the descendants of Esau is given in 1 Chron. 1, 35-54. 2. In 26, 34 (P) Esau married Yehudith the daughter of Beeri the Hittite, and Basemath the daughter of Elon the Hittite. In 28, 9 (P) he takes, in addition to his other wives (l*Ei3 i?y) — i.e. those of 26, 34 — Mahalath, Ishmael's daughter. Thus, according to 26, 34. 28, 9 (P), Esau's three wives were, 1. Yehudith, Beeri the Hittite's daughter ; 2. Basemath, Elon the Hittite's daughter; and 3. Mahalath, Ishmael's daughter. Here Esau's wives are given, 1 . Adah the daughter of Elon the Hittite; 2. Oholibamah1 the daughter of Anah, the daughter of Tsibeon the Hivite ; 3. Basemath the daughter of Ishmael, the sister of Nebayoth. There are three serious discrepancies in the two accounts : 1. The Basemath of 26, 34 is here called Adah ; 2. the Oholibamah the daughter of Anah, the daughter of Tsibeon the Hivite (cf. below) = (apparently) Yehudith the daughter of Beeri the Hittite of 26, 34; and 3. Ishmael's daughter Mahalath, 28, 9, is here called Basemath. 1 Names compounded with 'jnN (cf. Ex. 31, 6. Ez. 23, 4. 5) are also found in Phoenician, cf. C.I.S., i. p. 72 -^n^ns, p. 74 'H'a'mN'; Bloch, Phoen. Glossar, p. 11. CHAP. 36, VERS. 2-6. 299 With regard to ver. 2 *inn J1JJ3X na we must read (i) for *in, *lh, as ver. 25 (cf. ver. 20) shews; and (ii) either render n3 'granddaughter] cf. ver. 39 (?) and 29, 5 (where p must= 'grandson'); or emend and read p, so Sam, LXX, Pesh. In vers. 20. 25 Anah is described as the son of Seir the Horite, in this verse and ver. 24 he is the son of Tsibeon. The difficulty as regards Anah may be solved by assuming that there were two different persons of that name. In ver. 2 5*> Oholibamah is the daughter of Anah son of Seir, but in this verse and ver. 10 she is the daughter of Anah the son of Tsibeon. To remove this discrepancy, Del. has proposed to place 25^ (? a gloss) after 24b. Its present position may be due to the fact, that only a single name follows the formula, isy *33 ,17N1 ver. 25. Various hypotheses have been adopted to reconcile the different accounts of Esau's wives. Some have held that Esau had five wives; others (Hengst, Ros.) that the wives had two names, or had their names changed. Kn. and Ewald suppose that the names have been corrupted by copyists. If this is the case, the corruption must have been, as Di. points out, very great. Others (Del, Tuch, Nold.) explain the difference in the two accounts as arising from two different traditions. This seems the most natural solution. We must then, however, assume that R, either in this chapter, or in 26, 34 f. 28, 9, has inserted into the text of P, the names of Esau's wives, from some other source. The former view is perhaps more probable. Although c. 36 belongs to P in the main, there are evident traces of revision by R from other sources, in vers. 2-5. 9-28. Cf. Driver, Introd., p. 10, Di. and Del. ad loc. 6. Esau takes his wives and children, and all his property, and leaves Canaan for the land of Seir, out of the way of his brother Jacob. 300 GENESIS, yiN 7N as it stands yields no suitable sense. The Targums and Vulg. read nmN pN i?N. Ges. render's the text, 'to a land east of '(lit. before) facob;' but *330 can hardly mean this. LXX and Sam. read }y33 pNO, possibly a cor rection. The Pesh. has i»^a>; i^»l!> cf- vers- 8- 9> which is probably the correct reading, so Di, Tuch. 7. n3CJO. Cf. 4, 13 NltS'30. 8-. I"!?©, at a later date, included (cf. Deut. 2. Ez. 35, 15) the hill country of Edom, east of the Arabah, between the Dead Sea and the JElanitic Gulf. The northern half = the modern GeMI, and the southern half = the modern es-Sera. Originally (Judg. 5, 4. Deut. 33, 2, cf. Num. 20, 16. Josh. n, 17. 12, 7. 15, 1), the name Mount Seir was applied to the hill country west of the Arabah ; which rises to a considerable height to the south of the 'bald mountain' (pbnn im), the southern limit of the hill country of Judah ; a wild and desolate region now inhabited by the Arab tribe, the 'Azazime. n. The Canaanitish line. ]0"n is the name of a district of Edom (Jer. 49, 20. Amos 1, 12. Hab. 3, 3) celebrated for its wise men (Jer. 49, 7. Bar. 3, 22 f.); the home of Eliphaz, Job 2, 11. 101N, 1D2J, and Dni*3 are quite unknown. Op. Cf. 15, 19, where the Kenizites are mentioned among other tribes dwelling in the south of Canaan. 12. pboi', not identical with the great Amalekite people mentioned in 14, 7, who dwelt in the south of Canaan; but probably only a portion of those, who attached themselves to the families of Eliphaz, or were subject to them (Di.) ; cf. ver. 22. CHAP. 36, VERS. 7—24. 301 13. The Ishmaelitish line. The names are not further known. 14. The Horite line. Nothing further is known about the names here given. 15-19. The tribal princes of Edom. 15. F*|17N, a denom. from *|7N 'a thousand' =chiliarch or phylarch, mostly used of the tribal princes of Edom, more rarely of those of Judah, Zech. 9, 7. 12, 5. 6; see Driver, The Expositor, July, 1885. 16. nip ff17N, mentioned in ver. 18 as the son of Esau by Oholibamah, is wanting in the Sam. Codex and Vs., and one Heb. MS. (Wright), and is rejected as spurious by Tuch, Knobel, Del. Di. considers that it either crept in here by the oversight of a copyist from ver. 18, or is a gloss assigning Korah, according to another theory, to the family of Eliphaz. 20-30. The tribes of the Horites. The inhabitants of the land, as opposed to the descendants of Esau, who took possession of it (Deut. 2, 12). 20. linn from lin 'a hole] so 'a dweller in a hole or cave] ' a troglodyte'. ' The land of Edom abounds in holes or caves* (Di.). The identification of the names in the following verses is uncertain; cf. Di, p. 386 f. 24. n"N1. Most commentators read n*N with 1 Chron. 1, 40, LXX, Pesh, and Vulg. ; the text as it stands yields no suitable sense. DO"n. Targ. Jer, Saad, Kimchi, Luther, 'mules;' so the A. V.; more probably 'hot water springs' (R.V. 'the hot springs'), which Del. identifies with the hot springs of Callirrhoe, beneath Zerka Ma'in, on the east side of the Dead 302 GENESIS, Sea, about two hours distant from it ; cf. Hieron, Quaest. ed. Lag, p. 56 ; Bad, Pal., p. 190 ; Sh, G., pp. 562, 57 1- Onq. and Ps.-Jon. seem either to have read D*D*N,1, 'the giant race' mentioned in Deut. 2, 10, or to have taken DOM as meaning this. Pesh. gives 0*O, and one Heb. MS. (Wright). 26. I^l. LXX, Pesh, Vulg, 1 Chron. 1, 41, and most commentators read jfe"1!. 30. Dn"QbNb. ' According to their tribal princes] LXX, iv rdls riyepovlais, reading Dn*BpNp, possibly the correct reading, as this is the only place in this chapter where t)17N is written without the 1. It is worthy of notice that many of the names in this list, vers. 20-30, are names of animals, e.g. 731B' = in Arabic 'young lion;' -JE'*1 pygarg, a kind of antelope or gazelle, Deut. 14, 5 ; cf. Di. on Lev. 1 1, 2 f.; pyax = in Arabic 'hyena] etc.; cf. 1133y = mouse, ver. 38. Di. remarks, 'that it is a natural thing for peoples amongst whom the arts and trades were not developed to be fond of choosing their family names from the names of animals.' Cf. Rob. Smith, fourn. Phil., ix. 75 ff. 31-39. The names of the kings who ruled in the land of Edom. The names in this list are also doubtful; cf. Di, p. 388 ff. r 33. ni2J3D, now a little village in Gebal, BusSra, four miles south of the south end of the Dead Sea ; cf. Bad, Pal., p. 151- 37. in3n m^niO. Several places in the O. T. are called Rehoboth. The one mentioned here has been identified with Rahba, iSLj, on the western bank of the Euphrates (1131 elsewhere being the river par excellence, i.e. the Euphrates), south of the spot where the Chaboras enters the river. But this identification is not certain. CHAP. 36, VER. 26 — CHAP. 37, VER. 2. 303 40-43. A brief review of the tribal princes of Esau. The list contains partly names of individuals, e. g. T3p, 103*71N, and partly names of districts, e. g. 13*3, ,li?N . Most of the names of places in this list are uncertain. nbN, perhaps the seaport n?*N; cf. on 14, 6. p^C, also called in Num. 33, 42 (313, in Idumea, between Petra and Zoar, well known through its mines. 37. 2 . 'foseph, being seventeen years old, was tending the flock with his brethren, while yet a lad, with the sons of Bilhah, and with the sons of Zilpah, his father s wives, and foseph brought an evil report about them to their father! ni*1 nVT. Cf. the note on 4, 17. "IX?] Nim. LXX, &>v vios. A. V. renders incorrectly, ' and the lad was with the sons of Bilhah] for the clause is a circumstantial one; cf. note on 20, 3. Pesh. and Onq. seem to have misunderstood the words; the Pesh. has ooo Jxz> vJL Joo. ]i3» 'and he was growing up with' etc.; and Onq. *33 Dy *31 N111 « and he was growing up with the sons of etc. *S3 nN has been rendered variously. Knobel and Del.6 give the following meaning to the words. Joseph was feeding the flock with his brethren, as servant to the sons of Bilhah, etc.; i.e. he was handed over to their charge to learn, or to help them in their business; comparing, for this use of 15??, Judg. 7, n. 9, 54- *9> !3> but this is giving the words of the text a very forced meaning, and it is questionable whether iys can be used in this way. The rendering of the LXX, ' being yet a lad, with the sons'— 304 GENESIS, nN in the same sense as the nN in JNX3 1MN nN, just before — is unobjectionable. 1*3N . . . lys N111 is perhaps a doublet to jnx3 . . . niv ni'E>y yaE* p spi*. ni*1 Dn31. 'An evil report about them;' nyi is inten tionally indefinite, ,iyi,1 Dn31 would mean, 'their evil report;' cf. Ges, § 126. 5. Rem. 1 b. Possibly the words should be rendered, ' the report of them (as) an evil one] a sort of tertiary predicate; cf. Num. 14, 37 nyi pN,1.n31; 1 Sam. 2, 23 D*yi D3*131 nN. See also Dav, S., § 32. R. 2. nai in the Pent, only occurs in P. 3. lb Nin D"3,7T p ''3. Cf. 21, 2. 44, 20. lb nffiX'l. Either a case of the perf. with simple waw; or, possibly, with waw conv. in a freq. sense (29, 3); cf. 1 Sam. 2, 19. D^DB n^n3 only in this chapter and 2 Sam. 13, 18 (of Tamar's garment as the clothing of a king's daughter). D3 = ' an end] ' extremity] used of the hands and feet ; so D*D3 nsn3 = 'a coal of extremities] i.e. one reaching to the wrists and ancles; and, as is apparent from 2 Sam. l.c, worn by the upper classes. The ordinary nsn3 only reached to the knees, and had no sleeves. Cf. DS in Aramaic (e.g. Dan. 5, 5. 24), of the extremities of the hand and foot, and Jfcima used in a similar way. This meaning is supported by the Pesh. here, and the Vulg, LXX, and Aquila in 2 Sam. 1. e The LXX and Vulg. here, and the Pesh. in 2 Sam, and A.V. here and 2 Sam, 'a coat of (many) colours] margin (' pieces'), but this meaning of 0% = ' a piece' or 'patch] and so "3 "3 ' a variegated garment] is very doubtful. The R.V. retains the rendering, 'a coat of many colours] though it gives in the margin, ¦ a long garment with sleeves! CHAP. 37, VERS. 3-1 1. 305 4. D7ttJ7 1131. 'To speak peaceably to him] or 'to address him in greeting] i.e. to greet him and answer his inquiries after their health (Del.). There is only one other instance of 131 with the person addressed, in the ace case, viz. Num. 26, 3; but the text in this passage seems to be corrupt. Cf. Di. ad loc. Deut. 18, 21 f. quoted by Di. does not seem to be parallel, the suffix in each verse not being personal. 5. N3to 111* 13D1"1. Cf. on 8, 10. 7. 'And behold we were binding sheaves (partic) in the midst of the field, and behold my sheaf rose, and also stood up; and behold your sheaves were moving round (imperf.), and bowed down (imperf. with waw conv, denoting a single action) to my sheaf D*07NO ' were binding] participle, as in 13, 7 ; cf. the note there, and Dav, S., § 100 f. 13*3Dn =' began to move round] ' Joseph represents the sheaves as being in motion ' (Driver, §277). pnntiJm, TJ scriptio defectiva for ns, 'and they did bow down] i.e. once, and not more ; the imperf. with waw conv. describing a fact that happened once only in the past : con trast ns*3Dn, where the action has begun, and is still going on to completion. 8. DN . . . 170I1 . The disjunctive or alternative question is put with n in the first clause and DN or DN1 in the second, see Dav, ^, § 1 24 ; Ges, § 1 50. 2 and R.b; M.R, §145; and cf. Josh. 5, 13. Judg. 9, 2. 2 Sam. 24, 13- 1 Kings 22, 15. 10. N133 NUn. See note on 2, 16. and for the inf. abs. emphasizing the verb in a question, ver. 8. 24, 5. 43,7- Num- 22, 30. Judg. 11, 25. n. 13in nN lOttJ V3N1. Cf. Luke 2, 19. gi- x 306 GENESIS, 12. ]N2 hN. nN with two dots over it, probably because it was regarded as a doubtful reading. The Bereshith Rabba, cited by Strack, p. 89, explains the. points as follows, llpsi loxy nN niyi? ntn 137,1 abv 1017 nN by, i.e. ' With points on the nN, meaning that they only went lo feed themselves (not the flocks) ! ' So the Midr. Bern, cited by Strack at the same place. 14. DlbttJ = ' well-being] applied to the fiocks and to Joseph's brethren. 131 "33tt?m. Note the phrase 131 3*EM = ' bring back word] 2 accus, by Ges, § 117. 5. R. y; Dav, S., § 75 d ; M. R, § 45- 4- 15. ni*n n3m for nyn issn = nyn nh nsn; cf. on 32, 7. 17. D'HDN inXJOiy. Cf. 27, 6 1310 i*3N nN '¦nym; Dav, S., § 78 ; M. R., § 46. 2 ; Ew, § 284 b. The obj. of D*10N is omitted, cf. Ges, § 117. 1. R. 4. Sam. Ver. reads DMypE'. n3'ini ' towards Ddthdn] D6than orD6thain,=' twofoun- tains (?),' or perhaps ' cisterns] was about five hours north of Samaria. In Judith 3, 9 f. 4, 6. 7, 3. 8, 3, it is called Aomu'a or Aadatp, and is described as on the south side of the plain of Jezreel, between Scythopolis and Geba, near the ancient Ginnaea (Genin). Ruins, which still exist at Tell D6thin i£ hrs. S.W. of 6enin, mark the site of the place, cf. Bad, Pal., p. 226; Sh, G., pp. 151, 356. Through the plain of Tell D6Mn, south of Genin, the road from Bethshan and Jezreel to Ramleh and Egypt passes (Di.) ; cf. ver. 25 and Ebers, Egypten und die B. Mose's, p. 288. The form JM11 is apparently the Aramaic dual, of which (nil is a con traction; cf. jnip and 3M*lp, D3*}? and 3*3*y, and see Ges, chap. 37, vers. 12-24. 3°7 A — — — - — — § 88. 1. Rem. 1, and the forms found on the Moabite stone, e.g. jn*1p = DMnp, line 10; MNO = DMNO ('two hundred'), line 20; M731 = DM731, line 30; pun = D*31Hn, line 31. Cf. Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 150. Others consider that all the proper names ending in }*— and 3*— are not duals, but merely diphthongal pronunciations of the endings )— and D— . Cf. Well, Comp., p. 45. Barth, N.B., p. 319, regards the D*_ in proper names in Hebrew not as a dual, but as an ancient termination found in proper names of places, which was afterwards replaced by the endings ]-^-, J1—, and D— . Thus he considers the dual ending 3*-^- as older than the endings I— , |— > and B— • 18. 1b33ni . . . 3ipi DIOnl. Cf. the note on 2, 5 ; also Driver, § 127 0 ; Dav, S., §§ 50 b, 145 c ; Ges, §§ 107. 1. R. 1, in. 2. R. 1. inN 1733^1. 'They plotted against him] Hithpa'el with the ace. as in 1 Chron. 29, 17 n7N 73 M3isnn; see Ewald, § 124 b; Ges, § 54. 3 <=, and § 117. 4. Rem. 2; Dav, S., § 73. R. 4; cf. Ps. 105, 25, where 733nn takes the prep. 3. 19. mobnn blO. Cf. on 14, 13. nt7,1 as in 24, 65; cf. the note there. 21. ©33 1333 N7 = '&/ us not smite him as to life] i.e. mortally; so Deut. 22, 26 E'DS lnxil; see the note on 3, 15. 23. "l31 lO^SI. Verbs of 'clothing with] and 'stripping off] take 2 accusatives, see Dav, S., § 75 c; Ges, § 117. 5 a; M.R, §45-i- 24. ni3n. Cf. Jer. 38, 6 (where Jeremiah is cast into a pit with no water in it, but mud); Lam. 3, 53. x 2 308 GENESIS, 25. Oflb b.3N7 = '/o take their meal] lit. 'to eat breJjtf the meal being so called from the chief article of food ; cf. 3i, 54- 43. 25- Ma"- i5> 2. D^bNycto'* nniN. So Is. 21, 13 D*S11 niniN; Job 6, 19 Ncn niniN. nniN is the part. Qal fem. of niN, used in a collective sense. DIN = ' a single traveller] nnik ' a company of travellers', ' a caravan! Other feminines used collectively are IMN 'brotherhood] from nN 'brother;' ,133y ' a mass of clouds] from fSJ? ' a cloud; ' 1?i3 ' a band of exiles ;' see Ges, § 122. 4 c; Stade, § 312 b; Dav, S., § 14. 2. nN3] = ' tragacanth gum] the resinous gum of the astragalus gummifer : *1X = ' balsam' (*1X for *1¥, like *N1 for*Ni, j0b 37, 18 ; *01; for *»1, Is. 38, 10) : not real balsam, but the gum of the pistacia lentiscus, the mastic-tree : 07 = 'ladanum;' the aromatic gum of the cistus rose, or cistus creticus, three articles which even at the present day form the chief trade of the Arab-Egyptian caravans. Ebers, Egypten, etc, p. 292, has found nN33 and *1X on the Egyptian inscriptions, but not 07; he also (p. 293) mentions that gum, balsam, and incense are the chief imports from the East to Egypt at the present day, and — with the exception of a short distance by rail— are brought by the same method, i.e. caravans, as in the days of the patriarchs. The caravan road from Damascus to Egypt is the same now as in the time of Joseph. 26. X*^3 no = ' what gain, that we kill?' on the con struction, cf. M. R, § 93. Rem. b; Dav, S., §§ 8. R. 2, 53 b; see also Ewald, § 326 a. 28. OO'HD. Cf. on 25, 2. In this chapter there are two distinct parallel accounts of the CHAP. 37, VERS. 25-35. 3°9 way in which Joseph was taken to Egypt. In 37, 19-21. 25-27. 280 (to silver). 31-35. 39, 1 etc. J, Joseph is sold by his brethren to the Ishmaelites, cf. 45, 4b. In 37, 22-24. 28. 29-30. 36 E, his brethren cast him into a pit, from which he is stolen by the Midianites, without their know ledge, cf. 40, 15. In J the leading part is taken by Judah, so 43, 4 f. 44, 16 ff. ; in E by Reuben, so 42, 22. 37, cf. Driver, Introd., p. 16. f. ; Di. p. 392. f)D3 D"ltoj*3. bpV omitted; see note on 20, 16. The LXX have cIkoo-l xpvo-av, so in 45, 22. The price of a slave between five and twenty years was twenty shekels ; see Lev. 27, 5. On slavery in Egypt, see Ebers' note, Egypten und die Biicher Mose's, p. 293 ff, where he shews that the narrative in this chapter is quite in accordance with what used to take place at the time of the Pharaoh whose favourite Joseph became. 32. 133, n3n3i1. As nsn3 is in the cstr. state ,1 cannot be the article, but ,1 interrog. Cf. Ges, § 100. 4. Rem.; Dav, S., § 49 end. 33. &*,10 FpO. Inf. abs. Qal, with perf. Pu'al; cf. Ges, § 113. 3. Rem. 4; Dav, S., § 86. R. 2, and see Job 6, 2 b\>$l b\p&, the inf. abs. Qal and imperf. Nif, Gen. 46, 4 iby D3 fjiJyN, inf. Qal and imperf. Hif. 35. "3, either (1) introducing the words of the speaker, or (2) the Latin imo, ' no! b3N . . . UN 'I shall go down as one mourning' etc. Circ. clause, so Driver, p. 203, who cps. Lev. 20, 20. Dt. 4, 27. 9, 3, etc. Cf. Driver, 1. c. note 2, and note on 15, 2. nbNti) = ' to Sheol] ' the underworld;' always without the article. The word probably = ' the hollow place] from 7NE*= 310 GENESIS, byv. Another derivation, now almost obsolete, is from 7NB' ' to ask] with reference to the inexorable demand made by death on all mortals, and then transferred to the place of death, to which all mortals must come, ' the house of meeting for all living] Job 30, 23 ; cf. Is. 5, 14. Hab. 2, 5. 36. D"310n either abbreviated or corrupted from D*S*10, which is the reading of all the versions here. IB^tDIDb. 13*013 is the same as yi3 *01D, 41, 45. 46, 20, the former name being abbreviated from the latter. LXX have both TieTeobpfjs and llevTeqbprjs, see Lagarde, Gen. Graece, pref, p. 20, but Swete reads neither, preferring ™ ncTpeeprj. The name is the Egyptian Petepre, ' whom Ra or the sun god hath given] i. e. a gift of the sun ; cf. Ebers, p. 296. Ra is the Egyptian sun god, the chief place, of his worship being Heliopolis. Brugsch, Gesch., p. 248, explains the name as —-puti-par, ' Gift of him that has appeared! D"1D, either to be taken in its literal sense, cf. Ebers, p. 299, or merely equivalent to 'officer] ' official;' see further, Ebers, pp. 297, 300, who renders D*1D ' courtier; ' remarking that D*1D, among the Orientals, had much the same meaning as ' Schranz ' in German ('parasite] ' courtier '). 0"nnOn Ito = ' captain of the executioners'. The captain of the executioners was also chief of the body-guard and superintendent of the state prison (40, 3 f.), see Ebers, p. 301, who describes Potiphar's office as that of chief minister of police. A similar office existed among the Babylonians, 2 Kings 25, 8 ff. Jer. 39, 9. 52, 12. Dan. 2, 14. See further, Ebers, p. 300 ff. The LXX have dpxipdyeipos, which render ing is perhaps due to 39, 6. CHAP. 37, VER. 36 — CHAP. 38, VER. 5. 31I 38. 1. 0"1 ' turned aside] Keil renders, 'removed his dwelling] sc. 171N; but 0*1 without 171N is not found in this sense, and further, no pr. name of a place follows iy. "'Obll*. Adullam was in the plain (nbttV) of Judah (Josh. 15, 33. 35. Mic. 1, 15. Neh. n, 30. 2 Chron. n, 7, cf. 2 Mace 12, 38), presumably north-west of Hebron. The identification with Deir Dubban, north of Eleutheropolis, is very uncertain. Sh, G., p. 229 f, thinks that the most probable site is 'Aid-el-ma, about midway between Achzib and Ke'ilah, a little to the west of Rabbah. Bad, Pal., p. 1 6 1 , identifies it with a spot one hour to the south of Shochoh ; near the hill Sh6kh Madkur. On the etymology of the name, cf. Lagarde, B. N, p. 54. 2. "3X03 CTN. Onq. renders NTM 133 (cf. Is. 23, 8. Prov. 31, 24) 'a merchant] possibly finding Judah's marriage with a daughter of Canaan objectionable. Berliner, however, in his edition has *sysa 1?? , but mentions the other reading in his notes, p. 14 of part ii. Cf. Levy, Chald. W. B., ii. p. 528. 3. N1p"1. Sam, Targ. Ps.-Jon, Heb. Codd. (Di.) read (probably correctly) Nipm, see 29, 34 and vers. 3. 4. 5. (Till, see Driver, § 133. LXX has avrr) 8e %v, i.e. NM1, this reading gives a suitable sense and is doubtless the correct form of the text; see Dav, S., § 58 c ; Ges, § 112. 6 y; Dr. 1. e ; and cf. 1 Sam. 23, 15. 24. 2 Chron. 10, 2 ; see also Geiger, Urschrift, p. 462. As the text stands it must be rendered, 'he (fudah) was] but the perf. with waw is very- harsh, and a reference to Judah is not what we should expect. 312 GENESIS, 3"T33 = the 3*r3N of Josh. 15, 44. Mic. 1, 14; it was also in the low country (,17SE') of Judah. Sh, G., Map iv, places it a short distance N.E. of Shochoh, giving as its modern name Ain-el-Kezbeh. 8. 03^1 = to perform the duty of marrying the deceased brother's widow when he left no son ; see Deut. 25, 5. The brother-in-law in this case was called 33*. 9. nnffll . . . n"ni. The perfect with waw conv. in a frequentative sense, see Driver, §§ 120, 121; Dav, S., § 57; 'Ges, § 112. 4 d. R. ; also Ewald, §§ 342 b, 345 b. Other examples are Num. 21, 9 ... EM31 "]tSO DN ,1M1 Ml . . . 0*311; Judg. 6, 3 I7yi . . . yiT DN ,1*1l; Ex. 33, 9 11* . , . n*ni, with a simple impf. following. Other instances of DN in a temporal sense with the perf. are Is. 4, 4. Amos 7, 2. Ps. 41, 7; compare Ges, § 164. 2; Dav, S., § 130 b; Ewald, § 355 b. niJIN nnffll ; a pregnant construction, cf. note on 14, 3; so 19, 27. 42, 28. 43, 33. J?!*, must be understood after nnEI. 1i13. Cf. the note on NE»3, 4, 13. 11. *TON n"3 is ace. of place, see note on 18, 1. 12. 131 ""1T3 by byi, lit. 'he went up about the shearers of his flock] i.e. to see after them ; cf. the use of 7y in 30, 33 *13E> 7y. inXn. 'His companion.' LXX and Vulg. read the con sonants as 11Jp ' his shepherd;' so Luther. nnDOn is probably the Timnah mentioned with Gibeah in Josh. 15, 57, between Shochoh and Bethshemesh, the modern Tibneh, Bad, Pal., p. 161; and not identical with the Timnah belonging to the Danites (Josh. 19, 43), on CHAP. 38, VERS. 8-15. 313 account of nby ; Di. after Kn. and Del.13 Tuch (cf. Merx's note however) considers that there was only one Timnah. The name is found on the inscriptions in the form Tamnaa, Schrader, C.O.T., p. 159. Rob, Pales., ii. 343, mentions three Timnahs, and considers the one occurring here to be in the hill country of Judah. 14. nni30bN "133 10m. Cf. Judith 10, 3. D3nl, i.e. the face; cf. Deut. 22, 12. Jon. 3, 6, where the object of nD3 is omitted. FibXtfinl. 'And veiled herself;' cf. Prov. 7, 10. LXX, .Pesh, Onq. render, ' adorned herself D"3"X* TinZQ. — ' at the gate of Enaim.' 3*3*y is the same as 33*y. (cf. on 37, 17 nSMl), Josh. 15, 34 (with the article), and 3*3*?? in ver. 21a city of Judah, in the Shephelah. Its position is not known. So most modern commentators. The Vss. took the word as a nom. appell, contrary to ver. 21, excepting the LXX who give Alvdv. The Pesh. has &JL^3 IfcLiio/ ' dividing of roads] Onq. D^y. niEHB, lit. ' division of eyes', i.e. cross-way; cf. Levy, Chald. W.B., ii. pp. 212 d, 304. Targ. Ps.-Jon. f^DO P^r^l I^IN nEHS, i.e. 'the cross- ways whither every one's eyes look ! ' Vulg. ' in bivio itineris! Saad. Xfall ' a watch tower! The A. V. has, ' in an open place] margin, ' The door of eyes;' R.V. 'in the gate of Enaim] ntfNb lb n3n3 Nb Nim = * without her being given him to wife;' circ. cl. 15. n3i;b n3\yn*,i . cf. i Sam. i, 13 rrtovb hy i3em*i ; Dav, S, § 78. R. 5- rP3B nnD3 "3. LXX and Vulg. add nyi* N71 'and he did not know her] to explain "3 "3 *3, which gives the 314 GENESIS, reason why Judah did not recognise her, and not why he took her for a harlot. 1 7. "jnbttj IX? . . . |nn ON . The apodosis is suppressed, cf. on 30, 27. 18. "fOnn. 'The signet ring] which was worn round the neck on a chain (i>M3). As these were always worn by their owners, they would be easily identified again by them ; cf. Song of Songs 8, 6. TOOL 'And thy staff.' ,100 was a carved or ornamented staff, and so different from 7pO, a stick in its natural con dition. Among the Babylonians every man carried a stick with an ornamented top, and wore a signet ring ; see Herod. i. 195. The Versions render ?M3 differently. LXX have Spplo-Kov, ' a necklet! Hieron. ' armillam! Onq. T]?*E'iE' ' thy cloak! Pesh. ~4£c£a. ' thy cloak! a 1. Nin nttTTpn. Cf. the note on 19, 33. nEHp = ' a religious prostitute] lit. ' one dedicated' (tshp ' to set apart] ' dedicate') to the goddess Ashtoreth (nmE'y). Cf. Deut. 23, 18 for the law forbidding this dedication to Ashtoreth in Israel; and see Movers, Phonizier, i. 680. 24. D"tinn tt?7UJ03 "n"1. 'And it happened after about three months;' the double preposition is exceedingly rare, but cf. 1 Sam. 10, 27 LXX EHn03 ; 1 Sam. 14, 14 *xnaa; Lev. 26, 37 am *S3D3, also Is. 1, 26 nSE'Nl33, and see Driver, Sam., p. 82. E^n is here fem, but nowhere else; the Heb.-Sam. reads the more correct T\V7V. Fptom. This punishment in the Levitical law was applicable only to the daughters of a priest; see Lev. 21, 9. In other cases the offender was stoned, Lev. 20, 10. Deut. 22, 23 ff. John 8, 5. CHAP. 38, VERS. 17-29. 315 25. ' She was being brought out, and she sent to her father- in-law, saying, By a man to whom these belong am I with child; ' a more expressive way of saying, ' As she was being brought forth, she sent' etc.; so Judg. 18, 3 nom . . . n*3 Dy non li*3n; 1 Sam. 20, 36 m* NM1 p iysn; see Ewald, § 341 c, and the note on 19, 23. Cf. also Ges, § 142. 1. R. 2. nNSlO is fem. partic. Hof . of NX* for nNXIO ; cf. lON^ for lONi), DmV1? for QM7N^; see Stade, § 112 c; Ges, § 23. 2 b. 28. 1" in"1. 'And one stretched out a hand] i.e. a hand appeared; cf. in* in Job 37, 10 mp M* 7N nDE'so; Prov. 13, 10 nXD jn* !11t3 pi. Di. prefers to render, 'then he (sc. Msn) stretched out' etc, i.e. there was stretched out; see Ges, § 144. 3 a and Rem.; Dav, S., § 108 ; M. R, § 123. 3 ; and cf. Cheyne's erit. note on Is. 14, 30; and Dr., Sam., p. 102 f. Del.5 mentions both renderings as possible. OCJ, i.e. 'a thread coloured with crimson! *3E' is the crimson colour derived from the cochineal; called in Heb. either " ny?in. 29. 3"1ttJ03 TPI, hardly, 'and he was as one drawing back his hand] i.e. made an attempt to draw back (Del.4) ; but rather equivalent to 3*^0 ini*,13, or i3*EM3 • and it came to pass when he drew back;' so Di, who compares 40, 10 (?). Jer. 2, 17; Ewald, § 337 c; Dav., S., § 100. R. 6; Ges, § 164. 2. R. 3 (the emendation 3*EM3 is also mentioned). Driver, § 135. 6. Obs. 2, suggests the emendation 3*EM3 as more in accordance with Biblical analogy, but Di. questions this, as being not sufficiently definite. V13 "vby n213 nO = ' Why hast thou made a rent for thyself?' (20, 3) yby for thyself] 'on thy account;' so LXX, 316 GENESIS, Aquila, Luther, Di, Del. Others (Ges, Kn.) render. ' Why hast thou made a breach?' 'Upon thee a breach!' cf. 16, 5 1*7y *DOn: i.e. either (Ges.) 'thou must bear the guilt of this breach; ' or Knobel, ' may a breach come upon thee; ' but this is not so natural, and would rather require pDn. 39. 1. D^NXnaffiVJ. 'Ishmaelites] cf. 37, 28*>.(J). 2. n^b^O ti^N. ' A prosperous man ;' n*7XO in the next verse is slightly different = ' to cause to prosper! 3. nWy Nin IttJN 731. 'All that he was doing] almost equivalent to ntS'y* Nil lE'N 731; so ver. 6 73N, ver. 22 D^y; 1 Kings 3, 2 DM3TO; see Driver, § 135. 2. Obs, 'the participle denoting not a continuous state, but a fact liable to recur.' The position Joseph held in Potiphar's household was that of steward, somewhat similar to the post Eliezer occupied in Abraham's family (15, 2 f.); cf. Ebers, p. 303, who speaks of the position of steward as ' a dignity which we meet with at the earliest times in every great Egyptian household.' 4. 17 ttj'1 731 for 17 E** lE'N 731 ; cf. ver. 5. Ex. 9, 4. 18, 20. On the omission of the relative, see note on 15, 13 and cf. M. R, § 160 ; Ewald, § 333 b, who remarks that ' the omission of the relative in prose is almost entirely confined to the books of Chronicles.' 5. TpSn TND. 1NO with the perfect, as in Ex. 5, 23 nyiB 7N MN3 JNOl; 9, 24 *137 nn*,1 TNO; cf. Ges, § 164. 2; Dav, S., §i45d; M.R, §1640. In Ex. 4, 10 the inf. follows TNO. CHAP. 39, VERS. I— II. 317 6 ff. On the history of Joseph and Potiphar's wife, cf. the Egyptian tale, contained in the Papyrus d' Orbiney, translated by Ebers, p. 311 ff, and Erman, Aegypten, p. 505 ff. InN yT N71. inN referring to Joseph; cf. ver. 8 MN; ' and he did not know anything with him (foseph)' =hs did not trouble himself about anything that was with him, i.e. he left everything to Joseph's care, except his food, which could not be entrusted to him on account of the strictness of the Egyptian laws as to cleanness and uncleanness ; see 43, 32. 46, 34 ; so Kn, Ebers. Del, however, explains differently. Potiphar left everything he could to Joseph's care, except eating his food, which naturally could not be done by deputy. inN may also be taken reflexively, and referred to Potiphar = ' with himself i.e. in his own mind; cf. note on 3, 7. The A. V. offers a third rendering, also regarding WN as reflexive, 'And he knew not aught he had! 8. ^22 nO. ' What is in the house;' or no = ' anything] as in Prov. 9, 13. Job 13, 13. The Heb.-Sam. has noiNO. 9. "300 mn n"32 7113 133^ = 'A; is not greater in this house than I am] i.e. I hold the same position in this house that he does. These words are taken differently by Maurer, 'There is nothing in this house too great for me;' and by the R. V, ' There is none greater in this house than I' (the more correct rendering, in the margin). But 13S*N cannot be translated indefinitely, as it would be in these two renderings. ,10. DI" X2^ — 'day by day] 'daily;' so Ex. 16, 5. Prov. 8, 30; see Ges, § 123 d. 1; Dav, S., § 29. R. 8; Ewald, §313 a; M.R, §72. 2. n. ntn DT*n3 VPI. 'And it came to pass, just about that time;' cf. Deut. 6, 24 111 D1M3 13nM7; Neh. 5, 11 318 GENESIS, Dl*,13 D17 N3 13*E'1. In 50, 20 we find the more usual form 111 D1*3. See note on 25, 31. 12. 11333. In the singular we should — from the analogy of other words of the same kind, e.g. 'SpP from ^?0, *311 from *4l1 — expect iisrp; cf. ^ap* from 3p_*, in Deut. 15, 14; *13a,Ezr. 9, 3; *10J?, Dan. 8, 17; and see Ges, §93. Rem. iD; Stade, § 345 b. In the plural the aspirate has no dagesh. 14. "13X» tt^N 137 N<*3n='^ (Potiphar) hath brought unto us a Hebrew man;' or impersonally, ' one has brought] i.e. 'there has been brought] *i3y E'*N, i.e. one whom the Egyptians would regard with little favour; cf. 43, 32. 46, 34. On *l3y, cf. on 14, 13; the name has been supposed to be found in the Egyptian inscriptions, in the form 'apuriu;' see Ebers, p. 316, but the p for b is a difficulty, and this opinion is now generally given up. It is also doubtful whether the Chabiri, so often mentioned in the Tel-el-Amarna Letters, are to be identified with the Hebrews. 132 pn^7. Retrogression of the tone, cf. on 4, 17. See also Ges, § 64. Rem. 2; Stade, § 88. 2 b; so in ver. 17. 133 pnX7, as in Prov. 1, 26 = 'to wanton with us] different from nN pnx, 26, 8. The LXX have ipiralfav; cf. Ewald, § 217. f. 2 8. 133 . Potiphar's wife wishes to imply that the other females of the household had been similarly treated by Joseph. 15. ''bSN. Sam. has *1*3, but, as Del. points out, she would then betray herself. 18. NIpNI . . . "O'nns. So Lev. 16, 1 mo*l . . . Dnaipa; Josh. 8, 24 173*1 . . . n*.733 ; 1 Kings 18, 18 ^ni . . . D33ty3 ; see Driver, § 118; Ges, § 114. 3. R. 1 ; Dav, S, § 96. The CHAP. 39, VERS. 12-21. 319 inf. is continued by waw conv. and the imperf, because a fact is stated; cf. the note on 18, 25. Render, ' When I lifted up my voice and cried! 20. P)D1" "31N. So 42, 30. 33. Pluralis excellenliae, see Ges, § 124. i c; M.R, § 135. 2 ; Dav, S., § 16 c. inDn n'Q = perhaps ' the house of surrounding] or 'shutting in] i.e. a prison surrounded by a wall, if 11D be related to mD, 13D ; cf. the Syriac JLV^o. Ebers, p. 317 f, compares the fortress at Memphis called ' White wall' (a name found on many inscriptions), with which he identifies the i,1Dn n*3 of this chapter, and 40, 3. 5. The LXX have &xiptopa. The name for prison better known to the Hebrews was either 1131 n*3, Ex. 12, 29; N73 n*3, Is. 42, 7; or 13DO, Is. 42, 7. IfiJN DIpO. The sentence commencing with lE'N is a genitive after the construct state D1pO; see Ges, § 130. 3; M. R, § 82 c ; Dav, S., § 25 ; so 40, 3 11DN sjDI* lE'N Dipo ; 2 Sam. 15, 21 DE* ,1M* lE'N D1P03. "mDN, Kri *T?N, the Ktb. being the part. pass. Qal, the Kri the adj. of the form qdtil ; cf. Ges, § 84. 8; Barth, N. B., p. 186. D'HIDN. DE* is omitted after D*11DN, as in 35, 13; con trast 40, 3, and see Ewald, § 331 c. 3 ; cf. ver. 22, where the ordinary editions have Ktb. D*HDNn, with the Kri DT'DNI, as here, while Baer and Del. have D*i*DNn in their text. 21. 13n |n"1, lit. 'gave his ( foseph' s) favour in the eyes of i.e. and gave him favour.. in the eyes of, etc.; cf. Ex. 3, 21. n, 3. 12, 36 (all). inDn n'*3 lfe>. In this chapter, which is mainly from J, Joseph fs apparently confined in the royal prison, the governor 320 GENESIS, of which is not mentioned by name, but is merely described as 1.1D1 n*3 its'. In 40, 2-4 E, the governor of the prison is Potiphar, and the prison is in his own house, cf. Di. p. 403. Ebers, however, regards the person mentioned in this verse as the special governor of the prison for state prisoners. Potiphar was, as police minister, in control over all the prisons ; but not an actual prison governor, but cf. Di. 1. c. 22. D"IUX* is intentionally indefinite in contrast to ,1*1 Nil Tivy at the end of the verse, see Driver, p. 171, and cf. Ges, §§ 116. 5. R. 3, 144. 3 d; Dav, S., § 108 e niyx* n^n. Cf. the note on 4, 17. 23. Render, 'There was no governor of the prison over looking (lit. seeing) anything that he did (lit. anything in his hand), in that Yahweh was with him, and that which he was doing Yahweh made lo prosper! 40. 1. iNOn . . ."ni. So 14, 1. 2 lE»y...*0*3 Ml; Ex. 12, 41b 1NX* 111 DIM DXy3 *1*l; where instead of the perfect in the second half of the clause, the imperfect with waw conversive might stand, and most frequently does stand ; see Driver, § 78 ; Dav, S., § 51. R. 1; Ges, § in. 2. TONni CIBO 1,bO npt2*0 = '/,kr cupbearer and baker of the king of Egypt! Notice the difference in the idiom in English and Hebrew. English says, ' the cupbearer and baker of the king;' Hebrew, ' the cupbearer of the king and the baker] or more commonly with the third pers. suffix, 'his baker;' cf. 41, 8, and see Ewald, § 339 b; M.R, § 75. 2. Rem. a; Ges, § 128. 1 ; Dav, S., § 27 b. The 1SN has been discovered on the Egyptian inscriptions, but not the npE'O ; see Ebers, p. 321. CHAP. 39, VER. 22 CHAP. 40, VER. 6. 32I 2. VD^ID with firm qamec, as in DI3, though the more usual form with simple shewa under the D is also found. The form with qamec is explained by Stade, § 209, either from a by-form qattil, i.e. for O'lD, and as 1 cannot be doubled, D*1D, so D*ia ; or through the influence of the counter-tone on the first syllable ; for this he compares D*Ki*i>E' for OMpbti, from V^bv. Cf. also *X*1B and *S*1S, Ges. in the Thes. s.v., and Barth, N.B., p. 197. 3. 1CJN DIpO. Cf. the note on 39, 20. 4. 1D12J03 D^O" 1"n"1, lit. 'and they were days' etc, i.e. some time; cf. 4, 3 D*D* ypo — 'after some lime;' so we find D*0* used indefinitely in 1 Sam. 29, 3. Dan. 8, 27. Neh. 1, 4. Cf. Dav, S., § 11. R. 1 ; Ges, § 139. 4; contrast 27, 44. 29, 20. 5. lObn pin33 U^N. 'Each according to the inter pretation of his dream] i.e. each one dreamt a dream that had its special reference to himself, and its own interpretation. 0"12O 1,bob l&N n3Nn1 npttfOn. Cf. the note on 29, 9. This construction is closer to the English idiom than the one noticed in ver. 1, and must be used if the two words that should be in the construct state are to stand together; the construction "O 1,70 IBN) npE'O hardly occurs (two construct states and one genitive), so we must, if we wish to keep 1SN and npE'O together, use 7 lE'N or 7, as in 7, 1 1 ; otherwise the alternative construction followed in ver. 1 must be adopted. 6. 0"31>t='^/"a sad countenance] 'cast down;' so Dan. 1, 10; cf. D*oyt3 D*S3 in Prov. 25, 23. Symm. has o-Kv8pa,7rol here. On the importance attached to dreams among the Egyptians, see Ebers, p.. 321. Y 322 GENESIS, 7. D"X>1 D3"3D XniD. Cf. Neh. 2, 2 D*yi 73£> yi10 = ' why dost thou look so troubled?' 8. InN PN m)n£!) = 'and there is no one to interpret it;' cf. 41, 8 DniN mi3 [*Ni; on |*N, see Ges, § 152. 1. e 4; M.R, § 128. 2 b; Dav, S., § 127 b. 9. 131 n]m "Olbn2. 'In my dream, behold a vine was before me; ' the apodosis without a verb being introduced by waw; so ver. 16 (cf. 41, 17, where waw is omitted); 2 Sam. 15, 34. Prov. 10, 2 5a; see Driver, § 125. Obs.; M. R, § 132 b; Ges, § 143. R. 2. ,13,1 is inserted to attract the attention of the reader to the nature of the dream ; con trast 41, 22 *D7na N1N1, where no especial stress is laid. 10. "131 nnbl* nni33 Nim. I. The A.V, Knobel, Tuch, Driver render, 'And it was as though it budded, and its blossoms shot forth;' cf. the analogous use of 3 <1M in 19, 14, in the sense ' to appear] ' to seem] II. Di. and apparently Del. prefer taking 3 in a temporal sense, and render, 'And it, as it budded, its blossoms shot forth] comparing 38, 29 3*E'03 ; cf. the note there, and Driver, p. 172, who points out that this usage of the participle, though common in the Mishna (see Geiger, Lehr- und Lesebuch zur Sp. der Mishna, p. 52), is without analogy in Biblical Hebrew. n5J3 'its blossom! W occurs nowhere else in the Bible in the sense 'blossom] but is common in the Mishna; the feminine ,1X3 being used in Biblical Hebrew (as a nomen unitatis, see note on 27, 3). The masc. here may be explained as a collective, and so construed with the fem. nn7y (Wright). Others take nxs as abbreviated from mnsa ; see Ewald, § 257 d>' Stade, § 347 e 2 (and Del. on Ps. 27, 5), who gives as other examples, n?3, 1TX, H3B, niO. nxs may be taken, CHAP. 40, VERS. 7-14. 323 cf. Ewald, § 281 b, as accus. to ini*y = ' and it (the vine) went up into blossoms;' cf. l?y in Is. 5, 6. 34, 13. Prov. 24, 31 ; so 17*E'an in the second half of this verse. Possibly the text ought to be pointed nxs, the fem. ending n_ being altered into n__ (the suffix), lo conform with n*n73E'N in the second half of the verse. Prov. 7, 8 (nS3), Job 11, 9 (mo), Zech. 4, 2 (173), cited by Stade above, are similar to 1X3 in this verse, and may possibly be mistakes for the fem. forms. n^n73t!}N = ' its clusters! asy = ' the ripe grape! On the use of wine in Egypt, see Ebers, p. 322 f. 12. O'O.lton n'&b'tti , casus pendens. ' The three branches, they are three days;' cf. on 34, 21. 13. "JffNI nN . . . Nto". 'Shall lift up thy head] i.e. shall take thee from prison; cf. 2 Kings 25, 27. p\?JNin OQ$03, lit. 'according to the former custom] i.e. as thou wert .accustomed to do. 14. "OniSt DN "3. Di, following Ewald, § 356 b, cf. § 342 b. 2, renders, 'only that thou rememberest me, with thee (i.e. thyself), when it is well with thee, and wilt shew me kindness] comparing 2 Sam. 5, 6. 2 Kings 5, 20. 23, 9 (see also Ges, §§ 106. 3 b. note 2, 163. 2. R.), which are different from this passage, as the DN *3 is dependent on a previous verb. Wellhausen emends to IN, cf. 23, 13 ; and see Driver, § 119 8. foot-note 2, who points out that there is no justifi cation for rendering the bare perf. either as an imperf. or modal future. This reading would remove any difficulty, n*E»yi . , . *sni3T DN being a conditional sentence, exactly like 43, 9. 47, 6; see Driver, § 138. 1 a; M.R, § 26; Dav, S., §i3ob; Ges, § 159. 3d. Y 2 324 GENESIS, T,nN. Cf. Job 12, 3. 14, 5. 15. 1133 VlN IO© "*3. 'Thai they should have put me in prison;' cf. Ruth 1, 12 M1DN *3 ' that I should have said;' 1 Sam. 17, 26b f)in *3 'that he should have defied;' see Driver, § 39. 8. Obs.; Dav, S., §§ 39 c, 150; Ges, § 166. 2. 16. "in "bD. 'Baskets of white bread] *m from lin ' to be white] properly an adj. = ' what is white] and then applied to what is baked ; so the Arab. 13 fy* (Del.). Vulg. has ' canistra farinae] LXX Kava xo"8piTav ; cf. ver. 1 7 ,iyi3 73N3. The baker carried his wares on his head, an exceptional mode of carrying things among the Egyptians ; see Ebers, P- 33i f- 17. ni*1D b3NO b30. 'Of all kinds of food for Pharaoh] cf. Dan. 1, 5 "770,1 33TIB ; Gen. 49, 20 170 *3iyO. 730, JO partitive ; cf. on 4, 3. 19. yO^a . . . NiTA 'Shall lift up thy head from off thee] i. e. shall behead thee. There is a play on the words here, the phrase being the same as in ver. 13. Wright com pares John 12, 32. The punishment of the chief baker was one of the heaviest that could befall an Egyptian. The exposure of the body was intended to make the sentence more severe, and was especially repugnant.to the superstitious Egyptians, who regarded the life after death as dependent on the body remaining unmutilated; see Ebers, p. 334. 20. ni>13 nN mSn D1\ The construction is the same as in 4, 18 ; see the note there, ni j>n is inf. Hof . of 17*, for the ordinary form nibw ; cf. Ez. 16, 4 niWl, and IBIO, Is. 28, 16 (see Ges, § 69. 2. Rem. 7; Stade, §§ 29, 246), the 7 being doubled to compensate foi> the shortened Vowel. 21. inpttJO bl' = ' to his butlership] or ' cupbearer ship! CHAP. 40, VER. 15 CHAP. 41, VER. 4. 325 41. 1. D^O". Cf. on 29, 14. 10y n3m. Cf. note on 32, 7. IN^n. Always with * without the dagesh. 1NM 'the river' par excellence, the Nile, is the Hebrew form of the Egyptian aur-da, i.e. ' the great stream] Ebers, p. 338, which became in the mouth of the people iar-d, iaro. On the participle in this and the two following verses, cf. on 13, 7. 2. inN3. MN, LXX aXeL, 'Nile-grass] is the Hebrew form of the Egyptian axu or axuu, 'reeds' or 'grass' grow ing in marshy ground; see Ebers, p. 338 ; and Wiedemann, Samml. altaegypt. Worler, p. 16 ; also notice Hieron. ad Jes. 19, 7, who describes it as 'omne quod in palude virens nascitur;' and Ecclus. 40, 16. 2-4. The number of the cows, seven (cf. the same number in the next dream), was a sacred number among the Egyptians, as among other Oriental nations (Ebers, p. 337); cf. 21, 28. 30. On the dreams Kn. remarks, ' Both dreams were suitably interpreted by Joseph. The Nile floods are what the fruitfulness of Egypt chiefly depends on, therefore the cows in the dream come up out of the Nile. The ox was the symbol of the Nile (Diod. i. 51), and especially sacred to Osiris, the discoverer of agriculture (Diod. i. 21). The cow was, in the Egyptian hieroglyphic writing, the sign for the earth (Macrob, Sal., i. 19), agriculture, and food (Clem. Alex, Strom., v. p. 567). At the same time Isis was the goddess of the earth, that nourishes everything (Macrob, Sat., i. 20), and is rendered fruitful by the Nile (Plut, de Is., 38); the cow was especially sacred to her 326 GENESIS, (Her. ii. 41; Aelian, h. an., x. 27). She was also goddess of the moon (Diod. i. 11), and her picture serves in the hieroglyphics as a sign for the year (Horapollo, i. 3) ; there fore the seven fat cows mean seven fruitful, and the seven lean cows seven unfruitful years ; the seven lean cows coming closely upon the seven fat ones, point to the close succession of the unfruitful years to the fruitful years. The meaning of the second dream (the ears of corn) is self-evident. That the ears grow on one stalk, indicates that the seven years are regarded as following one immediately after the other.' 6. D^ip nOlltf. 'Blasted by the east wind! The narrator here mentions the wind that was most destructive in Palestine; cf. Hos. 13, 15. Jon. 4, 8. Ez. 17, 10. The winds in Egypt that were most hurtful came usually from the N. W. or S.E.; see Ebers, p. 340. Del. understands D*1p here as the destructive Chamsin, which blew, in the spring months, from the S.E. quarter; see Ebers, l.c. 7. Knobel remarks on the dreams, ' The order in which they come is well chosen. First the Nile, which causes the fruitfulness, then the cows representing fruitfulness, and lastly the ears, as an evidence of fruitfulness.' 8. CISO "OOin, only here and Ex. 7-9 P in Pent. The word is also found in Daniel, probably borrowed from the Pent. LXX i^tryrjrds. ' The lettered men of Egypt! The D*OOin are the Egyptian UpoypappaTels, represented on the inscriptions with writing materials in their hands, and a pen on their temples (Ebers, p. 345). They belonged to the Egyptian priesthood, and employed themselves in the study of the hieroglyphic writing and astronomy, and were also noted as seers or foretellers of future events; see Ebers, CHAP. 41, VERS. 6-10. 327/ p. 344 f.; Di, p. 412. They also had a great reputation as magicians, as it is clear from Ex. 7, 11. 22. 8, 3, etc. The word DOin is taken by Harkavy (fourn. Asiaf:que, 1870, p. 168 f.) as equivalent to the Egyptian 'Cher-tum] 'Revealer of secrets] It may, however, be equally wtjl derived from om ' to grave] or Oin 'a stylus] with the formative ending Di, like 3il1 from 11, nil*}?, Di*1E>; see Ewald, § 163 g; Stade, § 295. Tuch gives another derivation (Comm., p. 443 f.), according to which DOin is a quadriliteral form from om ' to write with a stylus] and Din 'to be sacred;' cf. 73in from 73n, and 731; this, however, is doubtful; see Stade, §§ 149, 150, on the formation of quadriliterals. Ol,03n = 'Me wise men] identified by Ebers, p. 345, with the rexxat-u of the inscriptions, ' those who know things ' (die wissenden der Dinge), probably a wide term, embracing all the higher classes of priests, especially the apoo-Konoi of Clement, who were astrologers, calendar makers, and inter preters of signs or omens. DniN . . . lobn. DniN, the plural suffix, may be used' with reference to the double nature of the dream, or the reading may be a scriptio defectiva, 1017n for I'pii'n, which the Sam. gives ; so Pesh. and Saadiah. 9. 1"3TO "3N, not' I remember] A.V— for i*3M means 'to cause another to remember' — but 'I make mention of On the order of the words obj. subj. verb, see Dav, S., § in. R. 1; Ges, §142. 2d; Driver, § 208. 2 ; M.R, § i3i.2.R.b; and cf. 37, 16. Judg. 9, 36. 2 Kings 5, 13. 6, 22. Is. 5, 17. This order of words is the usual one in nominal sentences with a participial pred. In other cases it is very rare. 10. "TIN* so Sam. Ver. LXX, and Pesh, more correctly, WIN. The Heb.-Sam. reads 3J1N. 328 GENESIS, iT. nobn31. The first person imperf. with waw conv. and tho n cohortative is rare ; there are two other instances in Gen, via. 32, 6 nni'E'NI, and 43, 21 inn331 ; see other instances in Driver, § 69. Obs.; Ewald, § 232 g; Ges, § 49. 2 ; Dav, S, § 51.J& 7- 12. lObTO 'tt^N. Seeon 9, 5. 14. in^l"!. 'And they brought him quickly] lit. ' made him run;' cf. 1 Sam. 17, 17 IMN? nsnon p,11 ; 2 Chron. 35, 13 Dy,1 "S3 737 1X*1*1. Vnbott) ^bn"1 nb31 . No one was allowed to appear before the king of Egypt unless he was quite clean; see Ebers, p. 350. Del.4 and Tuch explain the verse from the Egyptian custom of regarding a prisoner as a mourner. He would then wear his beard and hair; see Ebers, p. 350. foot note, against this view. 15. "l31 TWO© "ONI. 'And I have heard about thee, saying thou canst understand a dream] or 'thou hearest a dream] i.e. hast only to hear it, and can interpret it. *]"7X*, as in 1 Kings 10, 6 mosn by) 1*131 by. On the construction — oratio indirecta without *3 to intro duce it — see note on 12, 13. 16. "1X>72. 'Not I] as in 14, 24. The LXX have Svev tou Oeov ovk dnoKpidrja-eTm, which means really the same as the Mass. text, and does not of necessity suppose a reading DM7N MJ&3, and the addition of N7. The Sam. Ver. renders, ' Without me God will not answer the welfare of P] DlbtirnN TW*, lit. 'answer the welfare] i.e. give such an answer as will be most conducive to Pharaoh's welfare. 19. mpl, so vers. 20. 27, possibly a mistake for nipl, which occurs in ver. 3. CHAP. 41, VERS. II-33. 329 131 n3n3 "n"N1 Nb = 'such as I have not seen in all the land of Egypt for badness] lit. 'I have not seen like these' etc.; see ver. 38, and cf. M.R, § 56. 21. nD21p. Cf. the fuller forms in 21, 29 ,13137; 31, 6 13nN (bothE); the -^-, defective for *^, has arisen out of the diphthong »_; see Stade, § 352 b; cf. § 99. 2 ; Ges, § 91. 1. Rem. 2. ¦jn^NIOI. The form is singular, not plural, the '— being the ending W-, nNip = *NlO; see Slade, § 353 a. 1 0; cf. § 99. 2 ; Ges, § 93. 3. Rem. 3. 23. Dn"inN. Masc. suffix for fem.; cf. on 26, 15; in ver. 27 we find the fem. suffix used. 25. Nin inN ni>i3 oibn. cf. on 34, 21. 26. n20n ni3 y^Oi. See the notes on 21, 29. yaE* "131 ni3 is a casus pendens, as in ver. 25. 32. 'And with respect to the repetition of the dream unto Pharaoh twice, (it is) because the matter is resolved on by God, and God hastens to do it! niSE'n ?yi ; cf. Ruth 4, 7 n7N3n 7y mion.l ?yi 'with respect io ransoming, and with respect to exchanging! niSE'n is the Nif. inf. cstr. of nSE*. The Nifal of this verb is not found elsewhere. 33. NI". So the ordinary editions; but Baer and Del. in the text have Ni*., and in the notes to their edition, p. 78, they refer to Ibn Ezra in favour of the reading with — - On Ni*— for NT—, cf. Zech. 9, 5 *# (Baer and DeL N - in text and notes, p. 83), and see Ewald, § 63 d ; cf. Stade, § 489 b. 1. On Ni'., as an abnormal form, see Stade, l.c, and Ges, § 75. Rem. 3 b; Konig, Lehrg., p. 561- The jussive is used in making a suggestion, see Driver, § 50 0 (cf. Ex. 8, 25. 1 Kings 1, 2) ; M. R, § 8. 2 : Dav, S., § 63 b. 330 GENESIS, 34. 1pB1 nyiS nt*X,,, = ' let P. set up and appoint' etc.; cf. the use of T\vy in 1 Sam. 8, 16. 1 Kings 12, 31. Ges. in Thes., p. 1077, renders, 'facial (hoc) P. (sequatur consilium meum) et praeficiat! tfJOn, a denom. from ts'on, is a &ra£ Xeydp.='let him exact thefifthpart;' cf. the Arab. J^S- 'take a fifth part] 1t?B = ' to lake the tenth part of anything! 35. ni*13 T* nnn = ' under Pharaoh's control! 1* used as in 2 Kings 13, 5. Is. 3, 6. 39. "131 b3 nN fniN DTibN i*"nn "nnN. On the construction, see Ges., § 115. 1; M.R, § 116; Dav, S., § 91 e 40. ">Oy b3 pt»" ^pB by. I. Gesenius and Knobel render, 'And all my people shall kiss thy mouth;' cf. 1 Sam. 10, 1. 1 Kings 19, 18. Hos. 13, 2. But the kiss of homage was not given on the mouth ; and that Joseph had to receive the kiss from all the people would be a very unnatural thought ; further, i*y pE's is not used in the sense 'to kiss] for which we find the ace. or 7. II. The LXX, Sam. Ver, Vulg, and most moderns, e.g. Del, Tuch, Di, prefer taking "]*2S 7y, as in 45, 21. Ex. 17, 1. Num. 3, 16, etc. = ' according io thy mouth] i.e. 'command' etc, and render pE's 'dispose themselves] taking it intransitively. Cf. the Arabic (j-~j ' ordinare et disponere rem! III. Siegfried and Stade (Hebr. Wb'rlerb., p. 446) regard it as Impf. of pVi 'to arm] a denom. from pVi 'armour] so ' at thy command all my people shall arm themselves! 1,00 bl3N ND3n pi. 'Only with respect to the throne will I be greater than thou! ND31, accus. of respect; see Ges, § 118. 2 c; and cf. note on 3, 15. CHAP. 41, VERS. 34-43. 331 41. I,nn3. See on 1, 29. 42. ini*30. Cf. Esther 3, 10. 8, 2, where the Persian monarch gives his signet first to Haman, and then to Mordecai. tytt? = 'byssus] 'fine white cotton;' here B'E' *133 = ' clothing made of byssus ;' cf. Del.6, p. 468. The priests' clothing was of byssus; cf. Her. ii. 37. For VV, at a later period of the language, pa was used, e. g. in the books of Chronicles and Esther. E'E* probably = Egypt, schenti, schens, ' something woven] from root shent, plectere, conserere. The Hebrews seem to have connected it with VV\, album esse, see Di, on Ex. 25, 4. 43. n30*On n33lO = 'a carriage of the second rank;' cf. ISE'DI J13 'a priest of the second rank! 13310 is probably a nomen unitatis, cf. note on 27, 3. lb ItiJN. Cf. on 40, 5. TON. Most probably the Hebrew form of an Egyptian word, cf. Brugsch, Geschichte, p. 247, who renders ' bow the knee! De Rossi explains it zs, = ape-rek, 'bow the head! Harkavy (in the Berlin Aegyptological fournal, 1869, p. 132) as the Egyptian ap-rex-u, 'head of the wise! Benfey (Ver haltniss der Agypt. Sprache, p. 302 f.) takes it as equivalent to a, the sign of the imper, bor = 'projicere,' and k the sign of the second person ; so 'prostrate thyself Jablonski (ppusc, i. p. 6) explains it as meaning ouberek, ' bow towards ' (Joseph) ; Cook, Speaker's Comm., i. p. 482, as ab-rek, 'rejoice thoul' and Lepage Renoulf (Proc. Soc. Bib. Archaol., 1888, xi. 1, p. 5 ff.) as ab(u)rek, 'thy command is our desire] we are at thy service. The Versions give various renderings. The LXX have *VL l^s^o \LT ^-.j_^>> )jLi(' Father and ruler over all the land of Egypt;' and the Vulgate, which has ' Ut omnes coram eo genu flecterent! A possible explanation from the Hebrew is to take "|13N as inf. abs. Af'el for Hif'il, instead of the imperative; cf. ver. 51 *3E'S, Pa'el for Pi'el, and accordingly Jose b. Dormaskith, quoted by Del.5, p. 468, explains it by Q!?T?^; cf. the Vulg. rendering, and Aquila's rendering cited by Hieron. (Quaest., ed. Lag, p. 60), ' et clamavit in conspectu ejus ad genicula- tionem.' Hieron. himself follows the Targ. Ps.-Jon, and renders, ' tender father ;' cf. 11, 18, 7. Fried. Del. (Par., p. 225, Proleg., p. 145) compares maN with the Assyrian abarraku, a title =possibly 'grand vizier! Sayce, Relig. Bab. (Hibbert Lecture), p. 183, mentions Assyr. Abrikku = Akk. abrik, ' vizier] from an unpublished tablet. Against this view, cf. Schrader, C. O. T, p. 139 ; Nold, Z.D.M.G., xl. p. 734. ]1n31. The inf. abs. continuing the narrative instead of M?l; cf. the inf. abs. again in Ex. 8, 11 ia? nN 133 ni ; Judg. 7, 19 D*131 pS31; and see Ges, § 113. 4a; M.R, § 106. 2; Ewald, § 351 c; Dav, S., § 88 and R. 1. Probably the inf. abs. is used instead of the ordinary construction of the imperf. with waw conv, to shew that the appointment of Joseph over the land of Egypt was contemporaneous with the announce ment of the herald, and the setting him in the second chariot; not subsequent (as it would be with waw conv. and the impf.) ; we might therefore render )in31 ' thus setting him! To connect Jinsi with -paN is against the accents, besides giving an improbable sense, as the people would not have the appointment of vizier in their hands ; cf. the next verse. CHAP. 41, VER. 45. 333 45. n31*3 n33S. LXX, -irov6op ! Cf. Di, p. 414 f. HDDN = 'she who belongs to Neith ' (Pallas). LXX, 'Ao-evvid. Brugsch, Gesch., p. 248, makes it=*S»i 1*1. T T - TT 51. "31W3 "O ntt*30 = 'Manasseh, for he hath made me forget! The form *3$3, for 'SB'S, is used on account of its similarity in sound with the name 1E0O ; cf. Ges, § 52. 2. Rem. 1 ; Stade, § 387 a. In Arabic and Aramaic the a sound is regular, e.g. Heb. 70p, Arab. Jls, Aramaic "^4-*> and ?Op; and that a was once the original sound in Hebrew is proved from the imperf. and partic. of the Pi'el ; cf. Wright, Arab. Gram., i. pp. 32, 33. The Pi'el with a double ace may possibly, as Tuch and Di. suggest, have been chosen instead of the commoner Hifil on account of the name lEOO. 52. D"13N, meaning perhaps ' double fruitfulness ;' cf. Hos. 13, 15. Other dual names are 3*331, Hos. 1, 3 ; 3M731 (in DM731 n*3, Jer. 48, 22; called on the Moabite stone, 1. 30, jn?31 n*a; cf. Gen. 37, 17 ini3); also DM*1p and D'Slh (ibid., lines 10, 31 fn*ip and pun); see Schlottmann's monograph, p. 48, and the proper names of places,, as 3*3*';, D^Dp, etc. All these names, however, may not be duals, cf. on 37, 17. 53. n"n is neuter, 'which there was' (Germ, die es gab); contrast ver. 48 ; or IM may be referred to ya'EM. 56. Dn2 IttJN b3 nN. LXX, ndvTas tovs o-tTO06Xa>vas, Pesh. )Ti.o]y, Vulg. ' universa horrea] Onq. final N*1X*.N 73 n: N113*y = ' all the storehouses wherein was grain] which point to a reading 13 nilXIN. The true reading here seems to have been lost. CHAP. 41, VER. 48 — CHAP. 42, VER. 6. 335 13$"1 is probably to be emended to 13j?3, cf. 42, 6, as 13B*, Qal, always means, when a denom. from iaE/, 'to buy] not ' to sell! 57. 1N3 yiNn 731. The plural verb as y\m = 'ihe inhabitants of the land;' see Ges, § 145. 2c; M. R, § 135. 2 ; Dav, S., § 115 ; so 48, 6. 1 Sam. 14, 25. 2 Sam. 15, 23. 42. 1. 13ttJ. In all the passages where 13E> occurs it means 'grain] as an article of merchandise, hence its frequent use from this chapter onwards. It is usually derived from 13E* ' to break] from the corn being crushed in the mill ; see the Lexica. INinn. 'Look at one another] i.e. look helplessly, one to the other, expecting aid and advice. It is not found else where in this sense. 4. J1DN 13N1p" )B. 'Lest harm befall him.' Nip is here equivalent to nip, as in ver. 38. 49, 1. Ex. 1, 10. J1DN is only found again in ver. 38. 44, 29. Ex. 21, 22. 23. 6. 0"7ti?n Nin PpVI. epl*l is a casus pendens; so 9, 18 *3N Nin Dni; 15, 2 p'E»oi Nin *n*a pvn pl; see 44, 17, note on 3, 12, and cf. M.R, § 127. O^btCn = bvon in 45, 8. O'i'E' is a word common in Aramaic, and occasionally found in late Hebrew, e.g. Eccl. 7, 19 (pl.). 8, 8. 10, 5; and in the fem. sing. noi'E', Ez. 16, 30 (all). Di. suggests that it is a technical word here, that has come over with tradition, as it agrees remarkably with 336 GENESIS, Salatis, or Silitis, the name of the first ruler of the Hyksos in Egypt, Jos, Contra Ap., i. 14; so Tuch and Del. in their commentaries ; cf. the Assyrian salat, ' viceroy] 7. In this chap, vers. 7-13, 30-32 E, Joseph accuses his brethren of being spies, in reply they volunteer the information that they have a younger brother. In chap. 43 J there is no allusion to the charge preferred by Joseph, and it is expressly stated that Joseph asked them if they had a brother (vers. 6-7, cf. 44, 19 J). Cf. Driver, Introd., p. 17. nlttjp DnN 13T1. niB'p, the fem. pl, is here used as neuter; so nvp, fem. sing, in Ps. 60, 5 lE'p "joy n*Ni,1, and 1 Kings 12, 13 nvp By,1 nN 1?0,1 (y*l; other instances of the pl. fem. as neuter are Ps. 12, 4 ni7113; Ps. 16, 11 niO*ys; Zech. 4, 10 niSOp; see Ewald, § 172 b; M.R, § 63; Ges, § 122. 4 ; Dav, 6", § 14. 8. Dnl is emphatic, they, as opposed to Joseph; see on 33, 3- 9. Dnb. 'About them;' see on 17, 20. YINn miX* nN. 'The bareness of the land;' cf. a similar use of the Arabic t£c, Qor. 33, 13. Knobel further compares yvpvoiio-dai (Homer, Iliad, 12. 339) and nudari (Caesar, Gallic War, vii. 70), and points out that the Hyksos were in constant dread of attacks from the Assyrians, who were at that time very powerful, and therefore fortified the eastern portion of the land of Egypt (Jos, Contra Ap., i. 14). io- "TH31*1. l is here used after the negative, after which *3 usually stands; so 17, 5 n*,11, for the more usual ,1M* *3; see Ewald, § 354 a; Ges, § 163. 1; cf. Deut. n, 10 f.; 2 Sam. 23, 7. 11. I3n3 for the longer form isnSN is only found here, CHAP. 42, VERS. 7-15. 337 Ex. 16, 7. 8. Num. 32, 32. Lam. 3, 421; see Ges, § 32. Rem. 2 ; Stade, § 179 b; Dav, § 12. Rem. a. isns is the pausal form. D'*33 in the sense of 'upright] 'honest' (masc), is only found in this chapter; p occurs, Num. 27, 7. Is. 16, 6. Proy. 11, 19, and elsewhere, in the neuter sense of 'right.' 1"n is here a stative verb = ' thy servants have not been, nor are they now, spies;' so Is. 15, 6; see Driver, § n. D'*b310. 'Spies! Del. remarks that the term D*7310 ('those who go about with the object of spying') was a more insulting term than D*m (' those who go about with the object of exploring '). 12. nNlb Dn,N2 yiNn mil* "3. The obj. is in tentionally emphasized by being placed first. 13. 13n3N seems superfluous; possibly, as Olshausen suggests, it is a gloss from ver. 32, and should be rejected. Del.4 renders, against the accents, ' Twelve are thy servants, brothers are we, the sons of etc JOpn = ' the youngest ;' see on 9, 24, and cf. M.R, § 86 ; Dav, § 47. 2, and S., § 34; Ges, § 133. 3. 133"N, as in 5, 24. 14. Nin is here neuter, as in 20, 16. Job 13, 16. 15. nX*13 TI. The Mass. pointed M with a created object, but M with God; so Lev. 25, 36 ^oy *JMN Ml; see Ges, § 93. 1. Rem. 7 note; Dav, S., § 119. Cf. 1 Sam. 17, 55 (Saul). 2 Sam. 11, 11 (David). Di. remarks 'that this oath is very suitable here, as the Egyptians honoured their kings, ins npos aKr)8ciav ovras deois (Diod. i. 90). 1 un:, 2 Sam. 17, 12, quoted by Ges. l.c, is perf. Qal of nu. LXX and Pesh. take it as a verb ; cf. Dr., Sam., p. 250. Z 338 GENESIS, DN. On this use of DN, cf. on 14, 23. Render, 'As sure as P. lives! ye shall not go hence, except your youngest brother come hilher! 16. "O (introducing the oath) = ' surely;' see Ewald, § 330 b, and cf. 1 Sam. 14, 44. 20, 3. 2 Kings 3, 14. 17. fjDNI . Cf. Josh. 2, 18. Is. 24, 22. 18. Vnl 1i3V nNT, lit. 'Do this and live] i.e. 'if ye do this ye shall live;' see Ges, § no. 2 a; M.R, § 10; Driver, § 152 i; Dav, S., § 132 b; cf. § 64; Amos 5, 4 1M1 *31Eii1; Prov. 3, 3 f. nxoi . . . Dana. 19. In vers. 19-24. 34-37 E, the detention of Simeon is a necessary feature in the narrative, but in 42, 38-43, 10, and 44, 18-34 J, there is no allusion made to him at all; cf. Driver, Introd., p. 17. inN D3"nN. Cf. ver. 33 inNn D3MN. On the absence of the art. here, see Ges, § 126. 5. Rem. 1 b, and § 134. 1. Rem. ; M. R, § 76. Rem. c ; Ewald, § 290 f. ; Dav, S., § 32. R. 2; so in 43, 14 inN D3MN. D3"n2 )121>1 1312J. Cf. Is. 30, 23 "lyir ioo. 21 ff. give 'the details of the compendious p lE'y'l ver. 20.' Dr-, § 75 0- 23. l*OU7. Cf. on 13, 7. Y^bon ''S, i.e. the interpreter that was usually present in such cases ; hence the article. DnS^. Cf. 1SM13*3 in 26, 28. 25. This verse seems to be connected with ver. 35. Special provision having been given them for the journey, ver. 25, the brethren would naturally only have discovered the money in their sacks at the end of the journey, ver. 35. CHAP. 42, VERS. 16-35. 339 On the other hand, ver. 27 f. agrees with 43, 19 f, where the discovery is made at the lodging-place. The former account is probably from E, the latter from J. Cf. Driver, Introd., p. 17; Di, p. 421 f. Dn"3D3 here, and ver. 35, the plural is used, because the silver of more than one is intended, Ewald, § 176 c; Ges, § 124. 1. Rem. 1 a, explains the plural differently; cf. note on 6, 14. The dag. in the 3 is unusual, though it is found in the sing, and dual, the aspiration is generally preserved in the pl.; so *3f'l, *310, *10X, etc.; see Ges, § 93. Rem. 1 F; Stade, § 71. 2. IpiD 7N tt?"N, so ver. 35. Cf. the note on 9, 5. fe*l*"1. The sing, is harsh; after 1N70'1 a plural would be natural. The Pesh. and Vulg. read the pl, while the Sam. and Onq. have the sing.; the LXX have iyevi\8r\ alroXs ovto>s. If 15^*1 (sing.) is read it must be rendered impersonally, ' one did] i.e. 'it was done;' the implied subj. being n'0>n. 27. inNn, i.e. the one who, as it were, made a begin ning, and opened his bag (the others naturally opening theirs afterwards), so =' the first;' cf. 2, 11. 4,19. mnnON. The word is only found in Gen, chaps. 42-44 in J. E uses the commoner word p'E>, 42. 25- 35- 28. "l31 11in"1. A pregnant construction; see note on 14, 3, and cf. 43, 33 "W D*E'SNn inon'l. 30. yiNn "OIN. See on 39, 20. D^aiO? is Ben Asher's reading. Ben Naftali reads D*iyi03 (with the article), see Baer and Del, Gen., p. 86 [where, in note 3, Judg. 21, 29 should be Judg. 21, 19]. 35. "131 D"p',10 Dn VP1. 'And it came lopass, as they z 2 34° GENESIS, were emptying their sacks, that they found ' etc. A circum stantial clause; so 2 Kings 2, 11 1311 . . . D*3?1 non Ml; cf. note on 27, 30. 36. n3b3. See on 21, 29. ,1373 occurs again, Prov. 31, 29. 37. n"On = ' thou mayest kill! 38. Dmiini . . . inNipi. Cf. the note on 33, 13. 43. 2. b3Nb lb3. If? with 7 frequently occurs in J, e.g. 18, 33. 24, 15. 19. 22. 45. 3. 1X?n 1X*n 'protested strongly! Cf. note on 2, 16 and add to references there M. R, § 37 a. D3"nN ^73. Cf. ver. 5, Ex. 22, 19 1137 mn*? *n?a (Del.), see Ewald, § 322 a; and cf. the note on 12, 8. 4. nbffl'D "pi?" ON. Cf. the neg. in ver. 5 1,3'N DN1 ni'E'o, and the note on 24, 42 ; here a cohortative alone follows the participle with E"* DN, in 24, 42 a perf. with waw conv. 6. nob, here pointed with two qamecs and no dag, and the tone on the last syllable, as the next word begins with a guttural ; see Ges, § 102. 2 d. 7. 'The man asked particularly about us, and our kindred, etc, so we told him according to these words ; how were 'we lo know that he would say?' etc. *S by, as in Ex. 34, 27. Lev. 27, 8, and often. 1H3 Xm"n. Oh the inf. abs. see above on ver. 3. and for this (potential) use of the imperf, cf. Driver, § 39 0; CHAP. 42, VER. 36 — CHAP. 43, VER. II. 34I Ewald, § 136 d; M.R, § 7. 2. Rem. c; Ges, § 107. 4 b. 2 ; Dav, S., § 43 b; so ver. 25 173N' DE» '3; 2 Sam. 3, 33 133N niO* 733 ni03,1, etc 9. viNom . . . vnN"3n Nb on. cf. 47, 6 dni Ono'EI . . . nyi*; 2 Sam. 15, 33 n*m , . . may DN; and see Driver, § 138 i. (a) ; M. R, § 3. 1 c ; Dav, S., § 130 b ; Ges, § 159. 3. A. d. -]7 MNOni. Cf. 1 Kings 1, 21 *331 *SN D'Non noi'E'. 10. 'For had we not tarried, surely now we had returned' etc. nny *3, as in 31, 42 ; cf. the note on that passage. 11. yiNn niOTO is usually rendered, 'from the song of the land] i.e. of the products of the land of Canaan that are celebrated and praised in song; cf. Jer. 51, 41. But Kn. and Del. point out that such a highly poetical expression would be very strange in this passage, and further that 10T and its derivatives are only used of songs in divine service. Del. derives mot here from 10T (cf. moto) in the sense ' to cut off] so mot would mean 'produce' or 'portion! But, as Di. remarks, ' 101 is only used of cutting off what is useless, or in the way.' Di. renders 'fruits! LXX, Kapnol. Better is the explanation of D. H. Muller, in H.W.B.10, p. 983, ' choice products] from a root lor of doubtful meaning ; but cf. in Arabic jUj ' a thing lo be protected, sacred, inviolate] Lane, p. 978; Sab. 101 'protect] Aram, yo? 'to wonder at] and J too? 'wonderful, admirable] so ni*0', die Merkwurdig- keiten des Landes ; cf. C. P. Ges, sub voce, and on lot III. Ob, nN33, "nS, see on 37, 25. 1*21, here probably not the honey of bees, but a syrup prepared by boiling from the juice of the grape, Arab, dibs, which is at the present day brought to Egypt from the neighbourhood of Hebron. 342 GENESIS, D"303. 'Pistachio nuts' =Pistacia terebinlhus, see C. P. Ges, sub voce; Low, Aram. Pflanzenn., No. 44, Pistacia vera. D"1ptt)1 . 'And almonds] the fruit of the Amygdalus com munis. Almonds are found in Egypt, but only very rarely. 12. n3l?JO f|D31. ' nSE'O is here either an abverbial ace, or in apposition to *|D3; cf. ver. 15 ep3 nSE'O 'double in silver;' Ex. 16, 22 nSE'O Dn?; Deut. 15, 18 1*3E>13E» 13E>0 *3; Jer. 17, 18 piaE* nSE'O!. See Ges, § 131. 2 d, and Rem. 5 a; also Driver, § 194; Dav, S., § 38. R. 5; M. R, § 71. 4; Ewald, § 286 d. 14. inN D3V1N nN. See the note on 42, 19. LXX and Heb.-Sam. read inN,1 here. ¦*nb3CJ tflbbtf 112JN3 "ONI . 'And I, if I am bereaved, • : t t • : t -^ ' lam bereaved;' cf. Esther 4, 16 M13N MiaN 1E*N31 ; 2 Kings 7, 4 isnoi 13n*0* DN1. In M^E* notice the _ in pause for — , and cf. 49, 3 ty. for TV; 49, 27 ^10* for ^po*; see Ges, § 29. 4 c; Ewald, § 93. 3; Stade, § 459 c. 1 (who accounts for the use of the pausal form with — here, ' der Euphonie wegen,' for euphony). 16. 1130 is imperative for the usual form nao, but only in this passage, possibly, as Bottcher suggests, on account of the following nao, to produce a change in the sound of the final syllable of the first word (D30). 18. 2!I>n, 'because how it came there was unknown to them and inconceivable,' Del.4 bb3nnb, lit. 'to roll oneself upon any one;' cf. Job 30, 14 173?3nn 1NE* nnn. ??3nn? is inf. cstr. Hithpo'al from 773. 20. "2 is a precative particle, always followed by *31N or *31N z=pray! Some suppose that *3 = *JI3 from nya = 'to ask,'- CHAP. 43, vers. 12-28. 343 and so lit. 'a petition;' cf. the precative particles W33, and «Liio, in Aramaic, and for the contraction, 7? from bya; also Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 48. Nold, however (Wright, l.c, p. 287), thinks this improbable. It is, perhaps, better to derive *3 from a root *!?, *3 = ' to entreat] cf. Arab. ^ 'to come as a suppliant, entreat:' so *31N *3 would = ' a supplication of (i.e. to) my lord.' Cf. C. P. Ges, sub voce. 23. D3b DlbttJ. Cf. Judg. 6, 23. 1 Sam. 20, 21. 'Dli'E' Dai* in the O. T. is always a formula of encouragement or congratulation, later in Hebrew, as in Aramaic and Arabic, a formula of greeting,' Del. 25. Dnb ibSN1* DO? "O. 'That they were to eat bread there! Imperf, as in ver. 7. 44, 8. 34. 47, i5- 48» I1'> Dr-> § 39 0 and y; Dav, S., § 43 b; Ges., § 107. 3 b; M. R, § 7. 2 b. 26. 1N'13',1. N with mappiq, perhaps to mark that it is a consonant; cf. Lev. 23, 17 1N'3n; Job 33, 21 1*P ('cum N dagessato teste Masora, vide Michlol, 63 b ; ' note in Baer and DeL's ed. of fob, p. 52); Ezra 8, 18 1N*3*1 ('n dagessa- tum auctore Masora ; ' note in' Baer and Del.'s ed. of Daniel, Ezra, and Neh., p. 108). It appears (cf. Ginsburg, Verhandl. des 5 intern. Orient. Congr., II. 1. 136 ff-) that the four examples of a mappiq in N mobile are only remains of a much wider system of pointing the N mobile with mappiq, which was once more consistently carried out in MSS. See further, Ewald, § 21 e; Ges, § 14. *• R- 2; Stade, § 42 b; Strack, Proleg. Critica, p. 19. 27. DS'ON DlbQJn. D17E* is here used as an adj.; cf. 1 Sam. 25, 6. 2 Sam. 20, 9. 28. 1ip"1, impf. Qal of lip ; see Ges, § 67. 5 end ; Dav, 344 genesis, § 42. 6. foot-note 2. lip and linnEM occur together again in 24, 26. 48. 29. ^On1*. So again Is. 30, 19 for ^P!," cf. Ges, § 67. Rem. 2 ; Ewald, § 251. 2 d. 30. VOm 11033 ^. Cf. 1 Kings 3, 26. Hos. 11, 8' (with D*0ns for D*0m). 32. p731" N7 "3. Cf. Num. 9, 6. Deut. 12, 17. 22, 19, of legal and moral incapability. Kn. remarks on this verse : ' The predilection of the Egyptians for their own people and land, and their exclusiveness towards strangers (Diod. i. 67 ; Strabo, xvii. 1. 6), is well known. The priests neither ate nor drank anything that came from a foreign land (Porph. iv. 7) ; the Egyptian would use no eating utensils belonging to a Greek (Her. ii. 41). In a similar way they conducted themselves towards the Hebrews, especially as they were a nomad people, " tenders of flocks and herds " (see 46, 34 ; and cf. also 39, 6).' 33. mon^i. Cf. on 42, 28. 34. Nffi^l is impersonal, the implied subject being Nts/Sl ; cf. 42, 25 ; Deut. 22, 8 7331 73* *3 ; 2 Sam. 17, 9 yOEM yOEI. The LXX and Syr. have the plural here. nil" tiJOn. Knobel calls attention to the frequency of the number five in matters relating to Egypt, e.g. 41, 34. 45, 22. 47, 2. 24. Is. 19, 18. For 1* in the sense of 'portion] cf. 47, 24. 2 Sam. 19, 44. 2 Kings 11, 7. USttJI 'to be understood according to Hagg. 1, 6] Del. 44. 1. tt)"N pD3. See Ges, § 139. 1; M.R, § 94 b. 3. "131 D^Nni 11N ip3n. 'The morning dawned, CHAP. 43, VER. 29 CHAP. 44, VER. 5. 345 and the men were sent away! The construction is the same as in 38, 25 T\rbv NM1 nNXlO Nin, so in the next verse, ION t|Dl*l . . . 1NX* DI. See note on 19, 23. UN, intrans. perf. like Eia, 310 (all); see Ges, § 72. Rem. 1; Stade, § 385 f. 4. 1p"mn Na 'Without having gone far;' so Ex. 34, 28 inE* N? D*01 73N N7 Dn? ' without eating bread, or drinking water;' Lev. 13, 23 nnE'3 N7 ' without having spread! The perfect is here equivalent to our past part. act. ; see Driver, § 162; Ges, § 156. 3 b; Dav, S., § 41. R. 3; M.R, § i53- R- b. 5. The LXX (cf. the Pesh. and Vulg.) insert at the end of ver. 4, "va tI iKXeyjraTe pov to kov8v to dpyvpovv ; perhaps an explanatory gloss. 'Is not this that wherein my lord is wont to drink, and he (emphatic) ' would surely practise divination therewith ' etc. ? On 13, cf. Ges, § 119. 3 b. 4. and foot-note; and M. R, § 52. 1. Rem. a, who compares irivtiv iv xPv bibere in ossibus, and boire dans un verre, with the use of the prep. here. 3 T\T\V occurs again in Amos 6, 6 [** *pitoa DMEM. Tuch takes the sentence slightly differently, supplying D31*3 after N7,1. But this seems unnecessary. 12 C?n3" WTH. Cf. 30, 27. This species of divination with cups, called KvXiKopavrela or vSponavrela, was much prac tised in Egypt; cf. Jamblich, Myst., 3. 14, and Varro in Augustine's Civ. del, 7. 35, Kn. cited by Di, p. 427- Kn-> l-c-> says : ' Water was poured into a glass or some other vessel, or pieces of gold, silver, or precious stones were thrown into 1 Joseph had probably been admitted to the priests' caste, and would consequently practise divination, cf. 41, 45. 346 GENESIS, the water, and the figures or rings that appeared, when this was done, were supposed to give information about the future, or what was obscure to the inquirer.' The LXX have here ai/Tos 8e olavio~p& ola>vl£cTai iv airrQ. So the Pesh. and Vulg. Onq. has n*3 p*130 N^IS N111 'and he makes discoveries through it] sc. the cup. Saadiah, quoted by Wright (Genesis, p. 109), has sj Ixls^l lUl yLJ 'and he only proved you by it] ' Wishing to screen Joseph from such practices.' t£H3 = properly 'to whisper] viz. magic formulae or oracles. 7. 131" nob . 'After ,107, yilD, "J*N, HO *N, the imperfect, as more courteous and adapted to a tone of entreaty, is often preferred to the perfect,' Driver, § 39 y; so ver. 34. Ex. 2, 13 13n no?; 1 Sam. 21, 15 WN 1N*3n 107; cf. the note on 16, 8, and contrast the perf. in 26, 9. 2 Sam. 1, 14. mtoo . . . nb^bn. cf. on 18, 25. 9. nOI . . . N20" IttJN . The perf. with waw conv. to introduce the apodosis; contrast ver. io, where the simple imperf. follows ; cf. ver. 1 7 (where ' the subject is reinforced by the personal pronoun ' Nl,l) ; Judg. 8, 7. 9 ; and see Driver, § 123 y. Obs.; M.R, § 26; Ges, § 112. 5 a 8; Dav, S., § 56. 12. nb3 |Op31 bnn bl133, circ. clause; see on 21, 14. LXX, apgdpevos; so 48, 1 4 1*1* nN 73E». Render, ' Beginning with the eldest, and finishing with the youngest] l*'133n is a cup shaped like the bell or calix of a flower ; cf. Ex. 25, 31, where the word is used of the cup of a flower used in the workmanship of the golden candlestick. 15. 131 Dnxrp Nlbn. 'Did ye not know that a man like me would be certain io practise divination] and so at once CHAP. 44, VER. 7 — CHAP. 45, VER. I. 347 discover the thief? *S03 lE'N B^N, i.e. one of the wise men of Egypt ; cf. Is. 19, 11; Kn. 16. nOI = 1031, as in Ps. 116, 12. 18. ni>133 1,103, lit. 'like thee, like Pharaoh] i.e. 'for thou art as P.;' cf. 18, 25. Is. 24, 2. Hos. 4, 9. Ps. 139, 12 ; and see M.R, § 56. 1. Rem. a; Ges, § 161. 2. Rem.; Dav, 5, §151. R- 2- 21. Vbl* "3" nO"lDN1, i.e. take him under my pro tection; cf. Jer. 39, 12. 40, 4. Pss. 33, 18. 34, 16. LXX, *<» eirtpeXovpai avrov. 22. nOI . . . 3Tin; and ver. 29 Dnnill . . . imp*.. See the note on 33, 13; and cf. Ges, § 159. 2 e. noi ; cf. the note on 3, 22. 31. n"*n1 introduces the apodosis to *N33 nnyi in ver. 30 ; and noi is apodosis to W1N13. 33. bl^ . . . 3GK The jussive is here used in making a request, as often; cf. the note on 26, 28. 45. 1. Vbl* 0"323n 737. 'Before all those that stood by him] lit. 'with regard to all those' etc. 7 as in 17, 20 i'NyOE'*? ; cf. the note on that passage. X*1lnn3. 'When he made himself known! yimn, cf. Num. 12, 6 (all), is the inf. Hithp. of yi*, a verb *"s, really 1"S; in the Nif, Hif, and Hof. the waw reappears, yii3 = yilS, riin = 5,:iin, yi1l = Vlin; but in Hithpa'el the * usually remains, as 3X*, 3XM1, yV>, H™. ^nn (den" 348 GENESIS, from lb*.), EMMn (den. from EM?), etc. With yiin-1, cf. Iimi and n3in,1, Wright, Comp. Gram., p. 241 ; Ges, § 69. 2. 4. ^nN Dni30 1U*N. See Ges, § 138. 1. Rem. 1; M. R, § 156. Rem. c; Dav, S., § 9 b. 5. n"nob "O. ' For for the preservation of life] i.e. for the preservation of your life and that of other people; cf. Ezra 9, 8. 9. 6. 0"n3tt) nt. On this use of IJ, see note on 27, 36. Render, 'Now two years has the famine ' etc. "131 Hiin ]"N HL*N. Render, ' When there shall be neither ploughing nor harvest! lE'N after words of time without the prep, and suffix is virtually =' when] so 6, 4. 40, 13; see Dav, S., § 9 c, and cf. Ges, § 138. 1. 7- "3nbtt)"1 is connected only in thought, and not chrono logically, with ver. 6; so l?ni, 36, 14. 46, 18. 25. See Driver, § 76 a. n^lN© D37 Dlto7. ' To give you a remnant' etc, i.e. that your descendants may live and your family not be destroyed from off the earth; cf. 2 Sam. 14, 7. Jer. 44, 7. To take nMNE* as the residue of the corn which the earth has brought forth is unsuitable, as nMNE* is never used of things. n713 nO"7B7 037 nlTtn71. Del. renders 'to pro long for you life (ni'ni17 = n*no nni>, Ezra 9, 8 f.), to a great (numerous) deliverance] i. e. that you may be preserved, and become a numerous body of people, the second 7 being the dat. of the product. 1M,1 everywhere else is con strued with the ace, but, as Del. on Is. 53, 11 shews, verbs in Hif. are sometimes construed with a dative. Others (Schumann, Wright) take "i "a? as in apposition to D37, and render, ' to keep you alive, a great body of fugitives! LXX CHAP. 45, VERS. 4-IO. 349 and Heb.-Sam. strike out the 7 before 10*737. On no*?a, cf. Lag, B.N., p. 85; Barth, N.B., p. 314, who denies that the form (as some assume) is a diminutive. 8. nXTl37 3N7. Cf. 1 Mace 11, 32. A title bestowed on the first minister in the kingdom ; see Ges, Thes., p. 7. Di, referring to Brugsch, Gesch., 207, 248, 252, 592, says ab en pirao was, in documents of the nineteenth dynasty, the official title of the first (domestic) minister, and that ' adon of the whole land ' occurs in a similar sense in a document of the eighteenth dynasty. bttJO is either ace after *SO*E'*1, or, possibly, the force of the prep. 7 (before JUN?) extends to this word also ; cf. Ges, § 119. 5; Dav, S., § 101; M.R, § 59. 10. ]ti>3 yiN3, called in P DDOyi pN, 47, " (cf- Ex. 12, 37. Num. 33, 5) ; the LXX also, in 46, 28, render )V1 by els yrjv 'Pape0 'load] a fin-af Xeyop.; cf. 44, 13 (J), where DOy occurs. 18. "l31 210. ' The best of the land of Egypt] i.e. its best products; cf. vers. 20. 23, also 24, 10. 2 Kings 8, 9, etc.; so LXX, Vulg, Tuch, Del, Di. Rashi and others take 310 as =' the best portion] i.e. Goshen; but this is 30*0, 47, 6. n. 19. 131 nn"12 nnNI must mean, 'And thou (Joseph) art charged, do ye (the brethren) this] which is very harsh. Possibly the text is corrupt. The Pesh. inserts after n*lX, !J*nN-7N ION ; while the LXX, ob 8e ivretXai, and the Vulg, 'praecipe etiam' etc, read the text DnN mx. 20. Compare the note in 34, 21 for the casus pendens, "131 310 *3, taken up by the pronoun Nil. 22. n70fe? ni37n, i. e. ' changes of raiment] costly robes, which would be worn on special occasions, cf. 27, 15; see Judg. 14, 12 f. 19. 2 Kings 5, 5. 22 f. The brothers received a complete outfit, while Benjamin has five times as much, and three hundred shekels besides. 23. nNt3 'as follows! Usually pointed nN'3, and only here with no pretonic -^-. pTO occurs only once again in the O.T, 2 Chron. n, 23. The word is frequent in Aramaic. 24. 1T3in 7N, scarcely 'do not fear] for such a warning would be superfluous in the case of persons who had already made the journey more than once, but rather ' do not quarrel] i.e. do not dispute about your conduct to me; cf. 42, 22, also Prov. 29, 9. Is. 28, 21. 352 GENESIS, 26. "Ol = ' and that] introducing the oratio obliqua. 127 331. ' And his heart grew cold! 27. 2pl>'1 mi Tint . . . NT1, lit. ' and he saw . . . and the spirit off. revived;' almost = 'when he saw . . ! etc. (46, 29. 1 Sam. 10, 14. i7,5ib); cf. Driver, p. 187; Ges, §111. 1. R. 3. nn Mni; cf. Pss. 22, 27 lyb D333? *n*; 69, 33 D3337 M*1. 28. 21. '// is enough;' so Num. 16, 3. 7. 2 Sam. 24, 16. 46. 3. mio. nil for nil, like nyi for nyi, Ex. 2, 4 ; nib for ni7, Is. 37, 3 ; see Ges, § 69. Rem. 1; Stade, § 619 h. 4. Tlby 03 -[71*N "33N1. On the inf. Qal and imperf. Hif, see the note on 37, 33. The emphatic inf. abs. usually precedes the finite verb; see Ges, § 113. 3 a and b; Dav, S., § 86 c; M.R, § 37 a; Ewald, § 312 b, who remarks that Qal after Hif. is very rare; cf. Is. 31, 5. The inf. abs. is here further emphasized by D3, as in 31, 15 b)2ti D3 73N1. 6. Dn"Dp01, sing, not plural ; see the note on 41, 21. 8-27. A list of the family of Jacob who went down into Egypt with him. The names in this list are found again, with several variations, in Num. 26. 1 Chron. 2-8 (cf. also Ex. 6, 14-16), the variations being most numerous in the case of the sons of Benjamin. Jacob's sons are classified according to his wives, the list falling under four heads : Leah, Zilpah, Rachel, Bilhah. Under the first head, Leah, come Reuben, with four sons ; Simeon, with six ; Levi, with three ; Judah, with five ; Perez and Zerah being regarded as his sons, though they really were his grand sons ; Perez has two sons, and as Er and Onan died in CHAP. 45, VER. 26 CHAP. 46, VER. 8. 353 Canaan, Judah's sons and grandsons amount to five ; Issachar has four sons ; Zebulun, three ; Leah's daughter Dinah is also mentioned: thus Leah's children and grandchildren amount to 26; and these 26 + Reuben, Simeon, Levi, Judah, Issachar, and Zebulun =32, and with Jacob himself, 33. Under the second head, Zilpah, come Gad, with seven sons ; Asher, with four sons, a daughter (Serah), and two grand sons (7) : thus 7 + 74-2 (Gad and Asher) = 16. Under the third head, Rachel, come Joseph and Benjamin ; Joseph has two sons, Ephraim and Manasseh ; and Benjamin, ten : thus 2 + 2+10=14. Under the fourth head, Bilhah, come Dan, with one son; and Naphtali, with four sons: in all, 1 + 4 + 2 (Dan and Naphtali) = 7. Thus all the family of Jacob including himself, was (33 +16 + 14 + 7) 70. The LXX here (ver. 27), cf. Acts 7, 14, make the total number 75, counting (ver. 20) three grandchildren and two great grandchildren among Joseph's descendants, from 50, 23. Num. 26, 28 ff. 1 Chron. 7, 14 f. The number 70 is men tioned again in Ex. 1, 5. Deut. 10, 22 (LXX in Ex. 75, but in Deut. 70). On the variations in the lists given in this chapter, Num., l.c, and 1 Chron, l.c, cf. the larger com mentaries, i.e. Del.5, p. 492 f-J Di-, P- 437 f-; aIs0 on the difficulty that arises in the case of Perez, who, being born after the sale of Joseph into Egypt, and before Jacob came to Egypt, had, according to our list, two sons. Thus, as the time between Joseph's sale into Egypt and the coming of Jacob is only twenty-two years, the birth of Perez and his sons must have occurred within twenty-two years, which, of course, is not impossible, but not very probable. Another difficulty is also discussed by Di. and Del, viz. that Benjamin, the youth (43, 8. 44, 20, J), is represented here (ver. 21 P) as the father of ten sons. a a 354 GENESIS, 15. n3"l1 nNl . If the nN is not corrupt, we must render, ' and also Dinah ' (governed by ,11?*). 20. 12JN refers to the object that is implied in fjDl*7 171*1, viz. D*S3. < 27. nN2n. See the note on 18, 21. 28. 131 mlnb. 'To shew the way before him into Goshen] This can hardly mean that Judah should act as guide from Palestine to Egypt, but rather that he should in Egypt either acquire the necessary information about the way to Goshen, or make all preparations to facilitate Jacob's entry into that district with his flocks and herds. As we should expect to find Joseph doing this it seems simpler to make Joseph subject to nil,1? = ' that he (Joseph) should give him (Judah) instructions before his (Jacob's) arrival] so Ges, Kn, Di. Del.6 regards Judah as the subj. to nil,17, and explains that he was sent on before the others, to announce the impending arrival of Jacob. The Sam. Ver, LXX, Pesh. apparently read nill?, as inf. Nif.= niNin? (which is found in the Heb.-Sam.), or had this word in their text, which reading was accepted by Di.6, who considered it was confirmed by l*?N Ni*l in ver. 29, and rendered, ' That he (foseph) should appear before htm (i.e. come to meet him) lo Goshen! ViSb, i.e. 'before his (facob' s) arrival! 29. bX'l, i.e. from the Nile land to Goshen, which lay on higher ground, Di. 111*=' again and again;' cf. Ruth 1, 14. 30. DX?3n, as in 2, 23. 18, 32. 29, 34. 31. nbl*N, possibly used with reference to the ideal, or real high position of Pharaoh's royal residence, Di. ; cf. Ges, Thes., 1022. CHAP. 46, VER. 15 — CHAP. 47, VER. 6. 355 33. 03"tl)X*O, singular; cf. on 41, 21. 34. ni*1 b3. Cf. on 4, 2. The Sam. has the pl. *yi. 47. 2.1',nN repOI. ' Out ofthe whole number of his brethren;' so 1 Kings 12, 31 ny.1 niXpO (not as A.V, 'ofthe lowest ofthe people'); Ez. 33, 2 D1*XpO UN E'*N ; 19. 4 is different, cf. the note on that passage. 3. 1N2 nXH. On the predicate in the sing, see M.R, § 133. Dav, S., §§ 1 7, 1 1 6. R. 3, takes nyi as collective. Di, however, considers that nyi is miswritten for *yi, comparing 46, 32; Ges, § 145. 7 b; Ewald, § 16 b. The Sam. and several codices (Wright) read the plural. 5 and 6. In the LXX text the arrangement of these two verses is different; 5a is followed by 6\ with the insertion tjkBov 8e els AiyvTTTov npos 'la(rr)

0 Kal ol viol oItov' ko\ IJKovuev $apao> 0a irpos 'Iacr^ Xiyw, then 5 b and 6 a follow. Di, p. 441, Prefers LXX t0 Mass. text; cf. Driver, Introd., p. 10. 6. Nin *7"33b 0"12O yiN . Casus pendens; see on 34, 21. bT» ^N D3 ©1 nXH" ONI. 'And if thou knowest that there are capable men among them] lit. ' and if thou knowest, and there are ' etc. On this union of the subordinate clause by waw, see note on 30, 27, and cf. Job 23, 3 ('knew so that I might find him '). bTl "©3N. 'Able or worthy men;' cf. Ex. 18, 21. 25, and 1 Kings 1, 52 (7*n p). Onofcl, the perf. with waw conv. used in making a suggestion; see on 24, 14. a a 2 356 GENESIS, n3pO "lift Cf. 1 Sam. 21, 8, where Doeg the Edomite is called inNE5? lE'N O'jnn 1*3N. 7. miOyi. Cf. 1*oyi in P with J*xn in ver. 2 in J. *J13"1, as in 2 Kings 4, 29, used of greeting any one; cf. 2 Sam. 16, 16. n. DDOXH. Cf. on 45, 10. DDOyi (only here and LXX, 46, 28) is the name of the district, so called from the town DDOyi mentioned in Ex. 1, 11 (built by the children of Israel). 12, 37. Num. 33, 3. 5 (the starting-point of the Exodus). The position of the town is uncertain, possibly it was situated near Phacusa, not far from the modern Tel- el-Kebir. Cf. Naville, Goshen, p. 20 ; Exodus, p. 7. 12. Dnb . . . 1"2N nN . . . SDb3"1. On 737a with a double ace, see Ewald, § 283 b, and note on 26, 15. ?|Dn "3b, lit. ' according to the little children] i. e. ' accord ing to their number and wants] ' little children being mentioned because they would require much food, and also because people would be less willing to see them in want,' Del. *a? as in Lev. 25, 16. 27, 16. 13. nbm, awa£ Xeyop. Imperf. apoc. Qal of 11? for 1N7; on the form ofthe imperf. apoc, see Ges, § 75. Rem. 3 b. 14. N2503n. Cf. nNXosn, 19, 15. 15. D3N occurs only in this and the next verse in the Pent.; it is also found in Is. 16, 4. 29, 20. Ps. 77, 9 (all). 16. After D3? insert Qr6, with LXX, Sam, Vulg, as nsnNl requires an obj. 17. Dbn31. ' And he sustained them! 7>i3 is only used in this passage in the sense, 'sustain] 'nourish;' cf. Ps. 23, 2, LXX (iKTpicpetv). Elsewhere it means 'to lead' or 'guide;' so Is. 40, 11. Ps. 23, 2, and Cheyne, erit. note. CHAP. 47, VERS. 7-21. 357 18. "131 "31NO in33 Nb. 'We will not hide it from my lord, that if the money is spent, and the cattle we own be my lord's, there is nothing left' etc.; DN *3 being taken separately, according to the accentuation. Del. prefers to render, ' We cannot conceal it from my lord, but (must say), the money and the cattle we own are all my lord's, there is left' etc, taking DN *3 together and comparing 2 Sam. 15, 21. 1 Kings 20, 6. 2 Kings 5, 20 (where DN *3 is preceded by a protestation), which are not quite parallel to this passage. Others (Kn, Ges.) render DN *3 ' but, since] or ' but, because] which render ings assign to DN a meaning it can hardly bear. Di, following Kn, renders the words from DN *3 down to *31N slightly differently, ' that if our money, and the cattle we own, are entirely al an end, (and come) to my lord] comparing for the pregnant construction 14, 15. 42, 28. 43, 33, a rendering that seems somewhat harsh and unnatural. *3lN is used here, as in Num. 32, 25. 27. 36, 2, where more than one person is speaking. Del. compares the French 'Monsieur! 13n"13='o«r bodies] i.e. 'ourselves] 1*13 being used of living beings, as in Ez. 1, n. 23. Dan. 10, 6. Neh. 9, 37; elsewhere it is only used of a corpse. 19. Notice that niDS is zeugmatically connected with isnoiN , cf. 4, 20 nspoi ?nN aa*. 13n01N 03 13n3N 03. D3 . . . D3 = ' both . . . and] as in yeis. 3 and 19. 24, 25. 44- 43, 8- 44, 16. 46, 34; Dav, S.,\ 136; Ges, § 154- foot-note c; M. R, § 148- R- b- DCJn, impf. Qal (intrans.) from DOE'; cf. Ges, § 67. Rem. 3; Stade, § 509. 2; see on 16, 4 &«!)¦ With this use of DDE', cf. Ez. 12, 19 nXIN DEM jyO? ; 19, 7 HN7D1 pN DEMI. 21. "131 InN 1"21»n DX'n nNl, usually rendered, ' and the people, he removed them into the towns;' but such a removal 358 GENESIS, of all the people into the towns would be scarcely possible, and it is very doubtful whether 1*ayn can mean this. It is better, if the text is left unchanged, to render, ' and the people he caused to pass over to the towns', Dyn nNl being a casus pendens; cf. the notes on 13, 15. 21, 13. The meaning being, the people were brought to the towns so that they might be fed from the stores of grain that were there; cf. 41, 48. Tuch interprets the Mass. text as meaning, ' he moved the people from one city into another throughout the whole land ';' possibly to remove them from the districts in which the land they formerly owned lay. But this would require 1*y? l*yO; cf. 2 Chron. 30, 10. The LXX, Kal tov Xabv Kare&ovXaoaTo ovtco els natSas, SO the Sam. am?avz . aiisv . ^av? . ssv . a/tt?, and Vulg. ' Subjecitque earn (omnem terram) Pharaoni, et cunctos populos ejus] which point to a reading D*13y? MN 1*3y,1 Dyi nNl (cf. Jer. 17, 4) = ' the people he made serve him (the king) as slaves! Di. adopts this reading, following Knobel ; so Del.6 Onq. has *1pi> *1|0 IM*. layN Noy n^l, and the Pesh. Jcsa^o )%s£L )la ^» yaj( vd*., boih = 'and the people, he removed them from town to town] a meaning which (see above) the Heb. text cannot bear. Di. remarks, in favour of the ren dering of the text adopted by him, that the purchase of the people, corresponding to the purchase of the land, is demanded by the emphatic position of Dyn nNl ; cf. vers. 19 and 23. 22. pn "O. pn as in Ez. 16, 27. Prov. 30, 8. 31, 15. 1b3N1. The perf. with waw conv. is frequentative; see Driver, § 120; Ges, § 112. 3 a. f; Dav, S., § 54. R. 1. 23. Nn = l3i occurs only once again in Heb, Ez. 16, 43. It corresponds with the Arab. U, Syr. Ji. CHAP. 47, VERS. 22-31. 359 onxnn. cf. on 24,14. 24. D37 mn" ni"n 1*31N1. ' And four portions ye shall have! m*1 yaiNl must be regarded as object after n*1* D37, which is nearly equivalent to 'ye have! Cf. Ex. 12, 49 niTN? i*n* nnN mm; Num. 9, 14 Dai* n*n* nnN npn; see Ewald, § 295 d; Ges., § 145. 7. Rem. 3, and cf. Dav, S., §116. nT'n. See 43, 34. 03BO7 73N71 is omitted in LXX. These words are possibly a gloss, or they may, as Ols. suggests, originally have come after D373N71 . 26. \ZJOn7 ni*137. 'For P. with regard to the fifth part! It would be less harsh if the text were read E'en nyia?, with the Pesh, as an explanation of nnN. The LXX have raj 0apaa diroirepiTTOvv, as though the text were fc'on? "a?. 27. W1N1. See on 34, 10. 29. "31" nnn 1,1" N3 D"tU. See the note on 24, 2. 31. nOOn tiJNI 7X» 7N1&P innttJI. 'And Israel bowed down towards the head of the bed; ' so Di., Del. The aged patriarch sat upright while speaking with Joseph, and as he was too weak to rise, turned and inclined himself towards the upper end of the bed, and offered up thanks to God that his request was granted ; cf. the Vulg, ' adoravit Israel Deum, conversus ad lecluli caput] and 1 Kings 1, 47. Tuch renders, ' leant back upon the head of the bed! The LXX, Pesh, and Itala read noon as noon, the LXX being quoted thus in Heb. II, 21 ( I1- 1, 4- x7, *9- Is- 7, r4- 1130. On the part, asfulurum inslans, see on 6, 17. 5. On "O . . . *J"33 "3tt) nnil. On the casus pendens, see on 34, 21. , 6. iniblDl. 'And thy offspring;' ni710, as in Lev. 18, 9. 11. For construction cf. note on 41, 57. 131 On"nN 0t?j by. 'According lo the name of their brethren shall they be called in their inheritance] i.e. their descendants shall dwell among the posterity of Ephraim and Manasseh, and be reckoned as belonging to them, and not as separate tribes. CHAP. 48, VERS. I-I2. 361 7. |1BO. Everywhere else P calls Mesopotamia DIN [13; cf. on 25, 20. Possibly the omission of DIN is due to a copyist's mistake. The Sam. has DIN [IB. "'by nnO. 'Died, io my sorrow] For this use of by, cf. Eccl. 2, 17 n'E>yon *i>y yi *3. See also 33, 13 and the note on that passage. yiN ni33. Cf. the note on 35, 16. 9. nt3 'here;' so 38, 21. N3 Dnp. Ewald, § 253 a, and Stade, § 631 e, compare 3np here with 35?X3 (Amos 9, 1,), the suffix being attached to the word ending in a guttural, the tone being placed on the penult. Dnp, however, here has no accent at all, as it is con nected with NS by Maqqef, and so deprived of its accent ; and the _ of 3_ is consequently shortened into D— : and < in Amos 1. c. the tone on 3yxa is drawn back on to the penult, to avoid two tone-syllables coming together, the next- word being K'NIB. D313N1. For the pausal seghol, cf. 21, 9 pnxo and the note there ; also the frequent 1S» obivj', Ges, § 58. 3. Rem. 1; Konig, Lehrg., p. 232. In Num. 6, 27 we find 3?13N in pause, also in ordinary editions in this passage. 11. nNl for niNl, like ib»J| for n\V\ in 31, 28 (see the note on that passage), and n'E'y for ni'E^, 50, 20. VlbbS. According to Ben Asher in the Dihduke Hatea- • : at • ° mim, ed. Baer and Strack, Leipzig, 1879, § 49, the — in the first person perf. Pi'el is always preserved in pause, except in this word; M^n, Ps. 38, 7; MJm*, ps. „9) 43, etc.; *nij>*, Ps. 119, 128. 12. V3N7, as in Num. 22, 31. In 19, 1. 42, 6 we find D*3N alone used after lnnE"! and linnE'*! respectively. 362 GENESIS, 14. 1"T nN 73to. 'Crossing his hands;' the construc tion is the same as in 44, 12; cf. the note on 21, 14. This rendering is the same as that of the LXX, Pesh., Vulg, and most moderns, and is suitable to the context; cf. ver. 13. Cf. the Arab. Jk£ 'plexuit] ' ligavit] Onq. and Saadiah render, 'he made his hands wise] i.e. 'he placed them so intentionally,' which assigns a doubtful meaning to ?3fe> (=7*3^1); moreover with this rendering 1*1*3 would be more natural, as Di. points out. With this verse cf. Matt. 19, 13 f. Mark 10, 16, where Christ in blessing lays( His hands on those whom He blessed. 15. ntn D1"n IX* "111>0. This phrase is only found once again in the O.T, viz. Num. 22, 30 IM DIM iy "piyo. 16. "Ott) Dn3 N1p"1. Cf. 21, 12 and the note there. ' In them let my name be named] i.e. ' be made famous through their offspring.' Del.4 renders, ' On them let my name be called! D,13 = D1*?y, i.e. 'let them be regarded as my children, and sharers of the promises made to me and mine.' 131". nsi is only found in this passage in the O.T. 17. n*1©". Notice the tense, ' was placing ;' Jacob had not actually placed his hands on the heads of Ephraim and Manasseh, but was in the act of placing them ; cf. Driver, § 39 0, and note on 43, 25. The imperfects with waw conv. give details of Jacob's blessing which have been omitted, though the actual blessing is given in the preceding verses; cf. note on 27, 24. 19. D"13n N70 (cf. Is. 31, 4) = D*13 [ion in 17, 5. 22. "pnN by inN 03tt 1,7 VW3 "ONI. 'And I give thee one mountain slope above thy brethren! D3E'= 'shoulder] then applied to the slope of a mountain, like ?|n3, CHAP. 48, VERS. 14-22. 363 Num. 34, n. Josh. 15, 8. 10. 18, 12. 13. Is. 11, 14; see Ges, Thes., 1407. The word D3B* is chosen with an obvious allusion to the well-known town of Shechem (cf. on 12, 6) in the territory of Ephraim (Josh. 24, 1. 25. 32. Judg. 9, 1. 1 Kings 12, 1. 25). Cf. the LXX rendering o-Utpa i^aiperov. This Shechem Jacob gives to Joseph, in preference to his other sons. Joseph would therefore take precedence of his brethren ; as the possessor of a mountain tract, in addition to his other territory, he would, as it were, be a ' shoulder ' above them. inN is status absolutus with the vocalisation of the status constructus, the shorter pronunciation being sometimes chosen in the flow of speech; see note on 3, 22, and cf. Ewald, § 276 b; Ges, § 130. 6 ; and Is. 27, 12 in? inNi); Zech. 11, 7 MNip ™Ni>1 < • '™nTi? i!^- 0:>v is taken by Onq. and Pesh. in the sense 'portion] a translation that is too indefinite. Tuch and others consider that UN Q2V means that two portions of territory should be assigned to Ephraim and Manasseh (cf. ver. 5), as contrasted with the one portion that the other tribes were to receive. But D3E* UN can hardly mean ' one portion] as one portion of land would embrace more than one mountain slope, and UN G1V cannot = a district in which Shechem was situated, Di, p. 452. "nnp7 1\WN, Tuch, Kn, Keil, and Del. take *nnp7 as prophetic perfect; but cf. Di, l.c, who points out that if a future capture of Shechem is referred to, there is no reason why this particular town should have been selected by Jacob, and that we would rather expect njSPl or Vljpn. The account of the acquisition of Shechem in this chapter is probably from E. It varies from that given in chap. 34 P and J (Driver, Introd., p. 15; Di, p. 452). In 33, 19 and Josh. 24, 32, both E, Jacob is leported to have purchased the plot of ground at Shechem. 364 GENESIS, "ntl)p31 "3in2 are curiously rendered in some Vss, cf. Onq. Miy331 M17X3 'with my prayer and entreaty' (Berliner's text follows the Mass. text, see the notes in his edition, part ii, p. 17). Another curious paraphrase is proposed by Hieron. (Quaest., ed. Lagarde, p. 66), ' dabo tibi Sicimam, quam emi in fortitudine mea, hoc est in pecunia quam multo labore et sudore quaesivi.' In his translation, however, he follows the Heb. text. 49. In this chapter is coritained the so-called ' Blessing of Jacob/ a name which owes its origin to ver. 28b, which however probably belongs, not to the ' Blessing,' but to the following narrative 2 8b-33, which comes from P. This designation cannot be regarded as a suitable one, as in point of fact only two of the tribes are really blessed, viz. Judah and Joseph,' the utterances of the patriarch in the case of Reuben, Simeon, and Levi being full of reproach, and a future predicted for them the reverse of prosperous. It would be better designated by the title Del. gives it, ' The prophetic sayings of Jacob concerning the Twelve.' The six sons of Leah are first mentioned, then Bilhah's eldest son, Zilpah's two sons (the eldest first), Bilhah's second son, and Rachel's two sons, Joseph the eldest first. The order in which they occur is partly that in which they were born, and partly that in which the territories represented by them geographically stand, starting from the south of Canaan and going northwards (Ewald, Hist!, ii. p. 435 ; Eng. trans, ii. p. 308). Thus the four elder sons come first, Reuben, Simeon, Levi, Judah ; but then the order of birth is abandoned, and Leah's other two sons, Zebulun (Jacob's tenth son) and Issachar (Jacob's CHAP. 49. 365 ninth son), are inserted, Zebulun being placed before Issachar, as the future that Jacob predicts for him is more prosperous and honourable than that of Issachar (Di.). Cf. Deut. 33, 18, where Zebulun and Issachar come together, but Zebulun first, as here. The four last sons are cited according to their geographical position ; Benjamin, Joseph, Naphtali, Asher (from south to north), Joseph and Benjamin also being in the proper order of their birth. Dan is probably placed after Issachar, as being the first son of Jacob by his wives' hand maidens (in order of birth he follows Judah, but as the order of birth is abandoned to enumerate Leah's six sons, Dan, the fifth, is mentioned first, after the six sons of Leah). Gad would then be placed after Dan, and before Naphtali, who was born before him, so as not to disturb the geographical arrange ment — Benjamin, Joseph, Naphtali, Asheir — and possibly to keep Zilpah's two sons together. In Deut. 33, the ' Blessing of Moses,' — which has many points of contact with this chapter, both in the figures it employs and the language used, — the order is varied; viz. Reuben, Judah, Levi (whose blessing contrasts strangely with Jacob's words in ver. 5), Benjamin, Joseph (Ephraim and Manasseh are mentioned by name), Zebulun, Issachar, Gad, Dan, Naphtali, Asher, while Simeon in the text as we now have it is not mentioned at all. The language of this chapter should be noticed. In its elevated tone, in vigour and force, and in the numerous figurative expressions employed, it surpasses the other poetical passages in Genesis (9, 25 ff. 14, T9ff- 24, 60. 25, 23. 27, 27 ff. 39 f.). Many of the expressions employed are rare, and unusual in the later stages of the language, e.g. Tn§ (&ra£ Xey.) and 1M1.1, ver. 4; ni30, ver. 5 (a &ra£ Xey. of uncertain meaning); ppno, ver. 10 (occurring again in the poetical fragment Num. 21, 18. Deut. 33, 21. Judg. 5, 14- Ps. 60, 9) ; 366 GENESIS, niD, ver. II (airag Xey.) ; *7*?3n, ver. 12 (&ra£ Xey.); DMSE'D, ver. 14 (only found once again, Judg. 5, 16); ;3*BE', ver. 17 (&ra£ Xey.) ; niPty (only used thus in this passage), and ISC' (ajra£ Xey.) ver. 2 1 ; ni3, ver. 2 2 (observe the archaic fem. ending), only in this passage for nib • 131, ver. 23 (331 is perhaps found again in Ps. 18, 15 31 D*p13, see the note on ver. 23); ME^ . . . 3EM1, ver. 24, etc.; also the archaic ending *. (the old binding vowel) in 133? *1DN, 13nN *33; the suffix ri for i, in n'l*y and riniD, and possibly in n'TE* (cf. the note on this word) ; the poetical vV for ?y ; 1133, poetical for e'33, with which it is here parallel, ver. 6; *10N, ver. 21, poetical for *131 (but cf. note); the poetical 1*1* *yir, ver. 24, etc. Probably this chapter is the oldest portion of the book of Genesis, being incorporated into one of the original documents (possibly J), out of which the present book grew, from a still older source. On the special literature of this chapter, see Tuch, p. 479 f, and Di, p. 456. 1. D3nN N"*p\ Nlp = 1lp, as in 42. 4; cf. the note on that passage. D'*0"n nnnNS. 'In days lo come] lit. 'in the end of days! n*inN is used here as in Num. 24, 14. Deut. 4, 30. Jer. 23, 20, etc, denoting the end of the period which the prophet sees, or which he has in view. The LXX have eV io-xdrav twv fjpepav; cf. Heb. I, 2 and I Pet. I, 20 (eV io-xdrav t5>v WoW); Pesh. Jj&&oT» Jl'jJIa; Onq. N*Oi* S]iD3; Vulg. ' in diebus novissimis! The formula is also common in pro phecy in a somewhat different sense, e.g. Hos. 3, 5. Mic. 4, 1. Ez. 38, 16. 2. ' Gather yourselves and hear, sons of facob; And hearken unto Israel your father. 3. Reuben — my firstborn art thou, my strength and the firs fruits of my vigour. CHAP. 49, VERS. 1-4. 367 Excelling in dignity and excelling in might. Boiling over like water, excel not thou; For thou didst go up to thy father s bed: There thou didst pollute it; he went up to my couch!' Reuben, Jacob's firstborn, excels his brethren in dignity and power, but loses his privileges through his sin. In the post-Mosaic time the tribe of Reuben sinks into obscurity. With the exception of one successful campaign against the Hagarenes (1 Chron. 5, 8-10), nothing more is known of the doings of this tribe. nnN vl33 might be rendered, ' my firstborn, thou] re garding nnN as a vocative; the rendering given above is, however, better. T13 = '#zy manly strength! *31N, JIN, as in Deut. 21, 17. Pss. 78, 51. 105, 36, of genital power. LXX, o-v lo-xis pov Kal apxv TiKvav pov; Vulg. ' et principium doloris mei' (as though J1S were IJ?), following (as often) Aq. Ke as in Hab. 1, 7- Ps- 62, 5- Job 13, "• 3*, 23- TV not an adj. but pausal form of ft, see on 43, *4J so * in ver. 27 in pause for *P0*. The LXX render o-kX^os 'fr thee it was provided tl'rec'eivJ three portions, the right of firstborn, priest hood, and the kingdom] in accordance with the Jewish tradi tion, which assigned these three privileges to Reuben as the firstborn. 4. D"OS tn3, lit. 'a bubbling over like water! The root tns'in Arabic (yj I, V) = '/o boast;' in Aramaic the subs. 368 GENESIS, JLojUs occurs in the Pesh. Vers, ,2 Cor. 12, 21. Eph. 4, 19 = ao-e'Xyeia. The root properly ¦=' to exceed bounds, be inordinate;' LXX well, igi0pio-as. Only the comparison gives the idea of boiling or bubbling. MB, like in* in the preceding verse, is abstract for concrete; cf. Ewald, § 296b; Driver, § 189. Obs. The words may be taken as vocative, or (with Del.) as a descriptive apposition to the subject p!Nl . The Heb.-Sam. has fl}0?, and the other Vss. render as though nina stood instead of MB; but it is not necessary to suppose that the text they translated from actually had the second pers. of the verb, their renderings are probably chosen to express ina with greater clearness. 3*M3, part, of MB, occurs twice in the O.T, Judg. 9, 4. Zeph. 3, 4; in the sense of 'wanton in Judg. l.c, and 'boasting' in Zeph. l.c, of false prophets. Other renderings are suggested in Ges, § 147. 3, ' a bubbling up like water wast thou] nnN being understood as subject; or as an exclamation, 'a bubbling up like water I' the predicate being suppressed. mm bN, i.e. with reference to the in* mentioned in ver. 3. Render, 'Do not thou excel' (the jussive, with a nega tive, expressing a desire or wish, Driver, § 50 y), i.e. ' mayest thou lose the privileges that belong to thee as firstborn,' viz. those mentioned in ver. 3. LXX, pfj iK£iy as n?y = ' a step] a rendering that can scarcely be justified. In 1 Chron. 1. e the right of firstborn, which Reuben lost, is given to Joseph, while Judah received his (Reuben's) privilege of royalty. In Deut. 33, 6 Reuben's blessing is as follows: 7N1 J31N1 M* 13DD 1*no M*1 no* 'Let R. live and not die, so that his men become few] 5-7. ' Simeon and Levi, brethren; Weapons of violence are their shepherds' staves. Into their council, let not my soul come; With their assembly, let not my honour be united; For in their anger they slew men, And in their wantonness houghed oxen. Bb 370 GENESIS, Cursed be their anger, for it was fierce; And their wrath, for it was cruel: I will divide them in facob, And scatter them in Israel! 5. D^nN, Kn. and Del. take DMN as predicate, better as in apposition to *171 JiyOE*. Simeon and Levi are brothers, not only as sons of the same parents, but as being alike in their dispositions. ?n"ni30. The meaning of this word, which only occurs in this passage, is very uncertain. (1) It is commonly rendered ' sword] a meaning which was first hinted at by the Jews, who compared 1130 fancifully with the Greek pdxaipa ; see Bereshith Rabba, c 99 *31* |1E>7 [Sni* *31 ION .DIMliao pMiiao dmoin Eh pi*ao nmn? pip "*a p*30 nh :1MH?101 "JM1113D ION nNl 103 D1M11130 'Rabbi fohanan says the word ni130 is a Greek word, as they (the Greeks) call swords [*1*30 (pdxaipai). Others think that ni130 = nillSO, comparing Ez. 16, 3.' Hieron. and Rashi also render 'sword] cf.Ges, Thes., p. 672. But, as Del. points out, ni30 is no more pdxaipa, than the Assyr. pilakku the Gk. neXems. He derives it (after the analogy of niNO, niSO, nipp) from 113 ='lo dig' and 'to be round; ' so a weapon which makes a round gaping wound. But it is very doubtful whether 113 can combine the two meanings that Del. assigns to it. Del, Proleg., p. 121 f, thinks it comes from 113 = Assyr. kdru, a synonym of ni3, Assyr. kardtu = 'to cut] so 'a sword] (2) Tuch explains the word as meaning 'plot' or 'con trivance] lit. ' windings] from 113 = ' to wind] but, as Del. points out, 113 does not mean ' to wind] but ' to be round; ' while L. de Dieu and Maurer also render 'plots] but get this meaning from 130 = makara in Ethiopic and '& in CHAP. 49, VERS. 5, 6. 371 Arabic, ' to plan] 'contrive! We must then, however, point the form OHMiao, not 3n*ni30 ; see Ewald, § 260 a. (3) Kn, Bottcher, § 791 (though he adheres to the Mass. pointing), and others render, ' marriage contracts', as though 130 = the Aramaic iJL» ' desponsavit ;' 130 in Heb, however, means ' to sell] and if 130 can = ;iLse (which in Heb. would usually be rendered by mo), the reference to Dinah's brethren would be hardly suitable — though the next verse certainly refers to the incident narrated in chap. 34 — and ' marriage contracts ' could scarcely be called D*?3. Knobel alters the reading into BnM13D. (4) Di. derives the word from 113 ' to be round] and says it means a 'round curved instrument] perhaps a 'curved knife' or 'sickle.' Ewald, Hist?, ii. p. 493, Eng. trans, ii. p. 349, and Wellhausen, History of Israel, Eng. trans,^ p. 144, render (also from na), ' shepherds' staves] or as we' should say in English, 'shepherds' crooks] The LXX have o-vveTeXeaav dSiKiav i£ alpicreons ovtcov, as though the text were DnMiiap Don 173 'they ended the violence of their nature;' so Geiger translates, Urschrift, p. 374 f, regarding this translation of the LXX as intended to tone down the violence of Simeon and Levi's conduct. The Pesh. has Jj^p»? JJ]bo ¦oojla *J» 'instruments of violence from their nature;' possibly they connected ni30 with ,11130 'birth] 'descent! Onq. renders ni«? nay jiinianin yiN3 J*13*3 pas ' mighty men, in the land they dwelt in they did a mighty deed] as though Dn*ni30 = D1*1130 ; so Kimchi and the A.V, who supply 'in] which is wanting in the Heb. text. Onq.'s rendering seems an endeavour to transform Simeon and Levi's cruel deed into a noble one. The Vulg. gives ' vasa iniquitatis bellantia! 6. The first portion of this verse is rendered as follows in the A.V. and R.V. : '0 my soul, come not thou into their b b 2 372 GENESIS, secret (R.V. "council" marg. "secret"); unto their assembly, mine honour (R. V. " my glory"), be not thou united] taking N3n and inn as second pers. sing. masc. (though E'33 is more commonly fem.), and *Ei3S and *133 as vocatives. The rendering given above is that adopted by Di. and Del. Ilin is imperf. Qal of in*. The Heb.-Sam. reads m* 7N. ''133, 'my honour' or 'glory] is rhythmically interchanged with e'33 here. In Ps. 7, 6 *133 is parallel to *Ei33, and in Pss. 16, 9. 108, 2 to *37; cf. also Pss. 30, 13. 57, 9, where it is used in the sense of E'SS. 1133 is here fem. by Ewald, § 174 b (names of invisible active powers are fem.; so e'33 is usually fem, and *iaa being parallel to it, is also regarded as fem.). The LXX render *133 inn 7N with p^ ipto-at ra ijrraTd pov, as though the text were *133 in*"?N ; see Geiger, Urschrift, p. 319, who regards the rendering of the LXX as intentional, to avoid the possibility of confounding the human 133 (Doxa) with the divine, the word 133, when equivalent to E'33, having 'both the idea of divine majesty and the idea of the higher human nature.' Di. points out that in Assyr. kabidtu (133) is rhythmically interchanged with napistu (E^S), he thinks, therefore, that *133, • my liver] i.e. 'my heart or soul] is intended here, cf. Del, Assyr. Gram., § 68 end. tt*"N may be either collective— cf. the rendering given above— or the sing, may be used poetically for the plural. D32J131. 'In their wanton wrath! J1X1, here parallel to S]N, means 'unrestrained passion;' cf. Esther 9, 5 lE § x34- The Heb.-Sam. text has 1"™ for in?, and 3ni3m for Dni3J?l, probably an intentional change, so that Jacob should not be represented as cursing them. The Sam.Version renders in the same way as the Heb.-Sam. text; cf. Targ. Ps.-Jon. In Deut. 33, 8 f. Levi's blessing is entirely different in its tone from the severe language used by Jacob in this chapter ; while Simeon is not mentioned in Deut. 33, at least in our present text. 374 GENESIS, The Simeonites received as their portion several cities in the 333, i. e. the southern portion of Palestine, in the midst of the territory of Judah (cf. Josh. 15, 26-32. 42 with Josh. 19, 1-9. 1 Chron. 4, 28-32); while Levi, according to Num. 35. Josh. 21, receives no special portion of territory, but has forty-eight cities assigned to him to dwell in by the other tribes. 8-12. 'fudah, thou, may thy brethren praise thee: May thy hand be on the neck of thy foes; May thy father's sons bow down to thee. A lion's whelp is fudah; From the prey, my son, art thou gone up : He couched, he lay down like a lion, And like a lioness; who can rouse him ? The mar shall' s staff shall not depart from fudah, Nor the leader's staff from between his feet, Until he come to Shiloh; And may the obedience of the peoples be his. Binding to the vine his foal, And lo the Sorek vine his ass's colt: He washes in wine his garments ; And in the blood of grapes his raiment: Dark are his eyes with wine, And white his teeth with milk.' 8. The name here suggests the form of the blessing; cf. 29, 35, as though it were, 'Praise '. . . thy brethren shall praise thee! nnN. On the pronoun, as casus pendens, cf. note on *33N in 24, 27 ; also Ewald, § 309 b. 131 ?)1X*3 "J1\ Cf. Job 16, 12 *sx3xa*i *siya mni. "TON '*32. Not yna or "]0N *sa, but 1*3N *S3; for all chap. 49, vers. 8-10. 375 Jacob's sons — not only those Leah bore him — shall praise Judah. 9. nlin" n"lN 113. The comparison with a lion is not uncommon; see Deut. 33, 20 (where Gad is compared with a lioness), and 22 (where Dan is spoken of as a lion's whelp); cf. also Num. 23, 24. 24, 9 (which bears a striking resemblance to this passage, 130*p* *0 N*3731 *1N3 33E5 yi3), Mic. 5, 7. n"71* "'33 ?pOO. 'From the prey, my son, art thou gone up] i.e. Judah is like a lion reascending to the mountain (cf. Song of Songs 4, 8) after having devoured his prey. LXX render n*7y with dviprjs, and tpOD with « 0Xao-Tov, taking it as in Ez. 17,9 nriDX *S1B~73 ' all its fresh springing leaves.' ,17y Hif. is found in Ez. 19, 3, meaning 'to bring up (of a lion) ; ' but as ,1?y is generally only used of vegetation in the sense to. 'grow up] the rendering, 'From the prey, my son, art thou gone up] is preferable. If Judah were compared to a lion growing up, the addition of N*3?31 n*iN3 would be hardly necessary. N"373. The lioness, defending her young, is fiercer than the lion (Herod, iii. 108). 10. D"OX* . . . HO" N7. The rendering given above is that adopted by Di. and Del. The text as it stands can only have this meaning, but as will be shewn below it cannot be satisfactorily explained. The same may indeed be said of all the explanations that have been proposed. First of all let us examine the rendering of the A.V. and R.V, 'until Shiloh come] nV1 is here taken as a personal name, possibly 1 The word rW is pointed iVffl, ri><«5, riVft and iW. The first punctuation with the scriptio plena, being of a later date than n*B ¦.>* , is only found a few times. It is worthy of notice that the sceptic plena is not found on the Moabite stone, nor do the Versions have it in n)«. 376 GENESIS, meaning 'peaceful] or ' peace-bringer! But, as is generally. admitted v(see Driver, in the Cambridge fournal of Philology, xiv. 2, and in The Expositor, July, 1885), there are serious philological difficulties in the way of this view. As pointed in our present texts, the ending n must either stand for the suffix of the third1 pers. masc. sing, or mark the word as a pr. n. ; cf. im*, liy, 1111, no?E', etc. From these examples the word might, as far as its form goes, be a personal pr. n. If it be a pr. n, it must obviously, in a passage like the present, have some special significance, ri?*!?' apparently must be connected with rbv, which denotes ' to be at ease] or 'quiet! The only exact parallel is 173, the name of a place. But neither ,173 nor nb^Vr can be derived from 173 and rbv respectively, after the analogy of liE5*?, liO*p; for — as Tuch argues, and Del. allows — they would, if derived from l"? verbs, following analogy, be 'i?*3 and ^V. But the Gentile names *3i?*3 and ^i?*^ (2 Sam. 15, 12. 1 Kings n, 29) shew that ri?*E' and ri?*3 are really apocopated from foy and 117*3 (cf. Lag, B. N, p. 187), and have to be regarded as coming from the roots *b)V or 7*k», and *713 or 7*3 ; cf. however, Barth, N.B., p. 363. Further, if n^E* could possibly be derived from n^B*, ' 17E' is not a full and significant word like D7E* (Zech. 9, 10); at the most it denotes mere rest (Ps. 122, 6. 7), and is often associated with the idea of careless worldly ease (e.g. Job 12, 6. Ez. 16, 49).' So the rendering, 'peaceful one] or 'peace-bringer,' can hardly be got out of the root ¦178'. Further, there is no allusion in any other part of the O. T. to Shiloh as a personal name. Del. and Di. adopt the rendering given in the translation of vers. 8-12, above, arguing that the philological difficulty just mentioned, the absence of any allusion in subsequent parts of the O. T. to Shiloh as a personal name, and the fact chap. 49, ver. io. 377 that nT'B' everywhere else in the O. T. is the name of a place, favour the rendering, ' until he come to Shiloh ; ' ace loci ; cf. i Sam. 4, 1 2 TOV N3*l ' he came to Shiloh! They then, following the course of history, suppose that the prophecy was fulfilled in Josh. 18, 1, where the settlement of the land is described, pointing out that at an early date pre-eminence was assigned to Judah, — e.g. Num. 10, 14, the tribe marched first in the wilderness; Judg. 1, 2, advanced first to battle (cf. Judg. 20, 18); Josh. 15, was the first to receive its share when the land was divided, — and urge that the arrival of the Israelites at Shiloh was really a turning-point in their history, — the period of wandering was ended, the period of rest began, — a turning-point of sufficient importance to be noticed in the blessing; cf. Josh. 21, 42. 22, 4. The position Judah had gained was in subsequent years confirmed; the ' obedience of the peoples ' was realised in the victories of David (2 Sam. 8), while it also included the ideal relation of Israel to the heathen, which is more distinctly spoken of by the prophets. The Messianic idea is thus not excluded in this view, though it cannot be attached to the word Shiloh. This view is also adopted by Herder (Vom Geist der Hebr. Poesie, ii. 6); Ewald, fahrbucher, ii. 51; Hist, ii. 283 f. (Eng. trans.), and others. It is objected to by Schultz (Alltest. Theologie, 1878, pp. 668-672), Cheyne (Isaiah, vol. ii [eds. 1, 2], Essay iv), and Driver, who points out that Judah is represented as possessing not only supremacy, but royalty; for 03E' standing in ver. 10 alone, without any qualification, suggests rather a sceptre than a ' commander's^ staff' (in Judg. 5, 14 1BD 03E* may = ' a commander's staff;' cf. 13D,1 in 2 Kings 25, 19, but here 03E* has no such qualification). The 1*731 j*30 ppno represents rather a king sitting on his throne than a commander on active service, 378 GENESIS, and the view that Judah will have not only supremacy, but royalty, is confirmed by a comparison of 8* with 37, 7 f. (' Wilt thou be king over us, or wilt thou rule over us?'). Judah clearly enjoyed no royal power till long after Josh. 18, the passages in Num. and Josh, attributing only supremacy, not royalty, to him ; and if oaB* can bear the meaning assigned to it by Di. and Del, the context contains indications that the picture is one of royalty, and not mere supremacy. Bearing these facts in mind, it appears that the rendering 'till he come to Shiloh] must be abandoned. 'Judah is designated as the royal tribe : and the sceptre is confirmed to it D*oy nip* 171 n^E* N3* *a iy. The parallelism is so carefully observed throughout that there is a presumption that in clause c. some person is designated to which l?l in d. may be referred, that we must render, therefore, either " until he — Judah, comes to . . ." or "until . . . comes, having the submission of the nations." Now the D*oy n,1p*, in one form or another, is a constant feature of the ideal future as depicted by the prophets — the relation being sometimes one of force (as 22, 17. 27, 29. Ps. 18, 43 f. Amos 9, 11 f.), sometimes one of spontaneous homage to the spiritual pre-eminence of Israel (Is. 2, 2 f. Jer. 3, 17. Is. 45, 14, etc.).' Driver, 1. c, p. 26 f. As Driver has shewn in his two articles already referred to, the word n^E* is first connected with the Messiah in a passage in the Talmud, Sanh. 98 b, where the pupils of Rabbi Shila compliment their master by connecting his name with a title of the Messiah, calling him ' Shiloh,' on the ground of the present passage. The versions, as will be seen, have not interpreted it in this way, and it is doubtful whether the rendering, 'until Shiloh come] appears at all before the sixteenth century. The LXX render the verse, chap. 49, ver. io. 379 Ovk exXei^ei ap-^av i£ 'louSa, Kal rjyoipevos e'« to>v pr)pS>v uvtov, ems av eXOi] to. awoKelpeva aira' ko\ a&rbs jrpotrSoKia idvav. Variants are airoKeirai ; b diroKeirai aira and 6 diroKenai, see fourn. Phil., 1. c, p. 4. The last two variants are unimportant. to diroKelpeva ovto} is a paraphrastic rendering, which takes n?E' as = ri?E/ = 1? 1E/N. (see 2 Kings 6, n. Song of Songs i, 7 ; and cf. the note on 6, 3). idv eXB-g & anoKeiTai, this lendering is not a faithful reproduction of the Heb., as it supplies the subject (' until he comes, whose [it is] '), which is wanting in the Hebrew. e'« t&v pr)pav avrov = 1*731 |*30 ; cf. Deut. 28, 57 1*731 |*3D: LXX 81a twv pijpmv avTrjs. Trpoo-- 8oKia for nnp* seems to connect it with nip, nipn. Pesh. has I ? y y^ t . * * l * s> y y \s * t. ti y p* •* II )jo.-S. wota^^* B^s ^ rir*;->y O J?OOt- ^.SO Y^B- U^> » \-£ = ¦ an interpreter] ' announcer.' The Pesh. in Deut. 33, 21. Judg. 5, 14. Is. 33, 22 uses the same word again for ppno. Possibly this is a free translation on the part of the Pesh. Vers. ; in the two passages in the Psalms (60, 9. 108, 9) where ppno occurs, the Pesh. gives »^iii-» 'my king! The ppno in both the Psalms is Judah. ^jc «« «3&.??, the Pesh. renders T\bv, like the LXX, = nif. In the present text the Pesh. has nothing to explain the fem. w«. Possibly the original form ofthe text has been pre served by Aphraates (e 330-350 a.d.), who gives Jlo^i, = ' kingdom] after ««. This version also connects nip* with nip, nipn in its rendering v<£mw. Onq. has 1*?y *iy* K7 NrrE'o *n**i iy Noisy, iy *iisa *33o nibdi iiii; n*3ip jo^ie* N*poy fiypnE'* n*i?i NHttfjO NM n*i>*11 'A ruler (lit. one exercising authority) shall not depart from those ofthe house of fudah, nor a scribe from among his sons' sons for ever, until 380 GENESIS, Messiah comes, whose is the kingdom, and him the peoples shall obey] Onq. takes 03E* as ' ruler] and ppno as ' scribe] V731 J*30 is interpreted similarly to the LXX, 'from his descendants', 'for ever] and 'Messiah' are insertions, and n?E> is taken as nvp, following the construction of a diroKeiTai, 'kingdom' being inserted after it. For traces of a various reading in Onq, see Berliner, Targum Onk., ii. p. 18. The Targ. Jerus. is substantially the same as Onqelos ; but the Targ. Ps.-Jon. takes 17E' as M133 TJ)] NITBto N|i)0 = 'Z^ Messiah, his youngest son] nT'E' being connected with nJTpE', Deut. 28, 57, where Onq. has N1S3 1*JJ| ' her youngest son] and Rashi 3*3Pipn D*33. This interpretation afterwards found considerable favour, and is perhaps embodie'd in the Massoretic punctuation ri7*K> (=' his son'). The Old Latin has 'donee venianl quae reposita sunt ei] with the variants ' donee veniat cui reposilum est ' (or ' cui reposita sunt ') ; cf. the LXX trans lations. The Vulgate has 'donee Veniat qui mittendus est] reading n^E* as though it were ny?V, The Sam. Vers, has ^OrVY-^ for 1*731 'his ranks! The Heb.-Sam. has ;*30 1*731 'from between his banners] i?31 for 731. It retains the word n?*B', and renders ppno ' leader ' with the LXX (fr/ov- pevos) and Vulg. ('dux'). Thus it will be seen that most of the versions took 172* as rijE*, which would be a poetical equivalent of i? ~f$. (see above, on the LXX translation); the sentence being then rendered, (1) 'until there come that which (or he that) is his] or (2) ' until there come he to whom (or he whose) is] In the second case the sentence is without a subject, and requires some word, e.g. Nil or IM*, referring back to 03E*, or some expression denoting 'dominion;' cf. the renderings of Onq. and (possibly) the Pesh. The suffix n for \ does not occur with 7 elsewhere; but ri3 is only found once (Jer. 17, 24), chap. 49, VER. IO. 381 and we have riniD and 11*y in ver. 11. Possibly Ez. 21, 32 OBE'On 1? lE'N N3 iy may be a reference to this passage; if so, it favours the punctuation adopted by most of the Vss. As regards the reading implied by these versions, it may be noted that of all the conflicting views, this is the only one that is based on any definite evidence, and it may perhaps be provisionally accepted in lieu of a more probable interpretation. As may be seen from the extracts given by Driver, the rendering of the Targ. Ps.-Jon. ('his son') is adopted by Yepheth Ben Ali (e 950-990), Abulwalid (nth cent), David Kimchi (d. 1235), etc. If b^V means 'son' in this verse, it is the only passage in the O. T. where the word, occurs. The verse was interpreted in ancient times, by both Christian and Jewish writers, as Messianic; but this Messianic idea was derived, not from the word TVV, but from the context of the verse, especially from the promise of supremacy and success which is held out to Judah. Other renderings of the passage that have been proposed are: (1) 'Till peace or tranquillity cometh:' Ges. (Lex.), Reuss, Knobel, reading n?E> or nbf, as ri7*E> is always a proper name. But neither of these words exists, and there is nothing in clause c. to refer to 1?1. (2) ' Until he comes to peacefulness] Kurtz, Oehler'; cf. Hale"vy, Rev. Crit., 1883, p. 290, who reads 31??', Is. 57, 2, and renders similarly. (3) 'So long as one comes (= people come) lo Shiloh] i.e. as long as the worship at Shiloh is continued shall Judah retain his supremacy, i.e. for ever; so Tuch and others, comparing the use of V iy in Song of Songs 1, 12 =' as long as! (4) Lagarde conjectures ri^NE* ' his desired one] anticipated by Matthew Hiller (Onom. Sacra, 1706). (5) Reading ni> (D)B'(V) or (n)E'(l*) N3* *3 iy. This is the reading 382 GENESIS, suggested by Cheyne (Isaiah, ii. Essay iv), who thinks that the LXX rendering presupposes a fuller text than TVV. The rendering with this reading would be, 'for whom it (the dominion) is appointed! Cf. Judg. 5, 14 D*1BN *3» p70ya DE'lE' ' out of Ephraim [came down] they whose root is in A! (6) 'Till he come to that which is his] or ' his own;' cf. Deut. 33, 7, the rendering adopted by C. von Orelli, O. T. Prophecy, §15; see further, Di, Del, and Tuch in their commentaries, Driver, l.c, and the various authorities cited by them '. 03tl). In the rendering adopted by Del., Di, and others, oaE* means ' the leader's ' or ' commander's staff! In Judg. 5, 14 it certainly has this meaning, but in that passage it is qualified by 13D. Di. remarks that the term 03E* is not exclusively applied to a king,- and points out that it is used here, as ppno in Ps. 60, 9. Num. 21, 18, of the leader's or chief's staff, ppno, Di. and Del. ' leader's staff; ' cf. ppno in Num. 21, 18. Ps. 60, 9 (Del.). If the view be adopted, that the description is one of Judah's royal supremacy, cf. p. 377 f, as oaE* must then mean 'sceptre] ppno must in the parallel clause = ' ruler's staff! The Pesh. has f ¦ A, 4 ^ which perhaps favours the rendering 'law-giver] and which could be applied to a 'leader' or 'ruler;' LXX qyoipevos ; Onq, Targ. Ps.-Jon. (of actual 'scribes' [teachers of law]), Jer. Targ. 'scribe;' Vulg. 'dux;' Sam. Ver. ^7^53= ' leader;' all (excepting perhaps the Targums) renderings that could be used of a commander or a king. The meaning of ppno must be similar to that assigned to 03E*, whether oaE* 1 See also the two articles by the Dean of Peterborough in The Churchman, Oct. and Dec, 1886, who, after pointing out the difficulties of the rendering ' till Shiloh come] adopts the rendering (2) of Kurtz and Oehler, Theology of the O.T.,% 229, ' until he come to rest ut tranquillity ! CHAP. 49, VER. IO. 383 be rendered ' sceptre ' or ' leader's staff] as the two portions of the verse are parallel. 1^b31 ^20. 'From between his feet] the picture repre senting the leader, standing or sitting with his staff of office between his feet (Di, who compares the figures on the old Persian and Assyrian monuments), or the king on his throne, with the sceptre between his feet. The meaning, 'from among his descendants] is favoured by the LXX, Onq, Targg. Ps.-Jon, Jer., Vulg. (' de femore ejus'), but depends on a comparison with Deut. 28, 57, and is unsuitable here. Tuch renders V931 as the plural of *731 a 'foot soldier;' cf. the Heb.-Sam. text, and the Sam. Vers, referred to above, a meaning which would suit the word if the picture is that of a military commander. Di. condemns this rendering as devoid of taste and ungrammatical, as 1*?3i cannot stand for l*ji*3l; cf. Bottcher, Heb. Gram., § 827. Di. also rejects the Heb.-Sam. rendering, 'banners] as incompatible with the ppno. ^2'1 "3 11*. On *3"iy in a temporal sentence, cf. Dav, S., § 145 f-; Ges, § 155. 2 c; 26, 13 713 *3 iy; 41, 49 »a "i» 7H; 2 Sam. 23, 10 11* iys* *3 iy; and lE'N iy in 27, 44. D^OX* nilp" ibi. rinjjr* with the dag. forte dirimens; see Ges, § 20. 2 b; Dav, § 7. 4. note; Stade, § 138 a; so *3ipy, ver. 17; *?3y, Deut. 32, 32; IMhfp, Is. 5, 28; ?D3"M.?M, Is. 57, 6. nnp\ The meaning 'obedience] which is also adopted by Onq. (see above), agrees with Prov. 30, 17 (where it also has dag. dirimens), the only other passage where the word occurs, and is corroborated by the Arabic w, 'to obey! The A.V. renders, 'gathering of the people' (but R.V. 'obedience'), fol lowing Aq. (o-vD3 *pph; Obad. 3 ^D-*13n3 ^V; Mic. 7, 14 "H^ ^W; Ps. 123, I 3*0^3 *3EiM. O* '|t t — •;- ni1*!*. On the archaic orthography ii (for *,), see the note on 9, 21. ni*y is for ni*J? (the abs. state is 1*5?); cf. n*3, in*3, b'b, and b'b ; so n*B* in Is. 10, 17 makes M*^, not M*E/; see Stade, § 100; Ewald, § 255 b, who also cites IK'*'5!, Deut. 25, 4, as though from E'*1 ; but 1^*1 may be inf. cstr. of E^l. Onq. and the Sam. Vers, and Heb.-Sam. take 1l*y &s = 'hts city!' npltt?. 'The sorek vine] so called from the red colour (iCli>) of the grapes. Both the grapes and the wine were of a specially choice kind. In the territory of Judah the vine flourished; cf. Joel 1, 7 ff. 4, 18. 2 Chron. 26, 10, and Num. 13, 23 f, where the vineyards near Hebron, and Song of Songs 1, 14, where those of En-gedi, are mentioned. D33. Cf. the use of }M1 in Job 29, 6. Di. considers this a continuation of the part. *1DN ; cf. Ges, § 1 16. 5. Rem. 7; Driver, § 117. In this construction the second verb is usually connected with the part, by waw conv, or simple waw and the perfect, the perfect being separated from the waw by some word or words : cf. ver. 1 7 ?B*1 , , . "]Eon. It seems more natural to disconnect D33 and *1DN, following the accents, and to render as above. For the perfect, cf. Driver, § 12; Dav, S., § 40 c ; M.R, § 2. 2 ; Ges, § 106. 2 c. (a perfect of experience, or gnomic aorist); so Pss. 9, 11. 10, 3, etc. CHAP. 49, VERS. II, 12. 385 nniD . This word only occurs in this passage ; on the suffix ri, see on ni*y. The Heb.-Sam. reads miD3, which is possibly the correct reading. But as there seems to be no authority for the elision of the 3 (\n for }ns is not parallel), it will be better to derive the word from a root ,11D ' to envelop] ' wrap up] niD being contracted for nilD ; cf. the noun niDO, which comes from the same verb niD. niD may = the Arab. lSJj (the D in Heb. corresponding exceptionally to an Arabicj) = abdidit, celavit, conj.VII, abdidit se. 12. 0"3"1* ^bSn. The * is not the binding vowel, as in *1DN, *S3, but *7*73n is an adj. from 73n (see Ewald, § 164 a), with a repetition of the last letter of the root (see Stade, § 149; Barth, N.B., p. 215). Del. compares MViyE', but this word does not actually occur, though the fem. form n*inyE\ Hos. 6, 10, is found in the Ktb, and might pre- suppose a masc. '"JVlJjE'. The adjectival ending *— is common, e. g. "£?!, T& *&}> ^^- The r00t ^n (which> however, is not found) corresponds (apparently) with j5i IV, ' to be obscure and doubtful;' cf. C. P. Ges, sub voce. Del. on Ps. 10, 8 compares also the Arab. dJJL. ' to be jet black! CO"!* "^ban. Cf. Prov. 23, 29 D*s*y mWan *o?. The construction is the same as in INn nD*, 29, 17; see on 12, 11. D^ETD^- ~V& cstr- state of '"' from an abs' state '"" ' so abn cstr. state of abn, from an abs. state 3.^n, which with Maqqef would be 3^1; so "?^, Ps. 35, U, from ?5N; see Stade, § 202 a; Ges, § 93- 2. Rem. 1. With this verse, cf. Joel 4, 18. Amos 9, 13. The pasture lands of Judah were celebrated; see 1 Sam. 25, 2. Amos 1, 1. 2 Chron. 26, 10. c c 386 GENESIS, 13. ' Zebulun — on the shore of the sea shall he dwell: And he himself shall be on a shore of ships, With his border by Sidon! There is possibly an allusion here to the meaning of the name Zebulun ('dweller') given in 30, 20; but cf. note on that passage. pttj" D"0" H,inb. In Judg. 5, 17 Asher is spoken of thus, 3*0* f)in? 3E*, and in Deut. 33, 19 Zebulun and Issachar ' suck the abundance of the seas ' (ipS** D*0* yBE*). Zebulun's territory apparently did not lie on the seashore (cf. Josh. 19, 10-16), so perhaps we ought to render "X ?y with Del.4 ' towards Sidon] i. e. his border lay in the direction of Sidon, but was not actually on the seashore, only towards the coast district. The Sam. Ver, Heb.-Sam, LXX, Pesh, Vulg, and apparently Onq. 05? *00) read *-\y = 'up to S.] which would express the meaning ' in the direction of more clearly than ?y. According to Jos. (Ant., v. 1. 22 ; Bel.fud., iii. 3. 1) Zebulun inhabited the district from the lake of Gennesareth to Mount Carmel on the Mediterranean, and in support of this Tuch compares Josh. 19, 11 with Matt. 4, 13. Di. also conjectures that as the boundary between Asher and Zebulun in Josh. 19, 14 f. is not very clearly defined, it is not impossible that Zebulun might have possessed a strip of land, bordering on the Mediterranean Sea. n"3N P)in7 Nini. On the rendering 'he himself] see Ewald, § 314 b (N111 added in a new proposition, with special' force, as the subject). Cf. 2 Sam. 17, 10, where further emphasis is produced by the addition of 33. 14, 15. 'Issachar is a strong ass, Lying down between the sheep-folds : And he saw a resting-place, that it was good, CHAP. 49, VERS. 13-15. 387 And the land, that it was pleasant ; So he bowed his back to bear, And became a servant in bondage] 14. 013 lOn, lit. 'an ass of bone] i.e. a strongly built, powerful ass ; so Aq. ovos oot<»8?;s, Vulg. ' asinus for lis! The Sam. Vers, has ^sntSAfA, reading 3*13. ('sojourners'), which Geiger defends as the correct reading (Urschrift, p. 360), Issachar being ' an ass of strangers] i.e. bearing the burdens of strangers, and subject to them. But Del.4 points out that this rendering destroys the force of the figurative expression ion, and some other word, such as D*U or D*133, would be expected rather than D*13. The Heb.-Sam. has D*13, which Tuch punctuates 3*1?, = the Arab.-'^I. 'bony! The LXX have to koXov iire6vpj]o-ev, which presupposes some such read ing as D13 ion (Geiger); see Ps. 119, 20, LXX. D"n3©Dn. This word is only found once again, Judg. 5, 16, though we find 3M3E' in Ps. 68, 14 = ' sheep-folds! DMSBto is probably from nSiV = 'lo fix! Ewald, § 180 a, explains the word as = ' double pen] with reference to the cattle being usually separated into two portions in the pen ; while Stade, § 340 b, classes the word with those that denote < instruments or other things consisting of two parts belong ing to one another, or standing in pairs, one opposite to the other; so DMOn;' see also Ges, Thes., 147 * f- The word in this verse, and Judg. 5, 16, is used as a proverbial expression for the easy life ofthe agriculturist. Onq. renders N*Oinn (*3 'between the boundaries', so Vulg. 'inter terminos] while the LXX have dva peaov tS>v KXr,pa>v (but in Judg. dva piV is probably the cerastes or horned adder, a small and very dangerous species of snake, of a bluish yellow or sand colour. Hieronymus renders it by ' regulus ' in his Quaest., ed. Lagarde, p. 69; the Pesh. Ji&^ = ' a basilisk] the Vulg. 'cerastes] 390 GENESIS, Onq. Nsrra = ' an. adder! The LXX, not understanding the word [3*3$, render it, in harmony with the context, iyxadrj- pevos. In Arabic w».~> = ' a serpent with black and white spots! In Deut. 33, 22 Dan is compared with 'a lion's whelp that springeth out of Bashan! bB^I . . . I"]tt*3n. Cf. the note on 27, 33. The meaning of the verse is, Dan, like the serpent lurking in the path, attacks his foes, not in open fight, but with stratagem; cf. Judg. 18, 27, and the history of Samson. 18. ' For thy help I wait, O Yahweh! This verse breaks the connection of the poem, hence it is regarded by some (Maurer, Olshausen, etc.) as an interpo lation ; but if this is the case it must have been added at a later date by the redactor of the book, as a protest against Dan's idolatrous devices. It is found in all the Vss. Tuch explains it as ' an exclamation from the patriarch Jacob, who is exhausted and nerving himself for another effort before his death.' Kn, whom Di. follows, says, ' The patriarch here speaks in prayer, in the name of his descendants, who must, in the wars with the nations, e.g. the Philistines, put their trust in Yahweh, and look for His assistance.' So the Targg. Ps.-Jon. and Jer, Wright, Del, and Driver. 19. ' Gad — a troop shall press, upon him, Yet he shall press upon their heel! Gad, who was settled in Gilead, though exposed to the attacks of his foes (cf. Josh. 13, 25. Judg. 11, 15), and probably Often engaged in border warfare with marauding bands (cf. 2 Kings 5, 2. 6, 23), successfully defends himself and puts his enemies to flight (cf. Judg. 10 f. 12. 1 Chron. 5, 18 ff. 12, 8 f.); cf. Deut. 33, 20. 21. The name 13 is here connected by the writer with 113 'to assail] and 1113 = CHAP. 49, VERS. 18-20. 391 • a marauding band' (see 2 Kings, I.e.), in the sense ' assailer ' or ' attacker! In 30, 1 1 another explanation of the name is suggested. 13113"* 1113 13. Cf. Hab. 3, 16 isi!3* Dy? ni?yi>. 3pl*, the rendering given above, follows the reading 33PJJ, which is adopted by Bleek, Knobel, Ols, Wright, and others, the D of IE'NO being taken away and appended to 3py. Other instances of incorrect division of words are given in Dr., Sam., p. xxx. The LXX, Pesh, Vulg, and Saad. in a measure support this reading, as they do not translate the commencement of the next verse IE'NO, but lE'N. apy by itself, as Di. remarks, is sufficient, but, as Del. points out, with the rendering 'their heel' (R.V. margin), 19b and 20* alike gain in clearness. All the other 'blessings,' except Joseph's in ver. 22, begin with the name of the person blessed, without any preceding word or particle. The rendering 'heel' is more forcible than 'rearguard! Gad is depicted as pressing hotly on his foes, almost on the heels of the retreating enemy, apy cannot ==1MN 'back wards' (Vulg. ' retrorsum'), nor 'at the last] A.V. The R.V. renders correctly, ' upon their heel! 20. ' Asher— fat is his bread, And he shall yield kingly dainties! This rendering follows the reading lE'N, the pr. name being a casus pendens, like 13 in ver. 19; cf. Deut. 32, 4- 'if the4' reading IE'NO be adopted (so the Sam. Ver.), the rendering will be either, 'From Asher (comes) fat-his bread] so Tuch; cf. D*30E', Is. 25, 6; or, ' For Asher-his bread is too fat] Ewald. With the first rendering, IE'NO = N pW5, which is perhaps not quite suitable to the context, and 1SOE- 392 GENESIS, fem. is not found as a noun ; with the second, ion? must be taken as feminine; see Bott, § 657, who distinguishes be tween 3r£ = ' bread] masc, and 3ni* = ' abundance of bread' (Brotfulle), fem. The Sam. Vers, according to one reading, has }OE» masc. 1,70 ^IITD. ' Dainties fit for kings! Cf. D*1*3N Dn7, Ps. 78, 25. It is not necessary to think of a king of Israel in the term 170. The fertility and productivene'ss of Asher are again alluded to in Deut. 33, 24 f. Di. suggests that as the Phoenicians procured all sorts of country produce from the Hebrews (Ez. 27, 17. Acts 12, 20; Jos, Antiq., xiv. 10. 6), Asher, from his geographical position, would participate largely in this traffic. 21. ' Naphtali is a slender terebinth That puts forth beautiful branches! nn7© n7'*N = 'a hind let loose] so A.V, R.V.; Aq. eXaqbos direa-TaXpevos, Vulg. ' cervus emissus] Del.6 The Pesh. paraphrases, but with the same meaning, jllXn 1*4^1 'a swift messenger;' cf. Job 39, 5 "131 *E>3n N13 n^E* *0. Tuch and others take nn7B' in the sense 'stretched out] so 'graceful] but there seems to be no authority for this rendering in the case of living beings. Knobel, comparing Is. 16, 2 (nwD |p.), renders, 'a scared hind] b^ this thought is very unsuitable, and quite out of harmony with the context. The allusion in this part of the verse (following the reading of the text) is probably to the swiftness of the heroes and men of the tribe of Naphtali (cf. for the expression, Ps. 18, 34. Hab. 3, 19. Is. 35, 6 ; also 2 Sam. 2, 18. Song of Songs 2, 9). The Pesh. seems to interpret the first half of the verse as meaning that Naphtali is specially adapted for the duties of CHAP. 49, VERS. 21, 22. 393 a messenger, while Christian writers see an allusion in ini'E' to the apostles (Aramaic LTj^.») ! IDttJ "'ION ]n3h. The allusion here is to the poets of the tribe, Barak, however, being the only one of whom we hear anythmg (Judg. 5, 1). msn naturally refers to *?n3S, and not to n?*N, which is fem. The verse is explained as above by those who follow the Massoretic text. It is probable that the LXX has preserved the original text. The reading in that Version is Ne(]>8aXei, o-TeXexos dveipevov tirifiiftovs iv ™ yevrjpart KaXXos, which seems to be equivalent to "ISB^TDN jnan nr^f ,lb*N *i*nas, i.e. nb*N=' terebinth] for nb*N, and M*ON; (cf. Is. 17, 6. 9) = 'topmost branches', for the poetical *10N. This reading is accepted by Ewald, Ols, Di, C. P. Ges, etc, endorsing the opinion of numerous earlier scholars; cf. Di, p. 468. For the epithet in7E>, cf. Jer. Vj, 8. Ez. 17, 6. Ps. 80, 12, and the noun n^E* 'shoot,' 'blossom] Song of Songs 4, 13, and for the figure, ver. 22; the *l*ON are then the leaders produced by the tribe of Naphtali; cf. Judg. 4, 6. 5, 18. 6, 35- 7j 23- With this reading the rendering would be as adopted above. Onq. has n*3iy *Oin* N30 yi.N3 *i>nas Pn\h? f,?"!?,?, H,D Pn- f^- N"J3^ ^T n''^l?D,i,^l ' Naphtali, in a goodly land shall his lot be cast, and his possession shall be yielding fruits, they shall praise and bless over them] which apparently supports this reading. 22-26. 'A son of a fruit tree Is foseph, A son of a fruit tree by a fountain; His branches run over the wall. The archers harassed him, And shot at him, and lay in wait for him; But his bow remains firm, 394 GENESIS, And the hands of his arms are strong : From the hands of the mighty One of facob, From thence, (from) the shepherd, the stone of Israel: From the God of thy fathers — so may he keep thee, And with the Almighty — so may he bless thee, With blessings of heaven above, Blessings of the deep, that Heth beneath, Blessings of the breasts and womb. The blessings of thy father have prevailed over the blessings of the ancient mountains, The desire ofthe eternal hills: May they be upon the head of foseph, On the crown of the prince among his brethren! 22. P]DV ni3 p. 'Son of a fruit tree is f] i.e. ' a young fruit tree;' cf. |3, Ps. 80, 16. >3_though elsewhere pointed "fa or "fa, with Maqqef— must be taken as construct state, cf. DE/, cstr. state, 12, 8, and "DE', 16, 15, or we must readja with Di. The Massoretes may, as Del. suggests, have taken |3 as sing. abs. fem, pl. niS3, with the meaning 'branch! and ni3 as an adj. qualifying it = ' a fruitful branch; ' cf. Ges, § 96. sub voce ja. ni3 with the archaic ending n+ (see Stade, §§ 2 1 3 c, 308 d ; Lag, B.N., p. 81; Ges, § 80. Rem. 2 b; Ewald, § 173 d) is not equivalent to JL'v3 'a lamb' (Ilgen, etc.), with an allusion to Rachel; nor to nis 'a heifer' (Schumann, Wright). It = the later nib, meaning 'a fruit tree;' cf. '1J13, Is. 17, 6 (of the olive tree); probably a vine, cf. 1*13 J33 in Is. 32, 12. Ez. 19, 10. Ps. 128, 3; so Onq, Tuch, Ewald, Di. Possibly there is an allusion here to the name 3*13N (perhaps ' double fruitfulness'), 41, 52. yiy ibx*. The moisture would promote the growth of the vine; cf. Ps. 1, 3. Jer. 17, 8. ,CHAP. 49, VERS. 22, 23. 395 ¦^T5?J? n '33. The niS3 are the branches of the vine that grow over the wall (112* wall, cf. Ps. 18, 30, not ' ambuscade] Wright: Ps. 92, 12 it = 'lier in wait'), which also protects the vine. On the construction of the plural, where inanimate objects are spoken of, with the sing. fem. expressing (as in Arabic) the collective, see Ges, § 145. 4; Dav, S., § 116; M.R, § 135. 1; Ewald, § 317 a; cf. Joel 1, 20 niE» ni0,13 D3 31iyn; Zech. 6, 14 D?n? 1*,in moyn, and the construction, common in Greek, of the neuter pl. with a sing, verb, as ra 8rjpla dva0Xeirei. Ewald reads the text here iTl5?V niS3 ' daughters of ascent] but this alteration is unnecessary. The verse appears to have been entirely misunderstood by the Vss, and by Peters (Hebraica, iii. in and v. 190), who proposes the extraordinary rendering ' daughters have marched in procession to a bull' ! 23. milO"*!, lit. = ' they treated him bitterly] i.e. acted in a hostile manner towards him. 1311 with pretonic qamec, as in m31 mn, 1,2; see the note there. On the perf. with weak waw, cf. Driver, p. 160. 131 is from 331, with the intransitive punctuation (see Stade, § 385 b. 2 ; Ges, § 67. Rem. 1), meaning 'to shoot;' so Ps. 18, 15 001*1 31 D*pl31; related to nai and noi; cf. 1*31, Job 16, 13. Jer. 50, 29 (all). The LXX, Sam, Onq, and Vulg. seem to have read 13*1*1, but D*xn *?ya does not suit this. Qi2n "'bin. So nioiMn ?ya, 37, 19; nna *?ya, 14, 13, and the note on that passage. Compare with this verse the narrative in Judg. 6 ff. 1 Chron. 5, 18 f, of the hostility shewn to Ephraim and Manasseh by the neighbouring Arab tribes ; and Josh. 17, 16 f, where the children of Joseph are com manded to drive out the Canaanites from the territory Joshua assigns them. 396 GENESIS, 24. inUJp ljn',N3 3©m. 'Yet his bow remains in firmness! On the adversative force of the waw conv, see Ewald, § 231 b, and note on 32, 31 ; and cf. Deut. 4, 33. 2 Sam. 19, 29. On the action ofthe imperf. continuing into the writer's present, see Driver, § 79, and cf. the note on 19, 9. ¦jn^Na. Del. explains M*N as a subst. = M*N 0ip03; Ewald, § 299 b (cf. § 172 b), considers that the adj. here must be taken as neuter, ' in or with firmness] and the 3 con ceived as forming the predicate, comparing Ex. 32, 22 NM yi3. The form M*N, cf. 3T3N, 1T3N, in Hebrew cor- 9 S responds to the Arabic formation for adjectives jiSl, with the signification of our comparative and superlative, and so called ' the noun of pre-eminence ' or ' elative! In Hebrew the forms have lost their original significance and are used as simple adjectives; see Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 159; Ewald, § 162 b. Cf. also Barth, N.B., p. 221 ; Ges, § 133. 1. foot-note 3. |n*N seems to have been an old Canaanitish word; cf. C. I. S., i. p. 93. lin. 1 and 2. The LXX have ko\ o-vveTpl0r) peril Kpdrovs to. To£a avrav, reading 130*1, and the Pesh. o.£*^ JiLk£^ fc_Ls« 'his bow turned in strength] reading 3EM1; so apparently Onqelos. 1T3"*1. tra means 'to be nimble] 'pliant;' cf. the Arabic JS ' to be nimble! The root only occurs once again, in the Pi'el in 2 Sam. 6, 16 131301 TT30 'skipping and dancing' (cf. Ges. in Thes. s.v.). The LXX have Kal i&Xvdr,, Pesh. oi**H' VuIg' 'dissoluta sunt [vinculo]] reading perhaps wajl, from pa. "ypy^ I'ON ''TO, i.e. Joseph's strength comes from the hands of the mighty One of Jacob, which support him. 3py* i*3N, cf. Is. 1, 24 (7N1E>* i*3N). 49, 26. 60, 16. Ps. 132, CHAP. 49, vers. 24, 25. 397 2. 5, where the phrase is borrowed from this passage. 1*3N is only found in the cstr. state; Barth, N.B., p. 51, regards it as cstr. state of l*aN, comparing p"]S; cstr. state P13. 131 nin OttJO. In the rendering given above, which seems1 relatively the best in this difficult clause, lyi is taken as explaining 30O, which probably means 'from heaven] cf. Eccl. 3, 17 (?), and "E»* |3N is a second name for God, in apposition to iyi. For the term iyi applied to God, cf. 48, 15. Pss. 23, 1. 80, 2. t?N must be taken as equivalent to the common title of God Hif (Deut. 32, 4. 1 Sam. 2, 2. Is. 30, 29. Ps. 18, 32); pN, however, never has this meaning anywhere else. Another rendering which is possible is that adopted by Tuch (cf. Ewald, § 332 d), 'whence is the Shepherd the Stone of Israel:' hfQ='inde ubi;' cf. tNO = '«x quo tempore] 39, 5. Ps. 76, 8; and the Vulgate, 'inde pastor egressus est lapis' etc. Ewald renders similarly, but reads I?N IJp b*7p\ ('Shepherd of the Stone of Israel'), the allusion being to 28, 18 f. 22. 35, 14, the phrase practically = the God of Bethel, 31, 13. Di. approves of this reading as iyi without the art. or 7N1E»* following is awkward, and God is never elsewhere called }3N. Rosenmuller renders, 'From that time he (foseph) was the shepherd and stone of Israel;' cf. 300 in Hos. 2, 17 (Heb.); R.V. renders, 'From thence is the Shepherd, the Stone' etc., which may be explained as meaning, 'From thence] i.e. from God, Joseph became a guardian and defence of his people, viz. in Egypt. The Pesh. and Onq. (apparently) read 300, instead of 300; cf. Ps. 20, 2, but this, though lemoving the awkward expression B0O, does not stand very appropriately in parallelism with *1*0. In all probability the text, as it stands at present, is corrupt. 25. T3N bNO. The |0 continues the thought con- 398 GENESIS, tained in ver. 24, connecting ver. 25 with the preceding verse ; but in this verse two blessings are inserted. ' The same God, who has hitherto helped him, will also give him the following blessings,' Di. 7>3N 7NO, cf. 31, 5. 42. 48, 15. Ex. 15, 2. 18, 4. T^.1^') = ,':^-V-1' tne sufBx being strengthened by the energetic nun ; cf. note on 3, 9. Render, ' So may He help thee;' cf. Ex. 12, 3. Num. 16, 5. Is. 43, 4. Ps. 69, 33. The weak waw with the imperf. (voluntative) takes the place of the perf. with waw conv, after words standing alone, in language of an excited and impassioned character ; see Ewald, § 347 a; Driver, § 125; so 7313*1 in the next clause. ^Iffi nNl. 'And with the Almighty] i.e. with the help of the Almighty. The Pesh, Sam. Ver, and Heb.-Sam, and a few MSS. read ?N1, a reading which is perhaps supported by the LXX1, Vulg, Saadiah. Bleek, Hitzig, Tuch, and Ewald adopt this reading, as being more suitable, the shorter title ME* being as a rule (it occurs however twice, Num. 24, 4 and 16) used without ?N at a later period ofthe language (it is very common in the book of Job). If this reading be preferred, the force of JO in 1*3N 7NO extends to *1E> ?N ; so Judg. 5, 9. Is. 15, 8. Hab. 3, 15; see Ewald, § 351 a. 131 O^OttJ n5l3. n3l3 is the ace after -pi3*l = ' may he bless the blessings of] i.e. with the blessings of. Cf. on 33, 5. 71*0. Cf. 27, 39 bya 3*OEM 7001. The D*OE' n313 are the dew, rain, sunshine; cf. 27, 28. 39. The Dim naia are the springs, rivers, brooks, which are regarded as springing 1 The LXX render 0 Oeis 6 e/iSs, which corresponds with their render ing of Htt) ^N in 17, 1 0 Sees aov (see the note on that passage). 28, 3 (/"><0- 35. 11 (<™)- 43, 14 (j">v). 48, 3 (pov). Ex. 6, 3 (Qe6s &v airSnt). CHAP. 49, VER. 26. 399 from the subterranean Dinn, and fertilizing the ground. The Dnil DME* naia are every kind of animal fruitfulness ; contrast Hos. 9, 14. Compare Joseph's blessing in Deut. 33, 13 ff. with this verse, where the similarity in thought and language is most striking. 26. The translation given above follows the reading iy *lil , or perhaps better iy *1in, as lin only occurs as a proper name, and gives to niNn its ordinary meaning ' desire! This rendering suits the parallelism (D7iy nyas), and is supported by Deut. 33, 15 (D1p-*lin). Hab. 3, 6 (ISTI™), and the rendering of the LXX, dpiav povipav, and is adopted by Ges, Ewald, Tuch, Kn, Wright, Di, C. P. Ges, sub voce, and R. V. (margin). The Massoretic text is supported by the Pesh, Onq, Vulg, Saadiah, the Jewish commentators, A.V, and R. V. (text). The rendering then must be, 'The blessings of thy father have prevailed over the blessings of my parents, up to the boundary of the eternal hills] *!M must be separated from IJ?, following the accents, and taken in the sense 'parents] while 11Nn must be translated 'boundary] from 7]$n='io mark] 'limit;' cf. Num. 34, 7 f. ; also nin jn 1 Sam. 21, 14. Ez. 9, 4; see Ewald, § 186 b. The word *lil, however, = ' my parents] seems very doubtful. Neither the plural D*111, nor dual D*1il occurs with this meaning, and though the fem. 111,1= ' mother ' is found in Song of Songs 3, 4. Hos.*2, 7, the original meaning o'f the root, i.e. 'to conceive] is still present in this word in both of the passages where it occurs. The reading of the Sam. Vers, is uncertain, but the Sam. Codex (Heb.-Sam.) has 15? *in. The later Samaritans, however, pronounced the words IJ? *in 'my mountain, up to' etc, and understood it of Mount Gerizim, which was situated in the territory of the tribe of Joseph ; see Tuch, p. 501. The LXX and Sam. Vers, read in the 400 GENESIS, first clause of the verse "JON! 1*3N n313, while the Jer. Targ. exhibits traces of both the renderings discussed above, viz. ' my parents', and 'everlasting mountains;' see Geiger, Urschrift, p. 250. VnN 11*3 ipip7l fpli CJN17. Cf. Deut. 33, 16, where these words recur. IMN 1*0 = ' the prince of his brethren] The Vulg. and Saadiah take 1*0 in the sense ' Nazirite] a meaning which is unsuitable here. Onqelos takes 1*T3 'the separated one] in the sense of 'prince' or ' leader! His rendering is MinNI NB>'*1S N133 'the man (who is) separated among his brethren;' so Saadiah. This is the view adopted by most moderns, who, however, generally (following the Pesh.) connect 1*0 with the noun ITS 'diadem] cf. Lam. 4, 7, and E'Nl?, though with no allusion to a kingdom in the tribe of Joseph. The meaning cannot, however, be regarded as certain. Del. remarks that E'Nl? is chosen intentionally, as E'Nia is the usual expression for a curse coming upon any one, while va~f? is used for a blessing; cf. Deut. 33, 16. Prov. 10, 6. 11, 26. Joseph receives not only the blessings of the eternal hills, i.e. the rich and fruitful hill country of Ephraim and Manasseh (cf. Jer. 50, 19. Deut. 32, 14), but the blessings that surpass these, viz. the promises made by God to his forefathers. 27. ' Benjamin is a ravening wolf: In the morning he devoureth the prey, And at even divideth the spoil! That Benjamin was a most warlike tribe is shewn by the share it took in the struggle' for freedom under Deborah (Judg- 5, 14), and by the war it carried on with the other tribes (Judg. 19 ff.) after the outrage committed at Gibeah. Ehud, Saul, and Jonathan were also Benjamites. CHAP. 49, VERS. 27-30. 401 >)101 3N*» , lit. ' a wolf that ravens', the relative pronoun being omitted. Cf. Is. 51, 12 mo* EiSN = 'mortal man;' Hos. 4, 14 |*3* N? Dy 'a people without understanding ;' and see Ges, §§ 107. 2 b. and 155. 2 b; M. R, § 159 a; Ewald, § 332 a; Driver, § 34; Dav, S., §§ 44. R. 3. and 142. F)"ipl, pausal for ^10* ; see on ver. 3, Ty. Kn. remarks on the comparison of Benjamin with a wolf, ' The figure of the wolf occurs elsewhere in the O. T, only in a bad sense (Zeph. 3, 3. Hab. 1, 8. Jer. 5, 6. Ez. 22, 27); hence in this passage it does not signify a full measure of praise, though it recognises Benjamin's warlike capabilities.' Di. supplements this remark by pointing out, ' that the lion has already been used in ver. 9, and that only a comparison with some small beast of prey would be fitting in the case of Benjamin, the smallest of the tribes. The wolf was used in comparisons by non-Semitic peoples of antiquity in a good sense.' 11> 73N1. Cf. Num. 23, 24 fpo 73N* iy. 28. DnN 1,13 in3133 IffiN ffi'lN. 'Each one with that which was according to his blessing he blessed them] :p3 being construed with a double ace, as in Deut. 12, 7. 15, 14; cf. ver. 25. The LXX, Pesh, and Sam. omit lE'N. As the text is very awkward, Del. emends to "aa E>*N E"N ; cf. 2 Sam. 23, 21, where the Kri directs that E**N is to be read instead of lE'N, and Num. 21, 30, where the Kri marks the 1 of lE'N with a point, as suspicious. With this emendation, the verse may be compared with Ex. 36, 4 M3N700 E^N E»N; Lev. 15, 2 ,1*n* *3 E'*N E"N; Lev. 24, 15 ??p* *3 E'*N E'*N, and often. Perhaps, however, it is better simply to omit lE'N. 30. niton nN . . . n3p IttJN. ' Which A. purchased . . . with the field] so 50, 13, Del.6 Kautzsch (see Ges, d d 402 GENESIS, § 138. 1. note 1) and Di. prefer to connect lE'N here and 50, 13, with the ace niVTrm=' which field;' but with this construction, a suffix would be sufficient. The former way seems simpler. Abraham's object was not so much to buy the field, as to get possession of the grave which happened to be in the field. 32. 131 n3pO. This verse does not seem to have any connection with the rest of the narrative. Tuch regards it as a parenthesis, referring to ver. 30; cf. Ps. 72, 14. Del.6 and Di. consider it a gloss on 30°. 50. 2. V3N nN 03)17. 'To embalm his father] Embalm ing the dead was an Egyptian custom, which was due to the popular belief, in a permanent union of the body and the soul. The art was practised by a special class named rapi- xevral; see Herod, ii. 86 ff.; Diod. i. 91 ; Ebers in Riehm's H. W.B., 352 f. The Taptxevral are here called D*N3in. Joseph probably had his own special body of physicians. 3. Di03nn. The plural is used according to Ges, § 124. 1 a; Ewald, § 179 a ('to embrace the scattered units into a higher idea, thus to form the meaning of an abstract '). Oil D"X*3l?J. For a king the Egyptians used to mourn seventy-two days (Diod. i. 72). Jacob's death was mourned for by the Egyptians out of respect to Joseph. On the mourning customs of the Egyptians, see Herod, ii. 85 ; Diod. i. 91; Wilkinson, Manners and Customs (1878 ed, iii. c. 16). 4. ini33. Object, gen.; see on 9, 2. n*33 is formed like n*3n, n*aE*, by adding the ending n to the third radical *; see Ewald, § 186 b; Stade, § 192 b. CHAP. 49, VER. 32 CHAP. 50, VER. II. 403 5. lb M"|1l3. LXX &pvi-a, so the Vulg. and most moderns ; cf. 26, 25. 2 Chron. 16, 14, a rendering which suits *13p3 better than that adopted by Onq. and Pesh, ' / bought] with which Deut. 2, 6 DnND lian D*0 D31 may be compared. 10. lONn ]13 iy. ' To the threshing-floor of thorns;' probably not 'the threshing-floor of Atad! The locality is not further known. plin 131*3, i.e. on the eastern side of Jordan, the nar rator being in Palestine. QiOi ny2XD. Cf. i Sam. 31, 13. Judith 16, 24. Ecclus. 22, 12. 11. Q1120 73N. ?3N may be taken either as a verb, 'Egypt mourns] or as' a noun, 'the meadow of Egypt] cf. the proper names, nayo n*a 73N, D*0 73N, D*DEM 73N, n?MO 73N, D*Ol3 73N; but this rendering 'meadow of Egypt' merely expresses the views of the punctuators. Tuch and Kn. explain the name as a meadow, as fertile as Egypt; cf. 13, 10. Di. thinks this unnecessary, pointing out that plenty of historical reasons can be conjectured for the origin of such a name, from the fact that the Egyptians for a long period were the rulers of Palestine before the time of Moses ; as we now know from the Tel-el-Amarna Letters. The narrator evidently means that the words should be read 3*1X0 7aN ' mourning of the Egyptians] so the LXX have here Uiv8os Alyxmrov, and the Vulg. ' Planctus Egypti! The position of D*1XO 73N is not known. It has been identified by some (Knobel, Ritter, etc.) with ,l73n n*3, on the southern boundary of Benjamin, the modern 'Ain Hajla, a little north of the Dead Sea (cf. Rob, Bibl. Researches, i. p. 544 J Bad, Pal., p. 170), following Hieron, who in the Onom. identifies Area Atad with 173n n*3. But this identification is precarious, d d 2 404 GENESIS, as Hieron.'s account is not trustworthy; and n?3n n*3 is also on the western, and not the eastern side of Jordan ; see further, Di, p. 476 ; Del.6, p. 535. 13. niton nN. "With the field,-' cf. 49, 30. 15. fpY* 1300tol lb. 'If foseph were to hate us I' cf. Ez. 14, 15. Ex. 4, 1 *7 13*ON* N? pl 'andifthey will not believe met' LXX here, pr) wore pvr)o-iKaKr)a~r] r)plv 'lairfjO^, The imperf. in the protasis, where no apodosis follows, denoting either a wish or (as here) a. fear; see Driver, § 142; Ewald, § 358 a, who compares a similar aposiopesis in Ps. 27, 13 ; see also M. R, § 165; Ges, § 159. 3. C. 2; Dav, S., § 131. R. 1. 16. 112J11. ' And they sent a message! LXX <«u 7rapay«>oVro, Pesh. asyso, possibly a free translation, the translators not understanding nm. 17. N3N is only found once again in the Pent, viz. Ex. 32, 31 N3N. Ewald, § 262 a, — cf. Stade, § 373, — remarks that the Massora regards NSN always as consisting of two words (WM?) ; hence the double accents here and in Ex. l.c The tone is on the penult. l>toQb N3 Nt* . . . I*to3 N3 Nto. NB>3 = 'to forgive' (cf. 18, 24) is here construed, for the sake of variety, with the ace and dat.; so with dat. of offence in Ex. 23, 21. Josh. 24, 19 (all E); see Ewald, § 282 d. 1 9. 13N DVI7N nnnn 13 . 'For am I in God's place?' so in 30, 2 ; see the note there. Del. proposes a slightly different meaning here as an alternative, ' Am I authorised to interfere in what God does, am I not obliged to submit myself to Him ? ' Aq. on pr) Oeos iyet ; Symm. pi) yap dvTi 0eoO eyea dpi; Onq. renders MN. *M N^MI *1N; 'for a fearer ofY. am I] possibly reading "?N nnn (from nnn), or more probably rendering freely; so Saadiah, aJJI ,_Sli.l 'I fear God! CHAP. 50, VERS. 13-26. 405 20. ntol*. See on 48, 11. 21. 037 71* 131"1. See on 34, 3. 23. D11BN7 fpl" N111. The ? as in 44, 20 Nil mi*l 10N7 1137. DUBbto ^2. = ' sons of the third degree] i.e. not great grandchildren, but great-great-grandchildren. D*E'7E' — cf. Ex. 20, 5. 34, 7. Num. 14, 18. Deut. 5, 9 — are the children of the third generation, cf. Ex. 34, 7 ; the first ancestor not being counted; "v *33= great-great-grandchildren. Elsewhere D*Ei7E' *33 are called 3*501 ; so Di. and Ewald (Anltq.3, p. 225 ; Eng. trans, p. 169). LXX, Vulg, Pesh, Targg, Tuch, and Del. understand 'great-grandchildren ;' but then either D*33 must be read (so Sam.), or the cstr. *33 be taken according to Ewald, § 287 e (the cstr. state used where there is really only an appositional relation between the two words, and = ' consisting of). F)D11 l313"bXt. Cf. 30, 3. Sam. Ver. reads *0*3 for *3l3~7y, possibly the correct reading. 26. Dtoni. See on 24, 33. Render, 'they put him] 3rd pers. sing, imperf. J11N3 = here 'in the coffin;' so in Phoenician |11N, pl. nsiN, = sarcophagus ; cf. Bloch, Phoen. Glossar, p. 15. For the article in }11N3 cf. the note on 35, 17. 'The Egyptians used to place the embalmed body in a wooden coffin, and carefully preserve it in the vault (Her. ii. 86),' Kn. in Di, p. 479. With these verses, cf. Ex. 13, 19. Josh. 24, 32. APPENDIX. ?« and 3M?N, nin*. The first two names of God, ^» and D'ri^M, as may be seen from the Concordance, are of frequent occurrence in the Old Testament. The plural of bM and the sing, of D'rjta, on the contrary, are rare; the plural forms of bt? occurring about five times, and the sing, of D'iibM about 57 times, bt* (sing.), on the other hand, occurs (including proper names of people and of places compounded with ";«) over 300 times, and D'rfbg over 2500 times1. It will be found, on a closer examination of the various passages, that "jm , though of common occur rence, is essentially a poetical word, being very common in the poetical part of Job (about it quarter of the passages where b« is found are in Job). It is also found in the Psalms (but not so frequently as D'rfts) and in other poetical passages, and is used by the prophets from Hosea to Deutero-Isaiah and his contemporaries, 'jn is found in the Pentateuch in certain special phrases, such as ';iiti"^», KJjl"^, but otherwise the less poetical parts of the Pentateuch and Prophets avoid it. ^N apparently formed no part of the ordinary spoken language, as it is never used in Judges, Samuel, or Kings, and even in Chronicles only occurs in poetical passages. In proper names of persons and of places it is found from the earliest times. Thus from the O.T. it may be inferred that btt was a very old name of God, which, however, at a tolerably early date ceased to be used, and was only preserved in poetry, elevated prose, and in a few special phrases, oti'jh was the common name of God, the word being used for the sing, and plural. The singular n^s is most common in the book of Job, and it is found else where in only a few poetical passages. In pure prose it occurs only in two very late passages (2 Chron. 32, 15 and Dan. 11, 37~39) ! and even in the prose parts of Job is replaced by D'ri^S. #¦>« may thus be 1 Cf. Nestle, Th. S. W., 1882, p. 243 f. 408 APPENDIX; regarded as an artificial sing, of D'ribg1. So in the Hebrew the ordinary word for God was DTi^M, without a real singular, !>« and s^N being nearly entirely confined to poetry. In the other Semitic dialects bit is common, being found in Assyrian, Phoenician, and Himyaritic, but whether it is found in Northern Arabic and Aramaic is a disputed point2. rj^N is found, on the contrary, only in Aramaic and Arabic, the word both in Aramaic and Arabic being probably indigenous and not borrowed from the Hebrew3. In Sabean bit and Frt» occur, both words being used in much the same way as in Hebrew *. Various explanations of these names bit and D'ii^N have been offered by different scholars, but no certain derivation for either appears yet to have been obtained. Fleischer5, whom Delitzsch and others6 follow, takes D'ri^N as the plural of Fi^M (a noun ofthe form ^itop = JlS|), deriving a^M from an unused root nS«=the Arabic 5111 (s-ij)' which has the notion of ' wandering about] 'going hither and thither ' in perplexity or fear, and followed by J! ' to betake oneself to a person, by reason of fright or fear, seeking protection7. ij^N would thus, it is argued, = 'fear] and then 'the object of fear' (cf. oepaapn in Greek, and the Heb. »iiD, "ine, see Gen. 31, 42. 53), and so 'God! This derivation would appear, however, to be questionable. For in the verb the idea of ' fear ' is altogether subordinate, and though in a particular case it may express the idea of seeking protection with a person, in fear (of course) of other things, it is difficult to understand how a substantive derived from it could be used to denote God as the direct object of fear. It might, con ceivably; denote Him as a refuge, but hardly as fear, or the object of fear, bx is regarded by these scholars as belonging to a root b)N, with the primary meaning ' strength1.' 1 Noldeke, S. B> A. IV., 1882, p. 1177 ; cf. Nestle, I.e., p. 249. 2 Lagarde, Orientalia, ii. p. 3 f. (cf. Nestle, 1. c, p. 251), denies the existence of Sn as a real Aramaic and Arabic word : Noldeke disputes this, and appears to have shewn that Lagarde is in error. See M. B.A. W., 1880, p. 768 f, and S.B.A. W„ 1882, p. 1182. 3 See Noldeke, S. B. A.W., 1882, p. ir8g ; but cf. Nestle, 1. v., p. 252. 1 See Uber bin und nbx im Sabaischen, by Prof. D. H. Muller, Leyden, 1884. 11 Del., Comm.s, p. 47f. • Oehler, Schultz, Miihlau, Volck. 7 See Lane, Arabic Lex., p. 82. 8 Cf. Ges., Thes., pp. 42, 48. APPENDIX. 409 Ewald1 connects b* and f^n, regarding bx as abbreviated from ij,N, and holding nba ' to be strong' to be the root of both. Lagarde2 has proposed an entirely different derivation for ">s (the origin of ij'jg he does not discuss). He regards 'bx (pbit) as the root of bit, and compares the form *;» with 13 (from nu), Is. 50, 6, d>BD=D (from no to), ando'bs (but cstr. state <^3). ',N (M^n) he conjectures - had the meaning 'to stretch out to] and God he considers called b$, as 'one whom men strive after! The vowel in bx Lagarde regards as originally short, evading the analogy of words like 13, ij, nn, by the remark that such a word as b», ' God] can hardly be, what its vowel — would indicate that it is, a neuter passive participle (see more fully Mitteilungen (1884), p. 103 f.). Noldeke3 holds that ^N is a noun with a long vowel like }3, F|3, tto, etc., almost all of which belong to verbs i"» and v"s, and refers it to a root bin = to be in front, so ")» = the leader, lord. He expresses no decided opinion as to the connection between Sn and D'ri^N, but thinks a connection may be possible *- Dillmann5 regards S» and D'rj^H as inseparable. B'rt^ he considers to be a plural formed from b» after the analogy of ninnK from nDH, and )•• 9 *n | 9 s Ip* ¦ 9 \y t **• ^ Q)Nn» from . The evidence Noldeke adduces from the occurrence of Semitic proper names in Greek inscriptions, in favour of a long e in bN*, does not seem to have been met by Lagarde, and in failing to observe the Aramaic use of bx3, he has exposed himself to Noldeke's objection, supported by the Syriac, that formations like |3, f]3, etc., point to s"» or i"» stems'. Noldeke's own view of b^ (which is in the main the same as Gesenius held5) does not appear adequately to account for the shortening of the e in ^s in the proper names rtajTiH, nift^n, etc.6, nor for the ' in the latter name, which would seem to imply a root rr'V. It also does not take into account the Assyrian ilu, which has always a short i, and which never appears as llu or tlu". Nestle's view has been examined by Noldeke9, who points out that the usage of language is against it, that the explanation of D'SibM as an extended form of (im is precarious, for only one clear case of this occurs in Hebrew (viz. ninp» from nn»; cf. Barth, N.B., p. 8), and the cases that are found in the other Semitic dialects always have, in the expanded 1 This also applies to Dillmann's view. 2 See M. B. A. IV., 1880, p. 760 f. s See M. B. A. W., p. 772. * See M. B. A. W., p. 773. 5 Cf. note 4 on p. 409. " Noldeke accounts for this on the ground that an unusual shortening of vowels is often found in proper names. 7 Though, as has been just said, this might be the pronom. affix. 3 Del., Par., pp. 163-165. Brown in The Presbyterian Review (New York), 1882, p. 407. 9 In the S. B. A. W., 1882, pp. 1175-1192. APPENDIX. 41 1 form, the plural feminine ending, whether the word itself be masc. or fem.1 Noldeke also remarks that long o for long a is difficult (the long a in niriDM goes back to short a2), and that if the e of bx is long, the — in D'rftN is difficult to explain. The following points seem to require a satisfactory explanation before the derivation of b» and O'ri1)** can be definitely fixed, (i) Are the two words really connected one with the other, and derived from the same root? (ii) Does b« really come from^N, or from a root nb« (i.e. '"jm)? (iu) How is the n of n'r^m to be accounted for? (iv) Can the evidence which Noldeke brings forward to prove that the — in ")» is long be accepted as conclusive in the face of the fact that the vowel in the cor responding word in Assyrian (ilu) is short? (v) If the — is really long, is Noldeke's explanation of the shortening of — in rnp^H, NirP^H, and other similar proper names adequate3? The above is a brief sketch of the views held by scholars as to the derivation of ^s and D'iito. Both ")« and D'rftg (rf^«) are old words in Semitic, and, prima facie, would appear to be distinct : their original derivation, however, is at present obscure *. n)ni It is well known that the vowels with which the Tetragrammaton is punctuated in the ordinary editions of the Massoretic text do not really belong to it, but have been supplied from the word '^Si with tne composite shewa changed into a simple shewa, unless this word precedes mrr, when the points of D'ri^H are used, e.g. Is. 28, 16. 30, 15. 49, 22. Ez. 2, 4. 7, 2. Amos 5, 3, etc. This is clear from the following con siderations : (1) With the prefixes 3, b, o, 1 we find trirTVI (e.g. Ps. n, 1. 32, 10. 11. 64, 11); nin'b (e.g. Ps. 7, 1. 16, 2. 24, 1); nitrp (e.g. Ps. 33, 8. 37, 39. Is. 40, 27) ; n1Tn;i (Gen. 13, 14. 1 Sam. 12, 12. Is. 53, 10), i.e. 'JiMa, 'aiK^i 'ji«o, and ':isi (cf. Ges., § 23. 2). (2) If the word that follows mm begins with one of the letters 2,J,i,3,B,n, the dagesh lene is inserted, e.g. Gen. 13, 10. Ex. 15, 6. Num. 11, 25. 1 Cf. S. B. A. W., p. n8of. The masc. forms that occur in Syriac are, as Noldeke points out, late. Noldeke's remarks on this point also apply to Dillmann's explanation. 2 Noldeke, S. B. A. W., p. 1181. s See note 6, p. 410. * It may be noted that ">M as the name of a god occurs four times in the Sendschirli inscriptions always with two other gods ^S3i and IIFt ; see inscript. of Pannamu, line 22, and inscript. of Hadad, lines 2, n, 18. U. Die altsemit. Inschripten von Sendschirli. D. H. Miiller, Wien, 1893. 412 APPENDIX. Judg. 21, 15. 1 Sam. 28, 19. 2 Sam. 23, 2. (3) Ewald in his Lehrbtuh, § 228 b, draws attention to the fact that in Num. 10, 35, cf. ver. 36, ngip is accented on the last syllable, though the n is n cohortative, because the next following word mm begins with a guttural, e. g. «, nin; = '3iN, cf. Ps. 3, 8 nnip; 6, 5 njlto; 7, 7. 10, 12, etc. (4) The abbreviations im, m, im cannot come from nin;. The objection to using the real punctuation of m m arises from an old misconception ofthe two passages, Ex. 20, 7 («mj^ -['n'jM nin' Qto n« Nton nV) and Lev. 24, 16 (oto ap3i riDVnin mn'), which were interpreted as meaning that the divine name was to be treated as a nomen ineffabile. This interpretation of these two verses is mentioned by Philo, De vita Mosis, iii. pp. 519, 529; Josephus, Archaeol., ii. 12, § 4; Talmud, Sanhedrin, chap. 2, fol. 90; Maimonides, Yadh Chasaka, chap. 14, § 10; Theodoret, Quaest. 13 in Exod.; Eusebius, Praep. Evang., ii. p. 305; the passages (excepting that from Eusebius) being quoted by Gesenius, Thes., p. 575 f. The LXX render the Tetragrammaton always by 6 Kvpios (their ordinary translation of >3-|n), and the Samaritans used sn'B (' name'), and the Jews rjttin for mn', when they had to pronounce the word. The pro nunciation Jehovah seems to have been first introduced by Galatinus in 1520 ; but was objected to by Le Mercier, J. Drusius, and L. Capellus, as being against grammar and historical propriety. Cf. Bott., Heb. Gram., § 88, and C. P. Ges., sub voce. There is every reason to assume that the punctuation adopted by modern scholars for nin' is correct, viz. mm, the form being an im perfect Qal (according to another view Hifil) of mn, which is an archaic and North Palestinian form of the verb mn (cf. the note on 27, 29) ; compare the other proper names formed after the analogy of the imperf. of the verb, e.g. ap.Bl, -,'«;, pns;, etc. That this assumption is correct is proved by the fact that the abbreviations ?m (out of ini), in; and v (out of im = im) in compound proper names, and n' (mm= im = Fp) can easily be derived from nin.;, and by the statement of Theodoret that the pronunciation of the Samaritans was IABE, while Epiphanius, Adv. Haer. 20 (40), cites IABE as one of the names of God, explaining it (from Ex. 3, 14) as Ss r)v Kal e, a group of families united by vital ties; cf. Driver, Sam., p. 119. „ 122, line 9 from top, add after nimsn (cf. Osiander, Z.D.M. G, 1865, p. 239 ff.' 1 ; D. H. Muller, Z.D.M.G., 18S3, pp. 18 and 412). „ 138, 'rn, add following: 'Sn Gen. 12, 8 etc. probably the same place as »'» Neh. 11, 31, ms> 1 Chron. 7, 28; cf. my Is. 10, 28, and Josh. 18, 23. The position of 'yn was probably to the E. of Bethel (Gen. 12, 8), N. of Michmash, by the side of a deep valley. The name has not survived, but it ought perhaps to be located in the neighbourhood of the present Der-Diw&n, forty-five minutes S.E. of Betin (Bethel) in Tell-el-Hajar (cf. ,n Josh. 8, 28), on the S. side of the deep W&dy MatyS, through which at the present day the road from Jericho to the hill country passes, cf. Bad., Pal., p. 119. „ 149, add after Astarte, line 9, Bloch, Phoen. Glossar, p. 51. „ 196, On 'daughter of my father] cf. Robertson Smith, Kinship and Marriage, etc., ch. vi. „ 208, add after (cf. mfcyo). The word may be equivalent to ^ 'Mio 'chosen of God] or better m 'KID = nM"ip = appearance of Yahweh, cf. Bottcher, Gram., § 45. 240, ver. 21, micto identified by Palmer with Wady Sutnet er- Rub.eibe, which is probably the same as Wady Sutein in Rob., Pal., i. p. 332. 416 CORRIGENDA. CORRIGENDA. Page ix, line io from bottom, for io, „ xxxi, „ 16 „ „ „ tin I from top, „ Hithpael 7 from bottom, read jit 3 „ „ for Tablet 7 from top, „ 170 + 5 „ „ „ Melanges 8 from bottom, ,, § 82 f 2 „ „ „ consist 5 from top, read inn 8 from bottom, „ to3T 6 from top, „ '!;»£ 12 from bottom, „ sn^M 1 from top, for Pilel 1 „ ,, „ affix 6 from top, read mto^ 2 from bottom, for Glases 2 from top, „ man' 6 „ „ „ -lpto' 267, last line on page, omit 'here.' 279, line 12 from top, for, Welh. 280, „ 1 „ ,, „ Mahanaim 297, „ 2 from bottom, „ nji> 35°: » 13 from top, „ Tel-el-Kebir 399. >, I0 ,> „ read Dip „ XXXII, » 7°, „ 97, „ "4> „ 123, „ 128, „ I51, „ 152, „ 152, » 154: „ 168, :. 204, „ 220, „ 227, >, 234, „ 236, „ 255, read 10. „ Hithpa'el read Tablets „ 170 f. „ § 82 f. ,, consists read Fil'el ,, suffix read Glaser '„ nun' „ lpto' read Well. „ Mahanaim „ n^ „ Tell-el-Kebir 3 9002 021 2 7148